Copyright © 2010-2016 Linux Foundation
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 2.0 UK: England & Wales as published by Creative Commons.
| Revision History | |
|---|---|
| Revision 1.8 | April 2015 | 
| Released with the Yocto Project 1.8 Release. | |
| Revision 2.0 | October 2015 | 
| Released with the Yocto Project 2.0 Release. | |
| Revision 2.1 | April 2016 | 
| Released with the Yocto Project 2.1 Release. | |
| Revision 2.1.1 | August 2016 | 
| Released with the Yocto Project 2.1.1 Release. | |
| Revision 2.1.2 | December 2016 | 
| Released with the Yocto Project 2.1.2 Release. | |
Abstract¶
The Yocto Project Mega-Manual is a concatenation of the published Yocto Project HTML manuals for the given release. The manual exists to help users efficiently search for strings across the entire Yocto Project documentation set.Copyright © 2010-2016 Linux Foundation
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 2.0 UK: England & Wales as published by Creative Commons.
Abstract¶
|  | 
Welcome to the Yocto Project! The Yocto Project is an open-source collaboration project whose focus is developers of embedded Linux systems. Among other things, the Yocto Project uses a build host based on the OpenEmbedded (OE) project, which uses the BitBake tool, to construct complete Linux images. The BitBake and OE components are combined together to form a reference build host, historically known as Poky.
If you do not have a system that runs Linux and you want to give the Yocto Project a test run, you might consider using the Yocto Project Build Appliance. The Build Appliance allows you to build and boot a custom embedded Linux image with the Yocto Project using a non-Linux development system. See the Yocto Project Build Appliance for more information.
This quick start is written so that you can quickly get a build host set up to use the Yocto Project and then build some Linux images. Rather than go into great detail about the Yocto Project and its many capabilities, this quick start provides the minimal information you need to try out the Yocto Project using a supported Linux build host. Reading and using the quick start should result in you having a basic understanding of what the Yocto Project is and how to use some of its core components. You will also have worked through steps to produce two images: one that is suitable for emulation and one that boots on actual hardware. The examples highlight the ease with which you can use the Yocto Project to create images for multiple types of hardware.
For more detailed information on the Yocto Project, you can reference these resources:
Website: The Yocto Project Website provides the latest builds, breaking news, full development documentation, and access to a rich Yocto Project Development Community into which you can tap.
FAQs: Lists commonly asked Yocto Project questions and answers. You can find two FAQs: Yocto Project FAQ on a wiki, and the "FAQ" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Developer Screencast: The Getting Started with the Yocto Project - New Developer Screencast Tutorial provides a 30-minute video created for users unfamiliar with the Yocto Project but familiar with Linux build hosts. While this screencast is somewhat dated, the introductory and fundamental concepts are useful for the beginner.
The Yocto Project through the OpenEmbedded build system provides an open source development environment targeting the ARM, MIPS, PowerPC, and x86 architectures for a variety of platforms including x86-64 and emulated ones. You can use components from the Yocto Project to design, develop, build, debug, simulate, and test the complete software stack using Linux, the X Window System, GTK+ frameworks, and Qt frameworks.
|  | 
The Yocto Project Development Environment
Here are some highlights for the Yocto Project:
Provides a recent Linux kernel along with a set of system commands and libraries suitable for the embedded environment.
Makes available system components such as X11, GTK+, Qt, Clutter, and SDL (among others) so you can create a rich user experience on devices that have display hardware. For devices that do not have a display or where you wish to use alternative UI frameworks, these components need not be installed.
Creates a focused and stable core compatible with the OpenEmbedded project with which you can easily and reliably build and develop.
Fully supports a wide range of hardware and device emulation through the Quick EMUlator (QEMU).
Provides a layer mechanism that allows you to easily extend the system, make customizations, and keep them organized.
You can use the Yocto Project to generate images for many kinds of devices. As mentioned earlier, the Yocto Project supports creation of reference images that you can boot within and emulate using QEMU. The standard example machines target QEMU full-system emulation for 32-bit and 64-bit variants of x86, ARM, MIPS, and PowerPC architectures. Beyond emulation, you can use the layer mechanism to extend support to just about any platform that Linux can run on and that a toolchain can target.
Another Yocto Project feature is the Sato reference User Interface. This optional UI that is based on GTK+ is intended for devices with restricted screen sizes and is included as part of the OpenEmbedded Core layer so that developers can test parts of the software stack.
The following list shows what you need in order to use a Linux-based build host to use the Yocto Project to build images:
Build Host A build host with a minimum of 50 Gbytes of free disk space that is running a supported Linux distribution (i.e. recent releases of Fedora, openSUSE, CentOS, Debian, or Ubuntu).
Build Host Packages Appropriate packages installed on the build host.
The Yocto Project A release of the Yocto Project.
The Yocto Project team verifies each release against recent versions of the most popular Linux distributions that provide stable releases. In general, if you have the current release minus one of the following distributions, you should have no problems.
Ubuntu
Fedora
openSUSE
CentOS
Debian
For a more detailed list of distributions that support the Yocto Project, see the "Supported Linux Distributions" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
The OpenEmbedded build system should be able to run on any modern distribution that has the following versions for Git, tar, and Python.
Git 1.8.3.1 or greater
tar 1.24 or greater
Python 2.7.3 or greater excluding Python 3.x, which is not supported.
If your build host does not meet any of these three listed version requirements, you can take steps to prepare the system so that you can still use the Yocto Project. See the "Required Git, tar, and Python Versions" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for information.
Required build host packages vary depending on your build machine and what you want to do with the Yocto Project. For example, if you want to build an image that can run on QEMU in graphical mode (a minimal, basic build requirement), then the build host package requirements are different than if you want to build an image on a headless system or build out the Yocto Project documentation set.
Collectively, the number of required packages is large if you want to be able to cover all cases.
sudo installed.
                
The following list shows the required packages needed to build an image that runs on QEMU in graphical mode (e.g. essential plus graphics support). For lists of required packages for other scenarios, see the "Required Packages for the Host Development System" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Ubuntu and Debian
     $ sudo apt-get install gawk wget git-core diffstat unzip texinfo gcc-multilib \
     build-essential chrpath socat libsdl1.2-dev xterm
                        
Fedora
     $ sudo dnf install gawk make wget tar bzip2 gzip python unzip perl patch \
     diffutils diffstat git cpp gcc gcc-c++ glibc-devel texinfo chrpath \
     ccache perl-Data-Dumper perl-Text-ParseWords perl-Thread-Queue perl-bignum socat \
     findutils which SDL-devel xterm
                        
OpenSUSE
     $ sudo zypper install python gcc gcc-c++ git chrpath make wget python-xml \
     diffstat makeinfo python-curses patch socat libSDL-devel xterm
                        
CentOS
     $ sudo yum install gawk make wget tar bzip2 gzip python unzip perl patch \
     diffutils diffstat git cpp gcc gcc-c++ glibc-devel texinfo chrpath socat \
     perl-Data-Dumper perl-Text-ParseWords perl-Thread-Queue SDL-devel xterm
                        
                The last requirement you need to meet before using the
                Yocto Project is getting a Yocto Project release.
                It is recommended that you get the latest Yocto Project release
                by setting up (cloning in
                Git terms) a
                local copy of the poky Git repository on
                your build host and then checking out the latest release.
                Doing so allows you to easily update to newer Yocto Project
                releases as well as contribute back to the Yocto Project.
            
                Here is an example from an Ubuntu build host that clones the
                poky repository and then checks out the
                latest Yocto Project Release (i.e. 2.1.2):
                
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
     Cloning into 'poky'...
     remote: Counting objects: 226790, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (57465/57465), done.
     remote: Total 226790 (delta 165212), reused 225887 (delta 164327)
     Receiving objects: 100% (226790/226790), 100.98 MiB | 263 KiB/s, done.
     Resolving deltas: 100% (165212/165212), done.
     $ git checkout krogoth
                You can also get the Yocto Project Files by downloading Yocto Project releases from the Yocto Project website.
For more information on getting set up with the Yocto Project release, see the "Yocto Project Release" item in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Now that you have your system requirements in order, you can give Yocto Project a try. You can try out Yocto Project using either the command-line interface or using Toaster, which uses a graphical user interface. If you want to try out the Yocto Project using a GUI, see the Toaster User Manual for information on how to install and set up Toaster.
You can try out the Yocto Project using the command-line interface by finishing this quick start, which presents steps that let you do the following:
                    Build a qemux86 reference image
                    and run it in the QEMU emulator.
                    
Easily change configurations so that you can quickly create a second image, which would be for MinnowBoard MAX-compatible boards.
Use the following commands to build your image. The OpenEmbedded build system creates an entire Linux distribution, including the toolchain, from source.
By default, the build process searches for source code using a pre-determined order through a set of locations. If you are working behind a firewall and your build host is not set up for proxies, you could encounter problems with the build process when fetching source code (e.g. fetcher failures or Git failures).
If you do not know your proxy settings, consult your local network infrastructure resources and get that information. A good starting point could also be to check your web browser settings. Finally, you can find more information on using the Yocto Project behind a firewall in the Yocto Project Reference Manual FAQ and on the "Working Behind a Network Proxy" wiki page.
Be Sure Your Build Host is Set Up: The steps to build an image in this section depend on your build host being properly set up. Be sure you have worked through the requirements described in the "Setting Up to Use the Yocto Project" section.
Check Out Your Branch:
                    Be sure you are in the
                    Source Directory
                    (e.g. poky) and then check out
                    the branch associated with the latest Yocto Project
                    Release:
                    
     $ cd ~/poky
     $ git checkout -b krogoth origin/krogoth
                    
                    Git's checkout command checks out
                    the current Yocto Project release into a local branch
                    whose name matches the release (i.e.
                    krogoth).
                    The local branch tracks the upstream branch of the
                    same name.
                    Creating your own branch based on the released
                    branch ensures you are using the latest files for
                    that release.
                    
Initialize the Build Environment:
                    Run the
                    oe-init-build-env
                    environment setup script to define the OpenEmbedded
                    build environment on your build host.
                    
     $ source oe-init-build-env
                    
                    Among other things, the script creates the
                    Build Directory,
                    which is build in this case
                    and is located in the
                    Source Directory.
                    After the script runs, your current working directory
                    is set to the Build Directory.
                    Later, when the build completes, the Build Directory
                    contains all the files created during the build.
                    
oe-init-build-env-memres
                        setup script.
                    
Examine Your Local Configuration File:
                    When you set up the build environment, a local
                    configuration file named
                    local.conf becomes available in
                    a conf subdirectory of the
                    Build Directory.
                    Before using BitBake to start the build, you can
                    look at this file and be sure your general
                    configurations are how you want them:
                    
                            To help conserve disk space during builds,
                            you can add the following statement to your
                            project's configuration file, which for this
                            example is
                            poky/build/conf/local.conf.
                            Adding this statement deletes the work
                            directory used for building a recipe once the
                            recipe is built.
                            
     INHERIT += "rm_work"
                            
                            By default, the target machine for the build is
                            qemux86,
                            which produces an image that can be used in
                            the QEMU emulator and is targeted at an
                            Intel®
                            32-bit based architecture.
                            Further on in this example, this default is
                            easily changed through the
                            MACHINE
                            variable so that you can quickly
                            build an image for a different machine.
                            
                            Another consideration before you build is the
                            package manager used when creating the image.
                            The default local.conf
                            file selects the RPM package manager.
                            You can control this configuration by using the
                            PACKAGE_CLASSES
Selection of the package manager is separate from whether package management is used at runtime in the target image.
For additional package manager selection
                            information, see the
                            "package.bbclass"
                            section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                            
Start the Build:
                    Continue with the following command to build an OS image
                    for the target, which is
                    core-image-sato in this example:
                    
     $ bitbake core-image-sato
                    
                    For information on using the
                    bitbake command, see the
                    "BitBake"
                    section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual, or see the
                    "BitBake Command"
                    section in the BitBake User Manual.
                    For information on other targets, see the
                    "Images"
                    chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                    
Simulate Your Image Using QEMU: Once this particular image is built, you can start QEMU and run the image:
     $ runqemu qemux86
                    If you want to learn more about running QEMU, see the "Using the Quick EMUlator (QEMU)" chapter in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Exit QEMU:
                    Exit QEMU by either clicking on the shutdown icon or by
                    opening a terminal, typing
                    poweroff, and then pressing "Enter".
                    
            The following steps show how easy it is to set up to build an
            image for a new machine.
            These steps build an image for the MinnowBoard MAX, which is
            supported by the Yocto Project and the
            meta-intel intel-corei7-64
            and intel-core2-32 Board Support Packages
            (BSPs).
            
Create a Local Copy of the
                    meta-intel Repository:
                    Building an image for the MinnowBoard MAX requires the
                    meta-intel layer.
                    Use the git clone command to create
                    a local copy of the repository inside your
                    Source Directory,
                    which is poky in this example:
                    
     $ cd $HOME/poky
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/meta-intel
     Cloning into 'meta-intel'...
     remote: Counting objects: 11988, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (3884/3884), done.
     Receiving objects: 100% (11988/11988), 2.93 MiB | 2.51 MiB/s, done.
     remote: Total 11988 (delta 6881), reused 11752 (delta 6645)
     Resolving deltas: 100% (6881/6881), done.
     Checking connectivity... done.
                    
                    By default when you clone a Git repository, the
                    "master" branch is checked out.
                    Before you build your image that uses the
                    meta-intel layer, you must be
                    sure that both repositories
                    (meta-intel and
                    poky) are using the same releases.
                    Consequently, you need to checkout out the
                    "krogoth" release after
                    cloning meta-intel:
                    
     $ cd $HOME/poky/meta-intel
     $ git checkout krogoth
     Branch krogoth set up to track remote branch krogoth from origin.
     Switched to a new branch 'krogoth'
                    
Configure the Build:
                    To configure the build, you edit the
                    bblayers.conf and
                    local.conf files, both of which are
                    located in the build/conf directory.
                    
Here is a quick way to make the edits.
                    The first command uses the
                    bitbake-layers add-layer command
                    to add the meta-intel
                    layer, which contains the intel-core*
                    BSPs to the build.
                    The second command selects the BSP by setting the
                    MACHINE
                    variable.
                    
     $ cd $HOME/poky/build
     $ bitbake-layers add-layer "$HOME/poky/meta-intel"
     $ echo 'MACHINE = "intel-corei7-64"' >> conf/local.conf
                    
If you want a 64-bit build, use the following:
     $ echo 'MACHINE = "intel-corei7-64"' >> conf/local.conf
                        
If you want 32-bit images, use the following:
     $ echo 'MACHINE = "intel-core2-32"' >> conf/local.conf
                        
Build an Image for MinnowBoard MAX:
                    The type of image you build depends on your goals.
                    For example, the previous build created a
                    core-image-sato image, which is an
                    image with Sato support.
                    It is possible to build many image types for the
                    MinnowBoard MAX.
                    Some possibilities are core-image-base,
                    which is a console-only image.
                    Another choice could be a
                    core-image-full-cmdline, which is
                    another console-only image but has more full-features
                    Linux system functionality installed.
                    For types of images you can build using the Yocto
                    Project, see the
                    "Images"
                    chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Because configuration changes are minimal to set up
                    for this second build, the OpenEmbedded build system can
                    re-use files from previous builds as much as possible.
                    Re-using files means this second build will be much faster
                    than an initial build.
                    For this example, the core-image-base
                    image is built:
                    
     $ bitbake core-image-base
                    Once the build completes, the resulting console-only image is located in the Build Directory here:
     tmp/deploy/images/intel-corei7-64/core-image-base-intel-corei7-64.hddimg
                    
Write the Image:
                    You can write the image to a USB key, SATA drive, or SD
                    card by using the mkefidisk.sh script,
                    which is included in the poky
                    repository at
                    scripts/contrib/mkefidisk.sh:
                    
     $ sudo $HOME/source/poky/scripts/contrib/mkefidisk.sh HOST_DEVICE \
        tmp/deploy/images/intel-corei7-64/core-image-base-intel-corei7-64.hddimg TARGET_DEVICE
                    
                    In the previous command,
                    HOST_DEVICE is the device node
                    on the build host (e.g. /dev/sdc or
                    /dev/mmcblk0).
                    TARGET_DEVICE is the name of the
                    device as the MinnowBoard MAX sees it (e.g.
                    /dev/sda or
                    /dev/mmcblk0).
                    
Boot the Hardware: With the boot device provisioned, you can insert the media into the MinnowBoard MAX and boot the hardware. The board should automatically detect the media and boot to the bootloader and subsequently the operating system.
If the board does not boot automatically, you can boot it manually from the EFI shell as follows:
     Shell> connect -r
     Shell> map -r
     Shell> fs0:
     Shell> bootx64
                    
     Shell> bootia32
                        
If you completed all the steps in the previous section then congratulations! What now?
Depending on what you primary interests are with the Yocto Project, you could consider any of the following:
Visit the Yocto Project Web Site: The official Yocto Project web site contains information on the entire project. Visiting this site is a good way to familiarize yourself with the overall project.
Look Through the Yocto Project Development Manual: The Yocto Project Development Manual is a great place to get a feel for how to use the Yocto Project. The manual contains conceptual and procedural information that covers common development models and introduces the Yocto Project open source development environment. The manual also contains several targeted sections that cover specific common tasks such as understanding and creating layers, customizing images, writing new recipes, working with libraries, and configuring and patching the kernel.
Look Through the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide: The Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide describes how to use both the standard SDK and the extensible SDK, which are used primarily for application development. This manual also provides an example workflow that uses the popular Eclipse™ development environment. See the "Workflow using Eclipse™" section.
Learn About Board Support Packages (BSPs): If you want to learn about BSPs, see the Yocto Project Board Support Packages (BSP) Developer's Guide.
Learn About Toaster: Toaster is a web interface to the Yocto Project's OpenEmbedded build system. If you are interested in using this type of interface to create images, see the Toaster User Manual.
Have Available the Yocto Project Reference Manual The Yocto Project Reference Manual, unlike the rest of the Yocto Project manual set, is comprised of material suited for reference rather than procedures. You can get build details, a closer look at how the pieces of the Yocto Project development environment work together, information on various technical details, guidance on migrating to a newer Yocto Project release, reference material on the directory structure, classes, and tasks. The Yocto Project Reference Manual also contains a fairly comprehensive glossary of variables used within the Yocto Project.
|  | 
Welcome to the Yocto Project Development Manual! This manual provides information on how to use the Yocto Project to develop embedded Linux images and user-space applications that run on targeted devices. The manual provides an overview of image, kernel, and user-space application development using the Yocto Project. Because much of the information in this manual is general, it contains many references to other sources where you can find more detail. For example, you can find detailed information on Git, repositories, and open source in general in many places on the Internet. Another example specific to the Yocto Project is how to quickly set up your host development system and build an image, which you find in the Yocto Project Quick Start.
            The Yocto Project Development Manual does, however, provide
            guidance and examples on how to change the kernel source code,
            reconfigure the kernel, and develop an application using
            devtool.
        
The following list describes what you can get from this manual:
Information that lets you get set up to develop using the Yocto Project.
Information to help developers who are new to the open source environment and to the distributed revision control system Git, which the Yocto Project uses.
An understanding of common end-to-end development models and tasks.
Information about common development tasks generally used during image development for embedded devices.
Information on using the Yocto Project integration of the QuickEMUlator (QEMU), which lets you simulate running on hardware an image you have built using the OpenEmbedded build system.
Many references to other sources of related information.
This manual will not give you the following:
Step-by-step instructions when those instructions exist in other Yocto Project documentation: For example, the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide manual contains detailed instructions on how to install an SDK, which is used to develop applications for target hardware.
Reference material: This type of material resides in an appropriate reference manual. For example, system variables are documented in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Detailed public information that is not specific to the Yocto Project: For example, exhaustive information on how to use Git is covered better through the Internet than in this manual.
Because this manual presents overview information for many different topics, supplemental information is recommended for full comprehension. The following list presents other sources of information you might find helpful:
Yocto Project Website: The home page for the Yocto Project provides lots of information on the project as well as links to software and documentation.
Yocto Project Quick Start: This short document lets you get started with the Yocto Project and quickly begin building an image.
Yocto Project Reference Manual: This manual is a reference guide to the OpenEmbedded build system, which is based on BitBake. The build system is sometimes referred to as "Poky".
Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide: This guide provides information that lets you get going with the standard or extensible SDK. An SDK, with its cross-development toolchains, allows you to develop projects inside or outside of the Yocto Project environment.
Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide: This guide defines the structure for BSP components. Having a commonly understood structure encourages standardization.
Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual: This manual describes how to work with Linux Yocto kernels as well as provides a bit of conceptual information on the construction of the Yocto Linux kernel tree.
Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing Manual: This manual presents a set of common and generally useful tracing and profiling schemes along with their applications (as appropriate) to each tool.
Toaster User Manual: This manual introduces and describes how to set up and use Toaster, which is a web interface to the Yocto Project's OpenEmbedded Build System.
Eclipse IDE Yocto Plug-in: A step-by-step instructional video that demonstrates how an application developer uses Yocto Plug-in features within the Eclipse IDE.
FAQ: A list of commonly asked questions and their answers.
Release Notes: Features, updates and known issues for the current release of the Yocto Project.
Toaster: An Application Programming Interface (API) and web-based interface to the OpenEmbedded build system, which uses BitBake, that reports build information.
Build Appliance: A virtual machine that enables you to build and boot a custom embedded Linux image with the Yocto Project using a non-Linux development system.
Bugzilla: The bug tracking application the Yocto Project uses. If you find problems with the Yocto Project, you should report them using this application.
Yocto Project Mailing Lists: To subscribe to the Yocto Project mailing lists, click on the following URLs and follow the instructions:
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/yocto for a Yocto Project Discussions mailing list.
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/poky for a Yocto Project Discussions mailing list about the OpenEmbedded build system (Poky).
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/yocto-announce for a mailing list to receive official Yocto Project announcements as well as Yocto Project milestones.
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo
                            for a listing of all public mailing lists on
                            lists.yoctoproject.org.
                            
Internet Relay Chat (IRC):
                    Two IRC channels on freenode are available
                    for Yocto Project and Poky discussions: #yocto and
                    #poky, respectively.
                    
OpenEmbedded: The build system used by the Yocto Project. This project is the upstream, generic, embedded distribution from which the Yocto Project derives its build system (Poky) and to which it contributes.
BitBake: The tool used by the OpenEmbedded build system to process project metadata.
BitBake User Manual: A comprehensive guide to the BitBake tool. If you want information on BitBake, see this manual.
Quick EMUlator (QEMU): An open-source machine emulator and virtualizer.
This chapter introduces the Yocto Project and gives you an idea of what you need to get started. You can find enough information to set up your development host and build or use images for hardware supported by the Yocto Project by reading the Yocto Project Quick Start.
The remainder of this chapter summarizes what is in the Yocto Project Quick Start and provides some higher-level concepts you might want to consider.
The Yocto Project is an open-source collaboration project focused on embedded Linux development. The project currently provides a build system that is referred to as the OpenEmbedded build system in the Yocto Project documentation. The Yocto Project provides various ancillary tools for the embedded developer and also features the Sato reference User Interface, which is optimized for stylus-driven, low-resolution screens.
You can use the OpenEmbedded build system, which uses BitBake, to develop complete Linux images and associated user-space applications for architectures based on ARM, MIPS, PowerPC, x86 and x86-64.
While the Yocto Project does not provide a strict testing framework, it does provide or generate for you artifacts that let you perform target-level and emulated testing and debugging. Additionally, if you are an Eclipse™ IDE user, you can install an Eclipse Yocto Plug-in to allow you to develop within that familiar environment.
Here is what you need to use the Yocto Project:
Host System: You should have a reasonably current Linux-based host system. You will have the best results with a recent release of Fedora, openSUSE, Debian, Ubuntu, or CentOS as these releases are frequently tested against the Yocto Project and officially supported. For a list of the distributions under validation and their status, see the "Supported Linux Distributions" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual and the wiki page at Distribution Support.
You should also have about 50 Gbytes of free disk space for building images.
Packages: The OpenEmbedded build system requires that certain packages exist on your development system (e.g. Python 2.7). See "The Build Host Packages" section in the Yocto Project Quick Start and the "Required Packages for the Host Development System" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for the exact package requirements and the installation commands to install them for the supported distributions.
Yocto Project Release:
                You need a release of the Yocto Project locally installed on
                your development system.
                The documentation refers to this set of locally installed files
                as the Source Directory.
                You create your Source Directory by using
                Git to clone a local copy
                of the upstream poky repository,
                or by downloading and unpacking a tarball of an official
                Yocto Project release.
                The preferred method is to create a clone of the repository.
                
Working from a copy of the upstream repository allows you to contribute back into the Yocto Project or simply work with the latest software on a development branch. Because Git maintains and creates an upstream repository with a complete history of changes and you are working with a local clone of that repository, you have access to all the Yocto Project development branches and tag names used in the upstream repository.
The following transcript shows how to clone the
                poky Git repository into the current
                working directory.
                The command creates the local repository in a directory
                named poky.
                For information on Git used within the Yocto Project, see
                the "Git" section.
                
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
     Cloning into 'poky'...
     remote: Counting objects: 226790, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (57465/57465), done.
     remote: Total 226790 (delta 165212), reused 225887 (delta 164327)
     Receiving objects: 100% (226790/226790), 100.98 MiB | 263 KiB/s, done.
     Resolving deltas: 100% (165212/165212), done.
                For another example of how to set up your own local Git
                repositories, see this
                
                wiki page, which describes how to create local
                Git repositories for both
                poky and meta-intel.
                
You can also get the Yocto Project Files by downloading Yocto Project releases from the Yocto Project website. From the website, you just click "Downloads" in the navigation pane to the left to display all Yocto Project downloads. Current and archived releases are available for download. Nightly and developmental builds are also maintained at http://autobuilder.yoctoproject.org/pub/nightly/. One final site you can visit for information on Yocto Project releases is the Releases wiki.
Yocto Project Kernel: If you are going to be making modifications to a supported Yocto Project kernel, you need to establish local copies of the source. You can find Git repositories of supported Yocto Project kernels organized under "Yocto Linux Kernel" in the Yocto Project Source Repositories at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi.
This setup can involve creating a bare clone of the Yocto Project kernel and then
                copying that cloned repository.
                You can create the bare clone and the copy of the bare clone anywhere you like.
                For simplicity, it is recommended that you create these structures outside of the
                Source Directory, which is usually named poky.
As an example, the following transcript shows how to create the bare clone
                of the linux-yocto-3.19 kernel and then create a copy of
                that clone.
                
clone command.
                Doing so can speed up the process.In the following example, the bare clone is named
                linux-yocto-3.19.git, while the
                copy is named my-linux-yocto-3.19-work:
                
     $ git clone --bare git://git.yoctoproject.org/linux-yocto-3.19 linux-yocto-3.19.git
     Cloning into bare repository 'linux-yocto-3.19.git'...
     remote: Counting objects: 3983256, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (605006/605006), done.
     remote: Total 3983256 (delta 3352832), reused 3974503 (delta 3344079)
     Receiving objects: 100% (3983256/3983256), 843.66 MiB | 1.07 MiB/s, done.
     Resolving deltas: 100% (3352832/3352832), done.
     Checking connectivity... done.
                Now create a clone of the bare clone just created:
     $ git clone linux-yocto-3.19.git my-linux-yocto-3.19-work
     Cloning into 'my-linux-yocto-3.19-work'...
     done.
     Checking out files: 100% (48440/48440), done.
                
                The meta-yocto-kernel-extras Git Repository:
                The meta-yocto-kernel-extras Git repository contains Metadata needed
                only if you are modifying and building the kernel image.
                In particular, it contains the kernel BitBake append (.bbappend)
                files that you
                edit to point to your locally modified kernel source files and to build the kernel
                image.
                Pointing to these local files is much more efficient than requiring a download of the
                kernel's source files from upstream each time you make changes to the kernel.
You can find the meta-yocto-kernel-extras Git Repository in the
                "Yocto Metadata Layers" area of the Yocto Project Source Repositories at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi.
                It is good practice to create this Git repository inside the Source Directory.
Following is an example that creates the meta-yocto-kernel-extras Git
                repository inside the Source Directory, which is named poky
                in this case:
                
     $ cd ~/poky
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/meta-yocto-kernel-extras meta-yocto-kernel-extras
     Cloning into 'meta-yocto-kernel-extras'...
     remote: Counting objects: 727, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (452/452), done.
     remote: Total 727 (delta 260), reused 719 (delta 252)
     Receiving objects: 100% (727/727), 536.36 KiB | 240 KiB/s, done.
     Resolving deltas: 100% (260/260), done.
               Supported Board Support Packages (BSPs): The Yocto Project supports many BSPs, which are maintained in their own layers or in layers designed to contain several BSPs. To get an idea of machine support through BSP layers, you can look at the index of machines for the release.
The Yocto Project uses the following BSP layer naming scheme:
     meta-bsp_name
                
                where bsp_name is the recognized
                BSP name.
                Here is an example:
                
     meta-raspberrypi
                See the "BSP Layers" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide for more information on BSP Layers.
A useful Git repository released with the Yocto
                Project is meta-intel, which is a
                parent layer that contains many supported
                BSP Layers.
                You can locate the meta-intel Git
                repository in the "Yocto Metadata Layers" area of the Yocto
                Project Source Repositories at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi.
Using
                Git to create a local clone of the
                upstream repository can be helpful if you are working with
                BSPs.
                Typically, you set up the meta-intel
                Git repository inside the Source Directory.
                For example, the following transcript shows the steps to clone
                meta-intel.
                
meta-intel
                    branch that matches your
                    Source Directory
                    (i.e. poky) branch.
                    For example, if you have checked out the "master" branch
                    of poky and you are going to use
                    meta-intel, be sure to checkout the
                    "master" branch of meta-intel.
                
     $ cd ~/poky
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/meta-intel.git
     Cloning into 'meta-intel'...
     remote: Counting objects: 11917, done.
     remote: Compressing objects: 100% (3842/3842), done.
     remote: Total 11917 (delta 6840), reused 11699 (delta 6622)
     Receiving objects: 100% (11917/11917), 2.92 MiB | 2.88 MiB/s, done.
     Resolving deltas: 100% (6840/6840), done.
     Checking connectivity... done.
                The same
                wiki page
                referenced earlier covers how to set up the
                meta-intel Git repository.
                
Eclipse Yocto Plug-in: If you are developing applications using the Eclipse Integrated Development Environment (IDE), you will need this plug-in. See the "Setting up the Eclipse IDE" section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide for more information.
The build process creates an entire Linux distribution, including the toolchain, from source. For more information on this topic, see the "Building Images" section in the Yocto Project Quick Start.
The build process is as follows:
Make sure you have set up the Source Directory described in the previous section.
Initialize the build environment by sourcing a build
                environment script (i.e.
                oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres).
                
Optionally ensure the conf/local.conf configuration file,
                which is found in the
                Build Directory,
                is set up how you want it.
                This file defines many aspects of the build environment including
                the target machine architecture through the
                MACHINE variable,
                the packaging format used during the build
                (PACKAGE_CLASSES),
                and a centralized tarball download directory through the
                DL_DIR variable.
                Build the image using the bitbake command.
                If you want information on BitBake, see the
                BitBake User Manual.
                
Run the image either on the actual hardware or using the QEMU emulator.
Another option you have to get started is to use pre-built binaries. The Yocto Project provides many types of binaries with each release. See the "Images" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for descriptions of the types of binaries that ship with a Yocto Project release.
        Using a pre-built binary is ideal for developing software
        applications to run on your target hardware.
        To do this, you need to be able to access the appropriate
        cross-toolchain tarball for the architecture on which you are
        developing.
        If you are using an SDK type image, the image ships with the complete
        toolchain native to the architecture (i.e. a toolchain designed to
        run on the
        SDKMACHINE).
        If you are not using an SDK type image, you need to separately download
        and install the stand-alone Yocto Project cross-toolchain tarball.
    
Regardless of the type of image you are using, you need to download the pre-built kernel that you will boot in the QEMU emulator and then download and extract the target root filesystem for your target machine’s architecture. You can get architecture-specific binaries and file systems from machines. You can get installation scripts for stand-alone toolchains from toolchains. Once you have all your files, you set up the environment to emulate the hardware by sourcing an environment setup script. Finally, you start the QEMU emulator. You can find details on all these steps in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide. You can learn more about using QEMU with the Yocto Project in the "Using the Quick EMUlator (QEMU)" section.
        Using QEMU to emulate your hardware can result in speed issues
        depending on the target and host architecture mix.
        For example, using the qemux86 image in the emulator
        on an Intel-based 32-bit (x86) host machine is fast because the target and
        host architectures match.
        On the other hand, using the qemuarm image on the same Intel-based
        host can be slower.
        But, you still achieve faithful emulation of ARM-specific issues.
    
        To speed things up, the QEMU images support using distcc
        to call a cross-compiler outside the emulated system.
        If you used runqemu to start QEMU, and the
        distccd application is present on the host system, any
        BitBake cross-compiling toolchain available from the build system is automatically
        used from within QEMU simply by calling distcc.
        You can accomplish this by defining the cross-compiler variable
        (e.g. export CC="distcc").
        Alternatively, if you are using a suitable SDK image or the appropriate
        stand-alone toolchain is present,
        the toolchain is also automatically used.
    
QEMU provides a framebuffer interface that makes standard consoles available.
Generally, headless embedded devices have a serial port. If so, you can configure the operating system of the running image to use that port to run a console. The connection uses standard IP networking.
                SSH servers exist in some QEMU images.
                The core-image-sato QEMU image has a
                Dropbear secure shell (SSH) server that runs with the root
                password disabled.
                The core-image-full-cmdline and
                core-image-lsb QEMU images
                have OpenSSH instead of Dropbear.
                Including these SSH servers allow you to use standard
                ssh and scp commands.
                The core-image-minimal QEMU image,
                however, contains no SSH server.
                
You can use a provided, user-space NFS server to boot the QEMU session
                using a local copy of the root filesystem on the host.
                In order to make this connection, you must extract a root filesystem tarball by using the
                runqemu-extract-sdk command.
                After running the command, you must then point the runqemu
                script to the extracted directory instead of a root filesystem image file.
This chapter helps you understand the Yocto Project as an open source development project. In general, working in an open source environment is very different from working in a closed, proprietary environment. Additionally, the Yocto Project uses specific tools and constructs as part of its development environment. This chapter specifically addresses open source philosophy, using the Yocto Project in a team environment, source repositories, Yocto Project terms, licensing, the open source distributed version control system Git, workflows, bug tracking, and how to submit changes.
Open source philosophy is characterized by software development directed by peer production and collaboration through an active community of developers. Contrast this to the more standard centralized development models used by commercial software companies where a finite set of developers produces a product for sale using a defined set of procedures that ultimately result in an end product whose architecture and source material are closed to the public.
Open source projects conceptually have differing concurrent agendas, approaches, and production. These facets of the development process can come from anyone in the public (community) that has a stake in the software project. The open source environment contains new copyright, licensing, domain, and consumer issues that differ from the more traditional development environment. In an open source environment, the end product, source material, and documentation are all available to the public at no cost.
A benchmark example of an open source project is the Linux kernel, which was initially conceived and created by Finnish computer science student Linus Torvalds in 1991. Conversely, a good example of a non-open source project is the Windows® family of operating systems developed by Microsoft® Corporation.
Wikipedia has a good historical description of the Open Source Philosophy here. You can also find helpful information on how to participate in the Linux Community here.
It might not be immediately clear how you can use the Yocto Project in a team environment, or scale it for a large team of developers. One of the strengths of the Yocto Project is that it is extremely flexible. Thus, you can adapt it to many different use cases and scenarios. However, these characteristics can cause a struggle if you are trying to create a working setup that scales across a large team.
To help with these types of situations, this section presents some of the project's most successful experiences, practices, solutions, and available technologies that work well. Keep in mind, the information here is a starting point. You can build off it and customize it to fit any particular working environment and set of practices.
Systems across a large team should meet the needs of two types of developers: those working on the contents of the operating system image itself and those developing applications. Regardless of the type of developer, their workstations must be both reasonably powerful and run Linux.
For developers who mainly do application level work on top of an existing software stack, the following list shows practices that work best. For information on using a Software Development Kit (SDK), see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide:
Use a pre-built toolchain that contains the software stack itself. Then, develop the application code on top of the stack. This method works well for small numbers of relatively isolated applications.
When possible, use the Yocto Project plug-in for the Eclipse™ IDE and SDK development practices. For more information, see the "Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide".
Keep your cross-development toolchains
                        updated.
                        You can do this through provisioning either as new
                        toolchain downloads or as updates through a package
                        update mechanism using opkg
                        to provide updates to an existing toolchain.
                        The exact mechanics of how and when to do this are a
                        question for local policy.
Use multiple toolchains installed locally into different locations to allow development across versions.
For core system development, it is often best to have the build system itself available on the developer workstations so developers can run their own builds and directly rebuild the software stack. You should keep the core system unchanged as much as possible and do your work in layers on top of the core system. Doing so gives you a greater level of portability when upgrading to new versions of the core system or Board Support Packages (BSPs). You can share layers amongst the developers of a particular project and contain the policy configuration that defines the project.
Aside from the previous best practices, there exists a number of tips and tricks that can help speed up core development projects:
Use a Shared State Cache (sstate) among groups of developers who are on a fast network. The best way to share sstate is through a Network File System (NFS) share. The first user to build a given component for the first time contributes that object to the sstate, while subsequent builds from other developers then reuse the object rather than rebuild it themselves.
Although it is possible to use other protocols for the sstate such as HTTP and FTP, you should avoid these. Using HTTP limits the sstate to read-only and FTP provides poor performance.
Have autobuilders contribute to the sstate pool similarly to how the developer workstations contribute. For information, see the "Autobuilders" section.
Build stand-alone tarballs that contain
                        "missing" system requirements if for some reason
                        developer workstations do not meet minimum system
                        requirements such as latest Python versions,
                        chrpath, or other tools.
                        You can install and relocate the tarball exactly as you
                        would the usual cross-development toolchain so that
                        all developers can meet minimum version requirements
                        on most distributions.
Use a small number of shared, high performance systems for testing purposes (e.g. dual, six-core Xeons with 24 Gbytes of RAM and plenty of disk space). Developers can use these systems for wider, more extensive testing while they continue to develop locally using their primary development system.
Enable the PR Service when package feeds need to be incremental with continually increasing PR values. Typically, this situation occurs when you use or publish package feeds and use a shared state. You should enable the PR Service for all users who use the shared state pool. For more information on the PR Service, see the "Working With a PR Service".
Keeping your Metadata and any software you are developing under the control of an SCM system that is compatible with the OpenEmbedded build system is advisable. Of the SCMs BitBake supports, the Yocto Project team strongly recommends using Git. Git is a distributed system that is easy to backup, allows you to work remotely, and then connects back to the infrastructure.
            It is relatively easy to set up Git services and create
            infrastructure like
            http://git.yoctoproject.org,
            which is based on server software called
            gitolite with cgit
            being used to generate the web interface that lets you view the
            repositories.
            The gitolite software identifies users
            using SSH keys and allows branch-based
            access controls to repositories that you can control as little
            or as much as necessary.
        
Git documentation:
                    Describes how to install gitolite
                    on the server.
The gitolite master index:
                    All topics for gitolite.
                    
Interfaces, frontends, and tools: Documentation on how to create interfaces and frontends for Git.
Autobuilders are often the core of a development project. It is here that changes from individual developers are brought together and centrally tested and subsequent decisions about releases can be made. Autobuilders also allow for "continuous integration" style testing of software components and regression identification and tracking.
See "Yocto Project Autobuilder" for more information and links to buildbot. The Yocto Project team has found this implementation works well in this role. A public example of this is the Yocto Project Autobuilders, which we use to test the overall health of the project.
The features of this system are:
Highlights when commits break the build.
Populates an sstate cache from which developers can pull rather than requiring local builds.
Allows commit hook triggers, which trigger builds when commits are made.
Allows triggering of automated image booting and testing under the QuickEMUlator (QEMU).
Supports incremental build testing and from-scratch builds.
Shares output that allows developer testing and historical regression investigation.
Creates output that can be used for releases.
Allows scheduling of builds so that resources can be used efficiently.
            The Yocto Project itself uses a hierarchical structure and a
            pull model.
            Scripts exist to create and send pull requests
            (i.e. create-pull-request and
            send-pull-request).
            This model is in line with other open source projects where
            maintainers are responsible for specific areas of the project
            and a single maintainer handles the final "top-of-tree" merges.
        
gitolite software supports both the
            push and pull models quite easily.
        As with any development environment, it is important to document the policy used as well as any main project guidelines so they are understood by everyone. It is also a good idea to have well structured commit messages, which are usually a part of a project's guidelines. Good commit messages are essential when looking back in time and trying to understand why changes were made.
If you discover that changes are needed to the core layer of the project, it is worth sharing those with the community as soon as possible. Chances are if you have discovered the need for changes, someone else in the community needs them also.
This section summarizes the key recommendations described in the previous sections:
Use Git as the source control system.
Maintain your Metadata in layers that make sense for your situation. See the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section for more information on layers.
Separate the project's Metadata and code by using separate Git repositories. See the "Yocto Project Source Repositories" section for information on these repositories. See the "Getting Set Up" section for information on how to set up local Git repositories for related upstream Yocto Project Git repositories.
Set up the directory for the shared state cache
                    (SSTATE_DIR)
                    where it makes sense.
                    For example, set up the sstate cache on a system used
                    by developers in the same organization and share the
                    same source directories on their machines.
                    
Set up an Autobuilder and have it populate the sstate cache and source directories.
The Yocto Project community encourages you to send patches to the project to fix bugs or add features. If you do submit patches, follow the project commit guidelines for writing good commit messages. See the "How to Submit a Change" section.
Send changes to the core sooner than later as others are likely to run into the same issues. For some guidance on mailing lists to use, see the list in the "How to Submit a Change" section. For a description of the available mailing lists, see the "Mailing Lists" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
The Yocto Project team maintains complete source repositories for all Yocto Project files at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi. This web-based source code browser is organized into categories by function such as IDE Plugins, Matchbox, Poky, Yocto Linux Kernel, and so forth. From the interface, you can click on any particular item in the "Name" column and see the URL at the bottom of the page that you need to clone a Git repository for that particular item. Having a local Git repository of the Source Directory, which is usually named "poky", allows you to make changes, contribute to the history, and ultimately enhance the Yocto Project's tools, Board Support Packages, and so forth.
        For any supported release of Yocto Project, you can also go to the
        Yocto Project Website and
        select the "Downloads" tab and get a released tarball of the
        poky repository or any supported BSP tarballs.
        Unpacking these tarballs gives you a snapshot of the released
        files.
        
                    The recommended method for setting up the Yocto Project
                    Source Directory
                    and the files for supported BSPs
                    (e.g., meta-intel) is to use
                    Git to create a local copy of
                    the upstream repositories.
                    
                    Be sure to always work in matching branches for both
                    the selected BSP repository and the
                    Source Directory
                    (i.e. poky) repository.
                    For example, if you have checked out the "master" branch
                    of poky and you are going to use
                    meta-intel, be sure to checkout the
                    "master" branch of meta-intel.
                    
In summary, here is where you can get the project files needed for development:
Source Repositories: This area contains IDE Plugins, Matchbox, Poky, Poky Support, Tools, Yocto Linux Kernel, and Yocto Metadata Layers. You can create local copies of Git repositories for each of these areas.
|  | 
Index of /releases: This is an index of releases such as the Eclipse™ Yocto Plug-in, miscellaneous support, Poky, Pseudo, installers for cross-development toolchains, and all released versions of Yocto Project in the form of images or tarballs. Downloading and extracting these files does not produce a local copy of the Git repository but rather a snapshot of a particular release or image.
|  | 
"Downloads" page for the Yocto Project Website: Access this page by going to the website and then selecting the "Downloads" tab. This page allows you to download any Yocto Project release or Board Support Package (BSP) in tarball form. The tarballs are similar to those found in the Index of /releases: area.
|  | 
Following is a list of terms and definitions users new to the Yocto Project development environment might find helpful. While some of these terms are universal, the list includes them just in case:
Append Files: Files that append build information to
                a recipe file.
                Append files are known as BitBake append files and .bbappend files.
                The OpenEmbedded build system expects every append file to have a corresponding
                recipe (.bb) file.
                Furthermore, the append file and corresponding recipe file
                must use the same root filename.
                The filenames can differ only in the file type suffix used (e.g.
                formfactor_0.0.bb and formfactor_0.0.bbappend).
                
Information in append files extends or overrides the information in the similarly-named recipe file. For an example of an append file in use, see the "Using .bbappend Files" section.
BitBake: The task executor and scheduler used by the OpenEmbedded build system to build images. For more information on BitBake, see the BitBake User Manual.
Build Directory:
                This term refers to the area used by the OpenEmbedded build
                system for builds.
                The area is created when you source the
                setup environment script that is found in the Source Directory
                (i.e. oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres).
                The TOPDIR
                variable points to the Build Directory.
                    You have a lot of flexibility when creating the Build
                    Directory.
                    Following are some examples that show how to create the
                    directory.
                    The examples assume your
                    Source Directory is
                    named poky:
                   
Create the Build Directory inside your
                            Source Directory and let the name of the Build
                            Directory default to build:
                            
     $ cd $HOME/poky
     $ source oe-init-build-env
                            Create the Build Directory inside your
                            home directory and specifically name it
                            test-builds:
                            
     $ cd $HOME
     $ source poky/oe-init-build-env test-builds
                            
                            Provide a directory path and
                            specifically name the Build Directory.
                            Any intermediate folders in the pathname must
                            exist.
                            This next example creates a Build Directory named
                            YP-15.0.2
                            in your home directory within the existing
                            directory mybuilds:
                            
     $cd $HOME
     $ source $HOME/poky/oe-init-build-env $HOME/mybuilds/YP-15.0.2
                            
TMPDIR,
                        which is a temporary directory the build system uses for
                        its work.
                        TMPDIR cannot be under NFS.
                        Thus, by default, the Build Directory cannot be under NFS.
                        However, if you need the Build Directory to be under NFS,
                        you can set this up by setting TMPDIR
                        in your local.conf file
                        to use a local drive.
                        Doing so effectively separates TMPDIR
                        from TOPDIR, which is the Build
                        Directory.
                    
Classes: Files that provide for logic encapsulation
                and inheritance so that commonly used patterns can be defined once and then easily used
                in multiple recipes.
                For reference information on the Yocto Project classes, see the
                "Classes" chapter of the
                Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                Class files end with the .bbclass filename extension.
                
Configuration File:
                Configuration information in various .conf
                files provides global definitions of variables.
                The conf/local.conf configuration file in
                the
                Build Directory
                contains user-defined variables that affect every build.
                The meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf
                configuration file defines Yocto "distro" configuration
                variables used only when building with this policy.
                Machine configuration files, which
                are located throughout the
                Source Directory, define
                variables for specific hardware and are only used when building
                for that target (e.g. the
                machine/beaglebone.conf configuration
                file defines variables for the Texas Instruments ARM Cortex-A8
                development board).
                Configuration files end with a .conf
                filename extension.
                
Cross-Development Toolchain: In general, a cross-development toolchain is a collection of software development tools and utilities that run on one architecture and allow you to develop software for a different, or targeted, architecture. These toolchains contain cross-compilers, linkers, and debuggers that are specific to the target architecture.
The Yocto Project supports two different cross-development toolchains:
A toolchain only used by and within BitBake when building an image for a target architecture.
A relocatable toolchain used outside of BitBake by developers when developing applications that will run on a targeted device.
Creation of these toolchains is simple and automated. For information on toolchain concepts as they apply to the Yocto Project, see the "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual. You can also find more information on using the relocatable toolchain in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
Image: An image is an artifact of the BitBake build process given a collection of recipes and related Metadata. Images are the binary output that run on specific hardware or QEMU and are used for specific use-cases. For a list of the supported image types that the Yocto Project provides, see the "Images" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Layer: A collection of recipes representing the core, a BSP, or an application stack. For a discussion specifically on BSP Layers, see the "BSP Layers" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Packages (BSP) Developer's Guide.
Metadata:
                The files that BitBake parses when building an image.
                In general, Metadata includes recipes, classes, and
                configuration files.
                In the context of the kernel ("kernel Metadata"),
                it refers to Metadata in the meta
                branches of the kernel source Git repositories.
                
OE-Core: A core set of Metadata originating
                with OpenEmbedded (OE) that is shared between OE and the Yocto Project.
                This Metadata is found in the meta directory of the
                Source Directory.
OpenEmbedded Build System: The build system specific to the Yocto Project. The OpenEmbedded build system is based on another project known as "Poky", which uses BitBake as the task executor. Throughout the Yocto Project documentation set, the OpenEmbedded build system is sometimes referred to simply as "the build system". If other build systems, such as a host or target build system are referenced, the documentation clearly states the difference.
Package: In the context of the Yocto Project, this term refers to a recipe's packaged output produced by BitBake (i.e. a "baked recipe"). A package is generally the compiled binaries produced from the recipe's sources. You "bake" something by running it through BitBake.
It is worth noting that the term "package" can, in general, have subtle meanings. For example, the packages referred to in the "The Build Host Packages" section are compiled binaries that, when installed, add functionality to your Linux distribution.
Another point worth noting is that historically within the Yocto Project,
                recipes were referred to as packages - thus, the existence of several BitBake
                variables that are seemingly mis-named,
                (e.g. PR,
                PV, and
                PE).
                
Package Groups:
                Arbitrary groups of software Recipes.
                You use package groups to hold recipes that, when built,
                usually accomplish a single task.
                For example, a package group could contain the recipes for a
                company’s proprietary or value-add software.
                Or, the package group could contain the recipes that enable
                graphics.
                A package group is really just another recipe.
                Because package group files are recipes, they end with the
                .bb filename extension.
Poky: The term "poky" can mean several things. In its most general sense, it is an open-source project that was initially developed by OpenedHand. With OpenedHand, poky was developed off of the existing OpenEmbedded build system becoming a commercially supportable build system for embedded Linux. After Intel Corporation acquired OpenedHand, the project poky became the basis for the Yocto Project's build system.
Within the Yocto Project source repositories,
                poky exists as a separate Git
                repository you can clone to yield a local copy on your
                host system.
                Thus, "poky" can refer to the local copy of the Source
                Directory used for development within the Yocto
                Project.
Finally, "poky" can refer to the default
                DISTRO
                (i.e. distribution) created when you use the Yocto
                Project in conjunction with the
                poky repository to build an image.
                
Recipe:
                A set of instructions for building packages.
                A recipe describes where you get source code, which patches
                to apply, how to configure the source, how to compile it and so on.
                Recipes also describe dependencies for libraries or for other
                recipes.
                Recipes represent the logical unit of execution, the software
                to build, the images to build, and use the
                .bb file extension.
                
Source Directory:
                This term refers to the directory structure created as a result
                of creating a local copy of the poky Git
                repository git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
                or expanding a released poky tarball.
                
poky
                    Git repository is the recommended method for setting up
                    your Source Directory.
                Sometimes you might hear the term "poky directory" used to refer to this directory structure.
The Source Directory contains BitBake, Documentation, Metadata and other files that all support the Yocto Project. Consequently, you must have the Source Directory in place on your development system in order to do any development using the Yocto Project.
When you create a local copy of the Git repository, you
                can name the repository anything you like.
                Throughout much of the documentation, "poky"
                is used as the name of the top-level folder of the local copy of
                the poky Git repository.
                So, for example, cloning the poky Git
                repository results in a local Git repository whose top-level
                folder is also named "poky".
While it is not recommended that you use tarball expansion
                to set up the Source Directory, if you do, the top-level
                directory name of the Source Directory is derived from the
                Yocto Project release tarball.
                For example, downloading and unpacking
                poky-krogoth-15.0.2.tar.bz2 results in a
                Source Directory whose root folder is named
                poky-krogoth-15.0.2.
It is important to understand the differences between the
                Source Directory created by unpacking a released tarball as
                compared to cloning
                git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky.
                When you unpack a tarball, you have an exact copy of the files
                based on the time of release - a fixed release point.
                Any changes you make to your local files in the Source Directory
                are on top of the release and will remain local only.
                On the other hand, when you clone the poky
                Git repository, you have an active development repository with
                access to the upstream repository's branches and tags.
                In this case, any local changes you make to the local
                Source Directory can be later applied to active development
                branches of the upstream poky Git
                repository.
For more information on concepts related to Git repositories, branches, and tags, see the "Repositories, Tags, and Branches" section.
Task:
                A unit of execution for BitBake (e.g.
                do_compile,
                do_fetch,
                do_patch,
                and so forth).
                
Upstream: A reference to source code or repositories that are not local to the development system but located in a master area that is controlled by the maintainer of the source code. For example, in order for a developer to work on a particular piece of code, they need to first get a copy of it from an "upstream" source.
Because open source projects are open to the public, they have different licensing structures in place. License evolution for both Open Source and Free Software has an interesting history. If you are interested in this history, you can find basic information here:
In general, the Yocto Project is broadly licensed under the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) License. MIT licensing permits the reuse of software within proprietary software as long as the license is distributed with that software. MIT is also compatible with the GNU General Public License (GPL). Patches to the Yocto Project follow the upstream licensing scheme. You can find information on the MIT license here. You can find information on the GNU GPL here.
        When you build an image using the Yocto Project, the build process uses a
        known list of licenses to ensure compliance.
        You can find this list in the
        Source Directory at
        meta/files/common-licenses.
        Once the build completes, the list of all licenses found and used during that build are
        kept in the
        Build Directory at
        tmp/deploy/licenses.
    
If a module requires a license that is not in the base list, the build process generates a warning during the build. These tools make it easier for a developer to be certain of the licenses with which their shipped products must comply. However, even with these tools it is still up to the developer to resolve potential licensing issues.
The base list of licenses used by the build process is a combination of the Software Package Data Exchange (SPDX) list and the Open Source Initiative (OSI) projects. SPDX Group is a working group of the Linux Foundation that maintains a specification for a standard format for communicating the components, licenses, and copyrights associated with a software package. OSI is a corporation dedicated to the Open Source Definition and the effort for reviewing and approving licenses that conform to the Open Source Definition (OSD).
        You can find a list of the combined SPDX and OSI licenses that the
        Yocto Project uses in the
        meta/files/common-licenses directory in your
        Source Directory.
    
For information that can help you maintain compliance with various open source licensing during the lifecycle of a product created using the Yocto Project, see the "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle" section.
The Yocto Project makes extensive use of Git, which is a free, open source distributed version control system. Git supports distributed development, non-linear development, and can handle large projects. It is best that you have some fundamental understanding of how Git tracks projects and how to work with Git if you are going to use the Yocto Project for development. This section provides a quick overview of how Git works and provides you with a summary of some essential Git commands.
For more information on Git, see http://git-scm.com/documentation. If you need to download Git, go to http://git-scm.com/download.
As mentioned earlier in the section "Yocto Project Source Repositories", the Yocto Project maintains source repositories at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi. If you look at this web-interface of the repositories, each item is a separate Git repository.
Git repositories use branching techniques that track content change (not files) within a project (e.g. a new feature or updated documentation). Creating a tree-like structure based on project divergence allows for excellent historical information over the life of a project. This methodology also allows for an environment from which you can do lots of local experimentation on projects as you develop changes or new features.
            A Git repository represents all development efforts for a given project.
            For example, the Git repository poky contains all changes
            and developments for Poky over the course of its entire life.
            That means that all changes that make up all releases are captured.
            The repository maintains a complete history of changes.
        
            You can create a local copy of any repository by "cloning" it with the Git
            clone command.
            When you clone a Git repository, you end up with an identical copy of the
            repository on your development system.
            Once you have a local copy of a repository, you can take steps to develop locally.
            For examples on how to clone Git repositories, see the
            "Getting Set Up" section.
        
            It is important to understand that Git tracks content change and
            not files.
            Git uses "branches" to organize different development efforts.
            For example, the poky repository has
            several branches that include the current
            krogoth branch, the
            master branch, and many branches for past
            Yocto Project releases.
            You can see all the branches by going to
            http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi/poky/ and
            clicking on the
            [...]
            link beneath the "Branch" heading.
        
            Each of these branches represents a specific area of development.
            The master branch represents the current or most recent
            development.
            All other branches represent offshoots of the master
            branch.
        
            When you create a local copy of a Git repository, the copy has the same set
            of branches as the original.
            This means you can use Git to create a local working area (also called a branch)
            that tracks a specific development branch from the source Git repository.
            in other words, you can define your local Git environment to work on any development
            branch in the repository.
            To help illustrate, here is a set of commands that creates a local copy of the
            poky Git repository and then creates and checks out a local
            Git branch that tracks the Yocto Project 2.1.2 Release (Krogoth) development:
            
     $ cd ~
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
     $ cd poky
     $ git checkout -b krogoth origin/krogoth
            In this example, the name of the top-level directory of your local Source Directory is "poky" and the name of that local working area (local branch) you just created and checked out is "krogoth". The files in your local repository now reflect the same files that are in the "krogoth" development branch of the Yocto Project's "poky" upstream repository. It is important to understand that when you create and checkout a local working branch based on a branch name, your local environment matches the "tip" of that development branch at the time you created your local branch, which could be different from the files at the time of a similarly named release. In other words, creating and checking out a local branch based on the "krogoth" branch name is not the same as cloning and checking out the "master" branch. Keep reading to see how you create a local snapshot of a Yocto Project Release.
            Git uses "tags" to mark specific changes in a repository.
            Typically, a tag is used to mark a special point such as the final
            change before a project is released.
            You can see the tags used with the poky Git
            repository by going to
            http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi/poky/ and
            clicking on the
            [...]
            link beneath the "Tag" heading.
        
            Some key tags are
            dizzy-12.0.0,
            fido-13.0.0,
            jethro-14.0.0, and
            krogoth-15.0.2.
            These tags represent Yocto Project releases.
        
When you create a local copy of the Git repository, you also have access to all the tags. Similar to branches, you can create and checkout a local working Git branch based on a tag name. When you do this, you get a snapshot of the Git repository that reflects the state of the files when the change was made associated with that tag. The most common use is to checkout a working branch that matches a specific Yocto Project release. Here is an example:
     $ cd ~
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
     $ cd poky
     $ git checkout -b my-krogoth-15.0.2 krogoth-15.0.2
            
            In this example, the name of the top-level directory of your local Yocto Project
            Files Git repository is poky.
            And, the name of the local branch you have created and checked out is
            my-krogoth-15.0.2.
            The files in your repository now exactly match the Yocto Project 2.1.2
            Release tag (krogoth-15.0.2).
            It is important to understand that when you create and checkout a local
            working branch based on a tag, your environment matches a specific point
            in time and not the entire development branch.
        
Git has an extensive set of commands that lets you manage changes and perform collaboration over the life of a project. Conveniently though, you can manage with a small set of basic operations and workflows once you understand the basic philosophy behind Git. You do not have to be an expert in Git to be functional. A good place to look for instruction on a minimal set of Git commands is here. If you need to download Git, you can do so here, although any reasonably current Linux distribution should already have an installable package for Git.
If you do not know much about Git, you should educate yourself by visiting the links previously mentioned.
The following list briefly describes some basic Git operations as a way to get started. As with any set of commands, this list (in most cases) simply shows the base command and omits the many arguments they support. See the Git documentation for complete descriptions and strategies on how to use these commands:
git init: Initializes an empty Git repository.
                    You cannot use Git commands unless you have a .git repository.
git clone:
                    Creates a local clone of a Git repository.
                    During collaboration, this command allows you to create a
                    local Git repository that is on equal footing with a fellow
                    developer’s Git repository.
                    
git add: Stages updated file contents
                    to the index that
                    Git uses to track changes.
                    You must stage all files that have changed before you can commit them.
git commit: Creates a "commit" that documents
                    the changes you made.
                    Commits are used for historical purposes, for determining if a maintainer of a project
                    will allow the change, and for ultimately pushing the change from your local Git repository
                    into the project’s upstream (or master) repository.
git status: Reports any modified files that
                    possibly need to be staged and committed.
git checkout branch-name: Changes
                    your working branch.
                    This command is analogous to "cd".
git checkout –b working-branch: Creates
                    a working branch on your local machine where you can isolate work.
                    It is a good idea to use local branches when adding specific features or changes.
                    This way if you do not like what you have done you can easily get rid of the work.
git branch: Reports
                    existing local branches and
                    tells you the branch in which you are currently working.
git branch -D branch-name:
                    Deletes an existing local branch.
                    You need to be in a local branch other than the one you are deleting
                    in order to delete branch-name.
git pull: Retrieves information
                    from an upstream Git
                    repository and places it in your local Git repository.
                    You use this command to make sure you are synchronized with the repository
                    from which you are basing changes (.e.g. the master branch).
git push:
                    Sends all your committed local changes to an upstream Git
                    repository (e.g. a contribution repository).
                    The maintainer of the project draws from these repositories
                    when adding changes to the project’s master repository or
                    other development branch.
                    
git merge: Combines or adds changes from one
                    local branch of your repository with another branch.
                    When you create a local Git repository, the default branch is named "master".
                    A typical workflow is to create a temporary branch for isolated work, make and commit your
                    changes, switch to your local master branch, merge the changes from the temporary branch into the
                    local master branch, and then delete the temporary branch.
git cherry-pick: Choose and apply specific
                    commits from one branch into another branch.
                    There are times when you might not be able to merge all the changes in one branch with
                    another but need to pick out certain ones.
gitk: Provides a GUI view of the branches
                    and changes in your local Git repository.
                    This command is a good way to graphically see where things have diverged in your
                    local repository.
git log: Reports a history of your changes to the
                    repository.
git diff: Displays line-by-line differences
                    between your local working files and the same files in the upstream Git repository that your
                    branch currently tracks.
This section provides some overview on workflows using Git. In particular, the information covers basic practices that describe roles and actions in a collaborative development environment. Again, if you are familiar with this type of development environment, you might want to just skip this section.
The Yocto Project files are maintained using Git in a "master" branch whose Git history tracks every change and whose structure provides branches for all diverging functionality. Although there is no need to use Git, many open source projects do so. For the Yocto Project, a key individual called the "maintainer" is responsible for the "master" branch of a given Git repository. The "master" branch is the “upstream” repository where the final builds of the project occur. The maintainer is responsible for accepting changes from other developers and for organizing the underlying branch structure to reflect release strategies and so forth.
        The project also has an upstream contribution Git repository named
        poky-contrib.
        You can see all the branches in this repository using the web interface
        of the
        Source Repositories organized
        within the "Poky Support" area.
        These branches temporarily hold changes to the project that have been
        submitted or committed by the Yocto Project development team and by
        community members who contribute to the project.
        The maintainer determines if the changes are qualified to be moved
        from the "contrib" branches into the "master" branch of the Git
        repository.
    
Developers (including contributing community members) create and maintain cloned repositories of the upstream "master" branch. These repositories are local to their development platforms and are used to develop changes. When a developer is satisfied with a particular feature or change, they "push" the changes to the appropriate "contrib" repository.
Developers are responsible for keeping their local repository up-to-date with "master". They are also responsible for straightening out any conflicts that might arise within files that are being worked on simultaneously by more than one person. All this work is done locally on the developer’s machines before anything is pushed to a "contrib" area and examined at the maintainer’s level.
A somewhat formal method exists by which developers commit changes and push them into the "contrib" area and subsequently request that the maintainer include them into "master" This process is called “submitting a patch” or "submitting a change." For information on submitting patches and changes, see the "How to Submit a Change" section.
To summarize the environment: a single point of entry exists for changes into the project’s "master" branch of the Git repository, which is controlled by the project’s maintainer. And, a set of developers exist who independently develop, test, and submit changes to "contrib" areas for the maintainer to examine. The maintainer then chooses which changes are going to become a permanent part of the project.
|  | 
While each development environment is unique, there are some best practices or methods that help development run smoothly. The following list describes some of these practices. For more information about Git workflows, see the workflow topics in the Git Community Book.
Make Small Changes: It is best to keep the changes you commit small as compared to bundling many disparate changes into a single commit. This practice not only keeps things manageable but also allows the maintainer to more easily include or refuse changes.
It is also good practice to leave the repository in a state that allows you to still successfully build your project. In other words, do not commit half of a feature, then add the other half as a separate, later commit. Each commit should take you from one buildable project state to another buildable state.
Use Branches Liberally: It is very easy to create, use, and delete local branches in your working Git repository. You can name these branches anything you like. It is helpful to give them names associated with the particular feature or change on which you are working. Once you are done with a feature or change and have merged it into your local master branch, simply discard the temporary branch.
Merge Changes: The git merge
                command allows you to take the
                changes from one branch and fold them into another branch.
                This process is especially helpful when more than a single developer might be working
                on different parts of the same feature.
                Merging changes also automatically identifies any collisions or "conflicts"
                that might happen as a result of the same lines of code being altered by two different
                developers.
Manage Branches: Because branches are easy to use, you should use a system where branches indicate varying levels of code readiness. For example, you can have a "work" branch to develop in, a "test" branch where the code or change is tested, a "stage" branch where changes are ready to be committed, and so forth. As your project develops, you can merge code across the branches to reflect ever-increasing stable states of the development.
Use Push and Pull: The push-pull workflow is based on the
                concept of developers "pushing" local commits to a remote repository, which is
                usually a contribution repository.
                This workflow is also based on developers "pulling" known states of the project down into their
                local development repositories.
                The workflow easily allows you to pull changes submitted by other developers from the
                upstream repository into your work area ensuring that you have the most recent software
                on which to develop.
                The Yocto Project has two scripts named create-pull-request and
                send-pull-request that ship with the release to facilitate this
                workflow.
                You can find these scripts in the scripts
                folder of the
                Source Directory.
                For information on how to use these scripts, see the
                "Using Scripts to Push a Change Upstream and Request a Pull" section.
                
Patch Workflow: This workflow allows you to notify the
                maintainer through an email that you have a change (or patch) you would like considered
                for the "master" branch of the Git repository.
                To send this type of change, you format the patch and then send the email using the Git commands
                git format-patch and git send-email.
                For information on how to use these scripts, see the
                "How to Submit a Change"
                section.
                
The Yocto Project uses its own implementation of Bugzilla to track bugs. Implementations of Bugzilla work well for group development because they track bugs and code changes, can be used to communicate changes and problems with developers, can be used to submit and review patches, and can be used to manage quality assurance. The home page for the Yocto Project implementation of Bugzilla is http://bugzilla.yoctoproject.org.
Sometimes it is helpful to submit, investigate, or track a bug against the Yocto Project itself such as when discovering an issue with some component of the build system that acts contrary to the documentation or your expectations. Following is the general procedure for submitting a new bug using the Yocto Project Bugzilla. You can find more information on defect management, bug tracking, and feature request processes all accomplished through the Yocto Project Bugzilla on the wiki page.
Always use the Yocto Project implementation of Bugzilla to submit a bug.
When submitting a new bug, be sure to choose the appropriate Classification, Product, and Component for which the issue was found. Defects for the Yocto Project fall into one of seven classifications: Yocto Project Components, Infrastructure, Build System & Metadata, Documentation, QA/Testing, Runtime and Hardware. Each of these Classifications break down into multiple Products and, in some cases, multiple Components.
Use the bug form to choose the correct Hardware and Architecture for which the bug applies.
Indicate the Yocto Project version you were using when the issue occurred.
Be sure to indicate the Severity of the bug. Severity communicates how the bug impacted your work.
Select the appropriate "Documentation change" item for the bug. Fixing a bug may or may not affect the Yocto Project documentation.
Provide a brief summary of the issue. Try to limit your summary to just a line or two and be sure to capture the essence of the issue.
Provide a detailed description of the issue. You should provide as much detail as you can about the context, behavior, output, and so forth that surrounds the issue. You can even attach supporting files for output from logs by using the "Add an attachment" button.
Be sure to copy the appropriate people in the "CC List" for the bug. See the "How to Submit a Change" section for information about finding out who is responsible for code.
Submit the bug by clicking the "Submit Bug" button.
Contributions to the Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded are very welcome. Because the system is extremely configurable and flexible, we recognize that developers will want to extend, configure or optimize it for their specific uses. You should send patches to the appropriate mailing list so that they can be reviewed and merged by the appropriate maintainer.
Before submitting any change, be sure to find out who you should be notifying. Several methods exist through which you find out who you should be copying or notifying:
Maintenance File:
                Examine the maintainers.inc file, which is
                located in the
                Source Directory
                at meta-poky/conf/distro/include, to
                see who is responsible for code.
                
Board Support Package (BSP) README Files:
                For BSP maintainers of supported BSPs, you can examine
                individual BSP README files.
                In addition, some layers (such as the meta-intel layer),
                include a MAINTAINERS file which contains
                a list of all supported BSP maintainers for that layer.
                
Search by File: Using Git, you can enter the following command to bring up a short list of all commits against a specific file:
     git shortlog -- filename
                Just provide the name of the file for which you are interested. The information returned is not ordered by history but does include a list of all committers grouped by name. From the list, you can see who is responsible for the bulk of the changes against the file.
For a list of the Yocto Project and related mailing lists, see the "Mailing lists" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Here is some guidance on which mailing list to use for what type of change:
For changes to the core
                Metadata, send your patch to the
                openembedded-core mailing list.
                For example, a change to anything under the meta or
                scripts directories
                should be sent to this mailing list.
For changes to BitBake (anything under the bitbake
                directory), send your patch to the
                bitbake-devel mailing list.
For changes to meta-poky, send your patch to the
                poky mailing list.
For changes to other layers hosted on
                yoctoproject.org (unless the
                layer's documentation specifies otherwise), tools, and Yocto Project
                documentation, use the
                yocto mailing list.
For additional recipes that do not fit into the core Metadata, you should determine which layer the recipe should go into and submit the change in the manner recommended by the documentation (e.g. README) supplied with the layer. If in doubt, please ask on the yocto or openembedded-devel mailing lists.
When you send a patch, be sure to include a "Signed-off-by:" line in the same style as required by the Linux kernel. Adding this line signifies that you, the submitter, have agreed to the Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1 as follows:
     Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
     By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
     (a) The contribution was created in whole or in part by me and I
         have the right to submit it under the open source license
         indicated in the file; or
     (b) The contribution is based upon previous work that, to the best
         of my knowledge, is covered under an appropriate open source
         license and I have the right under that license to submit that
         work with modifications, whether created in whole or in part
         by me, under the same open source license (unless I am
         permitted to submit under a different license), as indicated
         in the file; or
     (c) The contribution was provided directly to me by some other
         person who certified (a), (b) or (c) and I have not modified
         it.
     (d) I understand and agree that this project and the contribution
         are public and that a record of the contribution (including all
         personal information I submit with it, including my sign-off) is
         maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with
         this project or the open source license(s) involved.
        
In a collaborative environment, it is necessary to have some sort of standard or method through which you submit changes. Otherwise, things could get quite chaotic. One general practice to follow is to make small, controlled changes. Keeping changes small and isolated aids review, makes merging/rebasing easier and keeps the change history clean when anyone needs to refer to it in future.
When you make a commit, you must follow certain standards established by the OpenEmbedded and Yocto Project development teams. For each commit, you must provide a single-line summary of the change and you should almost always provide a more detailed description of what you did (i.e. the body of the commit message). The only exceptions for not providing a detailed description would be if your change is a simple, self-explanatory change that needs no further description beyond the summary. Here are the guidelines for composing a commit message:
bug-idProvide a single-line, short summary of the change. This summary is typically viewable in the "shortlist" of changes. Thus, providing something short and descriptive that gives the reader a summary of the change is useful when viewing a list of many commits. This short description should be prefixed by the recipe name (if changing a recipe), or else the short form path to the file being changed.
For the body of the commit message, provide detailed information that describes what you changed, why you made the change, and the approach you used. It may also be helpful if you mention how you tested the change. Provide as much detail as you can in the body of the commit message.
If the change addresses a specific bug or issue that is associated with a bug-tracking ID, include a reference to that ID in your detailed description. For example, the Yocto Project uses a specific convention for bug references - any commit that addresses a specific bug should use the following form for the detailed description:
     Fixes [YOCTO #bug-id]
     detailed description of change
                
You can find more guidance on creating well-formed commit messages at this OpenEmbedded wiki page: http://www.openembedded.org/wiki/Commit_Patch_Message_Guidelines.
The next two sections describe general instructions for both pushing changes upstream and for submitting changes as patches.
The basic flow for pushing a change to an upstream "contrib" Git repository is as follows:
Make your changes in your local Git repository.
Stage your changes by using the git add
                    command on each file you changed.
                    Commit the change by using the
                    git commit command.
                    Be sure to provide a commit message that follows the
                    project’s commit message standards as described earlier.
                    
                    Push the change to the upstream "contrib" repository by
                    using the git push command.
                    
Notify the maintainer that you have pushed a change by making a pull
                    request.
                    The Yocto Project provides two scripts that conveniently let you generate and send
                    pull requests to the Yocto Project.
                    These scripts are create-pull-request and
                    send-pull-request.
                    You can find these scripts in the scripts directory
                    within the Source Directory.
Using these scripts correctly formats the requests without introducing any whitespace or HTML formatting. The maintainer that receives your patches needs to be able to save and apply them directly from your emails. Using these scripts is the preferred method for sending patches.
For help on using these scripts, simply provide the
                    -h argument as follows:
                    
     $ poky/scripts/create-pull-request -h
     $ poky/scripts/send-pull-request -h
                    
You can find general Git information on how to push a change upstream in the Git Community Book.
            You can submit patches without using the create-pull-request and
            send-pull-request scripts described in the previous section.
            However, keep in mind, the preferred method is to use the scripts.
        
Depending on the components changed, you need to submit the email to a specific mailing list. For some guidance on which mailing list to use, see the list in the "How to Submit a Change" section. For a description of the available mailing lists, see the "Mailing Lists" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
Here is the general procedure on how to submit a patch through email without using the scripts:
Make your changes in your local Git repository.
Stage your changes by using the git add
                    command on each file you changed.
Commit the change by using the
                    git commit --signoff command.
                    Using the --signoff option identifies you as the person
                    making the change and also satisfies the Developer's Certificate of
                    Origin (DCO) shown earlier.
When you form a commit, you must follow certain standards established by the Yocto Project development team. See the earlier section "How to Submit a Change" for Yocto Project commit message standards.
Format the commit into an email message.
                    To format commits, use the git format-patch command.
                    When you provide the command, you must include a revision list or a number of patches
                    as part of the command.
                    For example, either of these two commands takes your most
                    recent single commit and formats it as an email message in
                    the current directory:
                    
     $ git format-patch -1
                    or
     $ git format-patch HEAD~
                    After the command is run, the current directory contains a
                    numbered .patch file for the commit.
If you provide several commits as part of the command,
                    the git format-patch command produces a
                    series of numbered files in the current directory – one for each commit.
                    If you have more than one patch, you should also use the
                    --cover option with the command, which generates a
                    cover letter as the first "patch" in the series.
                    You can then edit the cover letter to provide a description for
                    the series of patches.
                    For information on the git format-patch command,
                    see GIT_FORMAT_PATCH(1) displayed using the
                    man git-format-patch command.
Import the files into your mail client by using the
                    git send-email command.
                    
git send-email, you must have the
                    the proper Git packages installed.
                    For Ubuntu, Debian, and Fedora the package is git-email.The git send-email command sends email by using a local
                    or remote Mail Transport Agent (MTA) such as
                    msmtp, sendmail, or through a direct
                    smtp configuration in your Git config
                    file.
                    If you are submitting patches through email only, it is very important
                    that you submit them without any whitespace or HTML formatting that
                    either you or your mailer introduces.
                    The maintainer that receives your patches needs to be able to save and
                    apply them directly from your emails.
                    A good way to verify that what you are sending will be applicable by the
                    maintainer is to do a dry run and send them to yourself and then
                    save and apply them as the maintainer would.
The git send-email command is the preferred method
                    for sending your patches since there is no risk of compromising whitespace
                    in the body of the message, which can occur when you use your own mail client.
                    The command also has several options that let you
                    specify recipients and perform further editing of the email message.
                    For information on how to use the git send-email command,
                    see GIT-SEND-EMAIL(1) displayed using
                    the man git-send-email command.
                    
Many development models exist for which you can use the Yocto Project. This chapter overviews simple methods that use tools provided by the Yocto Project:
System Development: System Development covers Board Support Package (BSP) development and kernel modification or configuration. For an example on how to create a BSP, see the "Creating a New BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide. For more complete information on how to work with the kernel, see the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
User Application Development: User Application Development covers development of applications that you intend to run on target hardware. For information on how to set up your host development system for user-space application development, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide. For a simple example of user-space application development using the Eclipse™ IDE, see the "Developing Applications Using Eclipse™" section.
Temporary Source Code Modification: Direct modification of temporary source code is a convenient development model to quickly iterate and develop towards a solution. Once you implement the solution, you should of course take steps to get the changes upstream and applied in the affected recipes.
Image Development using Toaster: You can use Toaster to build custom operating system images within the build environment. Toaster provides an efficient interface to the OpenEmbedded build that allows you to start builds and examine build statistics.
Using a Development Shell:
             You can use a
             devshell
             to efficiently debug
             commands or simply edit packages.
             Working inside a development shell is a quick way to set up the
             OpenEmbedded build environment to work on parts of a project.
             
System development involves modification or creation of an image that you want to run on a specific hardware target. Usually, when you want to create an image that runs on embedded hardware, the image does not require the same number of features that a full-fledged Linux distribution provides. Thus, you can create a much smaller image that is designed to use only the features for your particular hardware.
To help you understand how system development works in the Yocto Project, this section covers two types of image development: BSP creation and kernel modification or configuration.
A BSP is a collection of recipes that, when applied during a build, results in an image that you can run on a particular board. Thus, the package when compiled into the new image, supports the operation of the board.
            The remainder of this section presents the basic
            steps used to create a BSP using the Yocto Project's
            BSP Tools.
            Although not required for BSP creation, the
            meta-intel repository, which contains
            many BSPs supported by the Yocto Project, is part of the example.
        
For an example that shows how to create a new layer using the tools, see the "Creating a New BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
The following illustration and list summarize the BSP creation general workflow.
|  | 
Set up your host development system to support development using the Yocto Project: See the "The Linux Distribution" and the "The Build Host Packages" sections both in the Yocto Project Quick Start for requirements.
Establish a local copy of the project files on your system: You need this Source Directory available on your host system. Having these files on your system gives you access to the build process and to the tools you need. For information on how to set up the Source Directory, see the "Getting Set Up" section.
Establish the meta-intel
                    repository on your system:  Having local copies
                    of these supported BSP layers on your system gives you
                    access to layers you might be able to build on or modify
                    to create your BSP.
                    For information on how to get these files, see the
                    "Getting Set Up" section.
Create your own BSP layer using the
                    yocto-bsp script:
                    Layers are ideal for
                    isolating and storing work for a given piece of hardware.
                    A layer is really just a location or area in which you place
                    the recipes and configurations for your BSP.
                    In fact, a BSP is, in itself, a special type of layer.
                    The simplest way to create a new BSP layer that is compliant with the
                    Yocto Project is to use the yocto-bsp script.
                    For information about that script, see the
                    "Creating a New BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script"
                    section in the Yocto Project Board Support (BSP) Developer's Guide.
                    
Another example that illustrates a layer is an application. Suppose you are creating an application that has library or other dependencies in order for it to compile and run. The layer, in this case, would be where all the recipes that define those dependencies are kept. The key point for a layer is that it is an isolated area that contains all the relevant information for the project that the OpenEmbedded build system knows about. For more information on layers, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section. For more information on BSP layers, see the "BSP Layers" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
                                Five BSPs exist that are part of the Yocto Project release:
                                beaglebone (ARM),
                                mpc8315e (PowerPC),
                                and edgerouter (MIPS).
                                The recipes and configurations for these five BSPs
                                are located and dispersed within the
                                Source Directory.
                            
                                Three core Intel BSPs exist as part of the Yocto
                                Project release in the
                                meta-intel layer:
                                
intel-core2-32,
                                        which is a BSP optimized for the Core2 family of CPUs
                                        as well as all CPUs prior to the Silvermont core.
                                        
intel-corei7-64,
                                        which is a BSP optimized for Nehalem and later
                                        Core and Xeon CPUs as well as Silvermont and later
                                        Atom CPUs, such as the Baytrail SoCs.
                                        
intel-quark,
                                        which is a BSP optimized for the Intel Galileo
                                        gen1 & gen2 development boards.
                                        
When you set up a layer for a new BSP, you should follow a standard layout.
                    This layout is described in the
                    "Example Filesystem Layout"
                    section of the Board Support Package (BSP) Development Guide.
                    In the standard layout, you will notice a suggested structure for recipes and
                    configuration information.
                    You can see the standard layout for a BSP by examining
                    any supported BSP found in the meta-intel layer inside
                    the Source Directory.
Make configuration changes to your new BSP
                    layer:  The standard BSP layer structure organizes the files you need
                    to edit in conf and several recipes-*
                    directories within the BSP layer.
                    Configuration changes identify where your new layer is on the local system
                    and identify which kernel you are going to use.
                    When you run the yocto-bsp script, you are able to interactively
                    configure many things for the BSP (e.g. keyboard, touchscreen, and so forth).
                    
Make recipe changes to your new BSP layer:  Recipe
                    changes include altering recipes (.bb files), removing
                    recipes you do not use, and adding new recipes or append files
                    (.bbappend) that you need to support your hardware.
                    
Prepare for the build:  Once you have made all the
                    changes to your BSP layer, there remains a few things
                    you need to do for the OpenEmbedded build system in order for it to create your image.
                    You need to get the build environment ready by sourcing an environment setup script
                    (i.e. oe-init-build-env or
                    oe-init-build-env-memres)
                    and you need to be sure two key configuration files are configured appropriately:
                    the conf/local.conf and the
                    conf/bblayers.conf file.
                    You must make the OpenEmbedded build system aware of your new layer.
                    See the
                    "Enabling Your Layer" section
                    for information on how to let the build system know about your new layer.
The entire process for building an image is overviewed in the section "Building Images" section of the Yocto Project Quick Start. You might want to reference this information.
Build the image: The OpenEmbedded build system uses the BitBake tool to build images based on the type of image you want to create. You can find more information about BitBake in the BitBake User Manual.
The build process supports several types of images to satisfy different needs. See the "Images" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for information on supported images.
You can view a video presentation on "Building Custom Embedded Images with Yocto" at Free Electrons. After going to the page, just search for "Embedded". You can also find supplemental information in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide. Finally, there is helpful material and links on this wiki page. Although a bit dated, you might find the information on the wiki helpful.
            Kernel modification involves changing the Yocto Project kernel, which could involve changing
            configuration options as well as adding new kernel recipes.
            Configuration changes can be added in the form of configuration fragments, while recipe
            modification comes through the kernel's recipes-kernel area
            in a kernel layer you create.
        
The remainder of this section presents a high-level overview of the Yocto Project kernel architecture and the steps to modify the kernel. You can reference the "Patching the Kernel" section for an example that changes the source code of the kernel. For information on how to configure the kernel, see the "Configuring the Kernel" section. For more information on the kernel and on modifying the kernel, see the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
Traditionally, when one thinks of a patched kernel, they think of a base kernel source tree and a fixed structure that contains kernel patches. The Yocto Project, however, employs mechanisms that, in a sense, result in a kernel source generator. By the end of this section, this analogy will become clearer.
You can find a web interface to the Yocto Project kernel source repositories at http://git.yoctoproject.org. If you look at the interface, you will see to the left a grouping of Git repositories titled "Yocto Linux Kernel." Within this group, you will find several kernels supported by the Yocto Project:
                        linux-yocto-3.14 - The
                        stable Yocto Project kernel to use with the Yocto
                        Project Releases 1.6 and 1.7.
                        This kernel is based on the Linux 3.14 released kernel.
                        
                        linux-yocto-3.17 - An
                        additional, unsupported Yocto Project kernel used with
                        the Yocto Project Release 1.7.
                        This kernel is based on the Linux 3.17 released kernel.
                        
                        linux-yocto-3.19 - The
                        stable Yocto Project kernel to use with the Yocto
                        Project Release 1.8.
                        This kernel is based on the Linux 3.19 released kernel.
                        
                        linux-yocto-4.1 - The
                        stable Yocto Project kernel to use with the Yocto
                        Project Release 2.0.
                        This kernel is based on the Linux 4.1 released kernel.
                        
                        linux-yocto-4.4 - The
                        stable Yocto Project kernel to use with the Yocto
                        Project Release 2.1.
                        This kernel is based on the Linux 4.4 released kernel.
                        
                        linux-yocto-dev - A
                        development kernel based on the latest upstream release
                        candidate available.
                        
For Yocto Project releases 1.7, 1.8, and 2.0,
                            the LTSI kernel is linux-yocto-3.14.
                            
For Yocto Project release 2.1, the
                            LTSI kernel is linux-yocto-4.1.
                            
The kernels are maintained using the Git revision control system that structures them using the familiar "tree", "branch", and "leaf" scheme. Branches represent diversions from general code to more specific code, while leaves represent the end-points for a complete and unique kernel whose source files, when gathered from the root of the tree to the leaf, accumulate to create the files necessary for a specific piece of hardware and its features. The following figure displays this concept:
|  | 
                Within the figure, the "Kernel.org Branch Point" represents the point in the tree
                where a supported base kernel is modified from the Linux kernel.
                For example, this could be the branch point for the linux-yocto-3.19
                kernel.
                Thus, everything further to the right in the structure is based on the
                linux-yocto-3.19 kernel.
                Branch points to the right in the figure represent where the
                linux-yocto-3.19 kernel is modified for specific hardware
                or types of kernels, such as real-time kernels.
                Each leaf thus represents the end-point for a kernel designed to run on a specific
                targeted device.
            
The overall result is a Git-maintained repository from which all the supported kernel types can be derived for all the supported devices. A big advantage to this scheme is the sharing of common features by keeping them in "larger" branches within the tree. This practice eliminates redundant storage of similar features shared among kernels.
Upstream storage of all the available kernel source code is one thing, while representing and using the code on your host development system is another. Conceptually, you can think of the kernel source repositories as all the source files necessary for all the supported kernels. As a developer, you are just interested in the source files for the kernel on which you are working. And, furthermore, you need them available on your host system.
Kernel source code is available on your host system a couple of different ways. If you are working in the kernel all the time, you probably would want to set up your own local Git repository of the kernel tree. If you just need to make some patches to the kernel, you can access temporary kernel source files that were extracted and used during a build. We will just talk about working with the temporary source code. For more information on how to get kernel source code onto your host system, see the "Yocto Project Kernel" bulleted item earlier in the manual.
                What happens during the build?
                When you build the kernel on your development system, all files needed for the build
                are taken from the source repositories pointed to by the
                SRC_URI variable
                and gathered in a temporary work area
                where they are subsequently used to create the unique kernel.
                Thus, in a sense, the process constructs a local source tree specific to your
                kernel to generate the new kernel image - a source generator if you will.
            
The following figure shows the temporary file structure created on your host system when the build occurs. This Build Directory contains all the source files used during the build.
|  | 
Again, for additional information on the Yocto Project kernel's architecture and its branching strategy, see the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. You can also reference the "Patching the Kernel" section for a detailed example that modifies the kernel.
This illustration and the following list summarizes the kernel modification general workflow.
|  | 
Set up your host development system to support development using the Yocto Project: See "The Linux Distribution" and "The Build Host Packages" sections both in the Yocto Project Quick Start for requirements.
Establish a local copy of project files on your system: Having the Source Directory on your system gives you access to the build process and tools you need. For information on how to get these files, see the bulleted item "Yocto Project Release" earlier in this manual.
Establish the temporary kernel source files: Temporary kernel source files are kept in the Build Directory created by the OpenEmbedded build system when you run BitBake. If you have never built the kernel in which you are interested, you need to run an initial build to establish local kernel source files.
If you are building an image for the first time, you need to get the build
                        environment ready by sourcing an environment setup script
                        (i.e. oe-init-build-env or
                        oe-init-build-env-memres).
                        You also need to be sure two key configuration files
                        (local.conf and bblayers.conf)
                        are configured appropriately.
The entire process for building an image is overviewed in the "Building Images" section of the Yocto Project Quick Start. You might want to reference this information. You can find more information on BitBake in the BitBake User Manual.
The build process supports several types of images to satisfy different needs. See the "Images" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for information on supported images.
Make changes to the kernel source code if applicable: Modifying the kernel does not always mean directly changing source files. However, if you have to do this, you make the changes to the files in the Build Directory.
Make kernel configuration changes if applicable:
                        If your situation calls for changing the kernel's
                        configuration, you can use
                        menuconfig,
                        which allows you to interactively develop and test the
                        configuration changes you are making to the kernel.
                        Saving changes you make with
                        menuconfig updates
                        the kernel's .config file.
                        
.config file, which is
                            found in the Build Directory at
                            tmp/sysroots/machine-name/kernel.
                            Doing so, can produce unexpected results when the
                            OpenEmbedded build system regenerates the configuration
                            file.
                        
                        Once you are satisfied with the configuration
                        changes made using menuconfig
                        and you have saved them, you can directly compare the
                        resulting .config file against an
                        existing original and gather those changes into a
                        configuration fragment file
                        to be referenced from within the kernel's
                        .bbappend file.
Additionally, if you are working in a BSP layer
                        and need to modify the BSP's kernel's configuration,
                        you can use the
                        yocto-kernel
                        script as well as menuconfig.
                        The yocto-kernel script lets
                        you interactively set up kernel configurations.
                        
Rebuild the kernel image with your changes: Rebuilding the kernel image applies your changes.
Standard and extensible Software Development Kits (SDK) make it easy to develop applications inside or outside of the Yocto Project development environment. Tools exist to help the application developer during any phase of development. For information on how to install and use an SDK, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
A common development workflow consists of modifying project source files that are external to the Yocto Project and then integrating that project's build output into an image built using the OpenEmbedded build system. Given this scenario, development engineers typically want to stick to their familiar project development tools and methods, which allows them to just focus on the project.
Several workflows exist that allow you to develop, build, and test code that is going to be integrated into an image built using the OpenEmbedded build system. This section describes two:
devtool:
                A set of tools to aid in working on the source code built by
                the OpenEmbedded build system.
                Section
                "Using devtool in Your Workflow"
                describes this workflow.
                If you want more information that showcases the workflow, click
                here
                for a presentation by Trevor Woerner that, while somewhat dated,
                provides detailed background information and a complete
                working tutorial.
                
Quilt: A powerful tool that allows you to capture source code changes without having a clean source tree. While Quilt is not the preferred workflow of the two, this section includes it for users that are committed to using the tool. See the "Using Quilt in Your Workflow" section for more information.
devtool in Your Workflow¶
            As mentioned earlier, devtool helps
            you easily develop projects whose build output must be part of
            an image built using the OpenEmbedded build system.
        
            Three entry points exist that allow you to develop using
            devtool:
            
devtool add
                    
devtool modify
                    
devtool upgrade
                    
The remainder of this section presents these workflows.
devtool add to Integrate New Code¶
                The devtool add command generates
                a new recipe based on existing source code.
                This command takes advantage of the
                workspace
                layer that many devtool commands
                use.
                The command is flexible enough to allow you to extract source
                code into both the workspace or a separate local Git repository
                and to use existing code that does not need to be extracted.
            
                Depending on your particular scenario, the arguments and options
                you use with devtool add form different
                combinations.
                The following diagram shows common development flows
                you would use with the devtool add
                command:
            
                 
            
Generating the New Recipe:
                        The top part of the flow shows three scenarios by which
                        you could use devtool add to
                        generate a recipe based on existing source code.
In a shared development environment, it is typical where other developers are responsible for various areas of source code. As a developer, you are probably interested in using that source code as part of your development using the Yocto Project. All you need is access to the code, a recipe, and a controlled area in which to do your work.
Within the diagram, three possible scenarios
                        feed into the devtool add workflow:
                        
Left: The left scenario represents a common situation where the source code does not exist locally and needs to be extracted. In this situation, you just let it get extracted to the default workspace - you do not want it in some specific location outside of the workspace. Thus, everything you need will be located in the workspace:
     $ devtool add recipe fetchuri
                                
                                With this command, devtool
                                creates a recipe and an append file in the
                                workspace as well as extracts the upstream
                                source files into a local Git repository also
                                within the sources folder.
                                
Middle:
                                The middle scenario also represents a situation where
                                the source code does not exist locally.
                                In this case, the code is again upstream
                                and needs to be extracted to some
                                local area - this time outside of the default
                                workspace.
                                As always, if required devtool creates
                                a Git repository locally during the extraction.
                                Furthermore, the first positional argument
                                srctree in this case
                                identifies where the
                                devtool add command
                                will locate the extracted code outside of the
                                workspace:
                                
     $ devtool add recipe srctree fetchuri
                                
                                In summary, the source code is pulled from
                                fetchuri and extracted
                                into the location defined by
                                srctree as a local
                                Git repository.
Within workspace, devtool
                                creates both the recipe and an append file
                                for the recipe.
                                
Right:
                                The right scenario represents a situation
                                where the source tree (srctree) has been
                                previously prepared outside of the
                                devtool workspace.
                                
The following command names the recipe and identifies where the existing source tree is located:
     $ devtool add recipe srctree
                                The command examines the source code and creates a recipe for it placing the recipe into the workspace.
Because the extracted source code already exists,
                                devtool does not try to
                                relocate it into the workspace - just the new
                                the recipe is placed in the workspace.
Aside from a recipe folder, the command
                                also creates an append folder and places an initial
                                *.bbappend within.
                                
Edit the Recipe:
                        At this point, you can use devtool edit-recipe
                        to open up the editor as defined by the
                        $EDITOR environment variable
                        and modify the file:
                        
     $ devtool edit-recipe recipe
                        From within the editor, you can make modifications to the recipe that take affect when you build it later.
Build the Recipe or Rebuild the Image: At this point in the flow, the next step you take depends on what you are going to do with the new code.
If you need to take the build output and eventually
                        move it to the target hardware, you would use
                        devtool build:
                        
bitbake to build
                            the recipe as well.
                        
     $ devtool build recipe
                        On the other hand, if you want an image to
                        contain the recipe's packages for immediate deployment
                        onto a device (e.g. for testing purposes), you can use
                        the devtool build-image command:
                        
     $ devtool build-image image
                        
Deploy the Build Output:
                        When you use the devtool build
                        command to build out your recipe, you probably want to
                        see if the resulting build output works as expected on target
                        hardware.
                        
                        You can deploy your build output to that target hardware by
                        using the devtool deploy-target command:
                        
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                        
                        The target is a live target machine
                        running as an SSH server.
You can, of course, also deploy the image you build
                        using the devtool build-image command
                        to actual hardware.
                        However, devtool does not provide a
                        specific command that allows you to do this.
                        
Optionally Update the Recipe With Patch Files:
                        Once you are satisfied with the recipe, if you have made
                        any changes to the source tree that you want to have
                        applied by the recipe, you need to generate patches
                        from those changes.
                        You do this before moving the recipe
                        to its final layer and cleaning up the workspace area
                        devtool uses.
                        This optional step is especially relevant if you are
                        using or adding third-party software.
To convert commits created using Git to patch files,
                        use the devtool update-recipe command.
                        
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                        
Move the Recipe to its Permanent Layer:
                        Before cleaning up the workspace, you need to move the
                        final recipe to its permanent layer.
                        You must do this before using the
                        devtool reset command if you want to
                        retain the recipe.
                        
Reset the Recipe:
                        As a final step, you can restore the state such that
                        standard layers and the upstream source is used to build
                        the recipe rather than data in the workspace.
                        To reset the recipe, use the devtool reset
                        command:
                        
     $ devtool reset recipe
                        
devtool modify to Enable Work on Code Associated with an Existing Recipe¶
                The devtool modify command prepares the
                way to work on existing code that already has a recipe in
                place.
                The command is flexible enough to allow you to extract code,
                specify the existing recipe, and keep track of and gather any
                patch files from other developers that are
                associated with the code.
            
                Depending on your particular scenario, the arguments and options
                you use with devtool modify form different
                combinations.
                The following diagram shows common development flows
                you would use with the devtool modify
                command:
            
                 
            
Preparing to Modify the Code:
                        The top part of the flow shows three scenarios by which
                        you could use devtool modify to
                        prepare to work on source files.
                        Each scenario assumes the following:
                        
The recipe exists in some layer external
                                to the devtool workspace.
                                
The source files exist upstream in an un-extracted state or locally in a previously extracted state.
The typical situation is where another developer has created some layer for use with the Yocto Project and their recipe already resides in that layer. Furthermore, their source code is readily available either upstream or locally.
Left:
                                The left scenario represents a common situation
                                where the source code does not exist locally
                                and needs to be extracted.
                                In this situation, the source is extracted
                                into the default workspace location.
                                The recipe, in this scenario, is in its own
                                layer outside the workspace
                                (i.e.
                                meta-layername).
                                
The following command identifies the recipe and by default extracts the source files:
     $ devtool modify recipe
                                
                                Once devtoollocates the recipe,
                                it uses the
                                SRC_URI
                                variable to locate the source code and
                                any local patch files from other developers are
                                located.
                                
srctree when using the
                                    devtool modify command.
                                
                                With this scenario, however, since no
                                srctree argument exists, the
                                devtool modify command by default
                                extracts the source files to a Git structure.
                                Furthermore, the location for the extracted source is the
                                default area within the workspace.
                                The result is that the command sets up both the source
                                code and an append file within the workspace with the
                                recipe remaining in its original location.
                                
Middle: The middle scenario represents a situation where the source code also does not exist locally. In this case, the code is again upstream and needs to be extracted to some local area as a Git repository. The recipe, in this scenario, is again in its own layer outside the workspace.
The following command tells
                                devtool what recipe with
                                which to work and, in this case, identifies a local
                                area for the extracted source files that is outside
                                of the default workspace:
                                
     $ devtool modify recipe srctree
                                
                                As with all extractions, the command uses
                                the recipe's SRC_URI to locate the
                                source files.
                                Once the files are located, the command by default
                                extracts them.
                                Providing the srctree
                                argument instructs devtool where
                                place the extracted source.
Within workspace, devtool
                                creates an append file for the recipe.
                                The recipe remains in its original location but
                                the source files are extracted to the location you
                                provided with srctree.
                                
Right:
                                The right scenario represents a situation
                                where the source tree
                                (srctree) exists as a
                                previously extracted Git structure outside of
                                the devtool workspace.
                                In this example, the recipe also exists
                                elsewhere in its own layer.
                                
The following command tells
                                devtool the recipe
                                with which to work, uses the "-n" option to indicate
                                source does not need to be extracted, and uses
                                srctree to point to the
                                previously extracted source files:
                                
     $ devtool modify -n recipe srctree
                                
Once the command finishes, it creates only an append file for the recipe in the workspace. The recipe and the source code remain in their original locations.
Edit the Source:
                        Once you have used the devtool modify
                        command, you are free to make changes to the source
                        files.
                        You can use any editor you like to make and save
                        your source code modifications.
                        
Build the Recipe:
                        Once you have updated the source files, you can build
                        the recipe.
                        You can either use devtool build or
                        bitbake.
                        Either method produces build output that is stored
                        in
                        TMPDIR.
                        
Deploy the Build Output:
                        When you use the devtool build
                        command or bitbake to build out your
                        recipe, you probably want to see if the resulting build
                        output works as expected on target hardware.
                        
                        You can deploy your build output to that target hardware by
                        using the devtool deploy-target command:
                        
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                        
                        The target is a live target machine
                        running as an SSH server.
You can, of course, also deploy the image you build
                        using the devtool build-image command
                        to actual hardware.
                        However, devtool does not provide a
                        specific command that allows you to do this.
                        
Optionally Create Patch Files for Your Changes:
                        After you have debugged your changes, you can
                        use devtool update-recipe to
                        generate patch files for all the commits you have
                        made.
                        
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                        
                        By default, the
                        devtool update-recipe command
                        creates the patch files in a folder named the same
                        as the recipe beneath the folder in which the recipe
                        resides, and updates the recipe's
                        SRC_URI
                        statement to point to the generated patch files.
                        
LAYERDIR"
                            option to cause the command to create append files
                            in a specific layer rather than the default
                            recipe layer.
                        
Restore the Workspace:
                        The devtool reset restores the
                        state so that standard layers and upstream sources are
                        used to build the recipe rather than what is in the
                        workspace.
                        
     $ devtool reset recipe
                        
devtool upgrade to Create a Version of the Recipe that Supports a Newer Version of the Software¶
                The devtool upgrade command updates
                an existing recipe so that you can build it for an updated
                set of source files.
                The command is flexible enough to allow you to specify
                source code revision and versioning schemes, extract code into
                or out of the devtool workspace, and
                work with any source file forms that the fetchers support.
            
                Depending on your particular scenario, the arguments and options
                you use with devtool upgrade form different
                combinations.
                The following diagram shows a common development flow
                you would use with the devtool modify
                command:
            
                 
            
Initiate the Upgrade:
                        The top part of the flow shows a typical scenario by which
                        you could use devtool upgrade.
                        The following conditions exist:
                        
The recipe exists in some layer external
                                to the devtool workspace.
                                
The source files for the new release
                                exist adjacent to the same location pointed to by
                                SRC_URI
                                in the recipe (e.g. a tarball with the new version
                                number in the name, or as a different revision in
                                the upstream Git repository).
                                
A common situation is where third-party software has undergone a revision so that it has been upgraded. The recipe you have access to is likely in your own layer. Thus, you need to upgrade the recipe to use the newer version of the software:
     $ devtool upgrade -V version recipe
                        
                        By default, the devtool upgrade command
                        extracts source code into the sources
                        directory in the workspace.
                        If you want the code extracted to any other location, you
                        need to provide the srctree
                        positional argument with the command as follows:
                        
     $ devtool upgrade -V version recipe srctree
                        
                        Also, in this example, the "-V" option is used to specify
                        the new version.
                        If the source files pointed to by the
                        SRC_URI statement in the recipe are
                        in a Git repository, you must provide the "-S" option and
                        specify a revision for the software.
Once devtool locates the recipe,
                        it uses the SRC_URI variable to locate
                        the source code and any local patch files from other
                        developers are located.
                        The result is that the command sets up the source
                        code, the new version of the recipe, and an append file
                        all within the workspace.
                        
Resolve any Conflicts created by the Upgrade:
                        At this point, there could be some conflicts due to the
                        software being upgraded to a new version.
                        This would occur if your recipe specifies some patch files in
                        SRC_URI that conflict with changes
                        made in the new version of the software.
                        If this is the case, you need to resolve the conflicts
                        by editing the source and following the normal
                        git rebase conflict resolution
                        process.
Before moving onto the next step, be sure to resolve any such conflicts created through use of a newer or different version of the software.
Build the Recipe:
                        Once you have your recipe in order, you can build it.
                        You can either use devtool build or
                        bitbake.
                        Either method produces build output that is stored
                        in
                        TMPDIR.
                        
Deploy the Build Output:
                        When you use the devtool build
                        command or bitbake to build out your
                        recipe, you probably want to see if the resulting build
                        output works as expected on target hardware.
                        
                        You can deploy your build output to that target hardware by
                        using the devtool deploy-target command:
                        
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                        
                        The target is a live target machine
                        running as an SSH server.
You can, of course, also deploy the image you build
                        using the devtool build-image command
                        to actual hardware.
                        However, devtool does not provide a
                        specific command that allows you to do this.
                        
Optionally Create Patch Files for Your Changes:
                        After you have debugged your changes, you can
                        use devtool update-recipe to
                        generate patch files for all the commits you have
                        made.
                        
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                        
                        By default, the
                        devtool update-recipe command
                        creates the patch files in a folder named the same
                        as the recipe beneath the folder in which the recipe
                        resides, and updates the recipe's
                        SRC_URI
                        statement to point to the generated patch files.
                        
Move the Recipe to its Permanent Layer:
                        Before cleaning up the workspace, you need to move the
                        final recipe to its permanent layer.
                        You can either overwrite the original recipe or you can
                        overlay the upgraded recipe into a separate layer.
                        You must do this before using the
                        devtool reset command if you want to
                        retain the upgraded recipe.
                        
Restore the Workspace:
                        The devtool reset restores the
                        state so that standard layers and upstream sources are
                        used to build the recipe rather than what is in the
                        workspace.
                        
     $ devtool reset recipe
                        
devtool Quick Reference¶
            devtool has more functionality than simply
            adding a new recipe and the supporting Metadata to a temporary
            workspace layer.
            This section provides a short reference on
            devtool and its commands.
        
                The easiest way to get help with the
                devtool command is using the
                --help option:
                
     usage: devtool [--basepath BASEPATH] [--bbpath BBPATH] [-d] [-q]
                    [--color COLOR] [-h]
                    <subcommand> ...
     OpenEmbedded development tool
     optional arguments:
       --basepath BASEPATH  Base directory of SDK / build directory
       --bbpath BBPATH      Explicitly specify the BBPATH, rather than getting it
                            from the metadata
       -d, --debug          Enable debug output
       -q, --quiet          Print only errors
       --color COLOR        Colorize output (where COLOR is auto, always, never)
       -h, --help           show this help message and exit
     subcommands:
       Beginning work on a recipe:
         add                  Add a new recipe
         modify               Modify the source for an existing recipe
         upgrade              Upgrade an existing recipe
       Getting information:
         status               Show workspace status
         search               Search available recipes
       Working on a recipe in the workspace:
         build                Build a recipe
         edit-recipe          Edit a recipe file in your workspace
         configure-help       Get help on configure script options
         update-recipe        Apply changes from external source tree to recipe
         reset                Remove a recipe from your workspace
       Testing changes on target:
         deploy-target        Deploy recipe output files to live target machine
         undeploy-target      Undeploy recipe output files in live target machine
         build-image          Build image including workspace recipe packages
       Advanced:
         create-workspace     Set up workspace in an alternative location
         extract              Extract the source for an existing recipe
         sync                 Synchronize the source tree for an existing recipe
     Use devtool <subcommand> --help to get help on a specific command
                
                As directed in the general help output, you can get more
                syntax on a specific command by providing the command
                name and using --help:
                
     $ devtool add --help
     usage: devtool add [-h] [--same-dir | --no-same-dir] [--fetch URI]
                        [--version VERSION] [--no-git] [--binary] [--also-native]
                        [--src-subdir SUBDIR]
                        [recipename] [srctree] [fetchuri]
     Adds a new recipe to the workspace to build a specified source tree. Can
     optionally fetch a remote URI and unpack it to create the source tree.
     positional arguments:
       recipename            Name for new recipe to add (just name - no version,
                             path or extension). If not specified, will attempt to
                             auto-detect it.
       srctree               Path to external source tree. If not specified, a
                             subdirectory of
                             /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources will be
                             used.
       fetchuri              Fetch the specified URI and extract it to create the
                             source tree
     optional arguments:
       -h, --help            show this help message and exit
       --same-dir, -s        Build in same directory as source
       --no-same-dir         Force build in a separate build directory
       --fetch URI, -f URI   Fetch the specified URI and extract it to create the
                             source tree (deprecated - pass as positional argument
                             instead)
       --version VERSION, -V VERSION
                             Version to use within recipe (PV)
       --no-git, -g          If fetching source, do not set up source tree as a git
                             repository
       --binary, -b          Treat the source tree as something that should be
                             installed verbatim (no compilation, same directory
                             structure). Useful with binary packages e.g. RPMs.
       --also-native         Also add native variant (i.e. support building recipe
                             for the build host as well as the target machine)
       --src-subdir SUBDIR   Specify subdirectory within source tree to use
                
                devtool uses a "Workspace" layer
                in which to accomplish builds.
                This layer is not specific to any single
                devtool command but is rather a common
                working area used across the tool.
            
The following figure shows the workspace structure:
|  | 
     attic - A directory created if devtool believes it preserve
             anything when you run "devtool reset".  For example, if you
             run "devtool add", make changes to the recipe, and then
             run "devtool reset", devtool takes notice that the file has
             been changed and moves it into the attic should you still
             want the recipe.
     README - Provides information on what is in workspace layer and how to
              manage it.
     .devtool_md5 - A checksum file used by devtool.
     appends - A directory that contains *.bbappend files, which point to
               external source.
     conf - A configuration directory that contains the layer.conf file.
     recipes - A directory containing recipes.  This directory contains a
               folder for each directory added whose name matches that of the
               added recipe.  devtool places the recipe.bb file
               within that sub-directory.
     sources - A directory containing a working copy of the source files used
               when building the recipe.  This is the default directory used
               as the location of the source tree when you do not provide a
               source tree path.  This directory contains a folder for each
               set of source files matched to a corresponding recipe.
                
                Use the devtool add command to add a new recipe
                to the workspace layer.
                The recipe you add should not exist -
                devtool creates it for you.
                The source files the recipe uses should exist in an external
                area.
            
                The following example creates and adds a new recipe named
                jackson to a workspace layer the tool creates.
                The source code built by the recipes resides in
                /home/scottrif/sources/jackson:
                
     $ devtool add jackson /home/scottrif/sources/jackson
                
If you add a recipe and the workspace layer does not exist, the command creates the layer and populates it as described in "The Workspace Layer Structure" section.
                Running devtool add when the
                workspace layer exists causes the tool to add the recipe,
                append files, and source files into the existing workspace layer.
                The .bbappend file is created to point
                to the external source tree.
            
                Use the devtool extract command to
                extract the source for an existing recipe.
                When you use this command, you must supply the root name
                of the recipe (i.e. no version, paths, or extensions), and
                you must supply the directory to which you want the source
                extracted.
            
Additional command options let you control the name of a development branch into which you can checkout the source and whether or not to keep a temporary directory, which is useful for debugging.
                Use the devtool sync command to
                synchronize a previously extracted source tree for an
                existing recipe.
                When you use this command, you must supply the root name
                of the recipe (i.e. no version, paths, or extensions), and
                you must supply the directory to which you want the source
                extracted.
            
Additional command options let you control the name of a development branch into which you can checkout the source and whether or not to keep a temporary directory, which is useful for debugging.
                Use the devtool modify command to begin
                modifying the source of an existing recipe.
                This command is very similar to the
                add
                command except that it does not physically create the
                recipe in the workspace layer because the recipe already
                exists in an another layer.
            
                The devtool modify command extracts the
                source for a recipe, sets it up as a Git repository if the
                source had not already been fetched from Git, checks out a
                branch for development, and applies any patches from the recipe
                as commits on top.
                You can use the following command to checkout the source
                files:
                
     $ devtool modify recipe
                
                Using the above command form, devtool uses
                the existing recipe's
                SRC_URI
                statement to locate the upstream source, extracts the source
                into the default sources location in the workspace.
                The default development branch used is "devtool".
            
                Use the devtool edit-recipe command
                to run the default editor, which is identified using the
                EDITOR variable, on the specified recipe.
            
                When you use the devtool edit-recipe
                command, you must supply the root name of the recipe
                (i.e. no version, paths, or extensions).
                Also, the recipe file itself must reside in the workspace
                as a result of the devtool add or
                devtool upgrade commands.
                However, you can override that requirement by using the
                "-a" or "--any-recipe" option.
                Using either of these options allows you to edit any recipe
                regardless of its location.
            
                Use the devtool update-recipe command to
                update your recipe with patches that reflect changes you make
                to the source files.
                For example, if you know you are going to work on some
                code, you could first use the
                devtool modify
                command to extract the code and set up the workspace.
                After which, you could modify, compile, and test the code.
            
                When you are satisfied with the results and you have committed
                your changes to the Git repository, you can then
                run the devtool update-recipe to create the
                patches and update the recipe:
                
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                
                If you run the devtool update-recipe
                without committing your changes, the command ignores the
                changes.
             
                 Often, you might want to apply customizations made to your
                 software in your own layer rather than apply them to the
                 original recipe.
                 If so, you can use the
                 -a or --append
                 option with the devtool update-recipe
                 command.
                 These options allow you to specify the layer into which to
                 write an append file:
                 
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe -a base-layer-directory
                 
                 The *.bbappend file is created at the
                 appropriate path within the specified layer directory, which
                 may or may not be in your bblayers.conf
                 file.
                 If an append file already exists, the command updates it
                 appropriately.
            
                Use the devtool upgrade command
                to upgrade an existing recipe to a new upstream version.
                The command puts the upgraded recipe file into the
                workspace along with any associated files, and extracts
                the source tree to a specified location should patches
                need rebased or added to as a result of the upgrade.
            
                When you use the devtool upgrade command,
                you must supply the root name of the recipe (i.e. no version,
                paths, or extensions), and you must supply the directory
                to which you want the source extracted.
                Additional command options let you control things such as
                the version number to which you want to upgrade (i.e. the
                PV),
                the source revision to which you want to upgrade (i.e. the
                SRCREV,
                whether or not to apply patches, and so forth.
            
                Use the devtool reset command to remove a
                recipe and its configuration (e.g. the corresponding
                .bbappend file) from the workspace layer.
                Realize that this command deletes the recipe and the
                append file.
                The command does not physically move them for you.
                Consequently, you must be sure to physically relocate your
                updated recipe and the append file outside of the workspace
                layer before running the devtool reset
                command.
            
                If the devtool reset command detects that
                the recipe or the append files have been modified, the
                command preserves the modified files in a separate "attic"
                subdirectory under the workspace layer.
            
                Here is an example that resets the workspace directory that
                contains the mtr recipe:
                
     $ devtool reset mtr
     NOTE: Cleaning sysroot for recipe mtr...
     NOTE: Leaving source tree /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/mtr as-is; if you no
        longer need it then please delete it manually
     $
                
                Use the devtool build command to cause the
                OpenEmbedded build system to build your recipe.
                The devtool build command is equivalent to
                bitbake -c populate_sysroot.
            
                When you use the devtool build command,
                you must supply the root name of the recipe (i.e. no version,
                paths, or extensions).
                You can use either the "-s" or the "--disable-parallel-make"
                option to disable parallel makes during the build.
                Here is an example:
                
     $ devtool build recipe
                
                Use the devtool build-image command
                to build an image, extending it to include packages from
                recipes in the workspace.
                Using this command is useful when you want an image that
                ready for immediate deployment onto a device for testing.
                For proper integration into a final image, you need to
                edit your custom image recipe appropriately.
            
                When you use the devtool build-image
                command, you must supply the name of the image.
                This command has no command line options:
                
     $ devtool build-image image
                
                Use the devtool deploy-target command to
                deploy the recipe's build output to the live target machine:
                
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                
                The target is the address of the
                target machine, which must be running an SSH server (i.e.
                user@hostname[:destdir]).
            
                This command deploys all files installed during the
                do_install
                task.
                Furthermore, you do not need to have package management enabled
                within the target machine.
                If you do, the package manager is bypassed.
                
                        The deploy-target
                        functionality is for development only.
                        You should never use it to update an image that will be
                        used in production.
                    
                Use the devtool undeploy-target command to
                remove deployed build output from the target machine.
                For the devtool undeploy-target command to
                work, you must have previously used the
                devtool deploy-target
                command.
                
     $ devtool undeploy-target recipe target
                
                The target is the address of the
                target machine, which must be running an SSH server (i.e.
                user@hostname).
            
                Use the devtool create-workspace command to
                create a new workspace layer in your
                Build Directory.
                When you create a new workspace layer, it is populated with the
                README file and the
                conf directory only.
            
The following example creates a new workspace layer in your current working and by default names the workspace layer "workspace":
     $ devtool create-workspace
                
You can create a workspace layer anywhere by supplying a pathname with the command. The following command creates a new workspace layer named "new-workspace":
     $ devtool create-workspace /home/scottrif/new-workspace
                
                Use the devtool status command to
                list the recipes currently in your workspace.
                Information includes the paths to their respective
                external source trees.
            
                The devtool status command has no
                command-line options:
                
     devtool status
                
                Following is sample output after using
                devtool add
                to create and add the mtr_0.86.bb recipe
                to the workspace directory:
                
     $ devtool status
     mtr: /home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/sources/mtr (/home/scottrif/poky/build/workspace/recipes/mtr/mtr_0.86.bb)
     $
                
                Use the devtool search command to
                search for available target recipes.
                The command matches the recipe name, package name,
                description, and installed files.
                The command displays the recipe name as a result of a
                match.
            
                When you use the devtool search command,
                you must supply a keyword.
                The command uses the keyword when
                searching for a match.
            
Quilt is a powerful tool that allows you to capture source code changes without having a clean source tree. This section outlines the typical workflow you can use to modify source code, test changes, and then preserve the changes in the form of a patch all using Quilt.
rm_work enabled,
                the workflow described in the
                "Using devtool in Your Workflow"
                section is a safer development flow than than the flow that
                uses Quilt.
            
Follow these general steps:
Find the Source Code: Temporary source code used by the OpenEmbedded build system is kept in the Build Directory. See the "Finding Temporary Source Code" section to learn how to locate the directory that has the temporary source code for a particular package.
Change Your Working Directory:
                    You need to be in the directory that has the temporary source code.
                    That directory is defined by the
                    S
                    variable.
Create a New Patch:
                    Before modifying source code, you need to create a new patch.
                    To create a new patch file, use quilt new as below:
                    
     $ quilt new my_changes.patch
                    Notify Quilt and Add Files: After creating the patch, you need to notify Quilt about the files you plan to edit. You notify Quilt by adding the files to the patch you just created:
     $ quilt add file1.c file2.c file3.c
                    
Edit the Files: Make your changes in the source code to the files you added to the patch.
Test Your Changes:
                    Once you have modified the source code, the easiest way to
                    your changes is by calling the
                    do_compile task as shown in the
                    following example:
                    
     $ bitbake -c compile -f package
                    
                    The -f or --force
                    option forces the specified task to execute.
                    If you find problems with your code, you can just keep editing and
                    re-testing iteratively until things work as expected.
                    
do_clean
                    or
                    do_cleanall
                    tasks using BitBake (i.e.
                    bitbake -c clean package
                    and
                    bitbake -c cleanall package).
                    Modifications will also disappear if you use the rm_work
                    feature as described in the
                    "Building Images"
                    section of the Yocto Project Quick Start.
                    Generate the Patch: Once your changes work as expected, you need to use Quilt to generate the final patch that contains all your modifications.
     $ quilt refresh
                    
                    At this point, the my_changes.patch file has all your edits made
                    to the file1.c, file2.c, and
                    file3.c files.
You can find the resulting patch file in the patches/
                    subdirectory of the source (S) directory.
Copy the Patch File:
                    For simplicity, copy the patch file into a directory named files,
                    which you can create in the same directory that holds the recipe
                    (.bb) file or the
                    append (.bbappend) file.
                    Placing the patch here guarantees that the OpenEmbedded build system will find
                    the patch.
                    Next, add the patch into the
                    SRC_URI
                    of the recipe.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     SRC_URI += "file://my_changes.patch"
                    
You might find it helpful during development to modify the temporary source code used by recipes to build packages. For example, suppose you are developing a patch and you need to experiment a bit to figure out your solution. After you have initially built the package, you can iteratively tweak the source code, which is located in the Build Directory, and then you can force a re-compile and quickly test your altered code. Once you settle on a solution, you can then preserve your changes in the form of patches. If you are using Quilt for development, see the "Using Quilt in Your Workflow" section for more information.
            During a build, the unpacked temporary source code used by recipes
            to build packages is available in the Build Directory as
            defined by the
            S variable.
            Below is the default value for the S variable as defined in the
            meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration file in the
            Source Directory:
            
     S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}"
            
            You should be aware that many recipes override the S variable.
            For example, recipes that fetch their source from Git usually set
            S to ${WORKDIR}/git.
            
BP
                represents the base recipe name, which consists of the name and version:
                
     BP = "${BPN}-${PV}"
                
            The path to the work directory for the recipe
            (WORKDIR)
            is defined as follows:
            
     ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
            The actual directory depends on several things:
            As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder
            named poky, a default Build Directory at
            poky/build, and a
            qemux86-poky-linux machine target
            system.
            Furthermore, suppose your recipe is named
            foo_1.3.0.bb.
            In this case, the work directory the build system uses to
            build the package would be as follows:
            
     poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
            
Now that you know where to locate the directory that has the temporary source code, you can use a Quilt as described in section "Using Quilt in Your Workflow" to make your edits, test the changes, and preserve the changes in the form of patches.
Toaster is a web interface to the Yocto Project's OpenEmbedded build system. You can initiate builds using Toaster as well as examine the results and statistics of builds. See the Toaster User Manual for information on how to set up and use Toaster to build images.
        When debugging certain commands or even when just editing packages,
        devshell can be a useful tool.
        When you invoke devshell, all tasks up to and
        including
        do_patch
        are run for the specified target.
        Then, a new terminal is opened and you are placed in
        ${S},
        the source directory.
        In the new terminal, all the OpenEmbedded build-related environment variables are
        still defined so you can use commands such as configure and
        make.
        The commands execute just as if the OpenEmbedded build system were executing them.
        Consequently, working this way can be helpful when debugging a build or preparing
        software to be used with the OpenEmbedded build system.
    
        Following is an example that uses devshell on a target named
        matchbox-desktop:
        
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
        
        This command spawns a terminal with a shell prompt within the OpenEmbedded build environment.
        The OE_TERMINAL
        variable controls what type of shell is opened.
    
For spawned terminals, the following occurs:
The PATH variable includes the
                cross-toolchain.
The pkgconfig variables find the correct
                .pc files.
The configure command finds the
                Yocto Project site files as well as any other necessary files.
        Within this environment, you can run configure or compile
        commands as if they were being run by
        the OpenEmbedded build system itself.
        As noted earlier, the working directory also automatically changes to the
        Source Directory (S).
    
        To manually run a specific task using devshell,
        run the corresponding run.* script in
        the
        ${WORKDIR}/temp
        directory (e.g.,
        run.do_configure.pid).
        If a task's script does not exist, which would be the case if the task was
        skipped by way of the sstate cache, you can create the task by first running
        it outside of the devshell:
        
     $ bitbake -c task
        
Execution of a task's run.*
                    script and BitBake's execution of a task are identical.
                    In other words, running the script re-runs the task
                    just as it would be run using the
                    bitbake -c command.
                    
Any run.* file that does not
                    have a .pid extension is a
                    symbolic link (symlink) to the most recent version of that
                    file.
                    
        Remember, that the devshell is a mechanism that allows
        you to get into the BitBake task execution environment.
        And as such, all commands must be called just as BitBake would call them.
        That means you need to provide the appropriate options for
        cross-compilation and so forth as applicable.
    
        When you are finished using devshell, exit the shell
        or close the terminal window.
    
                It is worth remembering that when using devshell
                you need to use the full compiler name such as arm-poky-linux-gnueabi-gcc
                instead of just using gcc.
                The same applies to other applications such as binutils,
                libtool and so forth.
                BitBake sets up environment variables such as CC
                to assist applications, such as make to find the correct tools.
                
                It is also worth noting that devshell still works over
                X11 forwarding and similar situations.
                
This chapter describes fundamental procedures such as creating layers, adding new software packages, extending or customizing images, porting work to new hardware (adding a new machine), and so forth. You will find that the procedures documented here occur often in the development cycle using the Yocto Project.
The OpenEmbedded build system supports organizing Metadata into multiple layers. Layers allow you to isolate different types of customizations from each other. You might find it tempting to keep everything in one layer when working on a single project. However, the more modular your Metadata, the easier it is to cope with future changes.
            To illustrate how layers are used to keep things modular, consider
            machine customizations.
            These types of customizations typically reside in a special layer,
            rather than a general layer, called a Board Support Package (BSP)
            Layer.
            Furthermore, the machine customizations should be isolated from
            recipes and Metadata that support a new GUI environment,
            for example.
            This situation gives you a couple of layers: one for the machine
            configurations, and one for the GUI environment.
            It is important to understand, however, that the BSP layer can
            still make machine-specific additions to recipes within the GUI
            environment layer without polluting the GUI layer itself
            with those machine-specific changes.
            You can accomplish this through a recipe that is a BitBake append
            (.bbappend) file, which is described later
            in this section.
        
                The Source Directory
                contains both general layers and BSP
                layers right out of the box.
                You can easily identify layers that ship with a
                Yocto Project release in the Source Directory by their
                folder names.
                Folders that represent layers typically have names that begin with
                the string meta-.
                
meta-, but it is a commonly
                    accepted standard in the Yocto Project community.
                
                For example, when you set up the Source Directory structure,
                you will see several layers:
                meta,
                meta-skeleton,
                meta-selftest,
                meta-poky, and
                meta-yocto-bsp.
                Each of these folders represents a distinct layer.
            
                As another example, if you set up a local copy of the
                meta-intel Git repository
                and then explore the folder of that general layer,
                you will discover many Intel-specific BSP layers inside.
                For more information on BSP layers, see the
                "BSP Layers"
                section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP)
                Developer's Guide.
            
It is very easy to create your own layers to use with the OpenEmbedded build system. The Yocto Project ships with scripts that speed up creating general layers and BSP layers. This section describes the steps you perform by hand to create a layer so that you can better understand them. For information about the layer-creation scripts, see the "Creating a New BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide and the "Creating a General Layer Using the yocto-layer Script" section further down in this manual.
Follow these general steps to create your layer:
Check Existing Layers:
                        Before creating a new layer, you should be sure someone
                        has not already created a layer containing the Metadata
                        you need.
                        You can see the
                        OpenEmbedded Metadata Index
                        for a list of layers from the OpenEmbedded community
                        that can be used in the Yocto Project.
                        
Create a Directory:
                        Create the directory for your layer.
                        While not strictly required, prepend the name of the
                        folder with the string meta-.
                        For example:
                        
     meta-mylayer
     meta-GUI_xyz
     meta-mymachine
                        
Create a Layer Configuration
                       File:
                       Inside your new layer folder, you need to create a
                       conf/layer.conf file.
                       It is easiest to take an existing layer configuration
                       file and copy that to your layer's
                       conf directory and then modify the
                       file as needed.
The
                       meta-yocto-bsp/conf/layer.conf file
                       demonstrates the required syntax:
                       
     # We have a conf and classes directory, add to BBPATH
     BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
     # We have recipes-* directories, add to BBFILES
     BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
                 ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
     BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "yoctobsp"
     BBFILE_PATTERN_yoctobsp = "^${LAYERDIR}/"
     BBFILE_PRIORITY_yoctobsp = "5"
     LAYERVERSION_yoctobsp = "3"
                        Here is an explanation of the example:
The configuration and
                                classes directory is appended to
                                BBPATH.
                                
BBPATH.
                                    On the other hand, distro layers, such as
                                    meta-poky, can choose
                                    to enforce their own precedence over
                                    BBPATH.
                                    For an example of that syntax, see the
                                    layer.conf file for
                                    the meta-poky layer.
                                The recipes for the layers are
                                appended to
                                BBFILES.
                                
The
                                BBFILE_COLLECTIONS
                                variable is then appended with the layer name.
                                
The
                                BBFILE_PATTERN
                                variable is set to a regular expression and is
                                used to match files from
                                BBFILES into a particular
                                layer.
                                In this case,
                                LAYERDIR
                                is used to make BBFILE_PATTERN match within the
                                layer's path.
The
                                BBFILE_PRIORITY
                                variable then assigns a priority to the layer.
                                Applying priorities is useful in situations
                                where the same recipe might appear in multiple
                                layers and allows you to choose the layer
                                that takes precedence.
The
                                LAYERVERSION
                                variable optionally specifies the version of a
                                layer as a single number.
Note the use of the
                        LAYERDIR
                        variable, which expands to the directory of the current
                        layer.
Through the use of the BBPATH
                        variable, BitBake locates class files
                        (.bbclass),
                        configuration files, and files that are included
                        with include and
                        require statements.
                        For these cases, BitBake uses the first file that
                        matches the name found in BBPATH.
                        This is similar to the way the PATH
                        variable is used for binaries.
                        It is recommended, therefore, that you use unique
                        class and configuration
                        filenames in your custom layer.
Add Content: Depending
                        on the type of layer, add the content.
                        If the layer adds support for a machine, add the machine
                        configuration in a conf/machine/
                        file within the layer.
                        If the layer adds distro policy, add the distro
                        configuration in a conf/distro/
                        file within the layer.
                        If the layer introduces new recipes, put the recipes
                        you need in recipes-*
                        subdirectories within the layer.
                        
To create layers that are easier to maintain and that will not impact builds for other machines, you should consider the information in the following sections.
                    Avoid "overlaying" entire recipes from other layers in your
                    configuration.
                    In other words, do not copy an entire recipe into your
                    layer and then modify it.
                    Rather, use an append file (.bbappend)
                    to override
                    only those parts of the original recipe you need to modify.
                
                    Avoid duplicating include files.
                    Use append files (.bbappend)
                    for each recipe
                    that uses an include file.
                    Or, if you are introducing a new recipe that requires
                    the included file, use the path relative to the original
                    layer directory to refer to the file.
                    For example, use
                    require recipes-core/package/file.inc
                    instead of require file.inc.
                    If you're finding you have to overlay the include file,
                    it could indicate a deficiency in the include file in
                    the layer to which it originally belongs.
                    If this is the case, you should try to address that
                    deficiency instead of overlaying the include file.
                    For example, you could address this by getting the
                    maintainer of the include file to add a variable or
                    variables to make it easy to override the parts needing
                    to be overridden.
                
Proper use of overrides within append files and placement of machine-specific files within your layer can ensure that a build is not using the wrong Metadata and negatively impacting a build for a different machine. Following are some examples:
Modifying Variables to Support
                            a Different Machine:
                            Suppose you have a layer named
                            meta-one that adds support
                            for building machine "one".
                            To do so, you use an append file named
                            base-files.bbappend and
                            create a dependency on "foo" by altering the
                            DEPENDS
                            variable:
                            
     DEPENDS = "foo"
                            
                            The dependency is created during any build that
                            includes the layer
                            meta-one.
                            However, you might not want this dependency
                            for all machines.
                            For example, suppose you are building for
                            machine "two" but your
                            bblayers.conf file has the
                            meta-one layer included.
                            During the build, the
                            base-files for machine
                            "two" will also have the dependency on
                            foo.
To make sure your changes apply only when
                            building machine "one", use a machine override
                            with the DEPENDS statement:
                            
     DEPENDS_one = "foo"
                            
                            You should follow the same strategy when using
                            _append and
                            _prepend operations:
                            
     DEPENDS_append_one = " foo"
     DEPENDS_prepend_one = "foo "
                            As an actual example, here's a line from the recipe for gnutls, which adds dependencies on "argp-standalone" when building with the musl C library:
     DEPENDS_append_libc-musl = " argp-standalone"
                            
_append
                                and _prepend operations
                                is recommended as well.
                            Place Machine-Specific Files
                            in Machine-Specific Locations:
                            When you have a base recipe, such as
                            base-files.bb, that
                            contains a
                            SRC_URI
                            statement to a file, you can use an append file
                            to cause the build to use your own version of
                            the file.
                            For example, an append file in your layer at
                            meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files.bbappend
                            could extend
                            FILESPATH
                            using
                            FILESEXTRAPATHS
                            as follows:
                            
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${BPN}:"
                            
                            The build for machine "one" will pick up your
                            machine-specific file as long as you have the
                            file in
                            meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/.
                            However, if you are building for a different
                            machine and the
                            bblayers.conf file includes
                            the meta-one layer and
                            the location of your machine-specific file is
                            the first location where that file is found
                            according to FILESPATH,
                            builds for all machines will also use that
                            machine-specific file.
You can make sure that a machine-specific
                            file is used for a particular machine by putting
                            the file in a subdirectory specific to the
                            machine.
                            For example, rather than placing the file in
                            meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/
                            as shown above, put it in
                            meta-one/recipes-core/base-files/base-files/one/.
                            Not only does this make sure the file is used
                            only when building for machine "one", but the
                            build process locates the file more quickly.
In summary, you need to place all files
                            referenced from SRC_URI
                            in a machine-specific subdirectory within the
                            layer in order to restrict those files to
                            machine-specific builds.
We also recommend the following:
Store custom layers in a Git repository
                            that uses the
                            meta- format.
                            layer_name
Clone the repository alongside other
                            meta directories in the
                            Source Directory.
                            
Following these recommendations keeps your Source Directory and its configuration entirely inside the Yocto Project's core base.
                Before the OpenEmbedded build system can use your new layer,
                you need to enable it.
                To enable your layer, simply add your layer's path to the
                BBLAYERS
                variable in your conf/bblayers.conf file,
                which is found in the
                Build Directory.
                The following example shows how to enable a layer named
                meta-mylayer:
                
     LCONF_VERSION = "6"
     BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
     BBFILES ?= ""
     BBLAYERS ?= " \
       $HOME/poky/meta \
       $HOME/poky/meta-poky \
       $HOME/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
       $HOME/poky/meta-mylayer \
       "
                
                BitBake parses each conf/layer.conf file
                as specified in the BBLAYERS variable
                within the conf/bblayers.conf file.
                During the processing of each
                conf/layer.conf file, BitBake adds the
                recipes, classes and configurations contained within the
                particular layer to the source directory.
            
                Recipes used to append Metadata to other recipes are called
                BitBake append files.
                BitBake append files use the .bbappend file
                type suffix, while the corresponding recipes to which Metadata
                is being appended use the .bb file type
                suffix.
            
                A .bbappend file allows your layer to make
                additions or changes to the content of another layer's recipe
                without having to copy the other recipe into your layer.
                Your .bbappend file resides in your layer,
                while the main .bb recipe file to
                which you are appending Metadata resides in a different layer.
            
                Append files must have the same root names as their corresponding
                recipes.
                For example, the append file
                someapp_2.1.2.bbappend must apply to
                someapp_2.1.2.bb.
                This means the original recipe and append file names are version
                number-specific.
                If the corresponding recipe is renamed to update to a newer
                version, the corresponding .bbappend file must
                be renamed (and possibly updated) as well.
                During the build process, BitBake displays an error on starting
                if it detects a .bbappend file that does
                not have a corresponding recipe with a matching name.
                See the
                BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY
                variable for information on how to handle this error.
            
Being able to append information to an existing recipe not only avoids duplication, but also automatically applies recipe changes in a different layer to your layer. If you were copying recipes, you would have to manually merge changes as they occur.
                As an example, consider the main formfactor recipe and a
                corresponding formfactor append file both from the
                Source Directory.
                Here is the main formfactor recipe, which is named
                formfactor_0.0.bb and located in the
                "meta" layer at
                meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor:
                
     SUMMARY = "Device formfactor information"
     SECTION = "base"
     LICENSE = "MIT"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COREBASE}/LICENSE;md5=4d92cd373abda3937c2bc47fbc49d690 \
                    file://${COREBASE}/meta/COPYING.MIT;md5=3da9cfbcb788c80a0384361b4de20420"
     PR = "r45"
     SRC_URI = "file://config file://machconfig"
     S = "${WORKDIR}"
     PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
     INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS = "1"
     do_install() {
	     # Install file only if it has contents
             install -d ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
             install -m 0644 ${S}/config ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
	     if [ -s "${S}/machconfig" ]; then
	             install -m 0644 ${S}/machconfig ${D}${sysconfdir}/formfactor/
	     fi
     }
                
                In the main recipe, note the
                SRC_URI
                variable, which tells the OpenEmbedded build system where to
                find files during the build.
            
                Following is the append file, which is named
                formfactor_0.0.bbappend and is from the
                Raspberry Pi BSP Layer named
                meta-raspberrypi.
                The file is in recipes-bsp/formfactor:
                
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
                
                By default, the build system uses the
                FILESPATH
                variable to locate files.
                This append file extends the locations by setting the
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                variable.
                Setting this variable in the .bbappend
                file is the most reliable and recommended method for adding
                directories to the search path used by the build system
                to find files.
            
                The statement in this example extends the directories to include
                ${THISDIR}/${PN},
                which resolves to a directory named
                formfactor in the same directory
                in which the append file resides (i.e.
                meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor/formfactor.
                This implies that you must have the supporting directory
                structure set up that will contain any files or patches you
                will be including from the layer.
            
                Using the immediate expansion assignment operator
                := is important because of the reference to
                THISDIR.
                The trailing colon character is important as it ensures that
                items in the list remain colon-separated.
                
                        BitBake automatically defines the
                        THISDIR variable.
                        You should never set this variable yourself.
                        Using "_prepend" as part of the
                        FILESEXTRAPATHS ensures your path
                        will be searched prior to other paths in the final
                        list.
                    
                        Also, not all append files add extra files.
                        Many append files simply exist to add build options
                        (e.g. systemd).
                        For these cases, your append file would not even
                        use the FILESEXTRAPATHS statement.
                    
                Each layer is assigned a priority value.
                Priority values control which layer takes precedence if there
                are recipe files with the same name in multiple layers.
                For these cases, the recipe file from the layer with a higher
                priority number takes precedence.
                Priority values also affect the order in which multiple
                .bbappend files for the same recipe are
                applied.
                You can either specify the priority manually, or allow the
                build system to calculate it based on the layer's dependencies.
            
                To specify the layer's priority manually, use the
                BBFILE_PRIORITY
                variable.
                For example:
                
     BBFILE_PRIORITY_mylayer = "1"
                
It is possible for a recipe with a lower version number
                PV
                in a layer that has a higher priority to take precedence.
Also, the layer priority does not currently affect the
                precedence order of .conf
                or .bbclass files.
                Future versions of BitBake might address this.
                You can use the BitBake layer management tool to provide a view
                into the structure of recipes across a multi-layer project.
                Being able to generate output that reports on configured layers
                with their paths and priorities and on
                .bbappend files and their applicable
                recipes can help to reveal potential problems.
            
Use the following form when running the layer management tool.
     $ bitbake-layers command [arguments]
                The following list describes the available commands:
help:
                        Displays general help or help on a specified command.
                        
show-layers:
                        Shows the current configured layers.
                        
show-recipes:
                        Lists available recipes and the layers that provide them.
                        
show-overlayed:
                        Lists overlayed recipes.
                        A recipe is overlayed when a recipe with the same name
                        exists in another layer that has a higher layer
                        priority.
                        
show-appends:
                        Lists .bbappend files and the
                        recipe files to which they apply.
                        
show-cross-depends:
                        Lists dependency relationships between recipes that
                        cross layer boundaries.
                        
add-layer:
                        Adds a layer to bblayers.conf.
                        
remove-layer:
                        Removes a layer from bblayers.conf
                        
flatten:
                        Flattens the layer configuration into a separate output
                        directory.
                        Flattening your layer configuration builds a "flattened"
                        directory that contains the contents of all layers,
                        with any overlayed recipes removed and any
                        .bbappend files appended to the
                        corresponding recipes.
                        You might have to perform some manual cleanup of the
                        flattened layer as follows:
                        
Non-recipe files (such as patches) are overwritten. The flatten command shows a warning for these files.
Anything beyond the normal layer
                                setup has been added to the
                                layer.conf file.
                                Only the lowest priority layer's
                                layer.conf is used.
                                
Overridden and appended items from
                                .bbappend files need to be
                                cleaned up.
                                The contents of each
                                .bbappend end up in the
                                flattened recipe.
                                However, if there are appended or changed
                                variable values, you need to tidy these up
                                yourself.
                                Consider the following example.
                                Here, the bitbake-layers
                                command adds the line
                                #### bbappended ... so that
                                you know where the following lines originate:
                                
     ...
     DESCRIPTION = "A useful utility"
     ...
     EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something"
     ...
     #### bbappended from meta-anotherlayer ####
     DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
     EXTRA_OECONF += "--enable-somethingelse"
                                Ideally, you would tidy up these utilities as follows:
     ...
     DESCRIPTION = "Customized utility"
     ...
     EXTRA_OECONF = "--enable-something --enable-somethingelse"
     ...
                                
                The yocto-layer script simplifies
                creating a new general layer.
                
The default mode of the script's operation is to prompt you for information needed to generate the layer:
The layer priority.
Whether or not to create a sample recipe.
Whether or not to create a sample append file.
                Use the yocto-layer create sub-command
                to create a new general layer.
                In its simplest form, you can create a layer as follows:
                
     $ yocto-layer create mylayer
                
                The previous example creates a layer named
                meta-mylayer in the current directory.
            
                As the yocto-layer create command runs,
                default values for the prompts appear in brackets.
                Pressing enter without supplying anything for the prompts
                or pressing enter and providing an invalid response causes the
                script to accept the default value.
                Once the script completes, the new layer
                is created in the current working directory.
                The script names the layer by prepending
                meta- to the name you provide.
            
Minimally, the script creates the following within the layer:
The conf
                        directory:
                        This directory contains the layer's configuration file.
                        The root name for the file is the same as the root name
                        your provided for the layer (e.g.
                        layer.conf
The
                        COPYING.MIT file:
                        The copyright and use notice for the software.
                        
The README
                        file:
                        A file describing the contents of your new layer.
                        
                If you choose to generate a sample recipe file, the script
                prompts you for the name for the recipe and then creates it
                in layer/recipes-example/example/.bb file and a
                directory, which contains a sample
                helloworld.c source file, along with
                a sample patch file.
                If you do not provide a recipe name, the script uses
                "example".
            
                If you choose to generate a sample append file, the script
                prompts you for the name for the file and then creates it
                in layer/recipes-example-bbappend/example-bbappend/.bbappend file and a
                directory, which contains a sample patch file.
                If you do not provide a recipe name, the script uses
                "example".
                The script also prompts you for the version of the append file.
                The version should match the recipe to which the append file
                is associated.
            
                The easiest way to see how the yocto-layer
                script works is to experiment with the script.
                You can also read the usage information by entering the
                following:
                
     $ yocto-layer help
                
                Once you create your general layer, you must add it to your
                bblayers.conf file.
                Here is an example where a layer named
                meta-mylayer is added:
                
     BBLAYERS = ?" \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-poky \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-yocto-bsp \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-mylayer \
        "
                Adding the layer to this file enables the build system to locate the layer during the build.
You can customize images to satisfy particular requirements. This section describes several methods and provides guidelines for each.
local.conf¶
                Probably the easiest way to customize an image is to add a
                package by way of the local.conf
                configuration file.
                Because it is limited to local use, this method generally only
                allows you to add packages and is not as flexible as creating
                your own customized image.
                When you add packages using local variables this way, you need
                to realize that these variable changes are in effect for every
                build and consequently affect all images, which might not
                be what you require.
            
                To add a package to your image using the local configuration
                file, use the
                IMAGE_INSTALL
                variable with the _append operator:
                
     IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " strace"
                
                Use of the syntax is important - specifically, the space between
                the quote and the package name, which is
                strace in this example.
                This space is required since the _append
                operator does not add the space.
            
                Furthermore, you must use _append instead
                of the += operator if you want to avoid
                ordering issues.
                The reason for this is because doing so unconditionally appends
                to the variable and avoids ordering problems due to the
                variable being set in image recipes and
                .bbclass files with operators like
                ?=.
                Using _append ensures the operation takes
                affect.
            
                As shown in its simplest use,
                IMAGE_INSTALL_append affects all images.
                It is possible to extend the syntax so that the variable
                applies to a specific image only.
                Here is an example:
                
     IMAGE_INSTALL_append_pn-core-image-minimal = " strace"
                
                This example adds strace to the
                core-image-minimal image only.
            
                You can add packages using a similar approach through the
                CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL
                variable.
                If you use this variable, only
                core-image-* images are affected.
            
IMAGE_FEATURES and
                EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES¶
                Another method for customizing your image is to enable or
                disable high-level image features by using the
                IMAGE_FEATURES
                and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES
                variables.
                Although the functions for both variables are nearly equivalent,
                best practices dictate using IMAGE_FEATURES
                from within a recipe and using
                EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES from within
                your local.conf file, which is found in the
                Build Directory.
            
                To understand how these features work, the best reference is
                meta/classes/core-image.bbclass.
                This class lists out the available
                IMAGE_FEATURES
                of which most map to package groups while some, such as
                debug-tweaks and
                read-only-rootfs, resolve as general
                configuration settings.
            
                In summary, the file looks at the contents of the
                IMAGE_FEATURES variable and then maps
                or configures the feature accordingly.
                Based on this information, the build system automatically
                adds the appropriate packages or configurations to the
                IMAGE_INSTALL
                variable.
                Effectively, you are enabling extra features by extending the
                class or creating a custom class for use with specialized image
                .bb files.
            
                Use the EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES variable
                from within your local configuration file.
                Using a separate area from which to enable features with
                this variable helps you avoid overwriting the features in the
                image recipe that are enabled with
                IMAGE_FEATURES.
                The value of EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES is added
                to IMAGE_FEATURES within
                meta/conf/bitbake.conf.
            
                To illustrate how you can use these variables to modify your
                image, consider an example that selects the SSH server.
                The Yocto Project ships with two SSH servers you can use
                with your images: Dropbear and OpenSSH.
                Dropbear is a minimal SSH server appropriate for
                resource-constrained environments, while OpenSSH is a
                well-known standard SSH server implementation.
                By default, the core-image-sato image
                is configured to use Dropbear.
                The core-image-full-cmdline and
                core-image-lsb images both
                include OpenSSH.
                The core-image-minimal image does not
                contain an SSH server.
            
                You can customize your image and change these defaults.
                Edit the IMAGE_FEATURES variable
                in your recipe or use the
                EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES in your
                local.conf file so that it configures the
                image you are working with to include
                ssh-server-dropbear or
                ssh-server-openssh.
            
You can also customize an image by creating a custom recipe that defines additional software as part of the image. The following example shows the form for the two lines you need:
     IMAGE_INSTALL = "packagegroup-core-x11-base package1 package2"
     inherit core-image
                
                Defining the software using a custom recipe gives you total
                control over the contents of the image.
                It is important to use the correct names of packages in the
                IMAGE_INSTALL
                variable.
                You must use the OpenEmbedded notation and not the Debian notation for the names
                (e.g. glibc-dev instead of libc6-dev).
            
                The other method for creating a custom image is to base it on an existing image.
                For example, if you want to create an image based on core-image-sato
                but add the additional package strace to the image,
                copy the meta/recipes-sato/images/core-image-sato.bb to a
                new .bb and add the following line to the end of the copy:
                
     IMAGE_INSTALL += "strace"
                
                For complex custom images, the best approach for customizing
                an image is to create a custom package group recipe that is
                used to build the image or images.
                A good example of a package group recipe is
                meta/recipes-core/packagegroups/packagegroup-base.bb.
            
                If you examine that recipe, you see that the
                PACKAGES
                variable lists the package group packages to produce.
                The inherit packagegroup statement
                sets appropriate default values and automatically adds
                -dev, -dbg, and
                -ptest complementary packages for each
                package specified in the PACKAGES
                statement.
                
inherit packages should be
                    located near the top of the recipe, certainly before
                    the PACKAGES statement.
                
                For each package you specify in PACKAGES,
                you can use
                RDEPENDS
                and
                RRECOMMENDS
                entries to provide a list of packages the parent task package
                should contain.
                You can see examples of these further down in the
                packagegroup-base.bb recipe.
            
Here is a short, fabricated example showing the same basic pieces:
     DESCRIPTION = "My Custom Package Groups"
     inherit packagegroup
     PACKAGES = "\
         packagegroup-custom-apps \
         packagegroup-custom-tools \
         "
     RDEPENDS_packagegroup-custom-apps = "\
         dropbear \
         portmap \
         psplash"
     RDEPENDS_packagegroup-custom-tools = "\
         oprofile \
         oprofileui-server \
         lttng-tools"
     RRECOMMENDS_packagegroup-custom-tools = "\
         kernel-module-oprofile"
                
                In the previous example, two package group packages are created with their dependencies and their
                recommended package dependencies listed: packagegroup-custom-apps, and
                packagegroup-custom-tools.
                To build an image using these package group packages, you need to add
                packagegroup-custom-apps and/or
                packagegroup-custom-tools to
                IMAGE_INSTALL.
                For other forms of image dependencies see the other areas of this section.
            
                By default, the configured hostname (i.e.
                /etc/hostname) in an image is the
                same as the machine name.
                For example, if
                MACHINE
                equals "qemux86", the configured hostname written to
                /etc/hostname is "qemux86".
            
                You can customize this name by altering the value of the
                "hostname" variable in the
                base-files recipe using either
                an append file or a configuration file.
                Use the following in an append file:
                
     hostname="myhostname"
                Use the following in a configuration file:
     hostname_pn-base-files = "myhostname"
                
Changing the default value of the variable "hostname" can be useful in certain situations. For example, suppose you need to do extensive testing on an image and you would like to easily identify the image under test from existing images with typical default hostnames. In this situation, you could change the default hostname to "testme", which results in all the images using the name "testme". Once testing is complete and you do not need to rebuild the image for test any longer, you can easily reset the default hostname.
Another point of interest is that if you unset the variable, the image will have no default hostname in the filesystem. Here is an example that unsets the variable in a configuration file:
     hostname_pn-base-files = ""
                Having no default hostname in the filesystem is suitable for environments that use dynamic hostnames such as virtual machines.
            Recipes (.bb files) are fundamental components
            in the Yocto Project environment.
            Each software component built by the OpenEmbedded build system
            requires a recipe to define the component.
            This section describes how to create, write, and test a new
            recipe.
            
The following figure shows the basic process for creating a new recipe. The remainder of the section provides details for the steps.
|  | 
You can always write a recipe from scratch. However, two choices exist that can help you quickly get a start on a new recipe:
recipetool:
                        A tool provided by the Yocto Project that automates
                        creation of a base recipe based on the source
                        files.
                        
Existing Recipes: Location and modification of an existing recipe that is similar in function to the recipe you need.
recipetool¶
                    recipetool automates creation of
                    a base recipe given a set of source code files.
                    As long as you can extract or point to the source files,
                    the tool will construct a recipe and automatically
                    configure all pre-build information into the recipe.
                    For example, suppose you have an application that builds
                    using Autotools.
                    Creating the base recipe using
                    recipetool results in a recipe
                    that has the pre-build dependencies, license requirements,
                    and checksums configured.
                
                    To run the tool, you just need to be in your
                    Build Directory
                    and have sourced the build environment setup script
                    (i.e.
                    oe-init-build-env
                    or
                    oe-init-build-env-memres).
                    Here is the basic recipetool syntax:
                    
recipetool -h or
                        recipetool create -h produces the
                        Python-generated help, which presented differently
                        than what follows here.
                    
     recipetool -h
     recipetool create [-h]
     recipetool [-d] [-q] [--color auto | always | never ] create -o OUTFILE [-m] [-x EXTERNALSRC] source
          -d       Enables debug output.
          -q       Outputs only errors (quiet mode).
          --color  Colorizes the output automatically, always, or never.
          -h       Displays Python generated syntax for recipetool.
          create   Causes recipetool to create a base recipe.  The create
                   command is further defined with these options:
                   -o OUTFILE      Specifies the full path and filename for the generated
                                   recipe.
                   -m              Causes the recipe to be machine-specific rather than
                                   architecture-specific (default).
                   -x EXTERNALSRC  Fetches and extracts source files from source
                                   and places them in EXTERNALSRC.
                                   source must be a URL.
                   -h              Displays Python-generated syntax for create.
                   source          Specifies the source code on which to base the
                                   recipe.
                    
                    Running recipetool create -o OUTFILE
                    creates the base recipe and locates it properly in the
                    layer that contains your source files.
                    Following are some syntax examples:
                
                    Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source.
                    Once generated, the recipe resides in the existing source
                    code layer:
                    
     recipetool create -o OUTFILE source
                    
                    Use this syntax to generate a recipe using code that you
                    extract from source.
                    The extracted code is placed in its own layer defined
                    by EXTERNALSRC.
                    
     recipetool create -o OUTFILE -x EXTERNALSRC source
                    
                    Use this syntax to generate a recipe based on source.
                    The options direct recipetool to
                    run in "quiet mode" and to generate debugging information.
                    Once generated, the recipe resides in the existing source
                    code layer:
                    
     recipetool create -o OUTFILE source
                    
Before writing a recipe from scratch, it is often useful to discover whether someone else has already written one that meets (or comes close to meeting) your needs. The Yocto Project and OpenEmbedded communities maintain many recipes that might be candidates for what you are doing. You can find a good central index of these recipes in the OpenEmbedded metadata index.
Working from an existing recipe or a skeleton recipe is the best way to get started. Here are some points on both methods:
Locate and modify a recipe that is close to what you want to do: This method works when you are familiar with the current recipe space. The method does not work so well for those new to the Yocto Project or writing recipes.
Some risks associated with this method are using a recipe that has areas totally unrelated to what you are trying to accomplish with your recipe, not recognizing areas of the recipe that you might have to add from scratch, and so forth. All these risks stem from unfamiliarity with the existing recipe space.
Use and modify the following
                            skeleton recipe:
                            If for some reason you do not want to use
                            recipetool and you cannot
                            find an existing recipe that is close to meeting
                            your needs, you can use the following structure to
                            provide the fundamental areas of a new recipe.
                            
     DESCRIPTION = ""
     HOMEPAGE = ""
     LICENSE = ""
     SECTION = ""
     DEPENDS = ""
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = ""
     SRC_URI = ""
                            
Once you have your base recipe, you should put it in your own layer and name it appropriately. Locating it correctly ensures that the OpenEmbedded build system can find it when you use BitBake to process the recipe.
Storing Your Recipe:
                    The OpenEmbedded build system locates your recipe
                    through the layer's conf/layer.conf
                    file and the
                    BBFILES
                    variable.
                    This variable sets up a path from which the build system can
                    locate recipes.
                    Here is the typical use:
                    
     BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
                 ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
                    Consequently, you need to be sure you locate your new recipe inside your layer such that it can be found.
You can find more information on how layers are structured in the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section.
Naming Your Recipe: When you name your recipe, you need to follow this naming convention:
     basename_version.bb
                    
                    Use lower-cased characters and do not include the reserved
                    suffixes -native,
                    -cross, -initial,
                    or -dev casually (i.e. do not use them
                    as part of your recipe name unless the string applies).
                    Here are some examples:
                    
     cups_1.7.0.bb
     gawk_4.0.2.bb
     irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb
                    Understanding recipe file syntax is important for writing recipes. The following list overviews the basic items that make up a BitBake recipe file. For more complete BitBake syntax descriptions, see the "Syntax and Operators" chapter of the BitBake User Manual.
Variable Assignments and Manipulations: Variable assignments allow a value to be assigned to a variable. The assignment can be static text or might include the contents of other variables. In addition to the assignment, appending and prepending operations are also supported.
The following example shows some of the ways you can use variables in recipes:
     S = "${WORKDIR}/postfix-${PV}"
     CFLAGS += "-DNO_ASM"
     SRC_URI_append = " file://fixup.patch"
                        
Functions:
                        Functions provide a series of actions to be performed.
                        You usually use functions to override the default
                        implementation of a task function or to complement
                        a default function (i.e. append or prepend to an
                        existing function).
                        Standard functions use sh shell
                        syntax, although access to OpenEmbedded variables and
                        internal methods are also available.
The following is an example function from the
                        sed recipe:
                        
     do_install () {
         autotools_do_install
         install -d ${D}${base_bindir}
         mv ${D}${bindir}/sed ${D}${base_bindir}/sed
         rmdir ${D}${bindir}/
     }
                        It is also possible to implement new functions that are called between existing tasks as long as the new functions are not replacing or complementing the default functions. You can implement functions in Python instead of shell. Both of these options are not seen in the majority of recipes.
Keywords:
                        BitBake recipes use only a few keywords.
                        You use keywords to include common
                        functions (inherit), load parts
                        of a recipe from other files
                        (include and
                        require) and export variables
                        to the environment (export).
The following example shows the use of some of these keywords:
     export POSTCONF = "${STAGING_BINDIR}/postconf"
     inherit autoconf
     require otherfile.inc
                        
Comments:
                        Any lines that begin with the hash character
                        (#) are treated as comment lines
                        and are ignored:
                        
     # This is a comment
                        
This next list summarizes the most important and most commonly used parts of the recipe syntax. For more information on these parts of the syntax, you can reference the Syntax and Operators chapter in the BitBake User Manual.
Line Continuation: \ -
                        Use the backward slash (\)
                        character to split a statement over multiple lines.
                        Place the slash character at the end of the line that
                        is to be continued on the next line:
                        
     VAR = "A really long \
            line"
                        
Using Variables: ${...} -
                        Use the ${ syntax to
                        access the contents of a variable:
                        VARNAME}
     SRC_URI = "${SOURCEFORGE_MIRROR}/libpng/zlib-${PV}.tar.gz"
                        
Quote All Assignments: " -
                        Use double quotes around the value in all variable
                        assignments.
                        value"
     VAR1 = "${OTHERVAR}"
     VAR2 = "The version is ${PV}"
                        
Conditional Assignment: ?= -
                        Conditional assignment is used to assign a value to
                        a variable, but only when the variable is currently
                        unset.
                        Use the question mark followed by the equal sign
                        (?=) to make a "soft" assignment
                        used for conditional assignment.
                        Typically, "soft" assignments are used in the
                        local.conf file for variables
                        that are allowed to come through from the external
                        environment.
                        
Here is an example where
                        VAR1 is set to "New value" if
                        it is currently empty.
                        However, if VAR1 has already been
                        set, it remains unchanged:
                        
     VAR1 ?= "New value"
                        
                        In this next example, VAR1
                        is left with the value "Original value":
                        
     VAR1 = "Original value"
     VAR1 ?= "New value"
                        
Appending: += -
                        Use the plus character followed by the equals sign
                        (+=) to append values to existing
                        variables.
                        
Here is an example:
     SRC_URI += "file://fix-makefile.patch"
                        
Prepending: =+ -
                        Use the equals sign followed by the plus character
                        (=+) to prepend values to existing
                        variables.
                        
Here is an example:
     VAR =+ "Starts"
                        
Appending: _append -
                        Use the _append operator to
                        append values to existing variables.
                        This operator does not add any additional space.
                        Also, the operator is applied after all the
                        +=, and
                        =+ operators have been applied and
                        after all = assignments have
                        occurred.
                        
The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the start to ensure the appended value is not merged with the existing value:
     SRC_URI_append = " file://fix-makefile.patch"
                        
                        You can also use the _append
                        operator with overrides, which results in the actions
                        only being performed for the specified target or
                        machine:
                        
     SRC_URI_append_sh4 = " file://fix-makefile.patch"
                        
Prepending: _prepend -
                        Use the _prepend operator to
                        prepend values to existing variables.
                        This operator does not add any additional space.
                        Also, the operator is applied after all the
                        +=, and
                        =+ operators have been applied and
                        after all = assignments have
                        occurred.
                        
The following example shows the space being explicitly added to the end to ensure the prepended value is not merged with the existing value:
     CFLAGS_prepend = "-I${S}/myincludes "
                        
                        You can also use the _prepend
                        operator with overrides, which results in the actions
                        only being performed for the specified target or
                        machine:
                        
     CFLAGS_prepend_sh4 = "-I${S}/myincludes "
                        
Overrides: -
                        You can use overrides to set a value conditionally,
                        typically based on how the recipe is being built.
                        For example, to set the
                        KBRANCH
                        variable's value to "standard/base" for any target
                        MACHINE,
                        except for qemuarm where it should be set to
                        "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs", you would do the
                        following:
                        
     KBRANCH = "standard/base"
     KBRANCH_qemuarm  = "standard/arm-versatile-926ejs"
                        
                        Overrides are also used to separate alternate values
                        of a variable in other situations.
                        For example, when setting variables such as
                        FILES
                        and
                        RDEPENDS
                        that are specific to individual packages produced by
                        a recipe, you should always use an override that
                        specifies the name of the package.
                        
Indentation: Use spaces for indentation rather than than tabs. For shell functions, both currently work. However, it is a policy decision of the Yocto Project to use tabs in shell functions. Realize that some layers have a policy to use spaces for all indentation.
Using Python for Complex Operations: ${@ -
                        For more advanced processing, it is possible to use
                        Python code during variable assignments (e.g.
                        search and replacement on a variable).python_code}
You indicate Python code using the
                        ${@
                        syntax for the variable assignment:
                        python_code}
     SRC_URI = "ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/zip${@d.getVar('PV',1).replace('.', '')}.tgz
                        
Shell Function Syntax:
                        Write shell functions as if you were writing a shell
                        script when you describe a list of actions to take.
                        You should ensure that your script works with a generic
                        sh and that it does not require
                        any bash or other shell-specific
                        functionality.
                        The same considerations apply to various system
                        utilities (e.g. sed,
                        grep, awk,
                        and so forth) that you might wish to use.
                        If in doubt, you should check with multiple
                        implementations - including those from BusyBox.
                        
Creating a new recipe is usually an iterative process that requires using BitBake to process the recipe multiple times in order to progressively discover and add information to the recipe file.
                Assuming you have sourced a build environment setup script (i.e.
                oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres)
                and you are in the
                Build Directory,
                use BitBake to process your recipe.
                All you need to provide is the
                basename
     $ bitbake basename
                
                During the build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a
                temporary work directory for each recipe
                (${WORKDIR})
                where it keeps extracted source files, log files, intermediate
                compilation and packaging files, and so forth.
            
The per-recipe temporary work directory is constructed as follows and depends on several factors:
     BASE_WORKDIR ?= "${TMPDIR}/work"
     WORKDIR = "${BASE_WORKDIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}"
                
                As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder named
                poky, a default Build Directory at
                poky/build, and a
                qemux86-poky-linux machine target system.
                Furthermore, suppose your recipe is named
                foo_1.3.0.bb.
                In this case, the work directory the build system uses to
                build the package would be as follows:
                
     poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
                
                Inside this directory you can find sub-directories such as
                image, packages-split,
                and temp.
                After the build, you can examine these to determine how well
                the build went.
                
temp directory (e.g.
                    poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0/temp).
                    Log files are named log.taskname
                    (e.g. log.do_configure,
                    log.do_fetch, and
                    log.do_compile).
                
You can find more information about the build process in the "A Closer Look at the Yocto Project Development Environment" chapter of the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
You can also reference the following variables in the Yocto Project Reference Manual's glossary for more information:
                The first thing your recipe must do is specify how to fetch
                the source files.
                Fetching is controlled mainly through the
                SRC_URI
                variable.
                Your recipe must have a SRC_URI variable
                that points to where the source is located.
                For a graphical representation of source locations, see the
                "Sources"
                section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
            
                The
                do_fetch
                task uses the prefix of each entry in the
                SRC_URI variable value to determine which
                fetcher to use to get your source files.
                It is the SRC_URI variable that triggers
                the fetcher.
                The
                do_patch
                task uses the variable after source is fetched to apply
                patches.
                The OpenEmbedded build system uses
                FILESOVERRIDES
                for scanning directory locations for local files in
                SRC_URI.
            
                The SRC_URI variable in your recipe must
                define each unique location for your source files.
                It is good practice to not hard-code pathnames in an URL used
                in SRC_URI.
                Rather than hard-code these paths, use
                ${PV},
                which causes the fetch process to use the version specified in
                the recipe filename.
                Specifying the version in this manner means that upgrading the
                recipe to a future version is as simple as renaming the recipe
                to match the new version.
            
                Here is a simple example from the
                meta/recipes-devtools/cdrtools/cdrtools-native_3.01a20.bb
                recipe where the source comes from a single tarball.
                Notice the use of the
                PV
                variable:
                
     SRC_URI = "ftp://ftp.berlios.de/pub/cdrecord/alpha/cdrtools-${PV}.tar.bz2"
                
                Files mentioned in SRC_URI whose names end
                in a typical archive extension (e.g. .tar,
                .tar.gz, .tar.bz2,
                .zip, and so forth), are automatically
                extracted during the
                do_unpack
                task.
                For another example that specifies these types of files, see
                the
                "Autotooled Package"
                section.
            
                Another way of specifying source is from an SCM.
                For Git repositories, you must specify
                SRCREV
                and you should specify
                PV
                to include the revision with
                SRCPV.
                Here is an example from the recipe
                meta/recipes-kernel/blktrace/blktrace_git.bb:
                
     SRCREV = "d6918c8832793b4205ed3bfede78c2f915c23385"
     PR = "r6"
     PV = "1.0.5+git${SRCPV}"
     SRC_URI = "git://git.kernel.dk/blktrace.git \
                file://ldflags.patch"
                
                If your SRC_URI statement includes
                URLs pointing to individual files fetched from a remote server
                other than a version control system, BitBake attempts to
                verify the files against checksums defined in your recipe to
                ensure they have not been tampered with or otherwise modified
                since the recipe was written.
                Two checksums are used:
                SRC_URI[md5sum] and
                SRC_URI[sha256sum].
            
                If your SRC_URI variable points to
                more than a single URL (excluding SCM URLs), you need to
                provide the md5 and
                sha256 checksums for each URL.
                For these cases, you provide a name for each URL as part of
                the SRC_URI and then reference that name
                in the subsequent checksum statements.
                Here is an example:
                
     SRC_URI = "${DEBIAN_MIRROR}/main/a/apmd/apmd_3.2.2.orig.tar.gz;name=tarball \
                ${DEBIAN_MIRROR}/main/a/apmd/apmd_${PV}.diff.gz;name=patch
     SRC_URI[tarball.md5sum] = "b1e6309e8331e0f4e6efd311c2d97fa8"
     SRC_URI[tarball.sha256sum] = "7f7d9f60b7766b852881d40b8ff91d8e39fccb0d1d913102a5c75a2dbb52332d"
     SRC_URI[patch.md5sum] = "57e1b689264ea80f78353519eece0c92"
     SRC_URI[patch.sha256sum] = "7905ff96be93d725544d0040e425c42f9c05580db3c272f11cff75b9aa89d430"
                
                Proper values for md5 and
                sha256 checksums might be available
                with other signatures on the download page for the upstream
                source (e.g. md5,
                sha1, sha256,
                GPG, and so forth).
                Because the OpenEmbedded build system only deals with
                sha256sum and md5sum,
                you should verify all the signatures you find by hand.
            
                If no SRC_URI checksums are specified
                when you attempt to build the recipe, or you provide an
                incorrect checksum, the build will produce an error for each
                missing or incorrect checksum.
                As part of the error message, the build system provides
                the checksum string corresponding to the fetched file.
                Once you have the correct checksums, you can copy and paste
                them into your recipe and then run the build again to continue.
                
                This final example is a bit more complicated and is from the
                meta/recipes-sato/rxvt-unicode/rxvt-unicode_9.20.bb
                recipe.
                The example's SRC_URI statement identifies
                multiple files as the source files for the recipe: a tarball, a
                patch file, a desktop file, and an icon.
                
     SRC_URI = "http://dist.schmorp.de/rxvt-unicode/Attic/rxvt-unicode-${PV}.tar.bz2 \
                file://xwc.patch \
                file://rxvt.desktop \
                file://rxvt.png"
                
                When you specify local files using the
                file:// URI protocol, the build system
                fetches files from the local machine.
                The path is relative to the
                FILESPATH
                variable and searches specific directories in a certain order:
                ${BP},
                ${BPN},
                and files.
                The directories are assumed to be subdirectories of the
                directory in which the recipe or append file resides.
                For another example that specifies these types of files, see the
                "Single .c File Package (Hello World!)"
                section.
            
                The previous example also specifies a patch file.
                Patch files are files whose names usually end in
                .patch or .diff but
                can end with compressed suffixes such as
                diff.gz and
                patch.bz2, for example.
                The build system automatically applies patches as described
                in the
                "Patching Code" section.
            
                During the build, the
                do_unpack
                task unpacks the source with
                ${S}
                pointing to where it is unpacked.
            
                If you are fetching your source files from an upstream source
                archived tarball and the tarball's internal structure matches
                the common convention of a top-level subdirectory named
                ${BPN}-${PV},
                then you do not need to set S.
                However, if SRC_URI specifies to fetch
                source from an archive that does not use this convention,
                or from an SCM like Git or Subversion, your recipe needs to
                define S.
            
                If processing your recipe using BitBake successfully unpacks
                the source files, you need to be sure that the directory
                pointed to by ${S} matches the structure
                of the source.
            
                Sometimes it is necessary to patch code after it has been
                fetched.
                Any files mentioned in SRC_URI whose
                names end in .patch or
                .diff or compressed versions of these
                suffixes (e.g. diff.gz are treated as
                patches.
                The
                do_patch
                task automatically applies these patches.
            
                The build system should be able to apply patches with the "-p1"
                option (i.e. one directory level in the path will be stripped
                off).
                If your patch needs to have more directory levels stripped off,
                specify the number of levels using the "striplevel" option in
                the SRC_URI entry for the patch.
                Alternatively, if your patch needs to be applied in a specific
                subdirectory that is not specified in the patch file, use the
                "patchdir" option in the entry.
            
                As with all local files referenced in
                SRC_URI
                using file://, you should place
                patch files in a directory next to the recipe either
                named the same as the base name of the recipe
                (BP
                and
                BPN)
                or "files".
            
                Your recipe needs to have both the
                LICENSE
                and
                LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
                variables:
                
LICENSE:
                        This variable specifies the license for the software.
                        If you do not know the license under which the software
                        you are building is distributed, you should go to the
                        source code and look for that information.
                        Typical files containing this information include
                        COPYING,
                        LICENSE, and
                        README files.
                        You could also find the information near the top of
                        a source file.
                        For example, given a piece of software licensed under
                        the GNU General Public License version 2, you would
                        set LICENSE as follows:
                        
     LICENSE = "GPLv2"
                        The licenses you specify within
                        LICENSE can have any name as long
                        as you do not use spaces, since spaces are used as
                        separators between license names.
                        For standard licenses, use the names of the files in
                        meta/files/common-licenses/
                        or the SPDXLICENSEMAP flag names
                        defined in meta/conf/licenses.conf.
                        
LIC_FILES_CHKSUM:
                        The OpenEmbedded build system uses this variable to
                        make sure the license text has not changed.
                        If it has, the build produces an error and it affords
                        you the chance to figure it out and correct the problem.
                        
You need to specify all applicable licensing
                        files for the software.
                        At the end of the configuration step, the build process
                        will compare the checksums of the files to be sure
                        the text has not changed.
                        Any differences result in an error with the message
                        containing the current checksum.
                        For more explanation and examples of how to set the
                        LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable, see the
                        "Tracking License Changes"
                        section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
To determine the correct checksum string, you
                        can list the appropriate files in the
                        LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable with
                        incorrect md5 strings, attempt to build the software,
                        and then note the resulting error messages that will
                        report the correct md5 strings.
                        See the
                        "Fetching Code"
                        section for additional information.
                    
                        Here is an example that assumes the software has a
                        COPYING file:
                        
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=xxx"
                        When you try to build the software, the build system will produce an error and give you the correct string that you can substitute into the recipe file for a subsequent build.
Most software provides some means of setting build-time configuration options before compilation. Typically, setting these options is accomplished by running a configure script with some options, or by modifying a build configuration file.
pkg-config now, which is much more
                    robust.
                    You can find a list of the *-config
                    scripts that are disabled list in the
                    "Binary Configuration Scripts Disabled"
                    section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                
                A major part of build-time configuration is about checking for
                build-time dependencies and possibly enabling optional
                functionality as a result.
                You need to specify any build-time dependencies for the
                software you are building in your recipe's
                DEPENDS
                value, in terms of other recipes that satisfy those
                dependencies.
                You can often find build-time or runtime
                dependencies described in the software's documentation.
            
The following list provides configuration items of note based on how your software is built:
Autotools:
                        If your source files have a
                        configure.ac file, then your
                        software is built using Autotools.
                        If this is the case, you just need to worry about
                        modifying the configuration.
When using Autotools, your recipe needs to inherit
                        the
                        autotools
                        class and your recipe does not have to contain a
                        do_configure
                        task.
                        However, you might still want to make some adjustments.
                        For example, you can set
                        EXTRA_OECONF
                        to pass any needed configure options that are specific
                        to the recipe.
CMake:
                        If your source files have a
                        CMakeLists.txt file, then your
                        software is built using CMake.
                        If this is the case, you just need to worry about
                        modifying the configuration.
When you use CMake, your recipe needs to inherit
                        the
                        cmake
                        class and your recipe does not have to contain a
                        do_configure
                        task.
                        You can make some adjustments by setting
                        EXTRA_OECMAKE
                        to pass any needed configure options that are specific
                        to the recipe.
Other:
                        If your source files do not have a
                        configure.ac or
                        CMakeLists.txt file, then your
                        software is built using some method other than Autotools
                        or CMake.
                        If this is the case, you normally need to provide a
                        do_configure
                        task in your recipe
                        unless, of course, there is nothing to configure.
                        
Even if your software is not being built by Autotools or CMake, you still might not need to deal with any configuration issues. You need to determine if configuration is even a required step. You might need to modify a Makefile or some configuration file used for the build to specify necessary build options. Or, perhaps you might need to run a provided, custom configure script with the appropriate options.
For the case involving a custom configure
                        script, you would run
                        ./configure --help and look for
                        the options you need to set.
                Once configuration succeeds, it is always good practice to
                look at the log.do_configure file to
                ensure that the appropriate options have been enabled and no
                additional build-time dependencies need to be added to
                DEPENDS.
                For example, if the configure script reports that it found
                something not mentioned in DEPENDS, or
                that it did not find something that it needed for some
                desired optional functionality, then you would need to add
                those to DEPENDS.
                Looking at the log might also reveal items being checked for,
                enabled, or both that you do not want, or items not being found
                that are in DEPENDS, in which case
                you would need to look at passing extra options to the
                configure script as needed.
                For reference information on configure options specific to the
                software you are building, you can consult the output of the
                ./configure --help command within
                ${S} or consult the software's upstream
                documentation.
            
                During a build, the do_compile task
                happens after source is fetched, unpacked, and configured.
                If the recipe passes through do_compile
                successfully, nothing needs to be done.
            
However, if the compile step fails, you need to diagnose the failure. Here are some common issues that cause failures.
pkg-config.
                    See the note in section
                    "Configuring the Recipe"
                    for additional information.
                
Parallel build failures: These failures manifest themselves as intermittent errors, or errors reporting that a file or directory that should be created by some other part of the build process could not be found. This type of failure can occur even if, upon inspection, the file or directory does exist after the build has failed, because that part of the build process happened in the wrong order.
To fix the problem, you need to either satisfy
                        the missing dependency in the Makefile or whatever
                        script produced the Makefile, or (as a workaround)
                        set
                        PARALLEL_MAKE
                        to an empty string:
                        
     PARALLEL_MAKE = ""
                        For information on parallel Makefile issues, see the "Debugging Parallel Make Races" section.
Improper host path usage:
                        This failure applies to recipes building for the target
                        or nativesdk only.
                        The failure occurs when the compilation process uses
                        improper headers, libraries, or other files from the
                        host system when cross-compiling for the target.
                        
To fix the problem, examine the
                        log.do_compile file to identify
                        the host paths being used (e.g.
                        /usr/include,
                        /usr/lib, and so forth) and then
                        either add configure options, apply a patch, or do both.
                        
Failure to find required
                        libraries/headers:
                        If a build-time dependency is missing because it has
                        not been declared in
                        DEPENDS,
                        or because the dependency exists but the path used by
                        the build process to find the file is incorrect and the
                        configure step did not detect it, the compilation
                        process could fail.
                        For either of these failures, the compilation process
                        notes that files could not be found.
                        In these cases, you need to go back and add additional
                        options to the configure script as well as possibly
                        add additional build-time dependencies to
                        DEPENDS.
Occasionally, it is necessary to apply a patch
                        to the source to ensure the correct paths are used.
                        If you need to specify paths to find files staged
                        into the sysroot from other recipes, use the variables
                        that the OpenEmbedded build system provides
                        (e.g.
                        STAGING_BINDIR,
                        STAGING_INCDIR,
                        STAGING_DATADIR, and so forth).
                        
                During do_install, the task copies the
                built files along with their hierarchy to locations that
                would mirror their locations on the target device.
                The installation process copies files from the
                ${S},
                ${B},
                and
                ${WORKDIR}
                directories to the
                ${D}
                directory to create the structure as it should appear on the
                target system.
            
How your software is built affects what you must do to be sure your software is installed correctly. The following list describes what you must do for installation depending on the type of build system used by the software being built:
Autotools and CMake:
                        If the software your recipe is building uses Autotools
                        or CMake, the OpenEmbedded build
                        system understands how to install the software.
                        Consequently, you do not have to have a
                        do_install task as part of your
                        recipe.
                        You just need to make sure the install portion of the
                        build completes with no issues.
                        However, if you wish to install additional files not
                        already being installed by
                        make install, you should do this
                        using a do_install_append function
                        using the install command as described in
                        the "Manual" bulleted item later in this list.
                        
Other (using
                        make install):
                        You need to define a
                        do_install function in your
                        recipe.
                        The function should call
                        oe_runmake install and will likely
                        need to pass in the destination directory as well.
                        How you pass that path is dependent on how the
                        Makefile being run is written
                        (e.g. DESTDIR=${D},
                        PREFIX=${D},
                        INSTALLROOT=${D}, and so forth).
                        
For an example recipe using
                        make install, see the
                        "Makefile-Based Package"
                        section.
Manual:
                        You need to define a
                        do_install function in your
                        recipe.
                        The function must first use
                        install -d to create the
                        directories under
                        ${D}.
                        Once the directories exist, your function can use
                        install to manually install the
                        built software into the directories.
You can find more information on
                        install at
                        http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/install-invocation.html.
                        
                For the scenarios that do not use Autotools or
                CMake, you need to track the installation
                and diagnose and fix any issues until everything installs
                correctly.
                You need to look in the default location of
                ${D}, which is
                ${WORKDIR}/image, to be sure your
                files have been installed correctly.
            
                        During the installation process, you might need to
                        modify some of the installed files to suit the target
                        layout.
                        For example, you might need to replace hard-coded paths
                        in an initscript with values of variables provided by
                        the build system, such as replacing
                        /usr/bin/ with
                        ${bindir}.
                        If you do perform such modifications during
                        do_install, be sure to modify the
                        destination file after copying rather than before
                        copying.
                        Modifying after copying ensures that the build system
                        can re-execute do_install if
                        needed.
                        
                        oe_runmake install, which can be
                        run directly or can be run indirectly by the
                        autotools
                        and
                        cmake
                        classes, runs make install in
                        parallel.
                        Sometimes, a Makefile can have missing dependencies
                        between targets that can result in race conditions.
                        If you experience intermittent failures during
                        do_install, you might be able to
                        work around them by disabling parallel Makefile
                        installs by adding the following to the recipe:
                        
     PARALLEL_MAKEINST = ""
                        
                        See
                        PARALLEL_MAKEINST
                        for additional information.
                        
If you want to install a service, which is a process that usually starts on boot and runs in the background, then you must include some additional definitions in your recipe.
                If you are adding services and the service initialization
                script or the service file itself is not installed, you must
                provide for that installation in your recipe using a
                do_install_append function.
                If your recipe already has a do_install
                function, update the function near its end rather than
                adding an additional do_install_append
                function.
            
                When you create the installation for your services, you need
                to accomplish what is normally done by
                make install.
                In other words, make sure your installation arranges the output
                similar to how it is arranged on the target system.
            
The OpenEmbedded build system provides support for starting services two different ways:
SysVinit: SysVinit is a system and service manager that manages the init system used to control the very basic functions of your system. The init program is the first program started by the Linux kernel when the system boots. Init then controls the startup, running and shutdown of all other programs.
To enable a service using SysVinit, your recipe
                        needs to inherit the
                        update-rc.d
                        class.
                        The class helps facilitate safely installing the
                        package on the target.
You will need to set the
                        INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES,
                        INITSCRIPT_NAME,
                        and
                        INITSCRIPT_PARAMS
                        variables within your recipe.
systemd: System Management Daemon (systemd) was designed to replace SysVinit and to provide enhanced management of services. For more information on systemd, see the systemd homepage at http://freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/.
To enable a service using systemd, your recipe
                        needs to inherit the
                        systemd
                        class.
                        See the systemd.bbclass file
                        located in your
                        Source Directory.
                        section for more information.
                        
Successful packaging is a combination of automated processes performed by the OpenEmbedded build system and some specific steps you need to take. The following list describes the process:
Splitting Files:
                        The do_package task splits the
                        files produced by the recipe into logical components.
                        Even software that produces a single binary might
                        still have debug symbols, documentation, and other
                        logical components that should be split out.
                        The do_package task ensures
                        that files are split up and packaged correctly.
                        
Running QA Checks:
                        The
                        insane
                        class adds a step to
                        the package generation process so that output quality
                        assurance checks are generated by the OpenEmbedded
                        build system.
                        This step performs a range of checks to be sure the
                        build's output is free of common problems that show
                        up during runtime.
                        For information on these checks, see the
                        insane
                        class and the
                        "QA Error and Warning Messages"
                        chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                        
Hand-Checking Your Packages:
                        After you build your software, you need to be sure
                        your packages are correct.
                        Examine the
                        ${WORKDIR}/packages-split
                        directory and make sure files are where you expect
                        them to be.
                        If you discover problems, you can set
                        PACKAGES,
                        FILES,
                        do_install(_append), and so forth as
                        needed.
                        
Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages: If you need to split an application into several packages, see the "Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages" section for an example.
Installing a Post-Installation Script: For an example showing how to install a post-installation script, see the "Post-Installation Scripts" section.
Marking Package Architecture: Depending on what your recipe is building and how it is configured, it might be important to mark the packages produced as being specific to a particular machine, or to mark them as not being specific to a particular machine or architecture at all.
By default, packages apply to any machine with the
                        same architecture as the target machine.
                        When a recipe produces packages that are
                        machine-specific (e.g. the
                        MACHINE
                        value is passed into the configure script or a patch
                        is applied only for a particular machine), you should
                        mark them as such by adding the following to the
                        recipe:
                        
     PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
                        On the other hand, if the recipe produces packages
                        that do not contain anything specific to the target
                        machine or architecture at all (e.g. recipes
                        that simply package script files or configuration
                        files), you should use the
                        allarch
                        class to do this for you by adding this to your
                        recipe:
                        
     inherit allarch
                        Ensuring that the package architecture is correct is not critical while you are doing the first few builds of your recipe. However, it is important in order to ensure that your recipe rebuilds (or does not rebuild) appropriately in response to changes in configuration, and to ensure that you get the appropriate packages installed on the target machine, particularly if you run separate builds for more than one target machine.
                Sometimes the name of a recipe can lead to versioning
                problems when the recipe is upgraded to a final release.
                For example, consider the
                irssi_0.8.16-rc1.bb recipe file in
                the list of example recipes in the
                "Storing and Naming the Recipe"
                section.
                This recipe is at a release candidate stage (i.e.
                "rc1").
                When the recipe is released, the recipe filename becomes
                irssi_0.8.16.bb.
                The version change from 0.8.16-rc1
                to 0.8.16 is seen as a decrease by the
                build system and package managers, so the resulting packages
                will not correctly trigger an upgrade.
            
                In order to ensure the versions compare properly, the
                recommended convention is to set
                PV
                within the recipe to
                "previous_version+current_version".
                You can use an additional variable so that you can use the
                current version elsewhere.
                Here is an example:
                
     REALPV = "0.8.16-rc1"
     PV = "0.8.15+${REALPV}"
                
                Post-installation scripts run immediately after installing
                a package on the target or during image creation when a
                package is included in an image.
                To add a post-installation script to a package, add a
                pkg_postinst_PACKAGENAME() function to
                the recipe file (.bb) and replace
                PACKAGENAME with the name of the package
                you want to attach to the postinst
                script.
                To apply the post-installation script to the main package
                for the recipe, which is usually what is required, specify
                ${PN}
                in place of PACKAGENAME.
            
A post-installation function has the following structure:
     pkg_postinst_PACKAGENAME() {
     # Commands to carry out
     }
                
The script defined in the post-installation function is called when the root filesystem is created. If the script succeeds, the package is marked as installed. If the script fails, the package is marked as unpacked and the script is executed when the image boots again.
Sometimes it is necessary for the execution of a post-installation script to be delayed until the first boot. For example, the script might need to be executed on the device itself. To delay script execution until boot time, use the following structure in the post-installation script:
     pkg_postinst_PACKAGENAME() {
     if [ x"$D" = "x" ]; then
          # Actions to carry out on the device go here
     else
          exit 1
     fi
     }
                
                The previous example delays execution until the image boots
                again because the environment variable D
                points to the directory containing the image when
                the root filesystem is created at build time but is unset
                when executed on the first boot.
            
pkg_preinst,
                pkg_prerm, and
                pkg_postrm, respectively.
                These scrips work in exactly the same way as does
                pkg_postinst with the exception that they
                run at different times.
                Also, because of when they run, they are not applicable to
                being run at image creation time like
                pkg_postinst.
            The final step for completing your recipe is to be sure that the software you built runs correctly. To accomplish runtime testing, add the build's output packages to your image and test them on the target.
For information on how to customize your image by adding specific packages, see the "Customizing Images" section.
To help summarize how to write a recipe, this section provides some examples given various scenarios:
Recipes that use local files
Using an Autotooled package
Using a Makefile-based package
Splitting an application into multiple packages
Adding binaries to an image
                    Building an application from a single file that is stored
                    locally (e.g. under files) requires
                    a recipe that has the file listed in the
                    SRC_URI
                    variable.
                    Additionally, you need to manually write the
                    do_compile and
                    do_install tasks.
                    The S
                    variable defines the directory containing the source code,
                    which is set to
                    WORKDIR
                    in this case - the directory BitBake uses for the build.
                    
     SUMMARY = "Simple helloworld application"
     SECTION = "examples"
     LICENSE = "MIT"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${COMMON_LICENSE_DIR}/MIT;md5=0835ade698e0bcf8506ecda2f7b4f302"
     SRC_URI = "file://helloworld.c"
     S = "${WORKDIR}"
     do_compile() {
     	${CC} helloworld.c -o helloworld
     }
     do_install() {
     	install -d ${D}${bindir}
     	install -m 0755 helloworld ${D}${bindir}
     }
                    
                    By default, the helloworld,
                    helloworld-dbg, and
                    helloworld-dev packages are built.
                    For information on how to customize the packaging process,
                    see the
                    "Splitting an Application into Multiple Packages"
                    section.
                
                    Applications that use Autotools such as autoconf and
                    automake require a recipe that has a source archive listed in
                    SRC_URI and
                    also inherit the
                    autotools
                    class, which contains the definitions of all the steps
                    needed to build an Autotool-based application.
                    The result of the build is automatically packaged.
                    And, if the application uses NLS for localization, packages with local information are
                    generated (one package per language).
                    Following is one example: (hello_2.3.bb)
                    
     SUMMARY = "GNU Helloworld application"
     SECTION = "examples"
     LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=751419260aa954499f7abaabaa882bbe"
     SRC_URI = "${GNU_MIRROR}/hello/hello-${PV}.tar.gz"
     inherit autotools gettext
                     
                    The variable
                    LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
                    is used to track source license changes as described in the
                    "Tracking License Changes" section.
                    You can quickly create Autotool-based recipes in a manner similar to the previous example.
                
                    Applications that use GNU make also require a recipe that has
                    the source archive listed in
                    SRC_URI.
                    You do not need to add a do_compile step since by default BitBake
                    starts the make command to compile the application.
                    If you need additional make options, you should store them in the
                    EXTRA_OEMAKE
                    variable.
                    BitBake passes these options into the GNU make invocation.
                    Note that a do_install task is still required.
                    Otherwise, BitBake runs an empty do_install task by default.
                
                    Some applications might require extra parameters to be passed to the compiler.
                    For example, the application might need an additional header path.
                    You can accomplish this by adding to the
                    CFLAGS variable.
                    The following example shows this:
                    
     CFLAGS_prepend = "-I ${S}/include "
                    
                In the following example, mtd-utils is a makefile-based package:
                    
     SUMMARY = "Tools for managing memory technology devices"
     SECTION = "base"
     DEPENDS = "zlib lzo e2fsprogs util-linux"
     HOMEPAGE = "http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/"
     LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=0636e73ff0215e8d672dc4c32c317bb3 \
                         file://include/common.h;beginline=1;endline=17;md5=ba05b07912a44ea2bf81ce409380049c"
     # Use the latest version at 26 Oct, 2013
     SRCREV = "9f107132a6a073cce37434ca9cda6917dd8d866b"
     SRC_URI = "git://git.infradead.org/mtd-utils.git \
                     file://add-exclusion-to-mkfs-jffs2-git-2.patch \
     "
     PV = "1.5.1+git${SRCPV}"
     S = "${WORKDIR}/git/"
     EXTRA_OEMAKE = "'CC=${CC}' 'RANLIB=${RANLIB}' 'AR=${AR}' 'CFLAGS=${CFLAGS} -I${S}/include -DWITHOUT_XATTR' 'BUILDDIR=${S}'"
     do_install () {
             oe_runmake install DESTDIR=${D} SBINDIR=${sbindir} MANDIR=${mandir} INCLUDEDIR=${includedir}
     }
     PACKAGES =+ "mtd-utils-jffs2 mtd-utils-ubifs mtd-utils-misc"
     FILES_mtd-utils-jffs2 = "${sbindir}/mkfs.jffs2 ${sbindir}/jffs2dump ${sbindir}/jffs2reader ${sbindir}/sumtool"
     FILES_mtd-utils-ubifs = "${sbindir}/mkfs.ubifs ${sbindir}/ubi*"
     FILES_mtd-utils-misc = "${sbindir}/nftl* ${sbindir}/ftl* ${sbindir}/rfd* ${sbindir}/doc* ${sbindir}/serve_image ${sbindir}/recv_image"
     PARALLEL_MAKE = ""
     BBCLASSEXTEND = "native"
                    
                    You can use the variables
                    PACKAGES and
                    FILES
                    to split an application into multiple packages.
                
                    Following is an example that uses the libxpm recipe.
                    By default, this recipe generates a single package that contains the library along
                    with a few binaries.
                    You can modify the recipe to split the binaries into separate packages:
                    
     require xorg-lib-common.inc
     SUMMARY = "Xpm: X Pixmap extension library"
     LICENSE = "BSD"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=51f4270b012ecd4ab1a164f5f4ed6cf7"
     DEPENDS += "libxext libsm libxt"
     PE = "1"
     XORG_PN = "libXpm"
     PACKAGES =+ "sxpm cxpm"
     FILES_cxpm = "${bindir}/cxpm"
     FILES_sxpm = "${bindir}/sxpm"
                    
                    In the previous example, we want to ship the sxpm
                    and cxpm binaries in separate packages.
                    Since bindir would be packaged into the main
                    PN
                    package by default, we prepend the PACKAGES
                    variable so additional package names are added to the start of list.
                    This results in the extra FILES_*
                    variables then containing information that define which files and
                    directories go into which packages.
                    Files included by earlier packages are skipped by latter packages.
                    Thus, the main PN package
                    does not include the above listed files.
                
                    Sometimes, you need to add pre-compiled binaries to an
                    image.
                    For example, suppose that binaries for proprietary code
                    exist, which are created by a particular division of a
                    company.
                    Your part of the company needs to use those binaries as
                    part of an image that you are building using the
                    OpenEmbedded build system.
                    Since you only have the binaries and not the source code,
                    you cannot use a typical recipe that expects to fetch the
                    source specified in
                    SRC_URI
                    and then compile it.
                
One method is to package the binaries and then install them as part of the image. Generally, it is not a good idea to package binaries since, among other things, it can hinder the ability to reproduce builds and could lead to compatibility problems with ABI in the future. However, sometimes you have no choice.
                    The easiest solution is to create a recipe that uses
                    the
                    bin_package
                    class and to be sure that you are using default locations
                    for build artifacts.
                    In most cases, the bin_package class
                    handles "skipping" the configure and compile steps as well
                    as sets things up to grab packages from the appropriate
                    area.
                    In particular, this class sets noexec
                    on both the
                    do_configure
                    and
                    do_compile
                    tasks, sets
                    FILES_${PN} to "/" so that it picks
                    up all files, and sets up a
                    do_install
                    task, which effectively copies all files from
                    ${S} to ${D}.
                    The bin_package class works well when
                    the files extracted into ${S} are
                    already laid out in the way they should be laid out
                    on the target.
                    For more information on these variables, see the
                    FILES,
                    PN,
                    S,
                    and
                    D
                    variables in the Yocto Project Reference Manual's variable
                    glossary.
                
                    If you can't use the bin_package
                    class, you need to be sure you are doing the following:
                    
Create a recipe where the
                            do_configure and
                            do_compile tasks do nothing:
                            
     do_configure[noexec] = "1"
     do_compile[noexec] = "1"
                            Alternatively, you can make these tasks an empty function.
Make sure your
                            do_install task installs the
                            binaries appropriately.
                            
Ensure that you set up
                            FILES (usually
                            FILES_${PN}) to point to the
                            files you have installed, which of course depends
                            on where you have installed them and whether
                            those files are in different locations than the
                            defaults.
                            
Adding a new machine to the Yocto Project is a straightforward process. This section describes how to add machines that are similar to those that the Yocto Project already supports.
gcc/glibc and to the site
                information, which is beyond the scope of this manual.
            
For a complete example that shows how to add a new machine, see the "Creating a New BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
                To add a new machine, you need to add a new machine
                configuration file to the layer's
                conf/machine directory.
                This configuration file provides details about the device
                you are adding.
            
                The OpenEmbedded build system uses the root name of the
                machine configuration file to reference the new machine.
                For example, given a machine configuration file named
                crownbay.conf, the build system
                recognizes the machine as "crownbay".
            
The most important variables you must set in your machine configuration file or include from a lower-level configuration file are as follows:
TARGET_ARCH
                        (e.g. "arm")
PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel
                        
MACHINE_FEATURES
                        (e.g. "apm screen wifi")
You might also need these variables:
SERIAL_CONSOLES
                        (e.g. "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1")
KERNEL_IMAGETYPE
                        (e.g. "zImage")
IMAGE_FSTYPES
                        (e.g. "tar.gz jffs2")
                You can find full details on these variables in the reference
                section.
                You can leverage existing machine .conf
                files from meta-yocto-bsp/conf/machine/.
            
                The OpenEmbedded build system needs to be able to build a kernel
                for the machine.
                You need to either create a new kernel recipe for this machine,
                or extend an existing kernel recipe.
                You can find several kernel recipe examples in the
                Source Directory at
                meta/recipes-kernel/linux
                that you can use as references.
            
                If you are creating a new kernel recipe, normal recipe-writing
                rules apply for setting up a
                SRC_URI.
                Thus, you need to specify any necessary patches and set
                S
                to point at the source code.
                You need to create a do_configure task that
                configures the unpacked kernel with a
                defconfig file.
                You can do this by using a make defconfig
                command or, more commonly, by copying in a suitable
                defconfig file and then running
                make oldconfig.
                By making use of inherit kernel and
                potentially some of the linux-*.inc files,
                most other functionality is centralized and the defaults of the
                class normally work well.
            
                If you are extending an existing kernel recipe, it is usually
                a matter of adding a suitable defconfig
                file.
                The file needs to be added into a location similar to
                defconfig files used for other machines
                in a given kernel recipe.
                A possible way to do this is by listing the file in the
                SRC_URI and adding the machine to the
                expression in
                COMPATIBLE_MACHINE:
                
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE = '(qemux86|qemumips)'
                
                For more information on defconfig files,
                see the
                "Changing the Configuration"
                section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
            
A formfactor configuration file provides information about the target hardware for which the image is being built and information that the build system cannot obtain from other sources such as the kernel. Some examples of information contained in a formfactor configuration file include framebuffer orientation, whether or not the system has a keyboard, the positioning of the keyboard in relation to the screen, and the screen resolution.
                The build system uses reasonable defaults in most cases.
                However, if customization is
                necessary, you need to create a machconfig file
                in the meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files
                directory.
                This directory contains directories for specific machines such as
                qemuarm and qemux86.
                For information about the settings available and the defaults, see the
                meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/files/config file found in the
                same area.
            
Following is an example for "qemuarm" machine:
     HAVE_TOUCHSCREEN=1
     HAVE_KEYBOARD=1
     DISPLAY_CAN_ROTATE=0
     DISPLAY_ORIENTATION=0
     #DISPLAY_WIDTH_PIXELS=640
     #DISPLAY_HEIGHT_PIXELS=480
     #DISPLAY_BPP=16
     DISPLAY_DPI=150
     DISPLAY_SUBPIXEL_ORDER=vrgb
                
Libraries are an integral part of your system. This section describes some common practices you might find helpful when working with libraries to build your system:
                If you are building a library and the library offers static linking, you can control
                which static library files (*.a files) get included in the
                built library.
            
                The PACKAGES
                and FILES_*
                variables in the
                meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration file define how files installed
                by the do_install task are packaged.
                By default, the PACKAGES variable includes
                ${PN}-staticdev, which represents all static library files.
                
${PN}-dev.
                Following is part of the BitBake configuration file, where you can see how the static library files are defined:
     PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN ?= ""
     PACKAGES = "${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}"
     PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "^${PN}-locale-.*"
     FILES = ""
     FILES_${PN} = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/* ${libexecdir}/* ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBS} \
                 ${sysconfdir} ${sharedstatedir} ${localstatedir} \
                 ${base_bindir}/* ${base_sbindir}/* \
                 ${base_libdir}/*${SOLIBS} \
                 ${base_prefix}/lib/udev/rules.d ${prefix}/lib/udev/rules.d \
                 ${datadir}/${BPN} ${libdir}/${BPN}/* \
                 ${datadir}/pixmaps ${datadir}/applications \
                 ${datadir}/idl ${datadir}/omf ${datadir}/sounds \
                 ${libdir}/bonobo/servers"
     FILES_${PN}-bin = "${bindir}/* ${sbindir}/*"
     FILES_${PN}-doc = "${docdir} ${mandir} ${infodir} ${datadir}/gtk-doc \
                 ${datadir}/gnome/help"
     SECTION_${PN}-doc = "doc"
     FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
     FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir} ${FILES_SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/*.la \
                     ${libdir}/*.o ${libdir}/pkgconfig ${datadir}/pkgconfig \
                     ${datadir}/aclocal ${base_libdir}/*.o \
                     ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.la ${base_libdir}/*.la"
     SECTION_${PN}-dev = "devel"
     ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1"
     RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
     FILES_${PN}-staticdev = "${libdir}/*.a ${base_libdir}/*.a ${libdir}/${BPN}/*.a"
     SECTION_${PN}-staticdev = "devel"
     RDEPENDS_${PN}-staticdev = "${PN}-dev (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
                
The build system offers the ability to build libraries with different target optimizations or architecture formats and combine these together into one system image. You can link different binaries in the image against the different libraries as needed for specific use cases. This feature is called "Multilib."
An example would be where you have most of a system compiled in 32-bit mode using 32-bit libraries, but you have something large, like a database engine, that needs to be a 64-bit application and uses 64-bit libraries. Multilib allows you to get the best of both 32-bit and 64-bit libraries.
While the Multilib feature is most commonly used for 32 and 64-bit differences, the approach the build system uses facilitates different target optimizations. You could compile some binaries to use one set of libraries and other binaries to use a different set of libraries. The libraries could differ in architecture, compiler options, or other optimizations.
                Several examples exist in the
                meta-skeleton layer found in the
               Source Directory:
                
conf/multilib-example.conf
                        configuration file
conf/multilib-example2.conf
                        configuration file
recipes-multilib/images/core-image-multilib-example.bb
                        recipe
User-specific requirements drive the Multilib feature. Consequently, there is no one "out-of-the-box" configuration that likely exists to meet your needs.
                    In order to enable Multilib, you first need to ensure your recipe is
                    extended to support multiple libraries.
                    Many standard recipes are already extended and support multiple libraries.
                    You can check in the meta/conf/multilib.conf
                    configuration file in the
                    Source Directory to see how this is
                    done using the
                    BBCLASSEXTEND
                    variable.
                    Eventually, all recipes will be covered and this list will
                    not be needed.
                
                    For the most part, the Multilib class extension works automatically to
                    extend the package name from ${PN} to
                    ${MLPREFIX}${PN}, where MLPREFIX
                    is the particular multilib (e.g. "lib32-" or "lib64-").
                    Standard variables such as
                    DEPENDS,
                    RDEPENDS,
                    RPROVIDES,
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    PACKAGES, and
                    PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                    are automatically extended by the system.
                    If you are extending any manual code in the recipe, you can use the
                    ${MLPREFIX} variable to ensure those names are extended
                    correctly.
                    This automatic extension code resides in multilib.bbclass.
                
                    After you have set up the recipes, you need to define the actual
                    combination of multiple libraries you want to build.
                    You accomplish this through your local.conf
                    configuration file in the
                    Build Directory.
                    An example configuration would be as follows:
                    
     MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
     require conf/multilib.conf
     MULTILIBS = "multilib:lib32"
     DEFAULTTUNE_virtclass-multilib-lib32 = "x86"
     IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " lib32-glib-2.0"
                    
                    This example enables an
                    additional library named lib32 alongside the
                    normal target packages.
                    When combining these "lib32" alternatives, the example uses "x86" for tuning.
                    For information on this particular tuning, see
                    meta/conf/machine/include/ia32/arch-ia32.inc.
                
                    The example then includes lib32-glib-2.0
                    in all the images, which illustrates one method of including a
                    multiple library dependency.
                    You can use a normal image build to include this dependency,
                    for example:
                    
     $ bitbake core-image-sato
                    You can also build Multilib packages specifically with a command like this:
     $ bitbake lib32-glib-2.0
                    
Generic implementation details as well as details that are specific to package management systems exist. Following are implementation details that exist regardless of the package management system:
The typical convention used for the
                            class extension code as used by
                            Multilib assumes that all package names specified
                            in
                            PACKAGES
                            that contain ${PN} have
                            ${PN} at the start of the name.
                            When that convention is not followed and
                            ${PN} appears at
                            the middle or the end of a name, problems occur.
                            
The
                            TARGET_VENDOR
                            value under Multilib will be extended to
                            "-vendormlmultilib"
                            (e.g. "-pokymllib32" for a "lib32" Multilib with
                            Poky).
                            The reason for this slightly unwieldy contraction
                            is that any "-" characters in the vendor
                            string presently break Autoconf's
                            config.sub, and
                            other separators are problematic for different
                            reasons.
                            
'
For the RPM Package Management System, the following implementation details exist:
A unique architecture is defined for the Multilib packages,
                            along with creating a unique deploy folder under
                            tmp/deploy/rpm in the
                            Build Directory.
                            For example, consider lib32 in a
                            qemux86-64 image.
                            The possible architectures in the system are "all", "qemux86_64",
                            "lib32_qemux86_64", and "lib32_x86".
The ${MLPREFIX} variable is stripped from
                            ${PN} during RPM packaging.
                            The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib RPM package in a
                            qemux86-64 system resolves to something similar to
                            bash-4.1-r2.x86_64.rpm and
                            bash-4.1.r2.lib32_x86.rpm, respectively.
                            
When installing a Multilib image, the RPM backend first installs the base image and then installs the Multilib libraries.
The build system relies on RPM to resolve the identical files in the two (or more) Multilib packages.
For the IPK Package Management System, the following implementation details exist:
The ${MLPREFIX} is not stripped from
                            ${PN} during IPK packaging.
                            The naming for a normal RPM package and a Multilib IPK package in a
                            qemux86-64 system resolves to something like
                            bash_4.1-r2.x86_64.ipk and
                            lib32-bash_4.1-rw_x86.ipk, respectively.
                            
The IPK deploy folder is not modified with
                            ${MLPREFIX} because packages with and without
                            the Multilib feature can exist in the same folder due to the
                            ${PN} differences.
IPK defines a sanity check for Multilib installation using certain rules for file comparison, overridden, etc.
Situations can exist where you need to install and use multiple versions of the same library on the same system at the same time. These situations almost always exist when a library API changes and you have multiple pieces of software that depend on the separate versions of the library. To accommodate these situations, you can install multiple versions of the same library in parallel on the same system.
                The process is straightforward as long as the libraries use
                proper versioning.
                With properly versioned libraries, all you need to do to
                individually specify the libraries is create separate,
                appropriately named recipes where the
                PN part of the
                name includes a portion that differentiates each library version
                (e.g.the major part of the version number).
                Thus, instead of having a single recipe that loads one version
                of a library (e.g. clutter), you provide
                multiple recipes that result in different versions
                of the libraries you want.
                As an example, the following two recipes would allow the
                two separate versions of the clutter
                library to co-exist on the same system:
                
     clutter-1.6_1.6.20.bb
     clutter-1.8_1.8.4.bb
                
                Additionally, if you have other recipes that depend on a given
                library, you need to use the
                DEPENDS
                variable to create the dependency.
                Continuing with the same example, if you want to have a recipe
                depend on the 1.8 version of the clutter
                library, use the following in your recipe:
                
     DEPENDS = "clutter-1.8"
                
GObject introspection is the standard mechanism for accessing GObject-based software from runtime environments. GObject is a feature of the GLib library that provides an object framework for the GNOME desktop and related software. GObject Introspection adds information to GObject that allows objects created within it to be represented across different programming languages. If you want to construct GStreamer pipelines using Python, or control UPnP infrastructure using Javascript and GUPnP, GObject introspection is the only way to do it.
            This section describes the Yocto Project support for generating
            and packaging GObject introspection data.
            GObject introspection data is a description of the
            API provided by libraries built on top of GLib framework,
            and, in particular, that framework's GObject mechanism.
            GObject Introspection Repository (GIR) files go to
            -dev packages,
            typelib files go to main packages as they
            are packaged together with libraries that are introspected.
        
The data is generated when building such a library, by linking the library with a small executable binary that asks the library to describe itself, and then executing the binary and processing its output.
Generating this data in a cross-compilation environment is difficult because the library is produced for the target architecture, but its code needs to be executed on the build host. This problem is solved with the OpenEmbedded build system by running the code through QEMU, which allows precisely that. Unfortunately, QEMU does not always work perfectly as mentioned in the xxx section.
Enabling the generation of introspection data (GIR files) in your library package involves the following:
                        Inherit the
                        gobject-introspection
                        class.
                        
                        Make sure introspection is not disabled anywhere in
                        the recipe or from anything the recipe includes.
                        Also, make sure that "gobject-introspection-data" is
                        not in
                        DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
                        and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
                        MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED.
                        If either of these conditions exist, nothing will
                        happen.
                        
                        Try to build the recipe.
                        If you encounter build errors that look like
                        something is unable to find
                        .so libraries, check where these
                        libraries are located in the source tree and add
                        the following to the recipe:
                        
     GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH = "${B}/something/.libs"
                        
oe-core
                            repository that use that
                            GIR_EXTRA_LIBS_PATH variable
                            as an example.
                        
Look for any other errors, which probably mean that introspection support in a package is not entirely standard, and thus breaks down in a cross-compilation environment. For such cases, custom-made fixes are needed. A good place to ask and receive help in these cases is the Yocto Project mailing lists.
You might find that you do not want to generate introspection data. Or, perhaps QEMU does not work on your build host and target architecture combination. If so, you can use either of the following methods to disable GIR file generations:
Add the following to your distro configuration:
     DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "gobject-introspection-data"
                        Adding this statement disables generating introspection data using QEMU but will still enable building introspection tools and libraries (i.e. building them does not require the use of QEMU).
Add the following to your machine configuration:
     MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "qemu-usermode"
                        Adding this statement disables the use of QEMU when building packages for your machine. Currently, this feature is used only by introspection recipes and has the same effect as the previously described option.
If you disable introspection data, you can still obtain it through other means such as copying the data from a suitable sysroot, or by generating it on the target hardware. The OpenEmbedded build system does not currently provide specific support for these techniques.
Use the following procedure to test if generating introspection data is working in an image:
                        Make sure that "gobject-introspection-data" is not in
                        DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
                        and that "qemu-usermode" is not in
                        MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED.
                        
                        Build core-image-sato.
                        
Launch a Terminal and then start Python in the terminal.
Enter the following in the terminal:
     >>> from gi.repository import GLib
     >>> GLib.get_host_name()
                        
For something a little more advanced, enter the following:
     http://python-gtk-3-tutorial.readthedocs.org/en/latest/introduction.html
                        
The following know issues exist for GObject Introspection Support:
                        qemu-ppc64 immediately crashes.
                        Consequently, you cannot build introspection data on
                        that architecture.
                        
x32 is not supported by QEMU. Consequently, introspection data is disabled.
musl causes transient GLib binaries to crash on assertion failures. Consequently, generating introspection data is disabled.
                        Because QEMU is not able to run the binaries correctly,
                        introspection is disabled for some specific packages
                        under specific architectures (e.g.
                        gcr,
                        libsecret, and
                        webkit).
                        
You might want to use an external toolchain as part of your development. If this is the case, the fundamental steps you need to accomplish are as follows:
Understand where the installed toolchain resides. For cases where you need to build the external toolchain, you would need to take separate steps to build and install the toolchain.
                    Make sure you add the layer that contains the toolchain to
                    your bblayers.conf file through the
                    BBLAYERS
                    variable.
                    
                    Set the
                    EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN
                    variable in your local.conf file
                    to the location in which you installed the toolchain.
                    
            A good example of an external toolchain used with the Yocto Project
            is Mentor Graphics®
            Sourcery G++ Toolchain.
            You can see information on how to use that particular layer in the
            README file at
            http://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/.
            You can find further information by reading about the
            TCMODE
            variable in the Yocto Project Reference Manual's variable glossary.
        
            Creating an image for a particular hardware target using the
            OpenEmbedded build system does not necessarily mean you can boot
            that image as is on your device.
            Physical devices accept and boot images in various ways depending
            on the specifics of the device.
            Usually, information about the hardware can tell you what image
            format the device requires.
            Should your device require multiple partitions on an SD card, flash,
            or an HDD, you can use the OpenEmbedded Image Creator,
	        wic, to create the properly partitioned image.
        
            The wic command generates partitioned images
            from existing OpenEmbedded build artifacts.
            Image generation is driven by partitioning commands contained
            in an Openembedded kickstart file (.wks)
            specified either directly on the command line or as one of a
            selection of canned .wks files as shown
            with the wic list images command in the
            "Using an Existing Kickstart File"
            section.
            When applied to a given set of build artifacts, the result is an
            image or set of images that can be directly written onto media and
            used on a particular system.
        
	        The wic command and the infrastructure
	        it is based on is by definition incomplete.
            Its purpose is to allow the generation of customized images,
            and as such was designed to be completely extensible through a
            plug-in interface.
            See the
            "Plug-ins"
            section for information on these plug-ins.
	    
            This section provides some background information on
            wic, describes what you need to have in
            place to run the tool, provides instruction on how to use
            wic, and provides several examples.
        
                This section provides some background on the
                wic utility.
                While none of this information is required to use
                wic, you might find it interesting.
                
The name "wic" is derived from OpenEmbedded Image Creator (oeic). The "oe" diphthong in "oeic" was promoted to the letter "w", because "oeic" is both difficult to remember and pronounce.
                        wic is loosely based on the
                        Meego Image Creator (mic)
                        framework.
                        The wic implementation has been
                        heavily modified to make direct use of OpenEmbedded
                        build artifacts instead of package installation and
                        configuration, which are already incorporated within
                        the OpenEmbedded artifacts.
                        wic is a completely independent
                        standalone utility that initially provides
                        easier-to-use and more flexible replacements for a
                        couple bits of existing functionality in OE Core's
                        image-live
                        class and mkefidisk.sh script.
                        The difference between
                        wic and those examples is
                        that with wic the
                        functionality of those scripts is implemented
                        by a general-purpose partitioning language, which is
                        based on Redhat kickstart syntax.
                In order to use the wic utility
                with the OpenEmbedded Build system, your system needs
                to meet the following requirements:
                
The Linux distribution on your development host must support the Yocto Project. See the "Supported Linux Distributions" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for this list of distributions.
                        The standard system utilities, such as
                        cp, must be installed on your
                        development host system.
                        
                        You need to have the build artifacts already
                        available, which typically means that you must
                        have already created an image using the
                        Openembedded build system (e.g.
                        core-image-minimal).
                        While it might seem redundant to generate an image in
                        order to create an image using
                        wic, the current version of
                        wic requires the artifacts
                        in the form generated by the build system.
                        
You must build several native tools, which are tools built to run on the build system:
     $ bitbake parted-native dosfstools-native mtools-native
                        
                        You must have sourced one of the build environment
                        setup scripts (i.e.
                        oe-init-build-env
                        or
                        oe-init-build-env-memres)
                        found in the
                        Build Directory.
                        
                You can get general help for the wic
                by entering the wic command by itself
                or by entering the command with a help argument as follows:
                
     $ wic -h
     $ wic --help
                
                Currently, wic supports two commands:
                create and list.
                You can get help for these commands as follows:
                
     $ wic help command
                
                You can also get detailed help on a number of topics
                from the help system.
                The output of wic --help
                displays a list of available help
                topics under a "Help topics" heading.
                You can have the help system display the help text for
                a given topic by prefacing the topic with
                wic help:
                
     $ wic help help_topic
                
                You can find out more about the images
                wic creates using the existing
                kickstart files with the following form of the command:
                
     $ wic list image help
                
                where imagedirectdisk or
                mkefidisk.
            
	            You can use wic in two different
	            modes, depending on how much control you need for
	            specifying the Openembedded build artifacts that are
                used for creating the image: Raw and Cooked:
                
Raw Mode: You explicitly specify build artifacts through command-line arguments.
Cooked Mode:
                        The current
                        MACHINE
                        setting and image name are used to automatically locate
                        and provide the build artifacts.
                Regardless of the mode you use, you need to have the build
                artifacts ready and available.
                Additionally, the environment must be set up using the
                oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres
                script found in the
                Build Directory.
            
The general form of the 'wic' command in raw mode is:
     $ wic create image_name.wks [options] [...]
         Where:
             image_name.wks
                               An OpenEmbedded kickstart file.  You can provide
                               your own custom file or use a file from a set of
                               existing files as described by further options.
             -o OUTDIR, --outdir=OUTDIR
                               The name of a directory in which to create image.
             -i PROPERTIES_FILE, --infile=PROPERTIES_FILE
                               The name of a file containing the values for image
                               properties as a JSON file.
             -e IMAGE_NAME, --image-name=IMAGE_NAME
                               The name of the image from which to use the artifacts
                               (e.g. core-image-sato).
             -r ROOTFS_DIR, --rootfs-dir=ROOTFS_DIR
                               The path to the /rootfs directory to use as the
                               .wks rootfs source.
             -b BOOTIMG_DIR, --bootimg-dir=BOOTIMG_DIR
                               The path to the directory containing the boot artifacts
                               (e.g. /EFI or /syslinux) to use as the .wks bootimg
                               source.
             -k KERNEL_DIR, --kernel-dir=KERNEL_DIR
                               The path to the directory containing the kernel to use
                               in the .wks boot image.
             -n NATIVE_SYSROOT, --native-sysroot=NATIVE_SYSROOT
                               The path to the native sysroot containing the tools to use
                               to build the image.
             -s, --skip-build-check
                               Skips the build check.
             -D, --debug
                               Output debug information.
                    
wic.
                        In fact, you should not run as root when using the
                        utility.
                    
                    The general form of the wic command
                    using Cooked Mode is:
                    
     $ wic create kickstart_file -e image_name
         Where:
             kickstart_file
                               An OpenEmbedded kickstart file. You can provide your own
                               custom file or supplied file.
             image_name
                               Specifies the image built using the OpenEmbedded build
                               system.
                    
                    This form is the simplest and most user-friendly, as it
                    does not require specifying all individual parameters.
                    All you need to provide is your own
                    .wks file or one provided with the
                    release.
                
                If you do not want to create your own
                .wks file, you can use an existing
                file provided by the wic installation.
                Use the following command to list the available files:
                
     $ wic list images
     directdisk Create a 'pcbios' direct disk image
     mkefidisk Create an EFI disk image
                 
                 When you use an existing file, you do not have to use the
                 .wks extension.
                 Here is an example in Raw Mode that uses the
                 directdisk file:
                 
     $ wic create directdisk -r rootfs_dir -b bootimg_dir \
           -k kernel_dir -n native_sysroot
                
                Here are the actual partition language commands
                used in the mkefidisk.wks file to generate
                an image:
                
     # short-description: Create an EFI disk image
     # long-description: Creates a partitioned EFI disk image that the user
     # can directly dd to boot media.
     part /boot --source bootimg-efi --ondisk sda --label msdos --active --align 1024
     part / --source rootfs --ondisk sda --fstype=ext3 --label platform --align 1024
     part swap --ondisk sda --size 44 --label swap1 --fstype=swap
     bootloader  --timeout=10  --append="rootwait rootfstype=ext3 console=ttyPCH0,115200 console=tty0 vmalloc=256MB snd-hda-intel.enable_msi=0"
                
                This section provides several examples that show how to use
                the wic utility.
                All the examples assume the list of requirements in the
                "Requirements" section
                have been met.
                The examples assume the previously generated image is
                core-image-minimal.
            
                    This example runs in Cooked Mode and uses the
                    mkefidisk kickstart file:
                    
     $ wic create mkefidisk -e core-image-minimal
     Checking basic build environment...
     Done.
     Creating image(s)...
     Info: The new image(s) can be found here:
      /var/tmp/wic/build/mkefidisk-201310230946-sda.direct
     The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
      ROOTFS_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/minnow-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
      BOOTIMG_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/minnow-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/core-image-minimal-1.0/hddimg
      KERNEL_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/minnow/usr/src/kernel
      NATIVE_SYSROOT: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/x86_64-linux
     The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
      /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/mkefidisk.wks
                    
                    This example shows the easiest way to create an image
                    by running in Cooked Mode and using the
                    -e option with an existing kickstart
                    file.
                    All that is necessary is to specify the image used to
                    generate the artifacts.
                    Your local.conf needs to have the
                    MACHINE
                    variable set to the machine you are using, which is
                    "minnow" in this example.
                
                    The output specifies the exact image created as well as
                    where it was created.
                    The output also names the artifacts used and the exact
                    .wks script that was used to generate
                    the image.
                    
                    Continuing with the example, you can now directly
                    dd the image to a USB stick, or
                    whatever media for which you built your image,
                    and boot the resulting media:
                    
     $ sudo dd if=/var/tmp/wic/build/mkefidisk-201310230946-sda.direct of=/dev/sdb
     [sudo] password for trz:
     182274+0 records in
     182274+0 records out
     93324288 bytes (93 MB) copied, 14.4777 s, 6.4 MB/s
     [trz@empanada ~]$ sudo eject /dev/sdb
                    
                    Because wic image creation is driven
                    by the kickstart file, it is easy to affect image creation
                    by changing the parameters in the file.
                    This next example demonstrates that through modification
                    of the directdisk kickstart file.
                
                    As mentioned earlier, you can use the command
                    wic list images to show the list
                    of existing kickstart files.
                    The directory in which these files reside is
                    scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/
                    located in the
                    Source Directory.
                    Because the available files reside in this directory, you
                    can create and add your own custom files to the directory.
                    Subsequent use of the wic list images
                    command would then include your kickstart files.
                
                    In this example, the existing
                    directdisk file already does most
                    of what is needed.
                    However, for the hardware in this example, the image will
                    need to boot from sdb instead of
                    sda, which is what the
                    directdisk kickstart file uses.
                
                    The example begins by making a copy of the
                    directdisk.wks file in the
                    scripts/lib/image/canned-wks
                    directory and then changing the lines that specify the
                    target disk from which to boot.
                    
     $ cp /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/directdisk.wks \
          /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/directdisksdb.wks
                    
                    Next, the example modifies the
                    directdisksdb.wks file and changes all
                    instances of "--ondisk sda"
                    to "--ondisk sdb".
                    The example changes the following two lines and leaves the
                    remaining lines untouched:
                    
     part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios --ondisk sdb --label boot --active --align 1024
     part / --source rootfs --ondisk sdb --fstype=ext3 --label platform --align 1024
                    
                    Once the lines are changed, the example generates the
                    directdisksdb image.
                    The command points the process at the
                    core-image-minimal artifacts for the
                    Next Unit of Computing (nuc)
                    MACHINE
                    the local.conf.
                    
     $ wic create directdisksdb -e core-image-minimal
     Checking basic build environment...
     Done.
     Creating image(s)...
     Info: The new image(s) can be found here:
      /var/tmp/wic/build/directdisksdb-201310231131-sdb.direct
     The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
      ROOTFS_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/nuc-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
      BOOTIMG_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/nuc/usr/share
      KERNEL_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/nuc/usr/src/kernel
      NATIVE_SYSROOT: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/x86_64-linux
     The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
      /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/directdisksdb.wks
                    
                    Continuing with the example, you can now directly
                    dd the image to a USB stick, or
                    whatever media for which you built your image,
                    and boot the resulting media:
                    
     $ sudo dd if=/var/tmp/wic/build/directdisksdb-201310231131-sdb.direct of=/dev/sdb
     86018+0 records in
     86018+0 records out
     44041216 bytes (44 MB) copied, 13.0734 s, 3.4 MB/s
     [trz@empanada tmp]$ sudo eject /dev/sdb
                    
core-image-minimal and crownbay-noemgd¶
                    This example creates an image based on
                    core-image-minimal and a
                    crownbay-noemgd
                    MACHINE
                    that works right out of the box.
                    
     $ wic create directdisk -e core-image-minimal
     Checking basic build environment...
     Done.
     Creating image(s)...
     Info: The new image(s) can be found here:
      /var/tmp/wic/build/directdisk-201309252350-sda.direct
     The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
     ROOTFS_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/crownbay_noemgd-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
     BOOTIMG_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/share
     KERNEL_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/src/kernel
     NATIVE_SYSROOT: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/src/kernel
     The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
      /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/directdisk.wks
                    
                    This next example manually specifies each build artifact
                    (runs in Raw Mode) and uses a modified kickstart file.
                    The example also uses the -o option
                    to cause wic to create the output
                    somewhere other than the default
                    /var/tmp/wic directory:
                    
     $ wic create ~/test.wks -o /home/trz/testwic --rootfs-dir \
          /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/crownbay_noemgd-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs \
          --bootimg-dir /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/share \
          --kernel-dir /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/src/kernel \
          --native-sysroot /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/x86_64-linux
     Creating image(s)...
     Info: The new image(s) can be found here:
      /home/trz/testwic/build/test-201309260032-sda.direct
     The following build artifacts were used to create the image(s):
     ROOTFS_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/work/crownbay_noemgd-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/rootfs
     BOOTIMG_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/share
     KERNEL_DIR: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/src/kernel
     NATIVE_SYSROOT: /home/trz/yocto/yocto-image/build/tmp/sysroots/crownbay-noemgd/usr/src/kernel
     The image(s) were created using OE kickstart file:
      /home/trz/test.wks
                    
                    For this example,
                    MACHINE
                    did not have to be specified in the
                    local.conf file since the artifact is
                    manually specified.
                
	            Plug-ins allow wic functionality to
	            be extended and specialized by users.
                This section documents the plugin interface, which is
                currently restricted to source plug ins.
            
	            Source plug ins provide a mechanism to customize
	            various aspects of the image generation process in
	            wic, mainly the contents of
	            partitions.
	            The plug ins provide a mechanism for mapping values
	            specified in .wks files using the
	            --source keyword to a
                particular plugin implementation that populates a
                corresponding partition.
            
	            A source plugin is created as a subclass of
	            SourcePlugin.
                The plugin file containing it is added to
	            scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source/ to
	            make the plugin implementation available to the
	            wic implementation.
                For more information, see
	            scripts/lib/wic/pluginbase.py.
            
	            Source plugins can also be implemented and added by
	            external layers.
                As such, any plugins found in a
	            scripts/lib/wic/plugins/source/
	            directory in an external layer are also made
	            available.
            
	            When the wic implementation needs
	            to invoke a partition-specific implementation, it looks
	            for the plugin that has the same name as the
	            --source parameter given to
                that partition.
                For example, if the partition is set up as follows:
                
     part /boot --source bootimg-pcbios   ...
                
	            The methods defined as class members of the plugin
	            having the matching bootimg-pcbios.name
                class member are used.
            
	            To be more concrete, here is the plugin definition that
	            matches a
                --source bootimg-pcbios usage,
                along with an example
	            method called by the wic implementation
                when it needs to invoke an implementation-specific
	            partition-preparation function:
                
    class BootimgPcbiosPlugin(SourcePlugin):
        name = 'bootimg-pcbios'
    @classmethod
        def do_prepare_partition(self, part, ...)
                
	            If the subclass itself does not implement a function, a
	            default version in a superclass is located and
	            used, which is why all plugins must be derived from
	            SourcePlugin.
            
	            The SourcePlugin class defines the
	            following methods, which is the current set of methods
	            that can be implemented or overridden by
	            --source plugins.
                Any methods not implemented by a
                SourcePlugin subclass inherit the
                implementations present in the
	            SourcePlugin class.
                For more information, see the
	            SourcePlugin source for details:
            
do_prepare_partition():
                        Called to do the actual content population for a
                        partition.
                        In other words, the method prepares the final
                        partition image that is incorporated into the
                        disk image.
                        
do_configure_partition():
                        Called before
                        do_prepare_partition().
                        This method is typically used to create custom
                        configuration files for a partition (e.g. syslinux or
                        grub configuration files).
                        
do_install_disk():
                        Called after all partitions have been prepared and
                        assembled into a disk image.
                        This method provides a hook to allow finalization of a
                        disk image, (e.g. writing an MBR).
                        
do_stage_partition():
                        Special content-staging hook called before
                        do_prepare_partition().
                        This method is normally empty.
Typically, a partition just uses the passed-in
                        parameters (e.g. the unmodified value of
		                bootimg_dir).
                        However, in some cases things might need to be
                        more tailored.
                        As an example, certain files might additionally
                        need to be taken from
                        bootimg_dir + /boot.
		                This hook allows those files to be staged in a
		                customized fashion.
                        
get_bitbake_var()
                            allows you to access non-standard variables
                            that you might want to use for this.
                        
                This scheme is extensible.
                Adding more hooks is a simple matter of adding more
                plugin methods to SourcePlugin and
                derived classes.
                The code that then needs to call the plugin methods uses
                plugin.get_source_plugin_methods()
                to find the method or methods needed by the call.
                Retrieval of those methods is accomplished
                by filling up a dict with keys
                containing the method names of interest.
                On success, these will be filled in with the actual
                methods.
                Please see the wic
                implementation for examples and details.
            
                The current wic implementation supports
                only the basic kickstart partitioning commands:
                partition (or part
                for short) and bootloader.
                
                The following is a list of the commands, their syntax,
                and meanings.
                The commands are based on the Fedora
                kickstart versions but with modifications to
                reflect wic capabilities.
                You can see the original documentation for those commands
                at the following links:
                
Either of these commands create a partition on the system and uses the following syntax:
     part [mntpoint]
     partition [mntpoint]
                    
                    If you do not provide
                    mntpoint, wic creates a partition
                    but does not mount it.
                
                    The mntpoint
/:
                            For example, path/,
                            /usr, or
                            /home
swap:
                            The created partition is used as swap space.
                            
                    Specifying a mntpoint causes
                    the partition to automatically be mounted.
                    Wic achieves this by adding entries to the filesystem
                    table (fstab) during image generation.
                    In order for wic to generate a valid fstab, you must
                    also provide one of the --ondrive,
                    --ondisk, or
                    --use-uuid partition options as part
                    of the command.
                    Here is an example using "/" as the mountpoint.
                    The command uses "--ondisk" to force the partition onto
                    the sdb disk:
                    
     part / --source rootfs --ondisk sdb --fstype=ext3 --label platform --align 1024
                    
                    Here is a list that describes other supported options you
                    can use with the part and
                    partition commands:
                    
--size:
                            The minimum partition size in MBytes.
                            Specify an integer value such as 500.
                            Do not append the number with "MB".
                            You do not need this option if you use
                            --source.
--source:
                            This option is a
                            wic-specific option that
                            names the source of the data that populates
                            the partition.
                            The most common value for this option is
                            "rootfs", but you can use any value that maps to
                            a valid source plugin.
                            For information on the source plugins, see the
                            "Plugins"
                            section.
If you use
                            --source rootfs,
                            wic creates a partition as
                            large as needed and to fill it with the contents of
			                the root filesystem pointed to by the
			                -r command-line option
			                or the equivalent rootfs derived from the
			                -e command-line
			                option.
                            The filesystem type used to create the
                            partition is driven by the value of the
			                --fstype option
			                specified for the partition.
                            See the entry on
                            --fstype that
                            follows for more information.
			                
If you use
                            --source ,
                            plugin-namewic creates a partition as
                            large as needed and fills it with the contents of
                            the partition that is generated by the
                            specified plugin name using the data pointed
                            to by the -r command-line
                            option or the equivalent rootfs derived from the
			                -e command-line
			                option.
                            Exactly what those contents and filesystem type end
                            up being are dependent on the given plugin
                            implementation.
                            
If you do not use the
                            --source option, the
                            wic command creates an empty
                            partition.
                            Consequently, you must use the
                            --size option to specify the
                            size of the empty partition.
                            
--ondisk or --ondrive:
                            Forces the partition to be created on a particular
                            disk.
--fstype:
                            Sets the file system type for the partition.
                            Valid values are:
                            
ext4
                                
ext3
                                
ext2
                                
btrfs
                                
squashfs
                                
swap
                                
--fsoptions:
                            Specifies a free-form string of options to be
                            used when mounting the filesystem.
                            This string will be copied into the
                            /etc/fstab file of the
                            installed system and should be enclosed in
                            quotes.
                            If not specified, the default string
                            is "defaults".
                            
--label label:
                            Specifies the label to give to the filesystem to
                            be made on the partition.
                            If the given label is already in use by another
                            filesystem, a new label is created for the
                            partition.
--active:
                            Marks the partition as active.
--align (in KBytes):
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that says to start a partition on an
                            x KBytes boundary.
--no-table:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option.
                            Using the option reserves space for the partition
                            and causes it to become populated.
                            However, the partition is not added to the
                            partition table.
                            
--extra-space:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that adds extra space after the space
                            filled by the content of the partition.
                            The final size can go beyond the size specified
                            by the --size option.
                            The default value is 10 Mbytes.
                            
--overhead-factor:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that multiplies the size of the partition by
                            the option's value.
                            You must supply a value greater than or equal to
                            "1".
                            The default value is "1.3".
                            
--part-type:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that specifies the partition type globally
                            unique identifier (GUID) for GPT partitions.
                            You can find the list of partition type GUIDs
                            at
                            http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GUID_Partition_Table#Partition_type_GUIDs.
                            
--use-uuid:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that causes wic to
                            generate a random GUID for the partition.
                            The generated identifier is used in the bootloader
                            configuration to specify the root partition.
                            
--uuid:
                            This option is a wic-specific
                            option that specifies the partition UUID.
                            
This command specifies how the boot loader should be configured and supports the following options:
--source
			            plugins that implement bootloader functionality.
                        The bootloader command essentially provides a means of
                        modifying bootloader configuration.
                    
--timeout:
                            Specifies the number of seconds before the
                            bootloader times out and boots the default option.
                            
--append:
                            Specifies kernel parameters.
                            These parameters will be added to the syslinux
                            APPEND or
                            grub kernel command line.
                            
--configfile:
                            Specifies a user-defined configuration file for
                            the bootloader.
                            You can provide a full pathname for the file or
                            a file that exists in the
                            canned-wks folder.
                            This option overrides all other bootloader options.
                            
            Configuring the Yocto Project kernel consists of making sure the
            .config file has all the right information
            in it for the image you are building.
            You can use the menuconfig tool and
            configuration fragments to make sure your
            .config file is just how you need it.
            You can also save known configurations in a
            defconfig file that the build system can use
            for kernel configuration.
        
            This section describes how to use menuconfig,
            create and use configuration fragments, and how to interactively
            modify your .config file to create the
            leanest kernel configuration file possible.
        
For more information on kernel configuration, see the "Changing the Configuration" section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
menuconfig¶
                The easiest way to define kernel configurations is to set them through the
                menuconfig tool.
                This tool provides an interactive method with which
                to set kernel configurations.
                For general information on menuconfig, see
                http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Menuconfig.
            
                To use the menuconfig tool in the Yocto Project development
                environment, you must launch it using BitBake.
                Thus, the environment must be set up using the
                oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres
                script found in the
                Build Directory.
                You must also be sure of the state of your build in the
                Source Directory.
                The following commands run menuconfig
                assuming the Source Directory's top-level folder is
                ~/poky:
                
     $ cd poky
     $ source oe-init-build-env
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c kernel_configme -f
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c menuconfig
                
                Once menuconfig comes up, its standard
                interface allows you to interactively examine and configure
                all the kernel configuration parameters.
                After making your changes, simply exit the tool and save your
                changes to create an updated version of the
                .config configuration file.
            
                Consider an example that configures the linux-yocto-3.14
                kernel.
                The OpenEmbedded build system recognizes this kernel as
                linux-yocto.
                Thus, the following commands from the shell in which you previously sourced the
                environment initialization script cleans the shared state cache and the
                WORKDIR
                directory and then runs menuconfig:
                
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c menuconfig
                
                Once menuconfig launches, use the interface
                to navigate through the selections to find the configuration settings in
                which you are interested.
                For example, consider the CONFIG_SMP configuration setting.
                You can find it at Processor Type and Features under
                the configuration selection Symmetric Multi-processing Support.
                After highlighting the selection, use the arrow keys to select or deselect
                the setting.
                When you are finished with all your selections, exit out and save them.
            
                Saving the selections updates the .config configuration file.
                This is the file that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to configure the
                kernel during the build.
                You can find and examine this file in the Build Directory in
                tmp/work/.
                The actual .config is located in the area where the
                specific kernel is built.
                For example, if you were building a Linux Yocto kernel based on the
                Linux 3.14 kernel and you were building a QEMU image targeted for
                x86 architecture, the
                .config file would be located here:
                
     poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto-3.14.11+git1+84f...
        ...656ed30-r1/linux-qemux86-standard-build
                
linux-yocto-3.14... might differ.
                
                Within the .config file, you can see the kernel settings.
                For example, the following entry shows that symmetric multi-processor support
                is not set:
                
     # CONFIG_SMP is not set
                
                A good method to isolate changed configurations is to use a combination of the
                menuconfig tool and simple shell commands.
                Before changing configurations with menuconfig, copy the
                existing .config and rename it to something else,
                use menuconfig to make
                as many changes as you want and save them, then compare the renamed configuration
                file against the newly created file.
                You can use the resulting differences as your base to create configuration fragments
                to permanently save in your kernel layer.
                
.config and don't just
                    rename it.
                    The build system needs an existing .config
                    from which to work.
                
defconfig File¶
                A defconfig file is simply a
                .config renamed to "defconfig".
                You can use a defconfig file
                to retain a known set of kernel configurations from which the
                OpenEmbedded build system can draw to create the final
                .config file.
                
defconfig or
                    .config file.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system creates the final
                    .config file used to configure the
                    kernel.
                
                To create a defconfig, start with a
                complete, working Linux kernel .config
                file.
                Copy that file to the appropriate
                ${PN}
                directory in your layer's
                recipes-kernel/linux directory, and rename
                the copied file to "defconfig".
                Then, add the following lines to the linux-yocto
                .bbappend file in your layer:
                
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
     SRC_URI += "file://defconfig"
                
                The
                SRC_URI
                tells the build system how to search for the file, while the
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                extends the
                FILESPATH
                variable (search directories) to include the
                ${PN} directory you created to hold the
                configuration changes.
                
defconfig file before applying any
                    subsequent configuration fragments.
                    The final kernel configuration is a combination of the
                    configurations in the defconfig
                    file and any configuration fragments you provide.
                    You need to realize that if you have any configuration
                    fragments, the build system applies these on top of and
                    after applying the existing defconfig file configurations.
                For more information on configuring the kernel, see the "Changing the Configuration" and "Generating Configuration Files" sections, both in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
                Configuration fragments are simply kernel options that appear in a file
                placed where the OpenEmbedded build system can find and apply them.
                Syntactically, the configuration statement is identical to what would appear
                in the .config file, which is in the
                Build Directory:
                
     tmp/work/arch-poky-linux/linux-yocto-release_specific_string/linux-arch-build_type
                
                It is simple to create a configuration fragment.
                For example, issuing the following from the shell creates a configuration fragment
                file named my_smp.cfg that enables multi-processor support
                within the kernel:
                
     $ echo "CONFIG_SMP=y" >> my_smp.cfg
                
.cfg extension in order for the
                    OpenEmbedded build system to recognize them as a
                    configuration fragment.
                
                Where do you put your configuration fragment files?
                You can place these files in the same area pointed to by
                SRC_URI.
                The OpenEmbedded build system picks up the configuration and
                adds it to the kernel's configuration.
                For example, suppose you had a set of configuration options
                in a file called myconfig.cfg.
                If you put that file inside a directory named
                linux-yocto that resides in the same
                directory as the kernel's append file and then add a
                SRC_URI statement such as the following
                to the kernel's append file, those configuration options
                will be picked up and applied when the kernel is built.
                
     SRC_URI += "file://myconfig.cfg"
                
                As mentioned earlier, you can group related configurations into multiple files and
                name them all in the SRC_URI statement as well.
                For example, you could group separate configurations specifically for Ethernet and graphics
                into their own files and add those by using a SRC_URI statement like the
                following in your append file:
                
     SRC_URI += "file://myconfig.cfg \
            file://eth.cfg \
            file://gfx.cfg"
                
                You can make sure the .config file is as lean or efficient as
                possible by reading the output of the kernel configuration fragment audit,
                noting any issues, making changes to correct the issues, and then repeating.
            
                As part of the kernel build process, the
                do_kernel_configcheck task runs.
                This task validates the kernel configuration by checking the final
                .config file against the input files.
                During the check, the task produces warning messages for the following
                issues:
                
Requested options that did not make the final
                        .config file.
Configuration items that appear twice in the same configuration fragment.
Configuration items tagged as "required" that were overridden.
A board overrides a non-board specific option.
Listed options not valid for the kernel being processed. In other words, the option does not appear anywhere.
do_kernel_configcheck task can
                    also optionally report if an option is overridden during
                    processing.
                
For each output warning, a message points to the file that contains a list of the options and a pointer to the configuration fragment that defines them. Collectively, the files are the key to streamlining the configuration.
To streamline the configuration, do the following:
Start with a full configuration that you know works - it builds and boots successfully. This configuration file will be your baseline.
Separately run the
                        do_kernel_configme and
                        do_kernel_configcheck tasks.
                        
Take the resulting list of files from the
                        do_kernel_configcheck task
                        warnings and do the following:
                        
                                Drop values that are redefined in the fragment
                                but do not change the final
                                .config file.
                                
                                Analyze and potentially drop values from the
                                .config file that override
                                required configurations.
                                
Analyze and potentially remove non-board specific options.
Remove repeated and invalid options.
                        After you have worked through the output of the kernel
                        configuration audit, you can re-run the
                        do_kernel_configme and
                        do_kernel_configcheck tasks to
                        see the results of your changes.
                        If you have more issues, you can deal with them as
                        described in the previous step.
                        
                Iteratively working through steps two through four eventually yields
                a minimal, streamlined configuration file.
                Once you have the best .config, you can build the Linux
                Yocto kernel.
            
                This section describes part of the kernel configuration audit
                phase that most developers can ignore.
                During this part of the audit phase, the contents of the final
                .config file are compared against the
                fragments specified by the system.
                These fragments can be system fragments, distro fragments,
                or user specified configuration elements.
                Regardless of their origin, the OpenEmbedded build system
                warns the user if a specific option is not included in the
                final kernel configuration.
            
In order to not overwhelm the user with configuration warnings, by default the system only reports on missing "hardware" options because a missing hardware option could mean a boot failure or that important hardware is not available.
To determine whether or not a given option is "hardware" or "non-hardware", the kernel Metadata contains files that classify individual or groups of options as either hardware or non-hardware. To better show this, consider a situation where the Yocto Project kernel cache contains the following files:
     kernel-cache/features/drm-psb/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/features/kgdb/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/ktypes/base/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/mti-malta32/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/fsl-mpc8315e-rdb/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/qemu-ppc32/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/qemuarma9/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/mti-malta64/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/arm-versatile-926ejs/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/common-pc/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/bsp/common-pc-64/hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/features/rfkill/non-hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/ktypes/base/non-hardware.cfg
     kernel-cache/features/aufs/non-hardware.kcf
     kernel-cache/features/ocf/non-hardware.kcf
     kernel-cache/ktypes/base/non-hardware.kcf
     kernel-cache/ktypes/base/hardware.kcf
     kernel-cache/bsp/qemu-ppc32/hardware.kcf
                The following list provides explanations for the various files:
hardware.kcf:
                        Specifies a list of kernel Kconfig files that contain
                        hardware options only.
                        
non-hardware.kcf:
                        Specifies a list of kernel Kconfig files that contain
                        non-hardware options only.
                        
hardware.cfg:
                        Specifies a list of kernel
                        CONFIG_ options that are hardware,
                        regardless of whether or not they are within a Kconfig
                        file specified by a hardware or non-hardware
                        Kconfig file (i.e. hardware.kcf or
                        non-hardware.kcf).
                        
non-hardware.cfg:
                        Specifies a list of kernel
                        CONFIG_ options that are
                        not hardware, regardless of whether or not they are
                        within a Kconfig file specified by a hardware or
                        non-hardware Kconfig file (i.e.
                        hardware.kcf or
                        non-hardware.kcf).
                        
                Here is a specific example using the
                kernel-cache/bsp/mti-malta32/hardware.cfg:
                
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_CONSOLE
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_NR_UARTS
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_PCI
     CONFIG_SERIAL_CORE
     CONFIG_SERIAL_CORE_CONSOLE
     CONFIG_VGA_ARB
                
                The kernel configuration audit automatically detects these
                files (hence the names must be exactly the ones discussed here),
                and uses them as inputs when generating warnings about the
                final .config file.
            
                A user-specified kernel Metadata repository, or recipe space
                feature, can use these same files to classify options that are
                found within its .cfg files as hardware
                or non-hardware, to prevent the OpenEmbedded build system from
                producing an error or warning when an option is not in the
                final .config file.
            
Patching the kernel involves changing or adding configurations to an existing kernel, changing or adding recipes to the kernel that are needed to support specific hardware features, or even altering the source code itself.
yocto-kernel script
                found in the Source Directory
                under scripts to manage kernel patches and configuration.
                See the "Managing kernel Patches and Config Items with yocto-kernel"
                section in the Yocto Project Board Support Packages (BSP) Developer's Guide for
                more information.
            This example creates a simple patch by adding some QEMU emulator console
            output at boot time through printk statements in the kernel's
            calibrate.c source code file.
            Applying the patch and booting the modified image causes the added
            messages to appear on the emulator's console.
        
            The example assumes a clean build exists for the qemux86
            machine in a
            Source Directory
            named poky.
            Furthermore, the Build Directory is
            build and is located in poky and
            the kernel is based on the Linux 3.4 kernel.
        
Also, for more information on patching the kernel, see the "Applying Patches" section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
                The first step is to create a layer so you can isolate your
                changes.
                Rather than use the yocto-layer script
                to create the layer, this example steps through the process
                by hand.
                If you want information on the script that creates a general
                layer, see the
                "Creating a General Layer Using the yocto-layer Script"
                section.
            
These two commands create a directory you can use for your layer:
     $ cd ~/poky
     $ mkdir meta-mylayer
                Creating a directory that follows the Yocto Project layer naming conventions sets up the layer for your changes. The layer is where you place your configuration files, append files, and patch files. To learn more about creating a layer and filling it with the files you need, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section.
Each time you build a kernel image, the kernel source code is fetched and unpacked into the following directory:
     ${S}/linux
                
                See the "Finding Temporary Source Code"
                section and the
                S variable
                for more information about where source is kept during a build.
            
                For this example, we are going to patch the
                init/calibrate.c file
                by adding some simple console printk statements that we can
                see when we boot the image using QEMU.
            
                Two methods exist by which you can create the patch:
                devtool and
                Quilt.
                For kernel patches, the Git workflow is more appropriate.
                This section assumes the Git workflow and shows the steps specific to
                this example.
                
Change the working directory:
                        Change to where the kernel source code is before making
                        your edits to the calibrate.c file:
                        
     $ cd ~/poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto-${PV}-${PR}/linux
                        Because you are working in an established Git repository, you must be in this directory in order to commit your changes and create the patch file.
Edit the source file:
                        Edit the init/calibrate.c file to have the
                        following changes:
                        
     void calibrate_delay(void)
     {
         unsigned long lpj;
         static bool printed;
         int this_cpu = smp_processor_id();
         printk("*************************************\n");
         printk("*                                   *\n");
         printk("*        HELLO YOCTO KERNEL         *\n");
         printk("*                                   *\n");
         printk("*************************************\n");
     	if (per_cpu(cpu_loops_per_jiffy, this_cpu)) {
               .
               .
               .
                        Stage and commit your changes: These Git commands display the modified file, stage it, and then commit the file:
     $ git status
     $ git add init/calibrate.c
     $ git commit -m "calibrate: Add printk example"
                        Generate the patch file:
                        This Git command creates the a patch file named
                        0001-calibrate-Add-printk-example.patch
                        in the current directory.
                        
     $ git format-patch -1
                        
These steps get your layer set up for the build:
Create additional structure: Create the additional layer structure:
     $ cd ~/poky/meta-mylayer
     $ mkdir conf
     $ mkdir recipes-kernel
     $ mkdir recipes-kernel/linux
     $ mkdir recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto
                         
                         The conf directory holds your configuration files, while the
                         recipes-kernel directory holds your append file and
                         your patch file.
Create the layer configuration file:
                        Move to the meta-mylayer/conf directory and create
                        the layer.conf file as follows:
                        
     # We have a conf and classes directory, add to BBPATH
     BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
     # We have recipes-* directories, add to BBFILES
     BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
                 ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
     BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "mylayer"
     BBFILE_PATTERN_mylayer = "^${LAYERDIR}/"
     BBFILE_PRIORITY_mylayer = "5"
                         
                         Notice mylayer as part of the last three
                         statements.
Create the kernel recipe append file:
                        Move to the meta-mylayer/recipes-kernel/linux directory and create
                        the linux-yocto_3.4.bbappend file as follows:
                        
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
     SRC_URI += "file://0001-calibrate-Add-printk-example.patch"
                        
                        The FILESEXTRAPATHS
                        and SRC_URI
                        statements enable the OpenEmbedded build system to find the patch file.
                        For more information on using append files, see the
                        "Using .bbappend Files"
                        section.
                        
Put the patch file in your layer:
                        Move the 0001-calibrate-Add-printk-example.patch file to
                        the meta-mylayer/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto
                        directory.
Do the following to make sure the build parameters are set up for the example. Once you set up these build parameters, they do not have to change unless you change the target architecture of the machine you are building:
Build for the correct target architecture: Your
                        selected MACHINE
                        definition within the local.conf file in the
                        Build Directory
                        specifies the target architecture used when building the Linux kernel.
                        By default, MACHINE is set to
                        qemux86, which specifies a 32-bit
                        Intel® Architecture
                        target machine suitable for the QEMU emulator.
Identify your meta-mylayer
                        layer: The
                        BBLAYERS
                        variable in the
                        bblayers.conf file found in the
                        poky/build/conf directory needs to have the path to your local
                        meta-mylayer layer.
                        By default, the BBLAYERS variable contains paths to
                        meta, meta-poky, and
                        meta-yocto-bsp in the
                        poky Git repository.
                        Add the path to your meta-mylayer location:
                        
     BBLAYERS ?= " \
       $HOME/poky/meta \
       $HOME/poky/meta-poky \
       $HOME/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
       $HOME/poky/meta-mylayer \
       "
                        
The following steps build your modified kernel image:
Be sure your build environment is initialized:
                        Your environment should be set up since you previously sourced
                        the
                        oe-init-build-env
                        script.
                        If it is not, source the script again from poky.
                        
     $ cd ~/poky
     $ source oe-init-build-env
                        
Clean up:
                        Be sure to clean the shared state out by using BitBake
                        to run from within the Build Directory the
                        do_cleansstate
                        task as follows:
                        
     $ bitbake -c cleansstate linux-yocto
                        
tmp/deploy
                               directory inside the
                               Build Directory.
                               Always use the various BitBake clean tasks to
                               clear out previous build artifacts.
                               For information on the clean tasks, see the
                               "do_clean",
                               "do_cleanall",
                               and
                               "do_cleansstate"
                               sections all in the Yocto Project Reference
                               Manual.
                           
Build the image: Next, build the kernel image using this command:
     $ bitbake -k linux-yocto
                        
These steps boot the image and allow you to see the changes
Boot the image: Boot the modified image in the QEMU emulator using this command:
     $ runqemu qemux86
                        Verify the changes:
                        Log into the machine using root with no password and then
                        use the following shell command to scroll through the console's boot output.
                        
     # dmesg | less
                        
                        You should see the results of your printk statements
                        as part of the output.
Security is of increasing concern for embedded devices. Consider the issues and problems discussed in just this sampling of work found across the Internet:
"Security Risks of Embedded Systems" by Bruce Schneier
"Internet Census 2012" by Carna Botnet
"Security Issues for Embedded Devices" by Jake Edge
When securing your image is of concern, there are steps, tools, and variables that you can consider to help you reach the security goals you need for your particular device. Not all situations are identical when it comes to making an image secure. Consequently, this section provides some guidance and suggestions for consideration when you want to make your image more secure.
General considerations exist that help you create more secure images. You should consider the following suggestions to help make your device more secure:
Scan additional code you are adding to the system (e.g. application code) by using static analysis tools. Look for buffer overflows and other potential security problems.
Pay particular attention to the security for any web-based administration interface.
Web interfaces typically need to perform administrative functions and tend to need to run with elevated privileges. Thus, the consequences resulting from the interface's security becoming compromised can be serious. Look for common web vulnerabilities such as cross-site-scripting (XSS), unvalidated inputs, and so forth.
As with system passwords, the default credentials for accessing a web-based interface should not be the same across all devices. This is particularly true if the interface is enabled by default as it can be assumed that many end-users will not change the credentials.
Ensure you can update the software on the device to mitigate vulnerabilities discovered in the future. This consideration especially applies when your device is network-enabled.
Ensure you remove or disable debugging functionality before producing the final image. For information on how to do this, see the "Considerations Specific to the OpenEmbedded Build System" section.
Ensure you have no network services listening that are not needed.
Remove any software from the image that is not needed.
Enable hardware support for secure boot functionality when your device supports this functionality.
                The Yocto Project has security flags that you can enable that
                help make your build output more secure.
                The security flags are in the
                meta/conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc
                file in your
                Source Directory
                (e.g. poky).
                
                Use the following line in your
                local.conf file or in your custom
                distribution configuration file to enable the security
                compiler and linker flags for your build:
                
     require conf/distro/include/security_flags.inc
                
You can take some steps that are specific to the OpenEmbedded build system to make your images more secure:
                        Ensure "debug-tweaks" is not one of your selected
                        IMAGE_FEATURES.
                        When creating a new project, the default is to provide you
                        with an initial local.conf file that
                        enables this feature using the
                        EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES variable with the line:
                
     EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks"
                
                        To disable that feature, simply comment out that line in your
                        local.conf file, or
                        make sure IMAGE_FEATURES does not contain
                        "debug-tweaks" before producing your final image.
                        Among other things, leaving this in place sets the
                        root password as blank, which makes logging in for
                        debugging or inspection easy during
                        development but also means anyone can easily log in
                        during production.
                        
It is possible to set a root password for the image and also to set passwords for any extra users you might add (e.g. administrative or service type users). When you set up passwords for multiple images or users, you should not duplicate passwords.
                        To set up passwords, use the
                        extrausers
                        class, which is the preferred method.
                        For an example on how to set up both root and user
                        passwords, see the
                        "extrausers.bbclass"
                        section.
                        
                        Consider enabling a Mandatory Access Control (MAC)
                        framework such as SMACK or SELinux and tuning it
                        appropriately for your device's usage.
                        You can find more information in the
                        meta-selinux
                        layer.
                        
                The Yocto Project provides tools for making your image
                more secure.
                You can find these tools in the
                meta-security layer of the
                Yocto Project Source Repositories.
            
When you build an image using the Yocto Project and do not alter any distribution Metadata, you are creating a Poky distribution. If you wish to gain more control over package alternative selections, compile-time options, and other low-level configurations, you can create your own distribution.
To create your own distribution, the basic steps consist of creating your own distribution layer, creating your own distribution configuration file, and then adding any needed code and Metadata to the layer. The following steps provide some more detail:
Create a layer for your new distro:
                    Create your distribution layer so that you can keep your
                    Metadata and code for the distribution separate.
                    It is strongly recommended that you create and use your own
                    layer for configuration and code.
                    Using your own layer as compared to just placing
                    configurations in a local.conf
                    configuration file makes it easier to reproduce the same
                    build configuration when using multiple build machines.
                    See the
                    "Creating a General Layer Using the yocto-layer Script"
                    section for information on how to quickly set up a layer.
                    
Create the distribution configuration file:
                    The distribution configuration file needs to be created in
                    the conf/distro directory of your
                    layer.
                    You need to name it using your distribution name
                    (e.g. mydistro.conf).
                    
You can split out parts of your configuration file
                    into include files and then "require" them from within
                    your distribution configuration file.
                    Be sure to place the include files in the
                    conf/distro/include directory of
                    your layer.
                    A common example usage of include files would be to
                    separate out the selection of desired version and revisions
                    for individual recipes.
Your configuration file needs to set the following required variables:
     DISTRO_NAME
     DISTRO_VERSION
                    These following variables are optional and you typically set them from the distribution configuration file:
     DISTRO_FEATURES
     DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS
     DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS
     TCLIBC
                    
conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf as
                        a reference and just include variables that differ
                        as compared to defaultsetup.conf.
                        Alternatively, you can create a distribution
                        configuration file from scratch using the
                        defaultsetup.conf file
                        or configuration files from other distributions
                        such as Poky or Angstrom as references.
                    Provide miscellaneous variables:
                    Be sure to define any other variables for which you want to
                    create a default or enforce as part of the distribution
                    configuration.
                    You can include nearly any variable from the
                    local.conf file.
                    The variables you use are not limited to the list in the
                    previous bulleted item.
Point to Your distribution configuration file:
                    In your local.conf file in the
                    Build Directory,
                    set your
                    DISTRO
                    variable to point to your distribution's configuration file.
                    For example, if your distribution's configuration file is
                    named mydistro.conf, then you point
                    to it as follows:
                    
     DISTRO = "mydistro"
                    Add more to the layer if necessary: Use your layer to hold other information needed for the distribution:
Add recipes for installing
                            distro-specific configuration files that are not
                            already installed by another recipe.
                            If you have distro-specific configuration files
                            that are included by an existing recipe, you should
                            add an append file (.bbappend)
                            for those.
                            For general information and recommendations
                            on how to add recipes to your layer, see the
                            "Creating Your Own Layer"
                            and
                            "Best Practices to Follow When Creating Layers"
                            sections.
Add any image recipes that are specific to your distribution.
Add a psplash
                            append file for a branded splash screen.
                            For information on append files, see the
                            "Using .bbappend Files"
                            section.
Add any other append files to make custom changes that are specific to individual recipes.
            If you are producing your own customized version
            of the build system for use by other users, you might
            want to customize the message shown by the setup script or
            you might want to change the template configuration files (i.e.
            local.conf and
            bblayers.conf) that are created in
            a new build directory.
        
            The OpenEmbedded build system uses the environment variable
            TEMPLATECONF to locate the directory
            from which it gathers configuration information that ultimately
            ends up in the
            Build Directory's
            conf directory.
            By default, TEMPLATECONF is set as
            follows in the poky repository:
            
     TEMPLATECONF=${TEMPLATECONF:-meta-poky/conf}
            
            This is the directory used by the build system to find templates
            from which to build some key configuration files.
            If you look at this directory, you will see the
            bblayers.conf.sample,
            local.conf.sample, and
            conf-notes.txt files.
            The build system uses these files to form the respective
            bblayers.conf file,
            local.conf file, and display the list of
            BitBake targets when running the setup script.
        
            To override these default configuration files with
            configurations you want used within every new
            Build Directory, simply set the
            TEMPLATECONF variable to your directory.
            The TEMPLATECONF variable is set in the
            .templateconf file, which is in the
            top-level
            Source Directory
            folder (e.g. poky).
            Edit the .templateconf so that it can locate
            your directory.
        
            Best practices dictate that you should keep your
            template configuration directory in your custom distribution layer.
            For example, suppose you have a layer named
            meta-mylayer located in your home directory
            and you want your template configuration directory named
            myconf.
            Changing the .templateconf as follows
            causes the OpenEmbedded build system to look in your directory
            and base its configuration files on the
            *.sample configuration files it finds.
            The final configuration files (i.e.
            local.conf and
            bblayers.conf ultimately still end up in
            your Build Directory, but they are based on your
            *.sample files.
            
     TEMPLATECONF=${TEMPLATECONF:-meta-mylayer/myconf}
            
            Aside from the *.sample configuration files,
            the conf-notes.txt also resides in the
            default meta-poky/conf directory.
            The scripts that set up the build environment
            (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            and
            oe-init-build-env-memres)
            use this file to display BitBake targets as part of the script
            output.
            Customizing this conf-notes.txt file is a
            good way to make sure your list of custom targets appears
            as part of the script's output.
        
Here is the default list of targets displayed as a result of running either of the setup scripts:
     You can now run 'bitbake <target>'
     Common targets are:
         core-image-minimal
         core-image-sato
         meta-toolchain
         meta-ide-support
            
            Changing the listed common targets is as easy as editing your
            version of conf-notes.txt in your
            custom template configuration directory and making sure you
            have TEMPLATECONF set to your directory.
        
Very small distributions have some significant advantages such as requiring less on-die or in-package memory (cheaper), better performance through efficient cache usage, lower power requirements due to less memory, faster boot times, and reduced development overhead. Some real-world examples where a very small distribution gives you distinct advantages are digital cameras, medical devices, and small headless systems.
            This section presents information that shows you how you can
            trim your distribution to even smaller sizes than the
            poky-tiny distribution, which is around
            5 Mbytes, that can be built out-of-the-box using the Yocto Project.
        
The following list presents the overall steps you need to consider and perform to create distributions with smaller root filesystems, achieve faster boot times, maintain your critical functionality, and avoid initial RAM disks:
Before you can reach your destination, you need to know where you are going. Here is an example list that you can use as a guide when creating very small distributions:
Determine how much space you need (e.g. a kernel that is 1 Mbyte or less and a root filesystem that is 3 Mbytes or less).
Find the areas that are currently taking 90% of the space and concentrate on reducing those areas.
Do not create any difficult "hacks" to achieve your goals.
Leverage the device-specific options.
Work in a separate layer so that you keep changes isolated. For information on how to create layers, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section.
                It is easiest to have something to start with when creating
                your own distribution.
                You can use the Yocto Project out-of-the-box to create the
                poky-tiny distribution.
                Ultimately, you will want to make changes in your own
                distribution that are likely modeled after
                poky-tiny.
                
poky-tiny in your build,
                    set the
                    DISTRO
                    variable in your
                    local.conf file to "poky-tiny"
                    as described in the
                    "Creating Your Own Distribution"
                    section.
                
                Understanding some memory concepts will help you reduce the
                system size.
                Memory consists of static, dynamic, and temporary memory.
                Static memory is the TEXT (code), DATA (initialized data
                in the code), and BSS (uninitialized data) sections.
                Dynamic memory represents memory that is allocated at runtime:
                stacks, hash tables, and so forth.
                Temporary memory is recovered after the boot process.
                This memory consists of memory used for decompressing
                the kernel and for the __init__
                functions.
            
                To help you see where you currently are with kernel and root
                filesystem sizes, you can use two tools found in the
                Source Directory in
                the scripts/tiny/ directory:
                
ksize.py: Reports
                        component sizes for the kernel build objects.
                        
dirsize.py: Reports
                        component sizes for the root filesystem.
This next tool and command help you organize configuration fragments and view file dependencies in a human-readable form:
merge_config.sh:
                        Helps you manage configuration files and fragments
                        within the kernel.
                        With this tool, you can merge individual configuration
                        fragments together.
                        The tool allows you to make overrides and warns you
                        of any missing configuration options.
                        The tool is ideal for allowing you to iterate on
                        configurations, create minimal configurations, and
                        create configuration files for different machines
                        without having to duplicate your process.
The merge_config.sh script is
                        part of the Linux Yocto kernel Git repositories
                        (i.e. linux-yocto-3.14,
                        linux-yocto-3.10,
                        linux-yocto-3.8, and so forth)
                        in the
                        scripts/kconfig directory.
For more information on configuration fragments, see the "Generating Configuration Files" section of the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual and the "Creating Configuration Fragments" section, which is in this manual.
bitbake -u depexp -g :
                        Using the BitBake command with these options brings up
                        a Dependency Explorer from which you can view file
                        dependencies.
                        Understanding these dependencies allows you to make
                        informed decisions when cutting out various pieces of the
                        kernel and root filesystem.bitbake_target
The root filesystem is made up of packages for booting, libraries, and applications. To change things, you can configure how the packaging happens, which changes the way you build them. You can also modify the filesystem itself or select a different filesystem.
                First, find out what is hogging your root filesystem by running the
                dirsize.py script from your root directory:
                
     $ cd root-directory-of-image
     $ dirsize.py 100000 > dirsize-100k.log
     $ cat dirsize-100k.log
                You can apply a filter to the script to ignore files under a certain size. The previous example filters out any files below 100 Kbytes. The sizes reported by the tool are uncompressed, and thus will be smaller by a relatively constant factor in a compressed root filesystem. When you examine your log file, you can focus on areas of the root filesystem that take up large amounts of memory.
You need to be sure that what you eliminate does not cripple the functionality you need. One way to see how packages relate to each other is by using the Dependency Explorer UI with the BitBake command:
     $ cd image-directory
     $ bitbake -u depexp -g image
                Use the interface to select potential packages you wish to eliminate and see their dependency relationships.
                When deciding how to reduce the size, get rid of packages that
                result in minimal impact on the feature set.
                For example, you might not need a VGA display.
                Or, you might be able to get by with devtmpfs
                and mdev instead of
                udev.
            
                Use your local.conf file to make changes.
                For example, to eliminate udev and
                glib, set the following in the
                local configuration file:
                
     VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = ""
                
                Finally, you should consider exactly the type of root
                filesystem you need to meet your needs while also reducing
                its size.
                For example, consider cramfs,
                squashfs, ubifs,
                ext2, or an initramfs
                using initramfs.
                Be aware that ext3 requires a 1 Mbyte
                journal.
                If you are okay with running read-only, you do not need this
                journal.
            
The kernel is built by including policies for hardware-independent aspects. What subsystems do you enable? For what architecture are you building? Which drivers do you build by default?
                Run the ksize.py script from the top-level
                Linux build directory to get an idea of what is making up
                the kernel:
                
     $ cd top-level-linux-build-directory
     $ ksize.py > ksize.log
     $ cat ksize.log
                
                When you examine the log, you will see how much space is
                taken up with the built-in .o files for
                drivers, networking, core kernel files, filesystem, sound,
                and so forth.
                The sizes reported by the tool are uncompressed, and thus
                will be smaller by a relatively constant factor in a compressed
                kernel image.
                Look to reduce the areas that are large and taking up around
                the "90% rule."
            
                To examine, or drill down, into any particular area, use the
                -d option with the script:
                
     $ ksize.py -d > ksize.log
                Using this option breaks out the individual file information for each area of the kernel (e.g. drivers, networking, and so forth).
Use your log file to see what you can eliminate from the kernel based on features you can let go. For example, if you are not going to need sound, you do not need any drivers that support sound.
                After figuring out what to eliminate, you need to reconfigure
                the kernel to reflect those changes during the next build.
                You could run menuconfig and make all your
                changes at once.
                However, that makes it difficult to see the effects of your
                individual eliminations and also makes it difficult to replicate
                the changes for perhaps another target device.
                A better method is to start with no configurations using
                allnoconfig, create configuration
                fragments for individual changes, and then manage the
                fragments into a single configuration file using
                merge_config.sh.
                The tool makes it easy for you to iterate using the
                configuration change and build cycle.
            
Each time you make configuration changes, you need to rebuild the kernel and check to see what impact your changes had on the overall size.
Packaging requirements add size to the image. One way to reduce the size of the image is to remove all the packaging requirements from the image. This reduction includes both removing the package manager and its unique dependencies as well as removing the package management data itself.
                To eliminate all the packaging requirements for an image,
                be sure that "package-management" is not part of your
                IMAGE_FEATURES
                statement for the image.
                When you remove this feature, you are removing the package
                manager as well as its dependencies from the root filesystem.
            
Depending on your particular circumstances, other areas that you can trim likely exist. The key to finding these areas is through tools and methods described here combined with experimentation and iteration. Here are a couple of areas to experiment with:
glibc:
                        In general, follow this process:
                        
Remove glibc
                                features from
                                DISTRO_FEATURES
                                that you think you do not need.
Build your distribution.
If the build fails due to missing
                                symbols in a package, determine if you can
                                reconfigure the package to not need those
                                features.
                                For example, change the configuration to not
                                support wide character support as is done for
                                ncurses.
                                Or, if support for those characters is needed,
                                determine what glibc
                                features provide the support and restore the
                                configuration.
                                
Rebuild and repeat the process.
busybox:
                        For BusyBox, use a process similar as described for
                        glibc.
                        A difference is you will need to boot the resulting
                        system to see if you are able to do everything you
                        expect from the running system.
                        You need to be sure to integrate configuration fragments
                        into Busybox because BusyBox handles its own core
                        features and then allows you to add configuration
                        fragments on top.
                        
If you have not reached your goals on system size, you need to iterate on the process. The process is the same. Use the tools and see just what is taking up 90% of the root filesystem and the kernel. Decide what you can eliminate without limiting your device beyond what you need.
Depending on your system, a good place to look might be Busybox, which provides a stripped down version of Unix tools in a single, executable file. You might be able to drop virtual terminal services or perhaps ipv6.
            A common scenario developers face is creating images for several
            different machines that use the same software environment.
            In this situation, it is tempting to set the
            tunings and optimization flags for each build specifically for
            the targeted hardware (i.e. "maxing out" the tunings).
            Doing so can considerably add to build times and package feed
            maintenance collectively for the machines.
            For example, selecting tunes that are extremely specific to a
            CPU core used in a system might enable some micro optimizations
            in GCC for that particular system but would otherwise not gain
            you much of a performance difference across the other systems
            as compared to using a more general tuning across all the builds
            (e.g. setting
            DEFAULTTUNE
            specifically for each machine's build).
            Rather than "max out" each build's tunings, you can take steps that
            cause the OpenEmbedded build system to reuse software across the
            various machines where it makes sense.
        
If build speed and package feed maintenance are considerations, you should consider the points in this section that can help you optimize your tunings to best consider build times and package feed maintenance.
Share the Build Directory:
                    If at all possible, share the
                    TMPDIR
                    across builds.
                    The Yocto Project supports switching between different
                    MACHINE
                    values in the same TMPDIR.
                    This practice is well supported and regularly used by
                    developers when building for multiple machines.
                    When you use the same TMPDIR for
                    multiple machine builds, the OpenEmbedded build system can
                    reuse the existing native and often cross-recipes for
                    multiple machines.
                    Thus, build time decreases.
                    
DISTRO
                        settings change or fundamental configuration settings
                        such as the filesystem layout, you need to work with
                        a clean TMPDIR.
                        Sharing TMPDIR under these
                        circumstances might work but since it is not
                        guaranteed, you should use a clean
                        TMPDIR.
                    
Enable the Appropriate Package Architecture: By default, the OpenEmbedded build system enables three levels of package architectures: "all", "tune" or "package", and "machine". Any given recipe usually selects one of these package architectures (types) for its output. Depending for what a given recipe creates packages, making sure you enable the appropriate package architecture can directly impact the build time.
A recipe that just generates scripts can enable
                    "all" architecture because there are no binaries to build.
                    To specifically enable "all" architecture, be sure your
                    recipe inherits the
                    allarch
                    class.
                    This class is useful for "all" architectures because it
                    configures many variables so packages can be used across
                    multiple architectures.
If your recipe needs to generate packages that are
                    machine-specific or when one of the build or runtime
                    dependencies is already machine-architecture dependent,
                    which makes your recipe also machine-architecture dependent,
                    make sure your recipe enables the "machine" package
                    architecture through the
                    MACHINE_ARCH
                    variable:
                    
     PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
                    
                    When you do not specifically enable a package
                    architecture through the
                    PACKAGE_ARCH,
                    The OpenEmbedded build system defaults to the
                    TUNE_PKGARCH
                    setting:
                    
     PACKAGE_ARCH = "${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
                    
Choose a Generic Tuning File if Possible:
                    Some tunes are more generic and can run on multiple targets
                    (e.g. an armv5 set of packages could
                    run on armv6 and
                    armv7 processors in most cases).
                    Similarly, i486 binaries could work
                    on i586 and higher processors.
                    You should realize, however, that advances on newer
                    processor versions would not be used.
If you select the same tune for several different machines, the OpenEmbedded build system reuses software previously built, thus speeding up the overall build time. Realize that even though a new sysroot for each machine is generated, the software is not recompiled and only one package feed exists.
Manage Granular Level Packaging:
                    Sometimes cases exist where injecting another level
                    of package architecture beyond the three higher levels
                    noted earlier can be useful.
                    For example, consider the emgd
                    graphics stack in the
                    meta-intel layer.
                    In this layer, a subset of software exists that is
                    compiled against something different from the rest of the
                    generic packages.
                    You can examine the key code in the
                    Source Repositories
                    "daisy" branch in
                    classes/emgd-gl.bbclass.
                    For a specific set of packages, the code redefines
                    PACKAGE_ARCH.
                    PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS
                    is then appended with this extra tune name in
                    meta-intel-emgd.inc.
                    The result is that when searching for packages, the
                    build system uses a four-level search and the packages
                    in this new level are preferred as compared to the standard
                    tune.
                    The overall result is that the build system reuses most
                    software from the common tune except for specific cases
                    as needed.
                    
Use Tools to Debug Issues:
                    Sometimes you can run into situations where software is
                    being rebuilt when you think it should not be.
                    For example, the OpenEmbedded build system might not be
                    using shared state between machines when you think it
                    should be.
                    These types of situations are usually due to references
                    to machine-specific variables such as
                    MACHINE,
                    SERIAL_CONSOLE,
                    XSERVER,
                    MACHINE_FEATURES,
                    and so forth in code that is supposed to only be
                    tune-specific or when the recipe depends
                    (DEPENDS,
                    RDEPENDS,
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    RSUGGESTS,
                    and so forth) on some other recipe that already has
                    PACKAGE_ARCH
                    defined as "${MACHINE_ARCH}".
                    
For such cases, you can use some tools to help you sort out the situation:
sstate-diff-machines.sh:
                            You can find this tool in the
                            scripts directory of the
                            Source Repositories.
                            See the comments in the script for information on
                            how to use the tool.
                            
BitBake's "-S printdiff" Option:
                            Using this option causes BitBake to try to
                            establish the closest signature match it can
                            (e.g. in the shared state cache) and then run
                            bitbake-diffsigs over the
                            matches to determine the stamps and delta where
                            these two stamp trees diverge.
                            
This section describes a few tasks that involve packages:
You might find it necessary to prevent specific packages from being installed into an image. If so, you can use several variables to direct the build system to essentially ignore installing recommended packages or to not install a package at all.
                The following list introduces variables you can use to
                prevent packages from being installed into your image.
                Each of these variables only works with IPK and RPM
                package types.
                Support for Debian packages does not exist.
                Also, you can use these variables from your
                local.conf file or attach them to a
                specific image recipe by using a recipe name override.
                For more detail on the variables, see the descriptions in the
                Yocto Project Reference Manual's glossary chapter.
                
BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS:
                        Use this variable to specify "recommended-only"
                        packages that you do not want installed.
                        
NO_RECOMMENDATIONS:
                        Use this variable to prevent all "recommended-only"
                        packages from being installed.
                        
PACKAGE_EXCLUDE:
                        Use this variable to prevent specific packages from
                        being installed regardless of whether they are
                        "recommended-only" or not.
                        You need to realize that the build process could
                        fail with an error when you
                        prevent the installation of a package whose presence
                        is required by an installed package.
                        
                If a committed change results in changing the package output,
                then the value of the
                PR
                variable needs to be increased (or "bumped").
                Increasing PR occurs one of two ways:
                
Automatically using a Package Revision Service (PR Service).
Manually incrementing the
                        PR variable.
Given that one of the challenges any build system and its users face is how to maintain a package feed that is compatible with existing package manager applications such as RPM, APT, and OPKG, using an automated system is much preferred over a manual system. In either system, the main requirement is that version numbering increases in a linear fashion and that a number of version components exist that support that linear progression.
                The following two sections provide information on the PR Service
                and on manual PR bumping.
            
As mentioned, attempting to maintain revision numbers in the Metadata is error prone, inaccurate, and causes problems for people submitting recipes. Conversely, the PR Service automatically generates increasing numbers, particularly the revision field, which removes the human element.
                    The Yocto Project uses variables in order of
                    decreasing priority to facilitate revision numbering (i.e.
                    PE,
                    PV, and
                    PR
                    for epoch, version, and revision, respectively).
                    The values are highly dependent on the policies and
                    procedures of a given distribution and package feed.
                
                    Because the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    "signatures",
                    which are unique to a given build, the build system
                    knows when to rebuild packages.
                    All the inputs into a given task are represented by a
                    signature, which can trigger a rebuild when different.
                    Thus, the build system itself does not rely on the
                    PR numbers to trigger a rebuild.
                    The signatures, however, can be used to generate
                    PR values.
                
                    The PR Service works with both
                    OEBasic and
                    OEBasicHash generators.
                    The value of PR bumps when the
                    checksum changes and the different generator mechanisms
                    change signatures under different circumstances.
                
                    As implemented, the build system includes values from
                    the PR Service into the PR field as
                    an addition using the form ".x" so
                    r0 becomes r0.1,
                    r0.2 and so forth.
                    This scheme allows existing PR values
                    to be used for whatever reasons, which include manual
                    PR bumps, should it be necessary.
                
By default, the PR Service is not enabled or running. Thus, the packages generated are just "self consistent". The build system adds and removes packages and there are no guarantees about upgrade paths but images will be consistent and correct with the latest changes.
                    The simplest form for a PR Service is for it to exist
                    for a single host development system that builds the
                    package feed (building system).
                    For this scenario, you can enable a local PR Service by
                    setting
                    PRSERV_HOST
                    in your local.conf file in the
                    Build Directory:
                    
     PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
                    
                    Once the service is started, packages will automatically
                    get increasing PR values and
                    BitBake will take care of starting and stopping the server.
                
                    If you have a more complex setup where multiple host
                    development systems work against a common, shared package
                    feed, you have a single PR Service running and it is
                    connected to each building system.
                    For this scenario, you need to start the PR Service using
                    the bitbake-prserv command:
                    
     bitbake-prserv --host ip --port port --start
                    
                    In addition to hand-starting the service, you need to
                    update the local.conf file of each
                    building system as described earlier so each system
                    points to the server and port.
                
                    It is also recommended you use build history, which adds
                    some sanity checks to package versions, in conjunction with
                    the server that is running the PR Service.
                    To enable build history, add the following to each building
                    system's local.conf file:
                    
     # It is recommended to activate "buildhistory" for testing the PR service
     INHERIT += "buildhistory"
     BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
                    For information on build history, see the "Maintaining Build Output Quality" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
The OpenEmbedded build system does not maintain
                    PR information as part of the
                    shared state (sstate) packages.
                    If you maintain an sstate feed, its expected that either
                    all your building systems that contribute to the sstate
                    feed use a shared PR Service, or you do not run a PR
                    Service on any of your building systems.
                    Having some systems use a PR Service while others do
                    not leads to obvious problems.
For more information on shared state, see the "Shared State Cache" section in the Yocto Project Reference Manual.
                    The alternative to setting up a PR Service is to manually
                    bump the
                    PR
                    variable.
                
                    If a committed change results in changing the package
                    output, then the value of the PR variable needs to be
                    increased (or "bumped") as part of that commit.
                    For new recipes you should add the PR
                    variable and set its initial value equal to "r0", which is
                    the default.
                    Even though the default value is "r0", the practice of
                    adding it to a new recipe makes it harder to forget to bump
                    the variable when you make changes to the recipe in future.
                
                    If you are sharing a common .inc file
                    with multiple recipes, you can also use the
                    INC_PR
                    variable to ensure that the recipes sharing the
                    .inc file are rebuilt when the
                    .inc file itself is changed.
                    The .inc file must set
                    INC_PR (initially to "r0"), and all
                    recipes referring to it should set PR
                    to "${INC_PR}.0" initially, incrementing the last number
                    when the recipe is changed.
                    If the .inc file is changed then its
                    INC_PR should be incremented.
                
                    When upgrading the version of a package, assuming the
                    PV
                    changes, the PR variable should be
                    reset to "r0" (or "${INC_PR}.0" if you are using
                    INC_PR).
                
                    Usually, version increases occur only to packages.
                    However, if for some reason PV changes
                    but does not increase, you can increase the
                    PE
                    variable (Package Epoch).
                    The PE variable defaults to "0".
                
Version numbering strives to follow the Debian Version Field Policy Guidelines. These guidelines define how versions are compared and what "increasing" a version means.
Many pieces of software split functionality into optional modules (or plug-ins) and the plug-ins that are built might depend on configuration options. To avoid having to duplicate the logic that determines what modules are available in your recipe or to avoid having to package each module by hand, the OpenEmbedded build system provides functionality to handle module packaging dynamically.
To handle optional module packaging, you need to do two things:
Ensure the module packaging is actually done.
Ensure that any dependencies on optional modules from other recipes are satisfied by your recipe.
                    To ensure the module packaging actually gets done, you use
                    the do_split_packages function within
                    the populate_packages Python function
                    in your recipe.
                    The do_split_packages function
                    searches for a pattern of files or directories under a
                    specified path and creates a package for each one it finds
                    by appending to the
                    PACKAGES
                    variable and setting the appropriate values for
                    FILES_packagename,
                    RDEPENDS_packagename,
                    DESCRIPTION_packagename, and so forth.
                    Here is an example from the lighttpd
                    recipe:
                    
     python populate_packages_prepend () {
         lighttpd_libdir = d.expand('${libdir}')
         do_split_packages(d, lighttpd_libdir, '^mod_(.*)\.so$',
                          'lighttpd-module-%s', 'Lighttpd module for %s',
                           extra_depends='')
     }
                    
                    The previous example specifies a number of things in the
                    call to do_split_packages.
                    
A directory within the files installed
                            by your recipe through do_install
                            in which to search.
A regular expression used to match module files in that directory. In the example, note the parentheses () that mark the part of the expression from which the module name should be derived.
A pattern to use for the package names.
A description for each package.
An empty string for
                            extra_depends, which disables
                            the default dependency on the main
                            lighttpd package.
                            Thus, if a file in ${libdir}
                            called mod_alias.so is found,
                            a package called lighttpd-module-alias
                            is created for it and the
                            DESCRIPTION
                            is set to "Lighttpd module for alias".
                    Often, packaging modules is as simple as the previous
                    example.
                    However, more advanced options exist that you can use
                    within do_split_packages to modify its
                    behavior.
                    And, if you need to, you can add more logic by specifying
                    a hook function that is called for each package.
                    It is also perfectly acceptable to call
                    do_split_packages multiple times if
                    you have more than one set of modules to package.
                
                    For more examples that show how to use
                    do_split_packages, see the
                    connman.inc file in the
                    meta/recipes-connectivity/connman/
                    directory of the poky
                    source repository.
                    You can also find examples in
                    meta/classes/kernel.bbclass.
                 
                     Following is a reference that shows
                     do_split_packages mandatory and
                     optional arguments:
                     
     Mandatory arguments
     root
        The path in which to search
     file_regex
        Regular expression to match searched files.
        Use parentheses () to mark the part of this
        expression that should be used to derive the
        module name (to be substituted where %s is
        used in other function arguments as noted below)
     output_pattern
        Pattern to use for the package names. Must
        include %s.
     description
        Description to set for each package. Must
        include %s.
     Optional arguments
     postinst
        Postinstall script to use for all packages
        (as a string)
     recursive
        True to perform a recursive search - default
        False
     hook
        A hook function to be called for every match.
        The function will be called with the following
        arguments (in the order listed):
        f
           Full path to the file/directory match
        pkg
           The package name
        file_regex
           As above
        output_pattern
           As above
        modulename
           The module name derived using file_regex
     extra_depends
        Extra runtime dependencies (RDEPENDS) to be
        set for all packages. The default value of None
        causes a dependency on the main package
        (${PN}) - if you do not want this, pass empty
        string '' for this parameter.
     aux_files_pattern
        Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
        package. Can be a single string item or a list
        of strings for multiple items. Must include %s.
     postrm
        postrm script to use for all packages (as a
        string)
     allow_dirs
        True to allow directories to be matched -
        default False
     prepend
        If True, prepend created packages to PACKAGES
        instead of the default False which appends them
     match_path
        match file_regex on the whole relative path to
        the root rather than just the file name
     aux_files_pattern_verbatim
        Extra item(s) to be added to FILES for each
        package, using the actual derived module name
        rather than converting it to something legal
        for a package name. Can be a single string item
        or a list of strings for multiple items. Must
        include %s.
     allow_links
        True to allow symlinks to be matched - default
        False
     summary
        Summary to set for each package. Must include %s;
        defaults to description if not set.
                     
                    The second part for handling optional module packaging
                    is to ensure that any dependencies on optional modules
                    from other recipes are satisfied by your recipe.
                    You can be sure these dependencies are satisfied by
                    using the
                    PACKAGES_DYNAMIC variable.
                    Here is an example that continues with the
                    lighttpd recipe shown earlier:
                    
     PACKAGES_DYNAMIC = "lighttpd-module-.*"
                    
                    The name specified in the regular expression can of
                    course be anything.
                    In this example, it is lighttpd-module-
                    and is specified as the prefix to ensure that any
                    RDEPENDS
                    and RRECOMMENDS
                    on a package name starting with the prefix are satisfied
                    during build time.
                    If you are using do_split_packages
                    as described in the previous section, the value you put in
                    PACKAGES_DYNAMIC should correspond to
                    the name pattern specified in the call to
                    do_split_packages.
                
                During a build, BitBake always transforms a recipe into one or
                more packages.
                For example, BitBake takes the bash recipe
                and currently produces the bash-dbg,
                bash-staticdev,
                bash-dev, bash-doc,
                bash-locale, and
                bash packages.
                Not all generated packages are included in an image.
            
In several situations, you might need to update, add, remove, or query the packages on a target device at runtime (i.e. without having to generate a new image). Examples of such situations include:
You want to provide in-the-field updates to deployed devices (e.g. security updates).
You want to have a fast turn-around development cycle for one or more applications that run on your device.
You want to temporarily install the "debug" packages of various applications on your device so that debugging can be greatly improved by allowing access to symbols and source debugging.
You want to deploy a more minimal package selection of your device but allow in-the-field updates to add a larger selection for customization.
In all these situations, you have something similar to a more traditional Linux distribution in that in-field devices are able to receive pre-compiled packages from a server for installation or update. Being able to install these packages on a running, in-field device is what is termed "runtime package management".
In order to use runtime package management, you need a host/server machine that serves up the pre-compiled packages plus the required metadata. You also need package manipulation tools on the target. The build machine is a likely candidate to act as the server. However, that machine does not necessarily have to be the package server. The build machine could push its artifacts to another machine that acts as the server (e.g. Internet-facing).
                A simple build that targets just one device produces
                more than one package database.
                In other words, the packages produced by a build are separated
                out into a couple of different package groupings based on
                criteria such as the target's CPU architecture, the target
                board, or the C library used on the target.
                For example, a build targeting the qemuarm
                device produces the following three package databases:
                all, armv5te, and
                qemuarm.
                If you wanted your qemuarm device to be
                aware of all the packages that were available to it,
                you would need to point it to each of these databases
                individually.
                In a similar way, a traditional Linux distribution usually is
                configured to be aware of a number of software repositories
                from which it retrieves packages.
            
Using runtime package management is completely optional and not required for a successful build or deployment in any way. But if you want to make use of runtime package management, you need to do a couple things above and beyond the basics. The remainder of this section describes what you need to do.
This section describes build considerations of which you need to be aware in order to provide support for runtime package management.
                    When BitBake generates packages, it needs to know
                    what format or formats to use.
                    In your configuration, you use the
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    variable to specify the format:
                    
                            Open the local.conf file
                            inside your
                            Build Directory
                            (e.g. ~/poky/build/conf/local.conf).
                            
Select the desired package format as follows:
     PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= “package_packageformat”
                            
                            where packageformat
                            can be "ipk", "rpm", and "deb", which are the
                            supported package formats.
                            
                    If you would like your image to start off with a basic
                    package database containing the packages in your current
                    build as well as to have the relevant tools available on the
                    target for runtime package management, you can include
                    "package-management" in the
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    variable.
                    Including "package-management" in this
                    configuration variable ensures that when the image
                    is assembled for your target, the image includes
                    the currently-known package databases as well as
                    the target-specific tools required for runtime
                    package management to be performed on the target.
                    However, this is not strictly necessary.
                    You could start your image off without any databases
                    but only include the required on-target package
                    tool(s).
                    As an example, you could include "opkg" in your
                    IMAGE_INSTALL
                    variable if you are using the IPK package format.
                    You can then initialize your target's package database(s)
                    later once your image is up and running.
                
Whenever you perform any sort of build step that can potentially generate a package or modify an existing package, it is always a good idea to re-generate the package index with:
    $ bitbake package-index
                    Realize that it is not sufficient to simply do the following:
    $ bitbake some-package package-index
                    
                    The reason for this restriction is because BitBake does not
                    properly schedule the package-index
                    target fully after any other target has completed.
                    Thus, be sure to run the package update step separately.
                
                    You can use the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS,
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS,
                    and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                    variables to pre-configure target images to use a package
                    feed.
                    If you do not define these variables, then manual steps
                    as described in the subsequent sections are necessary to
                    configure the target.
                    You should set these variables before building the image
                    in order to produce a correctly configured image.
                
                    When your build is complete, your packages reside in the
                    ${TMPDIR}/deploy/
                    directory.
                    For example, if
                    packageformat${TMPDIR}
                    is tmp and your selected package type
                    is IPK, then your IPK packages are available in
                    tmp/deploy/ipk.
                
Although other protocols are possible, a server using HTTP typically serves packages. If you want to use HTTP, then set up and configure a web server such as Apache 2, lighttpd, or SimpleHTTPServer on the machine serving the packages.
To keep things simple, this section describes how to set up a SimpleHTTPServer web server to share package feeds from the developer's machine. Although this server might not be the best for a production environment, the setup is simple and straight forward. Should you want to use a different server more suited for production (e.g. Apache 2, Lighttpd, or Nginx), take the appropriate steps to do so.
                    From within the build directory where you have built an
                    image based on your packaging choice (i.e. the
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    setting), simply start the server.
                    The following example assumes a build directory of
                    ~/poky/build/tmp/deploy/rpm and a
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES setting of
                    "package_rpm":
                    
     $ cd ~/poky/build/tmp/deploy/rpm
     $ python -m SimpleHTTPServer
                    
Setting up the target differs depending on the package management system. This section provides information for RPM, IPK, and DEB.
                        The smart application performs
                        runtime package management of RPM packages.
                        You must perform an initial setup for
                        smart on the target machine
                        if the
                        PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS,
                        PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                        PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                        variables have not been set or the target image was
                        built before the variables were set.
                    
                        As an example, assume the target is able to use the
                        following package databases:
                        all, i586,
                        and qemux86 from a server named
                        my.server.
                        You must inform smart of the
                        availability of these databases by issuing the
                        following commands on the target:
                        
     # smart channel --add i585 type=rpm-md baseurl=http://my.server/rpm/i586
     # smart channel --add qemux86 type=rpm-md baseurl=http://my.server/rpm/qemux86
     # smart channel --add all type=rpm-md baseurl=http://my.server/rpm/all
                        From the target machine, fetch the repository:
     # smart update
                        
                        After everything is set up, smart
                        is able to find, install, and upgrade packages from
                        the specified repository.
                    
                        The opkg application performs
                        runtime package management of IPK packages.
                        You must perform an initial setup for
                        opkg on the target machine
                        if the
                        PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS,
                        PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                        PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                        variables have not been set or the target image was
                        built before the variables were set.
                    
                        The opkg application uses
                        configuration files to find available package
                        databases.
                        Thus, you need to create a configuration file inside
                        the /etc/opkg/ direction, which
                        informs opkg of any repository
                        you want to use.
                    
                        As an example, suppose you are serving packages from a
                        ipk/ directory containing the
                        i586,
                        all, and
                        qemux86 databases through an
                        HTTP server named my.server.
                        On the target, create a configuration file
                        (e.g. my_repo.conf) inside the
                        /etc/opkg/ directory containing
                        the following:
                        
     src/gz all http://my.server/ipk/all
     src/gz i586 http://my.server/ipk/i586
     src/gz qemux86 http://my.server/ipk/qemux86
                        
                        Next, instruct opkg to fetch
                        the repository information:
                        
     # opkg update
                        
                        The opkg application is now able
                        to find, install, and upgrade packages from the
                        specified repository.
                    
                        The apt application performs
                        runtime package management of DEB packages.
                        This application uses a source list file to find
                        available package databases.
                        You must perform an initial setup for
                        apt on the target machine
                        if the
                        PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS,
                        PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                        PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                        variables have not been set or the target image was
                        built before the variables were set.
                    
                        To inform apt of the repository
                        you want to use, you might create a list file (e.g.
                        my_repo.list) inside the
                        /etc/apt/sources.list.d/
                        directory.
                        As an example, suppose you are serving packages from a
                        deb/ directory containing the
                        i586,
                        all, and
                        qemux86 databases through an
                        HTTP server named my.server.
                        The list file should contain:
                        
     deb http://my.server/deb/all ./
     deb http://my.server/deb/i586 ./
     deb http://my.server/deb/qemux86 ./
                        
                        Next, instruct the apt
                        application to fetch the repository information:
                        
     # apt-get update
                        
                        After this step, apt is able
                        to find, install, and upgrade packages from the
                        specified repository.
                    
                A Package Test (ptest) runs tests against packages built
                by the OpenEmbedded build system on the target machine.
                A ptest contains at least two items: the actual test, and
                a shell script (run-ptest) that starts
                the test.
                The shell script that starts the test must not contain
                the actual test - the script only starts the test.
                On the other hand, the test can be anything from a simple
                shell script that runs a binary and checks the output to
                an elaborate system of test binaries and data files.
            
The test generates output in the format used by Automake:
     result: testname
                
                where the result can be PASS,
                FAIL, or SKIP,
                and the testname can be any identifying string.
            
For a list of Yocto Project recipes that are already enabled with ptest, see the Ptest wiki page.
ptest
                    class.
                
                    To add package testing to your build, add the
                    DISTRO_FEATURES
                    and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES
                    variables to your local.conf file,
                    which is found in the
                    Build Directory:
                    
     DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " ptest"
     EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES += "ptest-pkgs"
                    
                    Once your build is complete, the ptest files are installed
                    into the
                    /usr/lib/
                    directory within the image, where
                    package/ptestpackage
                    The ptest-runner package installs a
                    shell script that loops through all installed ptest test
                    suites and runs them in sequence.
                    Consequently, you might want to add this package to
                    your image.
                
In order to enable a recipe to run installed ptests on target hardware, you need to prepare the recipes that build the packages you want to test. Here is what you have to do for each recipe:
Be sure the recipe
                            inherits the
                            ptest
                            class:
                            Include the following line in each recipe:
                            
     inherit ptest
                            
Create run-ptest:
                            This script starts your test.
                            Locate the script where you will refer to it
                            using
                            SRC_URI.
                            Here is an example that starts a test for
                            dbus:
                            
     #!/bin/sh
     cd test
     make -k runtest-TESTS
                            
Ensure dependencies are
                            met:
                            If the test adds build or runtime dependencies
                            that normally do not exist for the package
                            (such as requiring "make" to run the test suite),
                            use the
                            DEPENDS
                            and
                            RDEPENDS
                            variables in your recipe in order for the package
                            to meet the dependencies.
                            Here is an example where the package has a runtime
                            dependency on "make":
                            
     RDEPENDS_${PN}-ptest += "make"
                            
Add a function to build the test suite: Not many packages support cross-compilation of their test suites. Consequently, you usually need to add a cross-compilation function to the package.
Many packages based on Automake compile and
                            run the test suite by using a single command
                            such as make check.
                            However, the host make check
                            builds and runs on the same computer, while
                            cross-compiling requires that the package is built
                            on the host but executed for the target
                            architecture (though often, as in the case for
                            ptest, the execution occurs on the host).
                            The built version of Automake that ships with the
                            Yocto Project includes a patch that separates
                            building and execution.
                            Consequently, packages that use the unaltered,
                            patched version of make check
                            automatically cross-compiles.
Regardless, you still must add a
                            do_compile_ptest function to
                            build the test suite.
                            Add a function similar to the following to your
                            recipe:
                            
     do_compile_ptest() {
        oe_runmake buildtest-TESTS
     }
                            
Ensure special configurations
                            are set:
                            If the package requires special configurations
                            prior to compiling the test code, you must
                            insert a do_configure_ptest
                            function into the recipe.
                            
Install the test
                            suite:
                            The ptest class
                            automatically copies the file
                            run-ptest to the target and
                            then runs make install-ptest
                            to run the tests.
                            If this is not enough, you need to create a
                            do_install_ptest function and
                            make sure it gets called after the
                            "make install-ptest" completes.
                            
            The OpenEmbedded build system works with source files located
            through the
            SRC_URI
            variable.
            When you build something using BitBake, a big part of the operation
            is locating and downloading all the source tarballs.
            For images, downloading all the source for various packages can
            take a significant amount of time.
        
This section presents information for working with source files that can lead to more efficient use of resources and time.
As mentioned, a good deal that goes into a Yocto Project build is simply downloading all of the source tarballs. Maybe you have been working with another build system (OpenEmbedded or Angstrom) for which you have built up a sizable directory of source tarballs. Or, perhaps someone else has such a directory for which you have read access. If so, you can save time by adding statements to your configuration file so that the build process checks local directories first for existing tarballs before checking the Internet.
                Here is an efficient way to set it up in your
                local.conf file:
                
     SOURCE_MIRROR_URL ?= "file:///home/you/your-download-dir/"
     INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
     BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
     # BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
                
                In the previous example, the
                BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS
                variable causes the OpenEmbedded build system to generate
                tarballs of the Git repositories and store them in the
                DL_DIR
                directory.
                Due to performance reasons, generating and storing these
                tarballs is not the build system's default behavior.
            
                You can also use the
                PREMIRRORS
                variable.
                For an example, see the variable's glossary entry in the
                Yocto Project Reference Manual.
            
                Another technique you can use to ready yourself for a
                successive string of build operations, is to pre-fetch
                all the source files without actually starting a build.
                This technique lets you work through any download issues
                and ultimately gathers all the source files into your
                download directory
                build/downloads,
                which is located with
                DL_DIR.
            
Use the following BitBake command form to fetch all the necessary sources without starting the build:
     $ bitbake -c fetchall target
                This variation of the BitBake command guarantees that you have all the sources for that BitBake target should you disconnect from the Internet and want to do the build later offline.
By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the Build Directory when building source code. The build process involves fetching the source files, unpacking them, and then patching them if necessary before the build takes place.
            Situations exist where you might want to build software from source
            files that are external to and thus outside of the
            OpenEmbedded build system.
            For example, suppose you have a project that includes a new BSP with
            a heavily customized kernel.
            And, you want to minimize exposing the build system to the
            development team so that they can focus on their project and
            maintain everyone's workflow as much as possible.
            In this case, you want a kernel source directory on the development
            machine where the development occurs.
            You want the recipe's
            SRC_URI
            variable to point to the external directory and use it as is, not
            copy it.
        
            To build from software that comes from an external source, all you
            need to do is inherit the
            externalsrc
            class and then set the
            EXTERNALSRC
            variable to point to your external source code.
            Here are the statements to put in your
            local.conf file:
            
     INHERIT += "externalsrc"
     EXTERNALSRC_pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
            
            This next example shows how to accomplish the same thing by setting
            EXTERNALSRC in the recipe itself or in the
            recipe's append file:
            
     EXTERNALSRC = "path"
     EXTERNALSRC_BUILD = "path"
            
externalsrc
                class.
            
            By default, externalsrc.bbclass builds
            the source code in a directory separate from the external source
            directory as specified by
            EXTERNALSRC.
            If you need to have the source built in the same directory in
            which it resides, or some other nominated directory, you can set
            EXTERNALSRC_BUILD
            to point to that directory:
            
     EXTERNALSRC_BUILD_pn-myrecipe = "path-to-your-source-tree"
            
By default, the Yocto Project uses SysVinit as the initialization manager. However, support also exists for systemd, which is a full replacement for init with parallel starting of services, reduced shell overhead and other features that are used by many distributions.
If you want to use SysVinit, you do not have to do anything. But, if you want to use systemd, you must take some steps as described in the following sections.
Set the these variables in your distribution configuration file as follows:
     DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " systemd"
     VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager = "systemd"
                You can also prevent the SysVinit distribution feature from being automatically enabled as follows:
     DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "sysvinit"
                Doing so removes any redundant SysVinit scripts.
To remove initscripts from your image altogether, set this variable also:
     VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_initscripts = ""
                
                For information on the backfill variable, see
                DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED.
            
Set these variables in your distribution configuration file as follows:
     DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " systemd"
     VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager = "systemd"
                
                Doing so causes your main image to use the
                packagegroup-core-boot.bb recipe and
                systemd.
                The rescue/minimal image cannot use this package group.
                However, it can install SysVinit
                and the appropriate packages will have support for both
                systemd and SysVinit.
            
            The Yocto Project provides multiple ways to manage the device
            manager (/dev):
            
Persistent and Pre-Populated/dev:
                    For this case, the /dev directory
                    is persistent and the required device nodes are created
                    during the build.
                    
Use devtmpfs with a Device Manager:
                    For this case, the /dev directory
                    is provided by the kernel as an in-memory file system and
                    is automatically populated by the kernel at runtime.
                    Additional configuration of device nodes is done in user
                    space by a device manager like
                    udev or
                    busybox-mdev.
                    
/dev¶
                To use the static method for device population, you need to
                set the
                USE_DEVFS
                variable to "0" as follows:
                
     USE_DEVFS = "0"
                
                The content of the resulting /dev
                directory is defined in a Device Table file.
                The
                IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES
                variable defines the Device Table to use and should be set
                in the machine or distro configuration file.
                Alternatively, you can set this variable in your
                local.conf configuration file.
            
                If you do not define the
                IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES variable, the default
                device_table-minimal.txt is used:
                
     IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES = "device_table-mymachine.txt"
                
                The population is handled by the makedevs
                utility during image creation:
            
devtmpfs and a Device Manager¶
                To use the dynamic method for device population, you need to
                use (or be sure to set) the
                USE_DEVFS
                variable to "1", which is the default:
                
     USE_DEVFS = "1"
                
                With this setting, the resulting /dev
                directory is populated by the kernel using
                devtmpfs.
                Make sure the corresponding kernel configuration variable
                CONFIG_DEVTMPFS is set when building
                you build a Linux kernel.
            
                All devices created by devtmpfs will be
                owned by root and have permissions
                0600.
            
                To have more control over the device nodes, you can use a
                device manager like udev or
                busybox-mdev.
                You choose the device manager by defining the
                VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager variable
                in your machine or distro configuration file.
                Alternatively, you can set this variable in your
                local.conf configuration file:
                
     VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev"
     # Some alternative values
     # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "busybox-mdev"
     # VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "systemd"
                
If you're working on a recipe that pulls from an external Source Code Manager (SCM), it is possible to have the OpenEmbedded build system notice new recipe changes added to the SCM and then build the resulting packages that depend on the new recipes by using the latest versions. This only works for SCMs from which it is possible to get a sensible revision number for changes. Currently, you can do this with Apache Subversion (SVN), Git, and Bazaar (BZR) repositories.
            To enable this behavior, the
            PV
            of the recipe needs to reference
            SRCPV.
            Here is an example:
            
     PV = "1.2.3+git${SRCPV}"
            
            Then, you can add the following to your
            local.conf:
            
     SRCREV_pn-PN = "${AUTOREV}"
            
            PN
            is the name of the recipe for which you want to enable automatic source
            revision updating.
        
If you do not want to update your local configuration file, you can add the following directly to the recipe to finish enabling the feature:
     SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
            
            The Yocto Project provides a distribution named
            poky-bleeding, whose configuration
            file contains the line:
            
     require conf/distro/include/poky-floating-revisions.inc
            This line pulls in the listed include file that contains numerous lines of exactly that form:
     #SRCREV_pn-opkg-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     #SRCREV_pn-opkg-sdk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     #SRCREV_pn-opkg ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     #SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils-native ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     #SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-gconf-dbus ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-common ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-config-gtk ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-desktop ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-keyboard ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-panel-2 ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-themes-extra ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-terminal ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-matchbox-wm ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-settings-daemon ?= "${AUTOREV}"
     SRCREV_pn-screenshot ?= "${AUTOREV}"
          .
          .
          .
            These lines allow you to experiment with building a distribution that tracks the latest development source for numerous packages.
poky-bleeding distribution
                is not tested on a regular basis.
                Keep this in mind if you use it.
            
Suppose, for security reasons, you need to disable your target device's root filesystem's write permissions (i.e. you need a read-only root filesystem). Or, perhaps you are running the device's operating system from a read-only storage device. For either case, you can customize your image for that behavior.
                To create the read-only root filesystem, simply add the
                "read-only-rootfs" feature to your image.
                Using either of the following statements in your
                image recipe or from within the
                local.conf file found in the
                Build Directory
                causes the build system to create a read-only root filesystem:
                
     IMAGE_FEATURES = "read-only-rootfs"
                or
     EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES += "read-only-rootfs"
                
                For more information on how to use these variables, see the
                "Customizing Images Using Custom IMAGE_FEATURES and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES"
                section.
                For information on the variables, see
                IMAGE_FEATURES
                and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES.
            
                It is very important that you make sure all
                post-Installation (pkg_postinst) scripts
                for packages that are installed into the image can be run
                at the time when the root filesystem is created during the
                build on the host system.
                These scripts cannot attempt to run during first-boot on the
                target device.
                With the "read-only-rootfs" feature enabled,
                the build system checks during root filesystem creation to make
                sure all post-installation scripts succeed.
                If any of these scripts still need to be run after the root
                filesystem is created, the build immediately fails.
                These build-time checks ensure that the build fails
                rather than the target device fails later during its
                initial boot operation.
            
Most of the common post-installation scripts generated by the build system for the out-of-the-box Yocto Project are engineered so that they can run during root filesystem creation (e.g. post-installation scripts for caching fonts). However, if you create and add custom scripts, you need to be sure they can be run during this file system creation.
Here are some common problems that prevent post-installation scripts from running during root filesystem creation:
                        Not using $D in front of absolute
                        paths:
                        The build system defines
                        $D
                        when the root filesystem is created.
                        Furthermore, $D is blank when the
                        script is run on the target device.
                        This implies two purposes for $D:
                        ensuring paths are valid in both the host and target
                        environments, and checking to determine which
                        environment is being used as a method for taking
                        appropriate actions.
                        
                        Attempting to run processes that are
                        specific to or dependent on the target
                        architecture:
                        You can work around these attempts by using native
                        tools, which run on the host system,
                        to accomplish the same tasks, or
                        by alternatively running the processes under QEMU,
                        which has the qemu_run_binary
                        function.
                        For more information, see the
                        qemu
                        class.
                With the "read-only-rootfs" feature enabled,
                any attempt by the target to write to the root filesystem at
                runtime fails.
                Consequently, you must make sure that you configure processes
                and applications that attempt these types of writes do so
                to directories with write access (e.g.
                /tmp or /var/run).
            
            The OpenEmbedded build system makes available a series of automated
            tests for images to verify runtime functionality.
            You can run these tests on either QEMU or actual target hardware.
            Tests are written in Python making use of the
            unittest module, and the majority of them
            run commands on the target system over SSH.
            This section describes how you set up the environment to use these
            tests, run available tests, and write and add your own tests.
        
Depending on whether you are planning to run tests using QEMU or on the hardware, you have to take different steps to enable the tests. See the following subsections for information on how to enable both types of tests.
In order to run tests, you need to do the following:
Set up to avoid interaction
                            with sudo for networking:
                            To accomplish this, you must do one of the
                            following:
                            
Add
                                    NOPASSWD for your user
                                    in /etc/sudoers either for
                                    all commands or just for
                                    runqemu-ifup.
                                    You must provide the full path as that can
                                    change if you are using multiple clones of the
                                    source repository.
                                    
/etc/sudoers.
                                    Manually configure a tap interface for your system.
Run as root the script in
                                    scripts/runqemu-gen-tapdevs,
                                    which should generate a list of tap devices.
                                    This is the option typically chosen for
                                    Autobuilder-type environments.
                                    
Set the
                            DISPLAY variable:
                            You need to set this variable so that you have an X
                            server available (e.g. start
                            vncserver for a headless machine).
                            
Be sure your host's firewall
                            accepts incoming connections from
                            192.168.7.0/24:
                            Some of the tests (in particular smart tests) start an
                            HTTP server on a random high number port, which is
                            used to serve files to the target.
                            The smart module serves
                            ${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm so it can run
                            smart channel commands. That means your host's firewall
                            must accept incoming connections from 192.168.7.0/24,
                            which is the default IP range used for tap devices
                            by runqemu.
Be sure your host has the correct packages installed: Depending your host's distribution, you need to have the following packages installed:
Ubuntu and Debian:
                                    sysstat and
                                    iproute2
                                    
OpenSUSE:
                                    sysstat and
                                    iproute2
                                    
Fedora:
                                    sysstat and
                                    iproute
                                    
CentOS:
                                    sysstat and
                                    iproute
                                    
Once you start running the tests, the following happens:
A copy of the root filesystem is written
                            to ${WORKDIR}/testimage.
                            
The image is booted under QEMU using the
                            standard runqemu script.
                            
A default timeout of 500 seconds occurs
                            to allow for the boot process to reach the login prompt.
                            You can change the timeout period by setting
                            TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT
                            in the local.conf file.
                            
Once the boot process is reached and the
                            login prompt appears, the tests run.
                            The full boot log is written to
                            ${WORKDIR}/testimage/qemu_boot_log.
                            
Each test module loads in the order found
                            in TEST_SUITES.
                            You can find the full output of the commands run over
                            SSH in
                            ${WORKDIR}/testimgage/ssh_target_log.
                            
If no failures occur, the task running the
                            tests ends successfully.
                            You can find the output from the
                            unittest in the task log at
                            ${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_testimage.
                            
The OpenEmbedded build system can run tests on real hardware, and for certain devices it can also deploy the image to be tested onto the device beforehand.
For automated deployment, a "master image" is installed onto the hardware once as part of setup. Then, each time tests are to be run, the following occurs:
The master image is booted into and used to write the image to be tested to a second partition.
The device is then rebooted using an external script that you need to provide.
The device boots into the image to be tested.
When running tests (independent of whether the image has been deployed automatically or not), the device is expected to be connected to a network on a pre-determined IP address. You can either use static IP addresses written into the image, or set the image to use DHCP and have your DHCP server on the test network assign a known IP address based on the MAC address of the device.
                    In order to run tests on hardware, you need to set
                    TEST_TARGET to an appropriate value.
                    For QEMU, you do not have to change anything, the default
                    value is "QemuTarget".
                    For running tests on hardware, the following options exist:
                    
"SimpleRemoteTarget": Choose "SimpleRemoteTarget" if you are going to run tests on a target system that is already running the image to be tested and is available on the network. You can use "SimpleRemoteTarget" in conjunction with either real hardware or an image running within a separately started QEMU or any other virtual machine manager.
"GummibootTarget":
                            Choose "GummibootTarget" if your hardware is
                            an EFI-based machine with
                            gummiboot as bootloader and
                            core-image-testmaster
                            (or something similar) is installed.
                            Also, your hardware under test must be in a
                            DHCP-enabled network that gives it the same IP
                            address for each reboot.
If you choose "GummibootTarget", there are additional requirements and considerations. See the "Selecting GummibootTarget" section, which follows, for more information.
"BeagleBoneTarget":
                            Choose "BeagleBoneTarget" if you are deploying
                            images and running tests on the BeagleBone
                            "Black" or original "White" hardware.
                            For information on how to use these tests, see the
                            comments at the top of the BeagleBoneTarget
                            meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/beaglebonetarget.py
                            file.
                            
"EdgeRouterTarget":
                            Choose "EdgeRouterTarget" is you are deploying
                            images and running tests on the Ubiquiti Networks
                            EdgeRouter Lite.
                            For information on how to use these tests, see the
                            comments at the top of the EdgeRouterTarget
                            meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/edgeroutertarget.py
                            file.
                            
"GrubTarget":
                            Choose the "supports deploying images and running
                            tests on any generic PC that boots using GRUB.
                            For information on how to use these tests, see the
                            comments at the top of the GrubTarget
                            meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/grubtarget.py
                            file.
                            
"your-target":
                            Create your own custom target if you want to run
                            tests when you are deploying images and running
                            tests on a custom machine within your BSP layer.
                            To do this, you need to add a Python unit that
                            defines the target class under
                            lib/oeqa/controllers/ within
                            your layer.
                            You must also provide an empty
                            __init__.py.
                            For examples, see files in
                            meta-yocto-bsp/lib/oeqa/controllers/.
                            
                    If you did not set TEST_TARGET to
                    "GummibootTarget", then you do not need any information
                    in this section.
                    You can skip down to the
                    "Running Tests"
                    section.
                
                    If you did set TEST_TARGET to
                    "GummibootTarget", you also need to perform a one-time
                    setup of your master image by doing the following:
                    
Set EFI_PROVIDER:
                            Be sure that EFI_PROVIDER
                            is as follows:
                            
     EFI_PROVIDER = "gummiboot"
                            
Build the master image:
                            Build the core-image-testmaster
                            image.
                            The core-image-testmaster
                            recipe is provided as an example for a
                            "master" image and you can customize the image
                            recipe as you would any other recipe.
                            
Here are the image recipe requirements:
Inherits
                                    core-image
                                    so that kernel modules are installed.
                                    
Installs normal linux utilities
                                    not busybox ones (e.g.
                                    bash,
                                    coreutils,
                                    tar,
                                    gzip, and
                                    kmod).
                                    
Uses a custom Initial RAM Disk (initramfs) image with a custom installer. A normal image that you can install usually creates a single rootfs partition. This image uses another installer that creates a specific partition layout. Not all Board Support Packages (BSPs) can use an installer. For such cases, you need to manually create the following partition layout on the target:
First partition mounted
                                            under /boot,
                                            labeled "boot".
                                            
The main rootfs
                                            partition where this image gets
                                            installed, which is mounted under
                                            /.
                                            
Another partition labeled "testrootfs" where test images get deployed.
Install image: Install the image that you just built on the target system.
                    The final thing you need to do when setting
                    TEST_TARGET to "GummibootTarget" is
                    to set up the test image:
                    
Set up your local.conf file:
                            Make sure you have the following statements in
                            your local.conf file:
                            
     IMAGE_FSTYPES += "tar.gz"
     INHERIT += "testimage"
     TEST_TARGET = "GummibootTarget"
     TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.2.3"
                            
Build your test image: Use BitBake to build the image:
     $ bitbake core-image-sato
                            
For most hardware targets other than SimpleRemoteTarget, you can control power:
                            You can use
                            TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD
                            together with
                            TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS
                            as a command that runs on the host and does power
                            cycling.
                            The test code passes one argument to that command:
                            off, on or cycle (off then on).
                            Here is an example that could appear in your
                            local.conf file:
                            
     TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "powercontrol.exp test 10.11.12.1 nuc1"
                            In this example, the expect script does the following:
     ssh test@10.11.12.1 "pyctl nuc1 arg"
                            
                            It then runs a Python script that controls power
                            for a label called nuc1.
                            
TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD
                                and
                                TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS
                                for your own setup.
                                The one requirement is that it accepts
                                "on", "off", and "cycle" as the last argument.
                            
When no command is defined, it connects to the device over SSH and uses the classic reboot command to reboot the device. Classic reboot is fine as long as the machine actually reboots (i.e. the SSH test has not failed). It is useful for scenarios where you have a simple setup, typically with a single board, and where some manual interaction is okay from time to time.
                    If you have no hardware to automatically perform power
                    control but still wish to experiment with automated
                    hardware testing, you can use the dialog-power-control
                    script that shows a dialog prompting you to perform the
                    required power action.
                    This script requires either KDialog or Zenity to be
                    installed.
                    To use this script, set the
                    TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD
                    variable as follows:
                    
     TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/dialog-power-control"
                    
                    For test target classes requiring a serial console
                    to interact with the bootloader (e.g. BeagleBoneTarget,
                    EdgeRouterTarget, and GrubTarget), you need to
                    specify a command to use to connect to the serial console
                    of the target machine by using the
                    TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD
                    variable and optionally the
                    TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS
                    variable.
                
                    These cases could be a serial terminal program if the
                    machine is connected to a local serial port, or a
                    telnet or
                    ssh command connecting to a remote
                    console server.
                    Regardless of the case, the command simply needs to
                    connect to the serial console and forward that connection
                    to standard input and output as any normal terminal
                    program does.
                    For example, to use the picocom terminal program on
                    serial device /dev/ttyUSB0
                    at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows:
                    
     TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
                    
                    For local devices where the serial port device disappears
                    when the device reboots, an additional "serdevtry" wrapper
                    script is provided.
                    To use this wrapper, simply prefix the terminal command
                    with
                    ${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry:
                    
     TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "${COREBASE}/scripts/contrib/serdevtry picocom -b
115200 /dev/ttyUSB0"
                    
You can start the tests automatically or manually:
Automatically running tests:
                        To run the tests automatically after the
                        OpenEmbedded build system successfully creates an image,
                        first set the
                        TEST_IMAGE
                        variable to "1" in your local.conf
                        file in the
                        Build Directory:
                        
     TEST_IMAGE = "1"
                        Next, build your image. If the image successfully builds, the tests will be run:
     bitbake core-image-sato
                        Manually running tests:
                        To manually run the tests, first globally inherit the
                        testimage
                        class by editing your local.conf
                        file:
                        
    INHERIT += "testimage"
                        Next, use BitBake to run the tests:
     bitbake -c testimage image
                        
                All test files reside in
                meta/lib/oeqa/runtime in the
                Source Directory.
                A test name maps directly to a Python module.
                Each test module may contain a number of individual tests.
                Tests are usually grouped together by the area
                tested (e.g tests for systemd reside in
                meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/systemd.py).
            
                You can add tests to any layer provided you place them in the
                proper area and you extend
                BBPATH
                in the local.conf file as normal.
                Be sure that tests reside in
                layer/lib/oeqa/runtime
meta/lib/oeqa/runtime.
                
                You can change the set of tests run by appending or overriding
                TEST_SUITES
                variable in local.conf.
                Each name in TEST_SUITES represents a
                required test for the image.
                Test modules named within TEST_SUITES
                cannot be skipped even if a test is not suitable for an image
                (e.g. running the RPM tests on an image without
                rpm).
                Appending "auto" to TEST_SUITES causes the
                build system to try to run all tests that are suitable for the
                image (i.e. each test module may elect to skip itself).
            
                The order you list tests in TEST_SUITES
                is important and influences test dependencies.
                Consequently, tests that depend on other tests should be added
                after the test on which they depend.
                For example, since the ssh test
                depends on the
                ping test, "ssh" needs to come after
                "ping" in the list.
                The test class provides no re-ordering or dependency handling.
                
unittest rules apply.
                
Here are some things to keep in mind when running tests:
The default tests for the image are defined as:
     DEFAULT_TEST_SUITES_pn-image = "ping ssh df connman syslog xorg scp vnc date rpm smart dmesg"
                        Add your own test to the list of the by using the following:
     TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest"
                        Run a specific list of tests as follows:
     TEST_SUITES = "test1 test2 test3"
                        Remember, order is important. Be sure to place a test that is dependent on another test later in the order.
                You can export tests so that they can run independently of
                the build system.
                Exporting tests is required if you want to be able to hand
                the test execution off to a scheduler.
                You can only export tests that are defined in
                TEST_SUITES.
            
                If your image is already built, make sure the following are set
                in your local.conf file.
                Be sure to provide the IP address you need:
                
     INHERIT +="testexport"
     TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.7.2"
     TEST_SERVER_IP = "192.168.7.1"
                You can then export the tests with the following:
     $ bitbake core-image-sato -c testexport
                
                Exporting the tests places them in the
                Build Directory in
                tmp/testexport/core-image-sato, which
                is controlled by the
                TEST_EXPORT_DIR variable.
            
You can now run the tests outside of the build environment:
     $ cd tmp/testexport/core-image-sato
     $ ./runexported.py testdata.json
                
                As mentioned previously, all new test files need to be in the
                proper place for the build system to find them.
                New tests for additional functionality outside of the core
                should be added to the layer that adds the functionality, in
                layer/lib/oeqa/runtimeBBPATH
                is extended in the layer's
                layer.conf file as normal).
                Just remember the following:
                
Filenames need to map directly to test (module) names.
Do not use module names that collide with existing core tests.
Minimally, an empty
                        __init__.py file must exist
                        in the runtime directory.
                        
                To create a new test, start by copying an existing module
                (e.g. syslog.py or
                gcc.py are good ones to use).
                Test modules can use code from
                meta/lib/oeqa/utils, which are helper
                classes.
            
df.py and
                date.py modules for examples.
            
                You will notice that all test classes inherit
                oeRuntimeTest, which is found in
                meta/lib/oetest.py.
                This base class offers some helper attributes, which are
                described in the following sections:
            
Class methods are as follows:
hasPackage(pkg):
                            Returns "True" if pkg is in the
                            installed package list of the image, which is based
                            on the manifest file that is generated during the
                            do_rootfs task.
                            
hasFeature(feature):
                            Returns "True" if the feature is in
                            IMAGE_FEATURES
                            or
                            DISTRO_FEATURES.
                            
Class attributes are as follows:
pscmd:
                            Equals "ps -ef" if procps is
                            installed in the image.
                            Otherwise, pscmd equals
                            "ps" (busybox).
                            
tc:
                            The called test context, which gives access to the
                            following attributes:
                            
d:
                                    The BitBake datastore, which allows you to
                                    use stuff such as
                                    oeRuntimeTest.tc.d.getVar("VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_init_manager").
                                    
testslist and testsrequired:
                                    Used internally.
                                    The tests do not need these.
                                    
filesdir:
                                    The absolute path to
                                    meta/lib/oeqa/runtime/files,
                                    which contains helper files for tests meant
                                    for copying on the target such as small
                                    files written in C for compilation.
                                    
target:
                                    The target controller object used to deploy
                                    and start an image on a particular target
                                    (e.g. QemuTarget, SimpleRemote, and
                                    GummibootTarget).
                                    Tests usually use the following:
                                    
ip:
                                            The target's IP address.
                                            
server_ip:
                                            The host's IP address, which is
                                            usually used by the "smart" test
                                            suite.
                                            
run(cmd, timeout=None):
                                            The single, most used method.
                                            This command is a wrapper for:
                                            ssh root@host "cmd".
                                            The command returns a tuple:
                                            (status, output), which are what
                                            their names imply - the return code
                                            of "cmd" and whatever output
                                            it produces.
                                            The optional timeout argument
                                            represents the number of seconds the
                                            test should wait for "cmd" to
                                            return.
                                            If the argument is "None", the
                                            test uses the default instance's
                                            timeout period, which is 300
                                            seconds.
                                            If the argument is "0", the test
                                            runs until the command returns.
                                            
copy_to(localpath, remotepath):
                                            scp localpath root@ip:remotepath.
                                            
copy_from(remotepath, localpath):
                                            scp root@host:remotepath localpath.
                                            
                    A single instance attribute exists, which is
                    target.
                    The target instance attribute is
                    identical to the class attribute of the same name, which
                    is described in the previous section.
                    This attribute exists as both an instance and class
                    attribute so tests can use
                    self.target.run(cmd) in instance
                    methods instead of
                    oeRuntimeTest.tc.target.run(cmd).
                
                When a test requires a package built by BitBake, it is possible
                to install that package.
                Installing the package does not require a package manager be
                installed in the device under test (DUT).
                It does, however, require an SSH connection and the target must
                be using the sshcontrol class.
                
scp to copy files
                    from the host to the target, which causes permissions and
                    special attributes to be lost.
                
                A JSON file is used to define the packages needed by a test.
                This file must be in the same path as the file used to define
                the tests.
                Furthermore, the filename must map directly to the test
                module name with a .json extension.
            
The JSON file must include an object with the test name as keys of an object or an array. This object (or array of objects) uses the following data:
"pkg" - A mandatory string that is the name of the package to be installed.
"rm" - An optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that specifies to remove the package after the test.
"extract" - An optional boolean, which defaults to "false", that specifies if the package must be extracted from the package format. When set to "true", the package is not automatically installed into the DUT.
Following is an example JSON file that handles test "foo" installing package "bar" and test "foobar" installing packages "foo" and "bar". Once the test is complete, the packages are removed from the DUT.
     {
         "foo": {
             "pkg": "bar"
         },
         "foobar": [
             {
                 "pkg": "foo",
                 "rm": true
             },
             {
                 "pkg": "bar",
                 "rm": true
             }
         ]
     }
                
GDB allows you to examine running programs, which in turn helps you to understand and fix problems. It also allows you to perform post-mortem style analysis of program crashes. GDB is available as a package within the Yocto Project and is installed in SDK images by default. See the "Images" chapter in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for a description of these images. You can find information on GDB at http://sourceware.org/gdb/.
-dbg) packages
            for the applications you are going to debug.
            Doing so makes extra debug symbols available that give you more
            meaningful output.
        Sometimes, due to memory or disk space constraints, it is not possible to use GDB directly on the remote target to debug applications. These constraints arise because GDB needs to load the debugging information and the binaries of the process being debugged. Additionally, GDB needs to perform many computations to locate information such as function names, variable names and values, stack traces and so forth - even before starting the debugging process. These extra computations place more load on the target system and can alter the characteristics of the program being debugged.
To help get past the previously mentioned constraints, you can use Gdbserver. Gdbserver runs on the remote target and does not load any debugging information from the debugged process. Instead, a GDB instance processes the debugging information that is run on a remote computer - the host GDB. The host GDB then sends control commands to Gdbserver to make it stop or start the debugged program, as well as read or write memory regions of that debugged program. All the debugging information loaded and processed as well as all the heavy debugging is done by the host GDB. Offloading these processes gives the Gdbserver running on the target a chance to remain small and fast.
*-dbg packages in order to enable GDB
                to show source lines in its output.
                You can save further space on the target by setting the
                PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE
                variable to "debug-without-src" so that these packages do not
                include the source files.
            
Because the host GDB is responsible for loading the debugging information and for doing the necessary processing to make actual debugging happen, you have to make sure the host can access the unstripped binaries complete with their debugging information and also be sure the target is compiled with no optimizations. The host GDB must also have local access to all the libraries used by the debugged program. Because Gdbserver does not need any local debugging information, the binaries on the remote target can remain stripped. However, the binaries must also be compiled without optimization so they match the host's binaries.
To remain consistent with GDB documentation and terminology, the binary being debugged on the remote target machine is referred to as the "inferior" binary. For documentation on GDB see the GDB site.
The remainder of this section describes the steps you need to take to debug using the GNU project debugger.
Before you can initiate a remote debugging session, you need to be sure you have set up the cross-development environment, toolchain, and sysroot. The Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide describes this process.
                Make sure Gdbserver is installed on the target.
                If it is not, install the package
                gdbserver, which needs the
                libthread-db1 package.
            
                Here is an example, that when entered from the host,
                connects to the target and launches Gdbserver in order to
                "debug" a binary named helloworld:
                
     $ gdbserver localhost:2345 /usr/bin/helloworld
                Gdbserver should now be listening on port 2345 for debugging commands coming from a remote GDB process that is running on the host computer. Communication between Gdbserver and the host GDB are done using TCP. To use other communication protocols, please refer to the Gdbserver documentation.
Running GDB on the host computer takes a number of stages, which this section describes.
                    A suitable GDB cross-binary is required that runs on your
                    host computer but also knows about the the ABI of the
                    remote target.
                    You can get this binary from the
                    Cross-Development Toolchain.
                    Here is an example where the toolchain has been installed
                    in the default directory
                    /opt/poky/2.1.2:
                    
     /opt/poky/2.1.2/sysroots/i686-pokysdk-linux/usr/bin/armv7a-vfp-neon-poky-linux-gnueabi/arm-poky-linux-gnueabi-gdb
                    
                    where arm is the target architecture
                    and linux-gnueabi is the target ABI.
                
                    Alternatively, you can use BitBake to build the
                    gdb-cross binary.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     $ bitbake gdb-cross
                    Once the binary is built, you can find it here:
     tmp/sysroots/host-arch/usr/bin/target-platform/target-abi-gdb
                    
                    Aside from the GDB cross-binary, you also need a GDB
                    initialization file in the same top directory in which
                    your binary resides.
                    When you start GDB on your host development system, GDB
                    finds this initialization file and executes all the
                    commands within.
                    For information on the .gdbinit, see
                    "Debugging with GDB",
                    which is maintained by
                    sourceware.org.
                
                    You need to add a statement in the
                    ~/.gdbinit file that points to your
                    root filesystem.
                    Here is an example that points to the root filesystem for
                    an ARM-based target device:
                    
     set sysroot ~/sysroot_arm
                    
                    Before launching the host GDB, you need to be sure
                    you have sourced the cross-debugging environment script,
                    which if you installed the root filesystem in the default
                    location is at /opt/poky/2.1.2
                    and begins with the string "environment-setup".
                    For more information, see the
                    Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's
                    Guide.
                
                    Finally, switch to the directory where the binary resides
                    and run the cross-gdb binary.
                    Provide the binary file you are going to debug.
                    For example, the following command continues with the
                    example used in the previous section by loading
                    the helloworld binary as well as the
                    debugging information:
                    
     $ arm-poky-linux-gnuabi-gdb helloworld
                    
                    The commands in your .gdbinit execute
                    and the GDB prompt appears.
                
From the target, you need to connect to the remote GDB server that is running on the host. You need to specify the remote host and port. Here is the command continuing with the example:
     target remote 192.168.7.2:2345
                
You can now proceed with debugging as normal - as if you were debugging on the local machine. For example, to instruct GDB to break in the "main" function and then continue with execution of the inferior binary use the following commands from within GDB:
     (gdb) break main
     (gdb) continue
                
For more information about using GDB, see the project's online documentation at http://sourceware.org/gdb/download/onlinedocs/.
            A parallel make race occurs when the build
            consists of several parts that are run simultaneously and
            a situation occurs when the output or result of one
            part is not ready for use with a different part of the build that
            depends on that output.
            Parallel make races are annoying and can sometimes be difficult
            to reproduce and fix.
            However, some simple tips and tricks exist that can help
            you debug and fix them.
            This section presents a real-world example of an error encountered
            on the Yocto Project autobuilder and the process used to fix it.
            
make race
                condition, you can work around it by clearing either the
                PARALLEL_MAKE
                or
                PARALLEL_MAKEINST
                variables.
            
For this example, assume that you are building an image that depends on the "neard" package. And, during the build, BitBake runs into problems and creates the following output.
                If you examine the output or the log file, you see the
                failure during make:
                
     | DEBUG: SITE files ['endian-little', 'bit-32', 'ix86-common', 'common-linux', 'common-glibc', 'i586-linux', 'common']
     | DEBUG: Executing shell function do_compile
     | NOTE: make -j 16
     | make --no-print-directory all-am
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/types.h include/near/types.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/log.h include/near/log.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/plugin.h include/near/plugin.h
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tag.h include/near/tag.h
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/adapter.h include/near/adapter.h
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/ndef.h include/near/ndef.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/tlv.h include/near/tlv.h
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/setting.h include/near/setting.h
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | /bin/mkdir -p include/near
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/device.h include/near/device.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/nfc_copy.h include/near/nfc_copy.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/snep.h include/near/snep.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/version.h include/near/version.h
     | ln -s /home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/neard/
       0.14-r0/neard-0.14/include/dbus.h include/near/dbus.h
     | ./src/genbuiltin nfctype1 nfctype2 nfctype3 nfctype4 p2p > src/builtin.h
     | i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/
       build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86 -DHAVE_CONFIG_H -I. -I./include -I./src -I./gdbus  -I/home/pokybuild/
       yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/glib-2.0
       -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/
       lib/glib-2.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/
       tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/dbus-1.0 -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/yocto-slave/
       nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/lib/dbus-1.0/include  -I/home/pokybuild/yocto-autobuilder/
       yocto-slave/nightly-x86/build/build/tmp/sysroots/qemux86/usr/include/libnl3
       -DNEAR_PLUGIN_BUILTIN -DPLUGINDIR=\""/usr/lib/near/plugins"\"
       -DCONFIGDIR=\""/etc/neard\"" -O2 -pipe -g -feliminate-unused-debug-types -c
       -o tools/snep-send.o tools/snep-send.c
     | In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
     | tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
     |  #include <near/dbus.h>
     |                        ^
     | compilation terminated.
     | make[1]: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
     | make[1]: *** Waiting for unfinished jobs....
     | make: *** [all] Error 2
     | ERROR: oe_runmake failed
                
Because race conditions are intermittent, they do not manifest themselves every time you do the build. In fact, most times the build will complete without problems even though the potential race condition exists. Thus, once the error surfaces, you need a way to reproduce it.
                In this example, compiling the "neard" package is causing the
                problem.
                So the first thing to do is build "neard" locally.
                Before you start the build, set the
                PARALLEL_MAKE
                variable in your local.conf file to
                a high number (e.g. "-j 20").
                Using a high value for PARALLEL_MAKE
                increases the chances of the race condition showing up:
                
     $ bitbake neard
                
                Once the local build for "neard" completes, start a
                devshell build:
                
     $ bitbake neard -c devshell
                
                For information on how to use a
                devshell, see the
                "Using a Development Shell"
                section.
            
                In the devshell, do the following:
                
     $ make clean
     $ make tools/snep-send.o
                
                The devshell commands cause the failure
                to clearly be visible.
                In this case, a missing dependency exists for the "neard"
                Makefile target.
                Here is some abbreviated, sample output with the
                missing dependency clearly visible at the end:
                
     i586-poky-linux-gcc  -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/home/scott-lenovo/......
        .
        .
        .
     tools/snep-send.c
     In file included from tools/snep-send.c:16:0:
     tools/../src/near.h:41:23: fatal error: near/dbus.h: No such file or directory
      #include <near/dbus.h>
                       ^
     compilation terminated.
     make: *** [tools/snep-send.o] Error 1
     $
                
                Because there is a missing dependency for the Makefile
                target, you need to patch the
                Makefile.am file, which is generated
                from Makefile.in.
                You can use Quilt to create the patch:
                
     $ quilt new parallelmake.patch
     Patch patches/parallelmake.patch is now on top
     $ quilt add Makefile.am
     File Makefile.am added to patch patches/parallelmake.patch
                For more information on using Quilt, see the "Using Quilt in Your Workflow" section.
                At this point you need to make the edits to
                Makefile.am to add the missing
                dependency.
                For our example, you have to add the following line
                to the file:
                
     tools/snep-send.$(OBJEXT): include/near/dbus.h
                
                Once you have edited the file, use the
                refresh command to create the patch:
                
     $ quilt refresh
     Refreshed patch patches/parallelmake.patch
                
                Once the patch file exists, you need to add it back to the
                originating recipe folder.
                Here is an example assuming a top-level
                Source Directory
                named poky:
                
     $ cp patches/parallelmake.patch poky/meta/recipes-connectivity/neard/neard
                
                The final thing you need to do to implement the fix in the
                build is to update the "neard" recipe (i.e.
                neard-0.14.bb) so that the
                SRC_URI
                statement includes the patch file.
                The recipe file is in the folder above the patch.
                Here is what the edited SRC_URI
                statement would look like:
                
     SRC_URI = "${KERNELORG_MIRROR}/linux/network/nfc/${BPN}-${PV}.tar.xz \
                file://neard.in \
                file://neard.service.in \
                file://parallelmake.patch \
               "
                
                With the patch complete and moved to the correct folder and
                the SRC_URI statement updated, you can
                exit the devshell:
                
     $ exit
                
With everything in place, you can get back to trying the build again locally:
     $ bitbake neard
                This build should succeed.
                Now you can open up a devshell again
                and repeat the clean and make operations as follows:
                
     $ bitbake neard -c devshell
     $ make clean
     $ make tools/snep-send.o
                The build should work without issue.
As with all solved problems, if they originated upstream, you need to submit the fix for the recipe in OE-Core and upstream so that the problem is taken care of at its source. See the "How to Submit a Change" section for more information.
One of the concerns for a development organization using open source software is how to maintain compliance with various open source licensing during the lifecycle of the product. While this section does not provide legal advice or comprehensively cover all scenarios, it does present methods that you can use to assist you in meeting the compliance requirements during a software release.
With hundreds of different open source licenses that the Yocto Project tracks, it is difficult to know the requirements of each and every license. However, the requirements of the major FLOSS licenses can begin to be covered by assuming that three main areas of concern exist:
Source code must be provided.
License text for the software must be provided.
Compilation scripts and modifications to the source code must be provided.
There are other requirements beyond the scope of these three and the methods described in this section (e.g. the mechanism through which source code is distributed).
As different organizations have different methods of complying with open source licensing, this section is not meant to imply that there is only one single way to meet your compliance obligations, but rather to describe one method of achieving compliance. The remainder of this section describes methods supported to meet the previously mentioned three requirements. Once you take steps to meet these requirements, and prior to releasing images, sources, and the build system, you should audit all artifacts to ensure completeness.
${DEPLOY_DIR}/licenses/image_name-datestamp
                to assist with any audits.
            
Compliance activities should begin before you generate the final image. The first thing you should look at is the requirement that tops the list for most compliance groups - providing the source. The Yocto Project has a few ways of meeting this requirement.
                One of the easiest ways to meet this requirement is
                to provide the entire
                DL_DIR
                used by the build.
                This method, however, has a few issues.
                The most obvious is the size of the directory since it includes
                all sources used in the build and not just the source used in
                the released image.
                It will include toolchain source, and other artifacts, which
                you would not generally release.
                However, the more serious issue for most companies is accidental
                release of proprietary software.
                The Yocto Project provides an
                archiver
                class to help avoid some of these concerns.
            
                Before you employ DL_DIR or the
                archiver class, you need to decide how you choose to
                provide source.
                The source archiver class can generate tarballs and SRPMs
                and can create them with various levels of compliance in mind.
            
                One way of doing this (but certainly not the only way) is to
                release just the source as a tarball.
                You can do this by adding the following to the
                local.conf file found in the
                Build Directory:
                
     INHERIT += "archiver"
     ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"
                
                During the creation of your image, the source from all
                recipes that deploy packages to the image is placed within
                subdirectories of
                DEPLOY_DIR/sources based on the
                LICENSE
                for each recipe.
                Releasing the entire directory enables you to comply with
                requirements concerning providing the unmodified source.
                It is important to note that the size of the directory can
                get large.
            
A way to help mitigate the size issue is to only release tarballs for licenses that require the release of source. Let us assume you are only concerned with GPL code as identified with the following:
     $ cd poky/build/tmp/deploy/sources
     $ mkdir ~/gpl_source_release
     $ for dir in */*GPL*; do cp -r $dir ~/gpl_source_release; done
                
                At this point, you could create a tarball from the
                gpl_source_release directory and
                provide that to the end user.
                This method would be a step toward achieving compliance
                with section 3a of GPLv2 and with section 6 of GPLv3.
            
                One requirement that is often overlooked is inclusion
                of license text.
                This requirement also needs to be dealt with prior to
                generating the final image.
                Some licenses require the license text to accompany
                the binary.
                You can achieve this by adding the following to your
                local.conf file:
                
     COPY_LIC_MANIFEST = "1"
     COPY_LIC_DIRS = "1"
     LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE = "1"
                Adding these statements to the configuration file ensures that the licenses collected during package generation are included on your image.
Setting all three variables to "1" results in the
                    image having two copies of the same license file.
                    One copy resides in
                    /usr/share/common-licenses and
                    the other resides in
                    /usr/share/license.
The reason for this behavior is because
                    COPY_LIC_DIRS
                    and
                    COPY_LIC_MANIFEST
                    add a copy of the license when the image is built but do not
                    offer a path for adding licenses for newly installed packages
                    to an image.
                    LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE
                    adds a separate package and an upgrade path for adding
                    licenses to an image.
As the source archiver has already archived the original unmodified source that contains the license files, you would have already met the requirements for inclusion of the license information with source as defined by the GPL and other open source licenses.
At this point, we have addressed all we need to address prior to generating the image. The next two requirements are addressed during the final packaging of the release.
By releasing the version of the OpenEmbedded build system and the layers used during the build, you will be providing both compilation scripts and the source code modifications in one step.
If the deployment team has a BSP layer and a distro layer, and those those layers are used to patch, compile, package, or modify (in any way) any open source software included in your released images, you might be required to to release those layers under section 3 of GPLv2 or section 1 of GPLv3. One way of doing that is with a clean checkout of the version of the Yocto Project and layers used during your build. Here is an example:
     # We built using the krogoth branch of the poky repo
     $ git clone -b krogoth git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
     $ cd poky
     # We built using the release_branch for our layers
     $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-bsp-layer
     $ git clone -b release_branch git://git.mycompany.com/meta-my-software-layer
     # clean up the .git repos
     $ find . -name ".git" -type d -exec rm -rf {} \;
                
                One thing a development organization might want to consider
                for end-user convenience is to modify
                meta-poky/conf/bblayers.conf.sample to
                ensure that when the end user utilizes the released build
                system to build an image, the development organization's
                layers are included in the bblayers.conf
                file automatically:
                
     # LAYER_CONF_VERSION is increased each time build/conf/bblayers.conf
     # changes incompatibly
     LCONF_VERSION = "6"
     BBPATH = "${TOPDIR}"
     BBFILES ?= ""
     BBLAYERS ?= " \
       ##OEROOT##/meta \
       ##OEROOT##/meta-poky \
       ##OEROOT##/meta-yocto-bsp \
       ##OEROOT##/meta-mylayer \
       "
                Creating and providing an archive of the Metadata layers (recipes, configuration files, and so forth) enables you to meet your requirements to include the scripts to control compilation as well as any modifications to the original source.
            The error reporting tool allows you to
            submit errors encountered during builds to a central database.
            Outside of the build environment, you can use a web interface to
            browse errors, view statistics, and query for errors.
            The tool works using a client-server system where the client
            portion is integrated with the installed Yocto Project
            Source Directory
            (e.g. poky).
            The server receives the information collected and saves it in a
            database.
        
A live instance of the error reporting server exists at http://errors.yoctoproject.org. This server exists so that when you want to get help with build failures, you can submit all of the information on the failure easily and then point to the URL in your bug report or send an email to the mailing list.
                By default, the error reporting tool is disabled.
                You can enable it by inheriting the
                report-error
                class by adding the following statement to the end of
                your local.conf file in your
                Build Directory.
                
     INHERIT += "report-error"
                
                By default, the error reporting feature stores information in
                ${LOG_DIR}/error-report.
                However, you can specify a directory to use by adding the following
                to your local.conf file:
                
     ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
                Enabling error reporting causes the build process to collect the errors and store them in a file as previously described. When the build system encounters an error, it includes a command as part of the console output. You can run the command to send the error file to the server. For example, the following command sends the errors to an upstream server:
     $ send-error-report /home/brandusa/project/poky/build/tmp/log/error-report/error_report_201403141617.txt
                In the previous example, the errors are sent to a public database available at http://errors.yoctoproject.org, which is used by the entire community. If you specify a particular server, you can send the errors to a different database. Use the following command for more information on available options:
     $ send-error-report --help
                
When sending the error file, you are prompted to review the data being sent as well as to provide a name and optional email address. Once you satisfy these prompts, the command returns a link from the server that corresponds to your entry in the database. For example, here is a typical link:
     http://errors.yoctoproject.org/Errors/Details/9522/
                Following the link takes you to a web interface where you can browse, query the errors, and view statistics.
                To disable the error reporting feature, simply remove or comment
                out the following statement from the end of your
                local.conf file in your
                Build Directory.
                
     INHERIT += "report-error"
                
If you want to set up your own error reporting server, you can obtain the code from the Git repository at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/error-report-web/. Instructions on how to set it up are in the README document.
Quick EMUlator (QEMU) is an Open Source project the Yocto Project uses as part of its development "tool set". As such, the information in this chapter is limited to the Yocto Project integration of QEMU and not QEMU in general. For official information and documentation on QEMU, see the following references:
QEMU Website: The official website for the QEMU Open Source project.
Documentation: The QEMU user manual.
This chapter provides an overview of the Yocto Project's integration of QEMU, a description of how you use QEMU and its various options, running under a Network File System (NFS) server, and a few tips and tricks you might find helpful when using QEMU.
Within the context of the Yocto Project, QEMU is an emulator and virtualization machine that allows you to run a complete image you have built using the Yocto Project as just another task on your build system. QEMU is useful for running and testing images and applications on supported Yocto Project architectures without having actual hardware. Among other things, the Yocto Project uses QEMU to run automated Quality Assurance (QA) tests on final images shipped with each release.
QEMU is made available with the Yocto Project a number of ways. One method is to install a Software Development Kit (SDK). For more information on how to make sure you have QEMU available, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
        Running QEMU involves having your build environment set up, having the
        right artifacts available, and understanding how to use the many
        options that are available to you when you start QEMU using the
        runqemu command.
    
            You run QEMU in the same environment from which you run BitBake.
            This means you need to source a build environment script (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
        
runqemu Command¶
            The basic runqemu command syntax is as
            follows:
            
     $ runqemu [option ]  [...]
            
            Based on what you provide on the command line,
            runqemu does a good job of figuring out what
            you are trying to do.
            For example, by default, QEMU looks for the most recently built
            image according to the timestamp when it needs to look for an
            image.
            Minimally, through the use of options, you must provide either
            a machine name, a virtual machine image
            (*.vmdk), or a kernel image
            (*.bin).
        
            Following is a description of runqemu
            options you can provide on the command line:
            
runqemu provides appropriate error
                messaging to help you correct the problem.
            
QEMUARCH:
                    The QEMU machine architecture, which must be "qemux86",
                    "qemux86_64", "qemuarm", "qemumips", "qemumipsel",
                    “qemumips64", "qemush4", "qemuppc", "qemumicroblaze",
                    or "qemuzynq".
                    
VM.vmdk file.
                    Use this option when you want to boot a
                    .vmdk image.
                    The image filename you provide must contain one of the
                    following strings: "qemux86-64", "qemux86", "qemuarm",
                    "qemumips64", "qemumips", "qemuppc", or "qemush4".
                    
ROOTFS:
                    A root filesystem that has one of the following
                    filetype extensions: "ext2", "ext3", "ext4", "jffs2",
                    "nfs", or "btrfs".
                    If the filename you provide for this option uses “nfs”, it
                    must provide an explicit root filesystem path.
                    
KERNEL:
                    A kernel image, which is a .bin file.
                    When you provide a .bin file,
                    runqemu detects it and assumes the
                    file is a kernel image.
                    
MACHINE:
                    The architecture of the QEMU machine, which must be one
                    of the following: "qemux86",
                    "qemux86-64", "qemuarm", "qemumips", "qemumipsel",
                    “qemumips64", "qemush4", "qemuppc", "qemumicroblaze",
                    or "qemuzynq".
                    The MACHINE and
                    QEMUARCH options are basically
                    identical.
                    If you do not provide a MACHINE
                    option, runqemu tries to determine
                    it based on other options.
                    
ramfs:
                    Indicates you are booting an initial RAM disk (initramfs)
                    image, which means the FSTYPE is
                    cpio.gz.
                    
iso:
                    Indicates you are booting an ISO image, which means the
                    FSTYPE is
                    .iso.
                    
nographic:
                    Disables the video console, which sets the console to
                    "ttys0".
                    
serial:
                    Enables a serial console on
                    /dev/ttyS0.
                    
biosdir:
                    Establishes a custom directory for BIOS, VGA BIOS and
                    keymaps.
                    
biosfilename:
                    Establishes a custom BIOS name.
                    
qemuparams=\":
                    Specifies custom QEMU parameters.
                    Use this option to pass options other than the simple
                    "kvm" and "serial" options.
                    xyz\"
bootparams=\":
                    Specifies custom boot parameters for the kernel.
                    xyz\"
audio:
                    Enables audio in QEMU.
                    The MACHINE option must be
                    either "qemux86" or "qemux86-64" in order for audio to be
                    enabled.
                    Additionally, the snd_intel8x0
                    or snd_ens1370 driver must be
                    installed in linux guest.
                    
slirp:
                    Enables "slirp" networking, which is a different way
                    of networking that does not need root access
                    but also is not as easy to use or comprehensive
                    as the default.
                    
kvm:
                    Enables KVM when running "qemux86" or "qemux86-64"
                    QEMU architectures.
                    For KVM to work, all the following conditions must be met:
                    
                            Your MACHINE must be either
qemux86" or "qemux86-64".
                            
                            Your build host has to have the KVM modules
                            installed, which are
                            /dev/kvm.
                            
                            The  build host /dev/kvm
                            directory has to be both writable and readable.
                            
kvm-vhost:
                    Enables KVM with VHOST support when running "qemux86" or "qemux86-64"
                    QEMU architectures.
                    For KVM with VHOST to work, the following conditions must
                    be met:
                    
kvm option conditions must be met.
                            Your build host has to have virtio net device, which
                            are /dev/vhost-net.
                            
                            The build host /dev/vhost-net
                            directory has to be either readable or writable
                            and “slirp-enabled”.
                            
publicvnc:
                    Enables a VNC server open to all hosts.
                    
            For further understanding regarding option use with
            runqemu, consider some examples.
        
            This example starts QEMU with
            MACHINE set to "qemux86".
            Assuming a standard
            Build Directory,
            runqemu automatically finds the
            bzImage-qemux86.bin image file and
            the
            core-image-minimal-qemux86-20140707074611.rootfs.ext3
            (assuming the current build created a
            core-image-minimal image).
            
    $ runqemu qemux86
            This example produces the exact same results as the previous example. This command, however, specifically provides the image and root filesystem type.
     $ runqemu qemux86 core-image-minimal ext3
            
            This example specifies to boot an initial RAM disk image
            and to enable audio in QEMU.
            For this case, runqemu set the
            internal variable FSTYPE to
            "cpio.gz".
            Also, for audio to be enabled, an appropriate driver must
            be installed (see the previous description for the
            audio option for more information).
            
     $ runqemu qemux86 ramfs audio
            
            This example does not provide enough information for
            QEMU to launch.
            While the command does provide a root filesystem type, it
            must also minimally provide a
            MACHINE,
            KERNEL, or
            VM option.
            
     $ runqemu ext3
            
            This example specifies to boot a virtual machine image
            (.vmdk file).
            From the .vmdk,
            runqemu determines the QEMU
            architecture (MACHINE) to be
            "qemux86" and the root filesystem type to be "vmdk".
            
     $ runqemu /home/scott-lenovo/vm/core-image-minimal-qemux86.vmdk
            
One method for running QEMU is to run it on an NFS server. This is useful when you need to access the same file system from both the build and the emulated system at the same time. It is also worth noting that the system does not need root privileges to run. It uses a user space NFS server to avoid that. This section describes how to set up for running QEMU using an NFS server and then how you can start and stop the server.
            Once you are able to run QEMU in your environment, you can use the
            runqemu-extract-sdk script, which is located
            in the scripts directory along with
            runqemu script.
            The runqemu-extract-sdk takes a root
            file system tarball and extracts it into a location that you
            specify.
            Then, when you run runqemu, you can specify
            the location that has the file system to pass it to QEMU.
            Here is an example that takes a file system and extracts it to
            a directory named test-nfs:
            
     runqemu-extract-sdk ./tmp/deploy/images/qemux86/core-image-sato-qemux86.tar.bz2 test-nfs
            
            Once you have extracted the file system, you can run
            runqemu normally with the additional
            location of the file system.
            You can then also make changes to the files within
            ./test-nfs and see those changes appear in the
            image in real time.
            Here is an example using the qemux86 image:
            
     runqemu qemux86 ./test-nfs
            
You can manually start and stop the NFS share using these commands:
start:
                    Starts the NFS share:
                    
     runqemu-export-rootfs start file-system-location
                    
stop:
                    Stops the NFS share:
                    
     runqemu-export-rootfs stop file-system-location
                    
restart:
                    Restarts the NFS share:
                    
     runqemu-export-rootfs restart file-system-location
                    
The following list describes things you can do to make running QEMU in the context of the Yocto Project a better experience:
Switching Between Consoles:
                When booting or running QEMU, you can switch between
                supported consoles by using
                Ctrl+Alt+number.
                For example, Ctrl+Alt+3 switches you to the serial console as
                long as that console is enabled.
                Being able to switch consoles is helpful, for example, if the
                main QEMU console breaks for some reason.
                
Removing the Splash Screen: You can remove the splash screen when QEMU is booting by using Alt+left. Removing the splash screen allows you to see what is happening in the background.
Disabling the Cursor Grab: The default QEMU integration captures the cursor within the main window. It does this since standard mouse devices only provide relative input and not absolute coordinates. You then have to break out of the grab using the "Ctrl+Alt" key combination. However, the Yocto Project's integration of QEMU enables the wacom USB touch pad driver by default to allow input of absolute coordinates. This default means that the mouse can enter and leave the main window without the grab taking effect leading to a better user experience.
|  | 
Welcome to the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide. This manual provides information that explains how to use both the standard Yocto Project SDK and an extensible SDK to develop applications and images using the Yocto Project. Additionally, the manual also provides information on how to use the popular Eclipse™ IDE as part of your application development workflow within the SDK environment.
Prior to the 2.0 Release of the Yocto Project, application development was primarily accomplished through the use of the Application Development Toolkit (ADT) and the availability of stand-alone cross-development toolchains and other tools. With the 2.1 Release of the Yocto Project, application development has transitioned to within a more traditional SDK and extensible SDK.
A standard SDK consists of the following:
Cross-Development Toolchain: This toolchain contains a compiler, debugger, and various miscellaneous tools.
Libraries, Headers, and Symbols: The libraries, headers, and symbols are specific to the image (i.e. they match the image).
Environment Setup Script:
                This *.sh file, once run, sets up the
                cross-development environment by defining variables and
                preparing for SDK use.
                
You can use the standard SDK to independently develop and test code that is destined to run on some target machine.
An extensible SDK consists of everything that the standard SDK has plus tools that allow you to easily add new applications and libraries to an image, modify the source of an existing component, test changes on the target hardware, and easily integrate an application into the OpenEmbedded build system.
        SDKs are completely self-contained.
        The binaries are linked against their own copy of
        libc, which results in no dependencies
        on the target system.
        To achieve this, the pointer to the dynamic loader is
        configured at install time since that path cannot be dynamically
        altered.
        This is the reason for a wrapper around the
        populate_sdk and
        populate_sdk_ext archives.
    
        Another feature for the SDKs is that only one set of cross-compiler
        toolchain binaries are produced per architecture.
        This feature takes advantage of the fact that the target hardware can
        be passed to gcc as a set of compiler options.
        Those options are set up by the environment script and contained in
        variables such as
        CC
        and
        LD.
        This reduces the space needed for the tools.
        Understand, however, that a sysroot is still needed for every target
        since those binaries are target-specific.
    
The SDK development environment consists of the following:
The self-contained SDK, which is an architecture-specific cross-toolchain and matching sysroots (target and native) all built by the OpenEmbedded build system (e.g. the SDK). The toolchain and sysroots are based on a Metadata configuration and extensions, which allows you to cross-develop on the host machine for the target hardware.
The Quick EMUlator (QEMU), which lets you simulate target hardware. QEMU is not literally part of the SDK. You must build and include this emulator separately. However, QEMU plays an important role in the development process that revolves around use of the SDK.
The Eclipse IDE Yocto Plug-in. This plug-in is available for you if you are an Eclipse user. In the same manner as QEMU, the plug-in is not literally part of the SDK but is rather available for use as part of the development process.
Various user-space tools that greatly enhance your application development experience. These tools are also separate from the actual SDK but can be independently obtained and used in the development process.
The Cross-Development Toolchain consists of a cross-compiler, cross-linker, and cross-debugger that are used to develop user-space applications for targeted hardware. This toolchain is created by running a toolchain installer script or through a Build Directory that is based on your Metadata configuration or extension for your targeted device. The cross-toolchain works with a matching target sysroot.
The native and target sysroots contain needed headers and libraries for generating binaries that run on the target architecture. The target sysroot is based on the target root filesystem image that is built by the OpenEmbedded build system and uses the same Metadata configuration used to build the cross-toolchain.
The QEMU emulator allows you to simulate your hardware while running your application or image. QEMU is not part of the SDK but is made available a number of ways:
                    If you have cloned the poky Git
                    repository to create a
                    Source Directory
                    and you have sourced the environment setup script, QEMU is
                    installed and automatically available.
                    
If you have downloaded a Yocto Project release and unpacked it to create a Source Directory and you have sourced the environment setup script, QEMU is installed and automatically available.
If you have installed the cross-toolchain tarball and you have sourced the toolchain's setup environment script, QEMU is also installed and automatically available.
The Eclipse IDE is a popular development environment and it fully supports development using the Yocto Project. When you install and configure the Eclipse Yocto Project Plug-in into the Eclipse IDE, you maximize your Yocto Project experience. Installing and configuring the Plug-in results in an environment that has extensions specifically designed to let you more easily develop software. These extensions allow for cross-compilation, deployment, and execution of your output into a QEMU emulation session. You can also perform cross-debugging and profiling. The environment also supports a suite of tools that allows you to perform remote profiling, tracing, collection of power data, collection of latency data, and collection of performance data.
For information about the application development workflow that uses the Eclipse IDE and for a detailed example of how to install and configure the Eclipse Yocto Project Plug-in, see the "Developing Applications Using Eclipse™" section.
User-space tools, which are available as part of the SDK development environment, can be helpful. The tools include LatencyTOP, PowerTOP, Perf, SystemTap, and Lttng-ust. These tools are common development tools for the Linux platform.
LatencyTOP: LatencyTOP focuses on latency that causes skips in audio, stutters in your desktop experience, or situations that overload your server even when you have plenty of CPU power left.
PowerTOP: Helps you determine what software is using the most power. You can find out more about PowerTOP at https://01.org/powertop/.
Perf: Performance counters for Linux used to keep track of certain types of hardware and software events. For more information on these types of counters see https://perf.wiki.kernel.org/. For examples on how to setup and use this tool, see the "perf" section in the Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing Manual.
SystemTap: A free software infrastructure that simplifies information gathering about a running Linux system. This information helps you diagnose performance or functional problems. SystemTap is not available as a user-space tool through the Eclipse IDE Yocto Plug-in. See http://sourceware.org/systemtap for more information on SystemTap. For examples on how to setup and use this tool, see the "SystemTap" section in the Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing Manual.
Lttng-ust: A User-space Tracer designed to provide detailed information on user-space activity. See http://lttng.org/ust for more information on Lttng-ust.
Fundamentally, the SDK fits into the development process as follows:
|  | 
The SDK is installed on any machine and can be used to develop applications, images, and kernels. An SDK can even be used by a QA Engineer or Release Engineer. The fundamental concept is that the machine that has the SDK installed does not have to be associated with the machine that has the Yocto Project installed. A developer can independently compile and test an object on their machine and then, when the object is ready for integration into an image, they can simply make it available to the machine that has the Yocto Project. Once the object is available, the image can be rebuilt using the Yocto Project to produce the modified image.
You just need to follow these general steps:
Install the SDK for your target hardware: For information on how to install the SDK, see the "Installing the SDK" section.
Download the Target Image: The Yocto Project supports several target architectures and has many pre-built kernel images and root filesystem images.
If you are going to develop your application on
                hardware, go to the
                machines
                download area and choose a target machine area
                from which to download the kernel image and root filesystem.
                This download area could have several files in it that
                support development using actual hardware.
                For example, the area might contain
                .hddimg files that combine the
                kernel image with the filesystem, boot loaders, and
                so forth.
                Be sure to get the files you need for your particular
                development process.
If you are going to develop your application and
                then run and test it using the QEMU emulator, go to the
                machines/qemu
                download area.
                From this area, go down into the directory for your
                target architecture (e.g. qemux86_64
                for an Intel®-based
                64-bit architecture).
                Download kernel, root filesystem, and any other files you
                need for your process.
                
Develop and Test your Application: At this point, you have the tools to develop your application. If you need to separately install and use the QEMU emulator, you can go to QEMU Home Page to download and learn about the emulator. See the "Using the Quick EMUlator (QEMU)" chapter in the Yocto Project Development Manual for information on using QEMU within the Yocto Project.
The remainder of this manual describes how to use both the standard SDK and the extensible SDK. Information also exists in appendix form that describes how you can build, install, and modify an SDK.
This chapter describes the standard SDK and how to use it. Information covers the pieces of the SDK, how to install it, and presents several task-based procedures common for developing with a standard SDK.
The Standard SDK provides a cross-development toolchain and libraries tailored to the contents of a specific image. You would use the Standard SDK if you want a more traditional toolchain experience.
The installed Standard SDK consists of several files and directories. Basically, it contains an SDK environment setup script, some configuration files, and host and target root filesystems to support usage. You can see the directory structure in the "Installed Standard SDK Directory Structure" section.
        The first thing you need to do is install the SDK on your host
        development machine by running the *.sh
        installation script.
    
        You can download a tarball installer, which includes the
        pre-built toolchain, the runqemu
        script, and support files from the appropriate directory under
        http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/yocto/yocto-2.1.2/toolchain/.
        Toolchains are available for 32-bit and 64-bit x86 development
        systems from the i686 and
        x86_64 directories, respectively.
        The toolchains the Yocto Project provides are based off the
        core-image-sato image and contain
        libraries appropriate for developing against that image.
        Each type of development system supports five or more target
        architectures.
    
The names of the tarball installer scripts are such that a string representing the host system appears first in the filename and then is immediately followed by a string representing the target architecture.
     poky-glibc-host_system-image_type-arch-toolchain-release_version.sh
     Where:
         host_system is a string representing your development system:
                    i686 or x86_64.
         image_type is the image for which the SDK was built.
         arch is a string representing the tuned target architecture:
                    i586, x86_64, powerpc, mips, armv7a or armv5te
         release_version is a string representing the release number of the
                Yocto Project:
                    2.1.2, 2.1.2+snapshot
        
        For example, the following toolchain installer is for a 64-bit
        development host system and a i586-tuned target architecture
        based off the SDK for core-image-sato and
        using the current 2.1.2 snapshot:
        
     poky-glibc-x86_64-core-image-sato-i586-toolchain-2.1.2.sh
        
        The SDK and toolchains are self-contained and by default are installed
        into /opt/poky.
        However, when you run the SDK installer, you can choose an
        installation directory.
        
     $ chmod +x poky-glibc-x86_64-core-image-sato-i586-toolchain-2.1.sh
            
        The following command shows how to run the installer given a
        toolchain tarball for a 64-bit x86 development host system and
        a 32-bit x86 target architecture.
        The example assumes the toolchain installer is located in
        ~/Downloads/.
        
     $ ./poky-glibc-x86_64-core-image-sato-i586-toolchain-2.1.sh
     Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro) SDK installer version 2.0
     ===============================================================
     Enter target directory for SDK (default: /opt/poky/2.1):
     You are about to install the SDK to "/opt/poky/2.1". Proceed[Y/n]? Y
     Extracting SDK.......................................................................done
     Setting it up...done
     SDK has been successfully set up and is ready to be used.
     Each time you wish to use the SDK in a new shell session, you need to source the environment setup script e.g.
      $ . /opt/poky/2.1/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
        
Again, reference the "Installed Standard SDK Directory Structure" section for more details on the resulting directory structure of the installed SDK.
Once you have the SDK installed, you must run the SDK environment setup script before you can actually use it. This setup script resides in the directory you chose when you installed the SDK. For information on where this setup script can reside, see the "Obtaining the SDK" Appendix.
        Before running the script, be sure it is the one that matches the
        architecture for which you are developing.
        Environment setup scripts begin with the string
        "environment-setup" and include as part of their
        name the tuned target architecture.
        For example, the command to source a setup script for an IA-based
        target machine using i586 tuning and located in the default SDK
        installation directory is as follows:
        
     $ source /opt/poky/2.1.2/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
        When you run the setup script, many environment variables are defined:
     SDKTARGETSYSROOT - The path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation
     PKG_CONFIG_PATH - The path to the target pkg-config files
     CONFIG_SITE - A GNU autoconf site file preconfigured for the target
     CC - The minimal command and arguments to run the C compiler
     CXX - The minimal command and arguments to run the C++ compiler
     CPP - The minimal command and arguments to run the C preprocessor
     AS - The minimal command and arguments to run the assembler
     LD - The minimal command and arguments to run the linker
     GDB - The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger
     STRIP - The minimal command and arguments to run 'strip', which strips symbols
     RANLIB - The minimal command and arguments to run 'ranlib'
     OBJCOPY - The minimal command and arguments to run 'objcopy'
     OBJDUMP - The minimal command and arguments to run 'objdump'
     AR - The minimal command and arguments to run 'ar'
     NM - The minimal command and arguments to run 'nm'
     TARGET_PREFIX - The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools
     CROSS_COMPILE - The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools
     CONFIGURE_FLAGS - The minimal arguments for GNU configure
     CFLAGS - Suggested C flags
     CXXFLAGS - Suggested C++ flags
     LDFLAGS - Suggested linker flags when you use CC to link
     CPPFLAGS - Suggested preprocessor flags
        
Once you have a suitable cross-toolchain installed, it is very easy to develop a project outside of the OpenEmbedded build system. This section presents a simple "Helloworld" example that shows how to set up, compile, and run the project.
Follow these steps to create a simple Autotools-based project:
Create your directory: Create a clean directory for your project and then make that directory your working location:
     $ mkdir $HOME/helloworld
     $ cd $HOME/helloworld
                    Populate the directory:
                    Create hello.c, Makefile.am,
                    and configure.ac files as follows:
                    
For hello.c, include
                            these lines:
                            
     #include <stdio.h>
     main()
        {
           printf("Hello World!\n");
        }
                            For Makefile.am,
                            include these lines:
                            
     bin_PROGRAMS = hello
     hello_SOURCES = hello.c
                            For configure.in,
                            include these lines:
                            
     AC_INIT(hello,0.1)
     AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([foreign])
     AC_PROG_CC
     AC_PROG_INSTALL
     AC_OUTPUT(Makefile)
                            Source the cross-toolchain environment setup file: Installation of the cross-toolchain creates a cross-toolchain environment setup script in the directory that the SDK was installed. Before you can use the tools to develop your project, you must source this setup script. The script begins with the string "environment-setup" and contains the machine architecture, which is followed by the string "poky-linux". Here is an example that sources a script from the default SDK installation directory that uses the 32-bit Intel x86 Architecture and the Krogoth Yocto Project release:
     $ source /opt/poky/2.1.2/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
                    Generate the local aclocal.m4
                    files and create the configure script:
                    The following GNU Autotools generate the local
                    aclocal.m4 files and create the
                    configure script:
                    
     $ aclocal
     $ autoconf
                    Generate files needed by GNU coding standards: GNU coding standards require certain files in order for the project to be compliant. This command creates those files:
     $ touch NEWS README AUTHORS ChangeLog
                    Generate the configure
                    file:
                    This command generates the configure:
                    
     $ automake -a
                    Cross-compile the project:
                    This command compiles the project using the cross-compiler.
                    The
                    CONFIGURE_FLAGS
                    environment variable provides the minimal arguments for
                    GNU configure:
                    
     $ ./configure ${CONFIGURE_FLAGS}
                    Make and install the project: These two commands generate and install the project into the destination directory:
     $ make
     $ make install DESTDIR=./tmp
                    Verify the installation: This command is a simple way to verify the installation of your project. Running the command prints the architecture on which the binary file can run. This architecture should be the same architecture that the installed cross-toolchain supports.
     $ file ./tmp/usr/local/bin/hello
                    Execute your project: To execute the project in the shell, simply enter the name. You could also copy the binary to the actual target hardware and run the project there as well:
     $ ./hello
                    As expected, the project displays the "Hello World!" message.
            For an Autotools-based project, you can use the cross-toolchain by just
            passing the appropriate host option to configure.sh.
            The host option you use is derived from the name of the environment setup
            script found in the directory in which you installed the cross-toolchain.
            For example, the host option for an ARM-based target that uses the GNU EABI
            is armv5te-poky-linux-gnueabi.
            You will notice that the name of the script is
            environment-setup-armv5te-poky-linux-gnueabi.
            Thus, the following command works to update your project and
            rebuild it using the appropriate cross-toolchain tools:
            
     $ ./configure --host=armv5te-poky-linux-gnueabi \
        --with-libtool-sysroot=sysroot_dir
            
configure script results in problems recognizing the
                --with-libtool-sysroot=sysroot-dir option,
                regenerate the script to enable the support by doing the following and then
                run the script again:
                
     $ libtoolize --automake
     $ aclocal -I ${OECORE_NATIVE_SYSROOT}/usr/share/aclocal \
        [-I dir_containing_your_project-specific_m4_macros]
     $ autoconf
     $ autoheader
     $ automake -a
                
        For Makefile-based projects, the cross-toolchain environment variables
        established by running the cross-toolchain environment setup script
        are subject to general make rules.
    
To illustrate this, consider the following four cross-toolchain environment variables:
     CC=i586-poky-linux-gcc -m32 -march=i586 --sysroot=/opt/poky/2.1.2/sysroots/i586-poky-linux
     LD=i586-poky-linux-ld --sysroot=/opt/poky/2.1.2/sysroots/i586-poky-linux
     CFLAGS=-O2 -pipe -g -feliminate-unused-debug-types
     CXXFLAGS=-O2 -pipe -g -feliminate-unused-debug-types
        Now, consider the following three cases:
Case 1 - No Variables Set in the Makefile:
                Because these variables are not specifically set in the
                Makefile, the variables retain their
                values based on the environment.
                
Case 2 - Variables Set in the Makefile:
                Specifically setting variables in the
                Makefile during the build results in the
                environment settings of the variables being overwritten.
                
Case 3 - Variables Set when the Makefile is Executed from the Command Line:
                Executing the Makefile from the command
                line results in the variables being overwritten with
                command-line content regardless of what is being set in the
                Makefile.
                In this case, environment variables are not considered unless
                you use the "-e" flag during the build:
                
     $ make -e file
                
                If you use this flag, then the environment values of the
                variables override any variables specifically set in the
                Makefile.
                
If you are familiar with the popular Eclipse IDE, you can use an Eclipse Yocto Plug-in to allow you to develop, deploy, and test your application all from within Eclipse. This section describes general workflow using the SDK and Eclipse and how to configure and set up Eclipse.
The following figure and supporting list summarize the application development general workflow that employs both the SDK Eclipse.
|  | 
Prepare the host system for the Yocto Project:
                    See
                    "Supported Linux Distributions"
                    and
                    "Required Packages for the Host Development System" sections both
                    in the Yocto Project Reference Manual for requirements.
                    In particular, be sure your host system has the
                    xterm package installed.
                    
Secure the Yocto Project kernel target image: You must have a target kernel image that has been built using the OpenEmbedded build system.
Depending on whether the Yocto Project has a pre-built image that matches your target architecture and where you are going to run the image while you develop your application (QEMU or real hardware), the area from which you get the image differs.
Download the image from
                                machines
                                if your target architecture is supported and you are going to develop
                                and test your application on actual hardware.
Download the image from
                                
                                machines/qemu if your target architecture is supported
                                and you are going to develop and test your application using the QEMU
                                emulator.
Build your image if you cannot find a pre-built image that matches your target architecture. If your target architecture is similar to a supported architecture, you can modify the kernel image before you build it. See the "Patching the Kernel" section in the Yocto Project Development manual for an example.
For information on pre-built kernel image naming schemes for images that can run on the QEMU emulator, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
Install the SDK: The SDK provides a target-specific cross-development toolchain, the root filesystem, the QEMU emulator, and other tools that can help you develop your application. For information on how to install the SDK, see the "Installing the SDK" section.
Secure the target root filesystem and the Cross-development toolchain: You need to find and download the appropriate root filesystem and the cross-development toolchain.
You can find the tarballs for the root filesystem in the same area used for the kernel image. Depending on the type of image you are running, the root filesystem you need differs. For example, if you are developing an application that runs on an image that supports Sato, you need to get a root filesystem that supports Sato.
You can find the cross-development toolchains at
                    toolchains.
                    Be sure to get the correct toolchain for your development host and your
                    target architecture.
                    See the "Locating Pre-Built SDK Installers"
                    section for information and the
                    "Installing the SDK"
                    section for installation information.
                    
Create and build your application: At this point, you need to have source files for your application. Once you have the files, you can use the Eclipse IDE to import them and build the project. If you are not using Eclipse, you need to use the cross-development tools you have installed to create the image.
Deploy the image with the application: If you are using the Eclipse IDE, you can deploy your image to the hardware or to QEMU through the project's preferences. If you are not using the Eclipse IDE, then you need to deploy the application to the hardware using other methods. Or, if you are using QEMU, you need to use that tool and load your image in for testing. See the "Using the Quick EMUlator (QEMU)" chapter in the Yocto Project Development Manual for information on using QEMU.
Test and debug the application: Once your application is deployed, you need to test it. Within the Eclipse IDE, you can use the debugging environment along with the set of installed user-space tools to debug your application. Of course, the same user-space tools are available separately if you choose not to use the Eclipse IDE.
The Eclipse IDE is a popular development environment and it fully supports development using the Yocto Project.
When you install and configure the Eclipse Yocto Project Plug-in into the Eclipse IDE, you maximize your Yocto Project experience. Installing and configuring the Plug-in results in an environment that has extensions specifically designed to let you more easily develop software. These extensions allow for cross-compilation, deployment, and execution of your output into a QEMU emulation session as well as actual target hardware. You can also perform cross-debugging and profiling. The environment also supports a suite of tools that allows you to perform remote profiling, tracing, collection of power data, collection of latency data, and collection of performance data.
This section describes how to install and configure the Eclipse IDE Yocto Plug-in and how to use it to develop your application.
To develop within the Eclipse IDE, you need to do the following:
Install the optimal version of the Eclipse IDE.
Configure the Eclipse IDE.
Install the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in.
Configure the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in.
It is recommended that you have the Luna SR2 (4.4.2) version of the Eclipse IDE installed on your development system. However, if you currently have the Kepler 4.3.2 version installed and you do not want to upgrade the IDE, you can configure Kepler to work with the Yocto Project.
If you do not have the Luna SR2 (4.4.2) Eclipse IDE installed, you can find the tarball at http://www.eclipse.org/downloads. From that site, choose the appropriate download from the "Eclipse IDE for C/C++ Developers". This version contains the Eclipse Platform, the Java Development Tools (JDT), and the Plug-in Development Environment.
                    Once you have downloaded the tarball, extract it into a
                    clean directory.
                    For example, the following commands unpack and install the
                    downloaded Eclipse IDE tarball into a clean directory
                    using the default name eclipse:
                    
     $ cd ~
     $ tar -xzvf ~/Downloads/eclipse-cpp-luna-SR2-linux-gtk-x86_64.tar.gz
                    
This section presents the steps needed to configure the Eclipse IDE.
Before installing and configuring the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in, you need to configure the Eclipse IDE. Follow these general steps:
Start the Eclipse IDE.
Make sure you are in your Workbench and select "Install New Software" from the "Help" pull-down menu.
Select
                            Luna - http://download.eclipse.org/releases/luna
                            from the "Work with:" pull-down menu.
                            
Kepler - http://download.eclipse.org/releases/kepler
Expand the box next to "Linux Tools"
                            and select the
                            Linux Tools LTTng Tracer Control,
                            Linux Tools LTTng Userspace Analysis,
                            and
                            LTTng Kernel Analysis boxes.
                            If these selections do not appear in the list,
                            that means the items are already installed.
                            
LTTng - Linux Tracing Toolkit
                                box.
                            
Expand the box next to "Mobile and Device Development" and select the following boxes. Again, if any of the following items are not available for selection, that means the items are already installed:
C/C++ Remote Launch (Requires RSE Remote System Explorer)
Remote System Explorer End-user Runtime
Remote System Explorer User Actions
Target Management Terminal (Core SDK)
TCF Remote System Explorer add-in
TCF Target Explorer
Expand the box next to "Programming
                            Languages" and select the
                            C/C++ Autotools Support
                            and C/C++ Development Tools
                            boxes.
                            For Luna, these items do not appear on the list
                            as they are already installed.
                            
Complete the installation and restart the Eclipse IDE.
You can install the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in into the Eclipse IDE one of two ways: use the Yocto Project's Eclipse Update site to install the pre-built plug-in or build and install the plug-in from the latest source code.
To install the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in from the update site, follow these steps:
Start up the Eclipse IDE.
In Eclipse, select "Install New Software" from the "Help" menu.
Click "Add..." in the "Work with:" area.
Enter
                                http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/eclipse-plugin/2.1.2/luna
                                in the URL field and provide a meaningful name
                                in the "Name" field.
                                
http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/eclipse-plugin/2.1.2/kepler
                                    in the URL field.
                                Click "OK" to have the entry added to the "Work with:" drop-down list.
Select the entry for the plug-in from the "Work with:" drop-down list.
Check the boxes next to
                                Yocto Project ADT Plug-in,
                                Yocto Project Bitbake Commander Plug-in,
                                and
                                Yocto Project Documentation plug-in.
                                
Complete the remaining software installation steps and then restart the Eclipse IDE to finish the installation of the plug-in.
To install the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in from the latest source code, follow these steps:
Be sure your development system is not using OpenJDK to build the plug-in by doing the following:
Use the Oracle JDK. If you don't have that, go to http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/downloads/jdk7-downloads-1880260.html and download the latest appropriate Java SE Development Kit tarball for your development system and extract it into your home directory.
In the shell you are going
                                        to do your work, export the location of
                                        the Oracle Java.
                                        The previous step creates a new folder
                                        for the extracted software.
                                        You need to use the following
                                        export command
                                        and provide the specific location:
                                        
     export PATH=~/extracted_jdk_location/bin:$PATH
                                        
In the same shell, create a Git repository with:
     $ cd ~
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/eclipse-poky
                                
Be sure to checkout the correct tag. For example, if you are using Luna, do the following:
     $ git checkout luna/yocto-2.1.2
                                This puts you in a detached HEAD state, which is fine since you are only going to be building and not developing.
kepler/yocto-2.1.2
                                    branch.
                                
Change to the
                                scripts
                                directory within the Git repository:
                                
     $ cd scripts
                                
Set up the local build environment by running the setup script:
     $ ./setup.sh
                                
When the script finishes execution,
                                it prompts you with instructions on how to run
                                the build.sh script, which
                                is also in the scripts
                                directory of the Git repository created
                                earlier.
                                
Run the build.sh
                                script as directed.
                                Be sure to provide the tag name, documentation
                                branch, and a release name.
                                Here is an example that uses the
                                luna/yocto-2.1.2 tag, the
                                master documentation
                                branch, and
                                krogoth for the
                                release name:
                                
     $ ECLIPSE_HOME=/home/scottrif/eclipse-poky/scripts/eclipse ./build.sh luna/yocto-2.1.2 master krogoth 2>&1 | tee -a build.log
                                
                                After running the script, the file
                                org.yocto.sdk-release-date-archive.zip
                                is in the current directory.
                                
If necessary, start the Eclipse IDE and be sure you are in the Workbench.
Select "Install New Software" from the "Help" pull-down menu.
Click "Add".
Provide anything you want in the "Name" field.
Click "Archive" and browse to the
                                ZIP file you built in step eight.
                                This ZIP file should not be "unzipped", and must
                                be the *archive.zip file
                                created by running the
                                build.sh script.
                                
Click the "OK" button.
Check the boxes that appear in
                                the installation window to install the
                                Yocto Project ADT Plug-in,
                                Yocto Project Bitbake Commander Plug-in,
                                and the
                                Yocto Project Documentation plug-in.
                                
Finish the installation by clicking through the appropriate buttons. You can click "OK" when prompted about installing software that contains unsigned content.
Restart the Eclipse IDE if necessary.
At this point you should be able to configure the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in as described in the "Configuring the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in" section.
Configuring the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in involves setting the Cross Compiler options and the Target options. The configurations you choose become the default settings for all projects. You do have opportunities to change them later when you configure the project (see the following section).
To start, you need to do the following from within the Eclipse IDE:
Choose "Preferences" from the "Window" menu to display the Preferences Dialog.
Click "Yocto Project ADT" to display the configuration screen.
To configure the Cross Compiler Options, you must select the type of toolchain, point to the toolchain, specify the sysroot location, and select the target architecture.
Selecting the Toolchain Type:
                                Choose between
                                Standalone pre-built toolchain
                                and
                                Build system derived toolchain
                                for Cross Compiler Options.
                                    
                                            Standalone Pre-built Toolchain:
                                            Select this mode when you are using
                                            a stand-alone cross-toolchain.
                                            For example, suppose you are an
                                            application developer and do not
                                            need to build a target image.
                                            Instead, you just want to use an
                                            architecture-specific toolchain on
                                            an existing kernel and target root
                                            filesystem.
                                            Build System Derived Toolchain:
                                            Select this mode if the
                                            cross-toolchain has been installed
                                            and built as part of the
                                            Build Directory.
                                            When you select
                                            Build system derived toolchain,
                                            you are using the toolchain bundled
                                            inside the Build Directory.
                                            
Point to the Toolchain: If you are using a stand-alone pre-built toolchain, you should be pointing to where it is installed. See the "Installing the SDK" section for information about how the SDK is installed.
If you are using a system-derived
                                toolchain, the path you provide for the
                                Toolchain Root Location
                                field is the
                                Build Directory.
                                See the
                                "Building an SDK Installer"
                                section.
Specify the Sysroot Location: This location is where the root filesystem for the target hardware resides.
The location of the sysroot filesystem depends on where you separately extracted and installed the filesystem.
For information on how to install the toolchain and on how to extract and install the sysroot filesystem, see the "Building an SDK Installer" section.
Select the Target Architecture:
                                The target architecture is the type of hardware
                                you are going to use or emulate.
                                Use the pull-down
                                Target Architecture menu
                                to make your selection.
                                The pull-down menu should have the supported
                                architectures.
                                If the architecture you need is not listed in
                                the menu, you will need to build the image.
                                See the
                                "Building Images"
                                section of the Yocto Project Quick Start for
                                more information.
You can choose to emulate hardware using the QEMU emulator, or you can choose to run your image on actual hardware.
QEMU: Select this option if you will be using the QEMU emulator. If you are using the emulator, you also need to locate the kernel and specify any custom options.
If you selected
                                Build system derived toolchain,
                                the target kernel you built will be located in
                                the Build Directory in
                                tmp/deploy/images/
                                directory.
                                If you selected
                                machineStandalone pre-built toolchain,
                                the pre-built image you downloaded is located
                                in the directory you specified when you
                                downloaded the image.
Most custom options are for advanced QEMU
                                users to further customize their QEMU instance.
                                These options are specified between paired
                                angled brackets.
                                Some options must be specified outside the
                                brackets.
                                In particular, the options
                                serial,
                                nographic, and
                                kvm must all be outside the
                                brackets.
                                Use the man qemu command
                                to get help on all the options and their use.
                                The following is an example:
                               
    serial ‘<-m 256 -full-screen>’
                                
                                Regardless of the mode, Sysroot is already
                                defined as part of the Cross-Compiler Options
                                configuration in the
                                Sysroot Location: field.
                                
External HW: Select this option if you will be using actual hardware.
Click the "OK" to save your plug-in configurations.
You can create two types of projects: Autotools-based, or Makefile-based. This section describes how to create Autotools-based projects from within the Eclipse IDE. For information on creating Makefile-based projects in a terminal window, see the "Makefile-Based Projects" section.
To create a project based on a Yocto template and then display the source code, follow these steps:
Select "Project" from the "File -> New" menu.
Double click CC++.
                        
Double click C Project
                        to create the project.
Expand Yocto Project ADT Autotools Project.
                        
Select Hello World ANSI C Autotools Project.
                        This is an Autotools-based project based on a Yocto
                        template.
Put a name in the Project name:
                        field.
                        Do not use hyphens as part of the name.
                        
Click "Next".
Add information in the
                        Author and
                        Copyright notice fields.
                        
Be sure the License
                        field is correct.
Click "Finish".
If the "open perspective" prompt appears, click "Yes" so that you in the C/C++ perspective.
The left-hand navigation pane shows your project. You can display your source by double clicking the project's source file.
The earlier section, "Configuring the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in", sets up the default project configurations. You can override these settings for a given project by following these steps:
Select "Change Yocto Project Settings" from the "Project" menu. This selection brings up the Yocto Project Settings Dialog and allows you to make changes specific to an individual project.
By default, the Cross Compiler Options and Target Options for a project are inherited from settings you provided using the Preferences Dialog as described earlier in the "Configuring the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in" section. The Yocto Project Settings Dialog allows you to override those default settings for a given project.
Make your configurations for the project and click "OK".
Right-click in the navigation pane and
                        select "Reconfigure Project" from the pop-up menu.
                        This selection reconfigures the project by running
                        autogen.sh in the workspace for
                        your project.
                        The script also runs libtoolize,
                        aclocal,
                        autoconf,
                        autoheader,
                        automake --a, and
                        ./configure.
                        Click on the "Console" tab beneath your source code to
                        see the results of reconfiguring your project.
                        
To build the project select "Build Project" from the "Project" menu. The console should update and you can note the cross-compiler you are using.
Select the project.
                            Select "Folder" from the
                            File > New menu.
                            
In the "New Folder" Dialog, select "Link to alternate location (linked folder)".
Click "Browse" to navigate to the include folder inside the same sysroot location selected in the Yocto Project configuration preferences.
Click "OK".
Click "Finish" to save the linked folder.
To start the QEMU emulator from within Eclipse, follow these steps:
Expose and select "External Tools" from the "Run" menu. Your image should appear as a selectable menu item.
Select your image from the menu to launch the emulator in a new window.
If needed, enter your host root password in
                        the shell window at the prompt.
                        This sets up a Tap 0 connection
                        needed for running in user-space NFS mode.
                        
Wait for QEMU to launch.
Once QEMU launches, you can begin operating
                        within that environment.
                        One useful task at this point would be to determine the
                        IP Address for the user-space NFS by using the
                       ifconfig command.
                       
Once the QEMU emulator is running the image, you can deploy your application using the Eclipse IDE and then use the emulator to perform debugging. Follow these steps to deploy the application.
     ssh -XY user_name@remote_host_ip
                    
                    After running the command, add the command to be executed
                    in Eclipse's run configuration before the application
                    as follows:
                    
     export DISPLAY=:10.0
                    
Select "Debug Configurations..." from the "Run" menu.
In the left area, expand
                        C/C++Remote Application.
                        
Locate your project and select it to bring up a new tabbed view in the Debug Configurations Dialog.
Enter the absolute path into which you want
                        to deploy the application.
                        Use the "Remote Absolute File Path for
                        C/C++Application:" field.
                        For example, enter
                        /usr/bin/.
                        programname
Click on the "Debugger" tab to see the cross-tool debugger you are using.
Click on the "Main" tab.
Create a new connection to the QEMU instance by clicking on "new".
Select TCF, which means
                        Target Communication Framework.
Click "Next".
Clear out the "host name" field and enter the IP Address determined earlier.
Click "Finish" to close the New Connections Dialog.
Use the drop-down menu now in the "Connection" field and pick the IP Address you entered.
Click "Debug" to bring up a login screen and login.
Accept the debug perspective.
As mentioned earlier in the manual, several tools exist that enhance your development experience. These tools are aids in developing and debugging applications and images. You can run these user-space tools from within the Eclipse IDE through the "YoctoProjectTools" menu.
Once you pick a tool, you need to configure it for the remote target. Every tool needs to have the connection configured. You must select an existing TCF-based RSE connection to the remote target. If one does not exist, click "New" to create one.
Here are some specifics about the remote tools:
Lttng2.0 trace import:
                        Selecting this tool transfers the remote target's
                        Lttng tracing data back to the
                        local host machine and uses the Lttng Eclipse plug-in
                        to graphically display the output.
                        For information on how to use Lttng to trace an
                        application,
                        see http://lttng.org/documentation
                        and the
                        "LTTng (Linux Trace Toolkit, next generation)"
                        section, which is in the Yocto Project Profiling and
                        Tracing Manual.
                        
Lttng-user space (legacy) tool.
                            This tool no longer has any upstream support.
Before you use the
                        Lttng2.0 trace import tool,
                        you need to setup the Lttng Eclipse plug-in and create a
                        Tracing project.
                        Do the following:
                        
Select "Open Perspective" from the "Window" menu and then select "Other..." to bring up a menu of other perspectives. Choose "Tracing".
Click "OK" to change the Eclipse perspective into the Tracing perspective.
Create a new Tracing project by selecting "Project" from the "File -> New" menu.
Choose "Tracing Project" from the "Tracing" menu and click "Next".
Provide a name for your tracing project and click "Finish".
Generate your tracing data on the remote target.
Select "Lttng2.0 trace import" from the "Yocto Project Tools" menu to start the data import process.
Specify your remote connection name.
For the Ust directory path, specify
                                the location of your remote tracing data.
                                Make sure the location ends with
                                ust (e.g.
                                /usr/mysession/ust).
                                
Click "OK" to complete the import process. The data is now in the local tracing project you created.
Right click on the data and then use the menu to Select "Generic CTF Trace" from the "Trace Type... -> Common Trace Format" menu to map the tracing type.
Right click the mouse and select "Open" to bring up the Eclipse Lttng Trace Viewer so you view the tracing data.
PowerTOP:
                        Selecting this tool runs PowerTOP on the remote target
                        machine and displays the results in a new view called
                        PowerTOP.
The "Time to gather data(sec):" field is the time passed in seconds before data is gathered from the remote target for analysis.
The "show pids in wakeups list:" field corresponds
                        to the -p argument passed to
                        PowerTOP.
LatencyTOP and Perf:
                        LatencyTOP identifies system latency, while
                        Perf monitors the system's performance counter
                        registers.
                        Selecting either of these tools causes an RSE terminal
                        view to appear from which you can run the tools.
                        Both tools refresh the entire screen to display results
                        while they run.
                        For more information on setting up and using
                        perf, see the
                        "perf"
                        section in the Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing
                        Manual.
                        
SystemTap:
                        Systemtap is a tool that lets you create and reuse
                        scripts to examine the activities of a live Linux
                        system.
                        You can easily extract, filter, and summarize data
                        that helps you diagnose complex performance or
                        functional problems.
                        For more information on setting up and using
                        SystemTap, see the
                        SystemTap Documentation.
                        
yocto-bsp:
                        The yocto-bsp tool lets you
                        quickly set up a Board Support Package (BSP) layer.
                        The tool requires a Metadata location, build location,
                        BSP name, BSP output location, and a kernel
                        architecture.
                        For more information on the
                        yocto-bsp tool outside of Eclipse,
                        see the
                        "Creating a new BSP Layer Using the yocto-bsp Script"
                        section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package
                        (BSP) Developer's Guide.
                        
devtool in Your SDK Workflowdevtool addThis chapter describes the extensible SDK and how to use it. The extensible SDK makes it easy to add new applications and libraries to an image, modify the source for an existing component, test changes on the target hardware, and ease integration into the rest of the OpenEmbedded build system.
Information in this chapter covers features that are not part of the standard SDK. In other words, the chapter presents information unique to the extensible SDK only. For information on how to use the standard SDK, see the "Using the Standard SDK" chapter.
Getting set up to use the extensible SDK is identical to getting set up to use the standard SDK. You still need to locate and run the installer and then run the environment setup script. See the "Installing the SDK" and the "Running the SDK Environment Setup Script" sections for general information. The following items highlight the only differences between getting set up to use the extensible SDK as compared to the standard SDK:
Default Installation Directory:
                By default, the extensible SDK installs into the
                poky_sdk folder of your home directory.
                As with the standard SDK, you can choose to install the
                extensible SDK in any location when you run the installer.
                However, unlike the standard SDK, the location you choose needs
                to be writable for whichever users need to use the SDK,
                since files will need to be written under that directory during
                the normal course of operation.
                
Build Tools and Build System: The extensible SDK installer performs additional tasks as compared to the standard SDK installer. The extensible SDK installer extracts build tools specific to the SDK and the installer also prepares the internal build system within the SDK. Here is example output for running the extensible SDK installer:
     $ ./poky-glibc-x86_64-core-image-minimal-core2-64-toolchain-ext-2.1+snapshot.sh
     Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro) Extensible SDK installer version 2.1+snapshot
     ===================================================================================
     Enter target directory for SDK (default: ~/poky_sdk):
     You are about to install the SDK to "/home/scottrif/poky_sdk". Proceed[Y/n]? Y
     Extracting SDK......................................................................done
     Setting it up...
     Extracting buildtools...
     Preparing build system...
     done
     SDK has been successfully set up and is ready to be used.
     Each time you wish to use the SDK in a new shell session, you need to source the environment setup script e.g.
      $ . /home/scottrif/poky_sdk/environment-setup-core2-64-poky-linux
                
After installing the SDK, you need to run the SDK environment setup script. Here is the output:
     $ source environment-setup-core2-64-poky-linux
     SDK environment now set up; additionally you may now run devtool to perform development tasks.
     Run devtool --help for further details.
        
        Once you run the environment setup script, you have
        devtool available.
    
devtool in Your SDK Workflow¶
        The cornerstone of the extensible SDK is a command-line tool
        called devtool.
        This tool provides a number of features that help
        you build, test and package software within the extensible SDK, and
        optionally integrate it into an image built by the OpenEmbedded build
        system.
    
        The devtool command line is organized similarly
        to
        Git in that it has a
        number of sub-commands for each function.
        You can run devtool --help to see all the
        commands.
    
        Two devtool subcommands that provide
        entry-points into development are:
        
devtool add:
                Assists in adding new software to be built.
                
devtool modify:
                Sets up an environment to enable you to modify the source of
                an existing component.
                
        As with the OpenEmbedded build system, "recipes" represent software
        packages within devtool.
        When you use devtool add, a recipe is
        automatically created.
        When you use devtool modify, the specified
        existing recipe is used in order to determine where to get the source
        code and how to patch it.
        In both cases, an environment is set up so that when you build the
        recipe a source tree that is under your control is used in order to
        allow you to make changes to the source as desired.
        By default, both new recipes and the source go into a "workspace"
        directory under the SDK.
    
        The remainder of this section presents the
        devtool add and
        devtool modify workflows.
    
devtool add to Add an Application¶
            The devtool add command generates
            a new recipe based on existing source code.
            This command takes advantage of the
            workspace
            layer that many devtool commands
            use.
            The command is flexible enough to allow you to extract source
            code into both the workspace or a separate local Git repository
            and to use existing code that does not need to be extracted.
        
            Depending on your particular scenario, the arguments and options
            you use with devtool add form different
            combinations.
            The following diagram shows common development flows
            you would use with the devtool add
            command:
        
             
        
Generating the New Recipe:
                    The top part of the flow shows three scenarios by which
                    you could use devtool add to
                    generate a recipe based on existing source code.
In a shared development environment, it is typical where other developers are responsible for various areas of source code. As a developer, you are probably interested in using that source code as part of your development using the Yocto Project. All you need is access to the code, a recipe, and a controlled area in which to do your work.
Within the diagram, three possible scenarios
                    feed into the devtool add workflow:
                    
Left: The left scenario represents a common situation where the source code does not exist locally and needs to be extracted. In this situation, you just let it get extracted to the default workspace - you do not want it in some specific location outside of the workspace. Thus, everything you need will be located in the workspace:
     $ devtool add recipe fetchuri
                            
                            With this command, devtool
                            creates a recipe and an append file in the
                            workspace as well as extracts the upstream
                            source files into a local Git repository also
                            within the sources folder.
                            
Middle:
                            The middle scenario also represents a situation where
                            the source code does not exist locally.
                            In this case, the code is again upstream
                            and needs to be extracted to some
                            local area - this time outside of the default
                            workspace.
                            As always, if required devtool creates
                            a Git repository locally during the extraction.
                            Furthermore, the first positional argument
                            srctree in this case
                            identifies where the
                            devtool add command
                            will locate the extracted code outside of the
                            workspace:
                            
     $ devtool add recipe srctree fetchuri
                            
                            In summary, the source code is pulled from
                            fetchuri and extracted
                            into the location defined by
                            srctree as a local
                            Git repository.
Within workspace, devtool
                            creates both the recipe and an append file
                            for the recipe.
                            
Right:
                            The right scenario represents a situation
                            where the source tree (srctree) has been
                            previously prepared outside of the
                            devtool workspace.
                            
The following command names the recipe and identifies where the existing source tree is located:
     $ devtool add recipe srctree
                            The command examines the source code and creates a recipe for it placing the recipe into the workspace.
Because the extracted source code already exists,
                            devtool does not try to
                            relocate it into the workspace - just the new
                            the recipe is placed in the workspace.
Aside from a recipe folder, the command
                            also creates an append folder and places an initial
                            *.bbappend within.
                            
Edit the Recipe:
                    At this point, you can use devtool edit-recipe
                    to open up the editor as defined by the
                    $EDITOR environment variable
                    and modify the file:
                    
     $ devtool edit-recipe recipe
                    From within the editor, you can make modifications to the recipe that take affect when you build it later.
Build the Recipe or Rebuild the Image: At this point in the flow, the next step you take depends on what you are going to do with the new code.
If you need to take the build output and eventually
                    move it to the target hardware, you would use
                    devtool build:
                    
     $ devtool build recipe
                    On the other hand, if you want an image to
                    contain the recipe's packages for immediate deployment
                    onto a device (e.g. for testing purposes), you can use
                    the devtool build-image command:
                    
     $ devtool build-image image
                    
Deploy the Build Output:
                    When you use the devtool build
                    command to build out your recipe, you probably want to
                    see if the resulting build output works as expected on target
                    hardware.
                    
                    You can deploy your build output to that target hardware by
                    using the devtool deploy-target command:
                    
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                    
                    The target is a live target machine
                    running as an SSH server.
You can, of course, also deploy the image you build
                    using the devtool build-image command
                    to actual hardware.
                    However, devtool does not provide a
                    specific command that allows you to do this.
                    
Optionally Update the Recipe With Patch Files:
                    Once you are satisfied with the recipe, if you have made
                    any changes to the source tree that you want to have
                    applied by the recipe, you need to generate patches
                    from those changes.
                    You do this before moving the recipe
                    to its final layer and cleaning up the workspace area
                    devtool uses.
                    This optional step is especially relevant if you are
                    using or adding third-party software.
To convert commits created using Git to patch files,
                    use the devtool update-recipe command.
                    
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                    
Move the Recipe to its Permanent Layer:
                    Before cleaning up the workspace, you need to move the
                    final recipe to its permanent layer.
                    You must do this before using the
                    devtool reset command if you want to
                    retain the recipe.
                    
Reset the Recipe:
                    As a final step, you can restore the state such that
                    standard layers and the upstream source is used to build
                    the recipe rather than data in the workspace.
                    To reset the recipe, use the devtool reset
                    command:
                    
     $ devtool reset recipe
                    
devtool modify to Modify the Source of an Existing Component¶
            The devtool modify command prepares the
            way to work on existing code that already has a recipe in
            place.
            The command is flexible enough to allow you to extract code,
            specify the existing recipe, and keep track of and gather any
            patch files from other developers that are
            associated with the code.
        
            Depending on your particular scenario, the arguments and options
            you use with devtool modify form different
            combinations.
            The following diagram shows common development flows
            you would use with the devtool modify
            command:
        
             
        
Preparing to Modify the Code:
                    The top part of the flow shows three scenarios by which
                    you could use devtool modify to
                    prepare to work on source files.
                    Each scenario assumes the following:
                    
The recipe exists in some layer external
                            to the devtool workspace.
                            
The source files exist upstream in an un-extracted state or locally in a previously extracted state.
The typical situation is where another developer has created some layer for use with the Yocto Project and their recipe already resides in that layer. Furthermore, their source code is readily available either upstream or locally.
Left:
                            The left scenario represents a common situation
                            where the source code does not exist locally
                            and needs to be extracted.
                            In this situation, the source is extracted
                            into the default workspace location.
                            The recipe, in this scenario, is in its own
                            layer outside the workspace
                            (i.e.
                            meta-layername).
                            
The following command identifies the recipe and by default extracts the source files:
     $ devtool modify recipe
                            
                            Once devtoollocates the recipe,
                            it uses the
                            SRC_URI
                            variable to locate the source code and
                            any local patch files from other developers are
                            located.
                            
srctree when using the
                                devtool modify command.
                            
                            With this scenario, however, since no
                            srctree argument exists, the
                            devtool modify command by default
                            extracts the source files to a Git structure.
                            Furthermore, the location for the extracted source is the
                            default area within the workspace.
                            The result is that the command sets up both the source
                            code and an append file within the workspace with the
                            recipe remaining in its original location.
                            
Middle: The middle scenario represents a situation where the source code also does not exist locally. In this case, the code is again upstream and needs to be extracted to some local area as a Git repository. The recipe, in this scenario, is again in its own layer outside the workspace.
The following command tells
                            devtool what recipe with
                            which to work and, in this case, identifies a local
                            area for the extracted source files that is outside
                            of the default workspace:
                            
     $ devtool modify recipe srctree
                            
                            As with all extractions, the command uses
                            the recipe's SRC_URI to locate the
                            source files.
                            Once the files are located, the command by default
                            extracts them.
                            Providing the srctree
                            argument instructs devtool where
                            place the extracted source.
Within workspace, devtool
                            creates an append file for the recipe.
                            The recipe remains in its original location but
                            the source files are extracted to the location you
                            provided with srctree.
                            
Right:
                            The right scenario represents a situation
                            where the source tree
                            (srctree) exists as a
                            previously extracted Git structure outside of
                            the devtool workspace.
                            In this example, the recipe also exists
                            elsewhere in its own layer.
                            
The following command tells
                            devtool the recipe
                            with which to work, uses the "-n" option to indicate
                            source does not need to be extracted, and uses
                            srctree to point to the
                            previously extracted source files:
                            
     $ devtool modify -n recipe srctree
                            
Once the command finishes, it creates only an append file for the recipe in the workspace. The recipe and the source code remain in their original locations.
Edit the Source:
                    Once you have used the devtool modify
                    command, you are free to make changes to the source
                    files.
                    You can use any editor you like to make and save
                    your source code modifications.
                    
Build the Recipe: Once you have updated the source files, you can build the recipe.
Deploy the Build Output:
                    When you use the devtool build
                    command to build out your recipe, you probably want to see
                    if the resulting build output works as expected on target
                    hardware.
                    
                    You can deploy your build output to that target hardware by
                    using the devtool deploy-target command:
                    
     $ devtool deploy-target recipe target
                    
                    The target is a live target machine
                    running as an SSH server.
You can, of course, also deploy the image you build
                    using the devtool build-image command
                    to actual hardware.
                    However, devtool does not provide a
                    specific command that allows you to do this.
                    
Optionally Create Patch Files for Your Changes:
                    After you have debugged your changes, you can
                    use devtool update-recipe to
                    generate patch files for all the commits you have
                    made.
                    
     $ devtool update-recipe recipe
                    
                    By default, the
                    devtool update-recipe command
                    creates the patch files in a folder named the same
                    as the recipe beneath the folder in which the recipe
                    resides, and updates the recipe's
                    SRC_URI
                    statement to point to the generated patch files.
                    
LAYERDIR"
                        option to cause the command to create append files
                        in a specific layer rather than the default
                        recipe layer.
                    
Restore the Workspace:
                    The devtool reset restores the
                    state so that standard layers and upstream sources are
                    used to build the recipe rather than what is in the
                    workspace.
                    
     $ devtool reset recipe
                    
devtool add¶
        The devtool add command automatically creates a
        recipe based on the source tree with which you provide it.
        Currently, the command has support for the following:
        
                Autotools (autoconf and
                automake)
                
CMake
Scons
                qmake
                
                Plain Makefile
                
Out-of-tree kernel module
Binary package (i.e. "-b" option)
                Node.js module through
                npm
                
                Python modules that use setuptools
                or distutils
                
        Apart from binary packages, the determination of how a source tree
        should be treated is automatic based on the files present within
        that source tree.
        For example, if a CMakeLists.txt file is found,
        then the source tree is assumed to be using
        CMake and is treated accordingly.
        
The remainder of this section covers specifics regarding how parts of the recipe are generated.
            If you do not specify a name and version on the command
            line, devtool add attempts to determine
            the name and version of the software being built from
            various metadata within the source tree.
            Furthermore, the command sets the name of the created recipe
            file accordingly.
            If the name or version cannot be determined, the
            devtool add command prints an error and
            you must re-run the command with both the name and version
            or just the name or version specified.
        
Sometimes the name or version determined from the source tree might be incorrect. For such a case, you must reset the recipe:
     $ devtool reset -n recipename
            
            After running the devtool reset command,
            you need to run devtool add again and
            provide the name or the version.
        
            The devtool add command attempts to
            detect build-time dependencies and map them to other recipes
            in the system.
            During this mapping, the command fills in the names of those
            recipes in the
            DEPENDS
            value within the recipe.
            If a dependency cannot be mapped, then a comment is placed in
            the recipe indicating such.
            The inability to map a dependency might be caused because the
            naming is not recognized or because the dependency simply is
            not available.
            For cases where the dependency is not available, you must use
            the devtool add command to add an
            additional recipe to satisfy the dependency and then come
            back to the first recipe and add its name to
            DEPENDS.
        
If you need to add runtime dependencies, you can do so by adding the following to your recipe:
     RDEPENDS_${PN} += "dependency1 dependency2 ..."
            
devtool add command often cannot
                distinguish between mandatory and optional dependencies.
                Consequently, some of the detected dependencies might
                in fact be optional.
                When in doubt, consult the documentation or the configure
                script for the software the recipe is building for further
                details.
                In some cases, you might find you can substitute the
                dependency for an option to disable the associated
                functionality passed to the configure script.
            
            The devtool add command attempts to
            determine if the software you are adding is able to be
            distributed under a common open-source license and sets the
            LICENSE
            value accordingly.
            You should double-check this value against the documentation
            or source files for the software you are building and update
            that LICENSE value if necessary.
        
            The devtool add command also sets the
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
            value to point to all files that appear to be license-related.
            However, license statements often appear in comments at the top
            of source files or within documentation.
            Consequently, you might need to amend the
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable to point to one
            or more of those comments if present.
            Setting LIC_FILES_CHKSUM is particularly
            important for third-party software.
            The mechanism attempts to ensure correct licensing should you
            upgrade the recipe to a newer upstream version in future.
            Any change in licensing is detected and you receive an error
            prompting you to check the license text again.
        
            If the devtool add command cannot
            determine licensing information, the
            LICENSE value is set to "CLOSED" and the
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM vaule remains unset.
            This behavior allows you to continue with development but is
            unlikely to be correct in all cases.
            Consequently, you should check the documentation or source
            files for the software you are building to determine the actual
            license.
        
            The use of make by itself is very common
            in both proprietary and open source software.
            Unfortunately, Makefiles are often not written with
            cross-compilation in mind.
            Thus, devtool add often cannot do very
            much to ensure that these Makefiles build correctly.
            It is very common, for example, to explicitly call
            gcc instead of using the
            CC variable.
            Usually, in a cross-compilation environment,
            gcc is the compiler for the build host
            and the cross-compiler is named something similar to
            arm-poky-linux-gnueabi-gcc and might
            require some arguments (e.g. to point to the associated sysroot
            for the target machine).
        
When writing a recipe for Makefile-only software, keep the following in mind:
                    You probably need to patch the Makefile to use
                    variables instead of hardcoding tools within the
                    toolchain such as gcc and
                    g++.
                    
                    The environment in which make runs
                    is set up with various standard variables for
                    compilation (e.g. CC,
                    CXX, and so forth) in a similar
                    manner to the environment set up by the SDK's
                    environment setup script.
                    One easy way to see these variables is to run the
                    devtool build command on the
                    recipe and then look in
                    oe-logs/run.do_compile.
                    Towards the top of this file you will see a list of
                    environment variables that are being set.
                    You can take advantage of these variables within the
                    Makefile.
                    
                    If the Makefile sets a default for a variable using "=",
                    that default overrides the value set in the environment,
                    which is usually not desirable.
                    In this situation, you can either patch the Makefile
                    so it sets the default using the "?=" operator, or
                    you can alternatively force the value on the
                    make command line.
                    To force the value on the command line, add the
                    variable setting to
                    EXTRA_OEMAKE
                    within the recipe as follows:
                    
     EXTRA_OEMAKE += "'CC=${CC}' 'CXX=${CXX}'"
                    In the above example, single quotes are used around the variable settings as the values are likely to contain spaces because required default options are passed to the compiler.
Hardcoding paths inside Makefiles is often problematic in a cross-compilation environment. This is particularly true because those hardcoded paths often point to locations on the build host and thus will either be read-only or will introduce contamination into the cross-compilation by virtue of being specific to the build host rather than the target. Patching the Makefile to use prefix variables or other path variables is usually the way to handle this.
                    Sometimes a Makefile runs target-specific commands such
                    as ldconfig.
                    For such cases, you might be able to simply apply
                    patches that remove these commands from the Makefile.
                    
            Often, you need to build additional tools that run on the
            build host system as opposed to the target.
            You should indicate this using one of the following methods
            when you run devtool add:
            
Specify the name of the recipe such that it ends with "-native". Specifying the name like this produces a recipe that only builds for the build host.
                    Specify the "‐‐also-native" option with the
                    devtool add command.
                    Specifying this option creates a recipe file that still
                    builds for the target but also creates a variant with
                    a "-native" suffix that builds for the build host.
                    
            You can use the devtool add command in the
            following form to add Node.js modules:
            
     $ devtool add "npm://registry.npmjs.org;name=forever;version=0.15.1"
            The name and version parameters are mandatory. Lockdown and shrinkwrap files are generated and pointed to by the recipe in order to freeze the version that is fetched for the dependencies according to the first time. This also saves checksums that are verified on future fetches. Together, these behaviors ensure the reproducibility and integrity of the build.
                        You must use quotes around the URL.
                        The devtool add does not require
                        the quotes, but the shell considers ";" as a splitter
                        between multiple commands.
                        Thus, without the quotes,
                        devtool add does not receive the
                        other parts, which results in several "command not
                        found" errors.
                        
                        In order to support adding
                        Node.js modules, a
                        nodejs recipe must be part of your
                        SDK in order to provide Node.js
                        itself.
                        
        When building a recipe with devtool build the
        typical build progression is as follows:
        
Fetch the source
Unpack the source
Configure the source
Compiling the source
Install the build output
Package the installed output
For recipes in the workspace, fetching and unpacking is disabled as the source tree has already been prepared and is persistent. Each of these build steps is defined as a function, usually with a "do_" prefix. These functions are typically shell scripts but can instead be written in Python.
        If you look at the contents of a recipe, you will see that the
        recipe does not include complete instructions for building the
        software.
        Instead, common functionality is encapsulated in classes inherited
        with the inherit directive, leaving the recipe
        to describe just the things that are specific to the software to be
        built.
        A base
        class exists that is implicitly inherited by all recipes and provides
        the functionality that most typical recipes need.
    
The remainder of this section presents information useful when working with recipes.
            When you are debugging a recipe that you previously created using
            devtool add or whose source you are modifying
            by using the devtool modify command, after
            the first run of devtool build, you will
            find some symbolic links created within the source tree:
            oe-logs, which points to the directory in
            which log files and run scripts for each build step are created
            and oe-workdir, which points to the temporary
            work area for the recipe.
            You can use these links to get more information on what is
            happening at each build step.
        
            These locations under oe-workdir are
            particularly useful:
            
image/:
                    Contains all of the files installed at the
                    do_install
                    stage.
                    Within a recipe, this directory is referred to by the
                    expression
                    ${D}.
                    
sysroot-destdir/:
                    Contains a subset of files installed within
                    do_install that have been put into the
                    shared sysroot.
                    For more information, see the
                    "Sharing Files Between Recipes"
                    section.
                    
packages-split/:
                    Contains subdirectories for each package produced by the
                    recipe.
                    For more information, see the
                    "Packaging" section.
                    
            If the software your recipe is building uses GNU autoconf,
            then a fixed set of arguments is passed to it to enable
            cross-compilation plus any extras specified by
            EXTRA_OECONF
            set within the recipe.
            If you wish to pass additional options, add them to
            EXTRA_OECONF.
            Other supported build tools have similar variables
            (e.g.
            EXTRA_OECMAKE
            for CMake,
            EXTRA_OESCONS
            for Scons, and so forth).
            If you need to pass anything on the make
            command line, you can use EXTRA_OEMAKE to do
            so.
        
            You can use the devtool configure-help command
            to help you set the arguments listed in the previous paragraph.
            The command determines the exact options being passed, and shows
            them to you along with any custom arguments specified through
            EXTRA_OECONF.
            If applicable, the command also shows you the output of the
            configure script's "‐‐help" option as a reference.
        
Recipes often need to use files provided by other recipes on the build host. For example, an application linking to a common library needs access to the library itself and its associated headers. The way this access is accomplished within the extensible SDK is through the sysroot. One sysroot exists per "machine" for which the SDK is being built. In practical terms, this means a sysroot exists for the target machine, and a sysroot exists for the build host.
            Recipes should never write files directly into the sysroot.
            Instead, files should be installed into standard locations
            during the
            do_install
            task within the
            ${D}
            directory.
            A subset of these files automatically go into the sysroot.
            The reason for this limitation is that almost all files that go
            into the sysroot are cataloged in manifests in order to ensure
            they can be removed later when a recipe is modified or removed.
            Thus, the sysroot is able to remain free from stale files.
        
Packaging is not always particularly relevant within the extensible SDK. However, if you examine how build output gets into the final image on the target device, it is important to understand packaging because the contents of the image are expressed in terms of packages and not recipes.
            During the
            do_package
            task, files installed during the
            do_install
            task are split into one main package, which is almost always named
            the same as the recipe, and several other packages.
            This separation is done because not all of those installed files
            are always useful in every image.
            For example, you probably do not need any of the documentation
            installed in a production image.
            Consequently, for each recipe the documentation files are separated
            into a -doc package.
            Recipes that package software that has optional modules or
            plugins might do additional package splitting as well.
        
            After building a recipe you can see where files have gone by
            looking in the oe-workdir/packages-split
            directory, which contains a subdirectory for each package.
            Apart from some advanced cases, the
            PACKAGES
            and
            FILES
            variables controls splitting.
            The PACKAGES variable lists all of the
            packages to be produced, while the FILES
            variable specifies which files to include in each package,
            using an override to specify the package.
            For example, FILES_${PN} specifies the files
            to go into the main package (i.e. the main package is named the
            same as the recipe and
            ${PN}
            evaluates to the recipe name).
            The order of the PACKAGES value is significant.
            For each installed file, the first package whose
            FILES value matches the file is the package
            into which the file goes.
            Defaults exist for both the PACKAGES and
            FILES variables.
            Consequently, you might find you do not even need to set these
            variables in your recipe unless the software the recipe is
            building installs files into non-standard locations.
        
        If you use the devtool deploy-target
        command to write a recipe's build output to the target, and
        you are working on an existing component of the system, then you
        might find yourself in a situation where you need to restore the
        original files that existed prior to running the
        devtool deploy-target command.
        Because the devtool deploy-target command
        backs up any files it overwrites, you can use the
        devtool undeploy-target to restore those files
        and remove any other files the recipe deployed.
        Consider the following example:
        
     $ devtool undeploy-target lighttpd root@192.168.7.2
        If you have deployed multiple applications, you can remove them all at once thus restoring the target device back to its original state:
     $ devtool undeploy-target -a root@192.168.7.2
        Information about files deployed to the target as well as any backed up files are stored on the target itself. This storage of course requires some additional space on the target machine.
devtool deploy-target and
            devtool undeploy-target command do not
            currently interact with any package management system on the
            target device (e.g. RPM or OPKG).
            Consequently, you should not intermingle operations
            devtool deploy-target and the package
            manager operations on the target device.
            Doing so could result in a conflicting set of files.
        
        The extensible SDK typically only comes with a small number of tools
        and libraries out of the box.
        If you have a minimal SDK, then it starts mostly empty and is
        populated on-demand.
        However, sometimes you will need to explicitly install extra items
        into the SDK.
        If you need these extra items, you can first search for the items
        using the devtool search command.
        For example, suppose you need to link to libGL but you are not sure
        which recipe provides it.
        You can use the following command to find out:
        
     $ devtool search libGL
     mesa                  A free implementation of the OpenGL API
        
        Once you know the recipe (i.e. mesa in this
        example), you can install it:
        
     $ devtool sdk-install mesa
        
        By default, the devtool sdk-install assumes the
        item is available in pre-built form from your SDK provider.
        If the item is not available and it is acceptable to build the item
        from source, you can add the "-s" option as follows:
        
     $ devtool sdk-install -s mesa
        
        It is important to remember that building the item from source takes
        significantly longer than installing the pre-built artifact.
        Also, if no recipe exists for the item you want to add to the SDK, you
        must instead add it using the devtool add command.
    
If you are working with an extensible SDK that gets occasionally updated (e.g. typically when that SDK has been provided to you by another party), then you will need to manually pull down those updates to your installed SDK.
To update your installed SDK, run the following:
     $ devtool sdk-update
         The previous command assumes your SDK provider has set the default update URL for you. If that URL has not been set, you need to specify it yourself as follows:
     $ devtool sdk-update path_to_update_directory
         
You might need to produce an SDK that contains your own custom libraries for sending to a third party (e.g., if you are a vendor with customers needing to build their own software for the target platform). If that is the case, then you can produce a derivative SDK based on the currently installed SDK fairly easily. Use these steps:
If necessary, install an extensible SDK that you want to use as a base for your derivative SDK.
Source the environment script for the SDK.
Add the extra libraries or other components
                you want by using the devtool add
                command.
                
Run the devtool build-sdk
                command.
                
The above procedure takes the recipes added to the workspace and constructs a new SDK installer containing those recipes and the resulting binary artifacts. The recipes go into their own separate layer in the constructed derivative SDK, leaving the workspace clean and ready for users to add their own recipes.
You can use existing, pre-built toolchains by locating and running an SDK installer script that ships with the Yocto Project. Using this method, you select and download an architecture-specific toolchain installer and then run the script to hand-install the toolchain.
You can find SDK installers here:
Standard SDK Installers
                Go to http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/yocto/yocto-2.1.2/toolchain/
                and find the folder that matches your host development system
                (i.e. i686 for 32-bit machines or
                x86_64 for 64-bit machines).
Go into that folder and download the toolchain installer
                whose name includes the appropriate target architecture.
                The toolchains provided by the Yocto Project are based off of
                the core-image-sato image and contain
                libraries appropriate for developing against that image.
                For example, if your host development system is a 64-bit x86
                system and you are going to use your cross-toolchain for a
                32-bit x86 target, go into the x86_64
                folder and download the following installer:
                
     poky-glibc-x86_64-core-image-sato-i586-toolchain-2.1.2.sh
                
Extensible SDK Installers Installers for the extensible SDK are in http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/yocto/yocto-2.1.2/toolchain/.
        As an alternative to locating and downloading a toolchain installer,
        you can build the toolchain installer assuming you have first sourced
        the environment setup script.
        See the
        "Building Images"
        section in the Yocto Project Quick Start for steps that show you
        how to set up the Yocto Project environment.
        In particular, you need to be sure the
        MACHINE
        variable matches the architecture for which you are building and that
        the
        SDKMACHINE
        variable is correctly set if you are building a toolchain designed to
        run on an architecture that differs from your current development host
        machine (i.e. the build machine).
    
To build the toolchain installer for a standard SDK and populate the SDK image, use the following command:
     $ bitbake image -c populate_sdk
        You can do the same for the extensible SDK using this command:
     $ bitbake image -c populate_sdk_ext
        These commands result in a toolchain installer that contains the sysroot that matches your target root filesystem.
        When the bitbake command completes, the toolchain
        installer will be in
        tmp/deploy/sdk in the Build Directory.
        
IMAGE_INSTALL
            variable inside your local.conf file to
            install the appropriate library packages.
            Following is an example using glibc static
            development libraries:
            
     IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " glibc-staticdev"
            
After installing the toolchain, for some use cases you might need to separately extract a root filesystem:
You want to boot the image using NFS.
You want to use the root filesystem as the target sysroot. For example, the Eclipse IDE environment with the Eclipse Yocto Plug-in installed allows you to use QEMU to boot under NFS.
You want to develop your target application using the root filesystem as the target sysroot.
        To extract the root filesystem, first source
        the cross-development environment setup script to establish
        necessary environment variables.
        If you built the toolchain in the Build Directory, you will find
        the toolchain environment script in the
        tmp directory.
        If you installed the toolchain by hand, the environment setup
        script is located in /opt/poky/2.1.2.
    
        After sourcing the environment script, use the
        runqemu-extract-sdk command and provide the
        filesystem image.
    
        Following is an example.
        The second command sets up the environment.
        In this case, the setup script is located in the
        /opt/poky/2.1.2 directory.
        The third command extracts the root filesystem from a previously
        built filesystem that is located in the
        ~/Downloads directory.
        Furthermore, this command extracts the root filesystem into the
        qemux86-sato directory:
        
     $ cd ~
     $ source /opt/poky/2.1.2/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
     $ runqemu-extract-sdk \
        ~/Downloads/core-image-sato-sdk-qemux86-2011091411831.rootfs.tar.bz2 \
        $HOME/qemux86-sato
        
        You could now point to the target sysroot at
        qemux86-sato.
    
        The following figure shows the resulting directory structure after
        you install the Standard SDK by running the *.sh
        SDK installation script:
    
         
    
        The installed SDK consists of an environment setup script for the SDK,
        a configuration file for the target, a version file for the target,
        and the root filesystem (sysroots) needed to
        develop objects for the target system.
    
        Within the figure, italicized text is used to indicate replaceable
        portions of the file or directory name.
        For example,
        install_dir/version
        is the directory where the SDK is installed.
        By default, this directory is /opt/poky/.
        And, version represents the specific
        snapshot of the SDK (e.g. 2.1.2+snapshot).
        Furthermore, target represents the target
        architecture (e.g. i586) and
        host represents the development system's
        architecture (e.g. x86_64).
        Thus, the complete names of the two directories within the
        sysroots could be
        i586-poky-linux and
        x86_64-pokysdk-linux for the target and host,
        respectively.
    
        The following figure shows the resulting directory structure after
        you install the Extensible SDK by running the *.sh
        SDK installation script:
    
         
    
The installed directory structure for the extensible SDK is quite different than the installed structure for the standard SDK. The extensible SDK does not separate host and target parts in the same manner as does the standard SDK. The extensible SDK uses an embedded copy of the OpenEmbedded build system, which has its own sysroots.
Of note in the directory structure are an environment setup script for the SDK, a configuration file for the target, a version file for the target, and a log file for the OpenEmbedded build system preparation script run by the installer.
        Within the figure, italicized text is used to indicate replaceable
        portions of the file or directory name.
        For example,
        install_dir is the directory where the SDK
        is installed, which is poky_sdk by default.
        target represents the target
        architecture (e.g. i586) and
        host represents the development system's
        architecture (e.g. x86_64).
    
This appendix presents customizations you can apply to both the standard and extensible SDK. Each subsection identifies the type of SDK to which the section applies.
        The extensible SDK primarily consists of a pre-configured copy of
        the OpenEmbedded build system from which it was produced.
        Thus, the SDK's configuration is derived using that build system and
        the following filters, which the OpenEmbedded build system applies
        against local.conf and
        auto.conf if they are present:
        
Variables whose values start with "/" are excluded since the assumption is that those values are paths that are likely to be specific to the build host.
                Variables listed in
                SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST
                are excluded.
                The default value blacklists
                CONF_VERSION,
                BB_NUMBER_THREADS,
                PARALLEL_MAKE,
                PRSERV_HOST,
                and
                SSTATE_MIRRORS.
                
                Variables listed in
                SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST
                are included.
                Including a variable in the value of
                SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST overrides either
                of the above two conditions.
                The default value is blank.
                
                Classes inherited globally with
                INHERIT
                that are listed in
                SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST
                are disabled.
                Using SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST to disable
                these classes is is the typical method to disable classes that
                are problematic or unnecessary in the SDK context.
                The default value blacklists the
                buildhistory
                and
                icecc
                classes.
                
        Additionally, the contents of conf/sdk-extra.conf,
        when present, are appended to the end of
        conf/local.conf within the produced SDK, without
        any filtering.
        The sdk-extra.conf file is particularly useful
        if you want to set a variable value just for the SDK and not the
        OpenEmbedded build system used to create the SDK.
    
In most cases, the extensible SDK defaults should work. However, some cases exist for which you might consider making adjustments:
                If your SDK configuration inherits additional classes
                using the
                INHERIT
                variable and you do not need or want those classes enabled in
                the SDK, you can blacklist them by adding them to the
                SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST
                variable.
                The default value of SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST
                is set using the "?=" operator.
                Consequently, you will need to either set the complete value
                using "=" or append the value using "_append".
                
If you have classes or recipes that add additional tasks to the standard build flow (i.e. that execute as part of building the recipe as opposed to needing to be called explicitly), then you need to do one of the following:
                        Ensure the tasks are shared state tasks (i.e. their
                        output is saved to and can be restored from the shared
                        state cache), or that the tasks are able to be
                        produced quickly from a task that is a shared state
                        task and add the task name to the value of
                        SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS.
                        
                        Disable the tasks if they are added by a class and
                        you do not need the functionality the class provides
                        in the extensible SDK.
                        To disable the tasks, add the class to
                        SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST as previously
                        described.
                        
Generally, you want to have a shared state mirror set up so users of the SDK can add additional items to the SDK after installation without needing to build the items from source. See the "Providing Additional Installable Extensible SDK Content" section for information.
                If you want users of the SDK to be able to easily update the
                SDK, you need to set the
                SDK_UPDATE_URL
                variable.
                For more information, see the
                "Providing Updates After Installing the Extensible SDK"
                section.
                
                If you have adjusted the list of files and directories that
                appear in
                COREBASE
                (other than layers that are enabled through
                bblayers.conf), then you must list these
                files in
                COREBASE_FILES
                so that the files are copied into the SDK.
                
                If your OpenEmbedded build system setup uses a different
                environment setup script other than
                oe-init-build-env
                or
                oe-init-build-env-memres,
                then you must set
                OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT
                to point to the environment setup script you use.
                
COREBASE_FILES variable as previously
                    described.
                
        You can change the title shown by the SDK installer by setting the
        SDK_TITLE
        variable.
        By default, this title is derived from
        DISTRO_NAME
        when it is set.
        If the DISTRO_NAME variable is not set, the title
        is derived from the
        DISTRO
        variable.
    
        When you make changes to your configuration or to the metadata and
        if you want those changes to be reflected in installed SDKs, you need
        to perform additional steps to make it possible for those that use
        the SDK to update their installations with the
        devtool sdk-update command:
        
Arrange to be created a directory that can be shared over HTTP or HTTPS.
                Set the
                SDK_UPDATE_URL
                variable to point to the corresponding HTTP or HTTPS URL.
                Setting this variable causes any SDK built to default to that
                URL and thus, the user does not have to pass the URL to the
                devtool sdk-update command.
                
                Build the extensible SDK normally (i.e., use the
                bitbake -c populate_sdk_ext imagename
                command).
                
Publish the SDK using the following command:
     $ oe-publish-sdk some_path/sdk-installer.sh path_to_shared/http_directory
                You must repeat this step each time you rebuild the SDK with changes that you want to make available through the update mechanism.
        Completing the above steps allows users of the existing SDKs to
        simply run devtool sdk-update to retrieve the
        latest updates.
        See the
        "Updating the Extensible SDK"
        section for further information.
    
If you want the users of the extensible SDK you are building to be able to add items to the SDK without needing to build the items from source, you need to do a number of things:
                Ensure the additional items you want the user to be able to
                install are actually built.
                You can ensure these items are built a number of different
                ways: 1) Build them explicitly, perhaps using one or more
                "meta" recipes that depend on lists of other recipes to keep
                things tidy, or 2) Build the "world" target and set
                EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD_pn-recipename
                for the recipes you do not want built.
                See the
                EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD
                variable for additional information.
                
                Expose the sstate-cache directory
                produced by the build.
                Typically, you expose this directory over HTTP or HTTPS.
                
                Set the appropriate configuration so that the produced SDK
                knows how to find the configuration.
                The variable you need to set is
                SSTATE_MIRRORS:
                
     SSTATE_MIRRORS = "file://.*  http://example.com/some_path/sstate-cache/PATH"
                
                You can set the SSTATE_MIRRORS variable
                in two different places:
                
                        If the mirror value you are setting is appropriate to
                        be set for both the OpenEmbedded build system that is
                        actually building the SDK and the SDK itself (i.e. the
                        mirror is accessible in both places or it will fail
                        quickly on the OpenEmbedded build system side, and its
                        contents will not interfere with the build), then you
                        can set the variable in your
                        local.conf or custom distro
                        configuration file.
                        You can then "whitelist" the variable through
                        to the SDK by adding the following:
                        
     SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST = "SSTATE_MIRRORS"
                        
                        Alternatively, if you just want to set the
                        SSTATE_MIRRORS variable's value
                        for the SDK alone, create a
                        conf/sdk-extra.conf either in
                        your
                        Build Directory
                        or within any layer and put your
                        SSTATE_MIRRORS setting within
                        that file.
                        
SSTATE_MIRRORS.
                        
        By default, the extensible SDK bundles the shared state artifacts for
        everything needed to reconstruct the image for which the SDK was built.
        This bundling can lead to an SDK installer file that is a Gigabyte or
        more in size.
        If the size of this file causes a problem, you can build an SDK that
        has just enough in it to install and provide access to the
        devtool command by setting the following in your
        configuration:
        
     SDK_EXT_TYPE = "minimal"
        
        Setting
        SDK_EXT_TYPE
        to "minimal" produces an SDK installer that is around 35 Mbytes in
        size, which downloads and installs quickly.
        You need to realize, though, that the minimal installer does not
        install any libraries or tools out of the box.
        These must be installed either "on the fly" or through actions you
        perform using devtool or explicitly with the
        devtool sdk-install command.
    
        In most cases, when building a minimal SDK you will need to also enable
        bringing in the information on a wider range of packages produced by
        the system.
        This is particularly true so that devtool add
        is able to effectively map dependencies it discovers in a source tree
        to the appropriate recipes.
        Also so that the devtool search command
        is able to return useful results.
    
To facilitate this wider range of information, you would additionally set the following:
     SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA = "1"
        
        See the
        SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA
        variable for additional information.
    
        Setting the SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA variable as
        shown causes the "world" target to be built so that information
        for all of the recipes included within it are available.
        Having these recipes available increases build time significantly and
        increases the size of the SDK installer by 30-80 Mbytes depending on
        how many recipes are included in your configuration.
    
        You can use
        EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD_pn-recipename
        for recipes you want to exclude.
        However, it is assumed that you would need to be building the "world"
        target if you want to provide additional items to the SDK.
        Consequently, building for "world" should not represent undue
        overhead in most cases.
        
SDK_EXT_TYPE to "minimal",
            then providing a shared state mirror is mandatory so that items
            can be installed as needed.
            See the
            "Providing Additional Installable Extensible SDK Content"
            section for more information.
        
|  | 
A Board Support Package (BSP) is a collection of information that defines how to support a particular hardware device, set of devices, or hardware platform. The BSP includes information about the hardware features present on the device and kernel configuration information along with any additional hardware drivers required. The BSP also lists any additional software components required in addition to a generic Linux software stack for both essential and optional platform features.
This guide presents information about BSP Layers, defines a structure for components so that BSPs follow a commonly understood layout, discusses how to customize a recipe for a BSP, addresses BSP licensing, and provides information that shows you how to create and manage a BSP Layer using two Yocto Project BSP Tools.
A BSP consists of a file structure inside a base directory. Collectively, you can think of the base directory, its file structure, and the contents as a BSP Layer. Although not a strict requirement, layers in the Yocto Project use the following well-established naming convention:
     meta-bsp_name
                
                The string "meta-" is prepended to the machine or platform name, which is
                bsp_name in the above form.
                
meta-.
                    However, you might run into situations where obscure
                    scripts assume this convention.
                
                To help understand the BSP layer concept, consider the BSPs that the
                Yocto Project supports and provides with each release.
                You can see the layers in the
                Yocto Project Source Repositories
                through a web interface at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi.
                If you go to that interface, you will find near the bottom of the list
                under "Yocto Metadata Layers" several BSP layers all of which are
                supported by the Yocto Project (e.g. meta-raspberrypi and
                meta-intel).
                Each of these layers is a repository unto itself and clicking on a
                layer reveals information that includes two links from which you can choose
                to set up a clone of the layer's repository on your local host system.
                Here is an example that clones the Raspberry Pi BSP layer:
                
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/meta-raspberrypi
                
                In addition to BSP layers near the bottom of that referenced
                Yocto Project Source Repository, the
                meta-yocto-bsp layer is part of the
                shipped poky repository.
                The meta-yocto-bsp layer maintains several
                BSPs such as the Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of
                both 32 and 64-bit IA machines.
            
For information on the BSP development workflow, see the "Developing a Board Support Package (BSP)" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual. For more information on how to set up a local copy of source files from a Git repository, see the "Getting Set Up" section also in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                The layer's base directory
                (meta-)
                is the root of the BSP Layer.
                This root is what you add to the
                bsp_nameBBLAYERS
                variable in the conf/bblayers.conf file found in the
                Build Directory,
                which is established after you run one of the OpenEmbedded build environment
                setup scripts (i.e.
                oe-init-build-env
                and
                oe-init-build-env-memres).
                Adding the root allows the OpenEmbedded build system to recognize the BSP
                definition and from it build an image.
                Here is an example:
                
     BBLAYERS ?= " \
       /usr/local/src/yocto/meta \
       /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-poky \
       /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-yocto-bsp \
       /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-mylayer \
       "
                
                Some BSPs require additional layers on
                top of the BSP's root layer in order to be functional.
                For these cases, you also need to add those layers to the
                BBLAYERS variable in order to build the BSP.
                You must also specify in the "Dependencies" section of the BSP's
                README file any requirements for additional
                layers and, preferably, any
                build instructions that might be contained elsewhere
                in the README file.
            
                Some layers function as a layer to hold other BSP layers.
                An example of this type of layer is the meta-intel layer,
                which contains a number of individual BSP sub-layers, as well as a directory
                named common/ full of common content across those layers.
                Another example is the meta-yocto-bsp layer mentioned
                earlier.
            
For more detailed information on layers, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section of the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Defining a common BSP directory structure allows end-users to understand and become familiar with that structure. A common format also encourages standardization of software support of hardware.
The proposed form does have elements that are specific to the OpenEmbedded build system. It is intended that this information can be used by other build systems besides the OpenEmbedded build system and that it will be simple to extract information and convert it to other formats if required. The OpenEmbedded build system, through its standard layers mechanism, can directly accept the format described as a layer. The BSP captures all the hardware-specific details in one place in a standard format, which is useful for any person wishing to use the hardware platform regardless of the build system they are using.
The BSP specification does not include a build system or other tools - it is concerned with the hardware-specific components only. At the end-distribution point, you can ship the BSP combined with a build system and other tools. However, it is important to maintain the distinction that these are separate components that happen to be combined in certain end products.
Before looking at the common form for the file structure inside a BSP Layer, you should be aware that some requirements do exist in order for a BSP to be considered compliant with the Yocto Project. For that list of requirements, see the "Released BSP Requirements" section.
Below is the common form for the file structure inside a BSP Layer. While you can use this basic form for the standard, realize that the actual structures for specific BSPs could differ.
     meta-bsp_name/
     meta-bsp_name/bsp_license_file
     meta-bsp_name/README
     meta-bsp_name/README.sources
     meta-bsp_name/binary/bootable_images
     meta-bsp_name/conf/layer.conf
     meta-bsp_name/conf/machine/*.conf
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-bsp/*
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-core/*
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-graphics/*
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_kernel_rev.bbappend
                
Below is an example of the Raspberry Pi BSP:
     meta-raspberrypi/COPYING.MIT
     meta-raspberrypi/README
     meta-raspberrypi/classes
     meta-raspberrypi/classes/linux-raspberrypi-base.bbclass
     meta-raspberrypi/classes/sdcard_image-rpi.bbclass
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/layer.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/raspberrypi.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/raspberrypi0.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/raspberrypi2.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/raspberrypi3.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include/rpi-base.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include/rpi-default-providers.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include/rpi-default-settings.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include/rpi-default-versions.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/conf/machine/include/rpi-tune-arm1176jzf-s.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/files
     meta-raspberrypi/files/custom-licenses
     meta-raspberrypi/files/custom-licenses/Broadcom
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/bootfiles
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/bootfiles/bcm2835-bootfiles.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/bootfiles/rpi-config_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/common
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/common/firmware.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor_00.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/formfactor/raspberrypi/machconfig
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/rpi-mkimage_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/rpi-mkimage/License
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/rpi-mkimage/open-files-relative-to-script.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-bsp/u-boot/u-boot-rpi_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/images
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/images/rpi-basic-image.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/images/rpi-hwup-image.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/images/rpi-test-image.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/packagegroups
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/packagegroups/packagegroup-rpi-test.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/psplash
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/psplash/files
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/psplash/psplash_git.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-core/psplash/files/psplash-raspberrypi-img.h
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/bcm2835
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/bcm2835/bcm2835_1.46.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/pi-blaster
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/pi-blaster/files
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/pi-blaster/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/pi-blaster/pi-blaster.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/pi-blaster/pi-blaster_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/python-rtimu
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/python-rtimu/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/python-rtimu_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/python-sense-hat_2.1.0.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpi-gpio
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpi-gpio/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpi-gpio_0.6.1.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpio
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpio/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/python/rpio_0.10.0.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi/files
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi/files/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi/wiringpi
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi/wiringpi/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-devtools/wiringPi/wiringpi_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/eglinfo
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/eglinfo/eglinfo-fb_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/eglinfo/eglinfo-x11_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/userland
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/userland/userland
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/userland/userland/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/userland/userland_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/files
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/files/egl.pc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/files/vchiq.sh
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/vc-graphics-hardfp.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/vc-graphics.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/vc-graphics/vc-graphics.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/wayland
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/wayland/weston_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/weston
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/weston/weston_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config/rpi
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config/rpi/xorg.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config/rpi/xorg.conf.d
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config/rpi/xorg.conf.d/10-evdev.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config/rpi/xorg.conf.d/99-pitft.conf
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-graphics/xorg-xserver/xserver-xf86-config_0.1.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware/linux-firmware
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware/linux-firmware/LICENSE.broadcom_brcm80211
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware/linux-firmware/brcmfmac43430-sdio.bin
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware/linux-firmware/brcmfmac43430-sdio.txt
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux-firmware/linux-firmware_git.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-3.14
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-3.14/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-3.18
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-3.18/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-4.1
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi-4.1/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi/defconfig
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi_3.14.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi_3.18.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi_4.1.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-raspberrypi_4.4.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-kernel/linux/linux.inc
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gstreamer1.0-omx
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gstreamer1.0-omx/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gstreamer1.0-omx_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gstreamer1.0-plugins-bad_%.bbappend
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/omxplayer
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/omxplayer/omxplayer
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/omxplayer/omxplayer/*.patch
     meta-raspberrypi/recipes-multimedia/omxplayer/omxplayer_git.bb
     meta-raspberrypi/scripts
     meta-raspberrypi/scripts/lib
     meta-raspberrypi/scripts/lib/image
     meta-raspberrypi/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks
     meta-raspberrypi/scripts/lib/image/canned-wks/sdimage-raspberrypi.wks
                
The following sections describe each part of the proposed BSP format.
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/bsp_license_file
                
                These optional files satisfy licensing requirements for the BSP.
                The type or types of files here can vary depending on the licensing requirements.
                For example, in the Raspberry Pi BSP all licensing requirements are handled with the
                COPYING.MIT file.
            
Licensing files can be MIT, BSD, GPLv*, and so forth. These files are recommended for the BSP but are optional and totally up to the BSP developer.
You can find this file in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/README
                
                This file provides information on how to boot the live images that are optionally
                included in the binary/ directory.
                The README file also provides special information needed for
                building the image.
            
                At a minimum, the README file must
                contain a list of dependencies, such as the names of
                any other layers on which the BSP depends and the name of
                the BSP maintainer with his or her contact information.
            
You can find this file in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/README.sources
                
                This file provides information on where to locate the BSP
                source files used to build the images (if any) that reside in
                meta-.
                Images in the bsp_name/binarybinary would be images
                released with the BSP.
                The information in the README.sources
                file also helps you find the
                Metadata
                used to generate the images that ship with the BSP.
                
binary directory is
                    missing or the directory has no images, an existing
                    README.sources file is
                    meaningless.
                
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/binary/bootable_images
                
This optional area contains useful pre-built kernels and user-space filesystem images released with the BSP that are appropriate to the target system. This directory typically contains graphical (e.g. Sato) and minimal live images when the BSP tarball has been created and made available in the Yocto Project website. You can use these kernels and images to get a system running and quickly get started on development tasks.
                The exact types of binaries present are highly
                hardware-dependent.
                The README file should be present in the
                BSP Layer and it will explain how to use the images with the
                target hardware.
                Additionally, the README.sources file
                should be present to locate the sources used to build the
                images and provide information on the Metadata.
            
You can find this file in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/conf/layer.conf
                
                The conf/layer.conf file identifies the file structure as a
                layer, identifies the
                contents of the layer, and contains information about how the build
                system should use it.
                Generally, a standard boilerplate file such as the following works.
                In the following example, you would replace "bsp" and
                "_bsp" with the actual name
                of the BSP (i.e. bsp_name from the example template).
            
     # We have a conf and classes directory, add to BBPATH
     BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
     # We have a recipes directory, add to BBFILES
     BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bb \
                 ${LAYERDIR}/recipes-*/*/*.bbappend"
     BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "bsp"
     BBFILE_PATTERN_bsp = "^${LAYERDIR}/"
     BBFILE_PRIORITY_bsp = "6"
     LAYERDEPENDS_bsp = "intel"
                
                To illustrate the string substitutions, here are the corresponding statements
                from the Raspberry Pi conf/layer.conf file:
               
     # We have a conf and classes directory, append to BBPATH
     BBPATH .= ":${LAYERDIR}"
     # We have a recipes directory containing .bb and .bbappend files, add to BBFILES
     BBFILES += "${LAYERDIR}/recipes*/*/*.bb \
                 ${LAYERDIR}/recipes*/*/*.bbappend"
     BBFILE_COLLECTIONS += "raspberrypi"
     BBFILE_PATTERN_raspberrypi := "^${LAYERDIR}/"
     BBFILE_PRIORITY_raspberrypi = "9"
     # Additional license directories.
     LICENSE_PATH += "${LAYERDIR}/files/custom-licenses"
                
This file simply makes BitBake aware of the recipes and configuration directories. The file must exist so that the OpenEmbedded build system can recognize the BSP.
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/conf/machine/*.conf
                
                The machine files bind together all the information contained elsewhere
                in the BSP into a format that the build system can understand.
                If the BSP supports multiple machines, multiple machine configuration files
                can be present.
                These filenames correspond to the values to which users have set the
                MACHINE variable.
            
                These files define things such as the kernel package to use
                (PREFERRED_PROVIDER
                of virtual/kernel), the hardware drivers to
                include in different types of images, any special software components
                that are needed, any bootloader information, and also any special image
                format requirements.
            
Each BSP Layer requires at least one machine file. However, you can supply more than one file.
This configuration file could also include a hardware "tuning" file that is commonly used to define the package architecture and specify optimization flags, which are carefully chosen to give best performance on a given processor.
                Tuning files are found in the meta/conf/machine/include
                directory within the
                Source Directory.
                For example, the ia32-base.inc file resides in the
                meta/conf/machine/include directory.
            
                To use an include file, you simply include them in the
                machine configuration file.
                For example, the Raspberry Pi BSP
                raspberrypi3.conf contains the
                following statement:
                
     include conf/machine/raspberrypi2.conf
                
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-bsp/*
                
                This optional directory contains miscellaneous recipe files for
                the BSP.
                Most notably would be the formfactor files.
                For example, in the Raspberry Pi BSP there is the
                formfactor_0.0.bbappend file, which is an
                append file used to augment the recipe that starts the build.
                Furthermore, there are machine-specific settings used during
                the build that are defined by the
                machconfig file further down in the
                directory.
                Here is the machconfig
                file for the Raspberry Pi BSP:
                
     HAVE_TOUCHSCREEN=0
     HAVE_KEYBOARD=1
     DISPLAY_CAN_ROTATE=0
     DISPLAY_ORIENTATION=0
     DISPLAY_DPI=133
                
                If a BSP does not have a formfactor entry, defaults are established according to
                the formfactor configuration file that is installed by the main
                formfactor recipe
                meta/recipes-bsp/formfactor/formfactor_0.0.bb,
                which is found in the
                Source Directory.
            
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-graphics/*
                
This optional directory contains recipes for the BSP if it has special requirements for graphics support. All files that are needed for the BSP to support a display are kept here.
You can find these files in the BSP Layer at:
     meta-bsp_name/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto*.bbappend
                
These files append your specific changes to the main kernel recipe you are using.
                For your BSP, you typically want to use an existing Yocto Project kernel recipe found in the
                Source Directory
                at meta/recipes-kernel/linux.
                You can append your specific changes to the kernel recipe by using a
                similarly named append file, which is located in the BSP Layer (e.g.
                the meta- directory).
            bsp_name/recipes-kernel/linux
                Suppose you are using the linux-yocto_4.4.bb recipe to build
                the kernel.
                In other words, you have selected the kernel in your
                bsp_name.conf file by adding these types
                of statements:
                
     PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto"
     PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto ?= "4.4%"
                
PREFERRED_PROVIDER statement does not appear in the
                    bsp_name.conf file.
                
                You would use the linux-yocto_4.4.bbappend
                file to append specific BSP settings to the kernel, thus
                configuring the kernel for your particular BSP.
            
                As an example, consider the following append file
                used by the BSPs in meta-yocto-bsp:
                
     meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.4.bbappend
                
                The following listing shows the file.
                Be aware that the actual commit ID strings in this
                example listing might be different than the actual strings
                in the file from the meta-yocto-bsp
                layer upstream.
                
     KBRANCH_genericx86  = "standard/base"
     KBRANCH_genericx86-64  = "standard/base"
     KMACHINE_genericx86 ?= "common-pc"
     KMACHINE_genericx86-64 ?= "common-pc-64"
     KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter"
     KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone"
     KBRANCH_mpc8315e-rdb = "standard/fsl-mpc8315e-rdb"
     SRCREV_machine_genericx86    ?= "ff4c4ef15b51f45b9106d71bf1f62fe7c02e63c2"
     SRCREV_machine_genericx86-64 ?= "ff4c4ef15b51f45b9106d71bf1f62fe7c02e63c2"
     SRCREV_machine_edgerouter ?= "ff4c4ef15b51f45b9106d71bf1f62fe7c02e63c2"
     SRCREV_machine_beaglebone ?= "ff4c4ef15b51f45b9106d71bf1f62fe7c02e63c2"
     SRCREV_machine_mpc8315e-rdb ?= "df00877ef9387b38b9601c82db57de2a1b23ce53"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_genericx86 = "genericx86"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_genericx86-64 = "genericx86-64"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_edgerouter = "edgerouter"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_beaglebone = "beaglebone"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_mpc8315e-rdb = "mpc8315e-rdb"
     LINUX_VERSION_genericx86 = "4.4.3"
     LINUX_VERSION_genericx86-64 = "4.4.3"
                
                This append file contains statements used to support
                several BSPs that ship with the Yocto Project.
                The file defines machines using the
                COMPATIBLE_MACHINE
                variable and uses the
                KMACHINE
                variable to ensure the machine name used by the OpenEmbedded
                build system maps to the machine name used by the Linux Yocto
                kernel.
                The file also uses the optional
                KBRANCH
                variable to ensure the build process uses the
                appropriate kernel branch.
            
                Although this particular example does not use it, the
                KERNEL_FEATURES
                variable could be used to enable features specific to
                the kernel.
                The append file points to specific commits in the
                Source Directory
                Git repository and the meta Git repository
                branches to identify the exact kernel needed to build the
                BSP.
            
                One thing missing in this particular BSP, which you will
                typically need when developing a BSP, is the kernel configuration
                file (.config) for your BSP.
                When developing a BSP, you probably have a kernel configuration
                file or a set of kernel configuration files that, when taken
                together, define the kernel configuration for your BSP.
                You can accomplish this definition by putting the configurations
                in a file or a set of files inside a directory located at the
                same level as your kernel's append file and having the same
                name as the kernel's main recipe file.
                With all these conditions met, simply reference those files in the
                SRC_URI
                statement in the append file.
            
                For example, suppose you had some configuration options
                in a file called network_configs.cfg.
                You can place that file inside a directory named
                linux-yocto and then add
                a SRC_URI statement such as the
                following to the append file.
                When the OpenEmbedded build system builds the kernel, the
                configuration options are picked up and applied.
                
     SRC_URI += "file://network_configs.cfg"
                
                To group related configurations into multiple files, you
                perform a similar procedure.
                Here is an example that groups separate configurations
                specifically for Ethernet and graphics into their own
                files and adds the configurations by using a
                SRC_URI statement like the following
                in your append file:
                
     SRC_URI += "file://myconfig.cfg \
                 file://eth.cfg \
                 file://gfx.cfg"
                
                Another variable you can use in your kernel recipe append
                file is the
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                variable.
                When you use this statement, you are extending the locations
                used by the OpenEmbedded system to look for files and
                patches as the recipe is processed.
            
                    Other methods exist to accomplish grouping and defining configuration options.
                    For example, if you are working with a local clone of the kernel repository,
                    you could checkout the kernel's meta branch, make your changes,
                    and then push the changes to the local bare clone of the kernel.
                    The result is that you directly add configuration options to the
                    meta branch for your BSP.
                    The configuration options will likely end up in that location anyway if the BSP gets
                    added to the Yocto Project.
                
                    In general, however, the Yocto Project maintainers take care of moving the
                    SRC_URI-specified
                    configuration options to the kernel's meta branch.
                    Not only is it easier for BSP developers to not have to worry about putting those
                   configurations in the branch, but having the maintainers do it allows them to apply
                    'global' knowledge about the kinds of common configuration options multiple BSPs in
                    the tree are typically using.
                    This allows for promotion of common configurations into common features.
                
Certain requirements exist for a released BSP to be considered compliant with the Yocto Project. Additionally, recommendations also exist. This section describes the requirements and recommendations for released BSPs.
Before looking at BSP requirements, you should consider the following:
The requirements here assume the BSP layer is a well-formed, "legal" layer that can be added to the Yocto Project. For guidelines on creating a layer that meets these base requirements, see the "BSP Layers" and the "Understanding and Creating Layers" in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
The requirements in this section apply regardless of how you package a BSP. You should consult the packaging and distribution guidelines for your specific release process. For an example of packaging and distribution requirements, see the "Third Party BSP Release Process" wiki page.
The requirements for the BSP as it is made available to a developer are completely independent of the released form of the BSP. For example, the BSP Metadata can be contained within a Git repository and could have a directory structure completely different from what appears in the officially released BSP layer.
It is not required that specific packages or package modifications exist in the BSP layer, beyond the requirements for general compliance with the Yocto Project. For example, no requirement exists dictating that a specific kernel or kernel version be used in a given BSP.
Following are the requirements for a released BSP that conform to the Yocto Project:
Layer Name: The BSP must have a layer name that follows the Yocto Project standards. For information on BSP layer names, see the "BSP Layers" section.
File System Layout:
                            When possible, use the same directory names in your
                            BSP layer as listed in the recipes.txt file.
                            In particular, you should place recipes
                            (.bb files) and recipe
                            modifications (.bbappend files) into
                            recipes-* subdirectories by functional area
                            as outlined in recipes.txt.
                            If you cannot find a category in recipes.txt
                            to fit a particular recipe, you can make up your own
                            recipes-* subdirectory.
                            You can find recipes.txt in the
                            meta directory of the
                            Source Directory,
                            or in the OpenEmbedded Core Layer
                            (openembedded-core) found at
                            http://git.openembedded.org/openembedded-core/tree/meta.
                            
Within any particular recipes-* category, the layout
                            should match what is found in the OpenEmbedded Core
                            Git repository (openembedded-core)
                            or the Source Directory (poky).
                            In other words, make sure you place related files in appropriately
                            related recipes-* subdirectories specific to the
                            recipe's function, or within a subdirectory containing a set of closely-related
                            recipes.
                            The recipes themselves should follow the general guidelines
                            for recipes used in the Yocto Project found in the
                            "OpenEmbedded Style Guide".
                            
License File:
                            You must include a license file in the
                            meta- directory.
                            This license covers the BSP Metadata as a whole.
                            You must specify which license to use since there is no
                            default license if one is not specified.
                            See the
                            bsp_nameCOPYING.MIT
                            file for the Raspberry Pi BSP in the
                            meta-raspberrypi BSP layer as an example.
                            
README File:
                            You must include a README file in the
                            meta- directory.
                            See the
                            bsp_nameREADME
                            file for the Raspberry Pi BSP in the meta-raspberrypi BSP layer
                            as an example.
At a minimum, the README file should
                            contain the following:
                            
A brief description about the hardware the BSP targets.
A list of all the dependencies on which a BSP layer depends. These dependencies are typically a list of required layers needed to build the BSP. However, the dependencies should also contain information regarding any other dependencies the BSP might have.
Any required special licensing information. For example, this information includes information on special variables needed to satisfy a EULA, or instructions on information needed to build or distribute binaries built from the BSP Metadata.
The name and contact information for the BSP layer maintainer. This is the person to whom patches and questions should be sent. For information on how to find the right person, see the "How to Submit a Change" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Instructions on how to build the BSP using the BSP layer.
Instructions on how to boot the BSP build from the BSP layer.
Instructions on how to boot the binary images
                                    contained in the binary directory,
                                    if present.
Information on any known bugs or issues that users should know about when either building or booting the BSP binaries.
README.sources File:
                            You must include a README.sources in the
                            meta- directory.
                            This file specifies exactly where you can find the sources used to
                            generate the binary images contained in the
                            bsp_namebinary directory, if present.
                            
Layer Configuration File:
                            You must include a conf/layer.conf in the
                            meta- directory.
                            This file identifies the bsp_namemeta-
                            BSP layer as a layer to the build system.bsp_name
Machine Configuration File:
                            You must include one or more
                            conf/machine/
                            files in the bsp_name.confmeta- directory.
                            These configuration files define machine targets that can be built
                            using the BSP layer.
                            Multiple machine configuration files define variations of machine
                            configurations that are supported by the BSP.
                            If a BSP supports multiple machine variations, you need to
                            adequately describe each variation in the BSP
                            bsp_nameREADME file.
                            Do not use multiple machine configuration files to describe disparate
                            hardware.
                            If you do have very different targets, you should create separate
                            BSP layers for each target.
                            
meta-yocto-bsp layer).
                            Such considerations are outside the scope of this document.
Following are recommendations for a released BSP that conforms to the Yocto Project:
Bootable Images: BSP releases can contain one or more bootable images. Including bootable images allows users to easily try out the BSP on their own hardware.
In some cases, it might not be convenient to include a bootable image. In this case, you might want to make two versions of the BSP available: one that contains binary images, and one that does not. The version that does not contain bootable images avoids unnecessary download times for users not interested in the images.
If you need to distribute a BSP and include bootable images or build kernel and
                            filesystems meant to allow users to boot the BSP for evaluation
                            purposes, you should put the images and artifacts within a
                            binary/ subdirectory located in the
                            meta- directory.
                            bsp_name
Use a Yocto Linux Kernel:
                            Kernel recipes in the BSP should be based on a Yocto Linux kernel.
                            Basing your recipes on these kernels reduces the costs for maintaining
                            the BSP and increases its scalability.
                            See the Yocto Linux Kernel category in the
                            Source Repositories
                            for these kernels.
If you plan on customizing a recipe for a particular BSP, you need to do the following:
Create a .bbappend
                       file for the modified recipe.
                       For information on using append files, see the
                       "Using .bbappend Files"
                       section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                       
Ensure your directory structure in the BSP layer that supports your machine is such that it can be found by the build system. See the example later in this section for more information.
                       Put the append file in a directory whose name matches
                       the machine's name and is located in an appropriate
                       sub-directory inside the BSP layer (i.e.
                       recipes-bsp, recipes-graphics,
                       recipes-core, and so forth).
                       
Place the BSP-specific files in the proper directory inside the BSP layer. How expansive the layer is affects where you must place these files. For example, if your layer supports several different machine types, you need to be sure your layer's directory structure includes hierarchy that separates the files out according to machine. If your layer does not support multiple machines, the layer would not have that additional hierarchy and the files would obviously not be able to reside in a machine-specific directory.
               Following is a specific example to help you better understand the process.
               Consider an example that customizes a recipe by adding
               a BSP-specific configuration file named interfaces to the
               init-ifupdown_1.0.bb recipe for machine "xyz" where the
               BSP layer also supports several other machines.
               Do the following:
               
Edit the init-ifupdown_1.0.bbappend file so that it
                       contains the following:
                       
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:"
                       
                       The append file needs to be in the
                       meta-xyz/recipes-core/init-ifupdown directory.
                       
Create and place the new interfaces
                       configuration file in the BSP's layer here:
                       
     meta-xyz/recipes-core/init-ifupdown/files/xyz-machine-one/interfaces
                       
meta-xyz layer did not support
                           multiple machines, you would place the
                           interfaces configuration file in the
                           layer here:
                           
     meta-xyz/recipes-core/init-ifupdown/files/interfaces
                           
                       The
                       FILESEXTRAPATHS
                       variable in the append files extends the search path
                       the build system uses to find files during the build.
                       Consequently, for this example you need to have the
                       files directory in the same location
                       as your append file.
In some cases, a BSP contains separately licensed Intellectual Property (IP) for a component or components. For these cases, you are required to accept the terms of a commercial or other type of license that requires some kind of explicit End User License Agreement (EULA). Once the license is accepted, the OpenEmbedded build system can then build and include the corresponding component in the final BSP image. If the BSP is available as a pre-built image, you can download the image after agreeing to the license or EULA.
You could find that some separately licensed components that are essential for normal operation of the system might not have an unencumbered (or free) substitute. Without these essential components, the system would be non-functional. Then again, you might find that other licensed components that are simply 'good-to-have' or purely elective do have an unencumbered, free replacement component that you can use rather than agreeing to the separately licensed component. Even for components essential to the system, you might find an unencumbered component that is not identical but will work as a less-capable version of the licensed version in the BSP recipe.
For cases where you can substitute a free component and still maintain the system's functionality, the "Downloads" page from the Yocto Project website's makes available de-featured BSPs that are completely free of any IP encumbrances. For these cases, you can use the substitution directly and without any further licensing requirements. If present, these fully de-featured BSPs are named appropriately different as compared to the names of the respective encumbered BSPs. If available, these substitutions are your simplest and most preferred options. Use of these substitutions of course assumes the resulting functionality meets system requirements.
If however, a non-encumbered version is unavailable or it provides unsuitable functionality or quality, you can use an encumbered version.
A couple different methods exist within the OpenEmbedded build system to satisfy the licensing requirements for an encumbered BSP. The following list describes them in order of preference:
Use the
                        LICENSE_FLAGS
                        variable to define the recipes that have commercial or other
                        types of specially-licensed packages:
                        For each of those recipes, you can
                        specify a matching license string in a
                        local.conf variable named
                        LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST.
                        Specifying the matching license string signifies that you agree to the license.
                        Thus, the build system can build the corresponding recipe and include
                        the component in the image.
                        See the
                        "Enabling
                        Commercially Licensed Recipes" section in the Yocto Project Reference
                        Manual for details on how to use these variables.
If you build as you normally would, without
		        specifying any recipes in the
		        LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST, the build stops and
		        provides you with the list of recipes that you have
		        tried to include in the image that need entries in
		        the LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST.
		        Once you enter the appropriate license flags into the whitelist,
		        restart the build to continue where it left off.
		        During the build, the prompt will not appear again
		        since you have satisfied the requirement.
Once the appropriate license flags are on the white list
		        in the LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST variable, you
		        can build the encumbered image with no change at all
		        to the normal build process.
Get a pre-built version of the BSP:
                        You can get this type of BSP by visiting the
                        "Downloads" page of the
                        Yocto Project website.
                        You can download BSP tarballs that contain proprietary components
                        after agreeing to the licensing
                        requirements of each of the individually encumbered
                        packages as part of the download process.
                        Obtaining the BSP this way allows you to access an encumbered
                        image immediately after agreeing to the
                        click-through license agreements presented by the
                        website.
                        Note that if you want to build the image
                        yourself using the recipes contained within the BSP
                        tarball, you will still need to create an
                        appropriate LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST to match the
                        encumbered recipes in the BSP.
                The Yocto Project includes a couple of tools that enable
                you to create a BSP layer
                from scratch and do basic configuration and maintenance
                of the kernel without ever looking at a Metadata file.
                These tools are yocto-bsp and yocto-kernel,
                respectively.
	    
                The following sections describe the common location and help features as well
                as provide details for the
                yocto-bsp and yocto-kernel tools.
            
                    Designed to have a  command interface somewhat like
                    Git, each
                    tool is structured as a set of sub-commands under a
                    top-level command.
                    The top-level command (yocto-bsp
                    or yocto-kernel) itself does
                    nothing but invoke or provide help on the sub-commands
                    it supports.
                
                    Both tools reside in the scripts/ subdirectory
                    of the Source Directory.
                    Consequently, to use the scripts, you must source the
                    environment just as you would when invoking a build:
                    
     $ source oe-init-build-env build_dir
                    
                    The most immediately useful function is to get help on both tools.
                    The built-in help system makes it easy to drill down at
                    any time and view the syntax required for any specific command.
                    Simply enter the name of the command with the help
                    switch:
                    
     $ yocto-bsp help
     Usage:
      Create a customized Yocto BSP layer.
      usage: yocto-bsp [--version] [--help] COMMAND [ARGS]
      Current 'yocto-bsp' commands are:
         create            Create a new Yocto BSP
         list              List available values for options and BSP properties
      See 'yocto-bsp help COMMAND' for more information on a specific command.
     Options:
       --version    show program's version number and exit
       -h, --help   show this help message and exit
       -D, --debug  output debug information
                    
Similarly, entering just the name of a sub-command shows the detailed usage for that sub-command:
     $ yocto-bsp create
     ERROR:root:Wrong number of arguments, exiting
     Usage:
      Create a new Yocto BSP
      usage: yocto-bsp create <bsp-name> <karch> [-o <DIRNAME> | --outdir <DIRNAME>]
            [-i <JSON PROPERTY FILE> | --infile <JSON PROPERTY_FILE>]
      This command creates a Yocto BSP based on the specified parameters.
      The new BSP will be a new Yocto BSP layer contained by default within
      the top-level directory specified as 'meta-bsp-name'.  The -o option
      can be used to place the BSP layer in a directory with a different
      name and location.
      The value of the 'karch' parameter determines the set of files that
      will be generated for the BSP, along with the specific set of
      'properties' that will be used to fill out the BSP-specific portions
      of the BSP.  The possible values for the 'karch' parameter can be
      listed via 'yocto-bsp list karch'.
      ...
                    
For any sub-command, you can use the word "help" option just before the sub-command to get more extensive documentation:
     $ yocto-bsp help create
     NAME
         yocto-bsp create - Create a new Yocto BSP
     SYNOPSIS
         yocto-bsp create <bsp-name> <karch> [-o <DIRNAME> | --outdir <DIRNAME>]
             [-i <JSON PROPERTY FILE> | --infile <JSON PROPERTY_FILE>]
     DESCRIPTION
         This command creates a Yocto BSP based on the specified
         parameters.  The new BSP will be a new Yocto BSP layer contained
         by default within the top-level directory specified as
         'meta-bsp-name'.  The -o option can be used to place the BSP layer
         in a directory with a different name and location.
         ...
                    
Now that you know where these two commands reside and how to access information on them, you should find it relatively straightforward to discover the commands necessary to create a BSP and perform basic kernel maintenance on that BSP using the tools.
yocto-layer tool to create
                        a "generic" layer.
                        For information on this tool, see the
                        "Creating a General Layer Using the yocto-layer Script"
                        section in the Yocto Project Development Guide.
                    
The next sections provide a concrete starting point to expand on a few points that might not be immediately obvious or that could use further explanation.
                    The yocto-bsp script creates a new
                    BSP layer for any architecture supported
                    by the Yocto Project, as well as QEMU versions of the same.
                    The default mode of the script's operation is to prompt you for information needed
                    to generate the BSP layer.
                
For the current set of BSPs, the script prompts you for various important parameters such as:
The kernel to use
The branch of that kernel to use (or re-use)
Whether or not to use X, and if so, which drivers to use
Whether to turn on SMP
Whether the BSP has a keyboard
Whether the BSP has a touchscreen
Remaining configurable items associated with the BSP
                    You use the yocto-bsp create sub-command to create
                    a new BSP layer.
                    This command requires you to specify a particular kernel architecture
                    (karch) on which to base the BSP.
                    Assuming you have sourced the environment, you can use the
                    yocto-bsp list karch sub-command to list the
                    architectures available for BSP creation as follows:
                    
     $ yocto-bsp list karch
     Architectures available:
         powerpc
         x86_64
         i386
         arm
         qemu
         mips
         mips64
                    
                    The remainder of this section presents an example that uses
                    myarm as the machine name and qemu
                    as the machine architecture.
                    Of the available architectures, qemu is the only architecture
                    that causes the script to prompt you further for an actual architecture.
                    In every other way, this architecture is representative of how creating a BSP for
                    an actual machine would work.
                    The reason the example uses this architecture is because it is an emulated architecture
                    and can easily be followed without requiring actual hardware.
                
                    As the yocto-bsp create command runs, default values for
                    the prompts appear in brackets.
                    Pressing enter without supplying anything on the command line or pressing enter
                    with an invalid response causes the script to accept the default value.
                    Once the script completes, the new meta-myarm BSP layer
                    is created in the current working directory.
                    This example assumes you have sourced the
                    oe-init-build-env
                    setup script.
                
Following is the complete example:
     $ yocto-bsp create myarm qemu
     Checking basic git connectivity...
     Done.
     Which qemu architecture would you like to use? [default: i386]
     	     1) i386    (32-bit)
	     2) x86_64  (64-bit)
	     3) ARM     (32-bit)
	     4) PowerPC (32-bit)
	     5) MIPS    (32-bit)
	     6) MIPS64  (64-bit)
     3
     Would you like to use the default (4.4) kernel? (y/n) [default: y]
     Do you need a new machine branch for this BSP (the alternative is to re-use an existing branch)? [y/n] [default: y]
     Getting branches from remote repo git://git.yoctoproject.org/linux-yocto-4.4.git...
     Please choose a machine branch to base this BSP on: [default: standard/base]
	     1) standard/arm-versatile-926ejs
	     2) standard/base
	     3) standard/beaglebone
	     4) standard/edgerouter
	     5) standard/fsl-mpc8315e-rdb
	     6) standard/mti-malta32
	     7) standard/mti-malta64
	     8) standard/qemuarm64
	     9) standard/qemuppc
     1
     Would you like SMP support? (y/n) [default: y]
     Does your BSP have a touchscreen? (y/n) [default: n]
     Does your BSP have a keyboard? (y/n) [default: y]
     New qemu BSP created in meta-myarm
                    Take a closer look at the example now:
For the QEMU architecture, the script first prompts you for which emulated architecture to use. In the example, we use the ARM architecture.
The script then prompts you for the kernel. The default 4.4 kernel is acceptable. So, the example accepts the default. If you enter 'n', the script prompts you to further enter the kernel you do want to use.
Next, the script asks whether you would like to have a new branch created especially for your BSP in the local Linux Yocto Kernel Git repository . If not, then the script re-uses an existing branch.
In this example, the default (or "yes") is accepted. Thus, a new branch is created for the BSP rather than using a common, shared branch. The new branch is the branch committed to for any patches you might later add. The reason a new branch is the default is that typically new BSPs do require BSP-specific patches. The tool thus assumes that most of time a new branch is required.
Regardless of which choice you make in the previous step,
                            you are now given the opportunity to select a particular machine branch on
                            which to base your new BSP-specific machine branch
                            (or to re-use if you had elected to not create a new branch).
                            Because this example is generating an ARM-based BSP, the example
                            uses #1 at the prompt, which selects the ARM-versatile branch.
                            
The remainder of the prompts are routine. Defaults are accepted for each.
By default, the script creates the new BSP Layer in the
                            current working directory of the
                            Source Directory,
                            (i.e. poky/build).
                            
                    Once the BSP Layer is created, you must add it to your
                    bblayers.conf file.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     BBLAYERS = ? " \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-poky \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-yocto-bsp \
        /usr/local/src/yocto/meta-myarm \
        "
                    
                    Adding the layer to this file allows the build system to build the BSP and
                    the yocto-kernel tool to be able to find the layer and
                    other Metadata it needs on which to operate.
                
                    Assuming you have created a BSP Layer using
                    
                    yocto-bsp and you added it to your
                    BBLAYERS
                    variable in the bblayers.conf file, you can now use
                    the yocto-kernel script to add patches and configuration
                    items to the BSP's kernel.
                
                    The yocto-kernel script allows you to add, remove, and list patches
                    and kernel config settings to a BSP's kernel
                    .bbappend file.
                    All you need to do is use the appropriate sub-command.
                    Recall that the easiest way to see exactly what sub-commands are available
                    is to use the yocto-kernel built-in help as follows:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel --help
     Usage:
      Modify and list Yocto BSP kernel config items and patches.
      usage: yocto-kernel [--version] [--help] COMMAND [ARGS]
      Current 'yocto-kernel' commands are:
        config list       List the modifiable set of bare kernel config options for a BSP
        config add        Add or modify bare kernel config options for a BSP
        config rm         Remove bare kernel config options from a BSP
        patch list        List the patches associated with a BSP
        patch add         Patch the Yocto kernel for a BSP
        patch rm          Remove patches from a BSP
        feature list      List the features used by a BSP
        feature add       Have a BSP use a feature
        feature rm        Have a BSP stop using a feature
        features list     List the features available to BSPs
        feature describe  Describe a particular feature
        feature create    Create a new BSP-local feature
        feature destroy   Remove a BSP-local feature
      See 'yocto-kernel help COMMAND' for more information on a specific command.
     Options:
       --version    show program's version number and exit
       -h, --help   show this help message and exit
       -D, --debug  output debug information
                    
                    The yocto-kernel patch add sub-command allows you to add a
                    patch to a BSP.
                    The following example adds two patches to the myarm BSP:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel patch add myarm ~/test.patch
     Added patches:
       test.patch
     $ yocto-kernel patch add myarm ~/yocto-testmod.patch
     Added patches:
       yocto-testmod.patch
                    
                    You can verify patches have been added by using the
                    yocto-kernel patch list sub-command.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel patch list myarm
     The current set of machine-specific patches for myarm is:
       1) test.patch
       2) yocto-testmod.patch
                    
                    You can also use the yocto-kernel script to
                    remove a patch using the yocto-kernel patch rm sub-command.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel patch rm myarm
     Specify the patches to remove:
       1) test.patch
       2) yocto-testmod.patch
     1
     Removed patches:
       test.patch
                    
                    Again, using the yocto-kernel patch list sub-command,
                    you can verify that the patch was in fact removed:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel patch list myarm
     The current set of machine-specific patches for myarm is:
       1) yocto-testmod.patch
                    
                    In a completely similar way, you can use the yocto-kernel config add
                    sub-command to add one or more kernel config item settings to a BSP.
                    The following commands add a couple of config items to the
                    myarm BSP:
                    
     $ yocto-kernel config add myarm CONFIG_MISC_DEVICES=y
     Added item:
       CONFIG_MISC_DEVICES=y
     $ yocto-kernel config add myarm CONFIG_YOCTO_TESTMOD=y
     Added item:
       CONFIG_YOCTO_TESTMOD=y
                    
You can list the config items now associated with the BSP. Doing so shows you the config items you added as well as others associated with the BSP:
     $ yocto-kernel config list myarm
     The current set of machine-specific kernel config items for myarm is:
             1) CONFIG_MISC_DEVICES=y
             2) CONFIG_YOCTO_TESTMOD=y
                    
                    Finally, you can remove one or more config items using the
                    yocto-kernel config rm sub-command in a manner
                    completely analogous to yocto-kernel patch rm.
                
|  | 
Regardless of how you intend to make use of the Yocto Project, chances are you will work with the Linux kernel. This manual provides background information on the Yocto Linux kernel Metadata, describes common tasks you can perform using the kernel tools, and shows you how to use the kernel Metadata needed to work with the kernel inside the Yocto Project.
            Each Yocto Project release has a set of linux-yocto recipes, whose
            Git repositories you can view in the Yocto
            Source Repositories under
            the "Yocto Linux Kernel" heading.
            New recipes for the release track the latest upstream developments
            and introduce newly-supported platforms.
            Previous recipes in the release are refreshed and supported for at
            least one additional release.
            As they align, these previous releases are updated to include the
            latest from the
            Long Term Support Initiative
            (LTSI) project.
            Also included is a linux-yocto development recipe
            (linux-yocto-dev.bb) should you want to work
            with the very latest in upstream Linux kernel development and
            kernel Metadata development.
        
The Yocto Project also provides a powerful set of kernel tools for managing Linux kernel sources and configuration data. You can use these tools to make a single configuration change, apply multiple patches, or work with your own kernel sources.
            In particular, the kernel tools allow you to generate configuration
            fragments that specify only what you must, and nothing more.
            Configuration fragments only need to contain the highest level
            visible CONFIG options as presented by the Linux
            kernel menuconfig system.
            Contrast this against a complete Linux kernel
            .config, which includes all the automatically
            selected CONFIG options.
            This efficiency reduces your maintenance effort and allows you
            to further separate your configuration in ways that make sense for
            your project.
            A common split separates policy and hardware.
            For example, all your kernels might support
            the proc and sys filesystems,
            but only specific boards require sound, USB, or specific drivers.
            Specifying these configurations individually allows you to aggregate
            them together as needed, but maintains them in only one place.
            Similar logic applies to separating source changes.
        
If you do not maintain your own kernel sources and need to make only minimal changes to the sources, the released recipes provide a vetted base upon which to layer your changes. Doing so allows you to benefit from the continual kernel integration and testing performed during development of the Yocto Project.
If, instead, you have a very specific Linux kernel source tree and are unable to align with one of the official linux-yocto recipes, an alternative exists by which you can use the Yocto Project Linux kernel tools with your own kernel sources.
The sections that follow provide instructions for completing specific Linux kernel development tasks. These instructions assume you are comfortable working with BitBake recipes and basic open-source development tools. Understanding these concepts will facilitate the process of working with the kernel recipes. If you find you need some additional background, please be sure to review and understand the following documentation:
Yocto Project Quick Start
The "Modifying Source Code" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual
The "Understanding and Creating Layers" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual
The "Modifying the Kernel" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Finally, while this document focuses on the manual creation of recipes, patches, and configuration files, the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) tools are available to automate this process with existing content and work well to create the initial framework and boilerplate code. For details on these tools, see the "Using the Yocto Project's BSP Tools" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
This chapter presents several common tasks you perform when you work with the Yocto Project Linux kernel. These tasks include preparing a layer, modifying an existing recipe, iterative development, working with your own sources, and incorporating out-of-tree modules.
            If you are going to be modifying kernel recipes, it is recommended
            that you create and prepare your own layer in which to do your
            work.
            Your layer contains its own
            BitBake
            append files
            (.bbappend) and provides a convenient
            mechanism to create your own recipe files
            (.bb).
            For details on how to create and work with layers, see the following
            sections in the Yocto Project Development Manual:
            
"Understanding and Creating Layers" for general information on layers and how to create layers.
"Set Up Your Layer for the Build" for specific instructions on setting up a layer for kernel development.
            In many cases, you can customize an existing linux-yocto recipe to
            meet the needs of your project.
            Each release of the Yocto Project provides a few Linux
            kernel recipes from which you can choose.
            These are located in the
            Source Directory
            in meta/recipes-kernel/linux.
        
Modifying an existing recipe can consist of the following:
Creating the append file
Applying patches
Changing the configuration
Before modifying an existing recipe, be sure that you have created a minimal, custom layer from which you can work. See the "Creating and Preparing a Layer" section for some general resources. You can also see the "Set Up Your Layer for the Build" section of the Yocto Project Development Manual for a detailed example.
                You create this file in your custom layer.
                You also name it accordingly based on the linux-yocto recipe
                you are using.
                For example, if you are modifying the
                meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bb
                recipe, the append file will typically be located as follows
                within your custom layer:
                
     your-layer/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend
                
                The append file should initially extend the
                FILESPATH
                search path by prepending the directory that contains your
                files to the
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                variable as follows:
                
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
                
                The path ${THISDIR}/${PN}
                expands to "linux-yocto" in the current directory for this
                example.
                If you add any new files that modify the kernel recipe and you
                have extended FILESPATH as
                described above, you must place the files in your layer in the
                following area:
                
     your-layer/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto/
                
                If you have a single patch or a small series of patches
                that you want to apply to the Linux kernel source, you
                can do so just as you would with any other recipe.
                You first copy the patches to the path added to
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                in your .bbappend file as described in
                the previous section, and then reference them in
                SRC_URI
                statements.
            
                For example, you can apply a three-patch series by adding the
                following lines to your linux-yocto
                .bbappend file in your layer:
                
     SRC_URI += "file://0001-first-change.patch"
     SRC_URI += "file://0002-second-change.patch"
     SRC_URI += "file://0003-third-change.patch"
                The next time you run BitBake to build the Linux kernel, BitBake detects the change in the recipe and fetches and applies the patches before building the kernel.
For a detailed example showing how to patch the kernel, see the "Patching the Kernel" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                You can make wholesale or incremental changes to the final
                .config file used for the eventual
                Linux kernel configuration by including a
                defconfig file and by specifying
                configuration fragments in the
                SRC_URI
                to be applied to that file.
            
                If you have a complete, working Linux kernel
                .config
                file you want to use for the configuration, as before, copy
                that file to the appropriate ${PN}
                directory in your layer's
                recipes-kernel/linux directory,
                and rename the copied file to "defconfig".
                Then, add the following lines to the linux-yocto
                .bbappend file in your layer:
                
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
     SRC_URI += "file://defconfig"
                
                The SRC_URI tells the build system how to
                search for the file, while the
                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                extends the
                FILESPATH
                variable (search directories) to include the
                ${PN} directory you created to hold the
                configuration changes.
            
defconfig file before applying any
                subsequent configuration fragments.
                The final kernel configuration is a combination of the
                configurations in the defconfig file and
                any configuration fragments you provide.
                You need to realize that if you have any configuration
                fragments, the build system applies these on top of and
                after applying the existing defconfig
                file configurations.
            
                Generally speaking, the preferred approach is to determine the
                incremental change you want to make and add that as a
                configuration fragment.
                For example, if you want to add support for a basic serial
                console, create a file named 8250.cfg in
                the ${PN} directory with the following
                content (without indentation):
                
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250=y
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_CONSOLE=y
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_PCI=y
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_NR_UARTS=4
     CONFIG_SERIAL_8250_RUNTIME_UARTS=4
     CONFIG_SERIAL_CORE=y
     CONFIG_SERIAL_CORE_CONSOLE=y
                
                Next, include this configuration fragment and extend the
                FILESPATH variable in your
                .bbappend file:
                
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
     SRC_URI += "file://8250.cfg"
                The next time you run BitBake to build the Linux kernel, BitBake detects the change in the recipe and fetches and applies the new configuration before building the kernel.
For a detailed example showing how to configure the kernel, see the "Configuring the Kernel" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
defconfig File¶
                It might be desirable to have kernel configuration fragment
                support through a defconfig file that
                is pulled from the kernel source tree for the configured
                machine.
                By default, the OpenEmbedded build system looks for
                defconfig files in the layer used for
                Metadata, which is "out-of-tree", and then configures them
                using the following:
                
     SRC_URI += "file://defconfig"
                
                If you do not want to maintain copies of
                defconfig files in your layer but would
                rather allow users to use the default configuration from the
                kernel tree and still be able to add configuration fragments
                to the
                SRC_URI
                through, for example, append files, you can direct the
                OpenEmbedded build system to use a
                defconfig file that is "in-tree".
            
                To specify an "in-tree" defconfig file,
                edit the recipe that builds your kernel so that it has the
                following command form:
                
     KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file
                
                You need to append the variable with
                KMACHINE
                and then supply the path to your "in-tree"
                defconfig file.
            
                Aside from modifying your kernel recipe and providing your own
                defconfig file, you need to be sure no
                files or statements set SRC_URI to use a
                defconfig other than your "in-tree"
                file (e.g. a kernel's linux-machine.inc
                file).
                In other words, if the build system detects a statement
                that identifies an "out-of-tree"
                defconfig file, that statement
                will override your
                KBUILD_DEFCONFIG variable.
            
                See the
                KBUILD_DEFCONFIG
                variable description for more information.
            
If you do not have existing patches or configuration files, you can iteratively generate them from within the BitBake build environment as described within this section. During an iterative workflow, running a previously completed BitBake task causes BitBake to invalidate the tasks that follow the completed task in the build sequence. Invalidated tasks rebuild the next time you run the build using BitBake.
As you read this section, be sure to substitute the name of your Linux kernel recipe for the term "linux-yocto".
If kernel images are being built with "-dirty" on the end of the version string, this simply means that modifications in the source directory have not been committed.
     $ git status
                
You can use the above Git command to report modified, removed, or added files. You should commit those changes to the tree regardless of whether they will be saved, exported, or used. Once you commit the changes, you need to rebuild the kernel.
To force a pickup and commit of all such pending changes, enter the following:
     $ git add .
     $ git commit -s -a -m "getting rid of -dirty"
                
Next, rebuild the kernel.
                You can manipulate the .config file
                used to build a linux-yocto recipe with the
                menuconfig command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c menuconfig
                
                This command starts the Linux kernel configuration tool,
                which allows you to prepare a new
                .config file for the build.
                When you exit the tool, be sure to save your changes
                at the prompt.
            
                The resulting .config file is
                located in the build directory,
                ${B},
                which expands to
                ${WORKDIR}/linux-${PACKAGE_ARCH}-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}-build.
                You can use the entire .config file as the
                defconfig file as described in the
                "Changing the Configuration" section.
                For more information on the .config file,
                see the
                "Using menuconfig"
                section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
bitbake -e
                    command:
                    
     $ bitbake -e virtual/kernel
                    
                    Search the output for the variable in which you are
                    interested to see exactly how it is expanded and used.
                
                A better method is to create a configuration fragment using the
                differences between two configuration files: one previously
                created and saved, and one freshly created using the
                menuconfig tool.
            
To create a configuration fragment using this method, follow these steps:
Complete a build at least through the kernel configuration task as follows:
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c kernel_configme -f
                        
                        This step ensures that you will be creating a
                        .config file from a known state.
                        Because situations exist where your build state might
                        become unknown, it is best to run the previous
                        command prior to starting up
                        menuconfig.
                        
Run the menuconfig
                        command:
                        
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c menuconfig
                        Run the diffconfig
                        command to prepare a configuration fragment.
                        The resulting file fragment.cfg
                        will be placed in the
                        ${WORKDIR} directory:
                        
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c diffconfig
                        
                The diffconfig command creates a file that is a
                list of Linux kernel CONFIG_ assignments.
                See the "Changing the Configuration"
                section for information on how to use the output as a
                configuration fragment.
                
                The kernel tools also provide configuration validation.
                You can use these tools to produce warnings for when a
                requested configuration does not appear in the final
                .config file or when you override a
                policy configuration in a hardware configuration fragment.
                Here is an example with some sample output of the command
                that runs these tools:
                
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c kernel_configcheck -f
     ...
     NOTE: validating kernel configuration
     This BSP sets 3 invalid/obsolete kernel options.
     These config options are not offered anywhere within this kernel.
     The full list can be found in your kernel src dir at:
     meta/cfg/standard/mybsp/invalid.cfg
     This BSP sets 21 kernel options that are possibly non-hardware related.
     The full list can be found in your kernel src dir at:
     meta/cfg/standard/mybsp/specified_non_hdw.cfg
     WARNING: There were 2 hardware options requested that do not
              have a corresponding value present in the final ".config" file.
              This probably means you are not getting the config you wanted.
              The full list can be found in your kernel src dir at:
              meta/cfg/standard/mybsp/mismatch.cfg
                
                The output describes the various problems that you can
                encounter along with where to find the offending configuration
                items.
                You can use the information in the logs to adjust your
                configuration files and then repeat the
                kernel_configme and
                kernel_configcheck commands until
                they produce no warnings.
            
                For more information on how to use the
                menuconfig tool, see the
                "Using menuconfig"
                section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            
You can experiment with source code changes and create a simple patch without leaving the BitBake environment. To get started, be sure to complete a build at least through the kernel configuration task:
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c kernel_configme -f
                
                Taking this step ensures you have the sources prepared
                and the configuration completed.
                You can find the sources in the build directory within the
                source/ directory, which is a symlink
                (i.e. ${B}/source).
                The source/ directory expands to
                ${WORKDIR}/linux-${PACKAGE_ARCH}-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}-build/source.
                The directory pointed to by the
                source/ symlink is also known as
                ${STAGING_KERNEL_DIR}.
            
                You can edit the sources as you would any other Linux source
                tree.
                However, keep in mind that you will lose changes if you
                trigger the
                do_fetch
                task for the recipe.
                You can avoid triggering this task by not using BitBake to
                run the
                cleanall,
                cleansstate,
                or forced
                fetch
                commands.
                Also, do not modify the recipe itself while working
                with temporary changes or BitBake might run the
                fetch command depending on the
                changes to the recipe.
            
                To test your temporary changes, instruct BitBake to run the
                compile again.
                The -f option forces the command to run
                even though BitBake might think it has already done so:
                
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c compile -f
                
                If the compile fails, you can update the sources and repeat
                the compile.
                Once compilation is successful, you can inspect and test
                the resulting build (i.e. kernel, modules, and so forth) from
                the following build directory:
                
     ${WORKDIR}/linux-${PACKAGE_ARCH}-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}-build
                
                Alternatively, you can run the deploy
                command to place the kernel image in the
                tmp/deploy/images directory:
                
	$ bitbake linux-yocto -c deploy
                And, of course, you can perform the remaining installation and packaging steps by issuing:
	$ bitbake linux-yocto
                
For rapid iterative development, the edit-compile-repeat loop described in this section is preferable to rebuilding the entire recipe because the installation and packaging tasks are very time consuming.
                Once you are satisfied with your source code modifications,
                you can make them permanent by generating patches and
                applying them to the
                SRC_URI
                statement as described in the
                "Applying Patches"
                section.
                If you are not familiar with generating patches, refer to the
                "Creating the Patch"
                section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            
If you cannot work with one of the Linux kernel versions supported by existing linux-yocto recipes, you can still make use of the Yocto Project Linux kernel tooling by working with your own sources. When you use your own sources, you will not be able to leverage the existing kernel Metadata and stabilization work of the linux-yocto sources. However, you will be able to manage your own Metadata in the same format as the linux-yocto sources. Maintaining format compatibility facilitates converging with linux-yocto on a future, mutually-supported kernel version.
            To help you use your own sources, the Yocto Project provides a
            linux-yocto custom recipe
            (linux-yocto-custom.bb) that uses
            kernel.org sources
            and the Yocto Project Linux kernel tools for managing
            kernel Metadata.
            You can find this recipe in the
            poky Git repository of the
            Yocto Project Source Repository
            at:
            
     poky/meta-skeleton/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto-custom.bb
            
Here are some basic steps you can use to work with your own sources:
Copy the linux-yocto-custom.bb
                    recipe to your layer and give it a meaningful name.
                    The name should include the version of the Linux kernel you
                    are using (e.g.
                    linux-yocto-myproject_3.19.bb,
                    where "3.19" is the base version of the Linux kernel
                    with which you would be working).
In the same directory inside your layer,
                    create a matching directory
                    to store your patches and configuration files (e.g.
                    linux-yocto-myproject).
                    
Make sure you have either a
                    defconfig file or configuration
                    fragment files.
                    When you use the linux-yocto-custom.bb
                    recipe, you must specify a configuration.
                    If you do not have a defconfig file,
                    you can run the following:
                    
     $ make defconfig
                    
                    After running the command, copy the resulting
                    .config to the
                    files directory as "defconfig" and
                    then add it to the
                    SRC_URI
                    variable in the recipe.
Running the make defconfig
                    command results in the default configuration for your
                    architecture as defined by your kernel.
                    However, no guarantee exists that this configuration is
                    valid for your use case, or that your board will even boot.
                    This is particularly true for non-x86 architectures.
                    To use non-x86 defconfig files, you
                    need to be more specific and find one that matches your
                    board (i.e. for arm, you look in
                    arch/arm/configs and use the one that
                    is the best starting point for your board).
                    
Edit the following variables in your recipe as appropriate for your project:
SRC_URI:
                            The SRC_URI should specify
                            a Git repository that uses one of the supported Git
                            fetcher protocols (i.e. file,
                            git, http,
                            and so forth).
                            The SRC_URI variable should
                            also specify either a defconfig
                            file or some configuration fragment files.
                            The skeleton recipe provides an example
                            SRC_URI as a syntax reference.
                            
LINUX_VERSION:
                            The Linux kernel version you are using (e.g.
                            "3.19").
LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION:
                            The Linux kernel CONFIG_LOCALVERSION
                            that is compiled into the resulting kernel and visible
                            through the uname command.
                            
SRCREV:
                            The commit ID from which you want to build.
                            
PR:
                            Treat this variable the same as you would in any other
                            recipe.
                            Increment the variable to indicate to the OpenEmbedded
                            build system that the recipe has changed.
                            
PV:
                            The default PV assignment is
                            typically adequate.
                            It combines the LINUX_VERSION
                            with the Source Control Manager (SCM) revision
                            as derived from the
                            SRCPV
                            variable.
                            The combined results are a string with
                            the following form:
                            
     3.19.11+git1+68a635bf8dfb64b02263c1ac80c948647cc76d5f_1+218bd8d2022b9852c60d32f0d770931e3cf343e2
                            
                            While lengthy, the extra verbosity in PV
                            helps ensure you are using the exact
                            sources from which you intend to build.
                            
COMPATIBLE_MACHINE:
                            A list of the machines supported by your new recipe.
                            This variable in the example recipe is set
                            by default to a regular expression that matches
                            only the empty string, "(^$)".
                            This default setting triggers an explicit build
                            failure.
                            You must change it to match a list of the machines
                            that your new recipe supports.
                            For example, to support the qemux86
                            and qemux86-64 machines, use
                            the following form:
                            
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE = "qemux86|qemux86-64"
                            Provide further customizations to your recipe as needed just as you would customize an existing linux-yocto recipe. See the "Modifying an Existing Recipe" section for information.
This section describes steps to build out-of-tree modules on your target and describes how to incorporate out-of-tree modules in the build.
While the traditional Yocto Project development model would be to include kernel modules as part of the normal build process, you might find it useful to build modules on the target. This could be the case if your target system is capable and powerful enough to handle the necessary compilation. Before deciding to build on your target, however, you should consider the benefits of using a proper cross-development environment from your build host.
                If you want to be able to build out-of-tree modules on
                the target, there are some steps you need to take
                on the target that is running your SDK image.
                Briefly, the kernel-dev package
                is installed by default on all
                *.sdk images and the
                kernel-devsrc package is installed
                on many of the *.sdk images.
                However, you need to create some scripts prior to
                attempting to build the out-of-tree modules on the target
                that is running that image.
            
                Prior to attempting to build the out-of-tree modules,
                you need to be on the target as root and you need to
                change to the /usr/src/kernel directory.
                Next, make the scripts:
                
     # cd /usr/src/kernel
     # make scripts
                
                Because all SDK image recipes include
                dev-pkgs, the
                kernel-dev packages will be installed
                as part of the SDK image and the
                kernel-devsrc packages will be installed
                as part of applicable SDK images.
                The SDK uses the scripts when building out-of-tree
                modules.
                Once you have switched to that directory and created the
                scripts, you should be able to build your out-of-tree modules
                on the target.
            
                While it is always preferable to work with sources integrated
                into the Linux kernel sources, if you need an external kernel
                module, the hello-mod.bb recipe is
                available as a template from which you can create your
                own out-of-tree Linux kernel module recipe.
            
                This template recipe is located in the
                poky Git repository of the
                Yocto Project Source Repository
                at:
                
     poky/meta-skeleton/recipes-kernel/hello-mod/hello-mod_0.1.bb
                
                To get started, copy this recipe to your layer and give it a
                meaningful name (e.g. mymodule_1.0.bb).
                In the same directory, create a new directory named
                files where you can store any source files,
                patches, or other files necessary for building
                the module that do not come with the sources.
                Finally, update the recipe as needed for the module.
                Typically, you will need to set the following variables:
                
                Depending on the build system used by the module sources,
                you might need to make some adjustments.
                For example, a typical module Makefile
                looks much like the one provided with the
                hello-mod template:
                
     obj-m := hello.o
     SRC := $(shell pwd)
     all:
         $(MAKE) -C $(KERNEL_SRC) M=$(SRC)
     modules_install:
         $(MAKE) -C $(KERNEL_SRC) M=$(SRC) modules_install
     ...
                
                The important point to note here is the
                KERNEL_SRC
                variable.
                The
                module
                class sets this variable and the
                KERNEL_PATH
                variable to
                ${
                with the necessary Linux kernel build information to build
                modules.
                If your module STAGING_KERNEL_DIR}Makefile uses a different
                variable, you might want to override the
                do_compile()
                step, or create a patch to
                the Makefile to work with the more typical
                KERNEL_SRC or
                KERNEL_PATH variables.
            
After you have prepared your recipe, you will likely want to include the module in your images. To do this, see the documentation for the following variables in the Yocto Project Reference Manual and set one of them appropriately for your machine configuration file:
Modules are often not required for boot and can be excluded from certain build configurations. The following allows for the most flexibility:
     MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-mymodule"
                
                The value is derived by appending the module filename without
                the .ko extension to the string
                "kernel-module-".
            
                Because the variable is
                RRECOMMENDS
                and not a
                RDEPENDS
                variable, the build will not fail if this module is not
                available to include in the image.
            
A common question when working with a kernel is: "What changes have been applied to this tree?" Rather than using "grep" across directories to see what has changed, you can use Git to inspect or search the kernel tree. Using Git is an efficient way to see what has changed in the tree.
Following are a few examples that show how to use Git commands to examine changes. These examples are by no means the only way to see changes.
kernel.org history is blended
                    with Yocto Project kernel changes.
                    You can form ranges by using branch names from the
                    kernel tree as the upper and lower commit markers with
                    the Git commands.
                    You can see the branch names through the web interface
                    to the Yocto Project source repositories at
                    http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi.
                
                To see a full range of the changes, use the
                git whatchanged command and specify a
                commit range for the branch
                (commit..commit).
            
                Here is an example that looks at what has changed in the
                emenlow branch of the
                linux-yocto-3.19 kernel.
                The lower commit range is the commit associated with the
                standard/base branch, while
                the upper commit range is the commit associated with the
                standard/emenlow branch.
                
     $ git whatchanged origin/standard/base..origin/standard/emenlow
                
                To see short, one line summaries of changes use the
                git log command:
                
     $ git log --oneline origin/standard/base..origin/standard/emenlow
                
Use this command to see code differences for the changes:
     $ git diff origin/standard/base..origin/standard/emenlow
                
Use this command to see the commit log messages and the text differences:
     $ git show origin/standard/base..origin/standard/emenlow
                
                Use this command to create individual patches for
                each change.
                Here is an example that that creates patch files for each
                commit and places them in your Documents
                directory:
                
     $ git format-patch -o $HOME/Documents origin/standard/base..origin/standard/emenlow
                
                Tags in the Yocto Project kernel tree divide changes for
                significant features or branches.
                The git show tag
                command shows changes based on a tag.
                Here is an example that shows systemtap
                changes:
                
     $ git show systemtap
                
                You can use the
                git branch --contains tag
                command to show the branches that contain a particular feature.
                This command shows the branches that contain the
                systemtap feature:
                
     $ git branch --contains systemtap
                
            You can add kernel features in the
            recipe-space by
            using the
            KERNEL_FEATURES
            variable and by specifying the feature's .scc
            file path in the
            SRC_URI
            statement.
            When you add features using this method, the OpenEmbedded build
            system checks to be sure the features are present.
            If the features are not present, the build stops.
            Kernel features are the last elements processed for configuring
            and patching the kernel.
            Therefore, adding features in this manner is a way
            to enforce specific features are present and enabled
            without needing to do a full audit of any other layer's additions
            to the SRC_URI statement.
        
            You add a kernel feature by providing the feature as part of the
            KERNEL_FEATURES variable and by providing the
            path to the feature's .scc file, which is
            relative to the root of the kernel Metadata.
            The OpenEmbedded build system searches all forms of kernel
            Metadata on the SRC_URI statement regardless
            of whether the Metadata is in the "kernel-cache", system kernel
            Metadata, or a recipe-space Metadata.
            See the
            "Kernel Metadata Location"
            section for additional information.
        
            When you specify the feature's .scc file
            on the SRC_URI statement, the OpenEmbedded
            build system adds the directory of that
            .scc file along with all its subdirectories
            to the kernel feature search path.
            Because subdirectories are searched, you can reference a single
            .scc file in the
            SRC_URI statement to reference multiple kernel
            features.
        
Consider the following example that adds the "test.scc" feature to the build.
                    Create a .scc file and locate it
                    just as you would any other patch file,
                    .cfg file, or fetcher item
                    you specify in the SRC_URI
                    statement.
                    
                                You must add the directory of the
                                .scc file to the fetcher's
                                search path in the same manner as you would
                                add a .patch file.
                                
                                You can create additional
                                .scc files beneath the
                                directory that contains the file you are
                                adding.
                                All subdirectories are searched during the
                                build as potential feature directories.
                                
                    Continuing with the example, suppose the "test.scc"
                    feature you are adding has a
                    test.scc file in the following
                    directory:
                    
     my_recipe
        |
        +-linux-yocto
           |
           +-test.cfg
           +-test.scc
                    
                    In this example, the linux-yocto
                    directory has both the feature
                    test.scc file and a similarly
                    named configuration fragment file
                    test.cfg.
                    
                    Add the .scc file to the
                    recipe's SRC_URI statement:
                    
     SRC_URI_append = " file://test.scc"
                    The leading space before the path is important as the path is appended to the existing path.
Specify the feature as a kernel feature:
     KERNEL_FEATURES_append = " test.scc"
                    The OpenEmbedded build system processes the kernel feature when it builds the kernel.
test.scc file.
                    
        In addition to supporting configuration fragments and patches, the
        Yocto Project kernel tools also support rich
        Metadata that you can
        use to define complex policies and Board Support Package (BSP) support.
        The purpose of the Metadata and the tools that manage it, known as
        the kern-tools (kern-tools-native_git.bb), is
        to help you manage the complexity of the configuration and sources
        used to support multiple BSPs and Linux kernel types.
    
        The kernel sources in the Yocto Project contain kernel Metadata, which
        is located in the meta branches of the kernel
        source Git repositories.
        This Metadata defines Board Support Packages (BSPs) that
        correspond to definitions in linux-yocto recipes for the same BSPs.
        A BSP consists of an aggregation of kernel policy and enabled
        hardware-specific features.
        The BSP can be influenced from within the linux-yocto recipe.
        
linux-yocto.inc include file is said to be a
            "linux-yocto style" recipe.
        
        Every linux-yocto style recipe must define the
        KMACHINE
        variable.
        This variable is typically set to the same value as the
        MACHINE
        variable, which is used by
        BitBake.
        However, in some cases, the variable might instead refer to the
        underlying platform of the MACHINE.
    
        Multiple BSPs can reuse the same KMACHINE
        name if they are built using the same BSP description.
        The "ep108-zynqmp" and "qemuzynqmp" BSP combination
        in the meta-xilinx
        layer is a good example of two BSPs using the same
        KMACHINE value (i.e. "zynqmp").
        See the BSP Descriptions section
        for more information.
    
        Every linux-yocto style recipe must also indicate the Linux kernel
        source repository branch used to build the Linux kernel.
        The KBRANCH
        variable must be set to indicate the branch.
        
KBRANCH value to define an
            alternate branch typically with a machine override as shown here
            from the meta-emenlow layer:
            
     KBRANCH_emenlow-noemgd = "standard/base"
            
The linux-yocto style recipes can optionally define the following variables:
     KERNEL_FEATURES
     LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE
        
        LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE defines the kernel type to be
        used in assembling the configuration.
        If you do not specify a LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE,
        it defaults to "standard".
        Together with
        KMACHINE,
        LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE defines the search
        arguments used by the kernel tools to find the
        appropriate description within the kernel Metadata with which to
        build out the sources and configuration.
        The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt"
        kernel types.
        See the "Kernel Types" section
        for more information on kernel types.
    
        During the build, the kern-tools search for the BSP description
        file that most closely matches the KMACHINE
        and LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE variables passed in from the
        recipe.
        The tools use the first BSP description it finds that match
        both variables.
        If the tools cannot find a match, they issue a warning such as
        the following:
        
     WARNING: Can't find any BSP hardware or required configuration fragments.
     WARNING: Looked at meta/cfg/broken/emenlow-broken/hdw_frags.txt and
              meta/cfg/broken/emenlow-broken/required_frags.txt in directory:
              meta/cfg/broken/emenlow-broken
        
        In this example, KMACHINE was set to "emenlow-broken"
        and LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE was set to "broken".
    
        The tools first search for the KMACHINE and
        then for the LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE.
        If the tools cannot find a partial match, they will use the
        sources from the KBRANCH and any configuration
        specified in the
        SRC_URI.
    
        You can use the KERNEL_FEATURES variable
        to include features (configuration fragments, patches, or both) that
        are not already included by the KMACHINE and
        LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE variable combination.
        For example, to include a feature specified as
        "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc",
        specify:
        
     KERNEL_FEATURES += "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc"
        
        To include a feature called "cfg/sound.scc" just for the
        qemux86 machine, specify:
        
     KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc"
        
        The value of the entries in KERNEL_FEATURES
        are dependent on their location within the kernel Metadata itself.
        The examples here are taken from the meta
        branch of the linux-yocto-3.19 repository.
        Within that branch, "features" and "cfg" are subdirectories of the
        meta/cfg/kernel-cache directory.
        For more information, see the
        "Kernel Metadata Syntax" section.
        
Kernel Metadata always exists outside of the kernel tree either defined in a kernel recipe (recipe-space) or outside of the recipe. Where you choose to define the Metadata depends on what you want to do and how you intend to work. Regardless of where you define the kernel Metadata, the syntax used applies equally.
If you are unfamiliar with the Linux kernel and only wish to apply a configuration and possibly a couple of patches provided to you by others, the recipe-space method is recommended. This method is also a good approach if you are working with Linux kernel sources you do not control or if you just do not want to maintain a Linux kernel Git repository on your own. For partial information on how you can define kernel Metadata in the recipe-space, see the "Modifying an Existing Recipe" section.
Conversely, if you are actively developing a kernel and are already maintaining a Linux kernel Git repository of your own, you might find it more convenient to work with kernel Metadata kept outside the recipe-space. Working with Metadata in this area can make iterative development of the Linux kernel more efficient outside of the BitBake environment.
            When stored in recipe-space, the kernel Metadata files reside in a
            directory hierarchy below
            FILESEXTRAPATHS.
            For a linux-yocto recipe or for a Linux kernel recipe derived
            by copying and modifying
            oe-core/meta-skeleton/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto-custom.bb
            to a recipe in your layer, FILESEXTRAPATHS
            is typically set to
            ${THISDIR}/${PN}.
            See the "Modifying an Existing Recipe"
            section for more information.
        
Here is an example that shows a trivial tree of kernel Metadata stored in recipe-space within a BSP layer:
     meta-my_bsp_layer/
     `-- recipes-kernel
         `-- linux
             `-- linux-yocto
                 |-- bsp-standard.scc
                 |-- bsp.cfg
                 `-- standard.cfg
            
            When the Metadata is stored in recipe-space, you must take
            steps to ensure BitBake has the necessary information to decide
            what files to fetch and when they need to be fetched again.
            It is only necessary to specify the .scc
            files on the
            SRC_URI.
            BitBake parses them and fetches any files referenced in the
            .scc files by the include,
            patch, or kconf commands.
            Because of this, it is necessary to bump the recipe
            PR
            value when changing the content of files not explicitly listed
            in the SRC_URI.
        
            When stored outside of the recipe-space, the kernel Metadata
            files reside in a separate repository.
            The OpenEmbedded build system adds the Metadata to the build as
            a "ktype=meta" repository through the
            SRC_URI
            variable.
            As an example, consider the following SRC_URI
            statement from the linux-yocto_4.4.bb
            kernel recipe:
            
     SRC_URI = "git://git.yoctoproject.org/linux-yocto-4.4.git;name=machine;branch=${KBRANCH}; \
                git://git.yoctoproject.org/yocto-kernel-cache;type=kmeta;name=meta;branch=yocto-4.4;destsuffix=${KMETA}"
            
            ${KMETA}, in this context, is simply used to
            name the directory into which the Git fetcher places the Metadata.
            This behavior is no different than any multi-repository
            SRC_URI statement used in a recipe.
        
            You can keep kernel Metadata in a "kernel-cache", which is a
            directory containing configuration fragments.
            As with any Metadata kept outside the recipe-space, you simply
            need to use the SRC_URI statement with the
            "type=kmeta" attribute.
            Doing so makes the kernel Metadata available during the
            configuration phase.
        
            If you modify the Metadata, you must not forget to update the
            SRCREV
            statements in the kernel's recipe.
            In particular, you need to update the
            SRCREV_meta variable to match the commit in
            the KMETA branch you wish to use.
            Changing the data in these branches and not updating the
            SRCREV statements to match will cause the
            build to fetch an older commit.
        
        The kernel Metadata consists of three primary types of files:
        scc
        [1]
        description files, configuration fragments, and patches.
        The scc files define variables and include or
        otherwise reference any of the three file types.
        The description files are used to aggregate all types of kernel
        Metadata into
        what ultimately describes the sources and the configuration required
        to build a Linux kernel tailored to a specific machine.
    
        The scc description files are used to define two
        fundamental types of kernel Metadata:
        
Features
Board Support Packages (BSPs)
Features aggregate sources in the form of patches and configuration fragments into a modular reusable unit. You can use features to implement conceptually separate kernel Metadata descriptions such as pure configuration fragments, simple patches, complex features, and kernel types. Kernel types define general kernel features and policy to be reused in the BSPs.
BSPs define hardware-specific features and aggregate them with kernel types to form the final description of what will be assembled and built.
While the kernel Metadata syntax does not enforce any logical separation of configuration fragments, patches, features or kernel types, best practices dictate a logical separation of these types of Metadata. The following Metadata file hierarchy is recommended:
     base/
        bsp/
        cfg/
        features/
        ktypes/
        patches/
        
        The bsp directory contains the
        BSP descriptions.
        The remaining directories all contain "features".
        Separating bsp from the rest of the structure
        aids conceptualizing intended usage.
    
        Use these guidelines to help place your scc
        description files within the structure:
        
If your file contains
                only configuration fragments, place the file in the
                cfg directory.
If your file contains
                only source-code fixes, place the file in the
                patches directory.
If your file encapsulates
                a major feature, often combining sources and configurations,
                place the file in features directory.
                
If your file aggregates
                non-hardware configuration and patches in order to define a
                base kernel policy or major kernel type to be reused across
                multiple BSPs, place the file in ktypes
                directory.
                
        These distinctions can easily become blurred - especially as
        out-of-tree features slowly merge upstream over time.
        Also, remember that how the description files are placed is
        a purely logical organization and has no impact on the functionality
        of the kernel Metadata.
        There is no impact because all of cfg,
        features, patches, and
        ktypes, contain "features" as far as the kernel
        tools are concerned.
    
        Paths used in kernel Metadata files are relative to
        <base>, which is either
        FILESEXTRAPATHS
        if you are creating Metadata in
        recipe-space,
        or meta/cfg/kernel-cache/ if you are creating
        Metadata outside of the recipe-space.
    
            The simplest unit of kernel Metadata is the configuration-only
            feature.
            This feature consists of one or more Linux kernel configuration
            parameters in a configuration fragment file
            (.cfg) and a .scc file
            that describes the fragment.
        
            The Symmetric Multi-Processing (SMP) fragment included in the
            linux-yocto-3.19 Git repository
            consists of the following two files:
            
     cfg/smp.scc:
        define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP"
        define KFEATURE_COMPATIBILITY all
        kconf hardware smp.cfg
     cfg/smp.cfg:
        CONFIG_SMP=y
        CONFIG_SCHED_SMT=y
        # Increase default NR_CPUS from 8 to 64 so that platform with
        # more than 8 processors can be all activated at boot time
        CONFIG_NR_CPUS=64
            You can find information on configuration fragment files in the "Creating Configuration Fragments" section of the Yocto Project Development Manual and in the "Generating Configuration Files" section earlier in this manual.
            KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION
            provides a short description of the fragment.
            Higher level kernel tools use this description.
        
            The kconf command is used to include the
            actual configuration fragment in an .scc
            file, and the "hardware" keyword identifies the fragment as
            being hardware enabling, as opposed to general policy,
            which would use the "non-hardware" keyword.
            The distinction is made for the benefit of the configuration
            validation tools, which warn you if a hardware fragment
            overrides a policy set by a non-hardware fragment.
            
kconf statements, one per fragment.
            
As described in the "Generating Configuration Files" section, you can use the following BitBake command to audit your configuration:
     $ bitbake linux-yocto -c kernel_configcheck -f
            
            Patch descriptions are very similar to configuration fragment
            descriptions, which are described in the previous section.
            However, instead of a .cfg file, these
            descriptions work with source patches.
        
A typical patch includes a description file and the patch itself:
     patches/mypatch.scc:
        patch mypatch.patch
     patches/mypatch.patch:
        typical-patch
            
            You can create the typical .patch
            file using diff -Nurp or
            git format-patch.
        
The description file can include multiple patch statements, one per patch.
            Features are complex kernel Metadata types that consist
            of configuration fragments (kconf), patches
            (patch), and possibly other feature
            description files (include).
        
Here is an example that shows a feature description file:
     features/myfeature.scc
        define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable myfeature"
        patch 0001-myfeature-core.patch
        patch 0002-myfeature-interface.patch
        include cfg/myfeature_dependency.scc
        kconf non-hardware myfeature.cfg
            
            This example shows how the patch and
            kconf commands are used as well as
            how an additional feature description file is included.
        
            Typically, features are less granular than configuration
            fragments and are more likely than configuration fragments
            and patches to be the types of things you want to specify
            in the KERNEL_FEATURES variable of the
            Linux kernel recipe.
            See the "Using Kernel Metadata in a Recipe"
            section earlier in the manual.
        
            A kernel type defines a high-level kernel policy by
            aggregating non-hardware configuration fragments with
            patches you want to use when building a Linux kernels of a
            specific type.
            Syntactically, kernel types are no different than features
            as described in the "Features"
            section.
            The LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE variable in the kernel
            recipe selects the kernel type.
            See the "Using Kernel Metadata in a Recipe"
            section for more information.
        
            As an example, the linux-yocto-3.19
            tree defines three kernel types: "standard",
            "tiny", and "preempt-rt":
            
"standard": Includes the generic Linux kernel policy of the Yocto Project linux-yocto kernel recipes. This policy includes, among other things, which file systems, networking options, core kernel features, and debugging and tracing options are supported.
"preempt-rt":
                    Applies the PREEMPT_RT
                    patches and the configuration options required to
                    build a real-time Linux kernel.
                    This kernel type inherits from the "standard" kernel type.
                    
"tiny": Defines a bare minimum configuration meant to serve as a base for very small Linux kernels. The "tiny" kernel type is independent from the "standard" configuration. Although the "tiny" kernel type does not currently include any source changes, it might in the future.
            The "standard" kernel type is defined by
            standard.scc:
            
     # Include this kernel type fragment to get the standard features and
     # configuration values.
     # Include all standard features
     include standard-nocfg.scc
     kconf non-hardware standard.cfg
     # individual cfg block section
     include cfg/fs/devtmpfs.scc
     include cfg/fs/debugfs.scc
     include cfg/fs/btrfs.scc
     include cfg/fs/ext2.scc
     include cfg/fs/ext3.scc
     include cfg/fs/ext4.scc
     include cfg/net/ipv6.scc
     include cfg/net/ip_nf.scc
     include cfg/net/ip6_nf.scc
     include cfg/net/bridge.scc
            
            As with any .scc file, a
            kernel type definition can aggregate other
            .scc files with
            include commands.
            These definitions can also directly pull in
            configuration fragments and patches with the
            kconf and patch
            commands, respectively.
        
.scc file.
            The Board Support Package (BSP) file can implicitly define
            the kernel type using a define
            KTYPE myktype
            line.
            See the "BSP Descriptions"
            section for more information.
        
            BSP descriptions combine kernel types with hardware-specific
            features.
            The hardware-specific portion is typically defined
            independently, and then aggregated with each supported kernel
            type.
            Consider this simple BSP description that supports the
            mybsp machine:
            
     mybsp.scc:
        define KMACHINE mybsp
        define KTYPE standard
        define KARCH i386
        kconf mybsp.cfg
            
            Every BSP description should define the
            KMACHINE,
            KTYPE,
            and KARCH
            variables.
            These variables allow the OpenEmbedded build system to identify
            the description as meeting the criteria set by the recipe being
            built.
            This simple example supports the "mybsp" machine for the "standard"
            kernel and the "i386" architecture.
        
            Be aware that a hard link between the
            KTYPE variable and a kernel type
            description file does not exist.
            Thus, if you do not have kernel types defined in your kernel
            Metadata, you only need to ensure that the kernel recipe's
            LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE
            variable and the KTYPE variable in the
            BSP description file match.
            
KTYPE in the BSP optional.
            
If you did want to separate your kernel policy from your hardware configuration, you could do so by specifying a kernel type, such as "standard" and including that description file in the BSP description file. See the "Kernel Types" section for more information.
            You might also have multiple hardware configurations that you
            aggregate into a single hardware description file that you
            could include in the BSP description file, rather than referencing
            a single .cfg file.
            Consider the following:
            
     mybsp.scc:
        define KMACHINE mybsp
        define KTYPE standard
        define KARCH i386
        include standard.scc
        include mybsp-hw.scc
            
            In the above example, standard.scc
            aggregates all the configuration fragments, patches, and
            features that make up your standard kernel policy whereas
            mybsp-hw.scc
            aggregates all those necessary
            to support the hardware available on the
            mybsp machine.
            For information on how to break a complete
            .config file into the various
            configuration fragments, see the
            "Generating Configuration Files"
            section.
        
            Many real-world examples are more complex.
            Like any other .scc file, BSP
            descriptions can aggregate features.
            Consider the Minnow BSP definition from the
            linux-yocto-3.19
            Git repository:
            
     minnow.scc:
        include cfg/x86.scc
        include features/eg20t/eg20t.scc
        include cfg/dmaengine.scc
        include features/power/intel.scc
        include cfg/efi.scc
        include features/usb/ehci-hcd.scc
        include features/usb/ohci-hcd.scc
        include features/usb/usb-gadgets.scc
        include features/usb/touchscreen-composite.scc
        include cfg/timer/hpet.scc
        include cfg/timer/rtc.scc
        include features/leds/leds.scc
        include features/spi/spidev.scc
        include features/i2c/i2cdev.scc
        # Earlyprintk and port debug requires 8250
        kconf hardware cfg/8250.cfg
        kconf hardware minnow.cfg
        kconf hardware minnow-dev.cfg
            
            The minnow.scc description file includes
            a hardware configuration fragment
            (minnow.cfg) specific to the Minnow
            BSP as well as several more general configuration
            fragments and features enabling hardware found on the
            machine.
            This description file is then included in each of the three
            "minnow" description files for the supported kernel types
            (i.e. "standard", "preempt-rt", and "tiny").
            Consider the "minnow" description for the "standard" kernel
            type:
            
     minnow-standard.scc:
        define KMACHINE minnow
        define KTYPE standard
        define KARCH i386
        include ktypes/standard
        include minnow.scc
        # Extra minnow configs above the minimal defined in minnow.scc
        include cfg/efi-ext.scc
        include features/media/media-all.scc
        include features/sound/snd_hda_intel.scc
        # The following should really be in standard.scc
        # USB live-image support
        include cfg/usb-mass-storage.scc
        include cfg/boot-live.scc
        # Basic profiling
        include features/latencytop/latencytop.scc
        include features/profiling/profiling.scc
        # Requested drivers that don't have an existing scc
        kconf hardware minnow-drivers-extra.cfg
            
            The include command midway through the file
            includes the minnow.scc description that
            defines all hardware enablements for the BSP that is common to all
            kernel types.
            Using this command significantly reduces duplication.
        
Now consider the "minnow" description for the "tiny" kernel type:
     minnow-tiny.scc:
        define KMACHINE minnow
        define KTYPE tiny
        define KARCH i386
        include ktypes/tiny
        include minnow.scc
            As you might expect, the "tiny" description includes quite a bit less. In fact, it includes only the minimal policy defined by the "tiny" kernel type and the hardware-specific configuration required for booting the machine along with the most basic functionality of the system as defined in the base "minnow" description file.
            Notice again the three critical variables:
            KMACHINE, KTYPE,
            and KARCH.
            Of these variables, only the KTYPE has changed.
            It is now set to "tiny".
        
        Many recipes based on the linux-yocto-custom.bb
        recipe use Linux kernel sources that have only a single
        branch - "master".
        This type of repository structure is fine for linear development
        supporting a single machine and architecture.
        However, if you work with multiple boards and architectures,
        a kernel source repository with multiple branches is more
        efficient.
        For example, suppose you need a series of patches for one board to boot.
        Sometimes, these patches are works-in-progress or fundamentally wrong,
        yet they are still necessary for specific boards.
        In these situations, you most likely do not want to include these
        patches in every kernel you build (i.e. have the patches as part of
        the lone "master" branch).
        It is situations like these that give rise to multiple branches used
        within a Linux kernel sources Git repository.
    
Repository organization strategies exist that maximize source reuse, remove redundancy, and logically order your changes. This section presents strategies for the following cases:
Encapsulating patches in a feature description and only including the patches in the BSP descriptions of the applicable boards.
Creating a machine branch in your kernel source repository and applying the patches on that branch only.
Creating a feature branch in your kernel source repository and merging that branch into your BSP when needed.
The approach you take is entirely up to you and depends on what works best for your development model.
if you are reusing patches from an external tree and are not working on the patches, you might find the encapsulated feature to be appropriate. Given this scenario, you do not need to create any branches in the source repository. Rather, you just take the static patches you need and encapsulate them within a feature description. Once you have the feature description, you simply include that into the BSP description as described in the "BSP Descriptions" section.
You can find information on how to create patches and BSP descriptions in the "Patches" and "BSP Descriptions" sections.
When you have multiple machines and architectures to support, or you are actively working on board support, it is more efficient to create branches in the repository based on individual machines. Having machine branches allows common source to remain in the "master" branch with any features specific to a machine stored in the appropriate machine branch. This organization method frees you from continually reintegrating your patches into a feature.
            Once you have a new branch, you can set up your kernel Metadata
            to use the branch a couple different ways.
            In the recipe, you can specify the new branch as the
            KBRANCH to use for the board as
            follows:
            
     KBRANCH = "mynewbranch"
            
            Another method is to use the branch command
            in the BSP description:
            
     mybsp.scc:
        define KMACHINE mybsp
        define KTYPE standard
        define KARCH i386
        include standard.scc
        branch mynewbranch
        include mybsp-hw.scc
            
If you find yourself with numerous branches, you might consider using a hierarchical branching system similar to what the linux-yocto Linux kernel repositories use:
     common/kernel_type/machine
            
            If you had two kernel types, "standard" and "small" for
            instance, three machines, and common
            as mydir, the branches in your
            Git repository might look like this:
            
     mydir/base
     mydir/standard/base
     mydir/standard/machine_a
     mydir/standard/machine_b
     mydir/standard/machine_c
     mydir/small/base
     mydir/small/machine_a
            
            This organization can help clarify the branch relationships.
            In this case, mydir/standard/machine_a
            includes everything in mydir/base and
            mydir/standard/base.
            The "standard" and "small" branches add sources specific to those
            kernel types that for whatever reason are not appropriate for the
            other branches.
            
mydir/standard and
                mydir/standard/machine_a because it
                would have to create a file and a directory named "standard".
            
            When you are actively developing new features, it can be more
            efficient to work with that feature as a branch, rather than
            as a set of patches that have to be regularly updated.
            The Yocto Project Linux kernel tools provide for this with
            the git merge command.
        
            To merge a feature branch into a BSP, insert the
            git merge command after any
            branch commands:
            
     mybsp.scc:
        define KMACHINE mybsp
        define KTYPE standard
        define KARCH i386
        include standard.scc
        branch mynewbranch
        git merge myfeature
        include mybsp-hw.scc
            
        This section provides a brief reference for the commands you can use
        within an SCC description file (.scc):
        
branch [ref]:
                Creates a new branch relative to the current branch
                (typically ${KTYPE}) using
                the currently checked-out branch, or "ref" if specified.
                
define:
                Defines variables, such as KMACHINE,
                KTYPE, KARCH,
                and KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION.
include SCC_FILE:
                Includes an SCC file in the current file.
                The file is parsed as if you had inserted it inline.
                
kconf [hardware|non-hardware] CFG_FILE:
                Queues a configuration fragment for merging into the final
                Linux .config file.
git merge GIT_BRANCH:
                Merges the feature branch into the current branch.
                
patch PATCH_FILE:
                Applies the patch to the current Git branch.
[1] 
                scc stands for Series Configuration
                Control, but the naming has less significance in the
                current implementation of the tooling than it had in the
                past.
                Consider scc files to be description files.
            
            Kernels available through the Yocto Project, like other kernels, are based off the Linux
            kernel releases from http://www.kernel.org.
            At the beginning of a major development cycle, the Yocto Project team
            chooses its kernel based on factors such as release timing, the anticipated release
            timing of final upstream kernel.org versions, and Yocto Project
            feature requirements.
            Typically, the kernel chosen is in the
            final stages of development by the community.
            In other words, the kernel is in the release
            candidate or "rc" phase and not yet a final release.
            But, by being in the final stages of external development, the team knows that the
            kernel.org final release will clearly be within the early stages of
            the Yocto Project development window.
        
This balance allows the team to deliver the most up-to-date kernel possible, while still ensuring that the team has a stable official release for the baseline Linux kernel version.
            The ultimate source for kernels available through the Yocto Project are released kernels
            from kernel.org.
            In addition to a foundational kernel from kernel.org, the
            kernels available contain a mix of important new mainline
            developments, non-mainline developments (when there is no alternative),
            Board Support Package (BSP) developments,
            and custom features.
            These additions result in a commercially released Yocto Project Linux kernel that caters
            to specific embedded designer needs for targeted hardware.
        
Once a kernel is officially released, the Yocto Project team goes into their next development cycle, or upward revision (uprev) cycle, while still continuing maintenance on the released kernel. It is important to note that the most sustainable and stable way to include feature development upstream is through a kernel uprev process. Back-porting hundreds of individual fixes and minor features from various kernel versions is not sustainable and can easily compromise quality.
            During the uprev cycle, the Yocto Project team uses an ongoing analysis of
            kernel development, BSP support, and release timing to select the best
            possible kernel.org version.
            The team continually monitors community kernel
            development to look for significant features of interest.
            The team does consider back-porting large features if they have a significant advantage.
            User or community demand can also trigger a back-port or creation of new
            functionality in the Yocto Project baseline kernel during the uprev cycle.
        
Generally speaking, every new kernel both adds features and introduces new bugs. These consequences are the basic properties of upstream kernel development and are managed by the Yocto Project team's kernel strategy. It is the Yocto Project team's policy to not back-port minor features to the released kernel. They only consider back-porting significant technological jumps - and, that is done after a complete gap analysis. The reason for this policy is that back-porting any small to medium sized change from an evolving kernel can easily create mismatches, incompatibilities and very subtle errors.
These policies result in both a stable and a cutting edge kernel that mixes forward ports of existing features and significant and critical new functionality. Forward porting functionality in the kernels available through the Yocto Project kernel can be thought of as a "micro uprev." The many “micro uprevs” produce a kernel version with a mix of important new mainline, non-mainline, BSP developments and feature integrations. This kernel gives insight into new features and allows focused amounts of testing to be done on the kernel, which prevents surprises when selecting the next major uprev. The quality of these cutting edge kernels is evolving and the kernels are used in leading edge feature and BSP development.
This section describes the architecture of the kernels available through the Yocto Project and provides information on the mechanisms used to achieve that architecture.
                As mentioned earlier, a key goal of the Yocto Project is to present the
                developer with
                a kernel that has a clear and continuous history that is visible to the user.
                The architecture and mechanisms used achieve that goal in a manner similar to the
                upstream kernel.org.
            
You can think of a Yocto Project kernel as consisting of a baseline Linux kernel with added features logically structured on top of the baseline. The features are tagged and organized by way of a branching strategy implemented by the source code manager (SCM) Git. For information on Git as applied to the Yocto Project, see the "Git" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
The result is that the user has the ability to see the added features and the commits that make up those features. In addition to being able to see added features, the user can also view the history of what made up the baseline kernel.
The following illustration shows the conceptual Yocto Project kernel.
|  | 
In the illustration, the "Kernel.org Branch Point" marks the specific spot (or release) from which the Yocto Project kernel is created. From this point "up" in the tree, features and differences are organized and tagged.
The "Yocto Project Baseline Kernel" contains functionality that is common to every kernel type and BSP that is organized further up the tree. Placing these common features in the tree this way means features do not have to be duplicated along individual branches of the structure.
From the Yocto Project Baseline Kernel, branch points represent specific functionality for individual BSPs as well as real-time kernels. The illustration represents this through three BSP-specific branches and a real-time kernel branch. Each branch represents some unique functionality for the BSP or a real-time kernel.
In this example structure, the real-time kernel branch has common features for all real-time kernels and contains more branches for individual BSP-specific real-time kernels. The illustration shows three branches as an example. Each branch points the way to specific, unique features for a respective real-time kernel as they apply to a given BSP.
The resulting tree structure presents a clear path of markers (or branches) to the developer that, for all practical purposes, is the kernel needed for any given set of requirements.
The Yocto Project team creates kernel branches at points where functionality is no longer shared and thus, needs to be isolated. For example, board-specific incompatibilities would require different functionality and would require a branch to separate the features. Likewise, for specific kernel features, the same branching strategy is used.
This branching strategy results in a tree that has features organized to be specific for particular functionality, single kernel types, or a subset of kernel types. This strategy also results in not having to store the same feature twice internally in the tree. Rather, the kernel team stores the unique differences required to apply the feature onto the kernel type in question.
BSP-specific code additions are handled in a similar manner to kernel-specific additions. Some BSPs only make sense given certain kernel types. So, for these types, the team creates branches off the end of that kernel type for all of the BSPs that are supported on that kernel type. From the perspective of the tools that create the BSP branch, the BSP is really no different than a feature. Consequently, the same branching strategy applies to BSPs as it does to features. So again, rather than store the BSP twice, the team only stores the unique differences for the BSP across the supported multiple kernels.
                While this strategy can result in a tree with a significant number of branches, it is
                important to realize that from the developer's point of view, there is a linear
                path that travels from the baseline kernel.org, through a select
                group of features and ends with their BSP-specific commits.
                In other words, the divisions of the kernel are transparent and are not relevant
                to the developer on a day-to-day basis.
                From the developer's perspective, this path is the "master" branch.
                The developer does not need to be aware of the existence of any other branches at all.
                Of course, there is value in the existence of these branches
                in the tree, should a person decide to explore them.
                For example, a comparison between two BSPs at either the commit level or at the line-by-line
                code diff level is now a trivial operation.
            
Working with the kernel as a structured tree follows recognized community best practices. In particular, the kernel as shipped with the product, should be considered an "upstream source" and viewed as a series of historical and documented modifications (commits). These modifications represent the development and stabilization done by the Yocto Project kernel development team.
Because commits only change at significant release points in the product life cycle, developers can work on a branch created from the last relevant commit in the shipped Yocto Project kernel. As mentioned previously, the structure is transparent to the developer because the kernel tree is left in this state after cloning and building the kernel.
                The Source Code Manager (SCM) is Git.
                This SCM is the obvious mechanism for meeting the previously mentioned goals.
                Not only is it the SCM for kernel.org but,
                Git continues to grow in popularity and supports many different work flows,
                front-ends and management techniques.
            
You can find documentation on Git at http://git-scm.com/documentation. You can also get an introduction to Git as it applies to the Yocto Project in the "Git" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual. These referenced sections overview Git and describe a minimal set of commands that allows you to be functional using Git.
This section describes construction of the Yocto Project kernel source repositories as accomplished by the Yocto Project team to create kernel repositories. These kernel repositories are found under the heading "Yocto Linux Kernel" at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi and can be shipped as part of a Yocto Project release. The team creates these repositories by compiling and executing the set of feature descriptions for every BSP and feature in the product. Those feature descriptions list all necessary patches, configuration, branching, tagging and feature divisions found in a kernel. Thus, the Yocto Project kernel repository (or tree) is built.
The existence of this tree allows you to access and clone a particular Yocto Project kernel repository and use it to build images based on their configurations and features.
            You can find the files used to describe all the valid features and BSPs
            in the Yocto Project kernel in any clone of the Yocto Project kernel source repository
            Git tree.
            For example, the following command clones the Yocto Project baseline kernel that
            branched off of linux.org version 3.19:
            
     $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/linux-yocto-3.19
            For another example of how to set up a local Git repository of the Yocto Project kernel files, see the "Yocto Project Kernel" bulleted item in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            Once you have cloned the kernel Git repository on your local machine, you can
            switch to the meta branch within the repository.
            Here is an example that assumes the local Git repository for the kernel is in
            a top-level directory named linux-yocto-3.19:
            
     $ cd linux-yocto-3.19
     $ git checkout -b meta origin/meta
            
            Once you have checked out and switched to the meta branch,
            you can see a snapshot of all the kernel configuration and feature descriptions that are
            used to build that particular kernel repository.
            These descriptions are in the form of .scc files.
        
You should realize, however, that browsing your local kernel repository for feature descriptions and patches is not an effective way to determine what is in a particular kernel branch. Instead, you should use Git directly to discover the changes in a branch. Using Git is an efficient and flexible way to inspect changes to the kernel.
The following steps describe what happens when the Yocto Project Team constructs the Yocto Project kernel source Git repository (or tree) found at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi given the introduction of a new top-level kernel feature or BSP. These are the actions that effectively create the tree that includes the new feature, patch or BSP:
A top-level kernel feature is passed to the kernel build subsystem. Normally, this feature is a BSP for a particular kernel type.
The file that describes the top-level feature is located by searching these system directories:
The in-tree kernel-cache directories, which are located
                            in meta/cfg/kernel-cache
Areas pointed to by SRC_URI statements
                            found in recipes
                    For a typical build, the target of the search is a
                    feature description in an .scc file
                    whose name follows this format:
                    
     bsp_name-kernel_type.scc
                    
Once located, the feature description is either compiled into a simple script of actions, or into an existing equivalent script that is already part of the shipped kernel.
Extra features are appended to the top-level feature description.
                    These features can come from the
                    KERNEL_FEATURES
                    variable in recipes.
Each extra feature is located, compiled and appended to the script as described in step three.
The script is executed to produce a series of meta-*
                    directories.
                    These directories are descriptions of all the branches, tags, patches and configurations that
                    need to be applied to the base Git repository to completely create the
                    source (build) branch for the new BSP or feature.
The base repository is cloned, and the actions
                    listed in the meta-* directories are applied to the
                    tree.
The Git repository is left with the desired branch checked out and any required branching, patching and tagging has been performed.
The kernel tree is now ready for developer consumption to be locally cloned, configured, and built into a Yocto Project kernel specific to some target hardware.
The generated meta-* directories add to the kernel
                as shipped with the Yocto Project release.
                Any add-ons and configuration data are applied to the end of an existing branch.
                The full repository generation that is found in the
                official Yocto Project kernel repositories at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi
                is the combination of all supported boards and configurations.
The technique the Yocto Project team uses is flexible and allows for seamless blending of an immutable history with additional patches specific to a deployment. Any additions to the kernel become an integrated part of the branches.
Once a local Git repository of the Yocto Project kernel exists on a development system, you can consider the compilation phase of kernel development - building a kernel image. Some prerequisites exist that are validated by the build process before compilation starts:
The
                SRC_URI points
                to the kernel Git repository.
A BSP build branch exists. This branch has the following form:
     kernel_type/bsp_name
                The OpenEmbedded build system makes sure these conditions exist before attempting compilation. Other means, however, do exist, such as as bootstrapping a BSP.
            Before building a kernel, the build process verifies the tree
            and configures the kernel by processing all of the
            configuration "fragments" specified by feature descriptions in the .scc
            files.
            As the features are compiled, associated kernel configuration fragments are noted
            and recorded in the meta-* series of directories in their compilation order.
            The fragments are migrated, pre-processed and passed to the Linux Kernel
            Configuration subsystem (lkc) as raw input in the form
            of a .config file.
            The lkc uses its own internal dependency constraints to do the final
            processing of that information and generates the final .config file
            that is used during compilation.
        
Using the board's architecture and other relevant values from the board's template, kernel compilation is started and a kernel image is produced.
            The other thing that you notice once you configure a kernel is that
            the build process generates a build tree that is separate from your kernel's local Git
            source repository tree.
            This build tree has a name that uses the following form, where
            ${MACHINE} is the metadata name of the machine (BSP) and "kernel_type" is one
            of the Yocto Project supported kernel types (e.g. "standard"):
        
     linux-${MACHINE}-kernel_type-build
        
            The existing support in the kernel.org tree achieves this
            default functionality.
        
            This behavior means that all the generated files for a particular machine or BSP are now in
            the build tree directory.
            The files include the final .config file, all the .o
            files, the .a files, and so forth.
            Since each machine or BSP has its own separate
            Build Directory
            in its own separate branch
            of the Git repository, you can easily switch between different builds.
        
|  | 
Yocto bundles a number of tracing and profiling tools - this 'HOWTO' describes their basic usage and shows by example how to make use of them to examine application and system behavior.
The tools presented are for the most part completely open-ended and have quite good and/or extensive documentation of their own which can be used to solve just about any problem you might come across in Linux. Each section that describes a particular tool has links to that tool's documentation and website.
The purpose of this 'HOWTO' is to present a set of common and generally useful tracing and profiling idioms along with their application (as appropriate) to each tool, in the context of a general-purpose 'drill-down' methodology that can be applied to solving a large number (90%?) of problems. For help with more advanced usages and problems, please see the documentation and/or websites listed for each tool.
The final section of this 'HOWTO' is a collection of real-world examples which we'll be continually adding to as we solve more problems using the tools - feel free to add your own examples to the list!
Most of the tools are available only in 'sdk' images or in images built after adding 'tools-profile' to your local.conf. So, in order to be able to access all of the tools described here, please first build and boot an 'sdk' image e.g.
     $ bitbake core-image-sato-sdk
            or alternatively by adding 'tools-profile' to the EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES line in your local.conf:
      EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks tools-profile"
            If you use the 'tools-profile' method, you don't need to build an sdk image - the tracing and profiling tools will be included in non-sdk images as well e.g.:
     $ bitbake core-image-sato
            
By default, the Yocto build system strips symbols from the binaries it packages, which makes it difficult to use some of the tools.
You can prevent that by setting the
                INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP
                variable to "1" in your
                local.conf when you build the image:
                
     INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP = "1"
            The above setting will noticeably increase the size of your image.
If you've already built a stripped image, you can generate debug packages (xxx-dbg) which you can manually install as needed.
To generate debug info for packages, you can add dbg-pkgs to EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES in local.conf. For example:
     EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks tools-profile dbg-pkgs"
            Additionally, in order to generate the right type of debuginfo, we also need to add the following to local.conf:
     PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE = 'debug-file-directory'
            
It may seem surprising to see a section covering an 'overall architecture' for what seems to be a random collection of tracing tools that together make up the Linux tracing and profiling space. The fact is, however, that in recent years this seemingly disparate set of tools has started to converge on a 'core' set of underlying mechanisms:
This chapter presents basic usage examples for each of the tracing tools.
The 'perf' tool is the profiling and tracing tool that comes bundled with the Linux kernel.
Don't let the fact that it's part of the kernel fool you into thinking that it's only for tracing and profiling the kernel - you can indeed use it to trace and profile just the kernel, but you can also use it to profile specific applications separately (with or without kernel context), and you can also use it to trace and profile the kernel and all applications on the system simultaneously to gain a system-wide view of what's going on.
In many ways, perf aims to be a superset of all the tracing and profiling tools available in Linux today, including all the other tools covered in this HOWTO. The past couple of years have seen perf subsume a lot of the functionality of those other tools and, at the same time, those other tools have removed large portions of their previous functionality and replaced it with calls to the equivalent functionality now implemented by the perf subsystem. Extrapolation suggests that at some point those other tools will simply become completely redundant and go away; until then, we'll cover those other tools in these pages and in many cases show how the same things can be accomplished in perf and the other tools when it seems useful to do so.
The coverage below details some of the most common ways you'll likely want to apply the tool; full documentation can be found either within the tool itself or in the man pages at perf(1).
For this section, we'll assume you've already performed the basic setup outlined in the General Setup section.
            In particular, you'll get the most mileage out of perf if you
            profile an image built with the following in your
            local.conf file:
            
     INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP = "1"
            
perf runs on the target system for the most part. You can archive profile data and copy it to the host for analysis, but for the rest of this document we assume you've ssh'ed to the host and will be running the perf commands on the target.
The perf tool is pretty much self-documenting. To remind yourself of the available commands, simply type 'perf', which will show you basic usage along with the available perf subcommands:
     root@crownbay:~# perf
     usage: perf [--version] [--help] COMMAND [ARGS]
     The most commonly used perf commands are:
       annotate        Read perf.data (created by perf record) and display annotated code
       archive         Create archive with object files with build-ids found in perf.data file
       bench           General framework for benchmark suites
       buildid-cache   Manage build-id cache.
       buildid-list    List the buildids in a perf.data file
       diff            Read two perf.data files and display the differential profile
       evlist          List the event names in a perf.data file
       inject          Filter to augment the events stream with additional information
       kmem            Tool to trace/measure kernel memory(slab) properties
       kvm             Tool to trace/measure kvm guest os
       list            List all symbolic event types
       lock            Analyze lock events
       probe           Define new dynamic tracepoints
       record          Run a command and record its profile into perf.data
       report          Read perf.data (created by perf record) and display the profile
       sched           Tool to trace/measure scheduler properties (latencies)
       script          Read perf.data (created by perf record) and display trace output
       stat            Run a command and gather performance counter statistics
       test            Runs sanity tests.
       timechart       Tool to visualize total system behavior during a workload
       top             System profiling tool.
     See 'perf help COMMAND' for more information on a specific command.
            
As a simple test case, we'll profile the 'wget' of a fairly large file, which is a minimally interesting case because it has both file and network I/O aspects, and at least in the case of standard Yocto images, it's implemented as part of busybox, so the methods we use to analyze it can be used in a very similar way to the whole host of supported busybox applets in Yocto.
     root@crownbay:~# rm linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2; \
     wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
                The quickest and easiest way to get some basic overall data about what's going on for a particular workload is to profile it using 'perf stat'. 'perf stat' basically profiles using a few default counters and displays the summed counts at the end of the run:
     root@crownbay:~# perf stat wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |***************************************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
     Performance counter stats for 'wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2':
           4597.223902 task-clock                #    0.077 CPUs utilized
                 23568 context-switches          #    0.005 M/sec
                    68 CPU-migrations            #    0.015 K/sec
                   241 page-faults               #    0.052 K/sec
            3045817293 cycles                    #    0.663 GHz
       <not supported> stalled-cycles-frontend
       <not supported> stalled-cycles-backend
             858909167 instructions              #    0.28  insns per cycle
             165441165 branches                  #   35.987 M/sec
              19550329 branch-misses             #   11.82% of all branches
          59.836627620 seconds time elapsed
                Many times such a simple-minded test doesn't yield much of interest, but sometimes it does (see Real-world Yocto bug (slow loop-mounted write speed)).
Also, note that 'perf stat' isn't restricted to a fixed set of counters - basically any event listed in the output of 'perf list' can be tallied by 'perf stat'. For example, suppose we wanted to see a summary of all the events related to kernel memory allocation/freeing along with cache hits and misses:
     root@crownbay:~# perf stat -e kmem:* -e cache-references -e cache-misses wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |***************************************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
     Performance counter stats for 'wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2':
                  5566 kmem:kmalloc
                125517 kmem:kmem_cache_alloc
                     0 kmem:kmalloc_node
                     0 kmem:kmem_cache_alloc_node
                 34401 kmem:kfree
                 69920 kmem:kmem_cache_free
                   133 kmem:mm_page_free
                    41 kmem:mm_page_free_batched
                 11502 kmem:mm_page_alloc
                 11375 kmem:mm_page_alloc_zone_locked
                     0 kmem:mm_page_pcpu_drain
                     0 kmem:mm_page_alloc_extfrag
              66848602 cache-references
               2917740 cache-misses              #    4.365 % of all cache refs
          44.831023415 seconds time elapsed
                So 'perf stat' gives us a nice easy way to get a quick overview of what might be happening for a set of events, but normally we'd need a little more detail in order to understand what's going on in a way that we can act on in a useful way.
To dive down into a next level of detail, we can use 'perf record'/'perf report' which will collect profiling data and present it to use using an interactive text-based UI (or simply as text if we specify --stdio to 'perf report').
As our first attempt at profiling this workload, we'll simply run 'perf record', handing it the workload we want to profile (everything after 'perf record' and any perf options we hand it - here none - will be executed in a new shell). perf collects samples until the process exits and records them in a file named 'perf.data' in the current working directory.
     root@crownbay:~# perf record wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |************************************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
     [ perf record: Woken up 1 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 0.176 MB perf.data (~7700 samples) ]
            To see the results in a 'text-based UI' (tui), simply run 'perf report', which will read the perf.data file in the current working directory and display the results in an interactive UI:
     root@crownbay:~# perf report
                
|  | 
The above screenshot displays a 'flat' profile, one entry for each 'bucket' corresponding to the functions that were profiled during the profiling run, ordered from the most popular to the least (perf has options to sort in various orders and keys as well as display entries only above a certain threshold and so on - see the perf documentation for details). Note that this includes both userspace functions (entries containing a [.]) and kernel functions accounted to the process (entries containing a [k]). (perf has command-line modifiers that can be used to restrict the profiling to kernel or userspace, among others).
Notice also that the above report shows an entry for 'busybox', which is the executable that implements 'wget' in Yocto, but that instead of a useful function name in that entry, it displays a not-so-friendly hex value instead. The steps below will show how to fix that problem.
Before we do that, however, let's try running a different profile, one which shows something a little more interesting. The only difference between the new profile and the previous one is that we'll add the -g option, which will record not just the address of a sampled function, but the entire callchain to the sampled function as well:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |************************************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
     [ perf record: Woken up 3 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 0.652 MB perf.data (~28476 samples) ]
     root@crownbay:~# perf report
                
|  | 
Using the callgraph view, we can actually see not only which functions took the most time, but we can also see a summary of how those functions were called and learn something about how the program interacts with the kernel in the process.
Notice that each entry in the above screenshot now contains a '+' on the left-hand side. This means that we can expand the entry and drill down into the callchains that feed into that entry. Pressing 'enter' on any one of them will expand the callchain (you can also press 'E' to expand them all at the same time or 'C' to collapse them all).
In the screenshot above, we've toggled the __copy_to_user_ll() entry and several subnodes all the way down. This lets us see which callchains contributed to the profiled __copy_to_user_ll() function which contributed 1.77% to the total profile.
As a bit of background explanation for these callchains, think about what happens at a high level when you run wget to get a file out on the network. Basically what happens is that the data comes into the kernel via the network connection (socket) and is passed to the userspace program 'wget' (which is actually a part of busybox, but that's not important for now), which takes the buffers the kernel passes to it and writes it to a disk file to save it.
The part of this process that we're looking at in the above call stacks is the part where the kernel passes the data it's read from the socket down to wget i.e. a copy-to-user.
Notice also that here there's also a case where the hex value is displayed in the callstack, here in the expanded sys_clock_gettime() function. Later we'll see it resolve to a userspace function call in busybox.
|  | 
The above screenshot shows the other half of the journey for the data - from the wget program's userspace buffers to disk. To get the buffers to disk, the wget program issues a write(2), which does a copy-from-user to the kernel, which then takes care via some circuitous path (probably also present somewhere in the profile data), to get it safely to disk.
Now that we've seen the basic layout of the profile data and the basics of how to extract useful information out of it, let's get back to the task at hand and see if we can get some basic idea about where the time is spent in the program we're profiling, wget. Remember that wget is actually implemented as an applet in busybox, so while the process name is 'wget', the executable we're actually interested in is busybox. So let's expand the first entry containing busybox:
|  | 
Again, before we expanded we saw that the function was labeled with a hex value instead of a symbol as with most of the kernel entries. Expanding the busybox entry doesn't make it any better.
The problem is that perf can't find the symbol information for the busybox binary, which is actually stripped out by the Yocto build system.
                One way around that is to put the following in your
                local.conf file when you build the image:
                
     INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP = "1"
                However, we already have an image with the binaries stripped, so what can we do to get perf to resolve the symbols? Basically we need to install the debuginfo for the busybox package.
To generate the debug info for the packages in the image, we can add dbg-pkgs to EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES in local.conf. For example:
     EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES = "debug-tweaks tools-profile dbg-pkgs"
                Additionally, in order to generate the type of debuginfo that perf understands, we also need to add the following to local.conf:
     PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE = 'debug-file-directory'
                Once we've done that, we can install the debuginfo for busybox. The debug packages once built can be found in build/tmp/deploy/rpm/* on the host system. Find the busybox-dbg-...rpm file and copy it to the target. For example:
     [trz@empanada core2]$ scp /home/trz/yocto/crownbay-tracing-dbg/build/tmp/deploy/rpm/core2_32/busybox-dbg-1.20.2-r2.core2_32.rpm root@192.168.1.31:
     root@192.168.1.31's password:
     busybox-dbg-1.20.2-r2.core2_32.rpm                     100% 1826KB   1.8MB/s   00:01
                Now install the debug rpm on the target:
     root@crownbay:~# rpm -i busybox-dbg-1.20.2-r2.core2_32.rpm
                Now that the debuginfo is installed, we see that the busybox entries now display their functions symbolically:
|  | 
If we expand one of the entries and press 'enter' on a leaf node, we're presented with a menu of actions we can take to get more information related to that entry:
|  | 
One of these actions allows us to show a view that displays a busybox-centric view of the profiled functions (in this case we've also expanded all the nodes using the 'E' key):
|  | 
Finally, we can see that now that the busybox debuginfo is installed, the previously unresolved symbol in the sys_clock_gettime() entry mentioned previously is now resolved, and shows that the sys_clock_gettime system call that was the source of 6.75% of the copy-to-user overhead was initiated by the handle_input() busybox function:
|  | 
At the lowest level of detail, we can dive down to the assembly level and see which instructions caused the most overhead in a function. Pressing 'enter' on the 'udhcpc_main' function, we're again presented with a menu:
|  | 
Selecting 'Annotate udhcpc_main', we get a detailed listing of percentages by instruction for the udhcpc_main function. From the display, we can see that over 50% of the time spent in this function is taken up by a couple tests and the move of a constant (1) to a register:
|  | 
As a segue into tracing, let's try another profile using a different counter, something other than the default 'cycles'.
The tracing and profiling infrastructure in Linux has become unified in a way that allows us to use the same tool with a completely different set of counters, not just the standard hardware counters that traditional tools have had to restrict themselves to (of course the traditional tools can also make use of the expanded possibilities now available to them, and in some cases have, as mentioned previously).
We can get a list of the available events that can be used to profile a workload via 'perf list':
     root@crownbay:~# perf list
     List of pre-defined events (to be used in -e):
      cpu-cycles OR cycles                               [Hardware event]
      stalled-cycles-frontend OR idle-cycles-frontend    [Hardware event]
      stalled-cycles-backend OR idle-cycles-backend      [Hardware event]
      instructions                                       [Hardware event]
      cache-references                                   [Hardware event]
      cache-misses                                       [Hardware event]
      branch-instructions OR branches                    [Hardware event]
      branch-misses                                      [Hardware event]
      bus-cycles                                         [Hardware event]
      ref-cycles                                         [Hardware event]
      cpu-clock                                          [Software event]
      task-clock                                         [Software event]
      page-faults OR faults                              [Software event]
      minor-faults                                       [Software event]
      major-faults                                       [Software event]
      context-switches OR cs                             [Software event]
      cpu-migrations OR migrations                       [Software event]
      alignment-faults                                   [Software event]
      emulation-faults                                   [Software event]
      L1-dcache-loads                                    [Hardware cache event]
      L1-dcache-load-misses                              [Hardware cache event]
      L1-dcache-prefetch-misses                          [Hardware cache event]
      L1-icache-loads                                    [Hardware cache event]
      L1-icache-load-misses                              [Hardware cache event]
      .
      .
      .
      rNNN                                               [Raw hardware event descriptor]
      cpu/t1=v1[,t2=v2,t3 ...]/modifier                  [Raw hardware event descriptor]
       (see 'perf list --help' on how to encode it)
      mem:<addr>[:access]                                [Hardware breakpoint]
      sunrpc:rpc_call_status                             [Tracepoint event]
      sunrpc:rpc_bind_status                             [Tracepoint event]
      sunrpc:rpc_connect_status                          [Tracepoint event]
      sunrpc:rpc_task_begin                              [Tracepoint event]
      skb:kfree_skb                                      [Tracepoint event]
      skb:consume_skb                                    [Tracepoint event]
      skb:skb_copy_datagram_iovec                        [Tracepoint event]
      net:net_dev_xmit                                   [Tracepoint event]
      net:net_dev_queue                                  [Tracepoint event]
      net:netif_receive_skb                              [Tracepoint event]
      net:netif_rx                                       [Tracepoint event]
      napi:napi_poll                                     [Tracepoint event]
      sock:sock_rcvqueue_full                            [Tracepoint event]
      sock:sock_exceed_buf_limit                         [Tracepoint event]
      udp:udp_fail_queue_rcv_skb                         [Tracepoint event]
      hda:hda_send_cmd                                   [Tracepoint event]
      hda:hda_get_response                               [Tracepoint event]
      hda:hda_bus_reset                                  [Tracepoint event]
      scsi:scsi_dispatch_cmd_start                       [Tracepoint event]
      scsi:scsi_dispatch_cmd_error                       [Tracepoint event]
      scsi:scsi_eh_wakeup                                [Tracepoint event]
      drm:drm_vblank_event                               [Tracepoint event]
      drm:drm_vblank_event_queued                        [Tracepoint event]
      drm:drm_vblank_event_delivered                     [Tracepoint event]
      random:mix_pool_bytes                              [Tracepoint event]
      random:mix_pool_bytes_nolock                       [Tracepoint event]
      random:credit_entropy_bits                         [Tracepoint event]
      gpio:gpio_direction                                [Tracepoint event]
      gpio:gpio_value                                    [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_rq_abort                               [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_rq_requeue                             [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_rq_issue                               [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_bio_bounce                             [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_bio_complete                           [Tracepoint event]
      block:block_bio_backmerge                          [Tracepoint event]
      .
      .
      writeback:writeback_wake_thread                    [Tracepoint event]
      writeback:writeback_wake_forker_thread             [Tracepoint event]
      writeback:writeback_bdi_register                   [Tracepoint event]
      .
      .
      writeback:writeback_single_inode_requeue           [Tracepoint event]
      writeback:writeback_single_inode                   [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:kmalloc                                       [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:kmem_cache_alloc                              [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:mm_page_alloc                                 [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:mm_page_alloc_zone_locked                     [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:mm_page_pcpu_drain                            [Tracepoint event]
      kmem:mm_page_alloc_extfrag                         [Tracepoint event]
      vmscan:mm_vmscan_kswapd_sleep                      [Tracepoint event]
      vmscan:mm_vmscan_kswapd_wake                       [Tracepoint event]
      vmscan:mm_vmscan_wakeup_kswapd                     [Tracepoint event]
      vmscan:mm_vmscan_direct_reclaim_begin              [Tracepoint event]
      .
      .
      module:module_get                                  [Tracepoint event]
      module:module_put                                  [Tracepoint event]
      module:module_request                              [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_kthread_stop                           [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_wakeup                                 [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_wakeup_new                             [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_process_fork                           [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_process_exec                           [Tracepoint event]
      sched:sched_stat_runtime                           [Tracepoint event]
      rcu:rcu_utilization                                [Tracepoint event]
      workqueue:workqueue_queue_work                     [Tracepoint event]
      workqueue:workqueue_execute_end                    [Tracepoint event]
      signal:signal_generate                             [Tracepoint event]
      signal:signal_deliver                              [Tracepoint event]
      timer:timer_init                                   [Tracepoint event]
      timer:timer_start                                  [Tracepoint event]
      timer:hrtimer_cancel                               [Tracepoint event]
      timer:itimer_state                                 [Tracepoint event]
      timer:itimer_expire                                [Tracepoint event]
      irq:irq_handler_entry                              [Tracepoint event]
      irq:irq_handler_exit                               [Tracepoint event]
      irq:softirq_entry                                  [Tracepoint event]
      irq:softirq_exit                                   [Tracepoint event]
      irq:softirq_raise                                  [Tracepoint event]
      printk:console                                     [Tracepoint event]
      task:task_newtask                                  [Tracepoint event]
      task:task_rename                                   [Tracepoint event]
      syscalls:sys_enter_socketcall                      [Tracepoint event]
      syscalls:sys_exit_socketcall                       [Tracepoint event]
      .
      .
      .
      syscalls:sys_enter_unshare                         [Tracepoint event]
      syscalls:sys_exit_unshare                          [Tracepoint event]
      raw_syscalls:sys_enter                             [Tracepoint event]
      raw_syscalls:sys_exit                              [Tracepoint event]
                
Only a subset of these would be of interest to us when looking at this workload, so let's choose the most likely subsystems (identified by the string before the colon in the Tracepoint events) and do a 'perf stat' run using only those wildcarded subsystems:
     root@crownbay:~# perf stat -e skb:* -e net:* -e napi:* -e sched:* -e workqueue:* -e irq:* -e syscalls:* wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Performance counter stats for 'wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2':
                 23323 skb:kfree_skb
                     0 skb:consume_skb
                 49897 skb:skb_copy_datagram_iovec
                  6217 net:net_dev_xmit
                  6217 net:net_dev_queue
                  7962 net:netif_receive_skb
                     2 net:netif_rx
                  8340 napi:napi_poll
                     0 sched:sched_kthread_stop
                     0 sched:sched_kthread_stop_ret
                  3749 sched:sched_wakeup
                     0 sched:sched_wakeup_new
                     0 sched:sched_switch
                    29 sched:sched_migrate_task
                     0 sched:sched_process_free
                     1 sched:sched_process_exit
                     0 sched:sched_wait_task
                     0 sched:sched_process_wait
                     0 sched:sched_process_fork
                     1 sched:sched_process_exec
                     0 sched:sched_stat_wait
         2106519415641 sched:sched_stat_sleep
                     0 sched:sched_stat_iowait
             147453613 sched:sched_stat_blocked
           12903026955 sched:sched_stat_runtime
                     0 sched:sched_pi_setprio
                  3574 workqueue:workqueue_queue_work
                  3574 workqueue:workqueue_activate_work
                     0 workqueue:workqueue_execute_start
                     0 workqueue:workqueue_execute_end
                 16631 irq:irq_handler_entry
                 16631 irq:irq_handler_exit
                 28521 irq:softirq_entry
                 28521 irq:softirq_exit
                 28728 irq:softirq_raise
                     1 syscalls:sys_enter_sendmmsg
                     1 syscalls:sys_exit_sendmmsg
                     0 syscalls:sys_enter_recvmmsg
                     0 syscalls:sys_exit_recvmmsg
                    14 syscalls:sys_enter_socketcall
                    14 syscalls:sys_exit_socketcall
                       .
                       .
                       .
                 16965 syscalls:sys_enter_read
                 16965 syscalls:sys_exit_read
                 12854 syscalls:sys_enter_write
                 12854 syscalls:sys_exit_write
                       .
                       .
                       .
          58.029710972 seconds time elapsed
                Let's pick one of these tracepoints and tell perf to do a profile using it as the sampling event:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g -e sched:sched_wakeup wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
                
|  | 
The screenshot above shows the results of running a profile using sched:sched_switch tracepoint, which shows the relative costs of various paths to sched_wakeup (note that sched_wakeup is the name of the tracepoint - it's actually defined just inside ttwu_do_wakeup(), which accounts for the function name actually displayed in the profile:
     /*
      * Mark the task runnable and perform wakeup-preemption.
      */
     static void
     ttwu_do_wakeup(struct rq *rq, struct task_struct *p, int wake_flags)
     {
          trace_sched_wakeup(p, true);
          .
          .
          .
     }
                A couple of the more interesting callchains are expanded and displayed above, basically some network receive paths that presumably end up waking up wget (busybox) when network data is ready.
Note that because tracepoints are normally used for tracing, the default sampling period for tracepoints is 1 i.e. for tracepoints perf will sample on every event occurrence (this can be changed using the -c option). This is in contrast to hardware counters such as for example the default 'cycles' hardware counter used for normal profiling, where sampling periods are much higher (in the thousands) because profiling should have as low an overhead as possible and sampling on every cycle would be prohibitively expensive.
Profiling is a great tool for solving many problems or for getting a high-level view of what's going on with a workload or across the system. It is however by definition an approximation, as suggested by the most prominent word associated with it, 'sampling'. On the one hand, it allows a representative picture of what's going on in the system to be cheaply taken, but on the other hand, that cheapness limits its utility when that data suggests a need to 'dive down' more deeply to discover what's really going on. In such cases, the only way to see what's really going on is to be able to look at (or summarize more intelligently) the individual steps that go into the higher-level behavior exposed by the coarse-grained profiling data.
As a concrete example, we can trace all the events we think might be applicable to our workload:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g -e skb:* -e net:* -e napi:* -e sched:sched_switch -e sched:sched_wakeup -e irq:*
      -e syscalls:sys_enter_read -e syscalls:sys_exit_read -e syscalls:sys_enter_write -e syscalls:sys_exit_write
      wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
                We can look at the raw trace output using 'perf script' with no arguments:
     root@crownbay:~# perf script
           perf  1262 [000] 11624.857082: sys_exit_read: 0x0
           perf  1262 [000] 11624.857193: sched_wakeup: comm=migration/0 pid=6 prio=0 success=1 target_cpu=000
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858021: softirq_raise: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858074: softirq_entry: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858081: softirq_exit: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858166: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xbf82c940, count: 0x0200
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858177: sys_exit_read: 0x200
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858878: kfree_skb: skbaddr=0xeb248d80 protocol=0 location=0xc15a5308
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.858945: kfree_skb: skbaddr=0xeb248000 protocol=0 location=0xc15a5308
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859020: softirq_raise: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859076: softirq_entry: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859083: softirq_exit: vec=1 [action=TIMER]
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859167: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xb7720000, count: 0x0400
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859192: sys_exit_read: 0x1d7
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859228: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xb7720000, count: 0x0400
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859233: sys_exit_read: 0x0
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859573: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xbf82c580, count: 0x0200
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859584: sys_exit_read: 0x200
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859864: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xb7720000, count: 0x0400
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859888: sys_exit_read: 0x400
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859935: sys_enter_read: fd: 0x0003, buf: 0xb7720000, count: 0x0400
           wget  1262 [001] 11624.859944: sys_exit_read: 0x400
                This gives us a detailed timestamped sequence of events that occurred within the workload with respect to those events.
In many ways, profiling can be viewed as a subset of tracing - theoretically, if you have a set of trace events that's sufficient to capture all the important aspects of a workload, you can derive any of the results or views that a profiling run can.
Another aspect of traditional profiling is that while powerful in many ways, it's limited by the granularity of the underlying data. Profiling tools offer various ways of sorting and presenting the sample data, which make it much more useful and amenable to user experimentation, but in the end it can't be used in an open-ended way to extract data that just isn't present as a consequence of the fact that conceptually, most of it has been thrown away.
Full-blown detailed tracing data does however offer the opportunity to manipulate and present the information collected during a tracing run in an infinite variety of ways.
Another way to look at it is that there are only so many ways that the 'primitive' counters can be used on their own to generate interesting output; to get anything more complicated than simple counts requires some amount of additional logic, which is typically very specific to the problem at hand. For example, if we wanted to make use of a 'counter' that maps to the value of the time difference between when a process was scheduled to run on a processor and the time it actually ran, we wouldn't expect such a counter to exist on its own, but we could derive one called say 'wakeup_latency' and use it to extract a useful view of that metric from trace data. Likewise, we really can't figure out from standard profiling tools how much data every process on the system reads and writes, along with how many of those reads and writes fail completely. If we have sufficient trace data, however, we could with the right tools easily extract and present that information, but we'd need something other than pre-canned profiling tools to do that.
Luckily, there is a general-purpose way to handle such needs, called 'programming languages'. Making programming languages easily available to apply to such problems given the specific format of data is called a 'programming language binding' for that data and language. Perf supports two programming language bindings, one for Python and one for Perl.
Now that we have the trace data in perf.data, we can use 'perf script -g' to generate a skeleton script with handlers for the read/write entry/exit events we recorded:
     root@crownbay:~# perf script -g python
     generated Python script: perf-script.py
                The skeleton script simply creates a python function for each event type in the perf.data file. The body of each function simply prints the event name along with its parameters. For example:
     def net__netif_rx(event_name, context, common_cpu,
            common_secs, common_nsecs, common_pid, common_comm,
            skbaddr, len, name):
                    print_header(event_name, common_cpu, common_secs, common_nsecs,
                            common_pid, common_comm)
		     print "skbaddr=%u, len=%u, name=%s\n" % (skbaddr, len, name),
                We can run that script directly to print all of the events contained in the perf.data file:
     root@crownbay:~# perf script -s perf-script.py
     in trace_begin
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     0 11624.857082795     1262 perf                  nr=3, ret=0
     sched__sched_wakeup      0 11624.857193498     1262 perf                  comm=migration/0, pid=6, prio=0,      success=1, target_cpu=0
     irq__softirq_raise       1 11624.858021635     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     irq__softirq_entry       1 11624.858074075     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     irq__softirq_exit        1 11624.858081389     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.858166434     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3213019456,      count=512
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.858177924     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=512
     skb__kfree_skb           1 11624.858878188     1262 wget                  skbaddr=3945041280,           location=3243922184, protocol=0
     skb__kfree_skb           1 11624.858945608     1262 wget                  skbaddr=3945037824,      location=3243922184, protocol=0
     irq__softirq_raise       1 11624.859020942     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     irq__softirq_entry       1 11624.859076935     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     irq__softirq_exit        1 11624.859083469     1262 wget                  vec=TIMER
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.859167565     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3077701632,      count=1024
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.859192533     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=471
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.859228072     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3077701632,      count=1024
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.859233707     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=0
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.859573008     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3213018496,      count=512
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.859584818     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=512
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.859864562     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3077701632,      count=1024
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.859888770     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=1024
     syscalls__sys_enter_read     1 11624.859935140     1262 wget                  nr=3, fd=3, buf=3077701632,      count=1024
     syscalls__sys_exit_read     1 11624.859944032     1262 wget                  nr=3, ret=1024
                That in itself isn't very useful; after all, we can accomplish pretty much the same thing by simply running 'perf script' without arguments in the same directory as the perf.data file.
We can however replace the print statements in the generated function bodies with whatever we want, and thereby make it infinitely more useful.
As a simple example, let's just replace the print statements in the function bodies with a simple function that does nothing but increment a per-event count. When the program is run against a perf.data file, each time a particular event is encountered, a tally is incremented for that event. For example:
     def net__netif_rx(event_name, context, common_cpu,
            common_secs, common_nsecs, common_pid, common_comm,
            skbaddr, len, name):
		          inc_counts(event_name)
                Each event handler function in the generated code is modified to do this. For convenience, we define a common function called inc_counts() that each handler calls; inc_counts() simply tallies a count for each event using the 'counts' hash, which is a specialized hash function that does Perl-like autovivification, a capability that's extremely useful for kinds of multi-level aggregation commonly used in processing traces (see perf's documentation on the Python language binding for details):
     counts = autodict()
     def inc_counts(event_name):
            try:
                    counts[event_name] += 1
            except TypeError:
                    counts[event_name] = 1
                Finally, at the end of the trace processing run, we want to print the result of all the per-event tallies. For that, we use the special 'trace_end()' function:
     def trace_end():
            for event_name, count in counts.iteritems():
                    print "%-40s %10s\n" % (event_name, count)
                The end result is a summary of all the events recorded in the trace:
     skb__skb_copy_datagram_iovec                  13148
     irq__softirq_entry                             4796
     irq__irq_handler_exit                          3805
     irq__softirq_exit                              4795
     syscalls__sys_enter_write                      8990
     net__net_dev_xmit                               652
     skb__kfree_skb                                 4047
     sched__sched_wakeup                            1155
     irq__irq_handler_entry                         3804
     irq__softirq_raise                             4799
     net__net_dev_queue                              652
     syscalls__sys_enter_read                      17599
     net__netif_receive_skb                         1743
     syscalls__sys_exit_read                       17598
     net__netif_rx                                     2
     napi__napi_poll                                1877
     syscalls__sys_exit_write                       8990
                Note that this is pretty much exactly the same information we get from 'perf stat', which goes a little way to support the idea mentioned previously that given the right kind of trace data, higher-level profiling-type summaries can be derived from it.
Documentation on using the 'perf script' python binding.
The examples so far have focused on tracing a particular program or workload - in other words, every profiling run has specified the program to profile in the command-line e.g. 'perf record wget ...'.
It's also possible, and more interesting in many cases, to run a system-wide profile or trace while running the workload in a separate shell.
To do system-wide profiling or tracing, you typically use the -a flag to 'perf record'.
To demonstrate this, open up one window and start the profile using the -a flag (press Ctrl-C to stop tracing):
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g -a
     ^C[ perf record: Woken up 6 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 1.400 MB perf.data (~61172 samples) ]
                In another window, run the wget test:
     root@crownbay:~# wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |*******************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
                Here we see entries not only for our wget load, but for other processes running on the system as well:
|  | 
In the snapshot above, we can see callchains that originate in libc, and a callchain from Xorg that demonstrates that we're using a proprietary X driver in userspace (notice the presence of 'PVR' and some other unresolvable symbols in the expanded Xorg callchain).
Note also that we have both kernel and userspace entries in the above snapshot. We can also tell perf to focus on userspace but providing a modifier, in this case 'u', to the 'cycles' hardware counter when we record a profile:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g -a -e cycles:u
     ^C[ perf record: Woken up 2 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 0.376 MB perf.data (~16443 samples) ]
                
|  | 
Notice in the screenshot above, we see only userspace entries ([.])
Finally, we can press 'enter' on a leaf node and select the 'Zoom into DSO' menu item to show only entries associated with a specific DSO. In the screenshot below, we've zoomed into the 'libc' DSO which shows all the entries associated with the libc-xxx.so DSO.
|  | 
We can also use the system-wide -a switch to do system-wide tracing. Here we'll trace a couple of scheduler events:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -a -e sched:sched_switch -e sched:sched_wakeup
     ^C[ perf record: Woken up 38 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 9.780 MB perf.data (~427299 samples) ]
                We can look at the raw output using 'perf script' with no arguments:
     root@crownbay:~# perf script
                perf  1383 [001]  6171.460045: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1383 [001]  6171.460066: sched_switch: prev_comm=perf prev_pid=1383 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/1:1 next_pid=21 next_prio=120
         kworker/1:1    21 [001]  6171.460093: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/1:1 prev_pid=21 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=perf next_pid=1383 next_prio=120
             swapper     0 [000]  6171.468063: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/0:3 pid=1209 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
             swapper     0 [000]  6171.468107: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/0 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=kworker/0:3 next_pid=1209 next_prio=120
         kworker/0:3  1209 [000]  6171.468143: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/0:3 prev_pid=1209 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/0 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
                perf  1383 [001]  6171.470039: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1383 [001]  6171.470058: sched_switch: prev_comm=perf prev_pid=1383 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R+ ==> next_comm=kworker/1:1 next_pid=21 next_prio=120
         kworker/1:1    21 [001]  6171.470082: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/1:1 prev_pid=21 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=perf next_pid=1383 next_prio=120
                perf  1383 [001]  6171.480035: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                
Notice that there are a lot of events that don't really have anything to do with what we're interested in, namely events that schedule 'perf' itself in and out or that wake perf up. We can get rid of those by using the '--filter' option - for each event we specify using -e, we can add a --filter after that to filter out trace events that contain fields with specific values:
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -a -e sched:sched_switch --filter 'next_comm != perf && prev_comm != perf' -e sched:sched_wakeup --filter 'comm != perf'
     ^C[ perf record: Woken up 38 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 9.688 MB perf.data (~423279 samples) ]
     root@crownbay:~# perf script
             swapper     0 [000]  7932.162180: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/0 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=kworker/0:3 next_pid=1209 next_prio=120
         kworker/0:3  1209 [000]  7932.162236: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/0:3 prev_pid=1209 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/0 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.170048: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.180044: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.190038: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.200044: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.210044: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
                perf  1407 [001]  7932.220044: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
             swapper     0 [001]  7932.230111: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/1:1 pid=21 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=001
             swapper     0 [001]  7932.230146: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/1 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=kworker/1:1 next_pid=21 next_prio=120
         kworker/1:1    21 [001]  7932.230205: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/1:1 prev_pid=21 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/1 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
             swapper     0 [000]  7932.326109: sched_wakeup: comm=kworker/0:3 pid=1209 prio=120 success=1 target_cpu=000
             swapper     0 [000]  7932.326171: sched_switch: prev_comm=swapper/0 prev_pid=0 prev_prio=120 prev_state=R ==> next_comm=kworker/0:3 next_pid=1209 next_prio=120
         kworker/0:3  1209 [000]  7932.326214: sched_switch: prev_comm=kworker/0:3 prev_pid=1209 prev_prio=120 prev_state=S ==> next_comm=swapper/0 next_pid=0 next_prio=120
                    In this case, we've filtered out all events that have 'perf' in their 'comm' or 'comm_prev' or 'comm_next' fields. Notice that there are still events recorded for perf, but notice that those events don't have values of 'perf' for the filtered fields. To completely filter out anything from perf will require a bit more work, but for the purpose of demonstrating how to use filters, it's close enough.
perf isn't restricted to the fixed set of static tracepoints listed by 'perf list'. Users can also add their own 'dynamic' tracepoints anywhere in the kernel. For instance, suppose we want to define our own tracepoint on do_fork(). We can do that using the 'perf probe' perf subcommand:
     root@crownbay:~# perf probe do_fork
     Added new event:
       probe:do_fork        (on do_fork)
     You can now use it in all perf tools, such as:
	     perf record -e probe:do_fork -aR sleep 1
                Adding a new tracepoint via 'perf probe' results in an event with all the expected files and format in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events, just the same as for static tracepoints (as discussed in more detail in the trace events subsystem section:
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/probe/do_fork# ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 .
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 ..
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 enable
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 filter
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 format
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Oct 28 11:42 id
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/probe/do_fork# cat format
     name: do_fork
     ID: 944
     format:
	     field:unsigned short common_type;	offset:0;	size:2;	signed:0;
	     field:unsigned char common_flags;	offset:2;	size:1;	signed:0;
	     field:unsigned char common_preempt_count;	offset:3;	size:1;	signed:0;
	     field:int common_pid;	offset:4;	size:4;	signed:1;
	     field:int common_padding;	offset:8;	size:4;	signed:1;
	     field:unsigned long __probe_ip;	offset:12;	size:4;	signed:0;
     print fmt: "(%lx)", REC->__probe_ip
                We can list all dynamic tracepoints currently in existence:
     root@crownbay:~# perf probe -l
      probe:do_fork        (on do_fork)
      probe:schedule       (on schedule)
                Let's record system-wide ('sleep 30' is a trick for recording system-wide but basically do nothing and then wake up after 30 seconds):
     root@crownbay:~# perf record -g -a -e probe:do_fork sleep 30
     [ perf record: Woken up 1 times to write data ]
     [ perf record: Captured and wrote 0.087 MB perf.data (~3812 samples) ]
                Using 'perf script' we can see each do_fork event that fired:
     root@crownbay:~# perf script
     # ========
     # captured on: Sun Oct 28 11:55:18 2012
     # hostname : crownbay
     # os release : 3.4.11-yocto-standard
     # perf version : 3.4.11
     # arch : i686
     # nrcpus online : 2
     # nrcpus avail : 2
     # cpudesc : Intel(R) Atom(TM) CPU E660 @ 1.30GHz
     # cpuid : GenuineIntel,6,38,1
     # total memory : 1017184 kB
     # cmdline : /usr/bin/perf record -g -a -e probe:do_fork sleep 30
     # event : name = probe:do_fork, type = 2, config = 0x3b0, config1 = 0x0, config2 = 0x0, excl_usr = 0, excl_kern
      = 0, id = { 5, 6 }
     # HEADER_CPU_TOPOLOGY info available, use -I to display
     # ========
     #
      matchbox-deskto  1197 [001] 34211.378318: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1295 [001] 34211.380388: do_fork: (c1028460)
              pcmanfm  1296 [000] 34211.632350: do_fork: (c1028460)
              pcmanfm  1296 [000] 34211.639917: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1197 [001] 34217.541603: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1299 [001] 34217.543584: do_fork: (c1028460)
               gthumb  1300 [001] 34217.697451: do_fork: (c1028460)
               gthumb  1300 [001] 34219.085734: do_fork: (c1028460)
               gthumb  1300 [000] 34219.121351: do_fork: (c1028460)
               gthumb  1300 [001] 34219.264551: do_fork: (c1028460)
              pcmanfm  1296 [000] 34219.590380: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1197 [001] 34224.955965: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1306 [001] 34224.957972: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-termin  1307 [000] 34225.038214: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-termin  1307 [001] 34225.044218: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-termin  1307 [000] 34225.046442: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1197 [001] 34237.112138: do_fork: (c1028460)
      matchbox-deskto  1311 [001] 34237.114106: do_fork: (c1028460)
                 gaku  1312 [000] 34237.202388: do_fork: (c1028460)
                And using 'perf report' on the same file, we can see the callgraphs from starting a few programs during those 30 seconds:
|  | 
Online versions of the man pages for the commands discussed in this section can be found here:
The 'perf stat' manpage.
The 'perf probe' manpage.
Documentation on using the 'perf script' python binding.
The top-level perf(1) manpage.
Normally, you should be able to invoke the man pages via perf itself e.g. 'perf help' or 'perf help record'.
However, by default Yocto doesn't install man pages, but perf invokes the man pages for most help functionality. This is a bug and is being addressed by a Yocto bug: Bug 3388 - perf: enable man pages for basic 'help' functionality.
The man pages in text form, along with some other files, such as a set of examples, can be found in the 'perf' directory of the kernel tree:
     tools/perf/Documentation
            There's also a nice perf tutorial on the perf wiki that goes into more detail than we do here in certain areas: Perf Tutorial
'ftrace' literally refers to the 'ftrace function tracer' but in reality this encompasses a number of related tracers along with the infrastructure that they all make use of.
For this section, we'll assume you've already performed the basic setup outlined in the General Setup section.
ftrace, trace-cmd, and kernelshark run on the target system, and are ready to go out-of-the-box - no additional setup is necessary. For the rest of this section we assume you've ssh'ed to the host and will be running ftrace on the target. kernelshark is a GUI application and if you use the '-X' option to ssh you can have the kernelshark GUI run on the target but display remotely on the host if you want.
'ftrace' essentially refers to everything included in the /tracing directory of the mounted debugfs filesystem (Yocto follows the standard convention and mounts it at /sys/kernel/debug). Here's a listing of all the files found in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing on a Yocto system:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# ls
     README                      kprobe_events               trace
     available_events            kprobe_profile              trace_clock
     available_filter_functions  options                     trace_marker
     available_tracers           per_cpu                     trace_options
     buffer_size_kb              printk_formats              trace_pipe
     buffer_total_size_kb        saved_cmdlines              tracing_cpumask
     current_tracer              set_event                   tracing_enabled
     dyn_ftrace_total_info       set_ftrace_filter           tracing_on
     enabled_functions           set_ftrace_notrace          tracing_thresh
     events                      set_ftrace_pid
     free_buffer                 set_graph_function
            The files listed above are used for various purposes - some relate directly to the tracers themselves, others are used to set tracing options, and yet others actually contain the tracing output when a tracer is in effect. Some of the functions can be guessed from their names, others need explanation; in any case, we'll cover some of the files we see here below but for an explanation of the others, please see the ftrace documentation.
We'll start by looking at some of the available built-in tracers.
cat'ing the 'available_tracers' file lists the set of available tracers:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat available_tracers
     blk function_graph function nop
            The 'current_tracer' file contains the tracer currently in effect:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat current_tracer
     nop
            The above listing of current_tracer shows that the 'nop' tracer is in effect, which is just another way of saying that there's actually no tracer currently in effect.
echo'ing one of the available_tracers into current_tracer makes the specified tracer the current tracer:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo function > current_tracer
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat current_tracer
     function
            The above sets the current tracer to be the 'function tracer'. This tracer traces every function call in the kernel and makes it available as the contents of the 'trace' file. Reading the 'trace' file lists the currently buffered function calls that have been traced by the function tracer:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat trace | less
     # tracer: function
     #
     # entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 310629/766471   #P:8
     #
     #                              _-----=> irqs-off
     #                             / _----=> need-resched
     #                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
     #                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
     #                            ||| /     delay
     #           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
     #              | |       |   ||||       |         |
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867169: ktime_get_real <-intel_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867170: getnstimeofday <-ktime_get_real
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867171: ns_to_timeval <-intel_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867171: ns_to_timespec <-ns_to_timeval
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867172: smp_apic_timer_interrupt <-apic_timer_interrupt
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867172: native_apic_mem_write <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867172: irq_enter <-smp_apic_timer_interrupt
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867172: rcu_irq_enter <-irq_enter
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867173: rcu_idle_exit_common.isra.33 <-rcu_irq_enter
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867173: local_bh_disable <-irq_enter
              <idle>-0     [004] d..1   470.867173: add_preempt_count <-local_bh_disable
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867174: tick_check_idle <-irq_enter
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867174: tick_check_oneshot_broadcast <-tick_check_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867174: ktime_get <-tick_check_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867174: tick_nohz_stop_idle <-tick_check_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867175: update_ts_time_stats <-tick_nohz_stop_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867175: nr_iowait_cpu <-update_ts_time_stats
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867175: tick_do_update_jiffies64 <-tick_check_idle
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867175: _raw_spin_lock <-tick_do_update_jiffies64
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s1   470.867176: add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s2   470.867176: do_timer <-tick_do_update_jiffies64
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s2   470.867176: _raw_spin_lock <-do_timer
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s2   470.867176: add_preempt_count <-_raw_spin_lock
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s3   470.867177: ntp_tick_length <-do_timer
              <idle>-0     [004] d.s3   470.867177: _raw_spin_lock_irqsave <-ntp_tick_length
              .
              .
              .
            Each line in the trace above shows what was happening in the kernel on a given cpu, to the level of detail of function calls. Each entry shows the function called, followed by its caller (after the arrow).
The function tracer gives you an extremely detailed idea of what the kernel was doing at the point in time the trace was taken, and is a great way to learn about how the kernel code works in a dynamic sense.
It is a little more difficult to follow the call chains than it needs to be - luckily there's a variant of the function tracer that displays the callchains explicitly, called the 'function_graph' tracer:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo function_graph > current_tracer
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat trace | less
      tracer: function_graph
      CPU  DURATION                  FUNCTION CALLS
      |     |   |                     |   |   |   |
     7)   0.046 us    |      pick_next_task_fair();
     7)   0.043 us    |      pick_next_task_stop();
     7)   0.042 us    |      pick_next_task_rt();
     7)   0.032 us    |      pick_next_task_fair();
     7)   0.030 us    |      pick_next_task_idle();
     7)               |      _raw_spin_unlock_irq() {
     7)   0.033 us    |        sub_preempt_count();
     7)   0.258 us    |      }
     7)   0.032 us    |      sub_preempt_count();
     7) + 13.341 us   |    } /* __schedule */
     7)   0.095 us    |  } /* sub_preempt_count */
     7)               |  schedule() {
     7)               |    __schedule() {
     7)   0.060 us    |      add_preempt_count();
     7)   0.044 us    |      rcu_note_context_switch();
     7)               |      _raw_spin_lock_irq() {
     7)   0.033 us    |        add_preempt_count();
     7)   0.247 us    |      }
     7)               |      idle_balance() {
     7)               |        _raw_spin_unlock() {
     7)   0.031 us    |          sub_preempt_count();
     7)   0.246 us    |        }
     7)               |        update_shares() {
     7)   0.030 us    |          __rcu_read_lock();
     7)   0.029 us    |          __rcu_read_unlock();
     7)   0.484 us    |        }
     7)   0.030 us    |        __rcu_read_lock();
     7)               |        load_balance() {
     7)               |          find_busiest_group() {
     7)   0.031 us    |            idle_cpu();
     7)   0.029 us    |            idle_cpu();
     7)   0.035 us    |            idle_cpu();
     7)   0.906 us    |          }
     7)   1.141 us    |        }
     7)   0.022 us    |        msecs_to_jiffies();
     7)               |        load_balance() {
     7)               |          find_busiest_group() {
     7)   0.031 us    |            idle_cpu();
     .
     .
     .
     4)   0.062 us    |        msecs_to_jiffies();
     4)   0.062 us    |        __rcu_read_unlock();
     4)               |        _raw_spin_lock() {
     4)   0.073 us    |          add_preempt_count();
     4)   0.562 us    |        }
     4) + 17.452 us   |      }
     4)   0.108 us    |      put_prev_task_fair();
     4)   0.102 us    |      pick_next_task_fair();
     4)   0.084 us    |      pick_next_task_stop();
     4)   0.075 us    |      pick_next_task_rt();
     4)   0.062 us    |      pick_next_task_fair();
     4)   0.066 us    |      pick_next_task_idle();
     ------------------------------------------
     4)   kworker-74   =>    <idle>-0
     ------------------------------------------
     4)               |      finish_task_switch() {
     4)               |        _raw_spin_unlock_irq() {
     4)   0.100 us    |          sub_preempt_count();
     4)   0.582 us    |        }
     4)   1.105 us    |      }
     4)   0.088 us    |      sub_preempt_count();
     4) ! 100.066 us  |    }
     .
     .
     .
     3)               |  sys_ioctl() {
     3)   0.083 us    |    fget_light();
     3)               |    security_file_ioctl() {
     3)   0.066 us    |      cap_file_ioctl();
     3)   0.562 us    |    }
     3)               |    do_vfs_ioctl() {
     3)               |      drm_ioctl() {
     3)   0.075 us    |        drm_ut_debug_printk();
     3)               |        i915_gem_pwrite_ioctl() {
     3)               |          i915_mutex_lock_interruptible() {
     3)   0.070 us    |            mutex_lock_interruptible();
     3)   0.570 us    |          }
     3)               |          drm_gem_object_lookup() {
     3)               |            _raw_spin_lock() {
     3)   0.080 us    |              add_preempt_count();
     3)   0.620 us    |            }
     3)               |            _raw_spin_unlock() {
     3)   0.085 us    |              sub_preempt_count();
     3)   0.562 us    |            }
     3)   2.149 us    |          }
     3)   0.133 us    |          i915_gem_object_pin();
     3)               |          i915_gem_object_set_to_gtt_domain() {
     3)   0.065 us    |            i915_gem_object_flush_gpu_write_domain();
     3)   0.065 us    |            i915_gem_object_wait_rendering();
     3)   0.062 us    |            i915_gem_object_flush_cpu_write_domain();
     3)   1.612 us    |          }
     3)               |          i915_gem_object_put_fence() {
     3)   0.097 us    |            i915_gem_object_flush_fence.constprop.36();
     3)   0.645 us    |          }
     3)   0.070 us    |          add_preempt_count();
     3)   0.070 us    |          sub_preempt_count();
     3)   0.073 us    |          i915_gem_object_unpin();
     3)   0.068 us    |          mutex_unlock();
     3)   9.924 us    |        }
     3) + 11.236 us   |      }
     3) + 11.770 us   |    }
     3) + 13.784 us   |  }
     3)               |  sys_ioctl() {
            As you can see, the function_graph display is much easier to follow. Also note that in addition to the function calls and associated braces, other events such as scheduler events are displayed in context. In fact, you can freely include any tracepoint available in the trace events subsystem described in the next section by simply enabling those events, and they'll appear in context in the function graph display. Quite a powerful tool for understanding kernel dynamics.
Also notice that there are various annotations on the left hand side of the display. For example if the total time it took for a given function to execute is above a certain threshold, an exclamation point or plus sign appears on the left hand side. Please see the ftrace documentation for details on all these fields.
One especially important directory contained within the /sys/kernel/debug/tracing directory is the 'events' subdirectory, which contains representations of every tracepoint in the system. Listing out the contents of the 'events' subdirectory, we see mainly another set of subdirectories:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cd events
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events# ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x   38 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 .
     drwxr-xr-x    5 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ..
     drwxr-xr-x   19 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 block
     drwxr-xr-x   32 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 btrfs
     drwxr-xr-x    5 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 drm
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 enable
     drwxr-xr-x   40 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ext3
     drwxr-xr-x   79 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ext4
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ftrace
     drwxr-xr-x    8 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 hda
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 header_event
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 header_page
     drwxr-xr-x   25 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 i915
     drwxr-xr-x    7 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 irq
     drwxr-xr-x   12 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 jbd
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 jbd2
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmem
     drwxr-xr-x    7 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 module
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 napi
     drwxr-xr-x    6 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 net
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 oom
     drwxr-xr-x   12 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 power
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 printk
     drwxr-xr-x    8 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 random
     drwxr-xr-x    4 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 raw_syscalls
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 rcu
     drwxr-xr-x    6 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 rpm
     drwxr-xr-x   20 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 sched
     drwxr-xr-x    7 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 scsi
     drwxr-xr-x    4 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 signal
     drwxr-xr-x    5 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 skb
     drwxr-xr-x    4 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 sock
     drwxr-xr-x   10 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 sunrpc
     drwxr-xr-x  538 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 syscalls
     drwxr-xr-x    4 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 task
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 timer
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 udp
     drwxr-xr-x   21 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 vmscan
     drwxr-xr-x    3 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 vsyscall
     drwxr-xr-x    6 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 workqueue
     drwxr-xr-x   26 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 writeback
            Each one of these subdirectories corresponds to a 'subsystem' and contains yet again more subdirectories, each one of those finally corresponding to a tracepoint. For example, here are the contents of the 'kmem' subsystem:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events# cd kmem
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem# ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 .
     drwxr-xr-x   38 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ..
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 enable
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 filter
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kfree
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmalloc
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmalloc_node
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmem_cache_alloc
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmem_cache_alloc_node
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 kmem_cache_free
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_alloc
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_alloc_extfrag
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_alloc_zone_locked
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_free
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_free_batched
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 mm_page_pcpu_drain
            Let's see what's inside the subdirectory for a specific tracepoint, in this case the one for kmalloc:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem# cd kmalloc
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc# ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 .
     drwxr-xr-x   14 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 ..
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 enable
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 filter
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 format
     -r--r--r--    1 root     root             0 Nov 14 23:19 id
            The 'format' file for the tracepoint describes the event in memory, which is used by the various tracing tools that now make use of these tracepoint to parse the event and make sense of it, along with a 'print fmt' field that allows tools like ftrace to display the event as text. Here's what the format of the kmalloc event looks like:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc# cat format
     name: kmalloc
     ID: 313
     format:
	     field:unsigned short common_type;	offset:0;	size:2;	signed:0;
	     field:unsigned char common_flags;	offset:2;	size:1;	signed:0;
	     field:unsigned char common_preempt_count;	offset:3;	size:1;	signed:0;
	     field:int common_pid;	offset:4;	size:4;	signed:1;
	     field:int common_padding;	offset:8;	size:4;	signed:1;
	     field:unsigned long call_site;	offset:16;	size:8;	signed:0;
	     field:const void * ptr;	offset:24;	size:8;	signed:0;
	     field:size_t bytes_req;	offset:32;	size:8;	signed:0;
	     field:size_t bytes_alloc;	offset:40;	size:8;	signed:0;
	     field:gfp_t gfp_flags;	offset:48;	size:4;	signed:0;
     print fmt: "call_site=%lx ptr=%p bytes_req=%zu bytes_alloc=%zu gfp_flags=%s", REC->call_site, REC->ptr, REC->bytes_req, REC->bytes_alloc,
     (REC->gfp_flags) ? __print_flags(REC->gfp_flags, "|", {(unsigned long)(((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u) | ((
     gfp_t)0x20000u) | (( gfp_t)0x02u) | (( gfp_t)0x08u)) | (( gfp_t)0x4000u) | (( gfp_t)0x10000u) | (( gfp_t)0x1000u) | (( gfp_t)0x200u) | ((
     gfp_t)0x400000u)), "GFP_TRANSHUGE"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u) | (( gfp_t)0x20000u) | ((
     gfp_t)0x02u) | (( gfp_t)0x08u)), "GFP_HIGHUSER_MOVABLE"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u) | ((
     gfp_t)0x20000u) | (( gfp_t)0x02u)), "GFP_HIGHUSER"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u) | ((
     gfp_t)0x20000u)), "GFP_USER"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u) | (( gfp_t)0x80000u)), GFP_TEMPORARY"},
     {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u) | (( gfp_t)0x80u)), "GFP_KERNEL"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u) | (( gfp_t)0x40u)),
     "GFP_NOFS"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x20u)), "GFP_ATOMIC"}, {(unsigned long)((( gfp_t)0x10u)), "GFP_NOIO"}, {(unsigned long)((
     gfp_t)0x20u), "GFP_HIGH"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x10u), "GFP_WAIT"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x40u), "GFP_IO"}, {(unsigned long)((
     gfp_t)0x100u), "GFP_COLD"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x200u), "GFP_NOWARN"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x400u), "GFP_REPEAT"}, {(unsigned
     long)(( gfp_t)0x800u), "GFP_NOFAIL"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x1000u), "GFP_NORETRY"},      {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x4000u), "GFP_COMP"},
     {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x8000u), "GFP_ZERO"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x10000u), "GFP_NOMEMALLOC"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x20000u),
     "GFP_HARDWALL"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x40000u), "GFP_THISNODE"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x80000u), "GFP_RECLAIMABLE"}, {(unsigned
     long)(( gfp_t)0x08u), "GFP_MOVABLE"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0), "GFP_NOTRACK"}, {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x400000u), "GFP_NO_KSWAPD"},
     {(unsigned long)(( gfp_t)0x800000u), "GFP_OTHER_NODE"} ) : "GFP_NOWAIT"
            The 'enable' file in the tracepoint directory is what allows the user (or tools such as trace-cmd) to actually turn the tracepoint on and off. When enabled, the corresponding tracepoint will start appearing in the ftrace 'trace' file described previously. For example, this turns on the kmalloc tracepoint:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc# echo 1 > enable
            At the moment, we're not interested in the function tracer or some other tracer that might be in effect, so we first turn it off, but if we do that, we still need to turn tracing on in order to see the events in the output buffer:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo nop > current_tracer
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo 1 > tracing_on
            Now, if we look at the the 'trace' file, we see nothing but the kmalloc events we just turned on:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat trace | less
     # tracer: nop
     #
     # entries-in-buffer/entries-written: 1897/1897   #P:8
     #
     #                              _-----=> irqs-off
     #                             / _----=> need-resched
     #                            | / _---=> hardirq/softirq
     #                            || / _--=> preempt-depth
     #                            ||| /     delay
     #           TASK-PID   CPU#  ||||    TIMESTAMP  FUNCTION
     #              | |       |   ||||       |         |
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18154.620753: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18154.621640: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18154.621656: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
     matchbox-termin-1361  [001] ...1 18154.755472: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81614050 ptr=ffff88006d5f0e00 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_REPEAT
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18154.755581: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff8141abe8 ptr=ffff8800734f4cc0 bytes_req=168 bytes_alloc=192 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_NOWARN|GFP_NORETRY
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18154.755583: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff814192a3 ptr=ffff88001f822520 bytes_req=24 bytes_alloc=32 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18154.755589: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81419edb ptr=ffff8800721a2f00 bytes_req=64 bytes_alloc=64 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
     matchbox-termin-1361  [001] ...1 18155.354594: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81614050 ptr=ffff88006db35400 bytes_req=576 bytes_alloc=1024 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_REPEAT
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.354703: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff8141abe8 ptr=ffff8800734f4cc0 bytes_req=168 bytes_alloc=192 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_NOWARN|GFP_NORETRY
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.354705: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff814192a3 ptr=ffff88001f822520 bytes_req=24 bytes_alloc=32 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.354711: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81419edb ptr=ffff8800721a2f00 bytes_req=64 bytes_alloc=64 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.673319: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18155.673525: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.674821: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d554800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.793014: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d554800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18155.793219: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.794147: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.936705: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18155.936910: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18155.937869: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d554800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
     matchbox-termin-1361  [001] ...1 18155.953667: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81614050 ptr=ffff88006d5f2000 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_REPEAT
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.953775: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff8141abe8 ptr=ffff8800734f4cc0 bytes_req=168 bytes_alloc=192 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_NOWARN|GFP_NORETRY
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.953777: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff814192a3 ptr=ffff88001f822520 bytes_req=24 bytes_alloc=32 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
                Xorg-1264  [002] ...1 18155.953783: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81419edb ptr=ffff8800721a2f00 bytes_req=64 bytes_alloc=64 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_ZERO
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18156.176053: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d554800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18156.176257: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18156.177717: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18156.399229: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d555800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
            dropbear-1465  [000] ...1 18156.399434: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff816650d4 ptr=ffff8800729c3000 bytes_http://rostedt.homelinux.com/kernelshark/req=2048 bytes_alloc=2048 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL
              <idle>-0     [000] ..s3 18156.400660: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81619b36 ptr=ffff88006d554800 bytes_req=512 bytes_alloc=512 gfp_flags=GFP_ATOMIC
     matchbox-termin-1361  [001] ...1 18156.552800: kmalloc: call_site=ffffffff81614050 ptr=ffff88006db34800 bytes_req=576 bytes_alloc=1024 gfp_flags=GFP_KERNEL|GFP_REPEAT
            To again disable the kmalloc event, we need to send 0 to the enable file:
     root@sugarbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/kmem/kmalloc# echo 0 > enable
            You can enable any number of events or complete subsystems (by using the 'enable' file in the subsystem directory) and get an arbitrarily fine-grained idea of what's going on in the system by enabling as many of the appropriate tracepoints as applicable.
A number of the tools described in this HOWTO do just that, including trace-cmd and kernelshark in the next section.
trace-cmd is essentially an extensive command-line 'wrapper' interface that hides the details of all the individual files in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing, allowing users to specify specific particular events within the /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/ subdirectory and to collect traces and avoid having to deal with those details directly.
As yet another layer on top of that, kernelshark provides a GUI that allows users to start and stop traces and specify sets of events using an intuitive interface, and view the output as both trace events and as a per-CPU graphical display. It directly uses 'trace-cmd' as the plumbing that accomplishes all that underneath the covers (and actually displays the trace-cmd command it uses, as we'll see).
To start a trace using kernelshark, first start kernelshark:
     root@sugarbay:~# kernelshark
            Then bring up the 'Capture' dialog by choosing from the kernelshark menu:
     Capture | Record
            That will display the following dialog, which allows you to choose one or more events (or even one or more complete subsystems) to trace:
|  | 
Note that these are exactly the same sets of events described in the previous trace events subsystem section, and in fact is where trace-cmd gets them for kernelshark.
In the above screenshot, we've decided to explore the graphics subsystem a bit and so have chosen to trace all the tracepoints contained within the 'i915' and 'drm' subsystems.
After doing that, we can start and stop the trace using the 'Run' and 'Stop' button on the lower right corner of the dialog (the same button will turn into the 'Stop' button after the trace has started):
|  | 
Notice that the right-hand pane shows the exact trace-cmd command-line that's used to run the trace, along with the results of the trace-cmd run.
Once the 'Stop' button is pressed, the graphical view magically fills up with a colorful per-cpu display of the trace data, along with the detailed event listing below that:
|  | 
Here's another example, this time a display resulting from tracing 'all events':
|  | 
The tool is pretty self-explanatory, but for more detailed information on navigating through the data, see the kernelshark website.
The documentation for ftrace can be found in the kernel Documentation directory:
     Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
            The documentation for the trace event subsystem can also be found in the kernel Documentation directory:
     Documentation/trace/events.txt
            There is a nice series of articles on using ftrace and trace-cmd at LWN:
There's more detailed documentation kernelshark usage here: KernelShark
An amusing yet useful README (a tracing mini-HOWTO) can be found in /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/README.
SystemTap is a system-wide script-based tracing and profiling tool.
SystemTap scripts are C-like programs that are executed in the kernel to gather/print/aggregate data extracted from the context they end up being invoked under.
For example, this probe from the SystemTap tutorial simply prints a line every time any process on the system open()s a file. For each line, it prints the executable name of the program that opened the file, along with its PID, and the name of the file it opened (or tried to open), which it extracts from the open syscall's argstr.
     probe syscall.open
     {
             printf ("%s(%d) open (%s)\n", execname(), pid(), argstr)
     }
     probe timer.ms(4000) # after 4 seconds
     {
             exit ()
     }
        Normally, to execute this probe, you'd simply install systemtap on the system you want to probe, and directly run the probe on that system e.g. assuming the name of the file containing the above text is trace_open.stp:
     # stap trace_open.stp
        What systemtap does under the covers to run this probe is 1) parse and convert the probe to an equivalent 'C' form, 2) compile the 'C' form into a kernel module, 3) insert the module into the kernel, which arms it, and 4) collect the data generated by the probe and display it to the user.
In order to accomplish steps 1 and 2, the 'stap' program needs access to the kernel build system that produced the kernel that the probed system is running. In the case of a typical embedded system (the 'target'), the kernel build system unfortunately isn't typically part of the image running on the target. It is normally available on the 'host' system that produced the target image however; in such cases, steps 1 and 2 are executed on the host system, and steps 3 and 4 are executed on the target system, using only the systemtap 'runtime'.
The systemtap support in Yocto assumes that only steps 3 and 4 are run on the target; it is possible to do everything on the target, but this section assumes only the typical embedded use-case.
So basically what you need to do in order to run a systemtap script on the target is to 1) on the host system, compile the probe into a kernel module that makes sense to the target, 2) copy the module onto the target system and 3) insert the module into the target kernel, which arms it, and 4) collect the data generated by the probe and display it to the user.
Those are a lot of steps and a lot of details, but fortunately Yocto includes a script called 'crosstap' that will take care of those details, allowing you to simply execute a systemtap script on the remote target, with arguments if necessary.
In order to do this from a remote host, however, you need to have access to the build for the image you booted. The 'crosstap' script provides details on how to do this if you run the script on the host without having done a build:
     $ crosstap root@192.168.1.88 trace_open.stp
     Error: No target kernel build found.
     Did you forget to create a local build of your image?
     'crosstap' requires a local sdk build of the target system
     (or a build that includes 'tools-profile') in order to build
     kernel modules that can probe the target system.
     Practically speaking, that means you need to do the following:
      - If you're running a pre-built image, download the release
        and/or BSP tarballs used to build the image.
      - If you're working from git sources, just clone the metadata
        and BSP layers needed to build the image you'll be booting.
      - Make sure you're properly set up to build a new image (see
        the BSP README and/or the widely available basic documentation
        that discusses how to build images).
      - Build an -sdk version of the image e.g.:
          $ bitbake core-image-sato-sdk
      OR
      - Build a non-sdk image but include the profiling tools:
          [ edit local.conf and add 'tools-profile' to the end of
            the EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES variable ]
          $ bitbake core-image-sato
     Once you've build the image on the host system, you're ready to
     boot it (or the equivalent pre-built image) and use 'crosstap'
     to probe it (you need to source the environment as usual first):
        $ source oe-init-build-env
        $ cd ~/my/systemtap/scripts
        $ crosstap root@192.168.1.xxx myscript.stp
            So essentially what you need to do is build an SDK image or image with 'tools-profile' as detailed in the "General Setup" section of this manual, and boot the resulting target image.
Once you've done that, you should be able to run a systemtap script on the target:
     $ cd /path/to/yocto
     $ source oe-init-build-env
     ### Shell environment set up for builds. ###
     You can now run 'bitbake <target>'
     Common targets are:
              core-image-minimal
              core-image-sato
              meta-toolchain
              meta-ide-support
     You can also run generated qemu images with a command like 'runqemu qemux86'
            Once you've done that, you can cd to whatever directory contains your scripts and use 'crosstap' to run the script:
     $ cd /path/to/my/systemap/script
     $ crosstap root@192.168.7.2 trace_open.stp
            If you get an error connecting to the target e.g.:
     $ crosstap root@192.168.7.2 trace_open.stp
     error establishing ssh connection on remote 'root@192.168.7.2'
            Try ssh'ing to the target and see what happens:
     $ ssh root@192.168.7.2
            A lot of the time, connection problems are due specifying a wrong IP address or having a 'host key verification error'.
If everything worked as planned, you should see something like this (enter the password when prompted, or press enter if it's set up to use no password):
     $ crosstap root@192.168.7.2 trace_open.stp
     root@192.168.7.2's password:
     matchbox-termin(1036) open ("/tmp/vte3FS2LW", O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL|O_LARGEFILE, 0600)
     matchbox-termin(1036) open ("/tmp/vteJMC7LW", O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL|O_LARGEFILE, 0600)
            
The SystemTap language reference can be found here: SystemTap Language Reference
Links to other SystemTap documents, tutorials, and examples can be found here: SystemTap documentation page
Sysprof is a very easy to use system-wide profiler that consists of a single window with three panes and a few buttons which allow you to start, stop, and view the profile from one place.
For this section, we'll assume you've already performed the basic setup outlined in the General Setup section.
Sysprof is a GUI-based application that runs on the target system. For the rest of this document we assume you've ssh'ed to the host and will be running Sysprof on the target (you can use the '-X' option to ssh and have the Sysprof GUI run on the target but display remotely on the host if you want).
To start profiling the system, you simply press the 'Start' button. To stop profiling and to start viewing the profile data in one easy step, press the 'Profile' button.
Once you've pressed the profile button, the three panes will fill up with profiling data:
|  | 
The left pane shows a list of functions and processes. Selecting one of those expands that function in the right pane, showing all its callees. Note that this caller-oriented display is essentially the inverse of perf's default callee-oriented callchain display.
In the screenshot above, we're focusing on __copy_to_user_ll() and looking up the callchain we can see that one of the callers of __copy_to_user_ll is sys_read() and the complete callpath between them. Notice that this is essentially a portion of the same information we saw in the perf display shown in the perf section of this page.
|  | 
Similarly, the above is a snapshot of the Sysprof display of a copy-from-user callchain.
Finally, looking at the third Sysprof pane in the lower left, we can see a list of all the callers of a particular function selected in the top left pane. In this case, the lower pane is showing all the callers of __mark_inode_dirty:
|  | 
Double-clicking on one of those functions will in turn change the focus to the selected function, and so on.
There doesn't seem to be any documentation for Sysprof, but maybe that's because it's pretty self-explanatory. The Sysprof website, however, is here: Sysprof, System-wide Performance Profiler for Linux
For this section, we'll assume you've already performed the basic setup outlined in the General Setup section.
LTTng is run on the target system by ssh'ing to it. However, if you want to see the traces graphically, install Eclipse as described in section "Manually copying a trace to the host and viewing it in Eclipse (i.e. using Eclipse without network support)" and follow the directions to manually copy traces to the host and view them in Eclipse (i.e. using Eclipse without network support).
Once you've applied the above commits and built and booted your image (you need to build the core-image-sato-sdk image or use one of the other methods described in the General Setup section), you're ready to start tracing.
First, from the host, ssh to the target:
     $ ssh -l root 192.168.1.47
     The authenticity of host '192.168.1.47 (192.168.1.47)' can't be established.
     RSA key fingerprint is 23:bd:c8:b1:a8:71:52:00:ee:00:4f:64:9e:10:b9:7e.
     Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
     Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.47' (RSA) to the list of known hosts.
     root@192.168.1.47's password:
                Once on the target, use these steps to create a trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng create
     Spawning a session daemon
     Session auto-20121015-232120 created.
     Traces will be written in /home/root/lttng-traces/auto-20121015-232120
                Enable the events you want to trace (in this case all kernel events):
     root@crownbay:~# lttng enable-event --kernel --all
     All kernel events are enabled in channel channel0
                Start the trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng start
     Tracing started for session auto-20121015-232120
                And then stop the trace after awhile or after running a particular workload that you want to trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng stop
     Tracing stopped for session auto-20121015-232120
                You can now view the trace in text form on the target:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng view
     [23:21:56.989270399] (+?.?????????) sys_geteuid: { 1 }, { }
     [23:21:56.989278081] (+0.000007682) exit_syscall: { 1 }, { ret = 0 }
     [23:21:56.989286043] (+0.000007962) sys_pipe: { 1 }, { fildes = 0xB77B9E8C }
     [23:21:56.989321802] (+0.000035759) exit_syscall: { 1 }, { ret = 0 }
     [23:21:56.989329345] (+0.000007543) sys_mmap_pgoff: { 1 }, { addr = 0x0, len = 10485760, prot = 3, flags = 131362, fd = 4294967295, pgoff = 0 }
     [23:21:56.989351694] (+0.000022349) exit_syscall: { 1 }, { ret = -1247805440 }
     [23:21:56.989432989] (+0.000081295) sys_clone: { 1 }, { clone_flags = 0x411, newsp = 0xB5EFFFE4, parent_tid = 0xFFFFFFFF, child_tid = 0x0 }
     [23:21:56.989477129] (+0.000044140) sched_stat_runtime: { 1 }, { comm = "lttng-consumerd", tid = 1193, runtime = 681660, vruntime = 43367983388 }
     [23:21:56.989486697] (+0.000009568) sched_migrate_task: { 1 }, { comm = "lttng-consumerd", tid = 1193, prio = 20, orig_cpu = 1, dest_cpu = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989508418] (+0.000021721) hrtimer_init: { 1 }, { hrtimer = 3970832076, clockid = 1, mode = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989770462] (+0.000262044) hrtimer_cancel: { 1 }, { hrtimer = 3993865440 }
     [23:21:56.989771580] (+0.000001118) hrtimer_cancel: { 0 }, { hrtimer = 3993812192 }
     [23:21:56.989776957] (+0.000005377) hrtimer_expire_entry: { 1 }, { hrtimer = 3993865440, now = 79815980007057, function = 3238465232 }
     [23:21:56.989778145] (+0.000001188) hrtimer_expire_entry: { 0 }, { hrtimer = 3993812192, now = 79815980008174, function = 3238465232 }
     [23:21:56.989791695] (+0.000013550) softirq_raise: { 1 }, { vec = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989795396] (+0.000003701) softirq_raise: { 0 }, { vec = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989800635] (+0.000005239) softirq_raise: { 0 }, { vec = 9 }
     [23:21:56.989807130] (+0.000006495) sched_stat_runtime: { 1 }, { comm = "lttng-consumerd", tid = 1193, runtime = 330710, vruntime = 43368314098 }
     [23:21:56.989809993] (+0.000002863) sched_stat_runtime: { 0 }, { comm = "lttng-sessiond", tid = 1181, runtime = 1015313, vruntime = 36976733240 }
     [23:21:56.989818514] (+0.000008521) hrtimer_expire_exit: { 0 }, { hrtimer = 3993812192 }
     [23:21:56.989819631] (+0.000001117) hrtimer_expire_exit: { 1 }, { hrtimer = 3993865440 }
     [23:21:56.989821866] (+0.000002235) hrtimer_start: { 0 }, { hrtimer = 3993812192, function = 3238465232, expires = 79815981000000, softexpires = 79815981000000 }
     [23:21:56.989822984] (+0.000001118) hrtimer_start: { 1 }, { hrtimer = 3993865440, function = 3238465232, expires = 79815981000000, softexpires = 79815981000000 }
     [23:21:56.989832762] (+0.000009778) softirq_entry: { 1 }, { vec = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989833879] (+0.000001117) softirq_entry: { 0 }, { vec = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989838069] (+0.000004190) timer_cancel: { 1 }, { timer = 3993871956 }
     [23:21:56.989839187] (+0.000001118) timer_cancel: { 0 }, { timer = 3993818708 }
     [23:21:56.989841492] (+0.000002305) timer_expire_entry: { 1 }, { timer = 3993871956, now = 79515980, function = 3238277552 }
     [23:21:56.989842819] (+0.000001327) timer_expire_entry: { 0 }, { timer = 3993818708, now = 79515980, function = 3238277552 }
     [23:21:56.989854831] (+0.000012012) sched_stat_runtime: { 1 }, { comm = "lttng-consumerd", tid = 1193, runtime = 49237, vruntime = 43368363335 }
     [23:21:56.989855949] (+0.000001118) sched_stat_runtime: { 0 }, { comm = "lttng-sessiond", tid = 1181, runtime = 45121, vruntime = 36976778361 }
     [23:21:56.989861257] (+0.000005308) sched_stat_sleep: { 1 }, { comm = "kworker/1:1", tid = 21, delay = 9451318 }
     [23:21:56.989862374] (+0.000001117) sched_stat_sleep: { 0 }, { comm = "kworker/0:0", tid = 4, delay = 9958820 }
     [23:21:56.989868241] (+0.000005867) sched_wakeup: { 0 }, { comm = "kworker/0:0", tid = 4, prio = 120, success = 1, target_cpu = 0 }
     [23:21:56.989869358] (+0.000001117) sched_wakeup: { 1 }, { comm = "kworker/1:1", tid = 21, prio = 120, success = 1, target_cpu = 1 }
     [23:21:56.989877460] (+0.000008102) timer_expire_exit: { 1 }, { timer = 3993871956 }
     [23:21:56.989878577] (+0.000001117) timer_expire_exit: { 0 }, { timer = 3993818708 }
     .
     .
     .
                You can now safely destroy the trace session (note that this doesn't delete the trace - it's still there in ~/lttng-traces):
     root@crownbay:~# lttng destroy
     Session auto-20121015-232120 destroyed at /home/root
                Note that the trace is saved in a directory of the same name as returned by 'lttng create', under the ~/lttng-traces directory (note that you can change this by supplying your own name to 'lttng create'):
     root@crownbay:~# ls -al ~/lttng-traces
     drwxrwx---    3 root     root          1024 Oct 15 23:21 .
     drwxr-xr-x    5 root     root          1024 Oct 15 23:57 ..
     drwxrwx---    3 root     root          1024 Oct 15 23:21 auto-20121015-232120
                
For LTTng userspace tracing, you need to have a properly instrumented userspace program. For this example, we'll use the 'hello' test program generated by the lttng-ust build.
The 'hello' test program isn't installed on the rootfs by the lttng-ust build, so we need to copy it over manually. First cd into the build directory that contains the hello executable:
     $ cd build/tmp/work/core2_32-poky-linux/lttng-ust/2.0.5-r0/git/tests/hello/.libs
                Copy that over to the target machine:
     $ scp hello root@192.168.1.20:
                You now have the instrumented lttng 'hello world' test program on the target, ready to test.
First, from the host, ssh to the target:
     $ ssh -l root 192.168.1.47
     The authenticity of host '192.168.1.47 (192.168.1.47)' can't be established.
     RSA key fingerprint is 23:bd:c8:b1:a8:71:52:00:ee:00:4f:64:9e:10:b9:7e.
     Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
     Warning: Permanently added '192.168.1.47' (RSA) to the list of known hosts.
     root@192.168.1.47's password:
                Once on the target, use these steps to create a trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng create
     Session auto-20190303-021943 created.
     Traces will be written in /home/root/lttng-traces/auto-20190303-021943
                Enable the events you want to trace (in this case all userspace events):
     root@crownbay:~# lttng enable-event --userspace --all
     All UST events are enabled in channel channel0
                Start the trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng start
     Tracing started for session auto-20190303-021943
                Run the instrumented hello world program:
     root@crownbay:~# ./hello
     Hello, World!
     Tracing...  done.
                And then stop the trace after awhile or after running a particular workload that you want to trace:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng stop
     Tracing stopped for session auto-20190303-021943
                You can now view the trace in text form on the target:
     root@crownbay:~# lttng view
     [02:31:14.906146544] (+?.?????????) hello:1424 ust_tests_hello:tptest: { cpu_id = 1 }, { intfield = 0, intfield2 = 0x0, longfield = 0, netintfield = 0, netintfieldhex = 0x0, arrfield1 = [ [0] = 1, [1] = 2, [2] = 3 ], arrfield2 = "test", _seqfield1_length = 4, seqfield1 = [ [0] = 116, [1] = 101, [2] = 115, [3] = 116 ], _seqfield2_length = 4,  seqfield2 = "test", stringfield = "test", floatfield = 2222, doublefield = 2, boolfield = 1 }
     [02:31:14.906170360] (+0.000023816) hello:1424 ust_tests_hello:tptest: { cpu_id = 1 }, { intfield = 1, intfield2 = 0x1, longfield = 1, netintfield = 1, netintfieldhex = 0x1, arrfield1 = [ [0] = 1, [1] = 2, [2] = 3 ], arrfield2 = "test", _seqfield1_length = 4, seqfield1 = [ [0] = 116, [1] = 101, [2] = 115, [3] = 116 ], _seqfield2_length = 4, seqfield2 = "test", stringfield = "test", floatfield = 2222, doublefield = 2, boolfield = 1 }
     [02:31:14.906183140] (+0.000012780) hello:1424 ust_tests_hello:tptest: { cpu_id = 1 }, { intfield = 2, intfield2 = 0x2, longfield = 2, netintfield = 2, netintfieldhex = 0x2, arrfield1 = [ [0] = 1, [1] = 2, [2] = 3 ], arrfield2 = "test", _seqfield1_length = 4, seqfield1 = [ [0] = 116, [1] = 101, [2] = 115, [3] = 116 ], _seqfield2_length = 4, seqfield2 = "test", stringfield = "test", floatfield = 2222, doublefield = 2, boolfield = 1 }
     [02:31:14.906194385] (+0.000011245) hello:1424 ust_tests_hello:tptest: { cpu_id = 1 }, { intfield = 3, intfield2 = 0x3, longfield = 3, netintfield = 3, netintfieldhex = 0x3, arrfield1 = [ [0] = 1, [1] = 2, [2] = 3 ], arrfield2 = "test", _seqfield1_length = 4, seqfield1 = [ [0] = 116, [1] = 101, [2] = 115, [3] = 116 ], _seqfield2_length = 4, seqfield2 = "test", stringfield = "test", floatfield = 2222, doublefield = 2, boolfield = 1 }
     .
     .
     .
                You can now safely destroy the trace session (note that this doesn't delete the trace - it's still there in ~/lttng-traces):
     root@crownbay:~# lttng destroy
     Session auto-20190303-021943 destroyed at /home/root
                
If you already have an LTTng trace on a remote target and would like to view it in Eclipse on the host, you can easily copy it from the target to the host and import it into Eclipse to view it using the LTTng Eclipse plug-in already bundled in the Eclipse (Juno SR1 or greater).
Using the trace we created in the previous section, archive it and copy it to your host system:
     root@crownbay:~/lttng-traces# tar zcvf auto-20121015-232120.tar.gz auto-20121015-232120
     auto-20121015-232120/
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/metadata
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/channel0_1
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/channel0_0
     $ scp root@192.168.1.47:lttng-traces/auto-20121015-232120.tar.gz .
     root@192.168.1.47's password:
     auto-20121015-232120.tar.gz                                             100% 1566KB   1.5MB/s   00:01
                Unarchive it on the host:
     $ gunzip -c auto-20121015-232120.tar.gz | tar xvf -
     auto-20121015-232120/
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/metadata
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/channel0_1
     auto-20121015-232120/kernel/channel0_0
                We can now import the trace into Eclipse and view it:
First, start eclipse and open the 'LTTng Kernel' perspective by selecting the following menu item:
     Window | Open Perspective | Other...
                        In the dialog box that opens, select 'LTTng Kernel' from the list.
Back at the main menu, select the following menu item:
     File | New | Project...
                        In the dialog box that opens, select the 'Tracing | Tracing Project' wizard and press 'Next>'.
Give the project a name and press 'Finish'.
In the 'Project Explorer' pane under the project you created, right click on the 'Traces' item.
Select 'Import..." and in the dialog that's displayed:
Browse the filesystem and find the select the 'kernel' directory containing the trace you copied from the target e.g. auto-20121015-232120/kernel
'Checkmark' the directory in the tree that's displayed for the trace
Below that, select 'Common Trace Format: Kernel Trace' for the 'Trace Type'
Press 'Finish' to close the dialog
Back in the 'Project Explorer' pane, double-click on the 'kernel' item for the trace you just imported under 'Traces'
You should now see your trace data displayed graphically in several different views in Eclipse:
|  | 
You can access extensive help information on how to use the LTTng plug-in to search and analyze captured traces via the Eclipse help system:
     Help | Help Contents | LTTng Plug-in User Guide
                
In order to trace a remote target, you also need to add a 'tracing' group on the target and connect as a user who's part of that group e.g:
     # adduser tomz
     # groupadd -r tracing
     # usermod -a -G tracing tomz
                
First, start eclipse and open the 'LTTng Kernel' perspective by selecting the following menu item:
     Window | Open Perspective | Other...
                         In the dialog box that opens, select 'LTTng Kernel' from the list.
Back at the main menu, select the following menu item:
     File | New | Project...
                        In the dialog box that opens, select the 'Tracing | Tracing Project' wizard and press 'Next>'.
Give the project a name and press 'Finish'. That should result in an entry in the 'Project' subwindow.
In the 'Control' subwindow just below it, press 'New Connection'.
Add a new connection, giving it the hostname or IP address of the target system.
Provide the username and password of a qualified user (a member of the 'tracing' group) or root account on the target system.
Provide appropriate answers to whatever else is asked for e.g. 'secure storage password' can be anything you want. If you get an 'RSE Error' it may be due to proxies. It may be possible to get around the problem by changing the following setting:
     Window | Preferences | Network Connections
                        Switch 'Active Provider' to 'Direct'
You can find the primary LTTng Documentation on the LTTng Documentation site. The documentation on this site is appropriate for intermediate to advanced software developers who are working in a Linux environment and are interested in efficient software tracing.
For information on LTTng in general, visit the LTTng Project site. You can find a "Getting Started" link on this site that takes you to an LTTng Quick Start.
Finally, you can access extensive help information on how to use the LTTng plug-in to search and analyze captured traces via the Eclipse help system:
     Help | Help Contents | LTTng Plug-in User Guide
            
blktrace is a tool for tracing and reporting low-level disk I/O. blktrace provides the tracing half of the equation; its output can be piped into the blkparse program, which renders the data in a human-readable form and does some basic analysis:
For this section, we'll assume you've already performed the basic setup outlined in the "General Setup" section.
blktrace is an application that runs on the target system. You can run the entire blktrace and blkparse pipeline on the target, or you can run blktrace in 'listen' mode on the target and have blktrace and blkparse collect and analyze the data on the host (see the "Using blktrace Remotely" section below). For the rest of this section we assume you've ssh'ed to the host and will be running blkrace on the target.
To record a trace, simply run the 'blktrace' command, giving it the name of the block device you want to trace activity on:
     root@crownbay:~# blktrace /dev/sdc
            In another shell, execute a workload you want to trace.
     root@crownbay:/media/sdc# rm linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2; wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2; sync
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |*******************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
            Press Ctrl-C in the blktrace shell to stop the trace. It will display how many events were logged, along with the per-cpu file sizes (blktrace records traces in per-cpu kernel buffers and simply dumps them to userspace for blkparse to merge and sort later).
     ^C=== sdc ===
      CPU  0:                 7082 events,      332 KiB data
      CPU  1:                 1578 events,       74 KiB data
      Total:                  8660 events (dropped 0),      406 KiB data
            If you examine the files saved to disk, you see multiple files, one per CPU and with the device name as the first part of the filename:
     root@crownbay:~# ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x    6 root     root          1024 Oct 27 22:39 .
     drwxr-sr-x    4 root     root          1024 Oct 26 18:24 ..
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root        339938 Oct 27 22:40 sdc.blktrace.0
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root         75753 Oct 27 22:40 sdc.blktrace.1
            To view the trace events, simply invoke 'blkparse' in the directory containing the trace files, giving it the device name that forms the first part of the filenames:
     root@crownbay:~# blkparse sdc
      8,32   1        1     0.000000000  1225  Q  WS 3417048 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        2     0.000025213  1225  G  WS 3417048 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        3     0.000033384  1225  P   N [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        4     0.000043301  1225  I  WS 3417048 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        0     0.000057270     0  m   N cfq1225 insert_request
      8,32   1        0     0.000064813     0  m   N cfq1225 add_to_rr
      8,32   1        5     0.000076336  1225  U   N [jbd2/sdc-8] 1
      8,32   1        0     0.000088559     0  m   N cfq workload slice:150
      8,32   1        0     0.000097359     0  m   N cfq1225 set_active wl_prio:0 wl_type:1
      8,32   1        0     0.000104063     0  m   N cfq1225 Not idling. st->count:1
      8,32   1        0     0.000112584     0  m   N cfq1225 fifo=  (null)
      8,32   1        0     0.000118730     0  m   N cfq1225 dispatch_insert
      8,32   1        0     0.000127390     0  m   N cfq1225 dispatched a request
      8,32   1        0     0.000133536     0  m   N cfq1225 activate rq, drv=1
      8,32   1        6     0.000136889  1225  D  WS 3417048 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        7     0.000360381  1225  Q  WS 3417056 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        8     0.000377422  1225  G  WS 3417056 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        9     0.000388876  1225  P   N [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       10     0.000397886  1225  Q  WS 3417064 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       11     0.000404800  1225  M  WS 3417064 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       12     0.000412343  1225  Q  WS 3417072 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       13     0.000416533  1225  M  WS 3417072 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       14     0.000422121  1225  Q  WS 3417080 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       15     0.000425194  1225  M  WS 3417080 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       16     0.000431968  1225  Q  WS 3417088 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       17     0.000435251  1225  M  WS 3417088 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       18     0.000440279  1225  Q  WS 3417096 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       19     0.000443911  1225  M  WS 3417096 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       20     0.000450336  1225  Q  WS 3417104 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       21     0.000454038  1225  M  WS 3417104 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       22     0.000462070  1225  Q  WS 3417112 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       23     0.000465422  1225  M  WS 3417112 + 8 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1       24     0.000474222  1225  I  WS 3417056 + 64 [jbd2/sdc-8]
      8,32   1        0     0.000483022     0  m   N cfq1225 insert_request
      8,32   1       25     0.000489727  1225  U   N [jbd2/sdc-8] 1
      8,32   1        0     0.000498457     0  m   N cfq1225 Not idling. st->count:1
      8,32   1        0     0.000503765     0  m   N cfq1225 dispatch_insert
      8,32   1        0     0.000512914     0  m   N cfq1225 dispatched a request
      8,32   1        0     0.000518851     0  m   N cfq1225 activate rq, drv=2
      .
      .
      .
      8,32   0        0    58.515006138     0  m   N cfq3551 complete rqnoidle 1
      8,32   0     2024    58.516603269     3  C  WS 3156992 + 16 [0]
      8,32   0        0    58.516626736     0  m   N cfq3551 complete rqnoidle 1
      8,32   0        0    58.516634558     0  m   N cfq3551 arm_idle: 8 group_idle: 0
      8,32   0        0    58.516636933     0  m   N cfq schedule dispatch
      8,32   1        0    58.516971613     0  m   N cfq3551 slice expired t=0
      8,32   1        0    58.516982089     0  m   N cfq3551 sl_used=13 disp=6 charge=13 iops=0 sect=80
      8,32   1        0    58.516985511     0  m   N cfq3551 del_from_rr
      8,32   1        0    58.516990819     0  m   N cfq3551 put_queue
     CPU0 (sdc):
      Reads Queued:           0,        0KiB	 Writes Queued:         331,   26,284KiB
      Read Dispatches:        0,        0KiB	 Write Dispatches:      485,   40,484KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:        0,        0KiB	 Writes Completed:      511,   41,000KiB
      Read Merges:            0,        0KiB	 Write Merges:           13,      160KiB
      Read depth:             0        	 Write depth:             2
      IO unplugs:            23        	 Timer unplugs:           0
     CPU1 (sdc):
      Reads Queued:           0,        0KiB	 Writes Queued:         249,   15,800KiB
      Read Dispatches:        0,        0KiB	 Write Dispatches:       42,    1,600KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:        0,        0KiB	 Writes Completed:       16,    1,084KiB
      Read Merges:            0,        0KiB	 Write Merges:           40,      276KiB
      Read depth:             0        	 Write depth:             2
      IO unplugs:            30        	 Timer unplugs:           1
     Total (sdc):
      Reads Queued:           0,        0KiB	 Writes Queued:         580,   42,084KiB
      Read Dispatches:        0,        0KiB	 Write Dispatches:      527,   42,084KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:        0,        0KiB	 Writes Completed:      527,   42,084KiB
      Read Merges:            0,        0KiB	 Write Merges:           53,      436KiB
      IO unplugs:            53        	 Timer unplugs:           1
     Throughput (R/W): 0KiB/s / 719KiB/s
     Events (sdc): 6,592 entries
     Skips: 0 forward (0 -   0.0%)
     Input file sdc.blktrace.0 added
     Input file sdc.blktrace.1 added
            The report shows each event that was found in the blktrace data, along with a summary of the overall block I/O traffic during the run. You can look at the blkparse manpage to learn the meaning of each field displayed in the trace listing.
blktrace and blkparse are designed from the ground up to be able to operate together in a 'pipe mode' where the stdout of blktrace can be fed directly into the stdin of blkparse:
     root@crownbay:~# blktrace /dev/sdc -o - | blkparse -i -
                This enables long-lived tracing sessions to run without writing anything to disk, and allows the user to look for certain conditions in the trace data in 'real-time' by viewing the trace output as it scrolls by on the screen or by passing it along to yet another program in the pipeline such as grep which can be used to identify and capture conditions of interest.
There's actually another blktrace command that implements the above pipeline as a single command, so the user doesn't have to bother typing in the above command sequence:
     root@crownbay:~# btrace /dev/sdc
                
Because blktrace traces block I/O and at the same time normally writes its trace data to a block device, and in general because it's not really a great idea to make the device being traced the same as the device the tracer writes to, blktrace provides a way to trace without perturbing the traced device at all by providing native support for sending all trace data over the network.
To have blktrace operate in this mode, start blktrace on the target system being traced with the -l option, along with the device to trace:
     root@crownbay:~# blktrace -l /dev/sdc
     server: waiting for connections...
                On the host system, use the -h option to connect to the target system, also passing it the device to trace:
     $ blktrace -d /dev/sdc -h 192.168.1.43
     blktrace: connecting to 192.168.1.43
     blktrace: connected!
                On the target system, you should see this:
     server: connection from 192.168.1.43
                In another shell, execute a workload you want to trace.
     root@crownbay:/media/sdc# rm linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2; wget http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/mirror/sources/linux-2.6.19.2.tar.bz2; sync
     Connecting to downloads.yoctoproject.org (140.211.169.59:80)
     linux-2.6.19.2.tar.b 100% |*******************************| 41727k  0:00:00 ETA
                When it's done, do a Ctrl-C on the host system to stop the trace:
     ^C=== sdc ===
      CPU  0:                 7691 events,      361 KiB data
      CPU  1:                 4109 events,      193 KiB data
      Total:                 11800 events (dropped 0),      554 KiB data
                On the target system, you should also see a trace summary for the trace just ended:
     server: end of run for 192.168.1.43:sdc
     === sdc ===
      CPU  0:                 7691 events,      361 KiB data
      CPU  1:                 4109 events,      193 KiB data
      Total:                 11800 events (dropped 0),      554 KiB data
                The blktrace instance on the host will save the target output inside a hostname-timestamp directory:
     $ ls -al
     drwxr-xr-x   10 root     root          1024 Oct 28 02:40 .
     drwxr-sr-x    4 root     root          1024 Oct 26 18:24 ..
     drwxr-xr-x    2 root     root          1024 Oct 28 02:40 192.168.1.43-2012-10-28-02:40:56
                cd into that directory to see the output files:
     $ ls -l
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root        369193 Oct 28 02:44 sdc.blktrace.0
     -rw-r--r--    1 root     root        197278 Oct 28 02:44 sdc.blktrace.1
                And run blkparse on the host system using the device name:
     $ blkparse sdc
      8,32   1        1     0.000000000  1263  Q  RM 6016 + 8 [ls]
      8,32   1        0     0.000036038     0  m   N cfq1263 alloced
      8,32   1        2     0.000039390  1263  G  RM 6016 + 8 [ls]
      8,32   1        3     0.000049168  1263  I  RM 6016 + 8 [ls]
      8,32   1        0     0.000056152     0  m   N cfq1263 insert_request
      8,32   1        0     0.000061600     0  m   N cfq1263 add_to_rr
      8,32   1        0     0.000075498     0  m   N cfq workload slice:300
      .
      .
      .
      8,32   0        0   177.266385696     0  m   N cfq1267 arm_idle: 8 group_idle: 0
      8,32   0        0   177.266388140     0  m   N cfq schedule dispatch
      8,32   1        0   177.266679239     0  m   N cfq1267 slice expired t=0
      8,32   1        0   177.266689297     0  m   N cfq1267 sl_used=9 disp=6 charge=9 iops=0 sect=56
      8,32   1        0   177.266692649     0  m   N cfq1267 del_from_rr
      8,32   1        0   177.266696560     0  m   N cfq1267 put_queue
     CPU0 (sdc):
      Reads Queued:           0,        0KiB	 Writes Queued:         270,   21,708KiB
      Read Dispatches:       59,    2,628KiB	 Write Dispatches:      495,   39,964KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:       90,    2,752KiB	 Writes Completed:      543,   41,596KiB
      Read Merges:            0,        0KiB	 Write Merges:            9,      344KiB
      Read depth:             2        	 Write depth:             2
      IO unplugs:            20        	 Timer unplugs:           1
     CPU1 (sdc):
      Reads Queued:         688,    2,752KiB	 Writes Queued:         381,   20,652KiB
      Read Dispatches:       31,      124KiB	 Write Dispatches:       59,    2,396KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:        0,        0KiB	 Writes Completed:       11,      764KiB
      Read Merges:          598,    2,392KiB	 Write Merges:           88,      448KiB
      Read depth:             2        	 Write depth:             2
      IO unplugs:            52        	 Timer unplugs:           0
     Total (sdc):
      Reads Queued:         688,    2,752KiB	 Writes Queued:         651,   42,360KiB
      Read Dispatches:       90,    2,752KiB	 Write Dispatches:      554,   42,360KiB
      Reads Requeued:         0		 Writes Requeued:         0
      Reads Completed:       90,    2,752KiB	 Writes Completed:      554,   42,360KiB
      Read Merges:          598,    2,392KiB	 Write Merges:           97,      792KiB
      IO unplugs:            72        	 Timer unplugs:           1
     Throughput (R/W): 15KiB/s / 238KiB/s
     Events (sdc): 9,301 entries
     Skips: 0 forward (0 -   0.0%)
                You should see the trace events and summary just as you would have if you'd run the same command on the target.
It's also possible to trace block I/O using only trace events subsystem, which can be useful for casual tracing if you don't want to bother dealing with the userspace tools.
To enable tracing for a given device, use /sys/block/xxx/trace/enable, where xxx is the device name. This for example enables tracing for /dev/sdc:
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo 1 > /sys/block/sdc/trace/enable
                Once you've selected the device(s) you want to trace, selecting the 'blk' tracer will turn the blk tracer on:
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat available_tracers
     blk function_graph function nop
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo blk > current_tracer
                Execute the workload you're interested in:
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat /media/sdc/testfile.txt
                And look at the output (note here that we're using 'trace_pipe' instead of trace to capture this trace - this allows us to wait around on the pipe for data to appear):
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# cat trace_pipe
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276361:   8,32   Q   R 1699848 + 8 [cat]
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276410:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 alloced
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276415:   8,32   G   R 1699848 + 8 [cat]
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276424:   8,32   P   N [cat]
                 cat-3587  [001] d..2  3023.276432:   8,32   I   R 1699848 + 8 [cat]
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276439:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 insert_request
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276445:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 add_to_rr
                 cat-3587  [001] d..2  3023.276454:   8,32   U   N [cat] 1
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276464:   8,32   m   N cfq workload slice:150
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276471:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 set_active wl_prio:0 wl_type:2
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276478:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 fifo=  (null)
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276483:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 dispatch_insert
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276490:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 dispatched a request
                 cat-3587  [001] d..1  3023.276497:   8,32   m   N cfq3587 activate rq, drv=1
                 cat-3587  [001] d..2  3023.276500:   8,32   D   R 1699848 + 8 [cat]
                And this turns off tracing for the specified device:
     root@crownbay:/sys/kernel/debug/tracing# echo 0 > /sys/block/sdc/trace/enable
                
Online versions of the man pages for the commands discussed in this section can be found here:
The above manpages, along with manpages for the other blktrace utilities (btt, blkiomon, etc) can be found in the /doc directory of the blktrace tools git repo:
     $ git clone git://git.kernel.dk/blktrace.git
            
This chapter contains real-world examples.
In one of our previous releases (denzil), users noticed that booting off of a live image and writing to disk was noticeably slower. This included the boot itself, especially the first one, since first boots tend to do a significant amount of writing due to certain post-install scripts.
The problem (and solution) was discovered by using the Yocto tracing tools, in this case 'perf stat', 'perf script', 'perf record' and 'perf report'.
See all the unvarnished details of how this bug was diagnosed and solved here: Yocto Bug #3049
|  | 
This manual provides reference information for the current release of the Yocto Project. The Yocto Project is an open-source collaboration project focused on embedded Linux developers. Amongst other things, the Yocto Project uses the OpenEmbedded build system, which is based on the Poky project, to construct complete Linux images. You can find complete introductory and getting started information on the Yocto Project by reading the Yocto Project Quick Start.
For task-based information using the Yocto Project, see the Yocto Project Development Manual and the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. For Board Support Package (BSP) structure information, see the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide. For information on how to use a Software Development Kit, (SDK), see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide. You can find information on tracing and profiling in the Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing Manual. For information on BitBake, which is the task execution tool the OpenEmbedded build system is based on, see the BitBake User Manual. Finally, you can also find lots of Yocto Project information on the Yocto Project website.
This reference manual consists of the following:
Using the Yocto Project: Provides an overview of the components that make up the Yocto Project followed by information about debugng images created in the Yocto Project.
A Closer Look at the Yocto Project Development Environment: Provides a more detailed look at the Yocto Project development environment within the context of development.
Technical Details: Describes fundamental Yocto Project components as well as an explanation behind how the Yocto Project uses shared state (sstate) cache to speed build time.
Migrating to a Newer Yocto Project Release: Describes release-specific information that helps you move from one Yocto Project Release to another.
Directory Structure: Describes the Source Directory created either by unpacking a released Yocto Project tarball on your host development system, or by cloning the upstream Poky Git repository.
Classes: Describes the classes used in the Yocto Project.
Tasks: Describes the tasks defined by the OpenEmbedded build system.
QA Error and Warning Messages: Lists and describes QA warning and error messages.
Images: Describes the standard images that the Yocto Project supports.
Features: Describes mechanisms for creating distribution, machine, and image features during the build process using the OpenEmbedded build system.
Variables Glossary: Presents most variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system, which uses BitBake. Entries describe the function of the variable and how to apply them.
Variable Context: Provides variable locality or context.
FAQ: Provides answers for commonly asked questions in the Yocto Project development environment.
Contributing to the Yocto Project: Provides guidance on how you can contribute back to the Yocto Project.
For general Yocto Project system requirements, see the "Setting Up to Use the Yocto Project" section in the Yocto Project Quick Start. The remainder of this section provides details on system requirements not covered in the Yocto Project Quick Start.
Currently, the Yocto Project is supported on the following distributions:
Yocto Project releases are tested against the stable Linux distributions in the following list. The Yocto Project should work on other distributions but validation is not performed against them.
In particular, the Yocto Project does not support and currently has no plans to support rolling-releases or development distributions due to their constantly changing nature. We welcome patches and bug reports, but keep in mind that our priority is on the supported platforms listed below.
If you encounter problems, please go to Yocto Project Bugzilla and submit a bug. We are interested in hearing about your experience.
Ubuntu 14.04 (LTS)
Ubuntu 14.10
Ubuntu 15.04
Ubuntu 15.10
Fedora release 21
Fedora release 22
CentOS release 6.x
CentOS release 7.x
Debian GNU/Linux 7.x (Wheezy)
Debian GNU/Linux 8.x (Jessie)
openSUSE 13.2
The list of packages you need on the host development system can be large when covering all build scenarios using the Yocto Project. This section provides required packages according to Linux distribution and function.
The following list shows the required packages by function given a supported Ubuntu or Debian Linux distribution:
oss4-dev package installed, you
                    might experience QEMU build failures due to the package
                    installing its own custom
                    /usr/include/linux/soundcard.h on
                    the Debian system.
                    If you run into this situation, either of the following
                    solutions exist:
                    
     $ sudo apt-get build-dep qemu
     $ sudo apt-get remove oss4-dev
                    
Essentials: Packages needed to build an image on a headless system:
     $ sudo apt-get install gawk wget git-core diffstat unzip texinfo gcc-multilib \
     build-essential chrpath socat
                        Graphical and Eclipse Plug-In Extras: Packages recommended if the host system has graphics support or if you are going to use the Eclipse IDE:
     $ sudo apt-get install libsdl1.2-dev xterm
                        Documentation: Packages needed if you are going to build out the Yocto Project documentation manuals:
     $ sudo apt-get install make xsltproc docbook-utils fop dblatex xmlto
                        SDK Installer Extras: Packages needed if you are going to be using the the standard or extensible SDK:
     $ sudo apt-get install autoconf automake libtool libglib2.0-dev libarchive-dev
                        OpenEmbedded Self-Test (oe-selftest):
                        Packages needed if you are going to run
                        oe-selftest:
                        
     $ sudo apt-get install python-git
                        
The following list shows the required packages by function given a supported Fedora Linux distribution:
Essentials: Packages needed to build an image for a headless system:
     $ sudo dnf install gawk make wget tar bzip2 gzip python unzip perl patch \
     diffutils diffstat git cpp gcc gcc-c++ glibc-devel texinfo chrpath \
     ccache perl-Data-Dumper perl-Text-ParseWords perl-Thread-Queue perl-bignum socat \
     findutils which
                        Graphical and Eclipse Plug-In Extras: Packages recommended if the host system has graphics support or if you are going to use the Eclipse IDE:
     $ sudo dnf install SDL-devel xterm
                        Documentation: Packages needed if you are going to build out the Yocto Project documentation manuals:
     $ sudo dnf install make docbook-style-dsssl docbook-style-xsl \
     docbook-dtds docbook-utils fop libxslt dblatex xmlto xsltproc
                        SDK Installer Extras: Packages needed if you are going to be using the standard or extensible SDK:
     $ sudo dnf install autoconf automake libtool glib2-devel libarchive-devel
                        OpenEmbedded Self-Test (oe-selftest):
                        Packages needed if you are going to run
                        oe-selftest:
                        
     $ sudo dnf install GitPython
                        
The following list shows the required packages by function given a supported openSUSE Linux distribution:
Essentials: Packages needed to build an image for a headless system:
     $ sudo zypper install python gcc gcc-c++ git chrpath make wget python-xml \
     diffstat makeinfo python-curses patch socat
                        Graphical and Eclipse Plug-In Extras: Packages recommended if the host system has graphics support or if you are going to use the Eclipse IDE:
     $ sudo zypper install libSDL-devel xterm
                        Documentation: Packages needed if you are going to build out the Yocto Project documentation manuals:
     $ sudo zypper install make fop xsltproc dblatex xmlto
                        SDK Installer Extras: Packages needed if you are going to be using the standard or extensible SDK:
     $ sudo zypper install autoconf automake libtool glib2-devel libarchive-devel
                        OpenEmbedded Self-Test (oe-selftest):
                        Packages needed if you are going to run
                        oe-selftest:
                        
     $ sudo zypper install python-GitPython
                        
The following list shows the required packages by function given a supported CentOS Linux distribution:
Essentials: Packages needed to build an image for a headless system:
     $ sudo yum install gawk make wget tar bzip2 gzip python unzip perl patch \
     diffutils diffstat git cpp gcc gcc-c++ glibc-devel texinfo chrpath socat \
     perl-Data-Dumper perl-Text-ParseWords perl-Thread-Queue
                        Graphical and Eclipse Plug-In Extras: Packages recommended if the host system has graphics support or if you are going to use the Eclipse IDE:
     $ sudo yum install SDL-devel xterm
                        Documentation: Packages needed if you are going to build out the Yocto Project documentation manuals:
     $ sudo yum install make docbook-style-dsssl docbook-style-xsl \
     docbook-dtds docbook-utils fop libxslt dblatex xmlto xsltproc
                        SDK Installer Extras: Packages needed if you are going to be using the standard or extensible SDK:
     $ sudo yum install autoconf automake libtool glib2-devel libarchive-devel
                        OpenEmbedded Self-Test (oe-selftest):
                        Packages needed if you are going to run
                        oe-selftest:
                        
     $ sudo yum install GitPython
                        
In order to use the build system, your host development system must meet the following version requirements for Git, tar, and Python:
Git 1.8.3.1 or greater
tar 1.24 or greater
Python 2.7.3 or greater not including Python 3.x, which is not supported.
            If your host development system does not meet all these requirements,
            you can resolve this by installing a buildtools
            tarball that contains these tools.
            You can get the tarball one of two ways: download a pre-built
            tarball or use BitBake to build the tarball.
        
buildtools Tarball¶Downloading and running a pre-built buildtools installer is the easiest of the two methods by which you can get these tools:
                        Locate and download the *.sh at
                        http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/yocto/yocto-2.1.2/buildtools/.
                        
Execute the installation script. Here is an example:
     $ sh poky-glibc-x86_64-buildtools-tarball-x86_64-buildtools-nativesdk-standalone-2.1.2.sh
                        During execution, a prompt appears that allows you to choose the installation directory. For example, you could choose the following:
     /home/your-username/buildtools
                        
Source the tools environment setup script by using a command like the following:
     $ source /home/your_username/buildtools/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
                        Of course, you need to supply your installation directory and be sure to use the right file (i.e. i585 or x86-64).
                        After you have sourced the setup script,
                        the tools are added to PATH
                        and any other environment variables required to run the
                        tools are initialized.
                        The results are working versions versions of Git, tar,
                        Python and chrpath.
                        
buildtools Tarball¶
                Building and running your own buildtools installer applies
                only when you have a build host that can already run BitBake.
                In this case, you use that machine to build the
                .sh file and then
                take steps to transfer and run it on a
                machine that does not meet the minimal Git, tar, and Python
                requirements.
            
Here are the steps to take to build and run your own buildtools installer:
                        On the machine that is able to run BitBake,
                        be sure you have set up your build environment with
                        the setup script
                        (oe-init-build-env
                        or
                        oe-init-build-env-memres).
                        
Run the BitBake command to build the tarball:
     $ bitbake buildtools-tarball
                        
SDKMACHINE
                        variable in your local.conf file
                        determines whether you build tools for a 32-bit
                        or 64-bit system.
                       
                       Once the build completes, you can find the
                       .sh file that installs
                       the tools in the tmp/deploy/sdk
                       subdirectory of the
                       Build Directory.
                       The installer file has the string "buildtools"
                       in the name.
                       
                       Transfer the .sh file from the
                       build host to the machine that does not meet the
                       Git, tar, or Python requirements.
                       
                       On the machine that does not meet the requirements,
                       run the .sh file
                       to install the tools.
                       Here is an example:
                       
     $ sh poky-glibc-x86_64-buildtools-tarball-x86_64-buildtools-nativesdk-standalone-2.1.2.sh
                       During execution, a prompt appears that allows you to choose the installation directory. For example, you could choose the following:
     /home/your_username/buildtools
                       
Source the tools environment setup script by using a command like the following:
     $ source /home/your_username/buildtools/environment-setup-i586-poky-linux
                        Of course, you need to supply your installation directory and be sure to use the right file (i.e. i585 or x86-64).
                        After you have sourced the setup script,
                        the tools are added to PATH
                        and any other environment variables required to run the
                        tools are initialized.
                        The results are working versions versions of Git, tar,
                        Python and chrpath.
                        
The Yocto Project development team makes the Yocto Project available through a number of methods:
Source Repositories:
                Working from a copy of the upstream
                poky repository is the
                preferred method for obtaining and using a Yocto Project
                release.
                You can view the Yocto Project Source Repositories at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit.cgi.
                In particular, you can find the
                poky repository at
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/.
                
Releases: Stable, tested releases are available as tarballs through http://downloads.yoctoproject.org/releases/yocto/.
Nightly Builds: These tarball releases are available at http://autobuilder.yoctoproject.org/pub/nightly/. These builds include Yocto Project releases, SDK installation scripts, and experimental builds.
Yocto Project Website: You can find tarball releases of the Yocto Project and supported BSPs at the Yocto Project website. Along with these downloads, you can find lots of other information at this site.
Development using the Yocto Project requires a local Source Directory. You can set up the Source Directory by cloning a copy of the upstream poky Git repository. For information on how to do this, see the "Getting Set Up" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
This chapter describes common usage for the Yocto Project. The information is introductory in nature as other manuals in the Yocto Project documentation set provide more details on how to use the Yocto Project.
This section provides a summary of the build process and provides information for less obvious aspects of the build process. For general information on how to build an image using the OpenEmbedded build system, see the "Building Images" section of the Yocto Project Quick Start.
In the development environment you will need to build an image whenever you change hardware support, add or change system libraries, or add or change services that have dependencies.

Building an Image
            The first thing you need to do is set up the OpenEmbedded build
            environment by sourcing an environment setup script
            (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
            Here is an example:
            
     $ source oe-init-build-env [build_dir]
            
            The build_dir argument is optional and specifies the directory the
            OpenEmbedded build system uses for the build -
            the Build Directory.
            If you do not specify a Build Directory, it defaults to a directory
            named build in your current working directory.
            A common practice is to use a different Build Directory for different targets.
            For example, ~/build/x86 for a qemux86
            target, and ~/build/arm for a qemuarm target.
        
Once the build environment is set up, you can build a target using:
     $ bitbake target
            
            The target is the name of the recipe you want to build.
            Common targets are the images in meta/recipes-core/images,
            meta/recipes-sato/images, etc. all found in the
            Source Directory.
            Or, the target can be the name of a recipe for a specific piece of software such as
            BusyBox.
            For more details about the images the OpenEmbedded build system supports, see the
            "Images" chapter.
        
When building an image using GPL components, you need to maintain your original settings and not switch back and forth applying different versions of the GNU General Public License. If you rebuild using different versions of GPL, dependency errors might occur due to some components not being rebuilt.
        Once an image has been built, it often needs to be installed.
        The images and kernels built by the OpenEmbedded build system are placed in the
        Build Directory in
        tmp/deploy/images.
        For information on how to run pre-built images such as qemux86
        and qemuarm, see the
        Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
        For information about how to install these images, see the documentation for your
        particular board or machine.
    
The exact method for debugging build failures depends on the nature of the problem and on the system's area from which the bug originates. Standard debugging practices such as comparison against the last known working version with examination of the changes and the re-application of steps to identify the one causing the problem are valid for the Yocto Project just as they are for any other system. Even though it is impossible to detail every possible potential failure, this section provides some general tips to aid in debugging.
A useful feature for debugging is the error reporting tool. Configuring the Yocto Project to use this tool causes the OpenEmbedded build system to produce error reporting commands as part of the console output. You can enter the commands after the build completes to log error information into a common database, that can help you figure out what might be going wrong. For information on how to enable and use this feature, see the "Using the Error Reporting Tool" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
For discussions on debugging, see the "Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) Remotely" section in the Yocto Project Developer's Manual and the "Working within Eclipse" section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
bitbake command.
        You can learn about BitBake by reading the
        BitBake User Manual.
    The log file for shell tasks is available in
            ${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_.
            For example, the taskname.piddo_compile task for the QEMU minimal image for the x86
            machine (qemux86) might be
            tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/core-image-minimal/1.0-r0/temp/log.do_compile.20830.
            To see what
            BitBake
            runs to generate that log, look at the corresponding
            run.do_ file located in the same directory.
        taskname.pid
Presently, the output from Python tasks is sent directly to the console.
            Any given package consists of a set of tasks.
            The standard BitBake behavior in most cases is:
            do_fetch,
            do_unpack,
            do_patch, do_configure,
            do_compile, do_install,
            do_package,
            do_package_write_*, and
            do_build.
            The default task is do_build and any tasks
            on which it depends build first.
            Some tasks, such as do_devshell, are not part
            of the default build chain.
            If you wish to run a task that is not part of the default build
            chain, you can use the -c option in BitBake.
            Here is an example:
            
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c devshell
            
            If you wish to rerun a task, use the -f force
            option.
            For example, the following sequence forces recompilation after
            changing files in the work directory.
            
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
               .
               .
        make some changes to the source code in the work directory
               .
               .
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c compile -f
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
            
            This sequence first builds and then recompiles
            matchbox-desktop.
            The last command reruns all tasks (basically the packaging tasks)
            after the compile.
            BitBake recognizes that the do_compile
            task was rerun and therefore understands that the other tasks
            also need to be run again.
        
            You can view a list of tasks in a given package by running the
            do_listtasks task as follows:
            
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop -c listtasks
            
            The results appear as output to the console and are also in the
            file ${WORKDIR}/temp/log.do_listtasks.
        
            Sometimes it can be hard to see why BitBake wants to build
            other packages before building a given package you have specified.
            The bitbake -g  command
            creates the targetnamepn-buildlist,
            pn-depends.dot,
            package-depends.dot, and
            task-depends.dot files in the current
            directory.
            These files show what will be built and the package and task
            dependencies, which are useful for debugging problems.
            You can use the
            bitbake -g -u depexp 
            command to display the results in a more human-readable form.
        targetname
            You can see debug output from BitBake by using the -D option.
            The debug output gives more information about what BitBake
            is doing and the reason behind it.
            Each -D option you use increases the logging level.
            The most common usage is -DDD.
        
            The output from bitbake -DDD -v targetname can reveal why
            BitBake chose a certain version of a package or why BitBake
            picked a certain provider.
            This command could also help you in a situation where you think BitBake did something
            unexpected.
        
Sometimes issues on the host development system can cause your build to fail. Following are known, host-specific problems. Be sure to always consult the Release Notes for a look at all release-related issues.
glibc-initial fails to build:
                    If your development host system has the unpatched
                    GNU Make 3.82,
                    the
                    do_install
                    task fails for glibc-initial during
                    the build.
Typically, every distribution that ships
                    GNU Make 3.82 as
                    the default already has the patched version.
                    However, some distributions, such as Debian, have
                    GNU Make 3.82 as an option, which
                    is unpatched.
                    You will see this error on these types of distributions.
                    Switch to GNU Make 3.81 or patch
                    your make to solve the problem.
                    
            To build a specific recipe (.bb file),
            you can use the following command form:
            
     $ bitbake -b somepath/somerecipe.bb
            This command form does not check for dependencies. Consequently, you should use it only when you know existing dependencies have been met.
            You can use the -e BitBake option to
            display the parsing environment for a configuration.
            The following displays the general parsing environment:
            
     $ bitbake -e
            This next example shows the parsing environment for a specific recipe:
     $ bitbake -e recipename
            
Best practices exist while writing recipes that both log build progress and act on build conditions such as warnings and errors. Both Python and Bash language bindings exist for the logging mechanism:
Python: For Python functions, BitBake
                    supports several loglevels: bb.fatal,
                    bb.error, bb.warn,
                    bb.note, bb.plain,
                    and bb.debug.
Bash: For Bash functions, the same set
                    of loglevels exist and are accessed with a similar syntax:
                    bbfatal, bberror,
                    bbwarn, bbnote,
                    bbplain, and bbdebug.
            For guidance on how logging is handled in both Python and Bash recipes, see the
            logging.bbclass file in the
            meta/classes folder of the
            Source Directory.
        
When creating recipes using Python and inserting code that handles build logs, keep in mind the goal is to have informative logs while keeping the console as "silent" as possible. Also, if you want status messages in the log, use the "debug" loglevel.
                Following is an example written in Python.
                The code handles logging for a function that determines the
                number of tasks needed to be run.
                See the
                "do_listtasks"
                section for additional information:
                
     python do_listtasks() {
         bb.debug(2, "Starting to figure out the task list")
         if noteworthy_condition:
             bb.note("There are 47 tasks to run")
         bb.debug(2, "Got to point xyz")
         if warning_trigger:
             bb.warn("Detected warning_trigger, this might be a problem later.")
         if recoverable_error:
             bb.error("Hit recoverable_error, you really need to fix this!")
         if fatal_error:
             bb.fatal("fatal_error detected, unable to print the task list")
         bb.plain("The tasks present are abc")
         bb.debug(2, "Finished figuring out the tasklist")
     }
                
When creating recipes using Bash and inserting code that handles build logs, you have the same goals - informative with minimal console output. The syntax you use for recipes written in Bash is similar to that of recipes written in Python described in the previous section.
                Following is an example written in Bash.
                The code logs the progress of the do_my_function function.
                
     do_my_function() {
         bbdebug 2 "Running do_my_function"
         if [ exceptional_condition ]; then
             bbnote "Hit exceptional_condition"
         fi
         bbdebug 2  "Got to point xyz"
         if [ warning_trigger ]; then
             bbwarn "Detected warning_trigger, this might cause a problem later."
         fi
         if [ recoverable_error ]; then
             bberror "Hit recoverable_error, correcting"
         fi
         if [ fatal_error ]; then
             bbfatal "fatal_error detected"
         fi
         bbdebug 2 "Completed do_my_function"
     }
                
Here are some other tips that you might find useful:
When adding new packages, it is worth watching for
                    undesirable items making their way into compiler command lines.
                    For example, you do not want references to local system files like
                    /usr/lib/ or /usr/include/.
                    
If you want to remove the psplash
                    boot splashscreen,
                    add psplash=false to  the kernel command line.
                    Doing so prevents psplash from loading
                    and thus allows you to see the console.
                    It is also possible to switch out of the splashscreen by
                    switching the virtual console (e.g. Fn+Left or Fn+Right on a Zaurus).
                    
Many factors can influence the quality of a build. For example, if you upgrade a recipe to use a new version of an upstream software package or you experiment with some new configuration options, subtle changes can occur that you might not detect until later. Consider the case where your recipe is using a newer version of an upstream package. In this case, a new version of a piece of software might introduce an optional dependency on another library, which is auto-detected. If that library has already been built when the software is building, the software will link to the built library and that library will be pulled into your image along with the new software even if you did not want the library.
        The
        buildhistory
        class exists to help you maintain
        the quality of your build output.
        You can use the class to highlight unexpected and possibly unwanted
        changes in the build output.
        When you enable build history, it records information about the contents of
        each package and image and then commits that information to a local Git
        repository where you can examine the information.
    
The remainder of this section describes the following:
How you can enable and disable build history
How to understand what the build history contains
How to limit the information used for build history
How to examine the build history from both a command-line and web interface
            Build history is disabled by default.
            To enable it, add the following INHERIT
            statement and set the
            BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT
            variable to "1" at the end of your
            conf/local.conf file found in the
            Build Directory:
            
     INHERIT += "buildhistory"
     BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"
            Enabling build history as previously described causes the build process to collect build output information and commit it to a local Git repository.
            You can disable build history by removing the previous statements
            from your conf/local.conf file.
        
            Build history information is kept in
            ${TOPDIR}/buildhistory
            in the Build Directory as defined by the
            BUILDHISTORY_DIR
            variable.
            The following is an example abbreviated listing:
            
|  | 
            At the top level, there is a metadata-revs file
            that lists the revisions of the repositories for the layers enabled
            when the build was produced.
            The rest of the data splits into separate
            packages, images and
            sdk directories, the contents of which are
            described below.
        
                The history for each package contains a text file that has
                name-value pairs with information about the package.
                For example, buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/busybox/latest
                contains the following:
                
     PV = 1.22.1
     PR = r32
     RPROVIDES =
     RDEPENDS = glibc (>= 2.20) update-alternatives-opkg
     RRECOMMENDS = busybox-syslog busybox-udhcpc update-rc.d
     PKGSIZE = 540168
     FILES = /usr/bin/* /usr/sbin/* /usr/lib/busybox/* /usr/lib/lib*.so.* \
        /etc /com /var /bin/* /sbin/* /lib/*.so.* /lib/udev/rules.d \
        /usr/lib/udev/rules.d /usr/share/busybox /usr/lib/busybox/* \
        /usr/share/pixmaps /usr/share/applications /usr/share/idl \
        /usr/share/omf /usr/share/sounds /usr/lib/bonobo/servers
     FILELIST = /bin/busybox /bin/busybox.nosuid /bin/busybox.suid /bin/sh \
        /etc/busybox.links.nosuid /etc/busybox.links.suid
                
                Most of these name-value pairs correspond to variables used
                to produce the package.
                The exceptions are FILELIST, which is the
                actual list of files in the package, and
                PKGSIZE, which is the total size of files
                in the package in bytes.
            
                There is also a file corresponding to the recipe from which the
                package came (e.g.
                buildhistory/packages/i586-poky-linux/busybox/latest):
                
     PV = 1.22.1
     PR = r32
     DEPENDS = initscripts kern-tools-native update-rc.d-native \
        virtual/i586-poky-linux-compilerlibs virtual/i586-poky-linux-gcc \
        virtual/libc virtual/update-alternatives
     PACKAGES = busybox-ptest busybox-httpd busybox-udhcpd busybox-udhcpc \
        busybox-syslog busybox-mdev busybox-hwclock busybox-dbg \
        busybox-staticdev busybox-dev busybox-doc busybox-locale busybox
                
                Finally, for those recipes fetched from a version control
                system (e.g., Git), a file exists that lists source revisions
                that are specified in the recipe and lists the actual revisions
                used during the build.
                Listed and actual revisions might differ when
                SRCREV
                is set to
                ${AUTOREV}.
                Here is an example assuming
                buildhistory/packages/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/latest_srcrev):
                
     # SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
     SRCREV_machine = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
     # SRCREV_meta = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
     SRCREV_meta = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
                
                You can use the buildhistory-collect-srcrevs
                command with the -a option to
                collect the stored SRCREV values
                from build history and report them in a format suitable for
                use in global configuration (e.g.,
                local.conf or a distro include file) to
                override floating AUTOREV values to a
                fixed set of revisions.
                Here is some example output from this command:
                
     $ buildhistory-collect-srcrevs -a
     # i586-poky-linux
     SRCREV_pn-glibc = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
     SRCREV_pn-glibc-initial = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
     SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils = "53274f087565fd45d8452c5367997ba6a682a37a"
     SRCREV_pn-kmod = "fd56638aed3fe147015bfa10ed4a5f7491303cb4"
     # x86_64-linux
     SRCREV_pn-gtk-doc-stub-native = "1dea266593edb766d6d898c79451ef193eb17cfa"
     SRCREV_pn-dtc-native = "65cc4d2748a2c2e6f27f1cf39e07a5dbabd80ebf"
     SRCREV_pn-update-rc.d-native = "eca680ddf28d024954895f59a241a622dd575c11"
     SRCREV_glibc_pn-cross-localedef-native = "b8079dd0d360648e4e8de48656c5c38972621072"
     SRCREV_localedef_pn-cross-localedef-native = "c833367348d39dad7ba018990bfdaffaec8e9ed3"
     SRCREV_pn-prelink-native = "faa069deec99bf61418d0bab831c83d7c1b797ca"
     SRCREV_pn-opkg-utils-native = "53274f087565fd45d8452c5367997ba6a682a37a"
     SRCREV_pn-kern-tools-native = "23345b8846fe4bd167efdf1bd8a1224b2ba9a5ff"
     SRCREV_pn-kmod-native = "fd56638aed3fe147015bfa10ed4a5f7491303cb4"
     # qemux86-poky-linux
     SRCREV_machine_pn-linux-yocto = "38cd560d5022ed2dbd1ab0dca9642e47c98a0aa1"
     SRCREV_meta_pn-linux-yocto = "a227f20eff056e511d504b2e490f3774ab260d6f"
     # all-poky-linux
     SRCREV_pn-update-rc.d = "eca680ddf28d024954895f59a241a622dd575c11"
                
buildhistory-collect-srcrevs command:
                    By default, only values where the
                            SRCREV was
                            not hardcoded (usually when AUTOREV
                            was used) are reported.
                            Use the -a option to see all
                            SRCREV values.
                            
The output statements might not have any effect
                            if overrides are applied elsewhere in the build system
                            configuration.
                            Use the -f option to add the
                            forcevariable override to each output line
                            if you need to work around this restriction.
                            
The script does apply special handling when
                            building for multiple machines.
                            However, the script does place a
                            comment before each set of values that specifies
                            which triplet to which they belong as shown above
                            (e.g., i586-poky-linux).
                            
The files produced for each image are as follows:
image-files:
                        A directory containing selected files from the root
                        filesystem.
                        The files are defined by
                        BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES.
                        
build-id.txt:
                        Human-readable information about the build configuration
                        and metadata source revisions.
                        This file contains the full build header as printed
                        by BitBake.
*.dot:
                        Dependency graphs for the image that are
                        compatible with graphviz.
                        
files-in-image.txt:
 	                    A list of files in the image with permissions,
                        owner, group, size, and symlink information.
                        
image-info.txt:
                        A text file containing name-value pairs with information
                        about the image.
                        See the following listing example for more information.
                        
installed-package-names.txt:
                        A list of installed packages by name only.
installed-package-sizes.txt:
                        A list of installed packages ordered by size.
                        
installed-packages.txt:
                        A list of installed packages with full package
                        filenames.
                Here is an example of image-info.txt:
                
     DISTRO = poky
     DISTRO_VERSION = 1.7
     USER_CLASSES = buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink
     IMAGE_CLASSES = image_types
     IMAGE_FEATURES = debug-tweaks
     IMAGE_LINGUAS =
     IMAGE_INSTALL = packagegroup-core-boot run-postinsts
     BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
     NO_RECOMMENDATIONS =
     PACKAGE_EXCLUDE =
     ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND = write_package_manifest; license_create_manifest; \
        write_image_manifest ; buildhistory_list_installed_image ; \
        buildhistory_get_image_installed ; ssh_allow_empty_password;  \
        postinst_enable_logging; rootfs_update_timestamp ; ssh_disable_dns_lookup ;
     IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND =   buildhistory_get_imageinfo ;
     IMAGESIZE = 6900
                
                Other than IMAGESIZE, which is the
                total size of the files in the image in Kbytes, the
                name-value pairs are variables that may have influenced the
                content of the image.
                This information is often useful when you are trying to determine
                why a change in the package or file listings has occurred.
            
                As you can see, build history produces image information,
                including dependency graphs, so you can see why something
                was pulled into the image.
                If you are just interested in this information and not
                interested in collecting specific package or SDK information,
                you can enable writing only image information without
                any history by adding the following to your
                conf/local.conf file found in the
                Build Directory:
                
     INHERIT += "buildhistory"
     BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "0"
     BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES = "image"
                
                Here, you set the
                BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES
                variable to use the image feature only.
            
                Build history collects similar information on the contents
                of SDKs
                (e.g. bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename)
                as compared to information it collects for images.
                Furthermore, this information differs depending on whether an
                extensible or standard SDK is being produced.
            
The following list shows the files produced for SDKs:
files-in-sdk.txt:
                        A list of files in the SDK with permissions,
                        owner, group, size, and symlink information.
                        This list includes both the host and target parts
                        of the SDK.
                        
sdk-info.txt:
                        A text file containing name-value pairs with information
                        about the SDK.
                        See the following listing example for more information.
                        
sstate-task-sizes.txt:
                        A text file containing name-value pairs with information
                        about task group sizes
                        (e.g. do_populate_sysroot tasks
                        have a total size).
                        The sstate-task-sizes.txt file
                        exists only when an extensible SDK is created.
                        
sstate-package-sizes.txt:
                        A text file containing name-value pairs with information
                        for the shared-state packages and sizes in the SDK.
                        The sstate-package-sizes.txt file
                        exists only when an extensible SDK is created.
                        
sdk-files:
                        A folder that contains copies of the files mentioned in
                        BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES if the
                        files are present in the output.
                        Additionally, the default value of
                        BUILDHISTORY_SDK_FILES is specific
                        to the extensible SDK although you can set it
                        differently if you would like to pull in specific files
                        from the standard SDK.
The default files are
                        conf/local.conf,
                        conf/bblayers.conf,
                        conf/auto.conf,
                        conf/locked-sigs.inc, and
                        conf/devtool.conf.
                        Thus, for an extensible SDK, these files get copied
                        into the sdk-files directory.
                        
The following information appears under
                        each of the host
                        and target directories
                        for the portions of the SDK that run on the host and
                        on the target, respectively:
                        
depends.dot:
                                Dependency graph for the SDK that is
                                compatible with graphviz.
                                
installed-package-names.txt:
                                A list of installed packages by name only.
                                
installed-package-sizes.txt:
                                A list of installed packages ordered by size.
                                
installed-packages.txt:
                                A list of installed packages with full package
                                filenames.
                Here is an example of sdk-info.txt:
                
     DISTRO = poky
     DISTRO_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot-20130327
     SDK_NAME = poky-glibc-i686-arm
     SDK_VERSION = 1.3+snapshot
     SDKMACHINE =
     SDKIMAGE_FEATURES = dev-pkgs dbg-pkgs
     BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS =
     SDKSIZE = 352712
                
                Other than SDKSIZE, which is the
                total size of the files in the SDK in Kbytes, the
                name-value pairs are variables that might have influenced the
                content of the SDK.
                This information is often useful when you are trying to
                determine why a change in the package or file listings
                has occurred.
            
You can examine build history output from the command line or from a web interface.
                To see any changes that have occurred (assuming you have
                BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT = "1"),
                you can simply
                use any Git command that allows you to view the history of
                a repository.
                Here is one method:
                
      $ git log -p
                You need to realize, however, that this method does show changes that are not significant (e.g. a package's size changing by a few bytes).
                A command-line tool called buildhistory-diff
                does exist, though, that queries the Git repository and prints just
                the differences that might be significant in human-readable form.
                Here is an example:
                
     $ ~/poky/poky/scripts/buildhistory-diff . HEAD^
     Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (files-in-image.txt):
        /etc/anotherpkg.conf was added
        /sbin/anotherpkg was added
        * (installed-package-names.txt):
        *   anotherpkg was added
     Changes to images/qemux86_64/glibc/core-image-minimal (installed-package-names.txt):
        anotherpkg was added
     packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d: PACKAGES: added "v86d-extras"
        * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
        * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
     packages/qemux86_64-poky-linux/v86d/v86d: PKGSIZE changed from 110579 to 144381 (+30%)
        * PR changed from "r0" to "r1"
        * PV changed from "0.1.10" to "0.1.12"
                
buildhistory-diff tool requires
                    the GitPython package.
                    Be sure to install it using Pip3 as follows:
                    
   $ pip3 install GitPython --user
                    
                    Alternatively, you can install
                    python3-git using the appropriate
                    distribution package manager (e.g.
                    apt-get, dnf, or
                    zipper).
                
                To see changes to the build history using a web interface, follow
                the instruction in the README file here.
                http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/buildhistory-web/.
            
Here is a sample screenshot of the interface:
|  | 
Build time can be an issue. By default, the build system uses simple controls to try and maximize build efficiency. In general, the default settings for all the following variables result in the most efficient build times when dealing with single socket systems (i.e. a single CPU). If you have multiple CPUs, you might try increasing the default values to gain more speed. See the descriptions in the glossary for each variable for more information:
                BB_NUMBER_THREADS:
                The maximum number of threads BitBake simultaneously executes.
                
                BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS:
                The number of threads BitBake uses during parsing.
                
                PARALLEL_MAKE:
                Extra options passed to the make command
                during the
                do_compile
                task in order to specify parallel compilation on the
                local build host.
                
                PARALLEL_MAKEINST:
                Extra options passed to the make command
                during the
                do_install
                task in order to specify parallel installation on the
                local build host.
                
As mentioned, these variables all scale to the number of processor cores available on the build system. For single socket systems, this auto-scaling ensures that the build system fundamentally takes advantage of potential parallel operations during the build based on the build machine's capabilities.
Following are additional factors that can affect build speed:
                File system type:
                The file system type that the build is being performed on can
                also influence performance.
                Using ext4 is recommended as compared
                to ext2 and ext3
                due to ext4 improved features
                such as extents.
                
                Disabling the updating of access time using
                noatime:
                The noatime mount option prevents the
                build system from updating file and directory access times.
                
Setting a longer commit: Using the "commit=" mount option increases the interval in seconds between disk cache writes. Changing this interval from the five second default to something longer increases the risk of data loss but decreases the need to write to the disk, thus increasing the build performance.
Choosing the packaging backend: Of the available packaging backends, IPK is the fastest. Additionally, selecting a singular packaging backend also helps.
                Using tmpfs for
                TMPDIR
                as a temporary file system:
                While this can help speed up the build, the benefits are
                limited due to the compiler using
                -pipe.
                The build system goes to some lengths to avoid
                sync() calls into the
                file system on the principle that if there was a significant
                failure, the
                Build Directory
                contents could easily be rebuilt.
                
                Inheriting the
                rm_work
                class:
                Inheriting this class has shown to speed up builds due to
                significantly lower amounts of data stored in the data
                cache as well as on disk.
                Inheriting this class also makes cleanup of
                TMPDIR
                faster, at the expense of being easily able to dive into the
                source code.
                File system maintainers have recommended that the fastest way
                to clean up large numbers of files is to reformat partitions
                rather than delete files due to the linear nature of partitions.
                This, of course, assumes you structure the disk partitions and
                file systems in a way that this is practical.
                
Aside from the previous list, you should keep some trade offs in mind that can help you speed up the build:
                Remove items from
                DISTRO_FEATURES
                that you might not need.
                
                Exclude debug symbols and other debug information:
                If you do not need these symbols and other debug information,
                disabling the *-dbg package generation
                can speed up the build.
                You can disable this generation by setting the
                INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT
                variable to "1".
                
                Disable static library generation for recipes derived from
                autoconf or libtool:
                Following is an example showing how to disable static
                libraries and still provide an override to handle exceptions:
                
     STATICLIBCONF = "--disable-static"
     STATICLIBCONF_sqlite3-native = ""
     EXTRA_OECONF += "${STATICLIBCONF}"
                
                            Some recipes need static libraries in order to work
                            correctly (e.g. pseudo-native
                            needs sqlite3-native).
                            Overrides, as in the previous example, account for
                            these kinds of exceptions.
                            
Some packages have packaging code that assumes the presence of the static libraries. If so, you might need to exclude them as well.
This chapter takes a more detailed look at the Yocto Project development environment. The following diagram represents the development environment at a high level. The remainder of this chapter expands on the fundamental input, output, process, and Metadata) blocks in the Yocto Project development environment.
|  | 
The generalized Yocto Project Development Environment consists of several functional areas:
User Configuration: Metadata you can use to control the build process.
Metadata Layers: Various layers that provide software, machine, and distro Metadata.
Source Files: Upstream releases, local projects, and SCMs.
Build System: Processes under the control of BitBake. This block expands on how BitBake fetches source, applies patches, completes compilation, analyzes output for package generation, creates and tests packages, generates images, and generates cross-development tools.
Package Feeds: Directories containing output packages (RPM, DEB or IPK), which are subsequently used in the construction of an image or SDK, produced by the build system. These feeds can also be copied and shared using a web server or other means to facilitate extending or updating existing images on devices at runtime if runtime package management is enabled.
Images: Images produced by the development process.
Application Development SDK: Cross-development tools that are produced along with an image or separately with BitBake.
User configuration helps define the build. Through user configuration, you can tell BitBake the target architecture for which you are building the image, where to store downloaded source, and other build properties.
The following figure shows an expanded representation of the "User Configuration" box of the general Yocto Project Development Environment figure:
             
        
            BitBake needs some basic configuration files in order to complete
            a build.
            These files are *.conf files.
            The minimally necessary ones reside as example files in the
            Source Directory.
            For simplicity, this section refers to the Source Directory as
            the "Poky Directory."
        
            When you clone the poky Git repository or you
            download and unpack a Yocto Project release, you can set up the
            Source Directory to be named anything you want.
            For this discussion, the cloned repository uses the default
            name poky.
            
            The meta-poky layer inside Poky contains
            a conf directory that has example
            configuration files.
            These example files are used as a basis for creating actual
            configuration files when you source the build environment
            script
            (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
        
            Sourcing the build environment script creates a
            Build Directory
            if one does not already exist.
            BitBake uses the Build Directory for all its work during builds.
            The Build Directory has a conf directory that
            contains default versions of your local.conf
            and bblayers.conf configuration files.
            These default configuration files are created only if versions
            do not already exist in the Build Directory at the time you
            source the build environment setup script.
        
            Because the Poky repository is fundamentally an aggregation of
            existing repositories, some users might be familiar with running
            the oe-init-build-env or
            oe-init-build-env-memres script in the context
            of separate OpenEmbedded-Core and BitBake repositories rather than a
            single Poky repository.
            This discussion assumes the script is executed from within a cloned
            or unpacked version of Poky.
        
            Depending on where the script is sourced, different sub-scripts
            are called to set up the Build Directory (Yocto or OpenEmbedded).
            Specifically, the script
            scripts/oe-setup-builddir inside the
            poky directory sets up the Build Directory and seeds the directory
            (if necessary) with configuration files appropriate for the
            Yocto Project development environment.
            
scripts/oe-setup-builddir script
                uses the $TEMPLATECONF variable to
                determine which sample configuration files to locate.
            
            The local.conf file provides many
            basic variables that define a build environment.
            Here is a list of a few.
            To see the default configurations in a local.conf
            file created by the build environment script, see the
            local.conf.sample in the
            meta-poky layer:
            
Parallelism Options:
                    Controlled by the
                    BB_NUMBER_THREADS,
                    PARALLEL_MAKE,
                    and
                    BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS
                    variables.
Target Machine Selection:
                    Controlled by the
                    MACHINE
                    variable.
Download Directory:
                    Controlled by the
                    DL_DIR
                    variable.
Shared State Directory:
                    Controlled by the
                    SSTATE_DIR
                    variable.
Build Output:
                    Controlled by the
                    TMPDIR
                    variable.
conf/local.conf
                file can also be set in the
                conf/site.conf and
                conf/auto.conf configuration files.
            
            The bblayers.conf file tells BitBake what
            layers you want considered during the build.
            By default, the layers listed in this file include layers
            minimally needed by the build system.
            However, you must manually add any custom layers you have created.
            You can find more information on working with the
            bblayers.conf file in the
            "Enabling Your Layer"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        
            The files site.conf and
            auto.conf are not created by the environment
            initialization script.
            If you want the site.conf file, you need to
            create that yourself.
            The auto.conf file is typically created by
            an autobuilder:
            
site.conf:
                    You can use the conf/site.conf
                    configuration file to configure multiple build directories.
                    For example, suppose you had several build environments and
                    they shared some common features.
                    You can set these default build properties here.
                    A good example is perhaps the packaging format to use
                    through the
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    variable.
One useful scenario for using the
                    conf/site.conf file is to extend your
                    BBPATH
                    variable to include the path to a
                    conf/site.conf.
                    Then, when BitBake looks for Metadata using
                    BBPATH, it finds the
                    conf/site.conf file and applies your
                    common configurations found in the file.
                    To override configurations in a particular build directory,
                    alter the similar configurations within that build
                    directory's conf/local.conf file.
                    
auto.conf:
                    The file is usually created and written to by
                    an autobuilder.
                    The settings put into the file are typically the same as
                    you would find in the conf/local.conf
                    or the conf/site.conf files.
                    
You can edit all configuration files to further define any particular build environment. This process is represented by the "User Configuration Edits" box in the figure.
            When you launch your build with the
            bitbake 
            command, BitBake sorts out the configurations to ultimately
            define your build environment.
            It is important to understand that the OpenEmbedded build system
            reads the configuration files in a specific order:
            targetsite.conf, auto.conf,
            and local.conf.
            And, the build system applies the normal assignment statement
            rules.
            Because the files are parsed in a specific order, variable
            assignments for the same variable could be affected.
            For example, if the auto.conf file and
            the local.conf set
            variable1 to different values, because
            the build system parses local.conf after
            auto.conf,
            variable1 is assigned the value from
            the local.conf file.
        
The previous section described the user configurations that define BitBake's global behavior. This section takes a closer look at the layers the build system uses to further control the build. These layers provide Metadata for the software, machine, and policy.
In general, three types of layer input exist:
Policy Configuration: Distribution Layers provide top-level or general policies for the image or SDK being built. For example, this layer would dictate whether BitBake produces RPM or IPK packages.
Machine Configuration: Board Support Package (BSP) layers provide machine configurations. This type of information is specific to a particular target architecture.
Metadata: Software layers contain user-supplied recipe files, patches, and append files.
The following figure shows an expanded representation of the Metadata, Machine Configuration, and Policy Configuration input (layers) boxes of the general Yocto Project Development Environment figure:
|  | 
            In general, all layers have a similar structure.
            They all contain a licensing file
            (e.g. COPYING) if the layer is to be
            distributed, a README file as good practice
            and especially if the layer is to be distributed, a
            configuration directory, and recipe directories.
        
The Yocto Project has many layers that can be used. You can see a web-interface listing of them on the Source Repositories page. The layers are shown at the bottom categorized under "Yocto Metadata Layers." These layers are fundamentally a subset of the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index, which lists all layers provided by the OpenEmbedded community.
            BitBake uses the conf/bblayers.conf file,
            which is part of the user configuration, to find what layers it
            should be using as part of the build.
        
For more information on layers, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                The distribution layer provides policy configurations for your
                distribution.
                Best practices dictate that you isolate these types of
                configurations into their own layer.
                Settings you provide in
                conf/distro/ override
                similar
                settings that BitBake finds in your
                distro.confconf/local.conf file in the Build
                Directory.
            
The following list provides some explanation and references for what you typically find in the distribution layer:
classes:
                        Class files (.bbclass) hold
                        common functionality that can be shared among
                        recipes in the distribution.
                        When your recipes inherit a class, they take on the
                        settings and functions for that class.
                        You can read more about class files in the
                        "Classes" section.
                        
conf:
                        This area holds configuration files for the
                        layer (conf/layer.conf),
                        the distribution
                        (conf/distro/),
                        and any distribution-wide include files.
                        distro.conf
recipes-*: Recipes and append files that affect common functionality across the distribution. This area could include recipes and append files to add distribution-specific configuration, initialization scripts, custom image recipes, and so forth.
The BSP Layer provides machine configurations. Everything in this layer is specific to the machine for which you are building the image or the SDK. A common structure or form is defined for BSP layers. You can learn more about this structure in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
                The BSP Layer's configuration directory contains
                configuration files for the machine
                (conf/machine/) and,
                of course, the layer (machine.confconf/layer.conf).
            
                The remainder of the layer is dedicated to specific recipes
                by function: recipes-bsp,
                recipes-core,
                recipes-graphics, and
                recipes-kernel.
                Metadata can exist for multiple formfactors, graphics
                support systems, and so forth.
                
recipes-*
                    directories, not all these directories appear in all
                    BSP layers.
                
The software layer provides the Metadata for additional software packages used during the build. This layer does not include Metadata that is specific to the distribution or the machine, which are found in their respective layers.
This layer contains any new recipes that your project needs in the form of recipe files.
In order for the OpenEmbedded build system to create an image or any target, it must be able to access source files. The general Yocto Project Development Environment figure represents source files using the "Upstream Project Releases", "Local Projects", and "SCMs (optional)" boxes. The figure represents mirrors, which also play a role in locating source files, with the "Source Mirror(s)" box.
The method by which source files are ultimately organized is a function of the project. For example, for released software, projects tend to use tarballs or other archived files that can capture the state of a release guaranteeing that it is statically represented. On the other hand, for a project that is more dynamic or experimental in nature, a project might keep source files in a repository controlled by a Source Control Manager (SCM) such as Git. Pulling source from a repository allows you to control the point in the repository (the revision) from which you want to build software. Finally, a combination of the two might exist, which would give the consumer a choice when deciding where to get source files.
            BitBake uses the
            SRC_URI
            variable to point to source files regardless of their location.
            Each recipe must have a SRC_URI variable
            that points to the source.
        
            Another area that plays a significant role in where source files
            come from is pointed to by the
            DL_DIR
            variable.
            This area is a cache that can hold previously downloaded source.
            You can also instruct the OpenEmbedded build system to create
            tarballs from Git repositories, which is not the default behavior,
            and store them in the DL_DIR by using the
            BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS
            variable.
        
            Judicious use of a DL_DIR directory can
            save the build system a trip across the Internet when looking
            for files.
            A good method for using a download directory is to have
            DL_DIR point to an area outside of your
            Build Directory.
            Doing so allows you to safely delete the Build Directory
            if needed without fear of removing any downloaded source file.
        
The remainder of this section provides a deeper look into the source files and the mirrors. Here is a more detailed look at the source file area of the base figure:
|  | 
Upstream project releases exist anywhere in the form of an archived file (e.g. tarball or zip file). These files correspond to individual recipes. For example, the figure uses specific releases each for BusyBox, Qt, and Dbus. An archive file can be for any released product that can be built using a recipe.
Local projects are custom bits of software the user provides. These bits reside somewhere local to a project - perhaps a directory into which the user checks in items (e.g. a local directory containing a development source tree used by the group).
                The canonical method through which to include a local project
                is to use the
                externalsrc
                class to include that local project.
                You use either the local.conf or a
                recipe's append file to override or set the
                recipe to point to the local directory on your disk to pull
                in the whole source tree.
            
                For information on how to use the
                externalsrc class, see the
                "externalsrc.bbclass"
                section.
            
                Another place the build system can get source files from is
                through an SCM such as Git or Subversion.
                In this case, a repository is cloned or checked out.
                The
                do_fetch
                task inside BitBake uses
                the SRC_URI
                variable and the argument's prefix to determine the correct
                fetcher module.
            
DL_DIR
                directory, see the
                BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS
                variable.
            
                When fetching a repository, BitBake uses the
                SRCREV
                variable to determine the specific revision from which to
                build.
            
                Two kinds of mirrors exist: pre-mirrors and regular mirrors.
                The PREMIRRORS
                and
                MIRRORS
                variables point to these, respectively.
                BitBake checks pre-mirrors before looking upstream for any
                source files.
                Pre-mirrors are appropriate when you have a shared directory
                that is not a directory defined by the
                DL_DIR
                variable.
                A Pre-mirror typically points to a shared directory that is
                local to your organization.
            
Regular mirrors can be any site across the Internet that is used as an alternative location for source code should the primary site not be functioning for some reason or another.
When the OpenEmbedded build system generates an image or an SDK, it gets the packages from a package feed area located in the Build Directory. The general Yocto Project Development Environment figure shows this package feeds area in the upper-right corner.
This section looks a little closer into the package feeds area used by the build system. Here is a more detailed look at the area:
|  | 
            Package feeds are an intermediary step in the build process.
            The OpenEmbedded build system provides classes to generate
            different package types, and you specify which classes to enable
            through the
            PACKAGE_CLASSES
            variable.
            Before placing the packages into package feeds,
            the build process validates them with generated output quality
            assurance checks through the
            insane
            class.
        
The package feed area resides in the Build Directory. The directory the build system uses to temporarily store packages is determined by a combination of variables and the particular package manager in use. See the "Package Feeds" box in the illustration and note the information to the right of that area. In particular, the following defines where package files are kept:
DEPLOY_DIR:
                    Defined as tmp/deploy in the Build
                    Directory.
                    
DEPLOY_DIR_*:
                    Depending on the package manager used, the package type
                    sub-folder.
                    Given RPM, IPK, or DEB packaging and tarball creation, the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_RPM,
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IPK,
                    DEPLOY_DIR_DEB,
                    or
                    DEPLOY_DIR_TAR,
                    variables are used, respectively.
                    
PACKAGE_ARCH:
                    Defines architecture-specific sub-folders.
                    For example, packages could exist for the i586 or qemux86
                    architectures.
                    
            BitBake uses the do_package_write_* tasks to
            generate packages and place them into the package holding area (e.g.
            do_package_write_ipk for IPK packages).
            See the
            "do_package_write_deb",
            "do_package_write_ipk",
            "do_package_write_rpm",
            and
            "do_package_write_tar"
            sections for additional information.
            As an example, consider a scenario where an IPK packaging manager
            is being used and package architecture support for both i586
            and qemux86 exist.
            Packages for the i586 architecture are placed in
            build/tmp/deploy/ipk/i586, while packages for
            the qemux86 architecture are placed in
            build/tmp/deploy/ipk/qemux86.
        
The OpenEmbedded build system uses BitBake to produce images. You can see from the general Yocto Project Development Environment figure, the BitBake area consists of several functional areas. This section takes a closer look at each of those areas.
Separate documentation exists for the BitBake tool. See the BitBake User Manual for reference material on BitBake.
The first stages of building a recipe are to fetch and unpack the source code:
|  | 
                The
                do_fetch
                and
                do_unpack
                tasks fetch the source files and unpack them into the work
                directory.
                
file://)
                    that is part of a recipe's
                    SRC_URI
                    statement, the OpenEmbedded build system takes a checksum
                    of the file for the recipe and inserts the checksum into
                    the signature for the do_fetch.
                    If any local file has been modified, the
                    do_fetch task and all tasks that
                    depend on it are re-executed.
                
                By default, everything is accomplished in the
                Build Directory,
                which has a defined structure.
                For additional general information on the Build Directory,
                see the
                "build/"
                section.
            
                Unpacked source files are pointed to by the
                S variable.
                Each recipe has an area in the Build Directory where the
                unpacked source code resides.
                The name of that directory for any given recipe is defined from
                several different variables.
                You can see the variables that define these directories
                by looking at the figure:
                
TMPDIR -
                        The base directory where the OpenEmbedded build system
                        performs all its work during the build.
                        
PACKAGE_ARCH -
                        The architecture of the built package or packages.
                        
TARGET_OS -
                        The operating system of the target device.
                        
PN -
                        The name of the built package.
                        
PV -
                        The version of the recipe used to build the package.
                        
PR -
                        The revision of the recipe used to build the package.
                        
WORKDIR -
                        The location within TMPDIR where
                        a specific package is built.
                        
S -
                        Contains the unpacked source files for a given recipe.
                        
Once source code is fetched and unpacked, BitBake locates patch files and applies them to the source files:
|  | 
                The
                do_patch
                task processes recipes by
                using the
                SRC_URI
                variable to locate applicable patch files, which by default
                are *.patch or
                *.diff files, or any file if
                "apply=yes" is specified for the file in
                SRC_URI.
            
                BitBake finds and applies multiple patches for a single recipe
                in the order in which it finds the patches.
                Patches are applied to the recipe's source files located in the
                S directory.
            
For more information on how the source directories are created, see the "Source Fetching" section.
After source code is patched, BitBake executes tasks that configure and compile the source code:
|  | 
This step in the build process consists of three tasks:
do_configure:
                        This task configures the source by enabling and
                        disabling any build-time and configuration options for
                        the software being built.
                        Configurations can come from the recipe itself as well
                        as from an inherited class.
                        Additionally, the software itself might configure itself
                        depending on the target for which it is being built.
                        
The configurations handled by the
                        do_configure
                        task are specific
                        to source code configuration for the source code
                        being built by the recipe.
If you are using the
                        autotools
                        class,
                        you can add additional configuration options by using
                        the EXTRA_OECONF
                        variable.
                        For information on how this variable works within
                        that class, see the
                        meta/classes/autotools.bbclass file.
                        
do_compile:
                        Once a configuration task has been satisfied, BitBake
                        compiles the source using the
                        do_compile
                        task.
                        Compilation occurs in the directory pointed to by the
                        B
                        variable.
                        Realize that the B directory is, by
                        default, the same as the
                        S
                        directory.
do_install:
                        Once compilation is done, BitBake executes the
                        do_install
                        task.
                        This task copies files from the B
                        directory and places them in a holding area pointed to
                        by the
                        D
                        variable.
After source code is configured and compiled, the OpenEmbedded build system analyzes the results and splits the output into packages:
|  | 
                The
                do_package
                and
                do_packagedata
                tasks combine to analyze
                the files found in the
                D directory
                and split them into subsets based on available packages and
                files.
                The analyzing process involves the following as well as other
                items: splitting out debugging symbols,
                looking at shared library dependencies between packages,
                and looking at package relationships.
                The do_packagedata task creates package
                metadata based on the analysis such that the
                OpenEmbedded build system can generate the final packages.
                Working, staged, and intermediate results of the analysis
                and package splitting process use these areas:
                
PKGD -
                        The destination directory for packages before they are
                        split.
                        
PKGDATA_DIR -
                        A shared, global-state directory that holds data
                        generated during the packaging process.
                        
PKGDESTWORK -
                        A temporary work area used by the
                        do_package task.
                        
PKGDEST -
                        The parent directory for packages after they have
                        been split.
                        
                The FILES
                variable defines the files that go into each package in
                PACKAGES.
                If you want details on how this is accomplished, you can
                look at the
                package
                class.
            
                Depending on the type of packages being created (RPM, DEB, or
                IPK), the do_package_write_* task
                creates the actual packages and places them in the
                Package Feed area, which is
                ${TMPDIR}/deploy.
                You can see the
                "Package Feeds"
                section for more detail on that part of the build process.
                
deploy/* directories does not exist.
                    Creating such feeds usually requires some kind of feed
                    maintenance mechanism that would upload the new packages
                    into an official package feed (e.g. the
                    Ångström distribution).
                    This functionality is highly distribution-specific
                    and thus is not provided out of the box.
                
Once packages are split and stored in the Package Feeds area, the OpenEmbedded build system uses BitBake to generate the root filesystem image:
|  | 
                The image generation process consists of several stages and
                depends on several tasks and variables.
                The
                do_rootfs
                task creates the root filesystem (file and directory structure)
                for an image.
                This task uses several key variables to help create the list
                of packages to actually install:
                
IMAGE_INSTALL:
                        Lists out the base set of packages to install from
                        the Package Feeds area.
PACKAGE_EXCLUDE:
                        Specifies packages that should not be installed.
                        
IMAGE_FEATURES:
                        Specifies features to include in the image.
                        Most of these features map to additional packages for
                        installation.
PACKAGE_CLASSES:
                        Specifies the package backend to use and consequently
                        helps determine where to locate packages within the
                        Package Feeds area.
IMAGE_LINGUAS:
                        Determines the language(s) for which additional
                        language support packages are installed.
                        
PACKAGE_INSTALL:
                        The final list of packages passed to the package manager
                        for installation into the image.
                        
                With
                IMAGE_ROOTFS
                pointing to the location of the filesystem under construction and
                the PACKAGE_INSTALL variable providing the
                final list of packages to install, the root file system is
                created.
            
Package installation is under control of the package manager (e.g. smart/rpm, opkg, or apt/dpkg) regardless of whether or not package management is enabled for the target. At the end of the process, if package management is not enabled for the target, the package manager's data files are deleted from the root filesystem. As part of the final stage of package installation, postinstall scripts that are part of the packages are run. Any scripts that fail to run on the build host are run on the target when the target system is first booted. If you are using a read-only root filesystem, all the post installation scripts must succeed during the package installation phase since the root filesystem is read-only.
                The final stages of the do_rootfs task
                handle post processing.
                Post processing includes creation of a manifest file and
                optimizations.
            
                The manifest file (.manifest) resides
                in the same directory as the root filesystem image.
                This file lists out, line-by-line, the installed packages.
                The manifest file is useful for the
                testimage
                class, for example, to determine whether or not to run
                specific tests.
                See the
                IMAGE_MANIFEST
                variable for additional information.
            
                Optimizing processes run across the image include
                mklibs, prelink,
                and any other post-processing commands as defined by the
                ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND
                variable.
                The mklibs process optimizes the size
                of the libraries, while the
                prelink process optimizes the dynamic
                linking of shared libraries to reduce start up time of
                executables.
            
                After the root filesystem is built, processing begins on
                the image through the do_image task.
                The build system runs any pre-processing commands as defined
                by the
                IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND
                variable.
                This variable specifies a list of functions to call before
                the OpenEmbedded build system creates the final image output
                files.
            
                The do_image task dynamically creates
                other do_image_* tasks as needed, which
                include compressing the root filesystem image to reduce the
                overall size of the image.
                The process turns everything into an image file or a set of
                image files.
                The formats used for the root filesystem depend on the
                IMAGE_FSTYPES
                variable.
            
                The final task involved in image creation is the
                do_image_complete task.
                This task completes the image by applying any image
                post processing as defined through the
                IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND
                variable.
                The variable specifies a list of functions to call once the
                OpenEmbedded build system has created the final image output
                files.
            
                The OpenEmbedded build system uses BitBake to generate the
                Software Development Kit (SDK) installer script for both the
                standard and extensible SDKs:
                 
            
do_populate_sdk
                task, see the
                "Building an SDK Installer"
                section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK)
                Developer's Guide.
            
                Like image generation, the SDK script process consists of
                several stages and depends on many variables.
                The do_populate_sdk and
                do_populate_sdk_ext tasks use these
                key variables to help create the list of packages to actually
                install.
                For information on the variables listed in the figure, see the
                "Application Development SDK"
                section.
            
                The do_populate_sdk task helps create
                the standard SDK and handles two parts: a target part and a
                host part.
                The target part is the part built for the target hardware and
                includes libraries and headers.
                The host part is the part of the SDK that runs on the
                SDKMACHINE.
            
                The do_populate_sdk_ext task helps create
                the extensible SDK and handles host and target parts
                differently than its counter part does for the standard SDK.
                For the extensible SDK, the task encapsulates the build system,
                which includes everything needed (host and target) for the SDK.
            
                Regardless of the type of SDK being constructed, the
                tasks perform some cleanup after which a cross-development
                environment setup script and any needed configuration files
                are created.
                The final output is the Cross-development
                toolchain installation script (.sh file),
                which includes the environment setup script.
            
The images produced by the OpenEmbedded build system are compressed forms of the root filesystem that are ready to boot on a target device. You can see from the general Yocto Project Development Environment figure that BitBake output, in part, consists of images. This section is going to look more closely at this output:
|  | 
For a list of example images that the Yocto Project provides, see the "Images" chapter.
            Images are written out to the
            Build Directory
            inside the tmp/deploy/images/
            folder as shown in the figure.
            This folder contains any files expected to be loaded on the
            target device.
            The
            machine/DEPLOY_DIR
            variable points to the deploy directory,
            while the
            DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE
            variable points to the appropriate directory containing images for
            the current configuration.
            
kernel-imageKERNEL_IMAGETYPE
                    variable setting determines the naming scheme for the
                    kernel image file.
                    Depending on that variable, the file could begin with
                    a variety of naming strings.
                    The deploy/images/
                    directory can contain multiple image files for the
                    machine.machine
root-filesystem-image*.ext3 or *.bz2
                    files).
                    The IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    variable setting determines the root filesystem image
                    type.
                    The deploy/images/
                    directory can contain multiple root filesystems for the
                    machine.machine
kernel-modulesMODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY
                    variable to "0".
                    The deploy/images/
                    directory can contain multiple kernel module tarballs
                    for the machine.machine
bootloadersdeploy/images/
                    directory can contain multiple bootloaders for the
                    machine.machine
symlinksdeploy/images/
                    folder contains
                    a symbolic link that points to the most recently built file
                    for each machine.
                    These links might be useful for external scripts that
                    need to obtain the latest version of each file.
                    machine
            In the
            general Yocto Project Development Environment figure,
            the output labeled "Application Development SDK" represents an
            SDK.
            The SDK generation process differs depending on whether you build
            a standard SDK
            (e.g. bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename)
            or an extensible SDK
            (e.g. bitbake -c populate_sdk_ext imagename).
            This section is going to take a closer look at this output:
            
|  | 
            The specific form of this output is a self-extracting
            SDK installer (*.sh) that, when run,
            installs the SDK, which consists of a cross-development
            toolchain, a set of libraries and headers, and an SDK
            environment setup script.
            Running this installer essentially sets up your
            cross-development environment.
            You can think of the cross-toolchain as the "host"
            part because it runs on the SDK machine.
            You can think of the libraries and headers as the "target"
            part because they are built for the target hardware.
            The environment setup script is added so that you can initialize
            the environment before using the tools.
        
The Yocto Project supports several methods by which you can set up this cross-development environment. These methods include downloading pre-built SDK installers or building and installing your own SDK installer.
For background information on cross-development toolchains in the Yocto Project development environment, see the "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation" section. For information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
            Once built, the SDK installers are written out to the
            deploy/sdk folder inside the
            Build Directory
            as shown in the figure at the beginning of this section.
            Depending on the type of SDK, several variables exist that help
            configure these files.
            The following list shows the variables associated with a standard
            SDK:
            
DEPLOY_DIR:
                    Points to the deploy
                    directory.
SDKMACHINE:
                    Specifies the architecture of the machine
                    on which the cross-development tools are run to
                    create packages for the target hardware.
                    
SDKIMAGE_FEATURES:
                    Lists the features to include in the "target" part
                    of the SDK.
                    
TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK:
                    Lists packages that make up the host
                    part of the SDK (i.e. the part that runs on
                    the SDKMACHINE).
                    When you use
                    bitbake -c populate_sdk 
                    to create the SDK, a set of default packages
                    apply.
                    This variable allows you to add more packages.
                    imagename
TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK:
                    Lists packages that make up the target part
                    of the SDK (i.e. the part built for the
                    target hardware).
                    
SDKPATH:
                    Defines the default SDK installation path offered by the
                    installation script.
                    
This next list, shows the variables associated with an extensible SDK:
DEPLOY_DIR:
                    Points to the deploy directory.
                    
SDK_EXT_TYPE:
                    Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied
                    into the extensible SDK.
                    By default, all required shared state artifacts are copied
                    into the SDK.
                    
SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA:
                    Specifies whether or not packagedata will be included in
                    the extensible SDK for all recipes in the "world" target.
                    
SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST:
                    A list of variables allowed through from the build system
                    configuration into the extensible SDK configuration.
                    
SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST:
                    A list of variables not allowed through from the build
                    system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration.
                    
SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST:
                    A list of classes to remove from the
                    INHERIT
                    value globally within the extensible SDK configuration.
                    
This chapter provides technical details for various parts of the Yocto Project. Currently, topics include Yocto Project components, cross-toolchain generation, shared state (sstate) cache, x32, Wayland support, and Licenses.
The BitBake task executor together with various types of configuration files form the OpenEmbedded Core. This section overviews these components by describing their use and how they interact.
BitBake handles the parsing and execution of the data files. The data itself is of various types:
Recipes: Provides details about particular pieces of software.
Class Data: Abstracts common build information (e.g. how to build a Linux kernel).
Configuration Data: Defines machine-specific settings, policy decisions, and so forth. Configuration data acts as the glue to bind everything together.
BitBake knows how to combine multiple data sources together and refers to each data source as a layer. For information on layers, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section of the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Following are some brief details on these core components. For additional information on how these components interact during a build, see the "A Closer Look at the Yocto Project Development Environment" Chapter.
BitBake is the tool at the heart of the OpenEmbedded build system and is responsible for parsing the Metadata, generating a list of tasks from it, and then executing those tasks.
This section briefly introduces BitBake. If you want more information on BitBake, see the BitBake User Manual.
To see a list of the options BitBake supports, use either of the following commands:
     $ bitbake -h
     $ bitbake --help
            
            The most common usage for BitBake is bitbake , where
            packagenamepackagename is the name of the package you want to build
            (referred to as the "target" in this manual).
            The target often equates to the first part of a recipe's filename
            (e.g. "foo" for a recipe named
            foo_1.3.0-r0.bb).
            So, to process the matchbox-desktop_1.2.3.bb recipe file, you
            might type the following:
            
     $ bitbake matchbox-desktop
            
            Several different versions of matchbox-desktop might exist.
            BitBake chooses the one selected by the distribution configuration.
            You can get more details about how BitBake chooses between different
            target versions and providers in the
            "Preferences"
            section of the BitBake User Manual.
        
            BitBake also tries to execute any dependent tasks first.
            So for example, before building matchbox-desktop, BitBake
            would build a cross compiler and glibc if they had not already
            been built.
        
            A useful BitBake option to consider is the -k or
            --continue option.
            This option instructs BitBake to try and continue processing the job
            as long as possible even after encountering an error.
            When an error occurs, the target that
            failed and those that depend on it cannot be remade.
            However, when you use this option other dependencies can still be
            processed.
        
            Files that have the .bb suffix are "recipes"
            files.
            In general, a recipe contains information about a single piece of
            software.
            This information includes the location from which to download the
            unaltered source, any source patches to be applied to that source
            (if needed), which special configuration options to apply,
            how to compile the source files, and how to package the compiled
            output.
        
            The term "package" is sometimes used to refer to recipes. However,
            since the word "package" is used for the packaged output from the OpenEmbedded
            build system (i.e. .ipk or .deb files),
            this document avoids using the term "package" when referring to recipes.
        
            Class files (.bbclass) contain information that
            is useful to share between
            Metadata files.
            An example is the
            autotools
            class, which contains common settings for any application that
            Autotools uses.
            The "Classes" chapter provides
            details about classes and how to use them.
        
            The configuration files (.conf) define various configuration variables
            that govern the OpenEmbedded build process.
            These files fall into several areas that define machine configuration options,
            distribution configuration options, compiler tuning options, general common configuration
            options, and user configuration options in local.conf, which is found
            in the
            Build Directory.
        
The Yocto Project does most of the work for you when it comes to creating cross-development toolchains. This section provides some technical background on how cross-development toolchains are created and used. For more information on toolchains, you can also see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
In the Yocto Project development environment, cross-development toolchains are used to build the image and applications that run on the target hardware. With just a few commands, the OpenEmbedded build system creates these necessary toolchains for you.
The following figure shows a high-level build environment regarding toolchain construction and use.
|  | 
        Most of the work occurs on the Build Host.
        This is the machine used to build images and generally work within the
        the Yocto Project environment.
        When you run BitBake to create an image, the OpenEmbedded build system
        uses the host gcc compiler to bootstrap a
        cross-compiler named gcc-cross.
        The gcc-cross compiler is what BitBake uses to
        compile source files when creating the target image.
        You can think of gcc-cross simply as an
        automatically generated cross-compiler that is used internally within
        BitBake only.
        
gcc-cross-canadian since this SDK
            ships a copy of the OpenEmbedded build system and the sysroot
            within it contains gcc-cross.
        
        The chain of events that occurs when gcc-cross is
        bootstrapped is as follows:
        
     gcc -> binutils-cross -> gcc-cross-initial -> linux-libc-headers -> glibc-initial -> glibc -> gcc-cross -> gcc-runtime
        
gcc:
                The build host's GNU Compiler Collection (GCC).
                
binutils-cross:
                The bare minimum binary utilities needed in order to run
                the gcc-cross-initial phase of the
                bootstrap operation.
                
gcc-cross-initial:
                An early stage of the bootstrap process for creating
                the cross-compiler.
                This stage builds enough of the gcc-cross,
                the C library, and other pieces needed to finish building the
                final cross-compiler in later stages.
                This tool is a "native" package (i.e. it is designed to run on
                the build host).
                
linux-libc-headers:
                Headers needed for the cross-compiler.
                
glibc-initial:
                An initial version of the Embedded GLIBC needed to bootstrap
                glibc.
                
gcc-cross:
                The final stage of the bootstrap process for the
                cross-compiler.
                This stage results in the actual cross-compiler that
                BitBake uses when it builds an image for a targeted
                device.
                
gcc-cross.
                This tool is also a "native" package (i.e. it is designed to run on the build host).
gcc-runtime:
                Runtime libraries resulting from the toolchain bootstrapping
                process.
                This tool produces a binary that consists of the
                runtime libraries need for the targeted device.
                
        You can use the OpenEmbedded build system to build an installer for
        the relocatable SDK used to develop applications.
        When you run the installer, it installs the toolchain, which contains
        the development tools (e.g., the
        gcc-cross-canadian),
        binutils-cross-canadian, and other
        nativesdk-* tools,
        which are tools native to the SDK (i.e. native to
        SDK_ARCH),
        you need to cross-compile and test your software.
        The figure shows the commands you use to easily build out this
        toolchain.
        This cross-development toolchain is built to execute on the
        SDKMACHINE,
        which might or might not be the same
        machine as the Build Host.
        
Here is the bootstrap process for the relocatable toolchain:
     gcc -> binutils-crosssdk -> gcc-crosssdk-initial -> linux-libc-headers ->
        glibc-initial -> nativesdk-glibc -> gcc-crosssdk -> gcc-cross-canadian
        
gcc:
                The build host's GNU Compiler Collection (GCC).
                
binutils-crosssdk:
                The bare minimum binary utilities needed in order to run
                the gcc-crosssdk-initial phase of the
                bootstrap operation.
                
gcc-crosssdk-initial:
                An early stage of the bootstrap process for creating
                the cross-compiler.
                This stage builds enough of the
                gcc-crosssdk and supporting pieces so that
                the final stage of the bootstrap process can produce the
                finished cross-compiler.
                This tool is a "native" binary that runs on the build host.
                
linux-libc-headers:
                Headers needed for the cross-compiler.
                
glibc-initial:
                An initial version of the Embedded GLIBC needed to bootstrap
                nativesdk-glibc.
                
nativesdk-glibc:
                The Embedded GLIBC needed to bootstrap the
                gcc-crosssdk.
                
gcc-crosssdk:
                The final stage of the bootstrap process for the
                relocatable cross-compiler.
                The gcc-crosssdk is a transitory compiler
                and never leaves the build host.
                Its purpose is to help in the bootstrap process to create the
                eventual relocatable gcc-cross-canadian
                compiler, which is relocatable.
                This tool is also a "native" package (i.e. it is
                designed to run on the build host).
                
gcc-cross-canadian:
                The final relocatable cross-compiler.
                When run on the
                SDKMACHINE,
                this tool
                produces executable code that runs on the target device.
                Only one cross-canadian compiler is produced per architecture
                since they can be targeted at different processor optimizations
                using configurations passed to the compiler through the
                compile commands.
                This circumvents the need for multiple compilers and thus
                reduces the size of the toolchains.
                
By design, the OpenEmbedded build system builds everything from scratch unless BitBake can determine that parts do not need to be rebuilt. Fundamentally, building from scratch is attractive as it means all parts are built fresh and there is no possibility of stale data causing problems. When developers hit problems, they typically default back to building from scratch so they know the state of things from the start.
Building an image from scratch is both an advantage and a disadvantage to the process. As mentioned in the previous paragraph, building from scratch ensures that everything is current and starts from a known state. However, building from scratch also takes much longer as it generally means rebuilding things that do not necessarily need to be rebuilt.
The Yocto Project implements shared state code that supports incremental builds. The implementation of the shared state code answers the following questions that were fundamental roadblocks within the OpenEmbedded incremental build support system:
What pieces of the system have changed and what pieces have not changed?
How are changed pieces of software removed and replaced?
How are pre-built components that do not need to be rebuilt from scratch used when they are available?
For the first question, the build system detects changes in the "inputs" to a given task by creating a checksum (or signature) of the task's inputs. If the checksum changes, the system assumes the inputs have changed and the task needs to be rerun. For the second question, the shared state (sstate) code tracks which tasks add which output to the build process. This means the output from a given task can be removed, upgraded or otherwise manipulated. The third question is partly addressed by the solution for the second question assuming the build system can fetch the sstate objects from remote locations and install them if they are deemed to be valid.
PR information
        as part of the shared state packages.
        Consequently, considerations exist that affect maintaining shared
        state feeds.
        For information on how the OpenEmbedded build system
        works with packages and can
        track incrementing PR information, see the
        "Incrementing a Package Revision Number"
        section.
    The rest of this section goes into detail about the overall incremental build architecture, the checksums (signatures), shared state, and some tips and tricks.
            When determining what parts of the system need to be built, BitBake
            works on a per-task basis rather than a per-recipe basis.
            You might wonder why using a per-task basis is preferred over a per-recipe basis.
            To help explain, consider having the IPK packaging backend enabled and then switching to DEB.
            In this case, the
            do_install
            and
            do_package
            task outputs are still valid.
            However, with a per-recipe approach, the build would not include the
            .deb files.
            Consequently, you would have to invalidate the whole build and rerun it.
            Rerunning everything is not the best solution.
            Also, in this case, the core must be "taught" much about specific tasks.
            This methodology does not scale well and does not allow users to easily add new tasks
            in layers or as external recipes without touching the packaged-staging core.
        
The shared state code uses a checksum, which is a unique signature of a task's inputs, to determine if a task needs to be run again. Because it is a change in a task's inputs that triggers a rerun, the process needs to detect all the inputs to a given task. For shell tasks, this turns out to be fairly easy because the build process generates a "run" shell script for each task and it is possible to create a checksum that gives you a good idea of when the task's data changes.
            To complicate the problem, there are things that should not be
            included in the checksum.
            First, there is the actual specific build path of a given task -
            the WORKDIR.
            It does not matter if the work directory changes because it should
            not affect the output for target packages.
            Also, the build process has the objective of making native
            or cross packages relocatable.
            
            The checksum therefore needs to exclude
            WORKDIR.
            The simplistic approach for excluding the work directory is to set
            WORKDIR to some fixed value and create the
            checksum for the "run" script.
        
Another problem results from the "run" scripts containing functions that might or might not get called. The incremental build solution contains code that figures out dependencies between shell functions. This code is used to prune the "run" scripts down to the minimum set, thereby alleviating this problem and making the "run" scripts much more readable as a bonus.
So far we have solutions for shell scripts. What about Python tasks? The same approach applies even though these tasks are more difficult. The process needs to figure out what variables a Python function accesses and what functions it calls. Again, the incremental build solution contains code that first figures out the variable and function dependencies, and then creates a checksum for the data used as the input to the task.
            Like the WORKDIR case, situations exist where dependencies
            should be ignored.
            For these cases, you can instruct the build process to ignore a dependency
            by using a line like the following:
            
     PACKAGE_ARCHS[vardepsexclude] = "MACHINE"
            
            This example ensures that the
            PACKAGE_ARCHS
            variable does not
            depend on the value of
            MACHINE,
            even if it does reference it.
        
Equally, there are cases where we need to add dependencies BitBake is not able to find. You can accomplish this by using a line like the following:
      PACKAGE_ARCHS[vardeps] = "MACHINE"
            
            This example explicitly adds the MACHINE variable as a
            dependency for PACKAGE_ARCHS.
        
            Consider a case with in-line Python, for example, where BitBake is not
            able to figure out dependencies.
            When running in debug mode (i.e. using -DDD), BitBake
            produces output when it discovers something for which it cannot figure out
            dependencies.
            The Yocto Project team has currently not managed to cover those dependencies
            in detail and is aware of the need to fix this situation.
        
Thus far, this section has limited discussion to the direct inputs into a task. Information based on direct inputs is referred to as the "basehash" in the code. However, there is still the question of a task's indirect inputs - the things that were already built and present in the Build Directory. The checksum (or signature) for a particular task needs to add the hashes of all the tasks on which the particular task depends. Choosing which dependencies to add is a policy decision. However, the effect is to generate a master checksum that combines the basehash and the hashes of the task's dependencies.
At the code level, there are a variety of ways both the basehash and the dependent task hashes can be influenced. Within the BitBake configuration file, we can give BitBake some extra information to help it construct the basehash. The following statement effectively results in a list of global variable dependency excludes - variables never included in any checksum:
     BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST ?= "TMPDIR FILE PATH PWD BB_TASKHASH BBPATH DL_DIR \
         SSTATE_DIR THISDIR FILESEXTRAPATHS FILE_DIRNAME HOME LOGNAME SHELL TERM \
         USER FILESPATH STAGING_DIR_HOST STAGING_DIR_TARGET COREBASE PRSERV_HOST \
         PRSERV_DUMPDIR PRSERV_DUMPFILE PRSERV_LOCKDOWN PARALLEL_MAKE \
         CCACHE_DIR EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN CCACHE CCACHE_DISABLE LICENSE_PATH SDKPKGSUFFIX"
            
            The previous example excludes
            WORKDIR
            since that variable is actually constructed as a path within
            TMPDIR, which is on
            the whitelist.
        
            The rules for deciding which hashes of dependent tasks to include through
            dependency chains are more complex and are generally accomplished with a
            Python function.
            The code in meta/lib/oe/sstatesig.py shows two examples
            of this and also illustrates how you can insert your own policy into the system
            if so desired.
            This file defines the two basic signature generators OE-Core
            uses:  "OEBasic" and "OEBasicHash".
            By default, there is a dummy "noop" signature handler enabled in BitBake.
            This means that behavior is unchanged from previous versions.
            OE-Core uses the "OEBasicHash" signature handler by default
            through this setting in the bitbake.conf file:
            
     BB_SIGNATURE_HANDLER ?= "OEBasicHash"
            
            The "OEBasicHash" BB_SIGNATURE_HANDLER is the same as the
            "OEBasic" version but adds the task hash to the stamp files.
            This results in any
            Metadata
            change that changes the task hash, automatically
            causing the task to be run again.
            This removes the need to bump PR
            values, and changes to Metadata automatically ripple across the build.
        
It is also worth noting that the end result of these signature generators is to make some dependency and hash information available to the build. This information includes:
BB_BASEHASH_task-taskname:
                    The base hashes for each task in the recipe.
                    
BB_BASEHASH_filename:taskname:
                    The base hashes for each dependent task.
                    
BBHASHDEPS_filename:taskname:
                    The task dependencies for each task.
                    
BB_TASKHASH:
                    The hash of the currently running task.
                    
Checksums and dependencies, as discussed in the previous section, solve half the problem of supporting a shared state. The other part of the problem is being able to use checksum information during the build and being able to reuse or rebuild specific components.
            The
            sstate
            class is a relatively generic implementation of how to "capture"
            a snapshot of a given task.
            The idea is that the build process does not care about the source of a task's output.
            Output could be freshly built or it could be downloaded and unpacked from
            somewhere - the build process does not need to worry about its origin.
        
            There are two types of output, one is just about creating a directory
            in WORKDIR.
            A good example is the output of either
            do_install
            or
            do_package.
            The other type of output occurs when a set of data is merged into a shared directory
            tree such as the sysroot.
        
            The Yocto Project team has tried to keep the details of the
            implementation hidden in sstate class.
            From a user's perspective, adding shared state wrapping to a task
            is as simple as this
            do_deploy
            example taken from the
            deploy
            class:
            
     DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}"
     SSTATETASKS += "do_deploy"
     do_deploy[sstate-inputdirs] = "${DEPLOYDIR}"
     do_deploy[sstate-outputdirs] = "${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}"
     python do_deploy_setscene () {
         sstate_setscene(d)
     }
     addtask do_deploy_setscene
     do_deploy[dirs] = "${DEPLOYDIR} ${B}"
            The following list explains the previous example:
                    Adding "do_deploy" to SSTATETASKS
                    adds some required sstate-related processing, which is
                    implemented in the
                    sstate
                    class, to before and after the
                    do_deploy
                    task.
                    
                    The
                    do_deploy[sstate-inputdirs] = "${DEPLOYDIR}"
                    declares that do_deploy places its
                    output in ${DEPLOYDIR} when run
                    normally (i.e. when not using the sstate cache).
                    This output becomes the input to the shared state cache.
                    
                    The
                    do_deploy[sstate-outputdirs] = "${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}"
                    line causes the contents of the shared state cache to be
                    copied to ${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}.
                    
do_deploy is not already in
                        the shared state cache or if its input checksum
                        (signature) has changed from when the output was
                        cached, the task will be run to populate the shared
                        state cache, after which the contents of the shared
                        state cache is copied to
                        ${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}.
                        If do_deploy is in the shared
                        state cache and its signature indicates that the
                        cached output is still valid (i.e. if no
                        relevant task inputs have changed), then the contents
                        of the shared state cache will be copied directly to
                        ${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE} by the
                        do_deploy_setscene task instead,
                        skipping the do_deploy task.
                    
The following task definition is glue logic needed to make the previous settings effective:
     python do_deploy_setscene () {
         sstate_setscene(d)
     }
     addtask do_deploy_setscene
                    
                    sstate_setscene() takes the flags
                    above as input and accelerates the
                    do_deploy task through the
                    shared state cache if possible.
                    If the task was accelerated,
                    sstate_setscene() returns True.
                    Otherwise, it returns False, and the normal
                    do_deploy task runs.
                    For more information, see the
                    "setscene"
                    section in the BitBake User Manual.
                    
                    The
                    do_deploy[dirs] = "${DEPLOYDIR} ${B}"
                    line creates ${DEPLOYDIR} and
                    ${B} before the
                    do_deploy task runs.
                    For more information, see the
                    "Variable Flags"
                    section in the BitBake User Manual.
                    
sstate-inputdirs and
                        sstate-outputdirs would be the
                        same, you can use
                        sstate-plaindirs.
                        For example, to preserve the
                        ${PKGD} and
                        ${PKGDEST} output from the
                        do_package
                        task, use the following:
                        
     do_package[sstate-plaindirs] = "${PKGD} ${PKGDEST}"
                        
                     sstate-inputdirs and
                     sstate-outputdirs can also be used
                     with multiple directories.
                     For example, the following declares
                     PKGDESTWORK and
                     SHLIBWORK as shared state
                     input directories, which populates the shared state
                     cache, and PKGDATA_DIR and
                     SHLIBSDIR as the corresponding
                     shared state output directories:
                     
     do_package[sstate-inputdirs] = "${PKGDESTWORK} ${SHLIBSWORKDIR}"
     do_package[sstate-outputdirs] = "${PKGDATA_DIR} ${SHLIBSDIR}"
                     
These methods also include the ability to take a lockfile when manipulating shared state directory structures, for cases where file additions or removals are sensitive:
     do_package[sstate-lockfile] = "${PACKAGELOCK}"
                     
            Behind the scenes, the shared state code works by looking in
            SSTATE_DIR and
            SSTATE_MIRRORS
            for shared state files.
            Here is an example:
            
     SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\
     file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \
     file://.* file:///some/local/dir/sstate/PATH"
            
SSTATE_DIR) is
                organized into two-character subdirectories, where the subdirectory
                names are based on the first two characters of the hash.
                If the shared state directory structure for a mirror has the
                same structure as SSTATE_DIR, you must
                specify "PATH" as part of the URI to enable the build system
                to map to the appropriate subdirectory.
            
The shared state package validity can be detected just by looking at the filename since the filename contains the task checksum (or signature) as described earlier in this section. If a valid shared state package is found, the build process downloads it and uses it to accelerate the task.
            The build processes use the *_setscene tasks
            for the task acceleration phase.
            BitBake goes through this phase before the main execution code and tries
            to accelerate any tasks for which it can find shared state packages.
            If a shared state package for a task is available, the shared state
            package is used.
            This means the task and any tasks on which it is dependent are not
            executed.
        
            As a real world example, the aim is when building an IPK-based image,
            only the
            do_package_write_ipk
            tasks would have their
            shared state packages fetched and extracted.
            Since the sysroot is not used, it would never get extracted.
            This is another reason why a task-based approach is preferred over a
            recipe-based approach, which would have to install the output from every task.
        
The code in the build system that supports incremental builds is not simple code. This section presents some tips and tricks that help you work around issues related to shared state code.
When things go wrong, debugging needs to be straightforward. Because of this, the Yocto Project includes strong debugging tools:
Whenever a shared state package is written
                        out into the
                        SSTATE_DIR,
                        a corresponding .siginfo file is
                        also written.
                        This file contains a pickled Python database of all
                        the Metadata that went into creating the hash for a
                        given shared state package.
                        Whenever a stamp is written into the stamp directory
                        STAMP,
                        a corresponding .sigdata file
                        is created that contains the same hash data that
                        represented the executed task.
                        
You can use BitBake to dump out the signature construction information without executing tasks by using either of the following BitBake command-line options:
     ‐‐dump-signatures=SIGNATURE_HANDLER
     -S SIGNATURE_HANDLER
                        
SIGNATURE_HANDLER are
                            "none" and "printdiff" to only dump the signature
                            or to compare the dumped signature with the
                            cached one, respectively.
                        
                        Using BitBake with either of these options causes
                        BitBake to dump out .sigdata files
                        in the stamp directory for every task it would have
                        executed instead of building the specified target
                        package.
                        
There is a
                        bitbake-diffsigs command that
                        can process .sigdata and
                        .siginfo files.
                        If you specify one of these files, BitBake dumps out
                        the dependency information in the file.
                        If you specify two files, BitBake compares the two
                        files and dumps out the differences between the two.
                        This more easily helps answer the question of "What
                        changed between X and Y?"
The OpenEmbedded build system uses checksums and shared state cache to avoid unnecessarily rebuilding tasks. Collectively, this scheme is known as "shared state code."
                As with all schemes, this one has some drawbacks.
                It is possible that you could make implicit changes to your
                code that the checksum calculations do not take into
                account.
                These implicit changes affect a task's output but do not trigger
                the shared state code into rebuilding a recipe.
                Consider an example during which a tool changes its output.
                Assume that the output of rpmdeps changes.
                The result of the change should be that all the
                package and
                package_write_rpm shared state cache
                items become invalid.
                However, because the change to the output is
                external to the code and therefore implicit,
                the associated shared state cache items do not become
                invalidated.
                In this case, the build process uses the cached items rather
                than running the task again.
                Obviously, these types of implicit changes can cause problems.
            
To avoid these problems during the build, you need to understand the effects of any changes you make. Realize that changes you make directly to a function are automatically factored into the checksum calculation. Thus, these explicit changes invalidate the associated area of shared state cache. However, you need to be aware of any implicit changes that are not obvious changes to the code and could affect the output of a given task.
                When you identify an implicit change, you can easily take steps
                to invalidate the cache and force the tasks to run.
                The steps you can take are as simple as changing a function's
                comments in the source code.
                For example, to invalidate package shared state files, change
                the comment statements of
                do_package
                or the comments of one of the functions it calls.
                Even though the change is purely cosmetic, it causes the
                checksum to be recalculated and forces the OpenEmbedded build
                system to run the task again.
            
x32 is a processor-specific Application Binary Interface (psABI) for x86_64. An ABI defines the calling conventions between functions in a processing environment. The interface determines what registers are used and what the sizes are for various C data types.
Some processing environments prefer using 32-bit applications even when running on Intel 64-bit platforms. Consider the i386 psABI, which is a very old 32-bit ABI for Intel 64-bit platforms. The i386 psABI does not provide efficient use and access of the Intel 64-bit processor resources, leaving the system underutilized. Now consider the x86_64 psABI. This ABI is newer and uses 64-bits for data sizes and program pointers. The extra bits increase the footprint size of the programs, libraries, and also increases the memory and file system size requirements. Executing under the x32 psABI enables user programs to utilize CPU and system resources more efficiently while keeping the memory footprint of the applications low. Extra bits are used for registers but not for addressing mechanisms.
This Yocto Project release supports the final specifications of x32 psABI. Support for x32 psABI exists as follows:
You can create packages and images in x32 psABI format on x86_64 architecture targets.
You can successfully build many recipes with the x32 toolchain.
You can create and boot core-image-minimal and
                    core-image-sato images.
Future Plans for the x32 psABI in the Yocto Project include the following:
Enhance and fix the few remaining recipes so they work with and support x32 toolchains.
Enhance RPM Package Manager (RPM) support for x32 binaries.
Support larger images.
Follow these steps to use the x32 spABI:
Enable the x32 psABI tuning file for x86_64
                    machines by editing the conf/local.conf like this:
                    
      MACHINE = "qemux86-64"
      DEFAULTTUNE = "x86-64-x32"
      baselib = "${@d.getVar('BASE_LIB_tune-' + (d.getVar('DEFAULTTUNE', True) \
         or 'INVALID'), True) or 'lib'}"
      #MACHINE = "genericx86"
      #DEFAULTTUNE = "core2-64-x32"
                    As usual, use BitBake to build an image that supports the x32 psABI. Here is an example:
     $ bitbake core-image-sato
                    As usual, run your image using QEMU:
     $ runqemu qemux86-64 core-image-sato
                    
Wayland is a computer display server protocol that provides a method for compositing window managers to communicate directly with applications and video hardware and expects them to communicate with input hardware using other libraries. Using Wayland with supporting targets can result in better control over graphics frame rendering than an application might otherwise achieve.
The Yocto Project provides the Wayland protocol libraries and the reference Weston compositor as part of its release. This section describes what you need to do to implement Wayland and use the compositor when building an image for a supporting target.
            The Wayland protocol libraries and the reference Weston compositor
            ship as integrated packages in the meta layer
            of the
            Source Directory.
            Specifically, you can find the recipes that build both Wayland
            and Weston at meta/recipes-graphics/wayland.
        
You can build both the Wayland and Weston packages for use only with targets that accept the Mesa 3D and Direct Rendering Infrastructure, which is also known as Mesa DRI. This implies that you cannot build and use the packages if your target uses, for example, the Intel® Embedded Media and Graphics Driver (Intel® EMGD) that overrides Mesa DRI.
To enable Wayland, you need to enable it to be built and enable it to be included in the image.
                To cause Mesa to build the wayland-egl
                platform and Weston to build Wayland with Kernel Mode
                Setting
                (KMS)
                support, include the "wayland" flag in the
                DISTRO_FEATURES
                statement in your local.conf file:
                
     DISTRO_FEATURES_append = " wayland"
                
                To install the Wayland feature into an image, you must
                include the following
                CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL
                statement in your local.conf file:
                
     CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL += "wayland weston"
                
To run Weston inside X11, enabling it as described earlier and building a Sato image is sufficient. If you are running your image under Sato, a Weston Launcher appears in the "Utility" category.
Alternatively, you can run Weston through the command-line interpretor (CLI), which is better suited for development work. To run Weston under the CLI, you need to do the following after your image is built:
Run these commands to export
                    XDG_RUNTIME_DIR:
                    
     mkdir -p /tmp/$USER-weston
     chmod 0700 /tmp/$USER-weston
     export XDG_RUNTIME_DIR=/tmp/$USER-weston
                    Launch Weston in the shell:
     weston
                    
This section describes the mechanism by which the OpenEmbedded build system tracks changes to licensing text. The section also describes how to enable commercially licensed recipes, which by default are disabled.
For information that can help you maintain compliance with various open source licensing during the lifecycle of the product, see the "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Project's Lifecycle" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            The license of an upstream project might change in the future.
            In order to prevent these changes going unnoticed, the
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
            variable tracks changes to the license text. The checksums are validated at the end of the
            configure step, and if the checksums do not match, the build will fail.
        
LIC_FILES_CHKSUM Variable¶
                The LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
                variable contains checksums of the license text in the source code for the recipe.
                Following is an example of how to specify LIC_FILES_CHKSUM:
                
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://COPYING;md5=xxxx \
                         file://licfile1.txt;beginline=5;endline=29;md5=yyyy \
                         file://licfile2.txt;endline=50;md5=zzzz \
                         ..."
                
                The build system uses the
                S variable as
                the default directory when searching files listed in
                LIC_FILES_CHKSUM.
                The previous example employs the default directory.
            
Consider this next example:
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://src/ls.c;beginline=5;endline=16;\
                                         md5=bb14ed3c4cda583abc85401304b5cd4e"
     LIC_FILES_CHKSUM = "file://${WORKDIR}/license.html;md5=5c94767cedb5d6987c902ac850ded2c6"
                
                The first line locates a file in
                ${S}/src/ls.c.
                The second line refers to a file in
                WORKDIR.
            
                Note that LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable is
                mandatory for all recipes, unless the
                LICENSE variable is set to "CLOSED".
            
                As mentioned in the previous section, the
                LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable lists all the
                important files that contain the license text for the source code.
                It is possible to specify a checksum for an entire file, or a specific section of a
                file (specified by beginning and ending line numbers with the "beginline" and "endline"
                parameters, respectively).
                The latter is useful for source files with a license notice header,
                README documents, and so forth.
                If you do not use the "beginline" parameter, then it is assumed that the text begins on the
                first line of the file.
                Similarly, if you do not use the "endline" parameter, it is assumed that the license text
                ends with the last line of the file.
            
The "md5" parameter stores the md5 checksum of the license text. If the license text changes in any way as compared to this parameter then a mismatch occurs. This mismatch triggers a build failure and notifies the developer. Notification allows the developer to review and address the license text changes. Also note that if a mismatch occurs during the build, the correct md5 checksum is placed in the build log and can be easily copied to the recipe.
                There is no limit to how many files you can specify using the
                LIC_FILES_CHKSUM variable.
                Generally, however, every project requires a few specifications for license tracking.
                Many projects have a "COPYING" file that stores the license information for all the source
                code files.
                This practice allows you to just track the "COPYING" file as long as it is kept up to date.
            
            By default, the OpenEmbedded build system disables
            components that have commercial or other special licensing
            requirements.
            Such requirements are defined on a
            recipe-by-recipe basis through the
            LICENSE_FLAGS
            variable definition in the affected recipe.
            For instance, the
            poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly
            recipe contains the following statement:
            
     LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
            Here is a slightly more complicated example that contains both an explicit recipe name and version (after variable expansion):
     LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}"
            
	        In order for a component restricted by a LICENSE_FLAGS
	        definition to be enabled and included in an image, it
	        needs to have a matching entry in the global
	        LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST
            variable, which is a variable
	        typically defined in your local.conf file.
            For example, to enable
	        the poky/meta/recipes-multimedia/gstreamer/gst-plugins-ugly
	        package, you could add either the string
	        "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly" or the more general string
	        "commercial" to LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST.
            See the
            "License Flag Matching" section
            for a full explanation of how LICENSE_FLAGS matching works.
            Here is the example:
            
     LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly"
            
	        Likewise, to additionally enable the package built from the recipe containing
	        LICENSE_FLAGS = "license_${PN}_${PV}", and assuming
	        that the actual recipe name was emgd_1.10.bb,
	        the following string would enable that package as well as
	        the original gst-plugins-ugly package:
            
     LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly license_emgd_1.10"
            As a convenience, you do not need to specify the complete license string in the whitelist for every package. You can use an abbreviated form, which consists of just the first portion or portions of the license string before the initial underscore character or characters. A partial string will match any license that contains the given string as the first portion of its license. For example, the following whitelist string will also match both of the packages previously mentioned as well as any other packages that have licenses starting with "commercial" or "license".
     LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial license"
            
		        License flag matching allows you to control what recipes the
                OpenEmbedded build system includes in the build.
                Fundamentally, the build system attempts to match
                LICENSE_FLAGS
                strings found in recipes against
                LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST
                strings found in the whitelist.
                A match causes the build system to include a recipe in the
                build, while failure to find a match causes the build system to
                exclude a recipe.
            
In general, license flag matching is simple. However, understanding some concepts will help you correctly and effectively use matching.
                Before a flag
                defined by a particular recipe is tested against the
                contents of the whitelist, the expanded string
                _${PN} is appended to the flag.
                This expansion makes each LICENSE_FLAGS
                value recipe-specific.
                After expansion, the string is then matched against the
                whitelist.
                Thus, specifying
                LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
                in recipe "foo", for example, results in the string
                "commercial_foo".
                And, to create a match, that string must appear in the
                whitelist.
            
                Judicious use of the LICENSE_FLAGS
                strings and the contents of the
                LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST variable
                allows you a lot of flexibility for including or excluding
                recipes based on licensing.
                For example, you can broaden the matching capabilities by
                using license flags string subsets in the whitelist.
                
usethispart_1.3,
                    usethispart_1.4, and so forth).
                
                For example, simply specifying the string "commercial" in
                the whitelist matches any expanded
                LICENSE_FLAGS definition that starts with
                the string "commercial" such as "commercial_foo" and
                "commercial_bar", which are the strings the build system
                automatically generates for hypothetical recipes named
                "foo" and "bar" assuming those recipes simply specify the
                following:
                
     LICENSE_FLAGS = "commercial"
                Thus, you can choose to exhaustively enumerate each license flag in the whitelist and allow only specific recipes into the image, or you can use a string subset that causes a broader range of matches to allow a range of recipes into the image.
                This scheme works even if the
                LICENSE_FLAGS string already
                has _${PN} appended.
                For example, the build system turns the license flag
                "commercial_1.2_foo" into "commercial_1.2_foo_foo" and would
                match both the general "commercial" and the specific
                "commercial_1.2_foo" strings found in the whitelist, as
                expected.
            
Here are some other scenarios:
You can specify a versioned string in the recipe such as "commercial_foo_1.2" in a "foo" recipe. The build system expands this string to "commercial_foo_1.2_foo". Combine this license flag with a whitelist that has the string "commercial" and you match the flag along with any other flag that starts with the string "commercial".
Under the same circumstances, you can use "commercial_foo" in the whitelist and the build system not only matches "commercial_foo_1.2" but also matches any license flag with the string "commercial_foo", regardless of the version.
You can be very specific and use both the package and version parts in the whitelist (e.g. "commercial_foo_1.2") to specifically match a versioned recipe.
                Other helpful variables related to commercial
                license handling exist and are defined in the
                poky/meta/conf/distro/include/default-distrovars.inc file:
                
     COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS ?= ""
     COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS ?= ""
                
                If you want to enable these components, you can do so by making sure you have
                statements similar to the following
                in your local.conf configuration file:
                
     COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mad \
        gst-plugins-ugly-mpegaudioparse"
     COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS = "gst-plugins-ugly-mpeg2dec \
        gst-plugins-ugly-mpegstream gst-plugins-bad-mpegvideoparse"
     LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial_gst-plugins-ugly commercial_gst-plugins-bad commercial_qmmp"
                
                Of course, you could also create a matching whitelist
                for those components using the more general "commercial"
                in the whitelist, but that would also enable all the
                other packages with
                LICENSE_FLAGS
                containing "commercial", which you may or may not want:
                
     LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST = "commercial"
                
                Specifying audio and video plug-ins as part of the
                COMMERCIAL_AUDIO_PLUGINS and
                COMMERCIAL_VIDEO_PLUGINS statements
                (along with the enabling
                LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST) includes the
                plug-ins or components into built images, thus adding
                support for media formats or components.
            
atom-pc Board Support Package (BSP)SRCREV ValuesIMAGE_FEATURES/runudevarchiver Classqemu-nativecore-image-basicCFLAGS Optionsupdate-alternative Providervirtclass OverridesPACKAGECONFIG Options in local.confeglibc 2.19 Replaced with glibc 2.20linux-yocto Kernel Metadata Repository Now Split from SourcegetVar() and
            getVarFlag() is Now Mandatorylibexecdir Reverted to ${prefix}/libexecac_cv_sizeof_off_t is No Longer Cached in Site FilesThis chapter provides information you can use to migrate work to a newer Yocto Project release. You can find the same information in the release notes for a given release.
Some considerations are not tied to a specific Yocto Project release. This section presents information you should consider when migrating to any new Yocto Project release.
Dealing with Customized Recipes: Issues could arise if you take older recipes that contain customizations and simply copy them forward expecting them to work after you migrate to new Yocto Project metadata. For example, suppose you have a recipe in your layer that is a customized version of a core recipe copied from the earlier release, rather than through the use of an append file. When you migrate to a newer version of Yocto Project, the metadata (e.g. perhaps an include file used by the recipe) could have changed in a way that would break the build. Say, for example, a function is removed from an include file and the customized recipe tries to call that function.
You could "forward-port" all your customizations in your recipe so that everything works for the new release. However, this is not the optimal solution as you would have to repeat this process with each new release if changes occur that give rise to problems.
The better solution (where practical) is to use append
                files (*.bbappend) to capture any
                customizations you want to make to a recipe.
                Doing so, isolates your changes from the main recipe making
                them much more manageable.
                However, sometimes it is not practical to use an append
                file.
                A good example of this is when introducing a newer or older
                version of a recipe in another layer.
Updating Append Files:
                Since append files generally only contain your customizations,
                they often do not need to be adjusted for new releases.
                However, if the .bbappend file is
                specific to a particular version of the recipe (i.e. its
                name does not use the % wildcard) and the version of the
                recipe to which it is appending has changed, then you will
                at a minimum need to rename the append file to match the
                name of the recipe file.
                A mismatch between an append file and its corresponding
                recipe file (.bb) will
                trigger an error during parsing.
Depending on the type of customization the append file applies, other incompatibilities might occur when you upgrade. For example, if your append file applies a patch and the recipe to which it is appending is updated to a newer version, the patch might no longer apply. If this is the case and assuming the patch is still needed, you must modify the patch file so that it does apply.
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.3 Release from the prior release.
            Differences include changes for
            SSTATE_MIRRORS
            and bblayers.conf.
        
                The shared state cache (sstate-cache), as pointed to by
                SSTATE_DIR,
                by default now has two-character subdirectories to prevent
                issues arising from too many files in the same directory.
                Also, native sstate-cache packages, which are built to run
                on the host system, will go into a subdirectory named using
                the distro ID string.
                If you copy the newly structured sstate-cache to a mirror
                location (either local or remote) and then point to it in
                SSTATE_MIRRORS,
                you need to append "PATH" to the end of the mirror URL so that
                the path used by BitBake before the mirror substitution is
                appended to the path used to access the mirror.
                Here is an example:
                
     SSTATE_MIRRORS = "file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH"
                
                The meta-yocto layer consists of two parts
                that correspond to the Poky reference distribution and the
                reference hardware Board Support Packages (BSPs), respectively:
                meta-yocto and
                meta-yocto-bsp.
                When running BitBake for the first time after upgrading,
                your conf/bblayers.conf file will be
                updated to handle this change and you will be asked to
                re-run or restart for the changes to take effect.
            
Differences include changes for the following:
Python function whitespace
proto= in SRC_URI
nativesdk
Task recipes
IMAGE_FEATURES
Removed recipes
                All Python functions must now use four spaces for indentation.
                Previously, an inconsistent mix of spaces and tabs existed,
                which made extending these functions using
                _append or _prepend
                complicated given that Python treats whitespace as
                syntactically significant.
                If you are defining or extending any Python functions (e.g.
                populate_packages, do_unpack,
                do_patch and so forth) in custom recipes
                or classes, you need to ensure you are using consistent
                four-space indentation.
            
                Any use of proto= in
                SRC_URI
                needs to be changed to protocol=.
                In particular, this applies to the following URIs:
                
svn://
bzr://
hg://
osc://
                Other URIs were already using protocol=.
                This change improves consistency.
            
                The suffix nativesdk is now implemented
                as a prefix, which simplifies a lot of the packaging code for
                nativesdk recipes.
                All custom nativesdk recipes, which are
                relocatable packages that are native to
                SDK_ARCH,
                and any references need to be updated to use
                nativesdk-* instead of
                *-nativesdk.
            
                "Task" recipes are now known as "Package groups" and have
                been renamed from task-*.bb to
                packagegroup-*.bb.
                Existing references to the previous task-*
                names should work in most cases as there is an automatic
                upgrade path for most packages.
                However, you should update references in your own recipes and
                configurations as they could be removed in future releases.
                You should also rename any custom task-*
                recipes to packagegroup-*, and change
                them to inherit packagegroup instead of
                task, as well as taking the opportunity
                to remove anything now handled by
                packagegroup.bbclass, such as providing
                -dev and -dbg
                packages, setting
                LIC_FILES_CHKSUM,
                and so forth.
                See the
                "packagegroup.bbclass"
                section for further details.
            
                Image recipes that previously included "apps-console-core"
                in IMAGE_FEATURES
                should now include "splash" instead to enable the boot-up
                splash screen.
                Retaining "apps-console-core" will still include the splash
                screen but generates a warning.
                The "apps-x11-core" and "apps-x11-games"
                IMAGE_FEATURES features have been removed.
            
The following recipes have been removed. For most of them, it is unlikely that you would have any references to them in your own Metadata. However, you should check your metadata against this list to be sure:
libx11-trim:
                        Replaced by libx11, which has a negligible
                        size difference with modern Xorg.
xserver-xorg-lite:
                        Use xserver-xorg, which has a negligible
                        size difference when DRI and GLX modules are not installed.
xserver-kdrive:
                        Effectively unmaintained for many years.
mesa-xlib:
                        No longer serves any purpose.
galago:
                        Replaced by telepathy.
gail:
                        Functionality was integrated into GTK+ 2.13.
eggdbus:
                        No longer needed.
gcc-*-intermediate:
                        The build has been restructured to avoid the need for
                        this step.
libgsmd:
                        Unmaintained for many years.
                        Functionality now provided by
                        ofono instead.
contacts, dates, tasks, eds-tools:
                        Largely unmaintained PIM application suite.
                        It has been moved to meta-gnome
                        in meta-openembedded.
                In addition to the previously listed changes, the
                meta-demoapps directory has also been removed
                because the recipes in it were not being maintained and many
                had become obsolete or broken.
                Additionally, these recipes were not parsed in the default configuration.
                Many of these recipes are already provided in an updated and
                maintained form within the OpenEmbedded community layers such as
                meta-oe and meta-gnome.
                For the remainder, you can now find them in the
                meta-extras repository, which is in the
                Yocto Project
                Source Repositories.
            
            The naming scheme for kernel output binaries has been changed to
            now include
            PE as part of the
            filename:
            
     KERNEL_IMAGE_BASE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}-${PE}-${PV}-${PR}-${MACHINE}-${DATETIME}"
            
            Because the PE variable is not set by default,
            these binary files could result with names that include two dash
            characters.
            Here is an example:
            
     bzImage--3.10.9+git0+cd502a8814_7144bcc4b8-r0-qemux86-64-20130830085431.bin
            
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.4 Release from the prior release.
Differences include the following:
Comment Continuation: If a comment ends with a line continuation (\) character, then the next line must also be a comment. Any instance where this is not the case, now triggers a warning. You must either remove the continuation character, or be sure the next line is a comment.
Package Name Overrides:
                    The runtime package specific variables
                    RDEPENDS,
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    RSUGGESTS,
                    RPROVIDES,
                    RCONFLICTS,
                    RREPLACES,
                    FILES,
                    ALLOW_EMPTY,
                    and the pre, post, install, and uninstall script functions
                    pkg_preinst,
                    pkg_postinst,
                    pkg_prerm, and
                    pkg_postrm should always have a
                    package name override.
                    For example, use RDEPENDS_${PN} for
                    the main package instead of RDEPENDS.
                    BitBake uses more strict checks when it parses recipes.
                    
Differences include the following:
Shared State Code: The shared state code has been optimized to avoid running unnecessary tasks. For example, the following no longer populates the target sysroot since that is not necessary:
     $ bitbake -c rootfs some-image
                    Instead, the system just needs to extract the output package contents, re-create the packages, and construct the root filesystem. This change is unlikely to cause any problems unless you have missing declared dependencies.
Scanning Directory Names:
                    When scanning for files in
                    SRC_URI,
                    the build system now uses
                    FILESOVERRIDES
                    instead of OVERRIDES
                    for the directory names.
                    In general, the values previously in
                    OVERRIDES are now in
                    FILESOVERRIDES as well.
                    However, if you relied upon an additional value
                    you previously added to OVERRIDES,
                    you might now need to add it to
                    FILESOVERRIDES unless you are already
                    adding it through the
                    MACHINEOVERRIDES
                    or DISTROOVERRIDES
                    variables, as appropriate.
                    For more related changes, see the
                    "Variables"
                    section.
                    
            A new oe-git-proxy script has been added to
            replace previous methods of handling proxies and fetching source
            from Git.
            See the meta-yocto/conf/site.conf.sample file
            for information on how to use this script.
        
            If you have created your own custom
            etc/network/interfaces file by creating
            an append file for the netbase recipe,
            you now need to create an append file for the
            init-ifupdown recipe instead, which you can
            find in the
            Source Directory
            at meta/recipes-core/init-ifupdown.
            For information on how to use append files, see the
            "Using .bbappend Files"
            in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        
            Support for remote debugging with the Eclipse IDE is now
            separated into an image feature
            (eclipse-debug) that corresponds to the
            packagegroup-core-eclipse-debug package group.
            Previously, the debugging feature was included through the
            tools-debug image feature, which corresponds
            to the packagegroup-core-tools-debug
            package group.
        
The following variables have changed:
SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS:
                    This variable now uses a distribution ID, which is composed
                    of the host distributor ID followed by the release.
                    Previously,
                    SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS
                    was composed of the description field.
                    For example, "Ubuntu 12.10" becomes "Ubuntu-12.10".
                    You do not need to worry about this change if you are not
                    specifically setting this variable, or if you are
                    specifically setting it to "".
                    
SRC_URI:
                    The ${PN},
                    ${PF},
                    ${P},
                    and FILE_DIRNAME directories have been
                    dropped from the default value of the
                    FILESPATH
                    variable, which is used as the search path for finding files
                    referred to in
                    SRC_URI.
                    If you have a recipe that relied upon these directories,
                    which would be unusual, then you will need to add the
                    appropriate paths within the recipe or, alternatively,
                    rearrange the files.
                    The most common locations are still covered by
                    ${BP}, ${BPN},
                    and "files", which all remain in the default value of
                    FILESPATH.
                    
If runtime package management is enabled and the RPM backend is selected, Smart is now installed for package download, dependency resolution, and upgrades instead of Zypper. For more information on how to use Smart, run the following command on the target:
     smart --help
            
The following recipes were moved from their previous locations because they are no longer used by anything in the OpenEmbedded-Core:
clutter-box2d:
                    Now resides in the meta-oe layer.
                    
evolution-data-server:
                    Now resides in the meta-gnome layer.
                    
gthumb:
                    Now resides in the meta-gnome layer.
                    
gtkhtml2:
                    Now resides in the meta-oe layer.
                    
gupnp:
                    Now resides in the meta-multimedia layer.
                    
gypsy:
                    Now resides in the meta-oe layer.
                    
libcanberra:
                    Now resides in the meta-gnome layer.
                    
libgdata:
                    Now resides in the meta-gnome layer.
                    
libmusicbrainz:
                    Now resides in the meta-multimedia layer.
                    
metacity:
                    Now resides in the meta-gnome layer.
                    
polkit:
                    Now resides in the meta-oe layer.
                    
zeroconf:
                    Now resides in the meta-networking layer.
                    
The following list shows what has been removed or renamed:
evieext:
                    Removed because it has been removed from
                    xserver since 2008.
                    
Gtk+ DirectFB: Removed support because upstream Gtk+ no longer supports it as of version 2.18.
libxfontcache / xfontcacheproto:
                    Removed because they were removed from the Xorg server in 2008.
                    
libxp / libxprintapputil / libxprintutil / printproto:
                    Removed because the XPrint server was removed from
                    Xorg in 2008.
                    
libxtrap / xtrapproto:
                    Removed because their functionality was broken upstream.
                    
linux-yocto 3.0 kernel: Removed with linux-yocto 3.8 kernel being added. The linux-yocto 3.2 and linux-yocto 3.4 kernels remain as part of the release.
lsbsetup:
                    Removed with functionality now provided by
                    lsbtest.
                    
matchbox-stroke:
                    Removed because it was never more than a proof-of-concept.
                    
matchbox-wm-2 / matchbox-theme-sato-2:
                    Removed because they are not maintained.
                    However, matchbox-wm and
                    matchbox-theme-sato are still
                    provided.
                    
mesa-dri:
                    Renamed to mesa.
                    
mesa-xlib:
                    Removed because it was no longer useful.
                    
mutter:
                    Removed because nothing ever uses it and the recipe is
                    very old.
                    
orinoco-conf:
                    Removed because it has become obsolete.
                    
update-modules:
                    Removed because it is no longer used.
                    The kernel module postinstall and
                    postrm scripts can now do the same
                    task without the use of this script.
                    
web:
                    Removed because it is not maintained.  Superseded by
                    web-webkit.
                    
xf86bigfontproto:
                    Removed because upstream it has been disabled by default
                    since 2007.
                    Nothing uses xf86bigfontproto.
                    
xf86rushproto:
                    Removed because its dependency in
                    xserver was spurious and it was
                    removed in 2005.
                    
zypper / libzypp / sat-solver:
                    Removed and been functionally replaced with Smart
                    (python-smartpm) when RPM packaging
                    is used and package management is enabled on the target.
                    
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.5 Release from the prior release.
The OpenEmbedded build system now has some additional requirements on the host system:
Python 2.7.3+
Tar 1.24+
Git 1.7.8+
Patched version of Make if you are using 3.82. Most distributions that provide Make 3.82 use the patched version.
If the Linux distribution you are using on your build host does not provide packages for these, you can install and use the Buildtools tarball, which provides an SDK-like environment containing them.
For more information on this requirement, see the "Required Git, tar, and Python Versions" section.
atom-pc Board Support Package (BSP)¶
            The atom-pc hardware reference BSP has been
            replaced by a genericx86 BSP.
            This BSP is not necessarily guaranteed to work on all x86
            hardware, but it will run on a wider range of systems than the
            atom-pc did.
            
genericx86-64 BSP has
                been added for 64-bit Atom systems.
            
The following changes have been made that relate to BitBake:
                    BitBake now supports a _remove
                    operator.
                    The addition of this operator means you will have to
                    rename any items in recipe space (functions, variables)
                    whose names currently contain
                    _remove_ or end with
                    _remove to avoid unexpected behavior.
                    
BitBake's global method pool has been removed. This method is not particularly useful and led to clashes between recipes containing functions that had the same name.
The "none" server backend has been removed. The "process" server backend has been serving well as the default for a long time now.
                    The bitbake-runtask script has been
                    removed.
                    ${P}
                    and
                    ${PF}
                    are no longer added to
                    PROVIDES
                    by default in bitbake.conf.
                    These version-specific PROVIDES
                    items were seldom used.
                    Attempting to use them could result in two versions being
                    built simultaneously rather than just one version due to
                    the way BitBake resolves dependencies.
The following changes have been made to the package QA checks:
                    If you have customized
                    ERROR_QA
                    or WARN_QA
                    values in your configuration, check that they contain all of
                    the issues that you wish to be reported.
                    Previous Yocto Project versions contained a bug that meant
                    that any item not mentioned in ERROR_QA
                    or WARN_QA would be treated as a
                    warning.
                    Consequently, several important items were not already in
                    the default value of WARN_QA.
                    All of the possible QA checks are now documented in the
                    "insane.bbclass"
                    section.
                    An additional QA check has been added to check if
                    /usr/share/info/dir is being installed.
                    Your recipe should delete this file within
                    do_install
                    if "make install" is installing it.
                    
                    If you are using the buildhistory class, the check for the
                    package version going backwards is now controlled using a
                    standard QA check.
                    Thus, if you have customized your
                    ERROR_QA or
                    WARN_QA values and still wish to have
                    this check performed, you should add
                    "version-going-backwards" to your value for one or the
                    other variables depending on how you wish it to be handled.
                    See the documented QA checks in the
                    "insane.bbclass"
                    section.
                    
The following directory changes exist:
                    Output SDK installer files are now named to include the
                    image name and tuning architecture through the
                    SDK_NAME
                    variable.
                    Images and related files are now installed into a directory
                    that is specific to the machine, instead of a parent
                    directory containing output files for multiple machines.
                    The
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE
                    variable continues to point to the directory containing
                    images for the current
                    MACHINE
                    and should be used anywhere there is a need to refer to
                    this directory.
                    The runqemu script now uses this
                    variable to find images and kernel binaries and will use
                    BitBake to determine the directory.
                    Alternatively, you can set the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE variable in the
                    external environment.
                    When buildhistory is enabled, its output is now written
                    under the
                    Build Directory
                    rather than
                    TMPDIR.
                    Doing so makes it easier to delete
                    TMPDIR and preserve the build history.
                    Additionally, data for produced SDKs is now split by
                    IMAGE_NAME.
                    
                    The pkgdata directory produced as
                    part of the packaging process has been collapsed into a
                    single machine-specific directory.
                    This directory is located under
                    sysroots and uses a machine-specific
                    name (i.e.
                    tmp/sysroots/).
                    machine/pkgdata
SRCREV Values¶
            BitBake will now shorten revisions from Git repositories from the
            normal 40 characters down to 10 characters within
            SRCPV
            for improved usability in path and file names.
            This change should be safe within contexts where these revisions
            are used because the chances of spatially close collisions
            is very low.
            Distant collisions are not a major issue in the way
            the values are used.
        
IMAGE_FEATURES¶
            The following changes have been made that relate to
            IMAGE_FEATURES:
            
                    The value of
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    is now validated to ensure invalid feature items are not
                    added.
                    Some users mistakenly add package names to this variable
                    instead of using
                    IMAGE_INSTALL
                    in order to have the package added to the image, which does
                    not work.
                    This change is intended to catch those kinds of situations.
                    Valid IMAGE_FEATURES are drawn from
                    PACKAGE_GROUP
                    definitions,
                    COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB
                    and a new "validitems" varflag on
                    IMAGE_FEATURES.
                    The "validitems" varflag change allows additional features
                    to be added if they are not provided using the previous
                    two mechanisms.
                    
                    The previously deprecated "apps-console-core"
                    IMAGE_FEATURES item is no longer
                    supported.
                    Add "splash" to IMAGE_FEATURES if you
                    wish to have the splash screen enabled, since this is
                    all that apps-console-core was doing.
/run¶
            The /run directory from the Filesystem
            Hierarchy Standard 3.0 has been introduced.
            You can find some of the implications for this change
            here.
            The change also means that recipes that install files to
            /var/run must be changed.
            You can find a guide on how to make these changes
            here.
        
            The image core-image-minimal no longer adds
            remove_packaging_data_files to
            ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND.
            This addition is now handled automatically when "package-management"
            is not in
            IMAGE_FEATURES.
            If you have custom image recipes that make this addition,
            you should remove the lines, as they are not needed and might
            interfere with correct operation of postinstall scripts.
        
            The
            do_rootfs
            and other related image
            construction tasks are no longer marked as "nostamp".
            Consequently, they will only be re-executed when their inputs have
            changed.
            Previous versions of the OpenEmbedded build system always rebuilt
            the image when requested rather when necessary.
        
            The previously deprecated task.bbclass has
            now been dropped.
            For recipes that previously inherited from this class, you should
            rename them from task-* to
            packagegroup-* and inherit packagegroup
            instead.
        
            For more information, see the
            "packagegroup.bbclass"
            section.
        
            By default, we now split BusyBox into two binaries:
            one that is suid root for those components that need it, and
            another for the rest of the components.
            Splitting BusyBox allows for optimization that eliminates the
            tinylogin recipe as recommended by upstream.
            You can disable this split by setting
            BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID
            to "0".
        
            A new automated image testing framework has been added
            through the
            testimage.bbclass
            class.
            This framework replaces the older
            imagetest-qemu framework.
        
You can learn more about performing automated image tests in the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section.
Following are changes to Build History:
                     Installed package sizes:
                     installed-package-sizes.txt for an
                     image now records the size of the files installed by each
                     package instead of the size of each compressed package
                     archive file.
                    The dependency graphs (depends*.dot)
                    now use the actual package names instead of replacing
                    dashes, dots and plus signs with underscores.
                    
                    The buildhistory-diff and
                    buildhistory-collect-srcrevs
                    utilities have improved command-line handling.
                    Use the --help option for
                    each utility for more information on the new syntax.
                    
For more information on Build History, see the "Maintaining Build Output Quality" section.
udev¶
            Following are changes to udev:
            
                    udev no longer brings in
                    udev-extraconf automatically
                    through
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    since this was originally intended to be optional.
                    If you need the extra rules, then add
                    udev-extraconf to your image.
                    
                    udev no longer brings in
                    pciutils-ids or
                    usbutils-ids through
                    RRECOMMENDS.
                    These are not needed by udev itself
                    and removing them saves around 350KB.
                    
                The linux-yocto 3.2 kernel has been
                removed.
                libtool-nativesdk has been renamed to
                nativesdk-libtool.
                tinylogin has been removed.
                It has been replaced by a suid portion of Busybox.
                See the
                "BusyBox" section
                for more information.
                external-python-tarball has been renamed
                to buildtools-tarball.
                
                web-webkit has been removed.
                It has been functionally replaced by
                midori.
                imake has been removed.
                It is no longer needed by any other recipe.
                
                transfig-native has been removed.
                It is no longer needed by any other recipe.
                
                anjuta-remote-run has been removed.
                Anjuta IDE integration has not been officially supported for
                several releases.
Following is a list of short entries describing other changes:
                    run-postinsts: Make this generic.
                    
                    base-files: Remove the unnecessary
                    media/xxx directories.
                    
                    alsa-state: Provide an empty
                    asound.conf by default.
                    
                    classes/image: Ensure
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    supports pre-renamed package names.
                    classes/rootfs_rpm: Implement
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    for RPM.
                    systemd: Remove
                    systemd_unitdir if
                    systemd is not in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES.
                    
                    systemd: Remove
                    init.d dir if
                    systemd unit file is present and
                    sysvinit is not a distro feature.
                    
                    libpam: Deny all services for the
                    OTHER entries.
                    
                    image.bbclass: Move
                    runtime_mapping_rename to avoid
                    conflict with multilib.
                    See
                    YOCTO #4993
                    in Bugzilla for more information.
                    
                    linux-dtb: Use kernel build system
                    to generate the dtb files.
                    
                    kern-tools: Switch from guilt to
                    new kgit-s2q tool.
                    
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.6 Release from the prior release.
archiver Class¶
            The
            archiver
            class has been rewritten and its configuration has been simplified.
            For more details on the source archiver, see the
            "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        
The following packaging changes have been made:
                    The binutils recipe no longer produces
                    a binutils-symlinks package.
                    update-alternatives is now used to
                    handle the preferred binutils
                    variant on the target instead.
                    
                    The tc (traffic control) utilities have been split out of
                    the main iproute2 package and put
                    into the iproute2-tc package.
                    
                    The gtk-engines schemas have been
                    moved to a dedicated
                    gtk-engines-schemas package.
                    
                    The armv7a with thumb package
                    architecture suffix has changed.
                    The suffix for these packages with the thumb
                    optimization enabled is "t2" as it should be.
                    Use of this suffix was not the case in the 1.5 release.
                    Architecture names will change within package feeds as a
                    result.
                    
The following changes have been made to BitBake.
                When fetching source from a Git repository using
                SRC_URI,
                BitBake will now validate the
                SRCREV
                value against the branch.
                You can specify the branch using the following form:
                
     SRC_URI = "git://server.name/repository;branch=branchname"
                If you do not specify a branch, BitBake looks in the default "master" branch.
                Alternatively, if you need to bypass this check (e.g.
                if you are fetching a revision corresponding to a tag that
                is not on any branch), you can add ";nobranch=1" to
                the end of the URL within SRC_URI.
            
                BitBake had some previously deprecated Python definitions
                within its bb module removed.
                You should use their sub-module counterparts instead:
                
bb.MalformedUrl:
                        Use bb.fetch.MalformedUrl.
                        
bb.encodeurl:
                        Use bb.fetch.encodeurl.
                        
bb.decodeurl:
                        Use bb.fetch.decodeurl
                        
bb.mkdirhier:
                        Use bb.utils.mkdirhier.
                        
bb.movefile:
                        Use bb.utils.movefile.
                        
bb.copyfile:
                        Use bb.utils.copyfile.
                        
bb.which:
                        Use bb.utils.which.
                        
bb.vercmp_string:
                        Use bb.utils.vercmp_string.
                        
bb.vercmp:
                        Use bb.utils.vercmp.
                        
The SVK fetcher has been removed from BitBake.
                The BitBake console UI will now output errors to
                stderr instead of
                stdout.
                Consequently, if you are piping or redirecting the output of
                bitbake to somewhere else, and you wish
                to retain the errors, you will need to add
                2>&1 (or something similar) to the
                end of your bitbake command line.
            
task-taskname Overrides¶
                task-taskname overrides have been
                adjusted so that tasks whose names contain underscores have the
                underscores replaced by hyphens for the override so that they
                now function properly.
                For example, the task override for
                do_populate_sdk
                is task-populate-sdk.
            
The following variables have changed. For information on the OpenEmbedded build system variables, see the "Variables Glossary" Chapter.
TMPDIR¶
                TMPDIR
                can no longer be on an NFS mount.
                NFS does not offer full POSIX locking and inode consistency
                and can cause unexpected issues if used to store
                TMPDIR.
            
                The check for this occurs on startup.
                If TMPDIR is detected on an NFS mount,
                an error occurs.
            
PRINC¶
                The PRINC
                variable has been deprecated and triggers a warning if
                detected during a build.
                For
                PR
                increments on changes, use the PR service instead.
                You can find out more about this service in the
                "Working With a PR Service"
                section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            
IMAGE_TYPES¶
                The "sum.jffs2" option for
                IMAGE_TYPES
                has been replaced by the "jffs2.sum" option, which fits the
                processing order.
            
COPY_LIC_MANIFEST¶
                The
                COPY_LIC_MANIFEST
                variable must
                now be set to "1" rather than any value in order to enable
                it.
            
COPY_LIC_DIRS¶
                The
                COPY_LIC_DIRS
                variable must
                now be set to "1" rather than any value in order to enable
                it.
            
PACKAGE_GROUP¶
                The
                PACKAGE_GROUP
                variable has been renamed to
                FEATURE_PACKAGES
                to more accurately reflect its purpose.
                You can still use PACKAGE_GROUP but
                the OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning message when
                it encounters the variable.
            
The following variables now expect a semicolon separated list of functions to call and not arbitrary shell commands:
     ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND
     ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND
     SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND
     POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND
     POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND
     IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND
     IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND
     ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND
     ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND
                For migration purposes, you can simply wrap shell commands in a shell function and then call the function. Here is an example:
     my_postprocess_function() {
        echo "hello" > ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}/hello.txt
     }
     ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "my_postprocess_function; "
                
            Package Tests (ptest) are built but not installed by default.
            For information on using Package Tests, see the
            "Setting up and running package test (ptest)"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
            For information on the ptest class, see the
            "ptest.bbclass"
            section.
        
            Separate build and source directories have been enabled
            by default for selected recipes where it is known to work
            (a whitelist) and for all recipes that inherit the
            cmake
            class.
            In future releases the
            autotools
            class will enable a separate build directory by default as
            well.
            Recipes building Autotools-based
            software that fails to build with a separate build directory
            should be changed to inherit from the
            autotools-brokensep
            class instead of the autotools or
            autotools_stageclasses.
        
qemu-native¶
            qemu-native now builds without
            SDL-based graphical output support by default.
            The following additional lines are needed in your
            local.conf to enable it:
            
     PACKAGECONFIG_pn-qemu-native = "sdl"
     ASSUME_PROVIDED += "libsdl-native"
            
local.conf
                contains these statements.
                Consequently, if you are building a headless system and using
                a default local.conf file, you will need
                comment these two lines out.
            
core-image-basic¶
            core-image-basic has been renamed to
            core-image-full-cmdline.
        
            In addition to core-image-basic being renamed,
            packagegroup-core-basic has been renamed to
            packagegroup-core-full-cmdline to match.
        
            The top-level LICENSE file has been changed
            to better describe the license of the various components of
            OE-Core.
            However, the licensing itself remains unchanged.
        
            Normally, this change would not cause any side-effects.
            However, some recipes point to this file within
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
            (as ${COREBASE}/LICENSE) and thus the
            accompanying checksum must be changed from
            3f40d7994397109285ec7b81fdeb3b58 to
            4d92cd373abda3937c2bc47fbc49d690.
            A better alternative is to have
            LIC_FILES_CHKSUM point to a file
            describing the license that is distributed with the source
            that the recipe is building, if possible, rather than pointing
            to ${COREBASE}/LICENSE.
        
CFLAGS Options¶
            The "-fpermissive" option has been removed from the default
            CFLAGS
            value.
            You need to take action on individual recipes that fail when
            building with this option.
            You need to either patch the recipes to fix the issues reported by
            the compiler, or you need to add "-fpermissive" to
            CFLAGS in the recipes.
        
            Custom image output types, as selected using
            IMAGE_FSTYPES,
            must declare their dependencies on other image types (if any) using
            a new
            IMAGE_TYPEDEP
            variable.
        
            The do_package_write task has been removed.
            The task is no longer needed.
        
update-alternative Provider¶
            The default update-alternatives provider has
            been changed from opkg to
            opkg-utils.
            This change resolves some troublesome circular dependencies.
            The runtime package has also been renamed from
            update-alternatives-cworth
            to update-alternatives-opkg.
        
virtclass Overrides¶
            The virtclass overrides are now deprecated.
            Use the equivalent class overrides instead (e.g.
            virtclass-native becomes
            class-native.)
        
The following recipes have been removed:
packagegroup-toolset-native -
                    This recipe is largely unused.
                    
linux-yocto-3.8 -
                    Support for the Linux yocto 3.8 kernel has been dropped.
                    Support for the 3.10 and 3.14 kernels have been added
                    with the linux-yocto-3.10 and
                    linux-yocto-3.14 recipes.
                    
ocf-linux -
                    This recipe has been functionally replaced using
                    cryptodev-linux.
                    
genext2fs -
                    genext2fs is no longer used by the
                    build system and is unmaintained upstream.
                    
js -
                    This provided an ancient version of Mozilla's javascript
                    engine that is no longer needed.
                    
zaurusd -
                    The recipe has been moved to the
                    meta-handheld layer.
                    
eglibc 2.17 -
                    Replaced by the eglibc 2.19
                    recipe.
                    
gcc 4.7.2 -
                    Replaced by the now stable
                    gcc 4.8.2.
                    
external-sourcery-toolchain -
                    this recipe is now maintained in the
                    meta-sourcery layer.
                    
linux-libc-headers-yocto 3.4+git -
                    Now using version 3.10 of the
                    linux-libc-headers by default.
                    
meta-toolchain-gmae -
                    This recipe is obsolete.
                    
packagegroup-core-sdk-gmae -
                    This recipe is obsolete.
                    
packagegroup-core-standalone-gmae-sdk-target -
                    This recipe is obsolete.
                    
The following classes have become obsolete and have been removed:
module_strip
                    
pkg_metainfo
                    
pkg_distribute
                    
image-empty
                    
The following reference BSPs changes occurred:
The BeagleBoard
                    (beagleboard) ARM reference hardware
                    has been replaced by the BeagleBone
                    (beaglebone) hardware.
                    
The RouterStation Pro
                    (routerstationpro) MIPS reference
                    hardware has been replaced by the EdgeRouter Lite
                    (edgerouter) hardware.
                    
            The previous reference BSPs for the
            beagleboard and
            routerstationpro machines are still available
            in a new meta-yocto-bsp-old layer in the
            Source Repositories
            at
            http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/meta-yocto-bsp-old/.
        
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.7 Release from the prior release.
PACKAGECONFIG Options in local.conf¶
            The QEMU recipe now uses a number of
            PACKAGECONFIG
            options to enable various optional features.
            The method used to set defaults for these options means that
            existing
            local.conf files will need to be be
            modified to append to PACKAGECONFIG for
            qemu-native and
            nativesdk-qemu instead of setting it.
            In other words, to enable graphical output for QEMU, you should
            now have these lines in local.conf:
            
     PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-qemu-native = " sdl"
     PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-nativesdk-qemu = " sdl"
            
            The minimum
            Git version required
            on the build host is now 1.7.8 because the
            --list option is now required by
            BitBake's Git fetcher.
            As always, if your host distribution does not provide a version of
            Git that meets this requirement, you can use the
            buildtools-tarball that does.
            See the
            "Required Git, tar, and Python Versions"
            section for more information.
        
            The following
            autotools
            class changes occurred:
            
                    A separate build directory is now used by default:
                    The autotools class has been changed
                    to use a directory for building
                    (B),
                    which is separate from the source directory
                    (S).
                    This is commonly referred to as
                    B != S, or an out-of-tree build.
If the software being built is already capable of
                    building in a directory separate from the source, you
                    do not need to do anything.
                    However, if the software is not capable of being built
                    in this manner, you will
                    need to either patch the software so that it can build
                    separately, or you will need to change the recipe to
                    inherit the
                    autotools-brokensep
                    class instead of the autotools or
                    autotools_stage classes.
                    
                    The --foreign option is
                    no longer passed to automake when
                    running autoconf:
                    This option tells automake that a
                    particular software package does not follow the GNU
                    standards and therefore should not be expected
                    to distribute certain files such as
                    ChangeLog,
                    AUTHORS, and so forth.
                    Because the majority of upstream software packages already
                    tell automake to enable foreign mode
                    themselves, the option is mostly superfluous.
                    However, some recipes will need patches for this change.
                    You can easily make the change by patching
                    configure.ac so that it passes
                    "foreign" to AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE().
                    See
                    this commit
                    for an example showing how to make the patch.
                    
            Some of the core recipes that package binary configuration scripts
            now disable the scripts due to the
            scripts previously requiring error-prone path substitution.
            Software that links against these libraries using these scripts
            should use the much more robust pkg-config
            instead.
            The list of recipes changed in this version (and their
            configuration scripts) is as follows:
            
     directfb (directfb-config)
     freetype (freetype-config)
     gpgme (gpgme-config)
     libassuan (libassuan-config)
     libcroco (croco-6.0-config)
     libgcrypt (libgcrypt-config)
     libgpg-error (gpg-error-config)
     libksba (ksba-config)
     libpcap (pcap-config)
     libpcre (pcre-config)
     libpng (libpng-config, libpng16-config)
     libsdl (sdl-config)
     libusb-compat (libusb-config)
     libxml2 (xml2-config)
     libxslt (xslt-config)
     ncurses (ncurses-config)
     neon (neon-config)
     npth (npth-config)
     pth (pth-config)
     taglib (taglib-config)
            
            Additionally, support for pkg-config has been
            added to some recipes in the previous list in the rare cases
            where the upstream software package does not already provide
            it.
        
eglibc 2.19 Replaced with glibc 2.20¶
            Because eglibc and
            glibc were already fairly close, this
            replacement should not require any significant changes to other
            software that links to eglibc.
            However, there were a number of minor changes in
            glibc 2.20 upstream that could require
            patching some software (e.g. the removal of the
            _BSD_SOURCE feature test macro).
        
            glibc 2.20 requires version 2.6.32 or greater
            of the Linux kernel.
            Thus, older kernels will no longer be usable in conjunction with it.
        
            For full details on the changes in glibc 2.20,
            see the upstream release notes
            here.
        
            The
            module_autoload_*
            variable is now deprecated and a new
            KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
            variable should be used instead.
            Also,
            module_conf_*
            must now be used in conjunction with a new
            KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF
            variable.
            The new variables no longer require you to specify the module name
            as part of the variable name.
            This change not only simplifies usage but also allows the values
            of these variables to be appropriately incorporated into task
            signatures and thus trigger the appropriate tasks to re-execute
            when changed.
            You should replace any references to
            module_autoload_* with
            KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD, and add any modules
            for which module_conf_* is specified to
            KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF.
        
            For more information, see the
            KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
            and
            KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF
            variables.
        
The following changes have occurred to the QA check process:
                    Additional QA checks file-rdeps
                    and build-deps have been added in
                    order to verify that file dependencies are satisfied
                    (e.g. package contains a script requiring
                    /bin/bash) and build-time dependencies
                    are declared, respectively.
                    For more information, please see the
                    "QA Error and Warning Messages"
                    chapter.
                    
                    Package QA checks are now performed during a new
                    do_package_qa
                    task rather than being part of the
                    do_package
                    task.
                    This allows more parallel execution.
                    This change is unlikely to be an issue except for highly
                    customized recipes that disable packaging tasks themselves
                    by marking them as noexec.
                    For those packages, you will need to disable the
                    do_package_qa task as well.
                    
                    Files being overwritten during the
                    do_populate_sysroot
                    task now trigger an error instead of a warning.
                    Recipes should not be overwriting files written to the
                    sysroot by other recipes.
                    If you have these types of recipes, you need to alter them
                    so that they do not overwrite these files.
You might now receive this error after changes in
                    configuration or metadata resulting in orphaned files
                    being left in the sysroot.
                    If you do receive this error, the way to resolve the issue
                    is to delete your
                    TMPDIR
                    or to move it out of the way and then re-start the build.
                    Anything that has been fully built up to that point and
                    does not need rebuilding will be restored from the shared
                    state cache and the rest of the build will be able to
                    proceed as normal.
                    
The following recipes have been removed:
                    x-load:
                    This recipe has been superseded by
                    U-boot SPL for all Cortex-based TI SoCs.
                    For legacy boards, the meta-ti
                    layer, which contains a maintained recipe, should be used
                    instead.
                    
                    ubootchart:
                    This recipe is obsolete.
                    A bootchart2 recipe has been added
                    to functionally replace it.
                    
                    linux-yocto 3.4:
                    Support for the linux-yocto 3.4 kernel has been dropped.
                    Support for the 3.10 and 3.14 kernels remains, while
                    support for version 3.17 has been added.
                    
                    eglibc has been removed in favor of
                    glibc.
                    See the
                    "eglibc 2.19 Replaced with glibc 2.20"
                    section for more information.
                    
The following miscellaneous change occurred:
                    The build history feature now writes
                    build-id.txt instead of
                    build-id.
                    Additionally, build-id.txt
                    now contains the full build header as printed by
                    BitBake upon starting the build.
                    You should manually remove old "build-id" files from your
                    existing build history repositories to avoid confusion.
                    For information on the build history feature, see the
                    "Maintaining Build Output Quality"
                    section.
                    
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 1.8 Release from the prior release.
The following recipes have been removed:
owl-video:
                    Functionality replaced by gst-player.
                    
gaku:
                    Functionality replaced by gst-player.
                    
gnome-desktop:
                    This recipe is now available in
                    meta-gnome and is no longer needed.
                    
gsettings-desktop-schemas:
                    This recipe is now available in
                    meta-gnome and is no longer needed.
                    
python-argparse:
                    The argparse module is already
                    provided in the default Python distribution in a
                    package named python-argparse.
                    Consequently, the separate
                    python-argparse recipe is no
                    longer needed.
                    
telepathy-python, libtelepathy, telepathy-glib, telepathy-idle, telepathy-mission-control:
                    All these recipes have moved to
                    meta-oe and are consequently no
                    longer needed by any recipes in OpenEmbedded-Core.
                    
linux-yocto_3.10 and linux-yocto_3.17:
                    Support for the linux-yocto 3.10 and 3.17 kernels has been
                    dropped.
                    Support for the 3.14 kernel remains, while support for
                    3.19 kernel has been added.
                    
poky-feed-config-opkg:
                    This recipe has become obsolete and is no longer needed.
                    Use distro-feed-config from
                    meta-oe instead.
                    
libav 0.8.x:
                    libav 9.x is now used.
                    
sed-native:
                    No longer needed.
                    A working version of sed is expected
                    to be provided by the host distribution.
                    
            Proper built-in support for selecting BlueZ 5.x in preference
            to the default of 4.x now exists.
            To use BlueZ 5.x, simply add "bluez5" to your
            DISTRO_FEATURES
            value.
            If you had previously added append files
            (*.bbappend) to make this selection, you can
            now remove them.
        
            Additionally, a
            bluetooth
            class has been added to make selection of the appropriate bluetooth
            support within a recipe a little easier.
            If you wish to make use of this class in a recipe, add something
            such as the following:
            
     inherit bluetooth
     PACKAGECONFIG ??= "${@bb.utils.contains('DISTRO_FEATURES', 'bluetooth', '${BLUEZ}', '', d)}
     PACKAGECONFIG[bluez4] = "--enable-bluetooth,--disable-bluetooth,bluez4"
     PACKAGECONFIG[bluez5] = "--enable-bluez5,--disable-bluez5,bluez5"
            
            The kernel build process was changed to place the source
            in a common shared work area and to place build artifacts
            separately in the source code tree.
            In theory, migration paths have been provided for most common
            usages in kernel recipes but this might not work in all cases.
            In particular, users need to ensure that
            ${S} (source files) and
            ${B} (build artifacts) are used
            correctly in functions such as
            do_configure
            and
            do_install.
            For kernel recipes that do not inherit from
            kernel-yocto or include
            linux-yocto.inc, you might wish to
            refer to the linux.inc file in the
            meta-oe layer for the kinds of changes you
            need to make.
            For reference, here is the
            commit
            where the linux.inc file in
            meta-oe was updated.
        
            Recipes that rely on the kernel source code and do not inherit
            the module classes might need to add explicit dependencies on
            the do_shared_workdir kernel task, for example:
            
     do_configure[depends] += "virtual/kernel:do_shared_workdir"
            
            SSL 3.0 is now disabled when building OpenSSL.
            Disabling SSL 3.0 avoids any lingering instances of the POODLE
            vulnerability.
            If you feel you must re-enable SSL 3.0, then you can add an
            append file (*.bbappend) for the
            openssl recipe to remove "-no-ssl3"
            from
            EXTRA_OECONF.
        
            gcc's default sysroot and include directories
            are now "poisoned".
            In other words, the sysroot and include directories are being
            redirected to a non-existent location in order to catch when
            host directories are being used due to the correct options not
            being passed.
            This poisoning applies both to the cross-compiler used within the
            build and to the cross-compiler produced in the SDK.
        
If this change causes something in the build to fail, it almost certainly means the various compiler flags and commands are not being passed correctly to the underlying piece of software. In such cases, you need to take corrective steps.
            Changes have been made to the
            base,
            autotools,
            and
            cmake
            classes to clean out generated files when the
            do_configure
            task needs to be re-executed.
        
            One of the improvements is to attempt to run "make clean" during
            the do_configure task if a
            Makefile exists.
            Some software packages do not provide a working clean target
            within their make files.
            If you have such recipes, you need to set
            CLEANBROKEN
            to "1" within the recipe, for example:
            
     CLEANBROKEN = "1"
            
The following QA Check and Validation Changes have occurred:
                    Usage of PRINC
                    previously triggered a warning.
                    It now triggers an error.
                    You should remove any remaining usage of
                    PRINC in any recipe or append file.
                    
                    An additional QA check has been added to detect usage of
                    ${D} in
                    FILES
                    values where
                    D values
                    should not be used at all.
                    The same check ensures that $D is used
                    in
                    pkg_preinst/pkg_postinst/pkg_prerm/pkg_postrm
                    functions instead of ${D}.
                    
                    S now
                    needs to be set to a valid value within a recipe.
                    If S is not set in the recipe, the
                    directory is not automatically created.
                    If S does not point to a directory
                    that exists at the time the
                    do_unpack
                    task finishes, a warning will be shown.
                    
                    LICENSE
                    is now validated for correct formatting of multiple
                    licenses.
                    If the format is invalid (e.g. multiple licenses are
                    specified with no operators to specify how the multiple
                    licenses interact), then a warning will be shown.
                    
The following miscellaneous changes have occurred:
                    The send-error-report script now
                    expects a "-s" option to be specified before the server
                    address.
                    This assumes a server address is being specified.
                    
                    The oe-pkgdata-util script now
                    expects a "-p" option to be specified before the
                    pkgdata directory, which is now
                    optional.
                    If the pkgdata directory is not
                    specified, the script will run BitBake to query
                    PKGDATA_DIR
                    from the build environment.
                    
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 2.0 Release from the prior release.
The default compiler is now GCC 5.2. This change has required fixes for compilation errors in a number of other recipes.
            One important example is a fix for when the Linux kernel freezes at
            boot time on ARM when built with GCC 5.
            If you are using your own kernel recipe or source tree and
            building for ARM, you will likely need to apply this
            patch.
            The standard linux-yocto kernel source tree
            already has a workaround for the same issue.
        
For further details, see https://gcc.gnu.org/gcc-5/changes.html and the porting guide at https://gcc.gnu.org/gcc-5/porting_to.html.
            Alternatively, you can switch back to GCC 4.9 or 4.8 by
            setting GCCVERSION in your configuration,
            as follows:
            
     GCCVERSION = "4.9%"
            
            Gstreamer 0.10 has been removed in favor of Gstreamer 1.x.
            As part of the change, recipes for Gstreamer 0.10 and related
            software are now located
            in meta-multimedia.
            This change results in Qt4 having Phonon and Gstreamer
            support in QtWebkit disabled by default.
        
The following recipes have been moved or removed:
                    bluez4: The recipe is obsolete and
                    has been moved due to bluez5
                    becoming fully integrated.
                    The bluez4 recipe now resides in
                    meta-oe.
                    
                    gamin: The recipe is obsolete and
                    has been removed.
                    
                    gnome-icon-theme: The recipe's
                    functionally has been replaced by
                    adwaita-icon-theme.
                    
Gstreamer 0.10 Recipes: Recipes for Gstreamer 0.10 have been removed in favor of the recipes for Gstreamer 1.x.
                    insserv: The recipe is obsolete and
                    has been removed.
                    
                    libunique: The recipe is no longer
                    used and has been moved to meta-oe.
                    
                    midori: The recipe's functionally
                    has been replaced by epiphany.
                    
                    python-gst: The recipe is obsolete
                    and has been removed since it only contains bindings for
                    Gstreamer 0.10.
                    
                    qt-mobility: The recipe is obsolete and
                    has been removed since it requires
                    Gstreamer 0.10, which has been
                    replaced.
                    
                    subversion: All 1.6.x versions of this
                    recipe have been removed.
                    
                    webkit-gtk: The older 1.8.3 version
                    of this recipe has been removed in favor of
                    webkitgtk.
                    
            The method by which BitBake's datastore handles overrides has
            changed.
            Overrides are now applied dynamically and
            bb.data.update_data() is now a no-op.
            Thus, bb.data.update_data() is no longer
            required in order to apply the correct overrides.
            In practice, this change is unlikely to require any changes to
            Metadata.
            However, these minor changes in behavior exist:
            
All potential overrides are now visible in the variable history as seen when you run the following:
     $ bitbake -e
                    
                    d.delVar('VARNAME') and
                    d.setVar('VARNAME', None)
                    result in the variable and all of its overrides being
                    cleared out.
                    Before the change, only the non-overridden values
                    were cleared.
                    
            The shell versions of the BitBake message functions (i.e.
            bbdebug, bbnote,
            bbwarn, bbplain,
            bberror, and bbfatal)
            are now connected through to their BitBake equivalents
            bb.debug(), bb.note(),
            bb.warn(), bb.plain(),
            bb.error(), and
            bb.fatal(), respectively.
            Thus, those message functions that you would expect to be printed
            by the BitBake UI are now actually printed.
            In practice, this change means two things:
            
                    If you now see messages on the console that you did not
                    previously see as a result of this change, you might
                    need to clean up the calls to
                    bbwarn, bberror,
                    and so forth.
                    Or, you might want to simply remove the calls.
                    
                    The bbfatal message function now
                    suppresses the full error log in the UI, which means any
                    calls to bbfatal where you still
                    wish to see the full error log should be replaced by
                    die or
                    bbfatal_log.
                    
            The following recipes have had extra
            dev/dbg packages removed:
            
                    acl
                    
                    apmd
                    
                    aspell
                    
                    attr
                    
                    augeas
                    
                    bzip2
                    
                    cogl
                    
                    curl
                    
                    elfutils
                    
                    gcc-target
                    
                    libgcc
                    
                    libtool
                    
                    libxmu
                    
                    opkg
                    
                    pciutils
                    
                    rpm
                    
                    sysfsutils
                    
                    tiff
                    
                    xz
                    
            All of the above recipes now conform to the standard packaging
            scheme where a single -dev,
            -dbg, and -staticdev
            package exists per recipe.
        
            Maintenance tracking data for recipes that was previously part
            of meta-yocto has been moved to OE-Core.
            The change includes package_regex.inc and
            distro_alias.inc, which are typically enabled
            when using the
            distrodata
            class.
            Additionally, the contents of
            upstream_tracking.inc has now been split out
            to the relevant recipes.
        
            Stale files from recipes that no longer exist in the current
            configuration are now automatically removed from
            sysroot as well as removed from
            any other place managed by shared state.
            This automatic cleanup means that the build system now properly
            handles situations such as renaming the build system side of
            recipes, removal of layers from
            bblayers.conf, and
            DISTRO_FEATURES
            changes.
        
Additionally, work directories for old versions of recipes are now pruned. If you wish to disable pruning old work directories, you can set the following variable in your configuration:
     SSTATE_PRUNE_OBSOLETEWORKDIR = "0"
            
linux-yocto Kernel Metadata Repository Now Split from Source¶
            The linux-yocto tree has up to now been a
            combined set of kernel changes and configuration (meta) data
            carried in a single tree.
            While this format is effective at keeping kernel configuration and
            source modifications synchronized, it is not always obvious to
            developers how to manipulate the Metadata as compared to the
            source.
        
            Metadata processing has now been removed from the
            kernel-yocto
            class and the external Metadata repository
            yocto-kernel-cache, which has always been used
            to seed the linux-yocto "meta" branch.
            This separate linux-yocto cache repository
            is now the primary location for this data.
            Due to this change, linux-yocto is no longer
            able to process combined trees.
            Thus, if you need to have your own combined kernel repository,
            you must do the split there as well and update your recipes
            accordingly.
            See the meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.1.bb
            recipe for an example.
        
The following QA checks have been added:
                    Added a "host-user-contaminated" check for ownership
                    issues for packaged files outside of
                    /home.
                    The check looks for files that are incorrectly owned by the
                    user that ran BitBake instead of owned by a valid user in
                    the target system.
                    
                    Added an "invalid-chars" check for invalid (non-UTF8)
                    characters in recipe metadata variable values
                    (i.e.
                    DESCRIPTION,
                    SUMMARY,
                    LICENSE,
                    and
                    SECTION).
                    Some package managers do not support these characters.
                    
                    Added an "invalid-packageconfig" check for any options
                    specified in
                    PACKAGECONFIG
                    that do not match any PACKAGECONFIG
                    option defined for the recipe.
                    
These additional changes exist:
                    gtk-update-icon-cache has been
                    renamed to gtk-icon-utils.
                    
                    The tools-profile
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    item as well as its corresponding packagegroup and
                    packagegroup-core-tools-profile no
                    longer bring in oprofile.
                    Bringing in oprofile was originally
                    added to aid compilation on resource-constrained
                    targets.
                    However, this aid has not been widely used and is not
                    likely to be used going forward due to the more powerful
                    target platforms and the existence of better
                    cross-compilation tools.
                    
                    The
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    variable's default value now specifies
                    ext4 instead of
                    ext3.
                    
                    All support for the PRINC
                    variable has been removed.
                    
                    The packagegroup-core-full-cmdline
                    packagegroup no longer brings in
                    lighttpd due to the fact that
                    bringing in lighttpd is not really in
                    line with the packagegroup's purpose, which is to add full
                    versions of command-line tools that by default are
                    provided by busybox.
                    
This section provides migration information for moving to the Yocto Project 2.1 Release from the prior release.
            Variable expressions, such as
            ${VARNAME}
            no longer expand automatically within Python functions.
            Suppressing expansion was done to allow Python functions to
            construct shell scripts or other code for situations in which you
            do not want such expressions expanded.
            For any existing code that relies on these expansions, you need to
            change the expansions to expand the value of individual
            variables through d.getVar().
            To alternatively expand more complex expressions,
            use d.expand().
        
            The convention for overrides has always been for them to be
            lower-case characters.
            This practice is now a requirement as BitBake's datastore now
            assumes lower-case characters in order to give a slight performance
            boost during parsing.
            In practical terms, this requirement means that anything that ends
            up in
            OVERRIDES
            must now appear in lower-case characters (e.g. values for
            MACHINE, TARGET_ARCH,
            DISTRO, and also recipe names if
            _pn-recipename
            overrides are to be effective).
        
getVar() and
            getVarFlag() is Now Mandatory¶
            The expand parameter to getVar() and
            getVarFlag() previously defaulted to
            False if not specified.
            Now, however, no default exists so one must be specified.
            You must change any getVar() calls that
            do not specify the final expand parameter to calls that do specify
            the parameter.
            You can run the following sed command at the
            base of a layer to make this change:
            
     sed -e 's:\(\.getVar([^,()]*\)):\1, False):g' -i `grep -ril getVar *`
     sed -e 's:\(\.getVarFlag([^,()]*, [^,()]*\)):\1, False):g' -i `grep -ril getVarFlag *`
            
            EXTRA_OEMAKE
            now defaults to "" instead of "-e MAKEFLAGS=".
            Setting EXTRA_OEMAKE to "-e MAKEFLAGS=" by
            default was a historical accident that has required many classes
            (e.g. autotools, module)
            and recipes to override this default in order to work with
            sensible build systems.
            When upgrading to the release, you must edit any recipe that
            relies upon this old default by either setting
            EXTRA_OEMAKE back to "-e MAKEFLAGS=" or by
            explicitly setting any required variable value overrides using
            EXTRA_OEMAKE, which is typically only needed
            when a Makefile sets a default value for a variable that is
            inappropriate for cross-compilation using the "=" operator rather
            than the "?=" operator.
        
libexecdir Reverted to ${prefix}/libexec¶
            The use of ${libdir}/${BPN} as
            libexecdir is different as compared to all
            other mainstream distributions, which either uses
            ${prefix}/libexec or
            ${libdir}.
            The use is also contrary to the GNU Coding Standards
            (i.e. https://www.gnu.org/prep/standards/html_node/Directory-Variables.html)
            that suggest ${prefix}/libexec and also
            notes that any package-specific nesting should be done by the
            package itself.
            Finally, having libexecdir change between
            recipes makes it very difficult for different recipes to invoke
            binaries that have been installed into
            libexecdir.
            The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard
            (i.e. http://refspecs.linuxfoundation.org/FHS_3.0/fhs/ch04s07.html)
            now recognizes the use of ${prefix}/libexec/,
            giving distributions the choice between
            ${prefix}/lib or
            ${prefix}/libexec without breaking FHS.
        
ac_cv_sizeof_off_t is No Longer Cached in Site Files¶
            For recipes inheriting the
            autotools
            class, ac_cv_sizeof_off_t is no longer cached
            in the site files for autoconf.
            The reason for this change is because the
            ac_cv_sizeof_off_t value is not necessarily
            static per architecture as was previously assumed.
            Rather, the value changes based on whether large file support is
            enabled.
            For most software that uses autoconf, this
            change should not be a problem.
            However, if you have a recipe that bypasses the standard
            do_configure
            task from the autotools class and the software
            the recipe is building uses a very old version of
            autoconf, the recipe might be incapable of
            determining the correct size of off_t during
            do_configure.
        
            The best course of action is to patch the software as necessary
            to allow the default implementation from the
            autotools class to work such that
            autoreconf succeeds and produces a working
            configure script, and to remove the
            overridden do_configure task such that the
            default implementation does get used.
        
            Previously, for image recipes the
            do_rootfs
            task assembled the filesystem and then from that filesystem
            generated images.
            With this Yocto Project release, image generation is split into
            separate
            do_image_*
            tasks for clarity both in operation and in the code.
        
            For most cases, this change does not present any problems.
            However, if you have made customizations that directly modify the
            do_rootfs task or that mention
            do_rootfs, you might need to update those
            changes.
            In particular, if you had added any tasks after
            do_rootfs, you should make edits so that
            those tasks are after the
            do_image_complete
            task rather than after do_rootfs
            so that the your added tasks
            run at the correct time.
        
            A minor part of this restructuring is that the post-processing
            definitions and functions have been moved from the
            image
            class to the
            rootfs-postcommands
            class.
            Functionally, however, they remain unchanged.
        
The following recipes have been removed in the 2.1 release:
gcc version 4.8:
                    Versions 4.9 and 5.3 remain.
                    
qt4:
                    All support for Qt 4.x has been moved out to a separate
                    meta-qt4 layer because Qt 4 is no
                    longer supported upstream.
                    
x11vnc:
                    Moved to the meta-oe layer.
                    
linux-yocto-3.14:
                    No longer supported.
                    
linux-yocto-3.19:
                    No longer supported.
                    
libjpeg:
                    Replaced by the libjpeg-turbo recipe.
                    
pth:
                    Became obsolete.
                    
liboil:
                    Recipe is no longer needed and has been moved to the
                    meta-multimedia layer.
                    
gtk-theme-torturer:
                    Recipe is no longer needed and has been moved to the
                    meta-gnome layer.
                    
gnome-mime-data:
                    Recipe is no longer needed and has been moved to the
                    meta-gnome layer.
                    
udev:
                    Replaced by the eudev recipe for
                    compatibility when using sysvinit
                    with newer kernels.
                    
python-pygtk:
                    Recipe became obsolete.
                    
adt-installer:
                    Recipe became obsolete.
                    See the
                    "ADT Removed"
                    section for more information.
                    
The following classes have changed:
autotools_stage:
                    Removed because the
                    autotools
                    class now provides its functionality.
                    Recipes that inherited from
                    autotools_stage should now inherit
                    from autotools instead.
                    
boot-directdisk:
                    Merged into the
                    image-vm
                    class.
                    The boot-directdisk class was rarely
                    directly used.
                    Consequently, this change should not cause any issues.
                    
bootimg:
                    Merged into the
                    image-live
                    class.
                    The bootimg class was rarely
                    directly used.
                    Consequently, this change should not cause any issues.
                    
packageinfo:
                    Removed due to its limited use by the Hob UI, which has
                    itself been removed.
                    
The following changes have been made to the build system user interface:
Hob GTK+-based UI: Removed because it is unmaintained and based on the outdated GTK+ 2 library. The Toaster web-based UI is much more capable and is actively maintained. See the "Using the Toaster Web Interface" section in the Yocto Project Toaster User Manual for more information on this interface.
"puccho" BitBake UI: Removed because is unmaintained and no longer useful.
The Application Development Toolkit (ADT) has been removed because its functionality almost completely overlapped with the standard SDK and the extensible SDK. For information on these SDKs and how to build and use them, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
The following changes have been made for the Poky distribution:
                    The meta-yocto layer has been renamed
                    to meta-poky to better match its
                    purpose, which is to provide the Poky reference
                    distribution.
                    The meta-yocto-bsp layer retains its
                    original name since it provides reference machines for
                    the Yocto Project and it is otherwise unrelated to Poky.
                    References to meta-yocto in your
                    conf/bblayers.conf should
                    automatically be updated, so you should not need to change
                    anything unless you are relying on this naming elsewhere.
                    
                    The
                    uninative
                    class is now enabled by default in Poky.
                    This class attempts to isolate the build system from the
                    host distribution's C library and makes re-use of native
                    shared state artifacts across different host distributions
                    practical.
                    With this class enabled, a tarball containing a pre-built
                    C library is downloaded at the start of the build.
The uninative class is enabled
                    through the
                    meta/conf/distro/include/yocto-uninative.inc
                    file, which for those not using the Poky distribution, can
                    include to easily enable the same functionality.
Alternatively, if you wish to build your own
                    uninative tarball, you can do so by
                    building the uninative-tarball recipe,
                    making it available to your build machines
                    (e.g. over HTTP/HTTPS) and setting a similar configuration
                    as the one set by yocto-uninative.inc.
                    
Static library generation, for most cases, is now disabled by default in the Poky distribution. Disabling this generation saves some build time as well as the size used for build output artifacts.
Disabling this library generation is accomplished
                    through a
                    meta/conf/distro/include/no-static-libs.inc,
                    which for those not using the Poky distribution can
                    easily include to enable the same functionality.
Any recipe that needs to opt-out of having the "--disable-static" option specified on the configure command line either because it is not a supported option for the configure script or because static libraries are needed should set the following variable:
     DISABLE_STATIC = ""
                    
                    The separate poky-tiny distribution
                    now uses the musl C library instead of a heavily pared
                    down glibc.
                    Using musl results in a smaller
                    distribution and facilitates much greater maintainability
                    because musl is designed to have a small footprint.
If you have used poky-tiny and
                    have customized the glibc
                    configuration you will need to redo those customizations
                    with musl when upgrading to the new release.
                    
The following changes have been made to packaging:
                    The runuser and
                    mountpoint binaries, which were
                    previously in the main util-linux
                    package, have been split out into the
                    util-linux-runuser and
                    util-linux-mountpoint packages,
                    respectively.
                    
                    The python-elementtree package has
                    been merged into the python-xml
                    package.
                    
The following changes have been made to the tuning files:
The "no-thumb-interwork" tuning feature has been dropped from the ARM tune include files. Because interworking is required for ARM EABI, attempting to disable it through a tuning feature no longer makes sense.
                    The tune-cortexm*.inc and
                    tune-cortexr4.inc files have been
                    removed because they are poorly tested.
                    Until the OpenEmbedded build system officially gains
                    support for CPUs without an MMU, these tuning files would
                    probably be better maintained in a separate layer
                    if needed.
                    
This release supports generation of GLib Introspective Repository (GIR) files through GObject introspection, which is the standard mechanism for accessing GObject-based software from runtime environments. You can enable, disable, and test the generation of this data. See the "Enabling GObject Introspection Support" section for more information.
These additional changes exist:
The minimum Git version has been increased to 1.8.3.1. If your host distribution does not provide a sufficiently recent version, you can install the buildtools, which will provide it. See the "Required Git, tar, and Python Versions" section for more information on the buildtools tarball.
The buggy and incomplete support for the RPM version 4 package manager has been removed. The well-tested and maintained support for RPM version 5 remains.
                    Previously, the following list of packages were removed
                    if package-management was not in
                    IMAGE_FEATURES,
                    regardless of any dependencies:
                    
     update-rc.d
     base-passwd
     shadow
     update-alternatives
     run-postinsts
                    
                    With the Yocto Project 2.1 release, these packages are only
                    removed if "read-only-rootfs" is in
                    IMAGE_FEATURES, since they might
                    still be needed for a read-write image even in the absence
                    of a package manager (e.g. if users need to be added,
                    modified, or removed at runtime).
                    
                    The
                    devtool modify
                    command now defaults to extracting the source since that
                    is most commonly expected.
                    The "-x" or "--extract" options are now no-ops.
                    If you wish to provide your own existing source tree, you
                    will now need to specify either the "-n" or
                    "--no-extract" options when running
                    devtool modify.
                    
If the formfactor for a machine is either not supplied or does not specify whether a keyboard is attached, then the default is to assume a keyboard is attached rather than assume no keyboard. This change primarily affects the Sato UI.
                    The .debug directory packaging is
                    now automatic.
                    If your recipe builds software that installs binaries into
                    directories other than the standard ones, you no longer
                    need to take care of setting
                    FILES_${PN}-dbg to pick up the
                    resulting .debug directories as these
                    directories are automatically found and added.
                    
                    Inaccurate disk and CPU percentage data has been dropped
                    from buildstats output.
                    This data has been replaced with
                    getrusage() data and corrected IO
                    statistics.
                    You will probably need to update any custom code that reads
                    the buildstats data.
                    
                    The
                    meta/conf/distro/include/package_regex.inc
                    is now deprecated.
                    The contents of this file have been moved to individual
                    recipes.
                    
                    The v86d/uvesafb has been removed from
                    the genericx86 and
                    genericx86-64 reference machines,
                    which are provided by the
                    meta-yocto-bsp layer.
                    Most modern x86 boards do not rely on this file and it only
                    adds kernel error messages during startup.
                    If you do still need to support
                    uvesafb, you can
                    simply add v86d to your image.
                    
                     Build sysroot paths are now removed from debug symbol
                     files.
                     Removing these paths means that remote GDB using an
                     unstripped build system sysroot will no longer work
                     (although this was never documented to work).
                     The supported method to accomplish something similar is
                     to set IMAGE_GEN_DEBUGFS to "1",
                     which will generate a companion debug image
                     containing unstripped binaries and associated debug
                     sources alongside the image.
                     
build/build/buildhistorybuild/conf/local.confbuild/conf/bblayers.confbuild/conf/sanity_infobuild/downloads/build/sstate-cache/build/tmp/build/tmp/buildstats/build/tmp/cache/build/tmp/deploy/build/tmp/deploy/deb/build/tmp/deploy/rpm/build/tmp/deploy/ipk/build/tmp/deploy/licenses/build/tmp/deploy/images/build/tmp/deploy/sdk/build/tmp/sstate-control/build/tmp/sysroots/build/tmp/stamps/build/tmp/log/build/tmp/work/build/tmp/work-shared/meta/meta/classes/meta/conf/meta/conf/machine/meta/conf/distro/meta/conf/machine-sdk/meta/files/meta/lib/meta/recipes-bsp/meta/recipes-connectivity/meta/recipes-core/meta/recipes-devtools/meta/recipes-extended/meta/recipes-gnome/meta/recipes-graphics/meta/recipes-kernel/meta/recipes-lsb4/meta/recipes-multimedia/meta/recipes-rt/meta/recipes-sato/meta/recipes-support/meta/site/meta/recipes.txtThe Source Directory consists of several components. Understanding them and knowing where they are located is key to using the Yocto Project well. This chapter describes the Source Directory and gives information about the various files and directories.
For information on how to establish a local Source Directory on your development system, see the "Getting Set Up" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
This section describes the top-level components of the Source Directory.
bitbake/¶This directory includes a copy of BitBake for ease of use. The copy usually matches the current stable BitBake release from the BitBake project. BitBake, a Metadata interpreter, reads the Yocto Project Metadata and runs the tasks defined by that data. Failures are usually from the Metadata and not from BitBake itself. Consequently, most users do not need to worry about BitBake.
            When you run the bitbake command, the
            main BitBake executable, which resides in the
            bitbake/bin/ directory, starts.
            Sourcing an environment setup script (e.g.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres)
            places the scripts and
            bitbake/bin directories (in that order) into
            the shell's PATH environment variable.
        
For more information on BitBake, see the BitBake User Manual.
build/¶
            This directory contains user configuration files and the output
            generated by the OpenEmbedded build system in its standard configuration where
            the source tree is combined with the output.
            The Build Directory
            is created initially when you source
            the OpenEmbedded build environment setup script
            (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
        
            It is also possible to place output and configuration
            files in a directory separate from the
            Source Directory
            by providing a directory name when you source
            the setup script.
            For information on separating output from your local
            Source Directory files, see the
            "oe-init-build-env
            and
            "oe-init-build-env-memres"
            sections.
        
documentation/¶
            This directory holds the source for the Yocto Project documentation
            as well as templates and tools that allow you to generate PDF and HTML
            versions of the manuals.
            Each manual is contained in a sub-folder.
            For example, the files for this manual reside in
            the ref-manual/ directory.
        
meta/¶
            This directory contains the OpenEmbedded Core metadata.
            The directory holds recipes, common classes, and machine
            configuration for emulated targets (qemux86,
            qemuarm, and so forth.)
        
meta-poky/¶This directory contains the configuration for the Poky reference distribution.
meta-yocto-bsp/¶This directory contains the Yocto Project reference hardware Board Support Packages (BSPs). For more information on BSPs, see the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
meta-selftest/¶This directory adds additional recipes and append files used by the OpenEmbedded selftests to verify the behavior of the build system.
            You do not have to add this layer to your
            bblayers.conf file unless you want to run the
            selftests.
        
meta-skeleton/¶This directory contains template recipes for BSP and kernel development.
scripts/¶
            This directory contains various integration scripts that implement
            extra functionality in the Yocto Project environment (e.g. QEMU scripts).
            The oe-init-build-env
            and
            oe-init-build-env-memres
            scripts append this directory to the shell's
            PATH environment variable.
        
            The scripts directory has useful scripts that assist in contributing
            back to the Yocto Project, such as create-pull-request and
            send-pull-request.
        
oe-init-build-env¶
            This script is one of two scripts that set up the OpenEmbedded build
            environment.
            For information on the other script, see the
            "oe-init-build-env-memres"
            section.
        
            Running this script with the source command in
            a shell makes changes to PATH and sets other
            core BitBake variables based on the current working directory.
            You need to run an environment setup script before running BitBake
            commands.
            The script uses other scripts within the
            scripts directory to do the bulk of the work.
        
When you run this script, your Yocto Project environment is set up, a Build Directory is created, your working directory becomes the Build Directory, and you are presented with a list of common BitBake targets. Here is an example:
     $ source oe-init-build-env
     ### Shell environment set up for builds. ###
     You can now run 'bitbake <target>'
     Common targets are:
         core-image-minimal
         core-image-sato
         meta-toolchain
         meta-ide-support
     You can also run generated qemu images with a command like 'runqemu qemux86'
            
            The script gets its default list of common targets from the
            conf-notes.txt file, which is found in the
            meta-poky directory within the
            Source Directory.
            Should you have custom distributions, it is very easy to modify
            this configuration file to include your targets for your
            distribution.
            See the
            "Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more
            information.
        
            By default, running this script without a
            Build Directory
            argument creates the build directory
            in your current working directory.
            If you provide a Build Directory argument when you
            source the script, you direct the OpenEmbedded
            build system to create a Build Directory of your choice.
            For example, the following command creates a Build Directory named
            mybuilds that is outside of the
            Source Directory:
            
     $ source oe-init-build-env ~/mybuilds
            
            The OpenEmbedded build system uses the template configuration
            files, which are found by default in the
            meta-poky/conf directory in the
            Source Directory.
            See the
            "Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more
            information.
            
oe-init-build-env script
                from a Source Directory that contains spaces in either the filenames
                or directory names, the script returns an error indicating no such
                file or directory.
                Be sure to use a Source Directory free of names containing spaces.
            
oe-init-build-env-memres¶
            This script is one of two scripts that set up the OpenEmbedded
            build environment.
            Aside from setting up the environment, this script starts a
            memory-resident BitBake server.
            For information on the other setup script, see the
            "oe-init-build-env"
            section.
        
Memory-resident BitBake resides in memory until you specifically remove it using the following BitBake command:
     $ bitbake -m
            
            Running this script with the source command in
            a shell makes changes to PATH and sets other
            core BitBake variables based on the current working directory.
            One of these variables is the
            BBSERVER
            variable, which allows the OpenEmbedded build system to locate
            the server that is running BitBake.
        
You need to run an environment setup script before using BitBake commands. Following is the script syntax:
     $ source oe-init-build-env-memres port_number build_dir
            Following are some considerations when sourcing this script:
                    The script uses other scripts within the
                    scripts directory to do the bulk of
                    the work.
                    
If you do not provide a port number with the script, the BitBake server starts at a randomly selected port.
The script's parameters are positionally dependent. Consequently, you cannot run the script and provide a Build Directory name without also providing a port number. In other words, the following syntax is illegal:
     $ source oe-initbuild-env-memres build_dir
                    
When you run this script, your Yocto Project environment is set up, a Build Directory is created, your working directory becomes the Build Directory, and you are presented with a list of common BitBake targets. Here is an example:
     $ source oe-init-build-env-memres
     No port specified, using dynamically selected port
     ### Shell environment set up for builds. ###
     You can now run 'bitbake <target>'
     Common targets are:
         core-image-minimal
         core-image-sato
         meta-toolchain
         meta-ide-support
     You can also run generated qemu images with a command like 'runqemu qemux86'
     Bitbake server address: 127.0.0.1, server port: 53995
     Bitbake server started on demand as needed, use bitbake -m to shut it down
            
            The script gets its default list of common targets from the
            conf-notes.txt file, which is found in the
            meta-poky directory within the
            Source Directory.
            Should you have custom distributions, it is very easy to modify
            this configuration file to include your targets for your
            distribution.
            See the
            "Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more
            information.
        
            By default, running this script without a
            Build Directory
            argument creates a build directory named
            build.
            If you provide a Build Directory argument and port number when you
            source the script, the Build Directory is
            created using that name.
            For example, the following command starts the BitBake server using
            port 53995 and creates a Build Directory named
            mybuilds that is outside of the
            Source Directory:
            
     $ source oe-init-build-env-memres 53995 ~/mybuilds
            
            The oe-init-build-env-memres script starts a
            memory resident BitBake server.
            This BitBake instance uses the
            bitbake-cookerdaemon.log file, which is
            located in the Build Directory.
        
            The OpenEmbedded build system uses the template configuration
            files, which are found by default in the
            meta-poky/conf directory in the
            Source Directory.
            See the
            "Creating a Custom Template Configuration Directory"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more
            information.
            
oe-init-build-env-memres script
                from a Source Directory that contains spaces in either the
                filenames or directory names, the script returns an error
                indicating no such file or directory.
                Be sure to use a Source Directory free of names containing
                spaces.
            
LICENSE, README, and README.hardware¶These files are standard top-level files.
build/¶
        The OpenEmbedded build system creates the
        Build Directory
        when you run one of the build environment setup scripts (i.e.
        oe-init-build-env
        or
        oe-init-build-env-memres).
    
        If you do not give the Build Directory a specific name when you run
        a setup script, the name defaults to build.
    
        The
        TOPDIR variable
        points to the Build Directory.
    
build/buildhistory¶The OpenEmbedded build system creates this directory when you enable the build history feature. The directory tracks build information into image, packages, and SDK subdirectories. For information on the build history feature, see the "Maintaining Build Output Quality" section.
build/conf/local.conf¶
            This configuration file contains all the local user configurations
            for your build environment.
            The local.conf file contains documentation on
            the various configuration options.
            Any variable set here overrides any variable set elsewhere within
            the environment unless that variable is hard-coded within a file
            (e.g. by using '=' instead of '?=').
            Some variables are hard-coded for various reasons but these
            variables are relatively rare.
        
            Edit this file to set the
            MACHINE
            for which you want to build, which package types you wish to use
            (PACKAGE_CLASSES),
            and the location from which you want to access downloaded files
            (DL_DIR).
        
            If local.conf is not present when you
            start the build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates it from
            local.conf.sample when
            you source the top-level build environment
            setup script (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
        
            The source local.conf.sample file used
            depends on the $TEMPLATECONF script variable,
            which defaults to meta-poky/conf
            when you are building from the Yocto Project development
            environment and defaults to meta/conf when
            you are building from the OpenEmbedded Core environment.
            Because the script variable points to the source of the
            local.conf.sample file, this implies that
            you can configure your build environment from any layer by setting
            the variable in the top-level build environment setup script as
            follows:
            
     TEMPLATECONF=your_layer/conf
            
            Once the build process gets the sample file, it uses
            sed to substitute final
            ${OEROOT}
            values for all ##OEROOT## values.
            
TEMPLATECONF variable
                is used by looking at the
                scripts/oe-setup-builddir script in the
                Source Directory.
                You can find the Yocto Project version of the
                local.conf.sample file in the
                meta-poky/conf directory.
            
build/conf/bblayers.conf¶
            This configuration file defines
            layers,
            which are directory trees, traversed (or walked) by BitBake.
            The bblayers.conf file uses the
            BBLAYERS
            variable to list the layers BitBake tries to find.
        
            If bblayers.conf is not present when you
            start the build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates it from
            bblayers.conf.sample when
            you source the top-level build environment
            setup script (i.e.
            oe-init-build-env
            or
            oe-init-build-env-memres).
        
            The source bblayers.conf.sample file used
            depends on the $TEMPLATECONF script variable,
            which defaults to meta-poky/conf
            when you are building from the Yocto Project development
            environment and defaults to meta/conf when
            you are building from the OpenEmbedded Core environment.
            Because the script variable points to the source of the
            bblayers.conf.sample file, this implies that
            you can base your build from any layer by setting the variable in
            the top-level build environment setup script as follows:
            
     TEMPLATECONF=your_layer/conf
            
            Once the build process gets the sample file, it uses
            sed to substitute final
            ${OEROOT}
            values for all ##OEROOT## values.
            
TEMPLATECONF variable
                scripts/oe-setup-builddir script in the
                Source Directory.
                You can find the Yocto Project version of the
                bblayers.conf.sample file in the
                meta-poky/conf directory.
            
build/conf/sanity_info¶This file indicates the state of the sanity checks and is created during the build.
build/downloads/¶
            This directory contains downloaded upstream source tarballs.
            You can reuse the directory for multiple builds or move
            the directory to another location.
            You can control the location of this directory through the
            DL_DIR variable.
        
build/sstate-cache/¶
            This directory contains the shared state cache.
            You can reuse the directory for multiple builds or move
            the directory to another location.
            You can control the location of this directory through the
            SSTATE_DIR variable.
        
build/tmp/¶
            The OpenEmbedded build system creates and uses this directory
            for all the build system's output.
            The
            TMPDIR
            variable points to this directory.
        
            BitBake creates this directory if it does not exist.
            As a last resort, to clean up a build and start it from scratch
            (other than the downloads), you can remove everything in the
            tmp directory or get rid of the
            directory completely.
            If you do, you should also completely remove the
            build/sstate-cache directory.
        
build/tmp/buildstats/¶This directory stores the build statistics.
build/tmp/cache/¶When BitBake parses the metadata, it creates a cache file of the result that can be used when subsequently running commands. BitBake stores these results here on a per-machine basis.
build/tmp/deploy/¶
            This directory contains any "end result" output from the
            OpenEmbedded build process.
            The DEPLOY_DIR
            variable points to this directory.
            For more detail on the contents of the deploy
            directory, see the
            "Images" and
            "Application Development SDK"
            sections.
        
build/tmp/deploy/deb/¶
            This directory receives any .deb packages produced by
            the build process.
            The packages are sorted into feeds for different architecture types.
        
build/tmp/deploy/rpm/¶
            This directory receives any .rpm packages produced by
            the build process.
            The packages are sorted into feeds for different architecture types.
        
build/tmp/deploy/ipk/¶
            This directory receives .ipk packages produced by
            the build process.
        
build/tmp/deploy/licenses/¶
            This directory receives package licensing information.
            For example, the directory contains sub-directories for bash,
            busybox, and glibc (among others) that in turn
            contain appropriate COPYING license files with other licensing information.
            For information on licensing, see the
            "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle"
            section.
        
build/tmp/deploy/images/¶This directory receives complete filesystem images. If you want to flash the resulting image from a build onto a device, look here for the image.
            Be careful when deleting files in this directory.
            You can safely delete old images from this directory (e.g.
            core-image-*).
            However, the kernel (*zImage*, *uImage*, etc.),
            bootloader and other supplementary files might be deployed here prior to building an
            image.
            Because these files are not directly produced from the image, if you
            delete them they will not be automatically re-created when you build the image again.
        
If you do accidentally delete files here, you will need to force them to be re-created. In order to do that, you will need to know the target that produced them. For example, these commands rebuild and re-create the kernel files:
     $ bitbake -c clean virtual/kernel
     $ bitbake virtual/kernel
            
build/tmp/deploy/sdk/¶The OpenEmbedded build system creates this directory to hold toolchain installer scripts, which when executed, install the sysroot that matches your target hardware. You can find out more about these installers in the "Building an SDK Installer" section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
build/tmp/sstate-control/¶The OpenEmbedded build system uses this directory for the shared state manifest files. The shared state code uses these files to record the files installed by each sstate task so that the files can be removed when cleaning the recipe or when a newer version is about to be installed. The build system also uses the manifests to detect and produce a warning when files from one task are overwriting those from another.
build/tmp/sysroots/¶This directory contains shared header files and libraries as well as other shared data. Packages that need to share output with other packages do so within this directory. The directory is subdivided by architecture so multiple builds can run within the one Build Directory.
build/tmp/stamps/¶This directory holds information that BitBake uses for accounting purposes to track what tasks have run and when they have run. The directory is sub-divided by architecture, package name, and version. Following is an example:
     stamps/all-poky-linux/distcc-config/1.0-r0.do_build-2fdd....2do
            Although the files in the directory are empty of data, BitBake uses the filenames and timestamps for tracking purposes.
build/tmp/log/¶
            This directory contains general logs that are not otherwise placed using the
            package's WORKDIR.
            Examples of logs are the output from the
            do_check_pkg or
            do_distro_check tasks.
            Running a build does not necessarily mean this directory is created.
        
build/tmp/work/¶
            This directory contains architecture-specific work sub-directories
            for packages built by BitBake.
            All tasks execute from the appropriate work directory.
            For example, the source for a particular package is unpacked,
            patched, configured and compiled all within its own work directory.
            Within the work directory, organization is based on the package group
            and version for which the source is being compiled
            as defined by the
            WORKDIR.
        
            It is worth considering the structure of a typical work directory.
            As an example, consider linux-yocto-kernel-3.0
            on the machine qemux86
            built within the Yocto Project.
            For this package, a work directory of
            tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/linux-yocto/3.0+git1+<.....>,
            referred to as the
            WORKDIR, is created.
            Within this directory, the source is unpacked to
            linux-qemux86-standard-build and then patched by Quilt.
            (See the
            "Using Quilt in Your Workflow"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more information.)
            Within the linux-qemux86-standard-build directory,
            standard Quilt directories linux-3.0/patches
            and linux-3.0/.pc are created,
            and standard Quilt commands can be used.
        
            There are other directories generated within WORKDIR.
            The most important directory is WORKDIR/temp/,
            which has log files for each task (log.do_*.pid)
            and contains the scripts BitBake runs for each task
            (run.do_*.pid).
            The WORKDIR/image/ directory is where "make
            install" places its output that is then split into sub-packages
            within WORKDIR/packages-split/.
        
build/tmp/work-shared/¶
            For efficiency, the OpenEmbedded build system creates and uses
            this directory to hold recipes that share a work directory with
            other recipes.
            In practice, this is only used for gcc
            and its variants (e.g. gcc-cross,
            libgcc, gcc-runtime,
            and so forth).
        
meta/¶As mentioned previously, Metadata is the core of the Yocto Project. Metadata has several important subdivisions:
meta/classes/¶
            This directory contains the *.bbclass files.
            Class files are used to abstract common code so it can be reused by multiple
            packages.
            Every package inherits the base.bbclass file.
            Examples of other important classes are autotools.bbclass, which
            in theory allows any Autotool-enabled package to work with the Yocto Project with minimal effort.
            Another example is kernel.bbclass that contains common code and functions
            for working with the Linux kernel.
            Functions like image generation or packaging also have their specific class files
            such as image.bbclass, rootfs_*.bbclass and
            package*.bbclass.
        
For reference information on classes, see the "Classes" chapter.
meta/conf/¶
            This directory contains the core set of configuration files that start from
            bitbake.conf and from which all other configuration
            files are included.
            See the include statements at the end of the
            bitbake.conf file and you will note that even
            local.conf is loaded from there.
            While bitbake.conf sets up the defaults, you can often override
            these by using the (local.conf) file, machine file or
            the distribution configuration file.
        
meta/conf/machine/¶
            This directory contains all the machine configuration files.
            If you set MACHINE = "qemux86",
            the OpenEmbedded build system looks for a qemux86.conf file in this
            directory.
            The include directory contains various data common to multiple machines.
            If you want to add support for a new machine to the Yocto Project, look in this directory.
        
meta/conf/distro/¶
            The contents of this directory controls any distribution-specific
            configurations.
            For the Yocto Project, the defaultsetup.conf is the main file here.
            This directory includes the versions and the
            SRCDATE definitions for applications that are configured here.
            An example of an alternative configuration might be poky-bleeding.conf.
            Although this file mainly inherits its configuration from Poky.
        
meta/conf/machine-sdk/¶
            The OpenEmbedded build system searches this directory for
            configuration files that correspond to the value of
            SDKMACHINE.
            By default, 32-bit and 64-bit x86 files ship with the Yocto
            Project that support some SDK hosts.
            However, it is possible to extend that support to other SDK hosts
            by adding additional configuration files in this subdirectory
            within another layer.
        
meta/files/¶This directory contains common license files and several text files used by the build system. The text files contain minimal device information and lists of files and directories with known permissions.
meta/lib/¶This directory contains OpenEmbedded Python library code used during the build process.
meta/recipes-bsp/¶This directory contains anything linking to specific hardware or hardware configuration information such as "u-boot" and "grub".
meta/recipes-connectivity/¶This directory contains libraries and applications related to communication with other devices.
meta/recipes-core/¶This directory contains what is needed to build a basic working Linux image including commonly used dependencies.
meta/recipes-devtools/¶This directory contains tools that are primarily used by the build system. The tools, however, can also be used on targets.
meta/recipes-extended/¶This directory contains non-essential applications that add features compared to the alternatives in core. You might need this directory for full tool functionality or for Linux Standard Base (LSB) compliance.
meta/recipes-gnome/¶This directory contains all things related to the GTK+ application framework.
meta/recipes-graphics/¶This directory contains X and other graphically related system libraries
meta/recipes-kernel/¶This directory contains the kernel and generic applications and libraries that have strong kernel dependencies.
meta/recipes-lsb4/¶This directory contains recipes specifically added to support the Linux Standard Base (LSB) version 4.x.
meta/recipes-multimedia/¶This directory contains codecs and support utilities for audio, images and video.
meta/recipes-rt/¶
            This directory contains package and image recipes for using and testing
            the PREEMPT_RT kernel.
        
meta/recipes-sato/¶This directory contains the Sato demo/reference UI/UX and its associated applications and configuration data.
meta/recipes-support/¶This directory contains recipes used by other recipes, but that are not directly included in images (i.e. dependencies of other recipes).
meta/site/¶This directory contains a list of cached results for various architectures. Because certain "autoconf" test results cannot be determined when cross-compiling due to the tests not able to run on a live system, the information in this directory is passed to "autoconf" for the various architectures.
meta/recipes.txt¶
            This file is a description of the contents of recipes-*.
        
allarch.bbclassarchiver.bbclassautotools*.bbclassbase.bbclassbash-completion.bbclassbin_package.bbclassbinconfig.bbclassbinconfig-disabled.bbclassblacklist.bbclassbluetooth.bbclassbugzilla.bbclassbuildhistory.bbclassbuildstats.bbclassbuildstats-summary.bbclassccache.bbclasschrpath.bbclassclutter.bbclasscmake.bbclasscml1.bbclasscompress_doc.bbclasscopyleft_compliance.bbclasscopyleft_filter.bbclasscore-image.bbclasscpan*.bbclasscross.bbclasscross-canadian.bbclasscrosssdk.bbclassdebian.bbclassdeploy.bbclassdevshell.bbclassdistro_features_check.bbclassdistrodata.bbclassdistutils*.bbclassdistutils3*.bbclassexternalsrc.bbclassextrausers.bbclassfontcache.bbclassfs-uuid.bbclassgconf.bbclassgettext.bbclassgnome.bbclassgnomebase.bbclassgobject-introspection.bbclassgrub-efi.bbclassgsettings.bbclassgtk-doc.bbclassgtk-icon-cache.bbclassgtk-immodules-cache.bbclassgummiboot.bbclassgzipnative.bbclassicecc.bbclassimage.bbclassimage-buildinfo.bbclassimage_types.bbclassimage_types_uboot.bbclassimage-live.bbclassimage-mklibs.bbclassimage-prelink.bbclassimage-swab.bbclassimage-vm.bbclassimage-vmdk.bbclassinsane.bbclassinsserv.bbclasskernel.bbclasskernel-arch.bbclasskernel-fitimage.bbclasskernel-grub.bbclasskernel-module-split.bbclasskernel-uboot.bbclasskernel-uimage.bbclasskernel-yocto.bbclasskernelsrc.bbclasslib_package.bbclasslibc*.bbclasslicense.bbclasslinux-kernel-base.bbclasslinuxloader.bbclasslogging.bbclassmeta.bbclassmetadata_scm.bbclassmigrate_localcount.bbclassmime.bbclassmirrors.bbclassmodule.bbclassmodule-base.bbclassmultilib*.bbclassnative.bbclassnativesdk.bbclassnopackages.bbclassnpm.bbclassoelint.bbclassown-mirrors.bbclasspackage.bbclasspackage_deb.bbclasspackage_ipk.bbclasspackage_rpm.bbclasspackage_tar.bbclasspackagedata.bbclasspackagegroup.bbclasspatch.bbclassperlnative.bbclasspixbufcache.bbclasspkgconfig.bbclasspopulate_sdk.bbclasspopulate_sdk_*.bbclassprexport.bbclassprimport.bbclassprserv.bbclassptest.bbclassptest-gnome.bbclasspython-dir.bbclasspython3native.bbclasspythonnative.bbclassqemu.bbclassrecipe_sanity.bbclassrelocatable.bbclassremove-libtool.bbclassreport-error.bbclassrm_work.bbclassrootfs*.bbclasssanity.bbclassscons.bbclasssdl.bbclasssetuptools.bbclasssetuptools3.bbclasssign_rpm.bbclasssip.bbclasssiteconfig.bbclasssiteinfo.bbclassspdx.bbclasssstate.bbclassstaging.bbclasssyslinux.bbclasssystemd.bbclassterminal.bbclasstestimage*.bbclasstestsdk.bbclasstexinfo.bbclasstinderclient.bbclasstoaster.bbclasstoolchain-scripts.bbclasstypecheck.bbclassuboot-config.bbclassuninative.bbclassupdate-alternatives.bbclassupdate-rc.d.bbclassuseradd*.bbclassutility-tasks.bbclassutils.bbclassvala.bbclasswaf.bbclass
    Class files are used to abstract common functionality and share it amongst
    multiple recipe (.bb) files.
    To use a class file, you simply make sure the recipe inherits the class.
    In most cases, when a recipe inherits a class it is enough to enable its
    features.
    There are cases, however, where in the recipe you might need to set
    variables or override some default behavior.
    Any Metadata usually
    found in a recipe can also be placed in a class file.
    Class files are identified by the extension .bbclass
    and are usually placed in a classes/ directory beneath
    the meta*/ directory found in the
    Source Directory.
    Class files can also be pointed to by
    BUILDDIR
    (e.g. build/) in the same way as
    .conf files in the conf directory.
    Class files are searched for in
    BBPATH
    using the same method by which .conf files are
    searched.
    This chapter discusses only the most useful and important classes.
    Other classes do exist within the meta/classes
    directory in the
    Source Directory.
    You can reference the .bbclass files directly
    for more information.
allarch.bbclass¶
        The allarch class is inherited
        by recipes that do not produce architecture-specific output.
        The class disables functionality that is normally needed for recipes
        that produce executable binaries (such as building the cross-compiler
        and a C library as pre-requisites, and splitting out of debug symbols
        during packaging).
        
Unlike some distro recipes (e.g. Debian), OpenEmbedded recipes
            that produce packages that depend on tunings through use of the
            RDEPENDS
            and
            TUNE_PKGARCH
            variables, should never be configured for all architectures
            using allarch.
            This is the case even if the recipes do not produce
            architecture-specific output.
Configuring such recipes for all architectures causes the
            do_package_write_*
            tasks to have different signatures for the machines with different
            tunings.
            Additionally, unnecessary rebuilds occur every time an
            image for a different MACHINE is built
            even when the recipe never changes.
        By default, all recipes inherit the
        base and
        package
        classes, which enable functionality
        needed for recipes that produce executable output.
        If your recipe, for example, only produces packages that contain
        configuration files, media files, or scripts (e.g. Python and Perl),
        then it should inherit the allarch class.
    
archiver.bbclass¶
        The archiver class supports releasing
        source code and other materials with the binaries.
    
        For more details on the source archiver, see the
        "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle"
        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        You can also see the
        ARCHIVER_MODE
        variable for information about the variable flags (varflags)
        that help control archive creation.
    
autotools*.bbclass¶
        The autotools* classes support Autotooled
        packages.
    
        The autoconf, automake,
        and libtool packages bring standardization.
        This class defines a set of tasks (e.g.
        configure, compile and
        so forth) that
        work for all Autotooled packages.
        It should usually be enough to define a few standard variables
        and then simply inherit autotools.
        These classes can also work with software that emulates Autotools.
        For more information, see the
        "Autotooled Package"
        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
    
        By default, the autotools* classes
        use out-of-tree builds (i.e.
        autotools.bbclass).
        (B !=
        S).
    
        If the software being built by a recipe does not support
        using out-of-tree builds, you should have the recipe inherit the
        autotools-brokensep class.
        The autotools-brokensep class behaves the same
        as the autotools class but builds with
        B ==
        S.
        This method is useful when out-of-tree build support is either not
        present or is broken.
        
        It's useful to have some idea of how the tasks defined by
        the autotools* classes work and what they do
        behind the scenes.
        
do_configure -
                Regenerates the
                configure script (using autoreconf) and
                then launches it with a standard set of arguments used during
                cross-compilation.
                You can pass additional parameters to
                configure through the
                EXTRA_OECONF variable.
                
do_compile -
                Runs make with arguments that specify the
                compiler and linker.
                You can pass additional arguments through
                the EXTRA_OEMAKE variable.
                
do_install -
                Runs make install and passes in
                ${D}
                as DESTDIR.
                
base.bbclass¶
        The base class is special in that every
        .bb file implicitly inherits the class.
        This class contains definitions for standard basic
        tasks such as fetching, unpacking, configuring (empty by default),
        compiling (runs any Makefile present), installing
        (empty by default) and packaging (empty by default).
        These classes are often overridden or extended by other classes
        such as the
        autotools
        class or the
        package
        class.
        The class also contains some commonly used functions such as
        oe_runmake.
    
bash-completion.bbclass¶Sets up packaging and dependencies appropriate for recipes that build software that includes bash-completion data.
bin_package.bbclass¶
        The bin_package class is a
        helper class for recipes that extract the contents of a binary package
        (e.g. an RPM) and install those contents rather than building the
        binary from source.
        The binary package is extracted and new packages in the configured
        output package format are created.
        Extraction and installation of proprietary binaries is a good example
        use for this class.
        
git://), the "subpath" parameter limits
            the checkout to a specific subpath of the tree.
            Here is an example where ${BP} is used so that
            the files are extracted into the subdirectory expected by the
            default value of
            S:
            
     SRC_URI = "git://example.com/downloads/somepackage.rpm;subpath=${BP}"
            
            See the
            "Fetchers"
            section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on
            supported BitBake Fetchers.
        
binconfig.bbclass¶
        The binconfig class helps to correct paths in
        shell scripts.
    
        Before pkg-config had become widespread, libraries
        shipped shell scripts to give information about the libraries and
        include paths needed to build software (usually named
        LIBNAME-config).
        This class assists any recipe using such scripts.
    
        During staging, the OpenEmbedded build system installs such scripts
        into the sysroots/ directory.
        Inheriting this class results in all paths in these scripts being
        changed to point into the sysroots/ directory so
        that all builds that use the script use the correct directories
        for the cross compiling layout.
        See the
        BINCONFIG_GLOB
        variable for more information.
    
binconfig-disabled.bbclass¶
        An alternative version of the
        binconfig
        class, which disables binary configuration scripts by making them
        return an error in favor of using pkg-config
        to query the information.
        The scripts to be disabled should be specified using the
        BINCONFIG
        variable within the recipe inheriting the class.
    
blacklist.bbclass¶
        The blacklist class prevents
        the OpenEmbedded build system from building specific recipes
        (blacklists them).
        To use this class, inherit the class globally and set
        PNBLACKLIST
        for each recipe you wish to blacklist.
        Specify the PN
        value as a variable flag (varflag) and provide a reason, which is
        reported, if the package is requested to be built as the value.
        For example, if you want to blacklist a recipe called "exoticware",
        you add the following to your local.conf
        or distribution configuration:
        
     INHERIT += "blacklist"
     PNBLACKLIST[exoticware] = "Not supported by our organization."
        
bluetooth.bbclass¶
        The bluetooth class defines a variable that
        expands to the recipe (package) providing core
        bluetooth support on the platform.
    
        For details on how the class works, see the
        meta/classes/bluetooth.bbclass file in the Yocto
        Project
        Source Directory.
    
bugzilla.bbclass¶
        The bugzilla class supports setting up an
        instance of Bugzilla in which you can automatically files bug reports
        in response to build failures.
        For this class to work, you need to enable the XML-RPC interface in
        the instance of Bugzilla.
    
buildhistory.bbclass¶
        The buildhistory class records a
        history of build output metadata, which can be used to detect possible
        regressions as well as used for analysis of the build output.
        For more information on using Build History, see the
        "Maintaining Build Output Quality"
        section.
    
buildstats.bbclass¶
        The buildstats class records
        performance statistics about each task executed during the build
        (e.g. elapsed time, CPU usage, and I/O usage).
    
        When you use this class, the output goes into the
        BUILDSTATS_BASE
        directory, which defaults to ${TMPDIR}/buildstats/.
        You can analyze the elapsed time using
        scripts/pybootchartgui/pybootchartgui.py, which
        produces a cascading chart of the entire build process and can be
        useful for highlighting bottlenecks.
    
        Collecting build statistics is enabled by default through the
        USER_CLASSES
        variable from your local.conf file.
        Consequently, you do not have to do anything to enable the class.
        However, if you want to disable the class, simply remove "buildstats"
        from the USER_CLASSES list.
    
buildstats-summary.bbclass¶
        When inherited globally, prints statistics at the end of the build
        on sstate re-use.
        In order to function, this class requires the
        buildstats
        class be enabled.
    
ccache.bbclass¶
        The ccache class enables the
        C/C++ Compiler Cache
        for the build.
        This class is used to give a minor performance boost during the build.
        However, using the class can lead to unexpected side-effects.
        Thus, it is recommended that you do not use this class.
        See http://ccache.samba.org/ for information on
        the C/C++ Compiler Cache.
    
chrpath.bbclass¶
        The chrpath class
        is a wrapper around the "chrpath" utility, which is used during the
        build process for nativesdk,
        cross, and
        cross-canadian recipes to change
        RPATH records within binaries in order to make
        them relocatable.
    
clutter.bbclass¶
        The clutter class consolidates the
        major and minor version naming and other common items used by Clutter
        and related recipes.
        
cmake.bbclass¶
        The cmake class allows for
        recipes that need to build software using the CMake build system.
        You can use the
        EXTRA_OECMAKE
        variable to specify additional configuration options to be passed on
        the cmake command line.
    
cml1.bbclass¶
        The cml1 class provides basic support for the
        Linux kernel style build configuration system.
    
compress_doc.bbclass¶
        Enables compression for man pages and info pages.
        This class is intended to be inherited globally.
        The default compression mechanism is gz (gzip) but you can
        select an alternative mechanism by setting the
        DOC_COMPRESS
        variable.
    
copyleft_compliance.bbclass¶
        The copyleft_compliance class
        preserves source code for the purposes of license compliance.
        This class is an alternative to the archiver
        class and is still used by some users even though it has been
        deprecated in favor of the
        archiver
        class.
    
copyleft_filter.bbclass¶
        A class used by the
        archiver
        and
        copyleft_compliance
        classes for filtering licenses.
        The copyleft_filter class is an internal class
        and is not intended to be used directly.
    
core-image.bbclass¶
        The core-image class
        provides common definitions for the
        core-image-* image recipes, such as support for
        additional
        IMAGE_FEATURES.
    
cpan*.bbclass¶
        The cpan* classes support Perl modules.
    
Recipes for Perl modules are simple. These recipes usually only need to point to the source's archive and then inherit the proper class file. Building is split into two methods depending on which method the module authors used.
Modules that use old
                Makefile.PL-based build system require
                cpan.bbclass in their recipes.
                
Modules that use
                Build.PL-based build system require
                using cpan_build.bbclass in their recipes.
                
        Both build methods inherit the cpan-base class
        for basic Perl support.
    
cross.bbclass¶
        The cross class provides support for the recipes
        that build the cross-compilation tools.
    
cross-canadian.bbclass¶
        The cross-canadian class
        provides support for the recipes that build the Canadian
        Cross-compilation tools for SDKs.
        See the
        "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation"
        section for more discussion on these cross-compilation tools.
    
crosssdk.bbclass¶
        The crosssdk class
        provides support for the recipes that build the cross-compilation
        tools used for building SDKs.
        See the
        "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation"
        section for more discussion on these cross-compilation tools.
    
debian.bbclass¶
        The debian class renames output packages so that
        they follow the Debian naming policy (i.e. glibc
        becomes libc6 and glibc-devel
        becomes libc6-dev.)
        Renaming includes the library name and version as part of the package
        name.
    
        If a recipe creates packages for multiple libraries
        (shared object files of .so type), use the
        LEAD_SONAME
        variable in the recipe to specify the library on which to apply the
        naming scheme.
    
deploy.bbclass¶
        The deploy class handles deploying files
        to the
        DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE
        directory.
        The main function of this class is to allow the deploy step to be
        accelerated by shared state.
        Recipes that inherit this class should define their own
        do_deploy
        function to copy the files to be deployed to
        DEPLOYDIR,
        and use addtask to add the task at the appropriate
        place, which is usually after
        do_compile
        or
        do_install.
        The class then takes care of staging the files from
        DEPLOYDIR to
        DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE.
    
devshell.bbclass¶
        The devshell class adds the
        do_devshell task.
        Distribution policy dictates whether to include this class.
        See the
        "Using a Development Shell" section
        in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more information about
        using devshell.
    
distro_features_check.bbclass¶
        The distro_features_check class
        allows individual recipes to check for required and conflicting
        DISTRO_FEATURES.
    
        This class provides support for the
        REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES
        and
        CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES
        variables.
        If any conditions specified in the recipe using the above variables are
        not met, the recipe will be skipped.
    
distrodata.bbclass¶
        The distrodata class
        provides for automatic checking for upstream recipe updates.
        The class creates a comma-separated value (CSV) spreadsheet that
        contains information about the recipes.
        The information provides the
        do_distrodata
        and
        do_distro_check tasks, which do upstream checking
        and also verify if a package is used in multiple major distributions.
    
        The class is not included by default.
        To use it, you must set the
        INHERIT
        variable:
        
     INHERIT+= "distrodata"
        
        The distrodata class also provides the
        do_checkpkg
        task, which can be used against a simple recipe or against an
        image to get all its recipe information.
    
distutils*.bbclass¶
        The distutils* classes support recipes for Python
        version 2.x extensions, which are simple.
        These recipes usually only need to point to the source's archive and
        then inherit the proper class.
        Building is split into two methods depending on which method the
        module authors used.
        
Extensions that use an Autotools-based build system
                require Autotools and the classes based on
                distutils in their recipes.
                
Extensions that use build systems based on
                distutils require
                the distutils class in their recipes.
                
Extensions that use build systems based on
                setuptools require the
                setuptools
                class in their recipes.
                
        The distutils-common-base class is required by
        some of the distutils* classes to provide common
        Python2 support.
    
	    The distutils-tools class supports recipes for
        additional "distutils" tools.
    
distutils3*.bbclass¶
        The distutils3* classes support recipes for Python
        version 3.x extensions, which are simple.
        These recipes usually only need to point to the source's archive and
        then inherit the proper class.
        Building is split into three methods depending on which method the
        module authors used.
        
Extensions that use an Autotools-based build system
                require Autotools and
                distutils-based classes in their recipes.
                
Extensions that use
                distutils-based build systems require
                the distutils class in their recipes.
                
Extensions that use build systems based on
                setuptools3 require the
                setuptools3
                class in their recipes.
                
        The distutils3* classes either inherit their
        corresponding distutils* class or replicate them
        using a Python3 version instead (e.g.
        distutils3-base inherits
        distutils-common-base, which is the same as
        distutils-base but inherits
        python3native instead of
        pythonnative).
    
externalsrc.bbclass¶
        The externalsrc class supports building software
        from source code that is external to the OpenEmbedded build system.
        Building software from an external source tree means that the build
        system's normal fetch, unpack, and patch process is not used.
    
        By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the
        S and
        B variables to
        locate unpacked recipe source code and to build it, respectively.
        When your recipe inherits the externalsrc class,
        you use the
        EXTERNALSRC
        and
        EXTERNALSRC_BUILD
        variables to ultimately define S and
        B.
    
        By default, this class expects the source code to support recipe builds
        that use the B
        variable to point to the directory in which the OpenEmbedded build
        system places the generated objects built from the recipes.
        By default, the B directory is set to the
        following, which is separate from the source directory
        (S):
        
     ${WORKDIR}/${BPN}/{PV}/
        
        See these variables for more information:
        WORKDIR,
        BPN, and
        PV,
    
        For more information on the
        externalsrc class, see the comments in
        meta/classes/externalsrc.bbclass in the
        Source Directory.
        For information on how to use the externalsrc
        class, see the
        "Building Software from an External Source"
        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
    
extrausers.bbclass¶
        The extrausers class allows
        additional user and group configuration to be applied at the image
        level.
        Inheriting this class either globally or from an image recipe allows
        additional user and group operations to be performed using the
        EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS
        variable.
        
extrausers class are not tied to a specific
            recipe outside of the recipe for the image.
            Thus, the operations can be performed across the image as a whole.
            Use the
            useradd
            class to add user and group configuration to a specific recipe.
        Here is an example that uses this class in an image recipe:
     inherit extrausers
     EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
         useradd -p '' tester; \
         groupadd developers; \
         userdel nobody; \
         groupdel -g video; \
         groupmod -g 1020 developers; \
         usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \
         "
        Here is an example that adds two users named "tester-jim" and "tester-sue" and assigns passwords:
     inherit extrausers
     EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
         useradd -P tester01 tester-jim; \
         useradd -P tester01 tester-sue; \
         "
        Finally, here is an example that sets the root password to "1876*18":
     inherit extrausers
     EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
         usermod -P 1876*18 root; \
         "
        
fontcache.bbclass¶
        The fontcache class generates the
        proper post-install and post-remove (postinst and postrm)
        scriptlets for font packages.
        These scriptlets call fc-cache (part of
        Fontconfig) to add the fonts to the font
        information cache.
        Since the cache files are architecture-specific,
        fc-cache runs using QEMU if the postinst
        scriptlets need to be run on the build host during image creation.
    
        If the fonts being installed are in packages other than the main
        package, set
        FONT_PACKAGES
        to specify the packages containing the fonts.
    
fs-uuid.bbclass¶
        The fs-uuid class extracts UUID from
        ${ROOTFS},
        which must have been built by the time that this function gets called.
        The fs-uuid class only works on
        ext file systems and depends on
        tune2fs.
    
gconf.bbclass¶
        The gconf class provides common
        functionality for recipes that need to install GConf schemas.
        The schemas will be put into a separate package
        (${PN}-gconf)
        that is created automatically when this class is inherited.
        This package uses the appropriate post-install and post-remove
        (postinst/postrm) scriptlets to register and unregister the schemas
        in the target image.
    
gettext.bbclass¶
        The gettext class provides support for
        building software that uses the GNU gettext
        internationalization and localization system.
        All recipes building software that use
        gettext should inherit this class.
    
gnome.bbclass¶
        The gnome class supports recipes that
        build software from the GNOME stack.
        This class inherits the
        gnomebase,
        gtk-icon-cache,
        gconf and
        mime classes.
        The class also disables GObject introspection where applicable.
    
gnomebase.bbclass¶
        The gnomebase class is the base
        class for recipes that build software from the GNOME stack.
        This class sets
        SRC_URI to
        download the source from the GNOME mirrors as well as extending
        FILES
        with the typical GNOME installation paths.
    
gobject-introspection.bbclass¶
        Provides support for recipes building software that
        supports GObject introspection.
        This functionality is only enabled if the
        "gobject-introspection-data" feature is in
        DISTRO_FEATURES
        as well as "qemu-usermode" being in
        MACHINE_FEATURES.
        
DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
            or
            MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED,
            respectively.
        
grub-efi.bbclass¶
        The grub-efi
        class provides grub-efi-specific functions for
        building bootable images.
    
This class supports several variables:
                INITRD:
                Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use
                as an initial RAM disk (initrd) (optional).
                
                ROOTFS:
                Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem
                (optional).
                GRUB_GFXSERIAL:
                Set this to "1" to have graphics and serial in the boot menu.
                
                LABELS:
                A list of targets for the automatic configuration.
                
                APPEND:
                An override list of append strings for each
                LABEL.
                
                GRUB_OPTS:
                Additional options to add to the configuration (optional).
                Options are delimited using semi-colon characters
                (;).
                GRUB_TIMEOUT:
                Timeout before executing the default LABEL
                (optional).
                
gsettings.bbclass¶
        The gsettings class
        provides common functionality for recipes that need to install
        GSettings (glib) schemas.
        The schemas are assumed to be part of the main package.
        Appropriate post-install and post-remove (postinst/postrm)
        scriptlets are added to register and unregister the schemas in the
        target image.
    
gtk-doc.bbclass¶
        The gtk-doc class
        is a helper class to pull in the appropriate
        gtk-doc dependencies and disable
        gtk-doc.
    
gtk-icon-cache.bbclass¶
        The gtk-icon-cache class
        generates the proper post-install and post-remove (postinst/postrm)
        scriptlets for packages that use GTK+ and install icons.
        These scriptlets call gtk-update-icon-cache to add
        the fonts to GTK+'s icon cache.
        Since the cache files are architecture-specific,
        gtk-update-icon-cache is run using QEMU if the
        postinst scriptlets need to be run on the build host during image
        creation.
    
gtk-immodules-cache.bbclass¶
        The gtk-immodules-cache class
        generates the proper post-install and post-remove (postinst/postrm)
        scriptlets for packages that install GTK+ input method modules for
        virtual keyboards.
        These scriptlets call gtk-update-icon-cache to add
        the input method modules to the cache.
        Since the cache files are architecture-specific,
        gtk-update-icon-cache is run using QEMU if the
        postinst scriptlets need to be run on the build host during image
        creation.
    
        If the input method modules being installed are in packages other than
        the main package, set
        GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES
        to specify the packages containing the modules.
    
gummiboot.bbclass¶
        The gummiboot class provides functions specific
        to the gummiboot bootloader for building bootable images.
        This is an internal class and is not intended to be
        used directly.
        Set the
        EFI_PROVIDER
        variable to "gummiboot" to use this class.
    
        For information on more variables used and supported in this class,
        see the
        GUMMIBOOT_CFG,
        GUMMIBOOT_ENTRIES,
        and
        GUMMIBOOT_TIMEOUT
        variables.
    
You can also see the Gummiboot documentation for more information.
gzipnative.bbclass¶
        The gzipnative class enables the use of
        different native versions of gzip
        and pigz rather than the versions of these tools
        from the build host.
    
icecc.bbclass¶
        The icecc class supports
        Icecream, which
        facilitates taking compile jobs and distributing them among remote
        machines.
    
        The class stages directories with symlinks from gcc
        and g++ to icecc, for both
        native and cross compilers.
        Depending on each configure or compile, the OpenEmbedded build system
        adds the directories at the head of the PATH list
        and then sets the ICECC_CXX and
        ICEC_CC variables, which are the paths to the
        g++ and gcc compilers,
        respectively.
    
        For the cross compiler, the class creates a tar.gz
        file that contains the Yocto Project toolchain and sets
        ICECC_VERSION, which is the version of the
        cross-compiler used in the cross-development toolchain, accordingly.
    
        The class handles all three different compile stages
        (i.e native ,cross-kernel and target) and creates the necessary
        environment tar.gz file to be used by the remote
        machines.
        The class also supports SDK generation.
    
        If ICECC_PATH
        is not set in your local.conf file, then the
        class tries to locate the icecc binary
        using which.
        If
        ICECC_ENV_EXEC
        is set in your local.conf file, the variable should
        point to the icecc-create-env script
        provided by the user.
        If you do not point to a user-provided script, the build system
        uses the default script provided by the recipe
        icecc-create-env-native.bb.
        
icecc.
        
        If you do not want the Icecream distributed compile support to apply
        to specific recipes or classes, you can effectively "blacklist" them
        by listing the recipes and classes using the
        ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL
        and
        ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL,
        variables, respectively, in your local.conf file.
        Doing so causes the OpenEmbedded build system to handle these
        compilations locally.
    
        Additionally, you can list recipes using the
        ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL
        variable in your local.conf file to force
        icecc to be enabled for recipes using an empty
        PARALLEL_MAKE
        variable.
    
        Inheriting the icecc class changes all sstate
        signatures.
        Consequently, if a development team has a dedicated build system
        that populates
        STATE_MIRRORS
        and they want to reuse sstate from
        STATE_MIRRORS, then all developers and the
        build system need to either inherit the icecc
        class or nobody should.
    
        At the distribution level, you can inherit the
        icecc class to be sure that all builders start
        with the same sstate signatures.
        After inheriting the class, you can then disable the feature by setting
        the
        ICECC_DISABLED
        variable to "1" as follows:
        
     INHERIT_DISTRO_append = " icecc"
     ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1"
        
        This practice makes sure everyone is using the same signatures but also
        requires individuals that do want to use Icecream to enable the feature
        individually as follows in your local.conf file:
        
     ICECC_DISABLED = ""
        
image.bbclass¶
        The image class helps support creating images
        in different formats.
        First, the root filesystem is created from packages using
        one of the rootfs*.bbclass
        files (depending on the package format used) and then one or more image
        files are created.
        
The
                IMAGE_FSTYPES
                variable controls the types of images to generate.
                
The
                IMAGE_INSTALL
                variable controls the list of packages to install into the
                image.
For information on customizing images, see the "Customizing Images" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual. For information on how images are created, see the "Images" section elsewhere in this manual.
image-buildinfo.bbclass¶
        The image-buildinfo class writes information
        to the target filesystem on /etc/build.
    
image_types.bbclass¶
        The image_types class defines all of
        the standard image output types that you can enable through the
        IMAGE_FSTYPES
        variable.
        You can use this class as a reference on how to add support for custom
        image output types.
    
        By default, this class is enabled through the
        IMAGE_CLASSES
        variable in
        image.bbclass.
        If you define your own image types using a custom BitBake class and
        then use IMAGE_CLASSES to enable it, the custom
        class must either inherit image_types or
        image_types must also appear in
        IMAGE_CLASSES.
    
image_types_uboot.bbclass¶
        The image_types_uboot class
        defines additional image types specifically for the U-Boot bootloader.
    
image-live.bbclass¶
        The image-live class supports building "live"
        images.
    
        Normally, you do not use this class directly.
        Instead, you add "live" to
        IMAGE_FSTYPES.
        For example, if you were building an ISO image, you would add "live"
        to IMAGE_FSTYPES, set the
        NOISO variable to
        "0" and the build system would use the image-live
        class to build the ISO image.
    
image-mklibs.bbclass¶
        The image-mklibs class
        enables the use of the mklibs utility during the
        do_rootfs
        task, which optimizes the size of
        libraries contained in the image.
    
        By default, the class is enabled in the
        local.conf.template using the
        USER_CLASSES
        variable as follows:
        
     USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink"
        
image-prelink.bbclass¶
        The image-prelink class
        enables the use of the prelink utility during
        the
        do_rootfs
        task, which optimizes the dynamic
        linking of shared libraries to reduce executable startup time.
    
        By default, the class is enabled in the
        local.conf.template using the
        USER_CLASSES
        variable as follows:
        
     USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink"
        
image-swab.bbclass¶
        The image-swab class enables the
        Swabber
        tool in order to detect and log accesses to the host system during
        the OpenEmbedded build process.
        
strace package needs to be installed
            in the build host as a dependency for this tool.
        
image-vm.bbclass¶
        The image-vm class supports building VM
        images.
    
image-vmdk.bbclass¶
        The image-vmdk class supports building VMware
        VMDK images.
        Normally, you do not use this class directly.
        Instead, you add "vmdk" to
        IMAGE_FSTYPES.
    
insane.bbclass¶
        The insane class adds a step to the package
        generation process so that output quality assurance checks are
        generated by the OpenEmbedded build system.
        A range of checks are performed that check the build's output
        for common problems that show up during runtime.
        Distribution policy usually dictates whether to include this class.
    
You can configure the sanity checks so that specific test failures either raise a warning or an error message. Typically, failures for new tests generate a warning. Subsequent failures for the same test would then generate an error message once the metadata is in a known and good condition. See the "QA Error and Warning Messages" Chapter for a list of all the warning and error messages you might encounter using a default configuration.
        Use the
        WARN_QA and
        ERROR_QA
        variables to control the behavior of
        these checks at the global level (i.e. in your custom distro
        configuration).
        However, to skip one or more checks in recipes, you should use
        INSANE_SKIP.
        For example, to skip the check for symbolic link
        .so files in the main package of a recipe,
        add the following to the recipe.
        You need to realize that the package name override, in this example
        ${PN}, must be used:
        
     INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so"
        Please keep in mind that the QA checks exist in order to detect real or potential problems in the packaged output. So exercise caution when disabling these checks.
        The following list shows the tests you can list with the
        WARN_QA and ERROR_QA
        variables:
        
already-stripped:
                Checks that produced binaries have not already been
                stripped prior to the build system extracting debug symbols.
                It is common for upstream software projects to default to
                stripping debug symbols for output binaries.
                In order for debugging to work on the target using
                -dbg packages, this stripping must be
                disabled.
                
arch:
                Checks the Executable and Linkable Format (ELF) type, bit size,
                and endianness of any binaries to ensure they match the target
                architecture.
                This test fails if any binaries do not match the type since
                there would be an incompatibility.
                The test could indicate that the
                wrong compiler or compiler options have been used.
                Sometimes software, like bootloaders, might need to bypass
                this check.
                
buildpaths:
                Checks for paths to locations on the build host inside the
                output files.
                Currently, this test triggers too many false positives and
                thus is not normally enabled.
                
build-deps:
                Determines if a build-time dependency that is specified through
                DEPENDS,
                explicit
                RDEPENDS,
                or task-level dependencies exists to match any runtime
                dependency.
                This determination is particularly useful to discover where
                runtime dependencies are detected and added during packaging.
                If no explicit dependency has been specified within the
                metadata, at the packaging stage it is too late to ensure that
                the dependency is built, and thus you can end up with an
                error when the package is installed into the image during the
                do_rootfs
                task because the auto-detected dependency was not satisfied.
                An example of this would be where the
                update-rc.d
                class automatically adds a dependency on the
                initscripts-functions package to packages
                that install an initscript that refers to
                /etc/init.d/functions.
                The recipe should really have an explicit
                RDEPENDS for the package in question on
                initscripts-functions so that the
                OpenEmbedded build system is able to ensure that the
                initscripts recipe is actually built and
                thus the initscripts-functions package is
                made available.
                
compile-host-path:
                Checks the
                do_compile
                log for indications
                that paths to locations on the build host were used.
                Using such paths might result in host contamination of the
                build output.
                
debug-deps:
                Checks that all packages except -dbg
                packages do not depend on -dbg
                packages, which would cause a packaging bug.
                
debug-files:
                Checks for .debug directories in anything but the
                -dbg package.
                The debug files should all be in the -dbg package.
                Thus, anything packaged elsewhere is incorrect packaging.
dep-cmp:
                Checks for invalid version comparison statements in runtime
                dependency relationships between packages (i.e. in
                RDEPENDS,
                RRECOMMENDS,
                RSUGGESTS,
                RPROVIDES,
                RREPLACES,
                and
                RCONFLICTS
                variable values).
                Any invalid comparisons might trigger failures or undesirable
                behavior when passed to the package manager.
                
desktop:
                Runs the desktop-file-validate program
                against any .desktop files to validate
                their contents against the specification for
                .desktop files.
dev-deps:
                Checks that all packages except -dev
                or -staticdev packages do not depend on
                -dev packages, which would be a
                packaging bug.
dev-so:
                Checks that the .so symbolic links are in the
                -dev package and not in any of the other packages.
                In general, these symlinks are only useful for development purposes.
                Thus, the -dev package is the correct location for
                them.
                Some very rare cases do exist for dynamically loaded modules where
                these symlinks are needed instead in the main package.
                
file-rdeps:
                Checks that file-level dependencies identified by the
                OpenEmbedded build system at packaging time are satisfied.
                For example, a shell script might start with the line
                #!/bin/bash.
                This line would translate to a file dependency on
                /bin/bash.
                Of the three package managers that the OpenEmbedded build
                system supports, only RPM directly handles file-level
                dependencies, resolving them automatically to packages
                providing the files.
                However, the lack of that functionality in the other two
                package managers does not mean the dependencies do not still
                need resolving.
                This QA check attempts to ensure that explicitly declared
                RDEPENDS
                exist to handle any file-level dependency detected in
                packaged files.
                
files-invalid:
                Checks for
                FILES
                variable values that contain "//", which is invalid.
                
incompatible-license:
                Report when packages are excluded from being created due to
                being marked with a license that is in
                INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE.
                
install-host-path:
                Checks the
                do_install
                log for indications
                that paths to locations on the build host were used.
                Using such paths might result in host contamination of the
                build output.
                
installed-vs-shipped:
                Reports when files have been installed within
                do_install but have not been included in
                any package by way of the
                FILES
                variable.
                Files that do not appear in any package cannot be present in
                an image later on in the build process.
                Ideally, all installed files should be packaged or not
                installed at all.
                These files can be deleted at the end of
                do_install if the files are not
                needed in any package.
                
la:
                Checks .la files for any TMPDIR
                paths.
                Any .la file containing these paths is incorrect since
                libtool adds the correct sysroot prefix when using the
                files automatically itself.
ldflags:
                Ensures that the binaries were linked with the
                LDFLAGS
                options provided by the build system.
                If this test fails, check that the LDFLAGS variable
                is being passed to the linker command.
libdir:
                Checks for libraries being installed into incorrect
                (possibly hardcoded) installation paths.
                For example, this test will catch recipes that install
                /lib/bar.so when
                ${base_libdir} is "lib32".
                Another example is when recipes install
                /usr/lib64/foo.so when
                ${libdir} is "/usr/lib".
                
libexec:
                Checks if a package contains files in
                /usr/libexec.
                This check is not performed if the
                libexecdir variable has been set
                explicitly to /usr/libexec.
                
packages-list:
                Checks for the same package being listed multiple times through
                the PACKAGES
                variable value.
                Installing the package in this manner can cause errors during
                packaging.
                
perm-config:
                Reports lines in fs-perms.txt that have
                an invalid format.
                
perm-line:
                Reports lines in fs-perms.txt that have
                an invalid format.
                
perm-link:
                Reports lines in fs-perms.txt that
                specify 'link' where the specified target already exists.
                
perms:
                Currently, this check is unused but reserved.
                
pkgconfig:
                Checks .pc files for any
                TMPDIR/WORKDIR
                paths.
                Any .pc file containing these paths is incorrect
                since pkg-config itself adds the correct sysroot prefix
                when the files are accessed.
pkgname:
                Checks that all packages in
                PACKAGES
                have names that do not contain invalid characters (i.e.
                characters other than 0-9, a-z, ., +, and -).
                
pkgv-undefined:
                Checks to see if the PKGV variable
                is undefined during
                do_package.
                
pkgvarcheck:
                Checks through the variables
                RDEPENDS,
                RRECOMMENDS,
                RSUGGESTS,
                RCONFLICTS,
                RPROVIDES,
                RREPLACES,
                FILES,
                ALLOW_EMPTY,
                pkg_preinst,
                pkg_postinst,
                pkg_prerm
                and pkg_postrm, and reports if there are
                variable sets that are not package-specific.
                Using these variables without a package suffix is bad practice,
                and might unnecessarily complicate dependencies of other packages
                within the same recipe or have other unintended consequences.
                
pn-overrides:
                Checks that a recipe does not have a name
                (PN) value
                that appears in
                OVERRIDES.
                If a recipe is named such that its PN
                value matches something already in
                OVERRIDES (e.g. PN
                happens to be the same as
                MACHINE
                or
                DISTRO),
                it can have unexpected consequences.
                For example, assignments such as
                FILES_${PN} = "xyz" effectively turn into
                FILES = "xyz".
                
rpaths:
                Checks for rpaths in the binaries that contain build system paths such
                as TMPDIR.
                If this test fails, bad -rpath options are being
                passed to the linker commands and your binaries have potential security
                issues.
split-strip:
                Reports that splitting or stripping debug symbols from binaries
                has failed.
                
staticdev:
                Checks for static library files (*.a) in
                non-staticdev packages.
                
symlink-to-sysroot:
                Checks for symlinks in packages that point into
                TMPDIR
                on the host.
                Such symlinks will work on the host, but are clearly invalid
                when running on the target.
                
textrel:
                Checks for ELF binaries that contain relocations in their
                .text sections, which can result in a
                performance impact at runtime.
                See the explanation for the
                ELF binary
                message for more information regarding runtime performance issues.
                
unsafe-references-in-binaries:
                Reports when a binary installed in
                ${base_libdir},
                ${base_bindir}, or
                ${base_sbindir}, depends on another
                binary installed under ${exec_prefix}.
                This dependency is a concern if you want the system to remain
                basically operable if /usr is mounted
                separately and is not mounted.
                
${base_libdir},
                    ${base_bindir}, and
                    ${base_sbindir} are
                    /lib, /bin, and
                    /sbin, respectively.
                    The default for a binary installed
                    under ${exec_prefix} is
                    /usr.
                
unsafe-references-in-scripts:
                Reports when a script file installed in
                ${base_libdir},
                ${base_bindir}, or
                ${base_sbindir}, depends on files
                installed under ${exec_prefix}.
                This dependency is a concern if you want the system to remain
                basically operable if /usr is mounted
                separately and is not mounted.
                
${base_libdir},
                    ${base_bindir}, and
                    ${base_sbindir} are
                    /lib, /bin, and
                    /sbin, respectively.
                    The default for a binary installed
                    under ${exec_prefix} is
                    /usr.
                
useless-rpaths:
                Checks for dynamic library load paths (rpaths) in the binaries that
                by default on a standard system are searched by the linker (e.g.
                /lib and /usr/lib).
                While these paths will not cause any breakage, they do waste space and
                are unnecessary.
var-undefined:
                Reports when variables fundamental to packaging (i.e.
                WORKDIR,
                DEPLOY_DIR,
                D,
                PN, and
                PKGD) are
                undefined during
                do_package.
                
version-going-backwards:
                If Build History is enabled, reports when a package
                being written out has a lower version than the previously
                written package under the same name.
                If you are placing output packages into a feed and
                upgrading packages on a target system using that feed, the
                version of a package going backwards can result in the target
                system not correctly upgrading to the "new" version of the
                package.
                
xorg-driver-abi:
                Checks that all packages containing Xorg drivers have ABI
                dependencies.
                The xserver-xorg recipe provides driver
                ABI names.
                All drivers should depend on the ABI versions that they have
                been built against.
                Driver recipes that include
                xorg-driver-input.inc
                or xorg-driver-video.inc will
                automatically get these versions.
                Consequently, you should only need to explicitly add
                dependencies to binary driver recipes.
                
insserv.bbclass¶
        The insserv class
        uses the insserv utility to update the order of
        symbolic links in /etc/rc?.d/ within an image
        based on dependencies specified by LSB headers in the
        init.d scripts themselves.
    
kernel.bbclass¶
        The kernel class handles building Linux kernels.
        The class contains code to build all kernel trees.
        All needed headers are staged into the
        STAGING_KERNEL_DIR
        directory to allow out-of-tree module builds using
        the
        module
        class.
    
        This means that each built kernel module is packaged separately and inter-module
        dependencies are created by parsing the modinfo output.
        If all modules are required, then installing the kernel-modules
        package installs all packages with modules and various other kernel packages
        such as kernel-vmlinux.
    
        Various other classes are used by the kernel
        and module classes internally including the
        kernel-arch,
        module-base,
        and
        linux-kernel-base
        classes.
    
kernel-arch.bbclass¶
        The kernel-arch class
        sets the ARCH environment variable for Linux
        kernel compilation (including modules).
    
kernel-fitimage.bbclass¶
        The kernel-fitimage class provides support to
        pack zImages.
    
kernel-grub.bbclass¶
        The kernel-grub class updates the boot area and
        the boot menu with the kernel as the priority boot mechanism while
        installing a RPM to update the kernel on a deployed target.
    
kernel-module-split.bbclass¶
        The kernel-module-split class
        provides common functionality for splitting Linux kernel modules into
        separate packages.
    
kernel-uboot.bbclass¶
        The kernel-uboot class provides support for
        building from vmlinux-style kernel sources.
    
kernel-uimage.bbclass¶
        The kernel-uimage class provides support to
        pack uImage.
    
kernel-yocto.bbclass¶
        The kernel-yocto class
        provides common functionality for building from linux-yocto style
        kernel source repositories.
    
kernelsrc.bbclass¶
        The kernelsrc class sets the Linux kernel
        source and version.
    
lib_package.bbclass¶
        The lib_package class
        supports recipes that build libraries and produce executable
        binaries, where those binaries should not be installed by default
        along with the library.
        Instead, the binaries are added to a separate
        ${PN}-bin
        package to make their installation optional.
    
libc*.bbclass¶
        The libc* classes support recipes that build
        packages with libc:
        
The libc-common class
                provides common support for building with
                libc.
                
The libc-package class
                supports packaging up glibc and
                eglibc.
                
license.bbclass¶
        The license class provides license
        manifest creation and license exclusion.
        This class is enabled by default using the default value for the
        INHERIT_DISTRO
        variable.
    
linux-kernel-base.bbclass¶
        The linux-kernel-base class
        provides common functionality for recipes that build out of the Linux
        kernel source tree.
        These builds goes beyond the kernel itself.
        For example, the Perf recipe also inherits this class.
    
linuxloader.bbclass¶
        Provides the function linuxloader(), which gives
        the value of the dynamic loader/linker provided on the platform.
        This value is used by a number of other classes.
    
logging.bbclass¶
        The logging class provides the standard
        shell functions used to log messages for various BitBake severity levels
        (i.e. bbplain, bbnote,
        bbwarn, bberror,
        bbfatal, and bbdebug).
    
        This class is enabled by default since it is inherited by
        the base class.
    
meta.bbclass¶
        The meta class is inherited by recipes
        that do not build any output packages themselves, but act as a "meta"
        target for building other recipes.
    
metadata_scm.bbclass¶
        The metadata_scm class provides functionality for
        querying the branch and revision of a Source Code Manager (SCM)
        repository.
    
        The base
        class uses this class to print the revisions of each layer before
        starting every build.
        The metadata_scm class is enabled by default
        because it is inherited by the base class.
    
migrate_localcount.bbclass¶
        The migrate_localcount class verifies a recipe's
        localcount data and increments it appropriately.
    
mime.bbclass¶
        The mime class generates the proper
        post-install and post-remove (postinst/postrm) scriptlets for packages
        that install MIME type files.
        These scriptlets call update-mime-database to add
        the MIME types to the shared database.
    
mirrors.bbclass¶
        The mirrors class sets up some standard
        MIRRORS entries
        for source code mirrors.
        These mirrors provide a fall-back path in case the upstream source
        specified in
        SRC_URI
        within recipes is unavailable.
    
        This class is enabled by default since it is inherited by the
        base class.
    
module.bbclass¶
        The module class provides support for building
        out-of-tree Linux kernel modules.
        The class inherits the
        module-base
        and
        kernel-module-split
        classes, and implements the
        do_compile
        and
        do_install
        tasks.
        The class provides everything needed to build and package a kernel
        module.
    
For general information on out-of-tree Linux kernel modules, see the "Incorporating Out-of-Tree Modules" section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
module-base.bbclass¶
        The module-base class provides the base
        functionality for building Linux kernel modules.
        Typically, a recipe that builds software that includes one or
        more kernel modules and has its own means of building
        the module inherits this class as opposed to inheriting the
        module
        class.
    
multilib*.bbclass¶
        The multilib* classes provide support
        for building libraries with different target optimizations or target
        architectures and installing them side-by-side in the same image.
    
For more information on using the Multilib feature, see the "Combining Multiple Versions of Library Files into One Image" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
native.bbclass¶
        The native class provides common
        functionality for recipes that wish to build tools to run on the build
        host (i.e. tools that use the compiler or other tools from the
        build host).
    
You can create a recipe that builds tools that run natively on the host a couple different ways:
Create a myrecipe-native.bb
                that inherits the native class.
                If you use this method, you must order the inherit statement
                in the recipe after all other inherit statements so that the
                native class is inherited last.
                
Create or modify a target recipe that contains the following:
     BBCLASSEXTEND = "native"
                
                Inside the recipe, use _class-native and
                _class-target overrides to specify any
                functionality specific to the respective native or target
                case.
        Although applied differently, the native class is
        used with both methods.
        The advantage of the second method is that you do not need to have two
        separate recipes (assuming you need both) for native and target.
        All common parts of the recipe are automatically shared.
    
nativesdk.bbclass¶
        The nativesdk class provides common
        functionality for recipes that wish to build tools to run as part of
        an SDK (i.e. tools that run on
        SDKMACHINE).
    
You can create a recipe that builds tools that run on the SDK machine a couple different ways:
Create a
                nativesdk-myrecipe.bb
                recipe that inherits the nativesdk class.
                If you use this method, you must order the inherit statement
                in the recipe after all other inherit statements so that the
                nativesdk class is inherited last.
                
Create a nativesdk variant
                of any recipe by adding the following:
                
     BBCLASSEXTEND = "nativesdk"
                
                Inside the recipe, use _class-nativesdk and
                _class-target overrides to specify any
                functionality specific to the respective SDK machine or target
                case.
        Although applied differently, the nativesdk class
        is used with both methods.
        The advantage of the second method is that you do not need to have two
        separate recipes (assuming you need both) for the SDK machine and the
        target.
        All common parts of the recipe are automatically shared.
    
nopackages.bbclass¶Disables packaging tasks for those recipes and classes where packaging is not needed.
npm.bbclass¶Provides support for building Node.js software fetched using the npm package manager.
npm:// fetcher to have dependencies fetched
            and packaged automatically.
        
oelint.bbclass¶
        The oelint class is an
        obsolete lint checking tool that exists in
        meta/classes in the
        Source Directory.
    
        A number of classes exist that could be generally useful in
        OE-Core but are never actually used within OE-Core itself.
        The oelint class is one such example.
        However, being aware of this class can reduce the proliferation of
        different versions of similar classes across multiple layers.
    
own-mirrors.bbclass¶
        The own-mirrors class makes it
        easier to set up your own
        PREMIRRORS
        from which to first fetch source before attempting to fetch it from the
        upstream specified in
        SRC_URI
        within each recipe.
    
        To use this class, inherit it globally and specify
        SOURCE_MIRROR_URL.
        Here is an example:
        
     INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
     SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my-source-mirror"
        
        You can specify only a single URL in
        SOURCE_MIRROR_URL.
    
package.bbclass¶
        The package class supports generating
        packages from a build's output.
        The core generic functionality is in
        package.bbclass.
        The code specific to particular package types resides in these
        package-specific classes:
        package_deb,
        package_rpm,
        package_ipk,
        and
        package_tar.
        
package_tar class is broken and not
            supported.
            It is recommended that you do not use this class.
        
        You can control the list of resulting package formats by using the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable defined in your conf/local.conf
        configuration file, which is located in the
        Build Directory.
        When defining the variable, you can specify one or more package types.
        Since images are generated from packages, a packaging class is
        needed to enable image generation.
        The first class listed in this variable is used for image generation.
    
If you take the optional step to set up a repository (package feed) on the development host that can be used by Smart, you can install packages from the feed while you are running the image on the target (i.e. runtime installation of packages). For more information, see the "Using Runtime Package Management" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        The package-specific class you choose can affect build-time performance
        and has space ramifications.
        In general, building a package with IPK takes about thirty percent less
        time as compared to using RPM to build the same or similar package.
        This comparison takes into account a complete build of the package with
        all dependencies previously built.
        The reason for this discrepancy is because the RPM package manager
        creates and processes more
        Metadata than the
        IPK package manager.
        Consequently, you might consider setting
        PACKAGE_CLASSES to "package_ipk" if you are
        building smaller systems.
    
Before making your package manager decision, however, you should consider some further things about using RPM:
RPM starts to provide more abilities than IPK due to the fact that it processes more Metadata. For example, this information includes individual file types, file checksum generation and evaluation on install, sparse file support, conflict detection and resolution for Multilib systems, ACID style upgrade, and repackaging abilities for rollbacks.
For smaller systems, the extra space used for the Berkeley Database and the amount of metadata when using RPM can affect your ability to perform on-device upgrades.
You can find additional information on the effects of the package class at these two Yocto Project mailing list links:
package_deb.bbclass¶
        The package_deb class
        provides support for creating packages that use the Debian
        (i.e. .deb) file format.
        The class ensures the packages are written out in a
        .deb file format to the
        ${DEPLOY_DIR_DEB}
        directory.
    
        This class inherits the
        package
        class and is enabled through the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable in the local.conf file.
    
package_ipk.bbclass¶
        The package_ipk class
        provides support for creating packages that use the IPK
        (i.e. .ipk) file format.
        The class ensures the packages are written out in a
        .ipk file format to the
        ${DEPLOY_DIR_IPK}
        directory.
    
        This class inherits the
        package
        class and is enabled through the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable in the local.conf file.
    
package_rpm.bbclass¶
        The package_rpm class
        provides support for creating packages that use the RPM
        (i.e. .rpm) file format.
        The class ensures the packages are written out in a
        .rpm file format to the
        ${DEPLOY_DIR_RPM}
        directory.
    
        This class inherits the
        package
        class and is enabled through the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable in the local.conf file.
    
package_tar.bbclass¶
        The package_tar class
        provides support for creating tarballs.
        The class ensures the packages are written out in a
        tarball format to the
        ${DEPLOY_DIR_TAR}
        directory.
    
        This class inherits the
        package
        class and is enabled through the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable in the local.conf file.
        
package_tar class
            first using the PACKAGE_CLASSES variable.
            You must use .deb,
            .ipk, or .rpm file
            formats for your image or SDK.
        
packagedata.bbclass¶
        The packagedata class provides
        common functionality for reading pkgdata files
        found in
        PKGDATA_DIR.
        These files contain information about each output package produced by
        the OpenEmbedded build system.
    
        This class is enabled by default because it is inherited by the
        package
        class.
    
packagegroup.bbclass¶
        The packagegroup class sets default values
        appropriate for package group recipes (e.g.
        PACKAGES,
        PACKAGE_ARCH,
        ALLOW_EMPTY,
        and so forth).
        It is highly recommended that all package group recipes inherit this class.
    
For information on how to use this class, see the "Customizing Images Using Custom Package Groups" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        Previously, this class was called the task class.
    
patch.bbclass¶
        The patch class provides all functionality for
        applying patches during the
        do_patch
        task.
    
        This class is enabled by default because it is inherited by the
        base
        class.
    
perlnative.bbclass¶
        When inherited by a recipe, the perlnative class
        supports using the native version of Perl built by the build system
        rather than using the version provided by the build host.
    
pixbufcache.bbclass¶
        The pixbufcache class generates the proper
        post-install and post-remove (postinst/postrm) scriptlets for packages
        that install pixbuf loaders, which are used with
        gdk-pixbuf.
        These scriptlets call update_pixbuf_cache
        to add the pixbuf loaders to the cache.
        Since the cache files are architecture-specific,
        update_pixbuf_cache is run using QEMU if the
        postinst scriptlets need to be run on the build host during image
        creation.
    
        If the pixbuf loaders being installed are in packages other
        than the recipe's main package, set
        PIXBUF_PACKAGES
        to specify the packages containing the loaders.
    
pkgconfig.bbclass¶
        The pkgconfig class provides a standard way to get
        header and library information by using pkg-config.
        This class aims to smooth integration of
        pkg-config into libraries that use it.
    
        During staging, BitBake installs pkg-config
        data into the sysroots/ directory.
        By making use of sysroot functionality within
        pkg-config, the pkgconfig
        class no longer has to manipulate the files.
    
populate_sdk.bbclass¶
        The populate_sdk class provides support for
        SDK-only recipes.
        For information on advantages gained when building a cross-development
        toolchain using the
        do_populate_sdk
        task, see the
        "Building an SDK Installer"
        section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
    
populate_sdk_*.bbclass¶
        The populate_sdk_* classes support SDK creation
        and consist of the following classes:
        
populate_sdk_base:
                The base class supporting SDK creation under all package
                managers (i.e. DEB, RPM, and opkg).
populate_sdk_deb:
                Supports creation of the SDK given the Debian package manager.
                
populate_sdk_rpm:
                Supports creation of the SDK given the RPM package manager.
                
populate_sdk_ipk:
                Supports creation of the SDK given the opkg (IPK format)
                package manager.
                
populate_sdk_ext:
                Supports extensible SDK creation under all package managers.
                
        The populate_sdk_base class inherits the
        appropriate populate_sdk_* (i.e.
        deb, rpm, and
        ipk) based on
        IMAGE_PKGTYPE.
    
        The base class ensures all source and destination directories are
        established and then populates the SDK.
        After populating the SDK, the populate_sdk_base
        class constructs two sysroots:
        ${SDK_ARCH}-nativesdk,
        which contains the cross-compiler and associated tooling, and the
        target, which contains a target root filesystem that is configured for
        the SDK usage.
        These two images reside in
        SDK_OUTPUT,
        which consists of the following:
        
     ${SDK_OUTPUT}/${SDK_ARCH}-nativesdk-pkgs
     ${SDK_OUTPUT}/${SDKTARGETSYSROOT}/target-pkgs
        
Finally, the base populate SDK class creates the toolchain environment setup script, the tarball of the SDK, and the installer.
        The respective populate_sdk_deb,
        populate_sdk_rpm, and
        populate_sdk_ipk classes each support the
        specific type of SDK.
        These classes are inherited by and used with the
        populate_sdk_base class.
    
        For more information on the cross-development toolchain
        generation, see the
        "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation"
        section.
        For information on advantages gained when building a
        cross-development toolchain using the
        do_populate_sdk
        task, see the
        "Building an SDK Installer"
        section in the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's
        Guide.
    
prexport.bbclass¶
        The prexport class provides functionality for
        exporting
        PR values.
        
bitbake-prserv-tool export".
        
primport.bbclass¶
        The primport class provides functionality for
        importing
        PR values.
        
bitbake-prserv-tool import".
        
prserv.bbclass¶
        The prserv class provides functionality for
        using a
        PR service
        in order to automatically manage the incrementing of the
        PR variable for
        each recipe.
    
        This class is enabled by default because it is inherited by the
        package
        class.
        However, the OpenEmbedded build system will not enable the
        functionality of this class unless
        PRSERV_HOST
        has been set.
    
ptest.bbclass¶
        The ptest class provides functionality for
        packaging and installing runtime tests for recipes that build software
        that provides these tests.
    
        This class is intended to be inherited by individual recipes.
        However, the class' functionality is largely disabled unless "ptest"
        appears in
        DISTRO_FEATURES.
        See the
        "Testing Packages With ptest"
        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more information
        on ptest.
    
ptest-gnome.bbclass¶
        Enables package tests (ptests) specifically for GNOME packages,
        which have tests intended to be executed with
        gnome-desktop-testing.
    
For information on setting up and running ptests, see the "Testing Packages With ptest" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
python-dir.bbclass¶
        The python-dir class provides the base version,
        location, and site package location for Python.
    
python3native.bbclass¶
        The python3native class supports using the
        native version of Python 3 built by the build system rather than
        support of the version provided by the build host.
    
pythonnative.bbclass¶
        When inherited by a recipe, the pythonnative class
        supports using the native version of Python built by the build system
        rather than using the version provided by the build host.
    
qemu.bbclass¶
        The qemu class provides functionality for recipes
        that either need QEMU or test for the existence of QEMU.
        Typically, this class is used to run programs for a target system on
        the build host using QEMU's application emulation mode.
    
recipe_sanity.bbclass¶
        The recipe_sanity class checks for the presence
        of any host system recipe prerequisites that might affect the
        build (e.g. variables that are set or software that is present).
    
relocatable.bbclass¶
        The relocatable class enables relocation of
        binaries when they are installed into the sysroot.
    
        This class makes use of the
        chrpath
        class and is used by both the
        cross
        and
        native
        classes.
    
remove-libtool.bbclass¶
        The remove-libtool class adds a post function
        to the
        do_install
        task to remove all .la files installed by
        libtool.
        Removing these files results in them being absent from both the
        sysroot and target packages.
    
        If a recipe needs the .la files to be installed,
        then the recipe can override the removal by setting
        REMOVE_LIBTOOL_LA to "0" as follows:
        
     REMOVE_LIBTOOL_LA = "0"
        
remove-libtool class is not enabled by
            default.
        
report-error.bbclass¶
        The report-error class supports enabling the
        error reporting tool,
        which allows you to submit build error information to a central
        database.
    
        The class collects debug information for recipe, recipe version, task,
        machine, distro, build system, target system, host distro, branch,
        commit, and log.
        From the information, report files using a JSON format are created and
        stored in
        ${LOG_DIR}/error-report.
    
rm_work.bbclass¶
        The rm_work class supports deletion of temporary
        workspace, which can ease your hard drive demands during builds.
    
        The OpenEmbedded build system can use a substantial amount of disk
        space during the build process.
        A portion of this space is the work files under the
        ${TMPDIR}/work directory for each recipe.
        Once the build system generates the packages for a recipe, the work
        files for that recipe are no longer needed.
        However, by default, the build system preserves these files
        for inspection and possible debugging purposes.
        If you would rather have these files deleted to save disk space
        as the build progresses, you can enable rm_work
        by adding the following to your local.conf file,
        which is found in the
        Build Directory.
        
    INHERIT += "rm_work"
        
        If you are modifying and building source code out of the work directory
        for a recipe, enabling rm_work will potentially
        result in your changes to the source being lost.
        To exclude some recipes from having their work directories deleted by
        rm_work, you can add the names of the recipe or
        recipes you are working on to the RM_WORK_EXCLUDE
        variable, which can also be set in your local.conf
        file.
        Here is an example:
        
    RM_WORK_EXCLUDE += "busybox glibc"
        
rootfs*.bbclass¶
        The rootfs* classes support creating
        the root filesystem for an image and consist of the following classes:
        
                The rootfs-postcommands class, which
                defines filesystem post-processing functions for image recipes.
                
                The rootfs_deb class, which supports
                creation of root filesystems for images built using
                .deb packages.
                The rootfs_rpm class, which supports
                creation of root filesystems for images built using
                .rpm packages.
                The rootfs_ipk class, which supports
                creation of root filesystems for images built using
                .ipk packages.
                The rootfsdebugfiles class, which installs
                additional files found on the build host directly into the
                root filesystem.
                
        The root filesystem is created from packages using one of the
        rootfs*.bbclass files as determined by the
        PACKAGE_CLASSES
        variable.
    
For information on how root filesystem images are created, see the "Image Generation" section.
sanity.bbclass¶
        The sanity class checks to see if prerequisite
        software is present on the host system so that users can be notified
        of potential problems that might affect their build.
        The class also performs basic user configuration checks from
        the local.conf configuration file to
        prevent common mistakes that cause build failures.
        Distribution policy usually determines whether to include this class.
    
scons.bbclass¶
        The scons class supports recipes that need to
        build software that uses the SCons build system.
        You can use the
        EXTRA_OESCONS
        variable to specify additional configuration options you want to pass
        SCons command line.
    
sdl.bbclass¶
        The sdl class supports recipes that need to build
        software that uses the Simple DirectMedia Layer (SDL) library.
    
setuptools.bbclass¶
        The setuptools class supports Python
        version 2.x extensions that use build systems based on
        setuptools.
        If your recipe uses these build systems, the recipe needs to
        inherit the setuptools class.
    
setuptools3.bbclass¶
        The setuptools3 class supports Python
        version 3.x extensions that use build systems based on
        setuptools3.
        If your recipe uses these build systems, the recipe needs to
        inherit the setuptools3 class.
    
sign_rpm.bbclass¶
        The sign_rpm class supports generating signed
        RPM packages.
    
sip.bbclass¶
        The sip class
        supports recipes that build or package SIP-based Python bindings.
    
siteconfig.bbclass¶
        The siteconfig class
        provides functionality for handling site configuration.
        The class is used by the
        autotools
        class to accelerate the
        do_configure
        task.
    
siteinfo.bbclass¶
        The siteinfo class provides information about
        the targets that might be needed by other classes or recipes.
    
        As an example, consider Autotools, which can require tests that must
        execute on the target hardware.
        Since this is not possible in general when cross compiling, site
        information is used to provide cached test results so these tests can
        be skipped over but still make the correct values available.
        The
        meta/site directory
        contains test results sorted into different categories such as
        architecture, endianness, and the libc used.
        Site information provides a list of files containing data relevant to
        the current build in the
        CONFIG_SITE variable
        that Autotools automatically picks up.
    
        The class also provides variables like
        SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS
        and SITEINFO_BITS
        that can be used elsewhere in the metadata.
    
        Because the
        base class
        includes the siteinfo class, it is always active.
    
spdx.bbclass¶
        The spdx class integrates real-time license
        scanning, generation of SPDX standard output, and verification
        of license information during the build.
        
sstate.bbclass¶
        The sstate class provides support for Shared
        State (sstate).
        By default, the class is enabled through the
        INHERIT_DISTRO
        variable's default value.
    
For more information on sstate, see the "Shared State Cache" section.
staging.bbclass¶
        The staging class provides the
        do_populate_sysroot
        task, which stages files into the sysroot to make them available to
        other recipes at build time.
        The class is enabled by default because it is inherited by the
        base
        class.
    
syslinux.bbclass¶
        The syslinux class provides syslinux-specific
        functions for building bootable images.
    
The class supports the following variables:
INITRD:
                Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as
                an initial RAM disk (initrd).
                This variable is optional.
ROOTFS:
                Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem.
                This variable is optional.
AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU:
                Enables creating an automatic menu when set to "1".
                
LABELS:
                Lists targets for automatic configuration.
                
APPEND:
                Lists append string overrides for each label.
                
SYSLINUX_OPTS:
                Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file.
                Semicolon characters separate multiple options.
                
SYSLINUX_SPLASH:
                Lists a background for the VGA boot menu when you are using the
                boot menu.
SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE:
                Set to "console=ttyX" to change kernel boot default console.
                
SYSLINUX_SERIAL:
                Sets an alternate serial port.
                Or, turns off serial when the variable is set with an
                empty string.
SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY:
                Sets an alternate "console=tty..." kernel boot argument.
                
systemd.bbclass¶
        The systemd class provides support for recipes
        that install systemd unit files.
    
        The functionality for this class is disabled unless you have "systemd"
        in
        DISTRO_FEATURES.
    
        Under this class, the recipe or Makefile (i.e. whatever the recipe is
        calling during the
        do_install
        task) installs unit files into
        ${D}${systemd_unitdir}/system.
        If the unit files being installed go into packages other than the
        main package, you need to set
        SYSTEMD_PACKAGES
        in your recipe to identify the packages in which the files will be
        installed.
    
        You should set
        SYSTEMD_SERVICE
        to the name of the service file.
        You should also use a package name override to indicate the package
        to which the value applies.
        If the value applies to the recipe's main package, use
        ${PN}.
        Here is an example from the connman recipe:
        
     SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service"
        
        Services are set up to start on boot automatically unless
        you have set
        SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE
        to "disable".
    
        For more information on systemd, see the
        "Selecting an Initialization Manager"
        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
    
terminal.bbclass¶
        The terminal class provides support for starting
        a terminal session.
        The
        OE_TERMINAL
        variable controls which terminal emulator is used for the session.
    
        Other classes use the terminal class anywhere a
        separate terminal session needs to be started.
        For example, the
        patch
        class assuming
        PATCHRESOLVE
        is set to "user", the
        cml1
        class, and the
        devshell
        class all use the terminal class.
    
testimage*.bbclass¶
        The testimage* classes support running
        automated tests against images using QEMU and on actual hardware.
        The classes handle loading the tests and starting the image.
        To use the classes, you need to perform steps to set up the
        environment.
    
        The tests are commands that run on the target system over
        ssh.
        Each test is written in Python and makes use of the
        unittest module.
    
        The testimage.bbclass runs tests on an image
        when called using the following:
        
     $ bitbake -c testimage image
        
        The testimage-auto class runs tests on an image
        after the image is constructed (i.e.
        TEST_IMAGE
        must be set to "1").
    
For information on how to enable, run, and create new tests, see the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
testsdk.bbclass¶
        This class supports running automated tests against
        software development kits (SDKs).
        The testsdk class runs tests on an SDK when
        called using the following:
        
     $ bitbake -c testsdk image
        
texinfo.bbclass¶
        This class should be inherited by recipes whose upstream packages
        invoke the texinfo utilities at build-time.
        Native and cross recipes are made to use the dummy scripts provided
        by texinfo-dummy-native, for improved performance.
        Target architecture recipes use the genuine
        Texinfo utilities.
        By default, they use the Texinfo utilities on the host system.
        
ASSUME_PROVIDED
            and makeinfo from
            SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES.
        
tinderclient.bbclass¶
        The tinderclient class submits build results to
        an external Tinderbox instance.
        
toaster.bbclass¶
        The toaster class collects information about
        packages and images and sends them as events that the BitBake
        user interface can receive.
        The class is enabled when the Toaster user interface is running.
    
This class is not intended to be used directly.
toolchain-scripts.bbclass¶
        The toolchain-scripts class provides the scripts
        used for setting up the environment for installed SDKs.
    
typecheck.bbclass¶
        The typecheck class provides support for
        validating the values of variables set at the configuration level
        against their defined types.
        The OpenEmbedded build system allows you to define the type of a
        variable using the "type" varflag.
        Here is an example:
        
     IMAGE_FEATURES[type] = "list"
        
uboot-config.bbclass¶
        The uboot-config class provides support for
        U-Boot configuration for a machine.
        Specify the machine in your recipe as follows:
        
     UBOOT_CONFIG ??= <default>
     UBOOT_CONFIG[foo] = "config,images"
        You can also specify the machine using this method:
     UBOOT_MACHINE = "config"
        
        See the
        UBOOT_CONFIG
        and
        UBOOT_MACHINE
        variables for additional information.
    
uninative.bbclass¶
        Attempts to isolate the build system from the host
        distribution's C library in order to make re-use of native shared state
        artifacts across different host distributions practical.
        With this class enabled, a tarball containing a pre-built C library
        is downloaded at the start of the build.
        In the Poky reference distribution this is enabled by default
        through
        meta/conf/distro/include/yocto-uninative.inc.
        Other distributions that do not derive from poky can also
        "require conf/distro/include/yocto-uninative.inc"
        to use this.
        Alternatively if you prefer, you can build the uninative-tarball recipe
        yourself, publish the resulting tarball (e.g. via HTTP) and set
        UNINATIVE_URL and
        UNINATIVE_CHECKSUM appropriately.
        For an example, see the
        meta/conf/distro/include/yocto-uninative.inc.
    
update-alternatives.bbclass¶
        The update-alternatives class helps the
        alternatives system when multiple sources provide the same command.
        This situation occurs when several programs that have the same or
        similar function are installed with the same name.
        For example, the ar command is available from the
        busybox, binutils and
        elfutils packages.
        The update-alternatives class handles
        renaming the binaries so that multiple packages can be installed
        without conflicts.
        The ar command still works regardless of which
        packages are installed or subsequently removed.
        The class renames the conflicting binary in each package and symlinks
        the highest priority binary during installation or removal of packages.
    
To use this class, you need to define a number of variables:
        These variables list alternative commands needed by a package,
        provide pathnames for links, default links for targets, and
        so forth.
        For details on how to use this class, see the comments in the
        update-alternatives.bbclass.
    
update-alternatives command
        directly in your recipes.
        However, this class simplifies things in most cases.
    update-rc.d.bbclass¶
        The update-rc.d class uses
        update-rc.d to safely install an
        initialization script on behalf of the package.
        The OpenEmbedded build system takes care of details such as making
        sure the script is stopped before a package is removed and started when
        the package is installed.
    
        Three variables control this class:
        INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES,
        INITSCRIPT_NAME and
        INITSCRIPT_PARAMS.
        See the variable links for details.
    
useradd*.bbclass¶
        The useradd* classes support the addition of users
        or groups for usage by the package on the target.
        For example, if you have packages that contain system services that
        should be run under their own user or group, you can use these classes
        to enable creation of the user or group.
        The meta-skeleton/recipes-skeleton/useradd/useradd-example.bb
        recipe in the Source Directory
        provides a simple example that shows how to add three
        users and groups to two packages.
        See the useradd-example.bb recipe for more
        information on how to use these classes.
    
        The useradd_base class provides basic
        functionality for user or groups settings.
    
        The useradd* classes support the
        USERADD_PACKAGES,
        USERADD_PARAM,
        GROUPADD_PARAM,
        and
        GROUPMEMS_PARAM
        variables.
    
        The useradd-staticids class supports the addition
        of users or groups that have static user identification
        (uid) and group identification
        (gid) values.
    
        The default behavior of the OpenEmbedded build system for assigning
        uid and gid values when
        packages add users and groups during package install time is to
        add them dynamically.
        This works fine for programs that do not care what the values of the
        resulting users and groups become.
        In these cases, the order of the installation determines the final
        uid and gid values.
        However, if non-deterministic
        uid and gid values are a
        problem, you can override the default, dynamic application of these
        values by setting static values.
        When you set static values, the OpenEmbedded build system looks in
        BBPATH for
        files/passwd and files/group
        files for the values.
    
        To use static uid and gid
        values, you need to set some variables.
        See the
        USERADDEXTENSION,
        USERADD_UID_TABLES,
        USERADD_GID_TABLES,
        and
        USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC
        variables.
        You can also see the
        useradd
        class for additional information.
    
useradd-staticids
        class directly.
        You either enable or disable the class by setting the
        USERADDEXTENSION variable.
        If you enable or disable the class in a configured system,
        TMPDIR
        might contain incorrect uid and
        gid values.
        Deleting the TMPDIR directory
        will correct this condition.
    utility-tasks.bbclass¶
        The utility-tasks class provides support for
        various "utility" type tasks that are applicable to all recipes,
        such as
        do_clean and
        do_listtasks.
    
        This class is enabled by default because it is inherited by
        the
        base
        class.
    
utils.bbclass¶
        The utils class provides some useful Python
        functions that are typically used in inline Python expressions
        (e.g. ${@...}).
        One example use is for bb.utils.contains().
    
        This class is enabled by default because it is inherited by the
        base
        class.
    
vala.bbclass¶
        The vala class supports recipes that need to
        build software written using the Vala programming language.
    
waf.bbclass¶
        The waf class supports recipes that need to build
        software that uses the Waf build system.
        You can use the
        EXTRA_OECONF
        variable to specify additional configuration options to be passed on
        the Waf command line.
    
do_builddo_checkpkgdo_compiledo_compile_ptest_basedo_configuredo_configure_ptest_basedo_deploydo_distrodatado_fetchdo_imagedo_image_completedo_installdo_install_ptest_basedo_packagedo_package_qado_package_write_debdo_package_write_ipkdo_package_write_rpmdo_package_write_tardo_packagedatado_patchdo_populate_licdo_populate_sdkdo_populate_sysrootdo_rm_workdo_rm_work_alldo_unpackdo_compile_kernelmodulesdo_diffconfigdo_kernel_checkoutdo_kernel_configcheckdo_kernel_configmedo_kernel_link_vmlinuxdo_kernel_metadatado_menuconfigdo_savedefconfigdo_shared_workdirdo_sizecheckdo_stripdo_uboot_mkimagedo_validate_branches
    Tasks are units of execution for BitBake.
    Recipes (.bb files) use tasks to complete
    configuring, compiling, and packaging software.
    This chapter provides a reference of the tasks defined in the
    OpenEmbedded build system.
The following sections describe normal tasks associated with building a recipe.
do_build¶The default task for all recipes. This task depends on all other normal tasks required to build a recipe.
do_checkpkg¶Provides information about the recipe including its upstream version and status. The upstream version and status reveals whether or not a version of the recipe exists upstream and a status of not updated, updated, or unknown.
            The checkpkg task is included as part of the
            distrodata
            class.
        
            To build the checkpkg task, use the
            bitbake command with the "-c" option and
            task name:
            
     $ bitbake core-image-minimal -c checkpkg
            
            By default, the results are stored in
            $LOG_DIR
            (e.g. $BUILD_DIR/tmp/log).
        
do_compile¶
            Compiles the source in the compilation directory, which is pointed
            to by the
            B variable.
        
do_compile_ptest_base¶Compiles the runtime test suite included in the software being built.
do_configure¶Configures the source by enabling and disabling any build-time and configuration options for the software being built.
do_configure_ptest_base¶Configures the runtime test suite included in the software being built.
do_deploy¶
            Writes output files that are to be deployed to the deploy
            directory, which is defined by the
            DEPLOYDIR
            variable.
        
            The do_deploy task is a
            shared state (sstate) task, which means that the task can
            be accelerated through sstate use.
            Realize also that if the task is re-executed, any previous output
            is removed (i.e. "cleaned").
        
do_distrodata¶Provides information about the recipe.
            The distrodata task is included as part of the
            distrodata
            class.
        
            To build the distrodata task, use the
            bitbake command with the "-c" option and
            task name:
            
     $ bitbake core-image-minimal -c distrodata
            
            By default, the results are stored in
            $LOG_DIR
            (e.g. $BUILD_DIR/tmp/log).
        
do_fetch¶
            Fetches the source code.
            This task uses the
            SRC_URI
            variable and the argument's prefix to determine the correct
            fetcher module.
        
do_image¶
            Starts the image generation process.
            The do_image task runs after the
            OpenEmbedded build system has run the
            do_rootfs
            task during which packages are identified for installation into
            the image and the root filesystem is created, complete with
            post-processing.
        
            The do_image task performs pre-processing
            on the image through the
            IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND
            and dynamically generates supporting
            do_image_* tasks as needed.
        
For more information on image creation, see the "Image Generation" section.
do_image_complete¶
            Completes the image generation process.
            The do_image_complete task runs after the
            OpenEmbedded build system has run the
            do_image
            task during which image pre-processing occurs and through
            dynamically generated do_image_* tasks the
            image is constructed.
        
            The do_image_complete task performs
            post-processing on the image through the
            IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND.
        
For more information on image creation, see the "Image Generation" section.
do_install¶
            Copies files from the compilation directory, which is defined by
            the
            B variable,
            to a holding area defined by the
            D variable.
        
do_install_ptest_base¶Copies the runtime test suite files from the compilation directory to a holding area.
do_package¶Analyzes the content of the holding area and splits it into subsets based on available packages and files.
do_package_qa¶
            Runs QA checks on packaged files.
            For more information on these checks, see the
            insane
            class.
        
do_package_write_deb¶
            Creates Debian packages (i.e. *.deb files) and
            places them in the
            ${DEPLOY_DIR_DEB}
            directory in the package feeds area.
            For more information, see the
            "Package Feeds"
            section.
        
do_package_write_ipk¶
            Creates IPK packages (i.e. *.ipk files) and
            places them in the
            ${DEPLOY_DIR_IPK}
            directory in the package feeds area.
            For more information, see the
            "Package Feeds"
            section.
        
do_package_write_rpm¶
            Creates RPM packages (i.e. *.rpm files) and
            places them in the
            ${DEPLOY_DIR_RPM}
            directory in the package feeds area.
            For more information, see the
            "Package Feeds"
            section.
        
do_package_write_tar¶
            Creates tarballs and places them in the
            ${DEPLOY_DIR_TAR}
            directory in the package feeds area.
            For more information, see the
            "Package Feeds"
            section.
        
do_packagedata¶Creates package metadata used by the build system to generate the final packages.
do_patch¶Locates patch files and applies them to the source code. See the "Patching" section for more information.
do_populate_lic¶Writes license information for the recipe that is collected later when the image is constructed.
do_populate_sdk¶Creates the file and directory structure for an installable SDK. See the "SDK Generation" section for more information.
do_populate_sysroot¶
            Copies a subset of the files installed by the
            do_install
            task into the sysroot to make them available to other recipes.
            Files that would typically not be needed by other recipes at build
            time are skipped.
            Skipped files include files installed into
            /etc.
            For information on what files are copied, see the
            staging
            class.
        
            The do_populate_sysroot task is a
            shared state (sstate) task, which means that the task can
            be accelerated through sstate use.
            Realize also that if the task is re-executed, any previous output
            is removed (i.e. "cleaned").
        
do_rm_work¶
            Removes work files after the OpenEmbedded build system has
            finished with them.
            You can learn more by looking at the
            "rm_work.bbclass"
            section.
        
do_rm_work_all¶Top-level task for removing work files after the build system has finished with them.
do_unpack¶
            Unpacks the source code into a working directory pointed to
            by
            ${WORKDIR}.
            The
            S variable also
            plays a role in where unpacked source files ultimately reside.
            For more information on how source files are unpacked, see the
            "Source Fetching"
            section and the WORKDIR and
            S variable descriptions.
        
        These tasks are typically manually triggered (e.g. by using the
        bitbake -c command-line option):
    
do_clean¶
            Removes all output files for a target from the
            do_unpack
            task forward (i.e.
            do_unpack,
            do_configure,
            do_compile,
            do_install,
            and
            do_package).
        
You can run this task using BitBake as follows:
     $ bitbake -c clean recipe
            
            Running this task does not remove the
            sstate) cache
            files.
            Consequently, if no changes have been made and the recipe is
            rebuilt after cleaning, output files are simply restored from the
            sstate cache.
            If you want to remove the sstate cache files for the recipe,
            you need to use the
            do_cleansstate
            task instead (i.e. bitbake -c cleansstate recipe).
        
do_cleanall¶
            Removes all output files, shared state
            (sstate) cache, and
            downloaded source files for a target (i.e. the contents of
            DL_DIR).
            Essentially, the do_cleanall task is
            identical to the
            do_cleansstate
            task with the added removal of downloaded source files.
        
You can run this task using BitBake as follows:
     $ bitbake -c cleanall recipe
            
            Typically, you would not normally use the
            cleanall task.
            Do so only if you want to start fresh with the
            do_fetch
            task.
        
do_cleansstate¶
            Removes all output files and shared state
            (sstate)
            cache for a target.
            Essentially, the do_cleansstate task is
            identical to the
            do_clean
            task with the added removal of shared state
            (sstate) cache.
        
You can run this task using BitBake as follows:
     $ bitbake -c cleansstate recipe
            
            When you run the do_cleansstate task,
            the OpenEmbedded build system no longer uses any
            sstate.
            Consequently, building the recipe from scratch is guaranteed.
            
do_cleansstate task cannot remove
                sstate from a remote sstate mirror.
                If you need to build a target from scratch using remote
                mirrors, use the "-f" option as follows:
                
     $ bitbake -f -c do_cleansstate target
                
do_devshell¶
            Starts a shell whose environment is set up for
            development, debugging, or both.
            See the
            "Using a Development Shell"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more
            information about using devshell.
        
do_fetchall¶Fetches all remote sources required to build a target.
do_listtasks¶Lists all defined tasks for a target.
do_package_index¶Creates or updates the index in the Package Feeds area.
bitbake -c command-line option as
                are the other tasks in this section.
                Because this task is specifically for the
                package-index recipe,
                you run it using
                bitbake package-index.
            
The following tasks are applicable to image recipes.
do_bootimg¶
            Creates a bootable live image.
            See the
            IMAGE_FSTYPES
            variable for additional information on live image types.
        
do_bundle_initramfs¶
            Combines an initial RAM disk (initramfs) image and kernel
            together to form a single image.
            The
            CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE
            variable has some more information about these types of images.
        
do_rootfs¶Creates the root filesystem (file and directory structure) for an image. See the "Image Generation" section for more information on how the root filesystem is created.
do_testimage¶Boots an image and performs runtime tests within the image. For information on automatically testing images, see the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
do_testimage_auto¶
            Boots an image and performs runtime tests within the image
            immediately after it has been built.
            This task is enabled when you set
            TEST_IMAGE
            equal to "1".
        
For information on automatically testing images, see the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        The following tasks are applicable to kernel recipes.
        Some of these tasks (e.g. the
        do_menuconfig
        task) are also applicable to recipes that use
        Linux kernel style configuration such as the BusyBox recipe.
    
do_compile_kernelmodules¶Compiles loadable modules for the Linux kernel.
do_diffconfig¶
            Compares the old and new config files after running the
            do_menuconfig
            task for the kernel.
        
do_kernel_checkout¶Checks out source/meta branches for a linux-yocto style kernel.
do_kernel_configcheck¶Validates the kernel configuration for a linux-yocto style kernel.
do_kernel_configme¶Assembles the kernel configuration for a linux-yocto style kernel.
do_kernel_link_vmlinux¶
            Creates a symbolic link in
            arch/$arch/boot for vmlinux kernel
            images.
        
do_kernel_metadata¶
            Collects kernel metadata for a
            linux-yocto style kernel.
        
do_menuconfig¶
            Runs make menuconfig for the kernel.
            For information on menuconfig, see the
            "Using  menuconfig"
            section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
        
do_savedefconfig¶Creates a minimal Linux kernel configuration file.
do_shared_workdir¶Creates the shared working directory for the kernel.
do_sizecheck¶
            Checks the size of the kernel image against
            KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE
            when set.
        
do_strip¶Strips unneeded sections out of the Linux kernel image.
do_uboot_mkimage¶Creates a uImage file from the kernel for the U-Boot bootloader.
When building a recipe, the OpenEmbedded build system performs various QA checks on the output to ensure that common issues are detected and reported. Sometimes when you create a new recipe to build new software, it will build with no problems. When this is not the case, or when you have QA issues building any software, it could take a little time to resolve them.
While it is tempting to ignore a QA message or even to disable QA checks, it is best to try and resolve any reported QA issues. This chapter provides a list of the QA messages and brief explanations of the issues you could encounter so that you can properly resolve problems.
The next section provides a list of all QA error and warning messages based on a default configuration. Each entry provides the message or error form along with an explanation.
                    At the end of each message, the name of the associated
                    QA test (as listed in the
                    "insane.bbclass"
                    section) appears within square brackets.
                    
As mentioned, this list of error and warning messages is for QA checks only. The list does not cover all possible build errors or warnings you could encounter.
Because some QA checks are disabled by default, this list does not include all possible QA check errors and warnings.
                    
     <packagename>: <path> is using libexec please relocate to <libexecdir> [libexec]
                    
                
                    The specified package contains files in
                    /usr/libexec when the distro
                    configuration uses a different path for
                    <libexecdir>
                    By default, <libexecdir> is
                    $prefix/libexec.
                    However, this default can be changed (e.g.
                    ${libdir}).
                
                    
     package <packagename> contains bad RPATH <rpath> in file <file> [rpaths]
                    
                
                    The specified binary produced by the recipe contains dynamic
                    library load paths (rpaths) that contain build system paths
                    such as
                    TMPDIR,
                    which are incorrect for the target and could potentially
                    be a security issue.
                    Check for bad -rpath options being
                    passed to the linker in your
                    do_compile
                    log.
                    Depending on the build system used by the software being
                    built, there might be a configure option to disable rpath
                    usage completely within the build of the software.
                
                    
     <packagename>: <file> contains probably-redundant RPATH <rpath> [useless-rpaths]
                    
                
                    The specified binary produced by the recipe contains dynamic
                    library load paths (rpaths) that on a standard system are
                    searched by default by the linker (e.g.
                    /lib and /usr/lib).
                    While these paths will not cause any breakage, they do waste
                    space and are unnecessary.
                    Depending on the build system used by the software being
                    built, there might be a configure option to disable rpath
                    usage completely within the build of the software.
                
                    
     <packagename> requires <files>, but no providers in its RDEPENDS [file-rdeps]
                    
                
                    A file-level dependency has been identified from the
                    specified package on the specified files, but there is
                    no explicit corresponding entry in
                    RDEPENDS.
                    If particular files are required at runtime then
                    RDEPENDS should be declared in the
                    recipe to ensure the packages providing them are built.
                
                    
     <packagename1> rdepends on <packagename2>, but it isn't a build dependency? [build-deps]
                    
                
                    A runtime dependency exists between the two specified
                    packages, but there is nothing explicit within the recipe
                    to enable the OpenEmbedded build system to ensure that
                    dependency is satisfied.
                    This condition is usually triggered by an
                    RDEPENDS
                    value being added at the packaging stage rather than up
                    front, which is usually automatic based on the contents of
                    the package.
                    In most cases, you should change the recipe to add an
                    explicit RDEPENDS for the dependency.
                
                    
     non -dev/-dbg/nativesdk- package contains symlink .so: <packagename> path '<path>' [dev-so]
                    
                
                    Symlink .so files are for development
                    only, and should therefore go into the
                    -dev package.
                    This situation might occur if you add
                    *.so* rather than
                    *.so.* to a non-dev package.
                    Change
                    FILES
                    (and possibly
                    PACKAGES)
                    such that the specified .so file goes
                    into an appropriate -dev package.
                
                    
     <packagename>: found library in wrong location [libdir]
                    
                
                    The specified file may have been installed into an incorrect
                    (possibly hardcoded) installation path.
                    For example, this test will catch recipes that install
                    /lib/bar.so when
                    ${base_libdir} is "lib32".
                    Another example is when recipes install
                    /usr/lib64/foo.so when
                    ${libdir} is "/usr/lib".
                    False positives occasionally exist.
                    For these cases add "libdir" to
                    INSANE_SKIP
                    for the package.
                
                    
     non debug package contains .debug directory: <packagename> path <path> [debug-files]
                    
                
                    The specified package contains a
                    .debug directory, which should not
                    appear in anything but the -dbg
                    package.
                    This situation might occur if you add a path which contains
                    a .debug directory and do not
                    explicitly add the .debug directory
                    to the -dbg package.
                    If this is the case, add the .debug
                    directory explicitly to
                    FILES_${PN}-dbg.
                    See
                    FILES
                    for additional information on FILES.
                
                    
     Architecture did not match (<machine_arch> to <file_arch>) on <file> [arch]
                    
                
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system checks the
                    Executable and Linkable Format (ELF) type, bit size, and
                    endianness of any binaries to ensure they match the
                    target architecture.
                    This test fails if any binaries do not match the type since
                    there would be an incompatibility.
                    The test could indicate that the wrong compiler or compiler
                    options have been used.
                    Sometimes software, like bootloaders, might need to
                    bypass this check.
                    If the file you receive the error for is firmware
                    that is not intended to be executed within the target
                    operating system or is intended to run on a separate
                    processor within the device, you can add "arch" to
                    INSANE_SKIP
                    for the package.
                    Another option is to check the
                    do_compile
                    log and verify that the compiler options being used
                    are correct.
                
                    
     Bit size did not match (<machine_bits> to <file_bits>) <recipe> on <file> [arch]
                    
                
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system checks
                    the Executable and Linkable Format (ELF) type,
                    bit size, and endianness of any binaries to ensure
                    they match the target architecture.
                    This test fails if any binaries do not match the type since
                    there would be an incompatibility.
                    The test could indicate that the wrong compiler or compiler
                    options have been used.
                    Sometimes software, like bootloaders, might need to
                    bypass this check.
                    If the file you receive the error for is firmware that
                    is not intended to be executed within the target
                    operating system or is intended to run on a separate
                    processor within the device, you can add "arch" to
                    INSANE_SKIP
                    for the package.
                    Another option is to check the
                    do_compile
                    log and verify that the compiler options being used are
                    correct.
                
                    
     Endianness did not match (<machine_endianness> to <file_endianness>) on <file> [arch]
                    
                
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system checks
                    the Executable and Linkable Format (ELF) type, bit
                    size, and endianness of any binaries to ensure they
                    match the target architecture.
                    This test fails if any binaries do not match the type since
                    there would be an incompatibility.
                    The test could indicate that the wrong compiler or compiler
                    options have been used.
                    Sometimes software, like bootloaders, might need to
                    bypass this check.
                    If the file you receive the error for is firmware
                    that is not intended to be executed within the target
                    operating system or is intended to run on a separate
                    processor within the device, you can add "arch" to
                    INSANE_SKIP
                    for the package.
                    Another option is to check the
                    do_compile
                    log and verify that the compiler options being used
                    are correct.
                
                    
     ELF binary '<file>' has relocations in .text [textrel]
                    
                
                    The specified ELF binary contains relocations in its
                    .text sections.
                    This situation can result in a performance impact
                    at runtime.
                
                    Typically, the way to solve this performance issue is to
                    add "-fPIC" or "-fpic" to the compiler command-line
                    options.
                    For example, given software that reads
                    CFLAGS
                    when you build it, you could add the following to your
                    recipe:
                    
     CFLAGS_append = " -fPIC "
                    
For more information on text relocations at runtime, see http://www.akkadia.org/drepper/textrelocs.html.
                    
     No GNU_HASH in the elf binary: '<file>' [ldflags]
                    
                
                    This indicates that binaries produced when building the
                    recipe have not been linked with the
                    LDFLAGS
                    options provided by the build system.
                    Check to be sure that the LDFLAGS
                    variable is being passed to the linker command.
                    A common workaround for this situation is to pass in
                    LDFLAGS using
                    TARGET_CC_ARCH
                    within the recipe as follows:
                    
     TARGET_CC_ARCH += "${LDFLAGS}"
                    
                    
     Package <packagename> contains Xorg driver (<driver>) but no xorg-abi- dependencies [xorg-driver-abi]
                    
                
                    The specified package contains an Xorg driver, but does not
                    have a corresponding ABI package dependency.
                    The xserver-xorg recipe provides driver ABI names.
                    All drivers should depend on the ABI versions that they have
                    been built against.
                    Driver recipes that include
                    xorg-driver-input.inc or
                    xorg-driver-video.inc will
                    automatically get these versions.
                    Consequently, you should only need to explicitly add
                    dependencies to binary driver recipes.
                
                    
     The /usr/share/info/dir file is not meant to be shipped in a particular package. [infodir]
                    
                
                    The /usr/share/info/dir should not be
                    packaged.
                    Add the following line to your
                    do_install
                    task or to your do_install_append
                    within the recipe as follows:
                    
     rm ${D}${infodir}/dir
                    
                    
     Symlink <path> in <packagename> points to TMPDIR [symlink-to-sysroot]
                    
                
                    The specified symlink points into
                    TMPDIR
                    on the host.
                    Such symlinks will work on the host.
                    However, they are clearly invalid when running on
                    the target.
                    You should either correct the symlink to use a relative
                    path or remove the symlink.
                
                    
     <file> failed sanity test (workdir) in path <path> [la]
                    
                
                    The specified .la file contains
                    TMPDIR
                    paths.
                    Any .la file containing these paths
                    is incorrect since libtool adds the
                    correct sysroot prefix when using the files automatically
                    itself.
                
                    
     <packagename> rdepends on <debug_packagename> [debug-deps]
                    
                
                    A dependency exists between the specified non-dbg package
                    (i.e. a package whose name does not end in
                    -dbg) and a package that is a
                    dbg package.
                    The dbg packages contain
                    debug symbols and are brought in using several
                    different methods:
                    
                            Using the dbg-pkgs
                            IMAGE_FEATURES
                            value.
                            
                            Using
                            IMAGE_INSTALL.
                            
                            As a dependency of another
                            dbg package that was brought
                            in using one of the above methods.
                            
                    The dependency might have been automatically added
                    because the dbg package erroneously
                    contains files that it should not contain (e.g. a
                    non-symlink .so file) or it might
                    have been added manually (e.g. by adding to
                    RDEPENDS).
                
                    
     <packagename> rdepends on <dev_packagename> [dev-deps]
                    
                
                    A dependency exists between the specified non-dev package
                    (a package whose name does not end in
                    -dev) and a package that is a
                    dev package.
                    The dev packages contain development
                    headers and are usually brought in using several different
                    methods:
                    
                            Using the dev-pkgs
                            IMAGE_FEATURES
                            value.
                            
                            Using
                            IMAGE_INSTALL.
                            
                            As a dependency of another
                            dev package that was brought
                            in using one of the above methods.
                            
                    The dependency might have been automatically added (because
                    the dev package erroneously contains
                    files that it should not have (e.g. a non-symlink
                    .so file) or it might have been added
                    manually (e.g. by adding to
                    RDEPENDS).
                
                    
     <var>_<packagename> is invalid: <comparison> (<value>)   only comparisons <, =, >, <=, and >= are allowed [dep-cmp]
                    
                
                    If you are adding a versioned dependency relationship to one
                    of the dependency variables
                    (RDEPENDS,
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    RSUGGESTS,
                    RPROVIDES,
                    RREPLACES,
                    or
                    RCONFLICTS),
                    you must only use the named comparison operators.
                    Change the versioned dependency values you are adding
                    to match those listed in the message.
                
                    
     <recipename>: The compile log indicates that host include and/or library paths were used. Please check the log '<logfile>' for more information. [compile-host-path]
                    
                
                    The log for the
                    do_compile
                    task indicates that paths on the host were searched
                    for files, which is not appropriate when cross-compiling.
                    Look for "is unsafe for cross-compilation" or "CROSS COMPILE
                    Badness" in the specified log file.
                
                    
     <recipename>: The install log indicates that host include and/or library paths were used. Please check the log '<logfile>' for more information. [install-host-path]
                    
                
                    The log for the
                    do_install
                    task indicates that paths on the host were searched
                    for files, which is not appropriate when cross-compiling.
                    Look for "is unsafe for cross-compilation"
                    or "CROSS COMPILE Badness" in the specified log file.
                
                    
     This autoconf log indicates errors, it looked at host include and/or library paths while determining system capabilities. Rerun configure task after fixing this. The path was '<path>'
                    
                
                    The log for the
                    do_configure
                    task indicates that paths on the host were searched
                    for files, which is not appropriate when cross-compiling.
                    Look for "is unsafe for cross-compilation" or
                    "CROSS COMPILE Badness" in the specified log file.
                
                    
     <packagename> doesn't match the [a-z0-9.+-]+ regex [pkgname]
                    
                
                    The convention within the OpenEmbedded build system
                    (sometimes enforced by the package manager itself) is to
                    require that package names are all lower case
                    and to allow a restricted set of characters.
                    If your recipe name does not match this, or you add
                    packages to
                    PACKAGES
                    that do not conform to the convention, then you
                    will receive this error.
                    Rename your recipe.
                    Or, if you have added a non-conforming package name to
                    PACKAGES, change the package name
                    appropriately.
                
                    
     <recipe>: configure was passed unrecognized options: <options> [unknown-configure-option]
                    
                
                    The configure script is reporting that the specified
                    options are unrecognized.
                    This situation could be because the options
                    were previously valid but have been removed from the
                    configure script.
                    Or, there was a mistake when the options were added
                    and there is another option that should be used instead.
                    If you are unsure, consult the upstream build
                    documentation, the
                    ./configure --help output,
                    and the upstream change log or release notes.
                    Once you have worked out what the appropriate
                    change is, you can update
                    EXTRA_OECONF
                    or the individual
                    PACKAGECONFIG
                    option values accordingly.
                
                    
     Recipe <recipefile> has PN of "<recipename>" which is in OVERRIDES, this can result in unexpected behavior. [pn-overrides]
                    
                
                    The specified recipe has a name
                    (PN)
                    value that appears in
                    OVERRIDES.
                    If a recipe is named such that its PN
                    value matches something already in
                    OVERRIDES (e.g. PN
                    happens to be the same as
                    MACHINE
                    or
                    DISTRO),
                    it can have unexpected consequences.
                    For example, assignments such as
                    FILES_${PN} = "xyz" effectively
                    turn into FILES = "xyz".
                    Rename your recipe (or if PN is being
                    set explicitly, change the PN value) so
                    that the conflict does not occur.
                    See
                    FILES
                    for additional information.
                
                    
     <recipefile>: Variable <variable> is set as not being package specific, please fix this. [pkgvarcheck]
                    
                
                    Certain variables
                    (RDEPENDS,
                    RRECOMMENDS,
                    RSUGGESTS,
                    RCONFLICTS,
                    RPROVIDES,
                    RREPLACES,
                    FILES,
                    pkg_preinst,
                    pkg_postinst,
                    pkg_prerm,
                    pkg_postrm, and
                    ALLOW_EMPTY)
                    should always be set specific to a package (i.e. they
                    should be set with a package name override such as
                    RDEPENDS_${PN} = "value" rather than
                    RDEPENDS = "value").
                    If you receive this error, correct any assignments to these
                    variables within your recipe.
                
                    
     File '<file>' from <recipename> was already stripped, this will prevent future debugging! [already-stripped]
                    
                
                    Produced binaries have already been stripped prior to the
                    build system extracting debug symbols.
                    It is common for upstream software projects to default to
                    stripping debug symbols for output binaries.
                    In order for debugging to work on the target using
                    -dbg packages, this stripping must be
                    disabled.
                
Depending on the build system used by the software being built, disabling this stripping could be as easy as specifying an additional configure option. If not, disabling stripping might involve patching the build scripts. In the latter case, look for references to "strip" or "STRIP", or the "-s" or "-S" command-line options being specified on the linker command line (possibly through the compiler command line if preceded with "-Wl,").
-dbg package,
                        it will then strip the symbols from the binaries.
                    
                    
     <packagename> is listed in PACKAGES multiple times, this leads to packaging errors. [packages-list]
                    
                
                    Package names must appear only once in the
                    PACKAGES
                    variable.
                    You might receive this error if you are attempting to add a
                    package to PACKAGES that is
                    already in the variable's value.
                
                    
     FILES variable for package <packagename> contains '//' which is invalid. Attempting to fix this but you should correct the metadata. [files-invalid]
                    
                
                    The string "//" is invalid in a Unix path.
                    Correct all occurrences where this string appears in a
                    FILES
                    variable so that there is only a single "/".
                
                    
      <recipename>: Files/directories were installed but not shipped [installed-vs-shipped]
                    
                
                    Files have been installed within the
                    do_install
                    task but have not been included in any package by way of the
                    FILES
                    variable.
                    Files that do not appear in any package cannot be present in
                    an image later on in the build process.
                    You need to do one of the following:
                    
                            Add the files to FILES for the
                            package you want them to appear in (e.g.
                            FILES_${PN} for the main
                            package).
                            
                            Delete the files at the end of the
                            do_install task if the files
                            are not needed in any package.
                            
                    
     <oldpackage>-<oldpkgversion> was registered as shlib provider for <library>, changing it to <newpackage>-<newpkgversion> because it was built later
                    
                
                    This message means that both
                    <oldpackage> and
                    <newpackage> provide the specified
                    shared library.
                    You can expect this message when a recipe has been renamed.
                    However, if that is not the case, the message might indicate
                    that a private version of a library is being erroneously
                    picked up as the provider for a common library.
                    If that is the case, you should add the library's
                    .so file name to
                    PRIVATE_LIBS
                    in the recipe that provides
                    the private version of the library.
                
        You can configure the QA checks globally so that specific check
        failures either raise a warning or an error message, using the
        WARN_QA and
        ERROR_QA
        variables, respectively.
        You can also disable checks within a particular recipe using
        INSANE_SKIP.
        For information on how to work with the QA checks, see the
        "insane.bbclass"
        section.
        
        The OpenEmbedded build system provides several example
        images to satisfy different needs.
        When you issue the bitbake command you provide a “top-level” recipe
        that essentially begins the build for the type of image you want.
    
local.conf file before using the BitBake
        command to build the minimal or base image:
        
     1. Comment out the EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES line
     2. Set INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0"
        
        From within the poky Git repository, you can use
        the following command to display the list of directories within the
        Source Directory
        that containe image recipe files:
        
     $ ls meta*/recipes*/images/*.bb
        
Following is a list of supported recipes:
build-appliance-image:
                An example virtual machine that contains all the pieces required to
                run builds using the build system as well as the build system itself.
                You can boot and run the image using either the
                VMware Player
                or VMware Workstation.
                For more information on this image, see the
                Build Appliance page on
                the Yocto Project website.
core-image-base:
                A console-only image that fully supports the target device hardware.
core-image-clutter:
                An image with support for the Open GL-based toolkit Clutter, which enables development of
                rich and animated graphical user interfaces.
core-image-directfb:
                An image that uses directfb instead of X11.
                
core-image-full-cmdline:
                A console-only image with more full-featured Linux system
                functionality installed.
core-image-lsb:
                An image that conforms to the Linux Standard Base (LSB)
                specification.
                This image requires a distribution configuration that
                enables LSB compliance (e.g. poky-lsb).
                If you build core-image-lsb without that
                configuration, the image will not be LSB-compliant.
                
core-image-lsb-dev:
                A core-image-lsb image that is suitable for development work
                using the host.
                The image includes headers and libraries you can use in a host development
                environment.
                This image requires a distribution configuration that
                enables LSB compliance (e.g. poky-lsb).
                If you build core-image-lsb-dev without that
                configuration, the image will not be LSB-compliant.
                
core-image-lsb-sdk:
                A core-image-lsb that includes everything in
                the cross-toolchain but also includes development headers and libraries
                to form a complete standalone SDK.
                This image requires a distribution configuration that
                enables LSB compliance (e.g. poky-lsb).
                If you build core-image-lsb-sdk without that
                configuration, the image will not be LSB-compliant.
                This image is suitable for development using the target.
core-image-minimal:
                A small image just capable of allowing a device to boot.
core-image-minimal-dev:
                A core-image-minimal image suitable for development work
                using the host.
                The image includes headers and libraries you can use in a host development
                environment.
                
core-image-minimal-initramfs:
                A core-image-minimal image that has the Minimal RAM-based
                Initial Root Filesystem (initramfs) as part of the kernel,
                which allows the system to find the first “init” program more efficiently.
                See the
                PACKAGE_INSTALL
                variable for additional information helpful when working with
                initramfs images.
                
core-image-minimal-mtdutils:
                A core-image-minimal image that has support
                for the Minimal MTD Utilities, which let the user interact with the
                MTD subsystem in the kernel to perform operations on flash devices.
                
core-image-rt:
                A core-image-minimal image plus a real-time test suite and
                tools appropriate for real-time use.
core-image-rt-sdk:
                A core-image-rt image that includes everything in
                the cross-toolchain.
                The image also includes development headers and libraries to form a complete
                stand-alone SDK and is suitable for development using the target.
                
core-image-sato:
                An image with Sato support, a mobile environment and visual style that works well
                with mobile devices.
                The image supports X11 with a Sato theme and applications such as
                a terminal, editor, file manager, media player, and so forth.
                
core-image-sato-dev:
                A core-image-sato image suitable for development
                using the host.
                The image includes libraries needed to build applications on the device itself,
                testing and profiling tools, and debug symbols.
                This image was formerly core-image-sdk.
                
core-image-sato-sdk:
                A core-image-sato image that includes everything in
                the cross-toolchain.
                The image also includes development headers and libraries to form a complete standalone SDK
                and is suitable for development using the target.
core-image-testmaster:
                A "master" image designed to be used for automated runtime testing.
                Provides a "known good" image that is deployed to a separate
                partition so that you can boot into it and use it to deploy a
                second image to be tested.
                You can find more information about runtime testing in the
                "Performing Automated Runtime Testing"
                section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
core-image-testmaster-initramfs:
                A RAM-based Initial Root Filesystem (initramfs) image tailored for
                use with the core-image-testmaster image.
                
core-image-weston:
                A very basic Wayland image with a terminal.
                This image provides the Wayland protocol libraries and the
                reference Weston compositor.
                For more information, see the
                "Wayland" section.
                
core-image-x11:
                A very basic X11 image with a terminal.
                
This chapter provides a reference of shipped machine and distro features you can include as part of your image, a reference on image features you can select, and a reference on feature backfilling.
        Features provide a mechanism for working out which packages
        should be included in the generated images.
        Distributions can select which features they want to support through the
        DISTRO_FEATURES
        variable, which is set or appended to in a distribution's configuration file such as
        poky.conf,
        poky-tiny.conf,
        poky-lsb.conf and so forth.
        Machine features are set in the
        MACHINE_FEATURES
        variable, which is set in the machine configuration file and
        specifies the hardware features for a given machine.
    
These two variables combine to work out which kernel modules, utilities, and other packages to include. A given distribution can support a selected subset of features so some machine features might not be included if the distribution itself does not support them.
        One method you can use to determine which recipes are checking to see if a
        particular feature is contained or not is to grep through
        the Metadata
        for the feature.
        Here is an example that discovers the recipes whose build is potentially
        changed based on a given feature:
        
     $ cd poky
     $ git grep 'contains.*MACHINE_FEATURES.*feature'
        
            The items below are features you can use with
            MACHINE_FEATURES.
            Features do not have a one-to-one correspondence to packages, and they can
            go beyond simply controlling the installation of a package or packages.
            Sometimes a feature can influence how certain recipes are built.
            For example, a feature might determine whether a particular configure option
            is specified within the
            do_configure
            task for a particular recipe.
        
This feature list only represents features as shipped with the Yocto Project metadata:
acpi: Hardware has ACPI (x86/x86_64 only)
alsa: Hardware has ALSA audio drivers
apm: Hardware uses APM (or APM emulation)
bluetooth: Hardware has integrated BT
efi: Support for booting through EFI
ext2: Hardware HDD or Microdrive
irda: Hardware has IrDA support
keyboard: Hardware has a keyboard
pcbios: Support for booting through BIOS
pci: Hardware has a PCI bus
pcmcia: Hardware has PCMCIA or CompactFlash sockets
phone: Mobile phone (voice) support
qvga: Machine has a QVGA (320x240) display
rtc: Machine has a Real-Time Clock
screen: Hardware has a screen
serial: Hardware has serial support (usually RS232)
touchscreen: Hardware has a touchscreen
usbgadget: Hardware is USB gadget device capable
usbhost: Hardware is USB Host capable
vfat: FAT file system support
wifi: Hardware has integrated WiFi
            The items below are features you can use with
            DISTRO_FEATURES
            to enable features across your distribution.
            Features do not have a one-to-one correspondence to packages,
            and they can go beyond simply controlling the installation of a
            package or packages.
            In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature translates to
            the appropriate option supplied to the configure script during the
            do_configure
            task for the recipes that optionally
            support the feature.
        
            Some distro features are also machine features.
            These select features make sense to be controlled both at
            the machine and distribution configuration level.
            See the
            COMBINED_FEATURES
            variable for more information.
        
This list only represents features as shipped with the Yocto Project metadata:
alsa: Include ALSA support (OSS compatibility kernel modules installed if available).
bluetooth: Include bluetooth support (integrated BT only).
bluez5: Include BlueZ Version 5, which provides core Bluetooth layers and protocols support.
DISTRO FEATURES
                        variable includes "bluetooth", which causes bluez5
                        to be backfilled in for bluetooth support.
                        If you do not want bluez5 backfilled and would rather
                        use bluez4, you need to use the
                        DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
                        variable as follows:
                        
     DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED = "bluez5"
                        
                        Setting this variable tells the OpenEmbedded build
                        system that you have considered but ruled
                        out using the bluez5 feature and that bluez4 will be
                        used.
                    
cramfs: Include CramFS support.
directfb: Include DirectFB support.
ext2: Include tools for supporting for devices with internal HDD/Microdrive for storing files (instead of Flash only devices).
ipsec: Include IPSec support.
ipv6: Include IPv6 support.
irda: Include IrDA support.
keyboard: Include keyboard support (e.g. keymaps will be loaded during boot).
nfs: Include NFS client support (for mounting NFS exports on device).
opengl: Include the Open Graphics Library, which is a cross-language, multi-platform application programming interface used for rendering two and three-dimensional graphics.
pci: Include PCI bus support.
pcmcia: Include PCMCIA/CompactFlash support.
ppp: Include PPP dialup support.
ptest: Enables building the package tests where supported by individual recipes. For more information on package tests, see the "Testing Packages With ptest" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
smbfs: Include SMB networks client support (for mounting Samba/Microsoft Windows shares on device).
systemd: Include support
                    for this init manager, which is a full
                    replacement of for init with parallel
                    starting of services, reduced shell overhead, and other
                    features.
                    This init manager is used by many
                    distributions.
usbgadget: Include USB Gadget Device support (for USB networking/serial/storage).
usbhost: Include USB Host support (allows to connect external keyboard, mouse, storage, network etc).
wayland: Include the Wayland display server protocol and the library that supports it.
wifi: Include WiFi support (integrated only).
x11: Include the X server and libraries.
            The contents of images generated by the OpenEmbedded build system
            can be controlled by the
            IMAGE_FEATURES
            and
            EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES
            variables that you typically configure in your image recipes.
            Through these variables, you can add several different
            predefined packages such as development utilities or packages with
            debug information needed to investigate application problems or
            profile applications.
        
The following image features are available for all images:
allow-empty-password: Allows Dropbear and OpenSSH to accept root logins and logins from accounts having an empty password string.
dbg-pkgs: Installs debug symbol packages for all packages installed in a given image.
debug-tweaks: Makes an image suitable for development (e.g. allows root logins without passwords and enables post-installation logging). See the 'allow-empty-password', 'empty-root-password', and 'post-install-logging' features in this list for additional information.
dev-pkgs: Installs development packages (headers and extra library links) for all packages installed in a given image.
doc-pkgs: Installs documentation packages for all packages installed in a given image.
empty-root-password: Sets the root password to an empty string, which allows logins with a blank password.
package-management: Installs package management tools and preserves the package manager database.
post-install-logging:
                    Enables logging postinstall script runs to
                    the /var/log/postinstall.log file
                    on first boot of the image on the target system.
                    
ptest-pkgs: Installs ptest packages for all ptest-enabled recipes.
read-only-rootfs: Creates an image whose root filesystem is read-only. See the "Creating a Read-Only Root Filesystem" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more information.
splash:
                    Enables showing a splash screen during boot.
                    By default, this screen is provided by
                    psplash, which does allow
                    customization.
                    If you prefer to use an alternative splash screen package,
                    you can do so by setting the SPLASH
                    variable to a different package name (or names) within the
                    image recipe or at the distro configuration level.
                    
staticdev-pkgs:
                    Installs static development packages, which are
                    static libraries (i.e. *.a files), for
                    all packages installed in a given image.
                    
            Some image features are available only when you inherit the
            core-image
            class.
            The current list of these valid features is as follows:
            
eclipse-debug: Provides Eclipse remote debugging support.
hwcodecs: Installs hardware acceleration codecs.
nfs-server: Installs an NFS server.
perf:
                    Installs profiling tools such as
                    perf, systemtap,
                    and LTTng.
                    For general information on user-space tools, see the
                    Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
                    
ssh-server-dropbear: Installs the Dropbear minimal SSH server.
ssh-server-openssh:
                    Installs the OpenSSH SSH server, which is more
                    full-featured than Dropbear.
                    Note that if both the OpenSSH SSH server and the Dropbear
                    minimal SSH server are present in
                    IMAGE_FEATURES, then OpenSSH will take
                    precedence and Dropbear will not be installed.
                    
tools-debug:
                    Installs debugging tools such as
                    strace and gdb.
                    For information on GDB, see the
                    "Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) Remotely"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                    For information on tracing and profiling, see the
                    Yocto Project Profiling and Tracing Manual.
                    
tools-sdk: Installs a full SDK that runs on the device.
tools-testapps: Installs device testing tools (e.g. touchscreen debugging).
x11: Installs the X server.
x11-base: Installs the X server with a minimal environment.
x11-sato: Installs the OpenedHand Sato environment.
            Sometimes it is necessary in the OpenEmbedded build system to extend
            MACHINE_FEATURES
            or DISTRO_FEATURES
            to control functionality that was previously enabled and not able
            to be disabled.
            For these cases, we need to add an
            additional feature item to appear in one of these variables,
            but we do not want to force developers who have existing values
            of the variables in their configuration to add the new feature
            in order to retain the same overall level of functionality.
            Thus, the OpenEmbedded build system has a mechanism to
            automatically "backfill" these added features into existing
            distro or machine configurations.
            You can see the list of features for which this is done by
            finding the
            DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL
            and MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL
            variables in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file.
        
            Because such features are backfilled by default into all
            configurations as described in the previous paragraph, developers
            who wish to disable the new features need to be able to selectively
            prevent the backfilling from occurring.
            They can do this by adding the undesired feature or features to the
            DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
            or MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
            variables for distro features and machine features respectively.
        
Here are two examples to help illustrate feature backfilling:
The "pulseaudio" distro feature option:
                    Previously, PulseAudio support was enabled within the Qt and
                    GStreamer frameworks.
                    Because of this, the feature is backfilled and thus
                    enabled for all distros through the
                    DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    variable in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file.
                    However, your distro needs to disable the feature.
                    You can disable the feature without affecting
                    other existing distro configurations that need PulseAudio support
                    by adding "pulseaudio" to
                    DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
                    in your distro's .conf file.
                    Adding the feature to this variable when it also
                    exists in the DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    variable prevents the build system from adding the feature to
                    your configuration's DISTRO_FEATURES, effectively disabling
                    the feature for that particular distro.
The "rtc" machine feature option:
                    Previously, real time clock (RTC) support was enabled for all
                    target devices.
                    Because of this, the feature is backfilled and thus enabled
                    for all machines through the MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    variable in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file.
                    However, your target device does not have this capability.
                    You can disable RTC support for your device without
                    affecting other machines that need RTC support
                    by adding the feature to your machine's
                    MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED
                    list in the machine's .conf file.
                    Adding the feature to this variable when it also
                    exists in the MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    variable prevents the build system from adding the feature to
                    your configuration's MACHINE_FEATURES, effectively
                    disabling RTC support for that particular machine.
This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build system and gives an overview of their function and contents.
A B C D E F G H I K L M O P R S T U W X
Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi").
                   ABI extensions are set in the machine include files.
                   For example, the
                   meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc
                   file sets the following extension:
                   
     ABIEXTENSION = "eabi"
                   
                   Specifies if an output package should still be produced if it is empty.
                   By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages.
                   This default behavior can cause issues when there is an
                   RDEPENDS or
                   some other hard runtime requirement on the existence of the package.
                
Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in conjunction with a package name override, as in:
     ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1"
     ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1"
     ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1"
                   
Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages. When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the commands can co-exist.
                    To use the variable, list out the package's commands
                    that also exist as part of another package.
                    For example, if the busybox package
                    has four commands that also exist as part of another
                    package, you identify them as follows:
                    
     ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket"
                    
                    For more information on the alternatives system, see the
                    "update-alternatives.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands
                    to actual locations.
                    For example, if the bracket command
                    provided by the busybox package is
                    duplicated through another package, you must use the
                    ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME variable to
                    specify the actual location:
                    
     ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/["
                    
                    In this example, the binary for the
                    bracket command (i.e.
                    [) from the
                    busybox package resides in
                    /usr/bin/.
                    
ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME is not
                        defined, it defaults to
                        ${bindir}/name.
                    
                    For more information on the alternatives system, see the
                    "update-alternatives.bbclass"
                    section.
                
Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single default regardless of the command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms:
     ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority"
     ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority"
     ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority"
                    
                    For more information on the alternatives system, see the
                    "update-alternatives.bbclass"
                    section.
                
Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms:
     ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target"
     ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target"
     ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target"
                    
                            If ALTERNATIVE_TARGET is not
                            defined, it inherits the value from the
                            ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME
                            variable.
                        
                            If ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME and
                            ALTERNATIVE_TARGET are the
                            same, the target for
                            ALTERNATIVE_TARGET
                            has ".{BPN}" appended to it.
                        
                            Finally, if the file referenced has not been
                            renamed, the alternatives system will rename it to
                            avoid the need to rename alternative files in the
                            do_install
                            task while
                            retaining support for the command if necessary.
                        
                    For more information on the alternatives system, see the
                    "update-alternatives.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    An override list of append strings for each
                    LABEL.
                
                    See the
                    grub-efi
                    class for more information on how this variable is used.
                
                    The minimal command and arguments used to run
                    ar.
                
                    When used with the
                    archiver
                    class, determines the type of information used to create
                    a released archive.
                    You can use this variable to create archives of patched
                    source, original source, configured source, and so forth
                    by employing the following variable flags (varflags):
                    
     ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"                 # Uses original (unpacked) source
                                                     # files.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched"                  # Uses patched source files. This is
                                                     # the default.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured"               # Uses configured source files.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1"                       # Uses patches between do_unpack and
                                                     # do_patch.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..."  # Lists files and directories to
                                                     # exclude from diff.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1"                   # Uses environment data.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1"                     # Uses recipe and include files.
     ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1"                       # Uses RPM package files.
                    
                    For information on how the variable works, see the
                    meta/classes/archiver.bbclass file
                    in the
                    Source Directory.
                
The minimal command and arguments used to run the assembler.
                    Lists recipe names
                    (PN
                    values) BitBake does not attempt to build.
                    Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already been
                    built.
                
                    In OpenEmbedded Core, ASSUME_PROVIDED
                    mostly specifies native tools that should not be built.
                    An example is git-native, which when
                    specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be
                    used rather than building git-native.
                
                    Provides additional shlibs provider
                    mapping information, which adds to or overwrites the
                    information provided automatically by the system.
                    Separate multiple entries using spaces.
                
                    As an example, use the following form to add an
                    shlib provider of
                    shlibname in
                    packagename with the optional
                    version:
                    
     shlibname:packagename[_version]
                    
                    Here is an example that adds a shared library named
                    libEGL.so.1 as being provided by
                    the libegl-implementation package:
                    
     ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation"
                    
The email address used to contact the original author or authors in order to send patches and forward bugs.
                    When the
                    debian
                    class is inherited, which is the default behavior,
                    AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS specifies which
                    packages should be checked for libraries and renamed
                    according to Debian library package naming.
                
The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe.
                    Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux
                    bootloader.
                    You must set this variable in your recipe.
                    The
                    syslinux
                    class checks this variable.
                
                    When
                    SRCREV
                    is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to use
                    the latest source revision in the repository.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
                    
                    If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest
                    version of software, you need to be sure
                    PV
                    contains
                    ${SRCPV}.
                    For example, suppose you have a kernel recipe that
                    inherits the
                    kernel class
                    and you use the previous statement.
                    In this example, ${SRCPV} does not
                    automatically get into PV.
                    Consequently, you need to change PV
                    in your recipe so that it does contain
                    ${SRCPV}.
                
The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build system.
The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with each other in a Multilib configuration.
To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the "=" operator. See the "Basic Syntax" section in the BitBake User Manual for more information.
                    The directory within the
                    Build Directory
                    in which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated
                    objects during a recipe's build process.
                    By default, this directory is the same as the S
                    directory, which is defined as:
                    
     S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}/"
                    
                    You can separate the (S) directory
                    and the directory pointed to by the B
                    variable.
                    Most Autotools-based recipes support separating these
                    directories.
                    The build system defaults to using separate directories for
                    gcc and some kernel recipes.
                
                    Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install.
                    Recommended-only packages are packages installed only
                    through the
                    RRECOMMENDS
                    variable.
                    You can prevent any of these "recommended" packages from
                    being installed by listing them with the
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS variable:
                    
     BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
                    
                    You can set this variable globally in your
                    local.conf file or you can attach it to
                    a specific image recipe by using the recipe name override:
                    
     BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name"
                    
                    It is important to realize that if you choose to not install
                    packages using this variable and some other packages are
                    dependent on them (i.e. listed in a recipe's
                    RDEPENDS
                    variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your
                    request and will install the packages to avoid dependency
                    errors.
                
Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
                    See the
                    NO_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    and the
                    PACKAGE_EXCLUDE
                    variables for related information.
                
                    The library directory name for the CPU or Application
                    Binary Interface (ABI) tune.
                    The BASE_LIB applies only in the
                    Multilib context.
                    See the
                    "Combining Multiple Versions of Library Files into One Image"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for
                    information on Multilib.
                
                    The BASE_LIB variable is defined in
                    the machine include files in the
                    Source Directory.
                    If Multilib is not being used, the value defaults to "lib".
                
Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default value is "${TMPDIR}/work".
Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed to use to obtain the required source code. Following are considerations surrounding this variable:
                            This host list is only used if
                            BB_NO_NETWORK is either not
                            set or set to "0".
                            
                            Limited support for wildcard matching against the
                            beginning of host names exists.
                            For example, the following setting matches
                            git.gnu.org,
                            ftp.gnu.org, and
                            foo.git.gnu.org.
                            
     BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org"
                            
Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug.
Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure.
                    Using BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS in
                    conjunction with
                    PREMIRRORS
                    is very useful.
                    Adding the host you want to use to
                    PREMIRRORS results in the source code
                    being fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising
                    an error when a host that is not allowed is in a
                    SRC_URI
                    statement.
                    This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the
                    host listed in SRC_URI after a
                    successful fetch from the
                    PREMIRRORS occurs.
                
                    Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append
                    file (.bbappend) has no
                    corresponding recipe file (.bb).
                    This condition often occurs when layers get out of sync
                    (e.g. oe-core bumps a
                    recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the
                    other layer has not been updated to the new version
                    of the recipe yet).
                
The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your changes are no longer being applied.
                    You can change the default behavior by setting this
                    variable to "1", "yes", or "true"
                    in your local.conf file, which is
                    located in the
                    Build Directory:
                    Here is an example:
                    
     BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1"
                    
Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows you to control the build based on these parameters.
                    Disk space monitoring is disabled by default.
                    To enable monitoring, add the BB_DISKMON_DIRS
                    variable to your conf/local.conf file found in the
                    Build Directory.
                    Use the following form:
                    
     BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]"
     where:
        action is:
           ABORT:     Immediately abort the build when
                      a threshold is broken.
           STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently
                      executing tasks have finished when
                      a threshold is broken.
           WARN:      Issue a warning but continue the
                      build when a threshold is broken.
                      Subsequent warnings are issued as
                      defined by the
                      BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL variable,
                      which must be defined in the
                      conf/local.conf file.
        dir is:
           Any directory you choose. You can specify one or
           more directories to monitor by separating the
           groupings with a space.  If two directories are
           on the same device, only the first directory
           is monitored.
        threshold is:
           Either the minimum available disk space,
           the minimum number of free inodes, or
           both.  You must specify at least one.  To
           omit one or the other, simply omit the value.
           Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes,
           Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do
           not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by
           default.  Do not use GB, MB, or KB.
                    
Here are some examples:
     BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
     BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G"
     BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K"
                    
                    The first example works only if you also provide
                    the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL variable
                    in the conf/local.conf.
                    This example causes the build system to immediately
                    abort when either the disk space in ${TMPDIR} drops
                    below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops below
                    100 Kbytes.
                    Because two directories are provided with the variable, the
                    build system also issue a
                    warning when the disk space in the
                    ${SSTATE_DIR} directory drops
                    below 1 Gbyte or the number of free inodes drops
                    below 100 Kbytes.
                    Subsequent warnings are issued during intervals as
                    defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL
                    variable.
                
                    The second example stops the build after all currently
                    executing tasks complete when the minimum disk space
                    in the ${TMPDIR}
                    directory drops below 1 Gbyte.
                    No disk monitoring occurs for the free inodes in this case.
                
                    The final example immediately aborts the build when the
                    number of free inodes in the ${TMPDIR} directory
                    drops below 100 Kbytes.
                    No disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs
                    in this case.
                
                    Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals.
                    To set these intervals, define the variable in your
                    conf/local.conf file in the
                    Build Directory.
                
                    If you are going to use the
                    BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL variable, you must
                    also use the
                    BB_DISKMON_DIRS variable
                    and define its action as "WARN".
                    During the build, subsequent warnings are issued each time
                    disk space or number of free inodes further reduces by
                    the respective interval.
                
                    If you do not provide a BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL
                    variable and you do use BB_DISKMON_DIRS with
                    the "WARN" action, the disk monitoring interval defaults to
                    the following:
                    
     BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
                    
When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the following form:
     BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval"
     where:
        disk_space_interval is:
           An interval of memory expressed in either
           G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
           respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
        disk_inode_interval is:
           An interval of free inodes expressed in either
           G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
           respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
                    
Here is an example:
     BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
     BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
                    
                    These variables cause the OpenEmbedded build system to
                    issue subsequent warnings each time the available
                    disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number
                    of free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the
                    ${SSTATE_DIR} directory.
                    Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time
                    a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning
                    (i.e. 1 Gbytes and 100 Kbytes).
                
                    Causes tarballs of the Git repositories, including the
                    Git metadata, to be placed in the
                    DL_DIR
                    directory.
                
For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of the Git repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build system.
     BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
                    
                    Set this variable in your local.conf
                    file in the
                    Build Directory.
                
                    The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel
                    at any one time.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures
                    this variable to be equal to the number of cores on the
                    build system.
                    For example, a system with a dual core processor that
                    also uses hyper-threading causes the
                    BB_NUMBER_THREADS variable to default
                    to "4".
                
                    For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not
                    have to override this variable to gain optimal parallelism
                    during builds.
                    However, if you have very large systems that employ
                    multiple physical CPUs, you might want to make sure the
                    BB_NUMBER_THREADS variable is not
                    set higher than "20".
                
For more information on speeding up builds, see the "Speeding Up the Build" section.
                    Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the software.
                    Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like quilt-native,
                    which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build system;
                    "crosses" such as gcc-cross,
                    which is a compiler built to run on the build machine but produces binaries
                    that run on the target MACHINE;
                    "nativesdk", which targets the SDK machine instead of MACHINE;
                    and "mulitlibs" in the form "multilib:multilib_name".
                
To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe:
     BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk"
     BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name"
                    
                    Lists the names of configured layers.
                    These names are used to find the other BBFILE_*
                    variables.
                    Typically, each layer will append its name to this variable in its
                    conf/layer.conf file.
                
                    Variable that expands to match files from
                    BBFILES
                    in a particular layer.
                    This variable is used in the conf/layer.conf file and must
                    be suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
                    BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow).
                
Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer.
                    This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears in
                    more than one layer.
                    Setting this variable allows you to prioritize a
                    layer against other layers that contain the same recipe - effectively
                    letting you control the precedence for the multiple layers.
                    The precedence established through this variable stands regardless of a
                    recipe's version
                    (PV variable).
                    For example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher PV value but for
                    which the BBFILE_PRIORITY is set to have a lower precedence still has a
                    lower precedence.
                
                    A larger value for the BBFILE_PRIORITY variable results in a higher
                    precedence.
                    For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence than the value 5.
                    If not specified, the BBFILE_PRIORITY variable is set based on layer
                    dependencies (see the
                    LAYERDEPENDS variable for
                    more information.
                    The default priority, if unspecified
                    for a layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1
                    (or 1 if no priorities are defined).
                
bitbake-layers show-layers to list
                    all configured layers along with their priorities.
                List of recipe files used by BitBake to build software.
Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure.
                    If
                    BBINCLUDELOGS
                    is set, specifies the maximum number of lines from the
                    task log file to print when reporting a failed task.
                    If you do not set BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES,
                    the entire log is printed.
                
                    Lists the layers to enable during the build.
                    This variable is defined in the bblayers.conf configuration
                    file in the Build Directory.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     BBLAYERS = " \
       /home/scottrif/poky/meta \
       /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \
       /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
       /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \
       "
                    
                    This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom, user-defined layer
                    named meta-mykernel.
                
Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files.
                    You can use the BBMASK variable
                    to "hide" these .bb and
                    .bbappend files.
                    BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append files that
                    match any of the expressions.
                    It is as if BitBake does not see them at all.
                    Consequently, matching files are not parsed or otherwise
                    used by BitBake.
The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression compiler. The expressions are compared against the full paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's documentation at http://docs.python.org/release/2.3/lib/re-syntax.html.
                    The following example uses a complete regular expression
                    to tell BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append
                    files in the meta-ti/recipes-misc/
                    directory:
                    
     BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/"
                    If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example masks out multiple directories and individual recipes:
     BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/"
     BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/"
     BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap"
     BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend"
     BBMASK += "lzma"
                    
                    Used by BitBake to locate
                    .bbclass and configuration files.
                    This variable is analogous to the
                    PATH variable.
                    
BBPATH to point to the
                        Build Directory.
                        Set the variable as you would any environment variable
                        and then run BitBake:
                        
     $ BBPATH = "build_directory"
     $ export BBPATH
     $ bitbake target
                        
                    Points to the server that runs memory-resident BitBake.
                    This variable is set by the
                    oe-init-build-env-memres
                    setup script and should not be hand-edited.
                    The variable is only used when you employ memory-resident
                    BitBake.
                    The setup script exports the value as follows:
                    
     export BBSERVER=localhost:$port
                    
                    For more information on how the
                    BBSERVER is used, see the
                    oe-init-build-env-memres script, which
                    is located in the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    binconfig-disabled
                    class, this variable specifies binary configuration
                    scripts to disable in favor of using
                    pkg-config to query the information.
                    The binconfig-disabled class will
                    modify the specified scripts to return an error so that
                    calls to them can be easily found and replaced.
                
                    To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces.
                    Here is an example from the libpng
                    recipe:
                    
     BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    binconfig
                    class, this variable specifies a wildcard for
                    configuration scripts that need editing.
                    The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have been
                    set up during compilation so that they are correct for
                    use when installed into the sysroot and called by the
                    build processes of other recipes.
                
                    For more information on how this variable works, see
                    meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass in the
                    Source Directory.
                    You can also find general information on the class in the
                    "binconfig.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    The base recipe name and version but without any special
                    recipe name suffix (i.e. -native, lib64-,
                    and so forth).
                    BP is comprised of the following:
                    
     ${BPN}-${PV}
                    
                    The bare name of the recipe.
                    This variable is a version of the
                    PN
                    variable but removes common suffixes such as
                    -native and
                    -cross as well
                    as removes common prefixes such as multilib's
                    lib64- and
                    lib32-.
                    The exact list of suffixes removed is specified by the
                    SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX
                    variable.
                    The exact list of prefixes removed is specified by the
                    MLPREFIX
                    variable.
                    Prefixes are removed for multilib
                    and nativesdk- cases.
                
Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe. The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being built needs to be manually reported.
                    Specifies the architecture of the build host
                    (e.g. i686).
                    The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of
                    BUILD_ARCH from the machine name
                    reported by the uname command.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building
                    for the build host.
                    When building in the -native context,
                    CFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor
                    (i.e. to both the C and the C++ compilers) when building
                    for the build host.
                    When building in the -native context,
                    CPPFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when
                    building for the build host.
                    When building in the -native context,
                    CXXFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building
                    for the build host.
                    When building in the -native context,
                    LDFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler
                    when building for the build host or the SDK.
                    The flags are passed through the
                    BUILD_CFLAGS
                    and
                    BUILDSDK_CFLAGS
                    default values.
                
                    The default value of the
                    BUILD_OPTIMIZATION variable is
                    "-O2 -pipe".
                
                    Specifies the operating system in use on the build
                    host (e.g. "linux").
                    The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of
                    BUILD_OS from the OS reported by
                    the uname command - the first word,
                    converted to lower-case characters.
                
                    The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system uses the
                    BUILD_PREFIX value to set the
                    TARGET_PREFIX
                    when building for native recipes.
                
                    Specifies the system, including the architecture and
                    the operating system, to use when building for the build
                    host (i.e. when building native
                    recipes).
                
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
                    variable based on
                    BUILD_ARCH,
                    BUILD_VENDOR,
                    and
                    BUILD_OS.
                    You do not need to set the BUILD_SYS
                    variable yourself.
                
Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host. The default value is an empty string ("").
                    Points to the location of the
                    Build Directory.
                    You can define this directory indirectly through the
                    oe-init-build-env
                    and
                    oe-init-build-env-memres
                    scripts by passing in a Build Directory path when you run
                    the scripts.
                    If you run the scripts and do not provide a Build Directory
                    path, the BUILDDIR defaults to
                    build in the current directory.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the
                    build history output in a local Git repository.
                    If set to "1", this local repository will be maintained
                    automatically by the
                    buildhistory
                    class and a commit will be created on every
                    build for changes to each top-level subdirectory of the
                    build history output (images, packages, and sdk).
                    If you want to track changes to build history over
                    time, you should set this value to "1".
                
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    does not commit the build history output in a local
                    Git repository:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable specifies the author to use for each
                    Git commit.
                    In order for the BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR
                    variable to work, the
                    BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT
                    variable must be set to "1".
                
                    Git requires that the value you provide for the
                    BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR variable
                    takes the form of "name <email@host>".
                    Providing an email address or host that is not valid does
                    not produce an error.
                
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    sets the variable as follows:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable specifies the directory in which
                    build history information is kept.
                    For more information on how the variable works, see the
                    buildhistory.class.
                
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    sets the directory as follows:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable specifies the build history features
                    to be enabled.
                    For more information on how build history works, see the
                    "Maintaining Build Output Quality"
                    section.
                
You can specify three features in the form of a space-separated list:
image: Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the list of installed packages among other things.
package: Analysis of the contents of individual packages.
sdk: Analysis of the contents of the software development kit (SDK).
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    enables all three features:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files
                    copied from the
                    image contents into the build history directory under
                    an "image-files" directory in the directory for
                    the image, so that you can track the contents of each file.
                    The default is to copy /etc/passwd
                    and /etc/group, which allows you to
                    monitor for changes in user and group entries.
                    You can modify the list to include any file.
                    Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error.
                    Consequently, you can include files that might
                    not always be present.
                
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    provides paths to the following files:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    buildhistory
                    class, this variable optionally specifies a remote
                    repository to which build history pushes Git changes.
                    In order for BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO
                    to work,
                    BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT
                    must be set to "1".
                
                    The repository should correspond to a remote
                    address that specifies a repository as understood by
                    Git, or alternatively to a remote name that you have
                    set up manually using git remote
                    within the local repository.
                
                    By default, the buildhistory class
                    sets the variable as follows:
                    
     BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= ""
                    
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building
                    for the SDK.
                    When building in the nativesdk-
                    context,
                    CFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor
                    (i.e. to both the C and the C++ compilers) when building
                    for the SDK.
                    When building in the nativesdk-
                    context,
                    CPPFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when
                    building for the SDK.
                    When building in the nativesdk-
                    context,
                    CXXFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building
                    for the SDK.
                    When building in the nativesdk-
                    context,
                    LDFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Points to the location of the directory that holds build
                    statistics when you use and enable the
                    buildstats
                    class.
                    The BUILDSTATS_BASE directory defaults
                    to
                    ${TMPDIR}/buildstats/.
                
                    For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the
                    output executable file into two parts: one for features
                    that require setuid root, and one for
                    the remaining features (i.e. those that do not require
                    setuid root).
                
                    The BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID variable
                    defaults to "1", which results in a single output
                    executable file.
                    Set the variable to "0" to split the output file.
                
Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the Metadata so it does not need to be parsed every time BitBake is started.
The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler.
Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the compilation step.
                    Default initialization for CFLAGS
                    varies depending on what is being built:
                    
                            TARGET_CFLAGS
                            when building for the target
                            
                            BUILD_CFLAGS
                            when building for the build host (i.e.
                            -native)
                            
                            BUILDSDK_CFLAGS
                            when building for an SDK (i.e.
                            nativesdk-)
                            
An internal variable specifying the special class override that should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so forth). The classes that use this variable set it to appropriate values.
                    You do not normally directly interact with this variable.
                    The value for the CLASSOVERRIDE
                    variable goes into
                    OVERRIDES
                    and then can be used as an override.
                    Here is an example where "python-native" is added to
                    DEPENDS
                    only when building for the -native case:
                    
     DEPENDS_append_class-native = " python-native"
                    
                    If set to "1" within a recipe,
                    CLEANBROKEN specifies that
                    the make clean command does
                    not work for the software being built.
                    Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try
                    to run make clean during the
                    do_configure
                    task, which is the default behavior.
                
                    Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in
                    both
                    MACHINE_FEATURES
                    and
                    DISTRO_FEATURES.
                    This select list of features contains features that make
                    sense to be controlled both at the machine and distribution
                    configuration level.
                    For example, the "bluetooth" feature requires hardware
                    support but should also be optional at the distribution
                    level, in case the hardware supports Bluetooth but you
                    do not ever intend to use it.
                
                    For more information, see the
                    MACHINE_FEATURES
                    and DISTRO_FEATURES
                    variables.
                
                    Points to meta/files/common-licenses
                    in the
                    Source Directory,
                    which is where generic license files reside.
                
                    A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts
                    (when the recipe is native) or one or more targets (when
                    the recipe is non-native) with which a recipe is compatible.
                    The regular expression is matched against
                    HOST_SYS.
                    You can use the variable to stop recipes from being built
                    for classes of systems with which the recipes are not
                    compatible.
                    Stopping these builds is particularly useful with kernels.
                    The variable also helps to increase parsing speed
                    since the build system skips parsing recipes not
                    compatible with the current system.
               
                    A regular expression that resolves to one or more
                    target machines with which a recipe is compatible.
                    The regular expression is matched against
                    MACHINEOVERRIDES.
                    You can use the variable to stop recipes from being built
                    for machines with which the recipes are not compatible.
                    Stopping these builds is particularly useful with kernels.
                    The variable also helps to increase parsing speed
                    since the build system skips parsing recipes not
                    compatible with the current machine.
                
                    Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of
                    complementary packages for all the packages explicitly
                    (or implicitly) installed in an image.
                    The resulting list of complementary packages is associated
                    with an item that can be added to
                    IMAGE_FEATURES.
                    An example usage of this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when
                    added to IMAGE_FEATURES will
                    install -dev packages (containing headers and other
                    development files) for every package in the image.
                
To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the wildcard. Here is an example:
     COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev'
                    
                    Tracks the version of the local configuration file
                    (i.e. local.conf).
                    The value for CONF_VERSION
                    increments each time build/conf/
                    compatibility changes.
                
                    Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package.
                    If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update
                    packages on the target system, it is possible that
                    configuration files you have changed after the original installation
                    and that you now want to remain unchanged are overwritten.
                    In other words, editable files might exist in the package that you do not
                    want reset as part of the package update process.
                    You can use the CONFFILES variable to list the files in the
                    package that you wish to prevent the PMS from overwriting during this update process.
                
                    To use the CONFFILES variable, provide a package name
                    override that identifies the resulting package.
                    Then, provide a space-separated list of files.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \
        ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3"
                    
                    A relationship exists between the CONFFILES and
                    FILES variables.
                    The files listed within CONFFILES must be a subset of
                    the files listed within FILES.
                    Because the configuration files you provide with CONFFILES
                    are simply being identified so that the PMS will not overwrite them,
                    it makes sense that
                    the files must already be included as part of the package through the
                    FILES variable.
                
CONFFILES variable,
                    it is good practice to use appropriate path variables.
                    For example, ${sysconfdir} rather than
                    /etc or ${bindir} rather
                    than /usr/bin.
                    You can find a list of these variables at the top of the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf file in the
                    Source Directory.
                Identifies the initial RAM disk (initramfs) source files. The OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set to null ("").
                    The CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE can be
                    either a single cpio archive with a
                    .cpio suffix or a
                    space-separated list of directories and files for building
                    the initramfs image.
                    A cpio archive should contain a filesystem archive
                    to be used as an initramfs image.
                    Directories should contain a filesystem layout to be
                    included in the initramfs image.
                    Files should contain entries according to the format
                    described by the
                    usr/gen_init_cpio program in the
                    kernel tree.
                
If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image will be the aggregate of all of them.
                    A list of files that contains autoconf test results relevant
                    to the current build.
                    This variable is used by the Autotools utilities when running
                    configure.
                
The minimal arguments for GNU configure.
                    When inheriting the
                    distro_features_check
                    class, this
                    variable identifies distribution features that would
                    be in conflict should the recipe
                    be built.
                    In other words, if the
                    CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES variable
                    lists a feature that also appears in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES within the
                    current configuration, an error occurs and the
                    build stops.
                
                    If set to "1" along with the
                    COPY_LIC_MANIFEST
                    variable, the OpenEmbedded build system copies
                    into the image the license files, which are located in
                    /usr/share/common-licenses,
                    for each package.
                    The license files are placed
                    in directories within the image itself during build time.
                    
COPY_LIC_DIRS does not
                        offer a path for adding licenses for newly installed
                        packages to an image, which might be most suitable
                        for read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded.
                        See the
                        LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE
                        variable for additional information.
                        You can also reference the
                        "Providing License Text"
                        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for
                        information on providing license text.
                    
                    If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies
                    the license manifest for the image to
                    /usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest
                    within the image itself during build time.
                    
COPY_LIC_MANIFEST does not
                        offer a path for adding licenses for newly installed
                        packages to an image, which might be most suitable
                        for read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded.
                        See the
                        LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE
                        variable for additional information.
                        You can also reference the
                        "Providing License Text"
                        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for
                        information on providing license text.
                    
                    Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image.
                    You should only set this variable in the
                    local.conf configuration file found
                    in the
                    Build Directory.
                
                    This variable replaces POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL, which is no longer supported.
                
                    Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded
                    Core Metadata layer (i.e. meta).
                
                    It is an important distinction that
                    COREBASE points to the parent of this
                    layer and not the layer itself.
                    Consider an example where you have cloned the Poky Git
                    repository and retained the poky
                    name for your local copy of the repository.
                    In this case, COREBASE points to
                    the poky folder because it is the
                    parent directory of the poky/meta
                    layer.
                
                    Lists files from the
                    COREBASE
                    directory that should be copied other than the layers
                    listed in the bblayers.conf file.
                    The COREBASE_FILES variable exists
                    for the purpose of copying metadata from the
                    OpenEmbedded build system into the extensible
                    SDK.
                
                    Explicitly listing files in COREBASE
                    is needed because it typically contains build
                    directories and other files that should not normally
                    be copied into the extensible SDK.
                    Consequently, the value of
                    COREBASE_FILES is used in order to
                    only copy the files that are actually needed.
                
The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor.
Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the compilation step.
                    Default initialization for CPPFLAGS
                    varies depending on what is being built:
                    
                            TARGET_CPPFLAGS
                            when building for the target
                            
                            BUILD_CPPFLAGS
                            when building for the build host (i.e.
                            -native)
                            
                            BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS
                            when building for an SDK (i.e.
                            nativesdk-)
                            
                    The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools.
                    The CROSS_COMPILE variable is the
                    same as the
                    TARGET_PREFIX
                    variable.
                    
CROSS_COMPILE variable only in
                        certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel
                        and kernel module recipes).
                    
The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are stored.
The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler.
Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the compilation step.
                    Default initialization for CXXFLAGS
                    varies depending on what is being built:
                    
                            TARGET_CXXFLAGS
                            when building for the target
                            
                            BUILD_CXXFLAGS
                            when building for the build host (i.e.
                            -native)
                            
                            BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS
                            when building for an SDK (i.e.
                            nativesdk-)
                            
                    The destination directory.
                    The location in the Build Directory
                    where components are installed by the
                    do_install
                    task.
                    This location defaults to:
                    
     ${WORKDIR}/image
                    
The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month, and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015).
The date and time on which the current build started. The format is suitable for timestamps.
                    When the
                    debian
                    class is inherited, which is the default behavior,
                    DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME specifies a
                    particular package should not be renamed according to
                    Debian library package naming.
                    You must use the package name as an override when you
                    set this variable.
                    Here is an example from the fontconfig
                    recipe:
                    
     DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1"
                    
                    When the
                    debian
                    class is inherited, which is the default behavior,
                    DEBIANNAME allows you to override the
                    library name for an individual package.
                    Overriding the library name in these cases is rare.
                    You must use the package name as an override when you
                    set this variable.
                    Here is an example from the dbus
                    recipe:
                    
     DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1"
                    
                    Specifies to build packages with debugging information.
                    This influences the value of the
                    SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION
                    variable.
                
                    The options to pass in
                    TARGET_CFLAGS
                    and CFLAGS when compiling
                    a system for debugging.
                    This variable defaults to "-O -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe".
                
Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority.
                    The most common usage of this is variable is to set
                    it to "-1" within a recipe for a development version of a
                    piece of software.
                    Using the variable in this way causes the stable version
                    of the recipe to build by default in the absence of
                    PREFERRED_VERSION
                    being used to build the development version.
                
DEFAULT_PREFERENCE
                    is weak and is overridden by
                    BBFILE_PRIORITY
                    if that variable is different between two layers
                    that contain different versions of the same recipe.
                
                    The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI)
                    tunings (i.e.  the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build
                    system.
                    The DEFAULTTUNE helps define
                    TUNE_FEATURES.
                
                    The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set
                    by the machine
                    (MACHINE).
                    However, you can override the setting using available tunes
                    as defined with
                    AVAILTUNES.
                
Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies (i.e. other recipe files). The system ensures that all the dependencies listed have been built and have their contents in the appropriate sysroots before the recipe's configure task is executed.
                    Consider this simple example for two recipes named "a" and
                    "b" that produce similarly named packages.
                    In this example, the DEPENDS
                    statement appears in the "a" recipe:
                    
     DEPENDS = "b"
                    
                    Here, the dependency is such that the
                    do_configure
                    task for recipe "a" depends on the
                    do_populate_sysroot
                    task of recipe "b".
                    This means anything that recipe "b" puts into sysroot
                    is available when recipe "a" is configuring itself.
                
                    For information on runtime dependencies, see the
                    RDEPENDS
                    variable.
                
                    Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build
                    system uses to place images, packages, SDKs and other output
                    files that are ready to be used outside of the build system.
                    By default, this directory resides within the
                    Build Directory
                    as ${TMPDIR}/deploy.
                
                    For more information on the structure of the Build
                    Directory, see
                    "The Build Directory - build/"
                    section.
                    For more detail on the contents of the
                    deploy directory, see the
                    "Images",
                    "Package Feeds",
                    and
                    "Application Development SDK"
                    sections.
                
                    Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to place Debian packages that are ready to be used outside
                    of the build system.
                    This variable applies only when
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    contains "package_deb".
                
                    The BitBake configuration file initially defines the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_DEB variable as a
                    sub-folder of
                    DEPLOY_DIR:
                    
     DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb"
                    
                    The
                    package_deb
                    class uses the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_DEB variable to make sure
                    the
                    do_package_write_deb
                    task writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder.
                    For more information on how packaging works, see the
                    "Package Feeds"
                    section.
                
                    Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to place images and other associated output files that are
                    ready to be deployed onto the target machine.
                    The directory is machine-specific as it contains the
                    ${MACHINE} name.
                    By default, this directory resides within the
                    Build Directory
                    as ${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/.
                
                    For more information on the structure of the Build
                    Directory, see
                    "The Build Directory - build/"
                    section.
                    For more detail on the contents of the
                    deploy directory, see the
                    "Images" and
                    "Application Development SDK"
                    sections.
                
                    Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to place IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of
                    the build system.
                    This variable applies only when
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    contains "package_ipk".
                
                    The BitBake configuration file initially defines this
                    variable as a sub-folder of
                    DEPLOY_DIR:
                    
     DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk"
                    
                    The
                    package_ipk
                    class uses the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IPK variable to make sure
                    the
                    do_package_write_ipk
                    task writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder.
                    For more information on how packaging works, see the
                    "Package Feeds"
                    section.
                
                    Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to place RPM packages that are ready to be used outside
                    of the build system.
                    This variable applies only when
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    contains "package_rpm".
                
                    The BitBake configuration file initially defines this
                    variable as a sub-folder of
                    DEPLOY_DIR:
                    
     DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm"
                    
                    The
                    package_rpm
                    class uses the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_RPM variable to make sure
                    the
                    do_package_write_rpm
                    task writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder.
                    For more information on how packaging works, see the
                    "Package Feeds"
                    section.
                
                    Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to place tarballs that are ready to be used outside of
                    the build system.
                    This variable applies only when
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    contains "package_tar".
                
                    The BitBake configuration file initially defines this
                    variable as a sub-folder of
                    DEPLOY_DIR:
                    
     DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar"
                    
                    The
                    package_tar
                    class uses the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_TAR variable to make sure
                    the
                    do_package_write_tar
                    task writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder.
                    For more information on how packaging works, see the
                    "Package Feeds"
                    section.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    deploy
                    class, the DEPLOYDIR points to a
                    temporary work area for deployed files that is set in the
                    deploy class as follows:
                    
     DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}"
                    
                    Recipes inheriting the deploy class
                    should copy files to be deployed into
                    DEPLOYDIR, and the class will take
                    care of copying them into
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE
                    afterwards.
                
                    The package description used by package managers.
                    If not set, DESCRIPTION takes
                    the value of the
                    SUMMARY
                    variable.
                
                    A 32-bit MBR disk signature used by
                    directdisk images.
                
                    By default, the signature is set to an automatically
                    generated random value that allows the OpenEmbedded
                    build system to create a boot loader.
                    You can override the signature in the image recipe
                    by setting DISK_SIGNATURE to an
                    8-digit hex string.
                    You might want to override
                    DISK_SIGNATURE if you want the disk
                    signature to remain constant between image builds.
                
                    When using Linux 3.8 or later, you can use
                    DISK_SIGNATURE to specify the root
                    by UUID to allow the kernel to locate the root device
                    even if the device name changes due to differences in
                    hardware configuration.
                    By default, SYSLINUX_ROOT is set
                    as follows:
                    
     SYSLINUX_ROOT = "root=/dev/sda2"
                    However, you can change this to locate the root device using the disk signature instead:
     SYSLINUX_ROOT = "root=PARTUUID=${DISK_SIGNATURE}-02"
                    
                    As previously mentioned, it is possible to set the
                    DISK_SIGNATURE variable in your
                    local.conf file to a fixed
                    value if you do not want syslinux.cfg
                    changing for each build.
                    You might find this useful when you want to upgrade the
                    root filesystem on a device without having to recreate or
                    modify the master boot record.
                
                    The short name of the distribution.
                    This variable corresponds to a distribution
                    configuration file whose root name is the same as the
                    variable's argument and whose filename extension is
                    .conf.
                    For example, the distribution configuration file for the
                    Poky distribution is named poky.conf
                    and resides in the
                    meta-poky/conf/distro directory of
                    the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    Within that poky.conf file, the
                    DISTRO variable is set as follows:
                    
     DISTRO = "poky"
                    
                    Distribution configuration files are located in a
                    conf/distro directory within the
                    Metadata
                    that contains the distribution configuration.
                    The value for DISTRO must not contain
                    spaces, and is typically all lower-case.
                    
DISTRO variable is blank, a set
                        of default configurations are used, which are specified
                        within
                        meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf
                        also in the Source Directory.
                    
Specifies a codename for the distribution being built.
                    Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images.
                    This variable takes affect through
                    packagegroup-base so the
                    variable only really applies to the more full-featured
                    images that include packagegroup-base.
                    You can use this variable to keep distro policy out of
                    generic images.
                    As with all other distro variables, you set this variable
                    in the distro .conf file.
                
Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g. kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but you can remove them.
The software support you want in your distribution for various features. You define your distribution features in the distribution configuration file.
                    In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES is translated to the
                    appropriate option supplied to the configure script
                    during the
                    do_configure
                    task for recipes that optionally support the feature.
                    For example, specifying "x11" in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES, causes
                    every piece of software built for the target that can
                    optionally support X11 to have its X11 support enabled.
                
Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can provide with this variable, see the "Distro Features" section.
                    Features to be added to
                    DISTRO_FEATURES
                    if not also present in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED.
                
                    This variable is set in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file.
                    It is not intended to be user-configurable.
                    It is best to just reference the variable to see which distro features are
                    being backfilled for all distro configurations.
                    See the Feature backfilling section for
                    more information.
                
                    Features from
                    DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    that should not be backfilled (i.e. added to
                    DISTRO_FEATURES)
                    during the build.
                    See the "Feature Backfilling" section for
                    more information.
                
                    A convenience variable that gives you the default
                    list of distro features with the exception of any
                    features specific to the C library
                    (libc).
                
                    When creating a custom distribution, you might find it
                    useful to be able to reuse the default
                    DISTRO_FEATURES
                    options without the need to write out the full set.
                    Here is an example that uses
                    DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT from a
                    custom distro configuration file:
                    
     DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} ${DISTRO_FEATURES_LIBC} myfeature"
                    
                    A convenience variable that specifies the list of distro
                    features that are specific to the C library
                    (libc).
                    Typically, these features are prefixed with "libc-" and
                    control which features are enabled at during the build
                    within the C library itself.
                
The long name of the distribution.
The version of the distribution.
                    This variable lists overrides specific to the current
                    distribution.
                    By default, the variable list includes the value of the
                    DISTRO
                    variable.
                    You can extend the variable to apply any variable overrides
                    you want as part of the distribution and are not
                    already in OVERRIDES through
                    some other means.
                
                    The central download directory used by the build process to
                    store downloads.
                    By default, DL_DIR gets files
                    suitable for mirroring for everything except Git
                    repositories.
                    If you want tarballs of Git repositories, use the
                    BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS
                    variable.
                
                    You can set this directory by defining the
                    DL_DIR variable in the
                    conf/local.conf file.
                    This directory is self-maintaining and you should not have
                    to touch it.
                    By default, the directory is downloads
                    in the
                    Build Directory.
                    
     #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads"
                    To specify a different download directory, simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory.
                    During a first build, the system downloads many different
                    source code tarballs from various upstream projects.
                    Downloading can take a while, particularly if your network
                    connection is slow.
                    Tarballs are all stored in the directory defined by
                    DL_DIR and the build system looks there
                    first to find source tarballs.
                    
You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the same development machine. For additional information on how the build process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy server, see this specific question in the "FAQ" chapter. You can also refer to the "Working Behind a Network Proxy" Wiki page.
                    When inheriting the
                    compress_doc
                    class, this variable sets the compression policy used when
                    the OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info
                    pages.
                    By default, the compression method used is gz (gzip).
                    Other policies available are xz and bz2.
                
                    For information on policies and on how to use this
                    variable, see the comments in the
                    meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass file.
                
                    When building bootable images (i.e. where
                    hddimg or vmdk
                    is in
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES),
                    the EFI_PROVIDER variable specifies
                    the EFI bootloader to use.
                    The default is "grub-efi", but "gummiboot" can be used
                    instead.
                
                    See the
                    gummiboot
                    class for more information.
                
                    Variable that controls which locales for
                    glibc are generated during the
                    build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes
                    of RAM or less).
                
                    When used with the
                    report-error
                    class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files
                    created by the
                    error reporting tool,
                    which allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a
                    central database.
                    By default, the value of this variable is
                    ${LOG_DIR}/error-report.
                
                    You can set ERR_REPORT_DIR to the path
                    you want the error reporting tool to store the debug files
                    as follows in your local.conf file:
                    
     ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
                    
                    Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are
                    reported as errors by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    You set this variable in your distribution configuration
                    file.
                    For a list of the checks you can control with this variable,
                    see the
                    "insane.bbclass"
                    section.
                
Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries.
package_do_shlibs, which is part of
                        the
                        do_package
                        task.
                        You should be aware that the shared libraries resolver
                        might implicitly define some dependencies between
                        packages.
                    
                    The EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS variable is
                    similar to the
                    PRIVATE_LIBS
                    variable, which excludes a package's particular libraries
                    only and not the whole package.
                
                    Use the
                    EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS variable by
                    setting it to "1" for a particular package:
                    
     EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1"
                    
                    Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e.
                    bitbake world).
                    During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and builds all
                    recipes found in every layer exposed in the
                    bblayers.conf configuration file.
                
To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the variable to "1" in the recipe.
EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD
                    may still be built during a world build in order to satisfy
                    dependencies of other recipes.
                    Adding a recipe to EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD
                    only ensures that the recipe is not explicitly added
                    to the list of build targets in a world build.
                
                    Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's
                    version based on the recipe's
                    PE value.
                    If PE is set and greater than zero for a recipe,
                    EXTENDPE becomes that value (e.g if
                    PE is equal to "1" then EXTENDPE
                    becomes "1_").
                    If a recipe's PE is not set (the default) or is equal to
                    zero, EXTENDPE becomes "".
See the STAMP
                    variable for an example.
                
The full package version specification as it appears on the final packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another package in the same recipe:
     RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
                    
The dependency relationships are intended to force the package manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step.
                    When set, the EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS
                    variable indicates that these tools are not in the
                    source tree.
                
                    When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are
                    preferred over any externally installed tools.
                    Setting the EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS
                    variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer
                    the installed external tools.
                    See the
                    kernel-yocto
                    class in meta/classes to see how
                    the variable is used.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    externalsrc
                    class, this variable points to the source tree, which is
                    outside of the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    When set, this variable sets the
                    S
                    variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to locate unpacked recipe source code.
                
                    For more information on
                    externalsrc.bbclass, see the
                    "externalsrc.bbclass"
                    section.
                    You can also find information on how to use this variable
                    in the
                    "Building Software from an External Source"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    externalsrc
                    class, this variable points to the directory in which the
                    recipe's source code is built, which is outside of the
                    OpenEmbedded build system.
                    When set, this variable sets the
                    B
                    variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    to locate the Build Directory.
                
                    For more information on
                    externalsrc.bbclass, see the
                    "externalsrc.bbclass"
                    section.
                    You can also find information on how to use this variable
                    in the
                    "Building Software from an External Source"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    For recipes inheriting the
                    autotools
                    class, you can use EXTRA_AUTORECONF to
                    specify extra options to pass to the
                    autoreconf command that is
                    executed during the
                    do_configure
                    task.
                
The default value is "--exclude=autopoint".
A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing more than one feature, separate them with a space.
                    Typically, you configure this variable in your
                    local.conf file, which is found in the
                    Build Directory.
                    Although you can use this variable from within a recipe,
                    best practices dictate that you do not.
                    
IMAGE_FEATURES
                        variable.
                    
Here are some examples of features you can add:
"dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages
             including symbol information for debugging and
             profiling.
"debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging.
                 For example, allows root logins without
                 passwords and enables post-installation
                 logging. See the 'allow-empty-password'
                 and 'post-install-logging' features in
                 the "Image Features" section for
                 more information.
"dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages.
             This is useful if you want to develop against
             the libraries in the image.
"read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root
                     filesystem is read-only. See the
                     "Creating a Read-Only Root Filesystem"
                     section in the Yocto Project
                     Development Manual for more
                     information
"tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and
                strace.
"tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make,
              pkgconfig and so forth.
"tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools such as
                   ts_print, aplay, arecord and so
                   forth.
                    
For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see the "Image Features" section.
                    For an example that shows how to customize your image by
                    using this variable, see the
                    "Customizing Images Using Custom IMAGE_FEATURES and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    Specifies additional options for the image
                    creation command that has been specified in
                    IMAGE_CMD.
                    When setting this variable, you should
                    use an override for the associated type.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096"
                    
A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for installing into the root filesystem.
                    Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not
                    needed in the root filesystem.
                    You can use the EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS variable to
                    list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies.
                    A typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration.
                
                    Additional cmake options.
                
                    Additional configure script options.
                
                    Additional GNU make options.
                
                    Because the EXTRA_OEMAKE defaults to
                    "", you need to set the variable to specify any required
                    GNU options.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    scons
                    class, this variable specifies additional configuration
                    options you want to pass to the
                    scons command line.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    extrausers
                    class, this variable provides image level user and group
                    operations.
                    This is a more global method of providing user and group
                    configuration as compared to using the
                    useradd
                    class, which ties user and group configurations to a
                    specific recipe.
                
                    The set list of commands you can configure using the
                    EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS is shown in the
                    extrausers class.
                    These commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same
                    names:
                    
     # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
     # useradd -p '' tester; \
     # groupadd developers; \
     # userdel nobody; \
     # groupdel -g video; \
     # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \
     # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \
     # "
                    
                    Defines one or more packages to include in an image when
                    a specific item is included in
                    IMAGE_FEATURES.
                    When setting the value, FEATURE_PACKAGES
                    should have the name of the feature item as an override.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2"
                    
                    In this example, if "widget" were added to
                    IMAGE_FEATURES, package1 and
                    package2 would be included in the image.
                    
FEATURE_PACKAGES are often package
                        groups.
                        While similarly named, you should not confuse the
                        FEATURE_PACKAGES variable with
                        package groups, which are discussed elsewhere in the
                        documentation.
                    
                    Points to the base URL of the server and location within
                    the document-root that provides the metadata and
                    packages required by OPKG to support runtime package
                    management of IPK packages.
                    You set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
Consider the following example:
     FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir"
                    
                    This example assumes you are serving your packages over
                    HTTP and your databases are located in a directory
                    named BOARD-dir, which is underneath
                    your HTTP server's document-root.
                    In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates a set
                    of configuration files for you in your target that work
                    with the feed.
                
The list of directories or files that are placed in packages.
                    To use the FILES variable, provide a
                    package name override that identifies the resulting package.
                    Then, provide a space-separated list of files or paths
                    that identify the files you want included as part of the
                    resulting package.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1/ ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile"
                    
FILES variable, it is good practice
                    to use appropriate path variables.
                    For example, use ${sysconfdir} rather
                    than /etc, or
                    ${bindir} rather than
                    /usr/bin.
                    You can find a list of these variables at the top of the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf file in the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    If some of the files you provide with the
                    FILES variable are editable and you
                    know they should not be overwritten during the package
                    update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you
                    can identify these files so that the PMS will not
                    overwrite them.
                    See the
                    CONFFILES
                    variable for information on how to identify these files to
                    the PMS.
                
                    Defines the file specification to match
                    SOLIBSDEV.
                    In other words, FILES_SOLIBSDEV
                    defines the full path name of the development symbolic link
                    (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform.
                
                    The following statement from the
                    bitbake.conf shows how it is set:
                    
     FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
                    
                    Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    when looking for files and patches as it processes recipes
                    and append files.
                    The default directories BitBake uses when it processes
                    recipes are initially defined by the
                    FILESPATH
                    variable.
                    You can extend FILESPATH variable
                    by using FILESEXTRAPATHS.
                
                    Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using
                    FILESEXTRAPATHS from within a
                    .bbappend file and that you prepend
                    paths as follows:
                    
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
                    In the above example, the build system first looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the corresponding append file.
When extending FILESEXTRAPATHS,
                        be sure to use the immediate expansion
                        (:=) operator.
                        Immediate expansion makes sure that BitBake evaluates
                        THISDIR
                        at the time the directive is encountered rather than at
                        some later time when expansion might result in a
                        directory that does not contain the files you need.
                        
Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories to the search path.
Here is another common use:
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:"
                    
                    In this example, the build system extends the
                    FILESPATH variable to include a
                    directory named files that is in the
                    same directory as the corresponding append file.
                
Here is a final example that specifically adds three paths:
     FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:"
                    
                    By prepending paths in .bbappend
                    files, you allow multiple append files that reside in
                    different layers but are used for the same recipe to
                    correctly extend the path.
                
                    A subset of OVERRIDES
                    used by the OpenEmbedded build system for creating
                    FILESPATH.
                    You can find more information on how overrides are handled
                    in the
                    BitBake Manual.
                
                    By default, the FILESOVERRIDES
                    variable is defined as:
                    
     FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}"
                    
FILESOVERRIDES
                        variable.
                        The values match up with expected overrides and are
                        used in an expected manner by the build system.
                    
                    The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system
                    uses when searching for patches and files.
                    During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in
                    FILESPATH in the specified order when
                    looking for files and patches specified by each
                    file:// URI in a recipe.
                
                    The default value for the FILESPATH
                    variable is defined in the base.bbclass
                    class found in meta/classes in the
                    Source Directory:
                    
     FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \
        "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}"
                    
FILESPATH
                        variable.
                        If you want the build system to look in directories
                        other than the defaults, extend the
                        FILESPATH variable by using the
                        FILESEXTRAPATHS
                        variable.
                    
                    Be aware that the default FILESPATH
                    directories do not map to directories in custom layers
                    where append files (.bbappend)
                    are used.
                    If you want the build system to find patches or files
                    that reside with your append files, you need to extend
                    the FILESPATH variable by using
                    the
                    FILESEXTRAPATHS
                    variable.
                
Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the packages themselves but this is not always possible.
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the fs-perms.txt, which
                    is located in the meta/files folder in the
                    Source Directory.
                    If you create your own file permissions setting table, you should place it in your
                    layer or the distro's layer.
                
                    You define the FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES variable in the
                    conf/local.conf file, which is found in the
                    Build Directory, to
                    point to your custom fs-perms.txt.
                    You can specify more than a single file permissions setting table.
                    The paths you specify to these files must be defined within the
                    BBPATH variable.
                
                    For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings table file,
                    examine the existing fs-perms.txt.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    fontcache
                    class, this variable specifies the runtime dependencies
                    for font packages.
                    By default, the FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS
                    is set to "fontconfig-utils".
                
                    When inheriting the
                    fontcache
                    class, this variable identifies packages containing font
                    files that need to be cached by Fontconfig.
                    By default, the fontcache class assumes
                    that fonts are in the recipe's main package
                    (i.e. ${PN}).
                    Use this variable if fonts you need are in a package
                    other than that main package.
                
                    The options to pass in
                    TARGET_CFLAGS
                    and CFLAGS
                    when compiling an optimized system.
                    This variable defaults to
                    "-O2 -pipe ${DEBUG_FLAGS}".
                
The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger.
The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored when it is cloned.
Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming.
                    You can set GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES
                    in your local.conf file.
                    By default, all locales are generated.
                    
      GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8"
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    useradd
                    class, this variable
                    specifies for a package what parameters should be passed
                    to the groupadd command
                    if you wish to add a group to the system when the package
                    is installed.
                
                    Here is an example from the dbus
                    recipe:
                    
     GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev"
                    
                    For information on the standard Linux shell command
                    groupadd, see
                    http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    useradd
                    class, this variable
                    specifies for a package what parameters should be passed
                    to the groupmems command
                    if you wish to modify the members of a group when the
                    package is installed.
                
                    For information on the standard Linux shell command
                    groupmems, see
                    http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems.
                
                    Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have
                    graphics and serial in the boot menu.
                    Set this variable to "1" in your
                    local.conf or distribution
                    configuration file to enable graphics and serial
                    in the menu.
                
                    See the
                    grub-efi
                    class for more information on how this variable is used.
                
                    Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified
                    Bootloader (GRUB) configuration.
                    Use a semi-colon character (;) to
                    separate multiple options.
                
                    The GRUB_OPTS variable is optional.
                    See the
                    grub-efi
                    class for more information on how this variable is used.
                
                    Specifies the timeout before executing the default
                    LABEL in the GNU GRand Unified
                    Bootloader (GRUB).
                
                    The GRUB_TIMEOUT variable is optional.
                    See the
                    grub-efi
                    class for more information on how this variable is used.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    gtk-immodules-cache
                    class, this variable specifies the packages that contain the
                    GTK+ input method modules being installed when the modules
                    are in packages other than the main package.
                
                    When
                    EFI_PROVIDER
                    is set to "gummiboot", the
                    GUMMIBOOT_CFG variable specifies the
                    configuration file that should be used.
                    By default, the
                    gummiboot
                    class sets the GUMMIBOOT_CFG as
                    follows:
                    
     GUMMIBOOT_CFG ?= "${S}/loader.conf"
                    
For information on Gummiboot, see the Gummiboot documentation.
                    When
                    EFI_PROVIDER
                    is set to "gummiboot", the
                    GUMMIBOOT_ENTRIES variable specifies
                    a list of entry files
                    (*.conf) to be installed
                    containing one boot entry per file.
                    By default, the
                    gummiboot
                    class sets the GUMMIBOOT_ENTRIES as
                    follows:
                    
     GUMMIBOOT_ENTRIES ?= ""
                    
For information on Gummiboot, see the Gummiboot documentation.
                    When
                    EFI_PROVIDER
                    is set to "gummiboot", the
                    GUMMIBOOT_TIMEOUT variable specifies
                    the boot menu timeout in seconds.
                    By default, the
                    gummiboot
                    class sets the GUMMIBOOT_TIMEOUT as
                    follows:
                    
     GUMMIBOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10"
                    
For information on Gummiboot, see the Gummiboot documentation.
Website where more information about the software the recipe is building can be found.
                    The name of the target architecture, which is normally
                    the same as
                    TARGET_ARCH.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system supports many
                    architectures.
                    Here is an example list of architectures supported.
                    This list is by no means complete as the architecture
                    is configurable:
                    
     arm
     i586
     x86_64
     powerpc
     powerpc64
     mips
     mipsel
                    
Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the C compiler.
                    Default initialization for HOST_CC_ARCH
                    varies depending on what is being built:
                    
                            TARGET_CC_ARCH
                            when building for the target
                            
                            BUILD_CC_ARCH
                            when building for the build host (i.e.
                            -native)
                            
                            BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH
                            when building for an SDK (i.e.
                            nativesdk-)
                            
                    Specifies the name of the target operating system, which
                    is normally the same as the
                    TARGET_OS.
                    The variable can be set to "linux" for glibc-based systems and
                    to "linux-uclibc" for uclibc.
                    For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and
                    "linux-uclibc-gnueabi" values possible.
                
                    Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain.
                    HOST_PREFIX is normally the same as
                    TARGET_PREFIX.
                
Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the current recipe.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
                    variable based on
                    HOST_ARCH,
                    HOST_VENDOR,
                    and
                    HOST_OS
                    variables.
                    
Consider these two examples:
Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the value is "i686-linux".
Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
                    Specifies the name of the vendor.
                    HOST_VENDOR is normally the same as
                    TARGET_VENDOR.
                
                    Disables or enables the icecc
                    (Icecream) function.
                    For more information on this function and best practices
                    for using this variable, see the
                    "icecc.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    Setting this variable to "1" in your
                    local.conf disables the function:
                    
     ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1"
                    To enable the function, set the variable as follows:
     ICECC_DISABLED = ""
                    
                    Points to the icecc-create-env script
                    that you provide.
                    This variable is used by the
                    icecc
                    class.
                    You set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
                    If you do not point to a script that you provide, the
                    OpenEmbedded build system uses the default script provided
                    by the icecc-create-env.bb recipe,
                    which is a modified version and not the one that comes with
                    icecc.
                
                    Extra options passed to the make
                    command during the
                    do_compile
                    task that specify parallel compilation.
                    This variable usually takes the form of
                    "-j x", where
                    x represents the maximum
                    number of parallel threads make can
                    run.
                    
iceccd daemon.
                    
                    If your enabled machines support multiple cores,
                    coming up with the maximum number of parallel threads
                    that gives you the best performance could take some
                    experimentation since machine speed, network lag,
                    available memory, and existing machine loads can all
                    affect build time.
                    Consequently, unlike the
                    PARALLEL_MAKE
                    variable, there is no rule-of-thumb for setting
                    ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE to achieve
                    optimal performance.
                
                    If you do not set ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE,
                    the build system does not use it (i.e. the system does
                    not detect and assign the number of cores as is done with
                    PARALLEL_MAKE).
                
                    The location of the icecc binary.
                    You can set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                    If your local.conf file does not define
                    this variable, the
                    icecc
                    class attempts to define it by locating
                    icecc using which.
                
                    Identifies user classes that you do not want the
                    Icecream distributed compile support to consider.
                    This variable is used by the
                    icecc
                    class.
                    You set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting" them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
                    Identifies user recipes that you do not want the
                    Icecream distributed compile support to consider.
                    This variable is used by the
                    icecc
                    class.
                    You set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting" them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
                    Identifies user recipes that use an empty
                    PARALLEL_MAKE
                    variable that you want to force remote distributed
                    compilation on using the Icecream distributed compile
                    support.
                    This variable is used by the
                    icecc
                    class.
                    You set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
                    The base name of image output files.
                    This variable defaults to the recipe name
                    (${PN}).
                
                    A space-separated list of files installed into the
                    boot partition when preparing an image using the
                    wic tool with the
                    bootimg-partition source
                    plugin.
                    By default, the files are installed under
                    the same name as the source files.
                    To change the installed name, separate it from the
                    original name with a semi-colon (;).
                    Source files need to be located in
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE.
                    Here are two examples:
                    
     IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel"
     IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}"
                    
Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In this case, the destination file will have the same name as the base name of the source file path. To install files into a directory within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). Here are two examples:
     IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*"
     IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/"
                    
                    The first example installs all files from
                    ${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles
                    into the root of the target partition.
                    The second example installs the same files into a
                    boot directory within the
                    target partition.
                
A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use this variable to specify the list of classes that register the different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates.
                    The default value for IMAGE_CLASSES is
                    image_types.
                    You can set this variable in your
                    local.conf or in a distribution
                    configuration file.
                
                    For more information, see
                    meta/classes/image_types.bbclass in the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    Specifies the command to create the image file for a
                    specific image type, which corresponds to the value set
                    set in
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES,
                    (e.g. ext3,
                    btrfs, and so forth).
                    When setting this variable, you should use
                    an override for the associated type.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \
        --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \
        ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}"
                    
                    You typically do not need to set this variable unless
                    you are adding support for a new image type.
                    For more examples on how to set this variable, see the
                    image_types
                    class file, which is
                    meta/classes/image_types.bbclass.
                
                    Specifies one or more files that contain custom device
                    tables that are passed to the
                    makedevs command as part of creating
                    an image.
                    These files list basic device nodes that should be
                    created under /dev within the image.
                    If IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES is not set,
                    files/device_table-minimal.txt is
                    used, which is located by
                    BBPATH.
                    For details on how you should write device table files,
                    see meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt
                    as an example.
                
                    The primary list of features to include in an image.
                    Typically, you configure this variable in an image recipe.
                    Although you can use this variable from your
                    local.conf file, which is found in the
                    Build Directory,
                    best practices dictate that you do not.
                    
EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES variable.
                    
For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see the "Image Features" section.
                    For an example that shows how to customize your image by
                    using this variable, see the
                    "Customizing Images Using Custom IMAGE_FEATURES and EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses
                    during the build when creating the root filesystem.
                    For example, setting IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    as follows causes the build system to create root
                    filesystems using two formats: .ext3
                    and .tar.bz2:
                    
     IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2"
                    
                    For the complete list of supported image formats from which
                    you can choose, see
                    IMAGE_TYPES.
                
IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    inside an image recipe, be sure that you do so prior to the
                    "inherit image" line of the recipe or the live image will
                    not build.
                _append or
                    _prepend. To add one or more
                    additional options to this variable the
                    += operator must be used.
                
                    Specifies the packages to install into an image.
                    The IMAGE_INSTALL variable is a
                    mechanism for an image recipe and you should use it
                    with care to avoid ordering issues.
                    
core-image-minimal-initramfs
                        image, do not use the IMAGE_INSTALL
                        variable to specify packages for installation.
                        Instead, use the
                        PACKAGE_INSTALL
                        variable, which allows the initial RAM disk (initramfs)
                        recipe to use a fixed set of packages and not be
                        affected by IMAGE_INSTALL.
                    
                    Image recipes set IMAGE_INSTALL
                    to specify the packages to install into an image through
                    image.bbclass.
                    Additionally, "helper" classes exist, such as
                    core-image.bbclass, that can take
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    lists and turn these into auto-generated entries in
                    IMAGE_INSTALL in addition to its
                    default contents.
                
                    Using IMAGE_INSTALL with the
                    += operator from the
                    /conf/local.conf file or from within
                    an image recipe is not recommended as it can cause ordering
                    issues.
                    Since core-image.bbclass sets
                    IMAGE_INSTALL to a default value using
                    the ?= operator, using a
                    += operation against
                    IMAGE_INSTALL will result in
                    unexpected behavior when used in
                    conf/local.conf.
                    Furthermore, the same operation from within an image
                    recipe may or may not succeed depending on the specific
                    situation.
                    In both these cases, the behavior is contrary to how most
                    users expect the += operator to work.
                
When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows:
     IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name"
                    Be sure to include the space between the quotation character and the start of the package name or names.
                    Specifies the list of locales to install into the image
                    during the root filesystem construction process.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically splits locale
                    files, which are used for localization, into separate
                    packages.
                    Setting the IMAGE_LINGUAS variable
                    ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages
                    already selected for installation into the image are also
                    installed.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de"
                    
                    In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian
                    Portuguese and German locale files that correspond to
                    packages in the image are installed (i.e.
                    *-locale-pt-br
                    and *-locale-de-de as well as
                    *-locale-pt
                    and *-locale-de, since some software
                    packages only provide locale files by language and not by
                    country-specific language).
                
                    See the
                    GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES
                    variable for information on generating GLIBC locales.
                
The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed packages that make up the image. The file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as follows:
     packagename packagearch version
                    
                    The
                    image
                    class defines the manifest file as follows:
                    
     IMAGE_MANIFEST = "${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest"
                    
                    The location is derived using the
                    DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE
                    and
                    IMAGE_NAME
                    variables.
                    You can find information on how the image
                    is created in the
                    "Image Generation"
                    section.
                
                    The name of the output image files minus the extension.
                    This variable is derived using the
                    IMAGE_BASENAME,
                    MACHINE,
                    and
                    DATETIME
                    variables:
                    
     IMAGE_NAME = "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}-${DATETIME}"
                    
                    Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial image
                    size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk usage value
                    for the image is greater than the sum of
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
                    and
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE.
                    The result of the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates
                    free disk space in the image as overhead.
                    By default, the build process uses a multiplier of 1.3 for this variable.
                    This default value results in 30% free disk space added to the image when this
                    method is used to determine the final generated image size.
                    You should be aware that post install scripts and the package management
                    system uses disk space inside this overhead area.
                    Consequently, the multiplier does not produce an image with
                    all the theoretical free disk space.
                    See IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
                    for information on how the build system determines the overall image size.
                
The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you can increase the default value. For example, the following setting gives you 50% free space added to the image:
     IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5"
                    
                    Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is added
                    to the image by using the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE
                    variable.
                
                    Defines the package type (DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used
                    by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    The variable is defined appropriately by the
                    package_deb,
                    package_rpm,
                    package_ipk,
                    or
                    package_tar
                    class.
                    
package_tar class is broken
                        and is not supported.
                        It is recommended that you do not use it.
                    
                    The
                    populate_sdk_*
                    and
                    image
                    classes use the IMAGE_PKGTYPE for
                    packaging up images and SDKs.
                
                    You should not set the IMAGE_PKGTYPE
                    manually.
                    Rather, the variable is set indirectly through the
                    appropriate
                    package_*
                    class using the
                    PACKAGE_CLASSES
                    variable.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type
                    (e.g. DEB, RPM, or IPK) that appears with the variable
                    
.tar format are
                        never used as a substitute packaging format for DEB,
                        RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image or SDK.
                    
Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build system has created the final image output files. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within the function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build system has created the final image output files. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within the function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
                    The location of the root filesystem while it is under
                    construction (i.e. during the
                    do_rootfs
                    task).
                    This variable is not configurable.
                    Do not change it.
                
                    Specifies the alignment for the output image file in
                    Kbytes.
                    If the size of the image is not a multiple of
                    this value, then the size is rounded up to the nearest
                    multiple of the value.
                    The default value is "1".
                    See
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
                    for additional information.
                
                    Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes.
                    By default, this variable is set to "0".
                    This free disk space is added to the image after the build system determines
                    the image size as described in
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE.
                
This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of free disk space is available, set the variable as follows:
     IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880"
                    
For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests 40 Gbytes of extra space with the line:
     IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040"
                    
Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded build system determines the final size for the generated image using an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically, the build system determines the final size of the generated image as follows:
    if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size:
	internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace
    else:
	internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace
    where:
      image-du = Returned value of the du command on
                 the image.
      overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR
      rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
      internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem
                             size before any modifications.
      xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE
                    
                    See the IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR
                    and IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE
                    variables for related information.
                
                    Specifies a dependency from one image type on another.
                    Here is an example from the
                    image-live
                    class:
                    
     IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3"
                    
                    In the previous example, the variable ensures that when
                    "live" is listed with the
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    variable, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an
                    ext3 image first since one of the
                    components of the live
                    image is an ext3
                    formatted partition containing the root
                    filesystem.
                
Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default:
     btrfs
     cpio
     cpio.gz
     cpio.lz4
     cpio.lzma
     cpio.xz
     cramfs
     elf
     ext2
     ext2.bz2
     ext2.gz
     ext2.lzma
     ext3
     ext3.gz
     ext4
     ext4.gz
     hdddirect
     hddimg
     iso
     jffs2
     jffs2.sum
     multiubi
     qcow2
     squashfs
     squashfs-lzo
     squashfs-xz
     tar
     tar.bz2
     tar.gz
     tar.lz4
     tar.xz
     ubi
     ubifs
     vdi
     vmdk
     wic
     wic.bz2
     wic.gz
     wic.lzma
                    
                    For more information about these types of images, see
                    meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass
                    in the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share
                    a common include file.
                    You can think of this variable as part of the recipe revision
                    as set from within an include file.
                
                    Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that
                    are used across several projects.
                    And, within each of those recipes the revision
                    (its PR
                    value) is set accordingly.
                    In this case, when the revision of those recipes changes,
                    the burden is on you to find all those recipes and
                    be sure that they get changed to reflect the updated
                    version of the recipe.
                    In this scenario, it can get complicated when recipes
                    that are used in many places and provide common functionality
                    are upgraded to a new revision.
                
                    A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is
                    to set the INC_PR variable inside
                    the include files that the recipes
                    share and then expand the INC_PR
                    variable within the recipes to help
                    define the recipe revision.
                
                    The following provides an example that shows how to use
                    the INC_PR variable
                    given a common include file that
                    defines the variable.
                    Once the variable is defined in the
                    include file, you can use the
                    variable to set the PR values in
                    each recipe.
                    You will notice that when you set a recipe's
                    PR you can provide more granular
                    revisioning by appending values to the
                    INC_PR variable:
                    
recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2"
recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1"
recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0"
recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3"
                    
                    The first line of the example establishes the baseline
                    revision to be used for all recipes that use the
                    include file.
                    The remaining lines in the example are from individual
                    recipes and show how the PR value
                    is set.
                
                    Specifies a space-separated list of license names
                    (as they would appear in
                    LICENSE)
                    that should be excluded from the build.
                    Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed incompatible
                    licenses are not built.
                    Packages that are individually licensed with the specified
                    incompatible licenses will be deleted.
                
     INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0"
                    
                    Although you can use other settings, you might be required
                    to remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to
                    components that are required to produce a functional system
                    image.
                Causes the named class to be inherited at this point during parsing. The variable is only valid in configuration files.
Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is unlikely that you want to edit this variable.
                    The default value of the variable is set as follows in the
                    meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf
                    file:
                    
     INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license"
                    
                    Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler
                    and standard C library (libc), from being added to
                    DEPENDS.
                    This variable is usually used within recipes that do not
                    require any compilation using the C compiler.
                
Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from being added.
                    Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting
                    out debug information during packaging.
                    By default, the build system splits out debugging
                    information during the
                    do_package
                    task.
                    For more information on how debug information is split out,
                    see the
                    PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE
                    variable.
                
                    To prevent the build system from splitting out
                    debug information during packaging, set the
                    INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT variable
                    as follows:
                    
     INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1"
                    
                    If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in
                    resulting packages and prevents the
                    -dbg package from containing the
                    source files.
                
                     By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips
                     binaries and puts the debugging symbols into
                     ${PN}-dbg.
                     Consequently, you should not set
                     INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP when you plan
                     to debug in general.
                
                    Defines the format for the output image of an initial
                    RAM disk (initramfs), which is used during boot.
                    Supported formats are the same as those supported by the
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    variable.
                
                    Causes the OpenEmbedded build system to build an additional
                    recipe as a dependency to your root filesystem recipe
                    (e.g. core-image-sato).
                    The additional recipe is used to create an initial RAM disk
                    (initramfs) that might be needed during the initial boot of
                    the target system to accomplish such things as loading
                    kernel modules prior to mounting the root file system.
                
                    When you set the variable, specify the name of the
                    initramfs you want created.
                    The following example, which is set in the
                    local.conf configuration file, causes
                    a separate recipe to be created that results in an
                    initramfs image named
                    core-image-sato-initramfs.bb to be
                    created:
                    
     INITRAMFS_IMAGE = "core-image-minimal-initramfs"
                    
                    By default, the
                    kernel
                    class sets this variable to a null string as follows:
                    
     INITRAMFS_IMAGE = ""
                    
                    See the
                    local.conf.sample.extended
                    file for additional information.
                    You can also reference the
                    kernel.bbclass
                    file to see how the variable is used.
                
                    Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by
                    INITRAMFS_IMAGE
                    is run through an extra pass during kernel compilation
                    in order to build a single binary that contains both the
                    kernel image and the initial RAM disk (initramfs).
                    Using an extra compilation pass ensures that when a kernel
                    attempts to use an initramfs, it does not encounter
                    circular dependencies should the initramfs include kernel
                    modules.
                
                    The combined binary is deposited into the
                    tmp/deploy directory, which is part
                    of the
                    Build Directory.
                
Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the OpenEmbedded build system to make the extra pass during kernel compilation:
     INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1"
                    
                    By default, the
                    kernel
                    class sets this variable to a null string as follows:
                    
     INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = ""
                    
INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE variable in
                        a configuration file.
                        You cannot set the variable in a recipe file.
                    
                    See the
                    local.conf.sample.extended
                    file for additional information.
                
                    Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use
                    as an initial RAM disk (initrd).
                
                    The INITRD variable is an optional
                    variable used with the
                    image-live
                    class.
                
                    When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    contains "live"), INITRD_IMAGE
                    specifies the image recipe that should be built
                    to provide the initial RAM disk image.
                    The default value is "core-image-minimal-initramfs".
                
                    See the
                    image-live
                    class for more information.
                
                    The filename of the initialization script as installed to
                    ${sysconfdir}/init.d.
                
                    This variable is used in recipes when using update-rc.d.bbclass.
                    The variable is mandatory.
                
                    A list of the packages that contain initscripts.
                    If multiple packages are specified, you need to append the package name
                    to the other INITSCRIPT_* as an override.
                 
                    This variable is used in recipes when using update-rc.d.bbclass.
                    The variable is optional and defaults to the
                    PN variable.
                
                    Specifies the options to pass to update-rc.d.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ."
                    
In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6.
                    The variable's default value is "defaults", which is
                    set in the
                    update-rc.d
                    class.
                
                    The value in
                    INITSCRIPT_PARAMS is passed through
                    to the update-rc.d command.
                    For more information on valid parameters, please see the
                    update-rc.d manual page at
                    http://www.tin.org/bin/man.cgi?section=8&topic=update-rc.d.
                
                    Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package
                    within a recipe.
                    For example, to skip the check for symbolic link
                    .so files in the main package of a
                    recipe, add the following to the recipe.
                    The package name override must be used, which in this
                    example is ${PN}:
                    
     INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so"
                    
                    See the "insane.bbclass"
                    section for a list of the valid QA checks you can
                    specify using this variable.
                
                    By default, the tzdata recipe packages
                    an /etc/timezone file.
                    Set the INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE
                    variable to "0" at the configuration level to disable this
                    behavior.
                
                    When the IPK backend is in use and package management
                    is enabled on the target, you can use this variable to
                    set up opkg in the target image
                    to point to package feeds on a nominated server.
                    Once the feed is established, you can perform
                    installations or upgrades using the package manager
                    at runtime.
                
Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the configuration. Architectures supported for this release are:
     powerpc
     i386
     x86_64
     arm
     qemu
     mips
                    
                    You define the KARCH variable in the
                    BSP Descriptions.
                
A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch you want is being used by the build process.
                    Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe
                    file and the kernel's append file.
                    For example, if you are using the Yocto Project kernel that
                    is based on the Linux 3.14 kernel, the kernel recipe file
                    is the
                    meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.14.bb
                    file.
                    Following is an example for a kernel recipe file:
                    
     KBRANCH ?= "standard/base"
                    
                    This variable is also used from the kernel's append file
                    to identify the kernel branch specific to a particular
                    machine or target hardware.
                    The kernel's append file is located in the BSP layer for
                    a given machine.
                    For example, the kernel append file for the Emenlow BSP is in the
                    meta-intel Git repository and is named
                    meta-emenlow/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.14.bbappend.
                    Here are the related statements from the append file:
                    
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_emenlow-noemgd = "emenlow-noemgd"
     KMACHINE_emenlow-noemgd = "emenlow"
     KBRANCH_emenlow-noemgd = "standard/base"
     KERNEL_FEATURES_append_emenlow-noemgd = " features/drm-gma500/drm-gma500.scc"
                    
                        The KBRANCH statement identifies
                        the kernel branch to use when building for the Emenlow
                        BSP.
                
                    When used with the
                    kernel-yocto
                    class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file
                    for use during a kernel build.
                
                    Typically, when using a defconfig to
                    configure a kernel during a build, you place the
                    file in your layer in the same manner as you would
                    patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e.
                    "out-of-tree").
                    However, if you want to use a defconfig
                    file that is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"),
                    you can use the
                    KBUILD_DEFCONFIG variable to point
                    to the defconfig file.
                
To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe using the following form:
     KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file
                    
                    Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2"
                    KMACHINE build that uses a
                    defconfig file named
                    "bcm2709_defconfig":
                    
     KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig"
                    As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file:
     KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file
                    
                    For more information on how to use the
                    KBUILD_DEFCONFIG variable, see the
                    "Using an "In-Tree" defconfig File"
                    section.
                
                    Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in
                    addition to the kernel image type specified using the
                    KERNEL_IMAGETYPE
                    variable.
                
                    A list of classes defining kernel image types that the
                    kernel
                    class should inherit.
                    You typically append this variable to enable extended image
                    types.
                    An example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables
                    fitImage support and resides in
                    meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass.
                    You can register custom kernel image types with the
                    kernel class using this variable.
                
                    Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree
                    (i.e. the .dtb) file.
                    
.dtb
                        file is preferred.
                    In order to use this variable, you must have the include files in your kernel recipe:
     require recipes-kernel/linux/linux-dtb.inc
                    or
     require recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto.inc
                    
                    Specifies additional make
                    command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded build system
                    passes on when compiling the kernel.
                
                    Includes additional metadata from the Yocto Project kernel Git repository.
                    In the OpenEmbedded build system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs)
                    Metadata
                    is provided through
                    the KMACHINE
                    and KBRANCH variables.
                    You can use the KERNEL_FEATURES variable to further
                    add metadata for all BSPs.
                
                    The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments and
                    features descriptions,
                    which usually includes patches as well as config fragments.
                    You typically override the KERNEL_FEATURES variable
                    for a specific machine.
                    In this way, you can provide validated, but optional, sets of kernel
                    configurations and features.
                
                    For example, the following adds netfilter to all
                    the Yocto Project kernels and adds sound support to the qemux86
                    machine:
                    
     # Add netfilter to all linux-yocto kernels
     KERNEL_FEATURES="features/netfilter/netfilter.scc"
     # Add sound support to the qemux86 machine
     KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86=" cfg/sound.scc"
                    The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the kernel class as follows:
     KERNEL_IMAGE_BASE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}-${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}-${DATETIME}"
                    
                    See the
                    KERNEL_IMAGETYPE,
                    PKGE,
                    PKGV,
                    PKGR,
                    MACHINE,
                    and
                    DATETIME
                    variables for additional information.
                
                    Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in
                    kilobytes.
                    If KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE is set,
                    the size of the kernel image file is checked against
                    the set value during the
                    do_sizecheck
                    task.
                    The task fails if the kernel image file is larger than
                    the setting.
                
                    KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE is useful for
                    target devices that have a limited amount of space in
                    which the kernel image must be stored.
                
By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the kernel image is not checked.
                    The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the
                    machine configuration files and defaults to "zImage".
                    This variable is used
                    when building the kernel and is passed to make as the target to
                    build.
                
                    If you want to build an alternate kernel image type, use the
                    KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE
                    variable.
                
Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot.
module_autoload
                        variable.
                    
                    You can use the KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
                    variable anywhere that it can be
                    recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel
                    module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a
                    distribution configuration file, an append file for the
                    recipe, or the recipe itself).
                
Specify it as follows:
     KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3"
                    
                    Including KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD causes
                    the OpenEmbedded build system to populate the
                    /etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf
                    file with the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot.
                    The modules appear one-per-line in the file.
                    Here is an example of the most common use case:
                    
     KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name"
                    
                    For information on how to populate the
                    modname.conf file with
                    modprobe.d syntax lines, see the
                    KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF
                    variable.
                
                    Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded
                    build system expects to find
                    module_conf_modname
                    values that specify configuration for each of the modules.
                    For information on how to provide those module
                    configurations, see the
                    module_conf_*
                    variable.
                
                    The location of the kernel sources.
                    This variable is set to the value of the
                    STAGING_KERNEL_DIR
                    within the
                    module
                    class.
                    For information on how this variable is used, see the
                    "Incorporating Out-of-Tree Modules"
                    section.
                
                    To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers
                    used to build modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also
                    recognizes and uses the
                    KERNEL_SRC
                    variable, which is identical to the
                    KERNEL_PATH variable.
                    Both variables are common variables used by external
                    Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
                
                    The location of the kernel sources.
                    This variable is set to the value of the
                    STAGING_KERNEL_DIR
                    within the
                    module
                    class.
                    For information on how this variable is used, see the
                    "Incorporating Out-of-Tree Modules"
                    section.
                
                    To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers
                    used to build modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also
                    recognizes and uses the
                    KERNEL_PATH
                    variable, which is identical to the
                    KERNEL_SRC variable.
                    Both variables are common variables used by external
                    Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
                
                    Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from
                    version.h or
                    utsrelease.h within the kernel sources.
                    Effects of setting this variable do not take affect until
                    the kernel has been configured.
                    Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in
                    contexts prior to configuration will not work.
                
                    Specifies whether the data referenced through
                    PKGDATA_DIR
                    is needed or not.
                    The KERNELDEPMODDEPEND does not
                    control whether or not that data exists,
                    but simply whether or not it is used.
                    If you do not need to use the data, set the
                    KERNELDEPMODDEPEND variable in your
                    initramfs recipe.
                    Setting the variable there when the data is not needed
                    avoids a potential dependency loop.
                
                    Provides a short description of a configuration fragment.
                    You use this variable in the .scc
                    file that describes a configuration fragment file.
                    Here is the variable used in a file named
                    smp.scc to describe SMP being
                    enabled:
                    
     define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP"
                    
                    The machine as known by the kernel.
                    Sometimes the machine name used by the kernel does not
                    match the machine name used by the OpenEmbedded build
                    system.
                    For example, the machine name that the OpenEmbedded build
                    system understands as
                    core2-32-intel-common goes by a
                    different name in the Linux Yocto kernel.
                    The kernel understands that machine as
                    intel-core2-32.
                    For cases like these, the KMACHINE
                    variable maps the kernel machine name to the OpenEmbedded
                    build system machine name.
                
                    These mappings between different names occur in the
                    Yocto Linux Kernel's meta branch.
                    As an example take a look in the
                    common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend
                    file:
                    
     LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0"
     COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}"
     SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974"
     SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711"
     KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32"
     KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base"
     KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}"
                    
                    The KMACHINE statement says that
                    the kernel understands the machine name as
                    "intel-core2-32".
                    However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the
                    machine as "core2-32-intel-common".
                
Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" kernel types. See the "Kernel Types" section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on kernel types.
                    You define the KTYPE variable in the
                    BSP Descriptions.
                    The value you use must match the value used for the
                    LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE
                    value used by the kernel recipe.
                
Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration.
                    See the
                    grub-efi
                    class for more information on how this variable is used.
                
                    Lists the layers that this recipe depends upon, separated by spaces.
                    Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency
                    by adding it to the end of the layer name with a colon, (e.g. "anotherlayer:3"
                    to be compared against
                    LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer
                    in this case).
                    An error will be produced if any dependency is missing or
                    the version numbers do not match exactly (if specified).
                    This variable is used in the conf/layer.conf file
                    and must be suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
                    LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer).
                
                    When used inside the layer.conf configuration
                    file, this variable provides the path of the current layer.
                    This variable is not available outside of layer.conf
                    and references are expanded immediately when parsing of the file completes.
                
                    Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number.
                    You can use this within
                    LAYERDEPENDS
                    for another layer in order to depend on a specific version
                    of the layer.
                    This variable is used in the conf/layer.conf file
                    and must be suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
                    LAYERVERSION_mylayer).
                
The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker.
Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the compilation step.
                    Default initialization for LDFLAGS
                    varies depending on what is being built:
                    
                            TARGET_LDFLAGS
                            when building for the target
                            
                            BUILD_LDFLAGS
                            when building for the build host (i.e.
                            -native)
                            
                            BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS
                            when building for an SDK (i.e.
                            nativesdk-)
                            
                    Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file
                    (.so) that the
                    debian
                    class applies its naming policy to given a recipe that
                    packages multiple libraries.
                
                    This variable works in conjunction with the
                    debian class.
                
Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code.
This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any license change.
                    This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless
                    LICENSE
                    is set to "CLOSED").
For more information, see the " Tracking License Changes" section.
The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules:
Do not use spaces within individual license names.
Separate license names using | (pipe) when there is a choice between licenses.
Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses exist that cover different parts of the source.
You can use spaces between license names.
For standard licenses, use the names
                            of the files in
                            meta/files/common-licenses/
                            or the
                            SPDXLICENSEMAP
                            flag names defined in
                            meta/conf/licenses.conf.
                            
Here are some examples:
     LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3"
     LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1"
     LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
                    
                    The first example is from the recipes for Qt, which the user
                    may choose to distribute under either the LGPL version
                    2.1 or GPL version 3.
                    The second example is from Cairo where two licenses cover
                    different parts of the source code.
                    The final example is from sysstat,
                    which presents a single license.
                
You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle situations where components of the output have different licenses. For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2 but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows:
     LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2"
     LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2"
     LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2"
                    
                        Setting LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE
                        to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded build system to create
                        an extra package (i.e.
                        ${PN}-lic)
                        for each recipe and to add those packages to the
                        RRECOMMENDS_${PN}.
                
                    The ${PN}-lic package installs a
                    directory in /usr/share/licenses
                    named ${PN}, which is the recipe's
                    base name, and installs files in that directory that
                    contain license and copyright information (i.e. copies of
                    the appropriate license files from
                    meta/common-licenses that match the
                    licenses specified in the
                    LICENSE
                    variable of the recipe metadata and copies of files marked
                    in
                    LIC_FILES_CHKSUM
                    as containing license text).
                
                    For related information on providing license text, see the
                    COPY_LIC_DIRS
                    variable, the
                    COPY_LIC_MANIFEST
                    variable, and the
                    "Providing License Text"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must
                    whitelist through
                    LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST
                    in order to allow the recipe to be built.
                    When providing multiple flags, separate them with
                    spaces.
                
                    This value is independent of
                    LICENSE
                    and is typically used to mark recipes that might
                    require additional licenses in order to be used in a
                    commercial product.
                    For more information, see the
                    "Enabling Commercially Licensed Recipes"
                    section.
                
                    Lists license flags that when specified in
                    LICENSE_FLAGS
                    within a recipe should not prevent that recipe from being
                    built.
                    This practice is otherwise known as "whitelisting"
                    license flags.
                    For more information, see the
                    Enabling Commercially Licensed Recipes"
                    section.
                
                    Path to additional licenses used during the build.
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses COMMON_LICENSE_DIR
                    to define the directory that holds common license text used during the build.
                    The LICENSE_PATH variable allows you to extend that
                    location to other areas that have additional licenses:
                    
     LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses"
                    
Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" kernel types. See the "Kernel Types" section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on kernel types.
                    If you do not specify a
                    LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE, it defaults to
                    "standard".
                    Together with
                    KMACHINE,
                    the LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE variable
                    defines the search
                    arguments used by the kernel tools to find the appropriate
                    description within the kernel
                    Metadata
                    with which to build out the sources and configuration.
                    
                    The Linux version from kernel.org
                    on which the Linux kernel image being built using the
                    OpenEmbedded build system is based.
                    You define this variable in the kernel recipe.
                    For example, the linux-yocto-3.4.bb
                    kernel recipe found in
                    meta/recipes-kernel/linux
                    defines the variables as follows:
                    
     LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24"
                    
                    The LINUX_VERSION variable is used to
                    define PV
                    for the recipe:
                    
     PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}"
                    
A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel recipes all define the variable as follows:
     LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}"
                    
                    Defining this variable essentially sets the
                    Linux kernel configuration item
                    CONFIG_LOCALVERSION, which is visible
                    through the uname command.
                    Here is an example that shows the extension assuming it
                    was set as previously shown:
                    
     $ uname -r
     3.7.0-rc8-custom
                    
                    Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build
                    system writes overall log files.
                    The default directory is ${TMPDIR}/log.
                
                    For the directory containing logs specific to each task,
                    see the T
                    variable.
                
                    Specifies the target device for which the image is built.
                    You define MACHINE in the
                    local.conf file found in the
                    Build Directory.
                    By default, MACHINE is set to
                    "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to
                    be emulated using QEMU:
                    
     MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
                    
                    The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the
                    same name, through which machine-specific configurations are set.
                    Thus, when MACHINE is set to "qemux86" there
                    exists the corresponding qemux86.conf machine
                    configuration file, which can be found in the
                    Source Directory
                    in meta/conf/machine.
                
The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped include the following:
     MACHINE ?= "qemuarm"
     MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64"
     MACHINE ?= "qemumips"
     MACHINE ?= "qemumips64"
     MACHINE ?= "qemuppc"
     MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
     MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64"
     MACHINE ?= "genericx86"
     MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64"
     MACHINE ?= "beaglebone"
     MACHINE ?= "mpc8315e-rdb"
     MACHINE ?= "edgerouter"
                    
                    The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware boards, which
                    are provided in the meta-yocto-bsp layer.
                    
MACHINE.
                    
                    Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture.
                    This variable is set automatically from
                    MACHINE
                    or
                    TUNE_PKGARCH.
                    You should not hand-edit the
                    MACHINE_ARCH variable.
                
                    A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of
                    the image being built.
                    The build process depends on these packages being present.
                    Furthermore, because this is a "machine essential" variable, the list of
                    packages are essential for the machine to boot.
                    The impact of this variable affects images based on
                    packagegroup-core-boot,
                    including the core-image-minimal image.
                
                    This variable is similar to the
                    MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS
                    variable with the exception that the image being built has a build
                    dependency on the variable's list of packages.
                    In other words, the image will not build if a file in this list is not found.
                
                    As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building requires
                    example-init to be run during boot to initialize the hardware.
                    In this case, you would use the following in the machine's
                    .conf configuration file:
                    
     MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init"
                    
                    A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of
                    the image being built.
                    The build process does not depend on these packages being present.
                    However, because this is a "machine essential" variable, the list of
                    packages are essential for the machine to boot.
                    The impact of this variable affects images based on
                    packagegroup-core-boot,
                    including the core-image-minimal image.
                
                    This variable is similar to the
                    MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS
                    variable with the exception that the image being built does not have a build
                    dependency on the variable's list of packages.
                    In other words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not found.
                    Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel modules, whose
                    functionality may be selected to be built into the kernel rather than as a module,
                    in which case a package will not be produced.
                
                    Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific touchscreen
                    driver is required for the machine to be usable.
                    However, the driver can be built as a module or
                    into the kernel depending on the kernel configuration.
                    If the driver is built as a module, you want it to be installed.
                    But, when the driver is built into the kernel, you still want the
                    build to succeed.
                    This variable sets up a "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case,
                    the build will not fail due to the missing package.
                    To accomplish this, assuming the package for the module was called
                    kernel-module-ab123, you would use the
                    following in the machine's .conf configuration
                    file:
                    
     MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123"
                    
kernel-module-ab123 recipe
                        needs to explicitly set its
                        PACKAGES
                        variable to ensure that BitBake does not use the
                        kernel recipe's
                        PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                        variable to satisfy the dependency.
                    
Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen, keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine).
A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However, the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the packages being present.
                    This variable affects all images based on
                    packagegroup-base, which does not include the
                    core-image-minimal or core-image-full-cmdline
                    images.
                
                    The variable is similar to the
                    MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS
                    variable with the exception that the image being built has a build
                    dependency on the variable's list of packages.
                    In other words, the image will not build if a file in this list is not found.
                
                    An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not
                    essential for the machine to boot the image.
                    However, if you are building a more fully-featured image, you want to enable
                    the WiFi.
                    The package containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always
                    expected to exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon
                    finding the package.
                    In this case, assuming the package for the firmware was called
                    wifidriver-firmware, you would use the following in the
                    .conf file for the machine:
                    
     MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware"
                    
A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image being built has no build dependency on this list of packages.
                    This variable affects only images based on
                    packagegroup-base, which does not include the
                    core-image-minimal or core-image-full-cmdline
                    images.
                
                    This variable is similar to the
                    MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS
                    variable with the exception that the image being built does not have a build
                    dependency on the variable's list of packages.
                    In other words, the image will build if a file in this list is not found.
                
                    An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential
                    For the machine to boot the image.
                    However, if you are building a more fully-featured image, you want to enable
                    WiFi.
                    In this case, the package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced
                    if the WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want the
                    build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package not being found.
                    To accomplish this, assuming the package for the module was called
                    kernel-module-examplewifi, you would use the
                    following in the .conf file for the machine:
                    
     MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi"
                    
                    Specifies the list of hardware features the
                    MACHINE is capable
                    of supporting.
                    For related information on enabling features, see the
                    DISTRO_FEATURES,
                    COMBINED_FEATURES,
                    and
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    variables.
                
For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as shipped, see the "Machine Features" section.
                    Features to be added to
                    MACHINE_FEATURES
                    if not also present in
                    MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED.
                
                    This variable is set in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file.
                    It is not intended to be user-configurable.
                    It is best to just reference the variable to see which machine features are
                    being backfilled for all machine configurations.
                    See the "Feature backfilling" section for
                    more information.
                
                    Features from
                    MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL
                    that should not be backfilled (i.e. added to
                    MACHINE_FEATURES)
                    during the build.
                    See the "Feature backfilling" section for
                    more information.
                
                    Lists overrides specific to the current machine.
                    By default, this list includes the value
                    of MACHINE.
                    You can extend the list to apply variable overrides for
                    classes of machines.
                    For example, all QEMU emulated machines (e.g. qemuarm,
                    qemux86, and so forth) include a common file named
                    meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc
                    that prepends MACHINEOVERRIDES with
                    the following variable override:
                    
    MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:"
                    
                    Applying an override like qemuall
                    affects all QEMU emulated machines elsewhere.
                    Here is an example from the
                    connman-conf recipe:
                    
    SRC_URI_append_qemuall = "file://wired.config \
                              file://wired-setup \
                             "
                    
The email address of the distribution maintainer.
                    Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded
                    build system gets source code.
                    When the build system searches for source code, it first
                    tries the local download directory.
                    If that location fails, the build system tries locations
                    defined by
                    PREMIRRORS,
                    the upstream source, and then locations specified by
                    MIRRORS in that order.
                
                    Assuming your distribution
                    (DISTRO)
                    is "poky", the default value for
                    MIRRORS is defined in the
                    conf/distro/poky.conf file in the
                    meta-poky Git repository.
                
                    Specifies a prefix has been added to
                    PN to create a special version
                    of a recipe or package, such as a Multilib version.
                    The variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be
                    added to or removed from a the name (e.g. the
                    BPN variable).
                    MLPREFIX gets set when a prefix has been
                    added to PN.
                
                    This variable has been replaced by the
                    KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD variable.
                    You should replace all occurrences of
                    module_autoload with additions to
                    KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD, for example:
                    
     module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm"
                    
should now be replaced with:
     KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm"
                    
                    See the
                    KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
                    variable for more information.
                
                    Specifies
                    modprobe.d
                    syntax lines for inclusion in the
                    /etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf file.
                
                    You can use this variable anywhere that it can be
                    recognized by the kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel
                    module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a
                    distribution configuration file, an append file for the
                    recipe, or the recipe itself).
                    If you use this variable, you must also be sure to list
                    the module name in the
                    KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
                    variable.
                
Here is the general syntax:
     module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax"
                    You must use the kernel module name override.
                    Run man modprobe.d in the shell to
                    find out more information on the exact syntax
                    you want to provide with module_conf.
                
                    Including module_conf causes the
                    OpenEmbedded build system to populate the
                    /etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf
                    file with modprobe.d syntax lines.
                    Here is an example that adds the options
                    arg1 and arg2
                    to a module named mymodule:
                    
     module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2"
                    
                    For information on how to specify kernel modules to
                    auto-load on boot, see the
                    KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD
                    variable.
                
The base name of the kernel modules tarball. This variable is set in the kernel class as follows:
     MODULE_IMAGE_BASE_NAME ?= "modules-${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}-${DATETIME}"
                    
                    See the
                    PKGE,
                    PKGV,
                    PKGR,
                    MACHINE,
                    and
                    DATETIME
                    variables for additional information.
                
                    Controls creation of the modules-*.tgz
                    file.
                    Set this variable to "0" to disable creation of this
                    file, which contains all of the kernel modules resulting
                    from a kernel build.
                
                    Separates files for different machines such that you can build
                    for multiple target machines using the same output directories.
                    See the STAMP variable
                    for an example.
                
                    A string identifying the host distribution.
                    Strings consist of the host distributor ID
                    followed by the release, as reported by the
                    lsb_release tool
                    or as read from /etc/lsb-release.
                    For example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value
                    is "Ubuntu-12.10".
                    If this information is unable to be determined, the value
                    resolves to "Unknown".
                
                    This variable is used by default to isolate native shared
                    state packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid
                    problems with glibc version
                    incompatibilities).
                    Additionally, the variable is checked against
                    SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS
                    if that variable is set.
                
                    The minimal command and arguments to run
                    nm.
                
                    Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages.
                    Recommended-only packages are packages installed only
                    through the
                    RRECOMMENDS
                    variable).
                    Setting the NO_RECOMMENDATIONS variable
                    to "1" turns this feature on:
                    
     NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1"
                    
                    You can set this variable globally in your
                    local.conf file or you can attach it to
                    a specific image recipe by using the recipe name override:
                    
     NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name"
                    
                    It is important to realize that if you choose to not install
                    packages using this variable and some other packages are
                    dependent on them (i.e. listed in a recipe's
                    RDEPENDS
                    variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your
                    request and will install the packages to avoid dependency
                    errors.
                    
IMAGE_INSTALL
                        variable.
                    
Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
                    See the
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    and the
                    PACKAGE_EXCLUDE
                    variables for related information.
                
                    Causes the OpenEmbedded build system to skip building the
                    .hddimg image.
                    The NOHDD variable is used with the
                    image-live
                    class.
                    Set the variable to "1" to prevent the
                    .hddimg image from being built.
                
                    Causes the OpenEmbedded build system to skip building the
                    ISO image.
                    The NOISO variable is used with the
                    image-live
                    class.
                    Set the variable to "1" to prevent the ISO image from
                    being built.
                    To enable building an ISO image, set the variable to "0".
                
                    The minimal command and arguments to run
                    objcopy.
                
                    The minimal command and arguments to run
                    objdump.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    binconfig
                    class, this variable
                    specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed" command.
                    The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts
                    that have been set up during compilation.
                    Inheriting this class results in all paths in these scripts
                    being changed to point into the
                    sysroots/ directory so that all builds
                    that use the script will use the correct directories
                    for the cross compiling layout.
                
                    See the meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass
                    in the
                    Source Directory
                    for details on how this class applies these additional
                    sed command arguments.
                    For general information on the
                    binconfig.bbclass class, see the
                    "Binary Configuration Scripts - binconfig.bbclass"
                    section.
                
An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system.
The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default value is "oe-init-build-env".
                    If you use a custom script to set up your build
                    environment, set the
                    OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT variable to its
                    name.
                
                    Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns
                    interactive terminals on the host development system
                    (e.g. using the BitBake command with the
                    -c devshell command-line option).
                    For more information, see the
                    "Using a Development Shell" section
                    in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                 
                    You can use the following values for the
                    OE_TERMINAL variable:
                    
     auto
     gnome
     xfce
     rxvt
     screen
     konsole
     none
                    
                    The directory from which the top-level build environment
                    setup script is sourced.
                    The Yocto Project makes two top-level build environment
                    setup scripts available:
                    oe-init-build-env
                    and
                    oe-init-build-env-memres.
                    When you run one of these scripts, the
                    OEROOT variable resolves to the
                    directory that contains the script.
                
For additional information on how this variable is used, see the initialization scripts.
                    Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the
                    produced binaries must support.
                    This variable is passed into the build of the Embedded
                    GNU C Library (glibc).
                
                    The default for this variable comes from the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration
                    file.
                    You can override this default by setting the variable
                    in a custom distribution configuration file.
                
                    BitBake uses OVERRIDES to control
                    what variables are overridden after BitBake parses
                    recipes and configuration files.
                    You can find more information on how overrides are handled
                    in the
                    "Conditional Syntax (Overrides)"
                    section of the BitBake User Manual.
                
                    The recipe name and version.
                    P is comprised of the following:
                    
     ${PN}-${PV}
                    
The architecture of the resulting package or packages.
                    By default, the value of this variable is set to
                    TUNE_PKGARCH
                    when building for the target,
                    BUILD_ARCH when building for the
                    build host and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building
                    for the SDK.
                    However, if your recipe's output packages are built
                    specific to the target machine rather than general for
                    the architecture of the machine, you should set
                    PACKAGE_ARCH to the value of
                    MACHINE_ARCH
                    in the recipe as follows:
                    
     PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
                    
                    Specifies a list of architectures compatible with
                    the target machine.
                    This variable is set automatically and should not
                    normally be hand-edited.
                    Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
                    of priority.
                    The default value for
                    PACKAGE_ARCHS is "all any noarch
                    ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}".
                
                    Enables easily adding packages to
                    PACKAGES
                    before ${PN}
                    so that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be
                    included in the default package.
                
                    This variable, which is set in the
                    local.conf configuration file found in
                    the conf folder of the
                    Build Directory,
                    specifies the package manager the OpenEmbedded build system
                    uses when packaging data.
                
You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the variable:
     PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk package_tar"
                    
package_tar class is broken
                        and is not supported.
                        It is recommended that you do not use it.
                    
                    The build system uses only the first argument in the list
                    as the package manager when creating your image or SDK.
                    However, packages will be created using any additional
                    packaging classes you specify.
                    For example, if you use the following in your
                    local.conf file:
                    
     PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk"
                    The OpenEmbedded build system uses the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK.
                    For information on packaging and build performance effects
                    as a result of the package manager in use, see the
                    "package.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    Determines how to split up the binary and debug information
                    when creating *-dbg packages to be
                    used with the GNU Project Debugger (GDB).
                
                    With the
                    PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE variable,
                    you can control where debug information, which can include
                    or exclude source files, is stored:
                    
                            ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next
                            to the binary in a .debug
                            directory on the target.
                            For example, if a binary is installed into
                            /bin, the corresponding debug
                            symbol files are installed in
                            /bin/.debug.
                            Source files are placed in
                            /usr/src/debug.
                            This is the default behavior.
                            
                            "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are
                            placed under /usr/lib/debug
                            on the target, and separated by the path from where
                            the binary is installed.
                            For example, if a binary is installed in
                            /bin, the corresponding debug
                            symbols are installed in
                            /usr/lib/debug/bin.
                            Source files are placed in
                            /usr/src/debug.
                            
"debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously described with the exception that no source files are installed.
You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the "Debugging With the GNU Project Debugger (GDB) Remotely" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are installing complementary packages.
                    You might find that you want to prevent installing certain
                    packages when you are installing complementary packages.
                    For example, if you are using
                    IMAGE_FEATURES
                    to install dev-pkgs, you might not want
                    to install all packages from a particular multilib.
                    If you find yourself in this situation, you can use the
                    PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY variable
                    to specify regular expressions to match the packages you
                    want to exclude.
                
Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For example:
     PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
                    
                    You can set this variable globally in your
                    local.conf file or you can attach it to
                    a specific image recipe by using the recipe name override:
                    
     PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name"
                    
                    If you choose to not install
                    a package using this variable and some other package is
                    dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's
                    RDEPENDS
                    variable), the OpenEmbedded build system generates a fatal
                    installation error.
                    Because the build system halts the process with a fatal
                    error, you can use the variable with an iterative
                    development process to remove specific components from a
                    system.
                
Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
                    See the
                    NO_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    and the
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS
                    variables for related information.
                
Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU. This variable is useful when you build for several different devices that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS.
                    Specifies the package architectures used as part of the
                    package feed URIs during the build.
                    The PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS variable is
                    appended to the final package feed URI, which is constructed
                    using the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                    and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS
                    variables.
                
                    Consider the following example where the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS,
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS variables are
                    defined in your local.conf file:
                    
     PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
                          https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
     PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
     PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
                    Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
                    
                    Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed
                    URIs.
                    The PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS variable
                    makes up the middle portion of a package feed URI used
                    by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    The base path lies between the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS
                    and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS
                    variables.
                
                    Consider the following example where the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS,
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS variables are
                    defined in your local.conf file:
                    
     PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
                          https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
     PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
     PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
                    Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
                    
                    Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI
                    used by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    Each final package feed URI is comprised of
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS,
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS,
                    and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS
                    variables.
                
                    Consider the following example where the
                    PACKAGE_FEED_URIS,
                    PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS, and
                    PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS variables are
                    defined in your local.conf file:
                    
     PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
                          https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
     PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
     PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
                    Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
     https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
                    
                    The PACKAGE_GROUP variable has been
                    renamed to
                    FEATURE_PACKAGES.
                    See the variable description for
                    FEATURE_PACKAGES for information.
                
                    If if you use the PACKAGE_GROUP
                    variable, the OpenEmbedded build system issues a warning
                    message.
                
The final list of packages passed to the package manager for installation into the image.
                    Because the package manager controls actual installation
                    of all packages, the list of packages passed using
                    PACKAGE_INSTALL is not the final list
                    of packages that are actually installed.
                    This variable is internal to the image construction
                    code.
                    Consequently, in general, you should use the
                    IMAGE_INSTALL
                    variable to specify packages for installation.
                    The exception to this is when working with
                    the
                    core-image-minimal-initramfs
                    image.
                    When working with an initial RAM disk (initramfs)
                    image, use the PACKAGE_INSTALL
                    variable.
                
Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable is generally not user-defined.
                    Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the
                    PKGD
                    directory prior to splitting the files out to individual
                    packages.
                
                    This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling
                    features of a recipe on a per-recipe basis.
                    PACKAGECONFIG blocks are defined
                    in recipes when you specify features and then arguments
                    that define feature behaviors.
                    Here is the basic block structure:
                    
     PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..."
     PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "--with-f1,--without-f1,build-deps-f1,rt-deps-f1"
     PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "--with-f2,--without-f2,build-deps-f2,rt-deps-f2"
     PACKAGECONFIG[f3] = "--with-f3,--without-f3,build-deps-f3,rt-deps-f3"
                    
                    The PACKAGECONFIG
                    variable itself specifies a space-separated list of the
                    features to enable.
                    Following the features, you can determine the behavior of
                    each feature by providing up to four order-dependent
                    arguments, which are separated by commas.
                    You can omit any argument you like but must retain the
                    separating commas.
                    The order is important and specifies the following:
                    
Extra arguments
                            that should be added to the configure script
                            argument list
                            (EXTRA_OECONF)
                            if the feature is enabled.
Extra arguments
                            that should be added to EXTRA_OECONF
                            if the feature is disabled.
                            
Additional build dependencies
                            (DEPENDS)
                            that should be added if the feature is enabled.
                            
Additional runtime dependencies
                            (RDEPENDS)
                            that should be added if the feature is enabled.
                            
                    Consider the following
                    PACKAGECONFIG block taken from the
                    librsvg recipe.
                    In this example the feature is croco,
                    which has three arguments that determine the feature's
                    behavior.
                    
     PACKAGECONFIG ??= "croco"
     PACKAGECONFIG[croco] = "--with-croco,--without-croco,libcroco"
                    
                    The --with-croco and
                    libcroco arguments apply only if
                    the feature is enabled.
                    In this case, --with-croco is
                    added to the configure script argument list and
                    libcroco is added to
                    DEPENDS.
                    On the other hand, if the feature is disabled say through
                    a .bbappend file in another layer, then
                    the second argument --without-croco is
                    added to the configure script rather than
                    --with-croco.
                
                    The basic PACKAGECONFIG structure
                    previously described holds true regardless of whether you
                    are creating a block or changing a block.
                    When creating a block, use the structure inside your
                    recipe.
                
                    If you want to change an existing
                    PACKAGECONFIG block, you can do so
                    one of two ways:
                    
Append file:
                            Create an append file named
                            recipename.bbappend
                            in your layer and override the value of
                            PACKAGECONFIG.
                            You can either completely override the variable:
                            
     PACKAGECONFIG="f4 f5"
                            Or, you can just append the variable:
     PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4"
                            Configuration file:
                            This method is identical to changing the block
                            through an append file except you edit your
                            local.conf or
                            mydistro.conf
     PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename="f4 f5"
                            Or, you can just amend the variable:
     PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4"
                            
                    For recipes inheriting the
                    packagegroup
                    class, setting
                    PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY to
                    "1" specifies that the normal complementary packages
                    (i.e. -dev,
                    -dbg, and so forth) should not be
                    automatically created by the
                    packagegroup recipe, which is the
                    default behavior.
                
The list of packages to be created from the recipe. The default value is the following:
     ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}
                    
                    A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies
                    for optional modules that are found in other recipes.
                    PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                    does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it only states that
                    they should be satisfied.
                    For example, if a hard, runtime dependency
                    (RDEPENDS)
                    of another package is satisfied
                    at build time through the PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                    variable, but a package with the module name is never actually
                    produced, then the other package will be broken.
                    Thus, if you attempt to include that package in an image,
                    you will get a dependency failure from the packaging system
                    during the
                    do_rootfs
                    task.
                
                    Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can
                    occur and the package that is not created is valid
                    without the dependency being satisfied, then you should use
                    RRECOMMENDS
                    (a soft runtime dependency) instead of
                    RDEPENDS.
                
                    For an example of how to use the PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                    variable when you are splitting packages, see the
                    "Handling Optional Module Packaging" section
                    in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                
                    Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional
                    splitting of files into individual packages.
                    Recipes can either prepend to this variable or prepend
                    to the populate_packages function
                    in order to perform additional package splitting.
                    In either case, the function should set
                    PACKAGES,
                    FILES,
                    RDEPENDS
                    and other packaging variables appropriately in order to
                    perform the desired splitting.
                
                    Extra options passed to the make
                    command during the
                    do_compile
                    task in order to specify parallel compilation on the local
                    build host.
                    This variable is usually in the form "-j x",
                    where x represents the maximum
                    number of parallel threads make can
                    run.
                
By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses.
do_compile
                        task that result in race conditions, you can clear
                        the PARALLEL_MAKE variable within
                        the recipe as a workaround.
                        For information on addressing race conditions, see the
                        "Debugging Parallel Make Races"
                        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                    
                    For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not
                    have to override this variable to gain optimal parallelism
                    during builds.
                    However, if you have very large systems that employ
                    multiple physical CPUs, you might want to make sure the
                    PARALLEL_MAKE variable is not
                    set higher than "-j 20".
                
For more information on speeding up builds, see the "Speeding Up the Build" section.
                    Extra options passed to the
                    make install command during the
                    do_install
                    task in order to specify parallel installation.
                    This variable defaults to the value of
                    PARALLEL_MAKE.
                    
do_install task that result in
                        race conditions, you can clear the
                        PARALLEL_MAKEINST variable within
                        the recipe as a workaround.
                        For information on addressing race conditions, see the
                        "Debugging Parallel Make Races"
                        section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                    
Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user".
The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the conflicts.
                    Set this variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                
                    Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe
                    during the
                    do_patch
                    task.
                    You can specify one of three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or
                    "git".
                    The default utility used is "quilt" except for the
                    quilt-native recipe itself.
                    Because the quilt tool is not available at the
                    time quilt-native is being patched, it uses "patch".
                
If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in the recipe using one of the following:
     PATCHTOOL = "patch"
     PATCHTOOL = "quilt"
     PATCHTOOL = "git"
                    
The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme changes in some backwards incompatible way.
                    Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and revision
                    numbers (i.e. glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/ and
                    bash-4.2-r1/).
                    This variable is comprised of the following:
                    
     ${PN}-${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    pixbufcache
                    class, this variable identifies packages that contain
                    the pixbuf loaders used with
                    gdk-pixbuf.
                    By default, the pixbufcache class
                    assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package
                    (i.e. ${PN}).
                    Use this variable if the loaders you need are in a package
                    other than that main package.
                
The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build system.
PKG variable, you
                        must use a package name override.
                    
                    For example, when the
                    debian
                    class renames the output package, it does so by setting
                    PKG_.
                packagename
                    The path to pkg-config files for the
                    current build context.
                    pkg-config reads this variable
                    from the environment.
                
Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to the following:
     ${WORKDIR}/package
                    
Do not change this default.
                    Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data
                    generated during the packaging process.
                    During the packaging process, the
                    do_packagedata
                    task packages data for each recipe and installs it into
                    this temporary, shared area.
                    This directory defaults to the following:
                    
     ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata
                    
Do not change this default.
Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to the following:
     ${WORKDIR}/packages-split
                    
                    Under this directory, the build system creates
                    directories for each package specified in
                    PACKAGES.
                    Do not change this default.
                
                    Points to a temporary work area used by the
                    do_package
                    task to write output from the
                    do_packagedata
                    task.
                    The PKGDESTWORK location defaults to
                    the following:
                    
     ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata
                    
                    The do_packagedata task then packages
                    the data in the temporary work area and installs it into a
                    shared directory pointed to by
                    PKGDATA_DIR.
                
Do not change this default.
                    The epoch of the output package built by the
                    OpenEmbedded build system.
                    By default, PKGE is set to
                    PE.
                
                    The revision of the output package built by the
                    OpenEmbedded build system.
                    By default, PKGR is set to
                    PR.
                
                    The version of the output package built by the
                    OpenEmbedded build system.
                    By default, PKGV is set to
                    PV.
                 
This variable can have two separate functions depending on the context: a recipe name or a resulting package name.
                    PN refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used
                    by the OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package.
                    The name is normally extracted from the recipe file name.
                    For example, if the recipe is named
                    expat_2.0.1.bb, then the default value of PN
                    will be "expat".
                
The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    If applicable, the PN variable also contains any special
                    suffix or prefix.
                    For example, using bash to build packages for the native
                    machine, PN is bash-native.
                    Using bash to build packages for the target and for Multilib,
                    PN would be bash and
                    lib64-bash, respectively.
                
                    Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system
                    to build.
                    This variable works in conjunction with the
                    blacklist
                    class, which the recipe must inherit globally.
                
                    To prevent a recipe from being built, inherit the class
                    globally and use the variable in your
                    local.conf file.
                    Here is an example that prevents
                    myrecipe from being built:
                    
     INHERIT += "blacklist"
     PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization."
                    
Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the SDK path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${SDK_DIR}, which points to
                    the parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build
                    system when creating SDK output.
                    See the
                    SDK_DIR
                    variable for more information.
                
Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the SDK path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${SDK_DIR}, which points to
                    the parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build
                    system when creating SDK output.
                    See the
                    SDK_DIR
                    variable for more information.
                
                    The revision of the recipe. The default value for this
                    variable is "r0".
                    Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the
                    values "r1", "r2", and so forth.
                    When
                    PV
                    increases, PR is conventionally reset
                    to "r0".
                    
PR to know when to rebuild a
                        recipe.
                        The build system uses
                        STAMP
                        and the
                        shared state cache
                        mechanisms.
                    
                    The PR variable primarily becomes
                    significant when a package manager dynamically installs
                    packages on an already built image.
                    In this case, PR, which is the default
                    value of
                    PKGR,
                    helps the package manager distinguish which package is the
                    most recent one in cases where many packages have the same
                    PV (i.e. PKGV).
                    A component having many packages with the same
                    PV usually means that the packages all
                    install the same upstream version, but with later
                    (PR) version packages including
                    packaging fixes.
                    
PR does not need to be increased
                        for changes that do not change the package contents or
                        metadata.
                    
                    Because manually managing PR can be
                    cumbersome and error-prone, an automated solution exists.
                    See the
                    "Working With a PR Service"
                    section for more information.
                
                    If multiple recipes provide an item, this variable
                    determines which recipe should be given preference.
                    You should always suffix the variable with the name of the
                    provided item, and you should set it to the
                    PN
                    of the recipe to which you want to give precedence.
                    Some examples:
                    
     PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto"
     PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86"
     PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa"
                    
PREFERRED_PROVIDER
                        for a virtual/* item, then any
                        recipe that
                        PROVIDES
                        that item that is not selected by
                        PREFERRED_PROVIDER is prevented
                        from building, which is usually desirable since this
                        mechanism is designed to select between mutually
                        exclusive alternative providers.
                    
                    If there are multiple versions of recipes available, this
                    variable determines which recipe should be given preference.
                    You must always suffix the variable with the
                    PN
                    you want to select, and you should set the
                    PV
                    accordingly for precedence.
                    You can use the "%" character as a
                    wildcard to match any number of characters, which can be
                    useful when specifying versions that contain long revision
                    numbers that could potentially change.
                    Here are two examples:
                    
     PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "2.7.3"
     PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "3.19%"
                    
                    Sometimes the PREFERRED_VERSION
                    variable can be set by configuration files in a way that
                    is hard to change.
                    You can use
                    OVERRIDES
                    to set a machine-specific override.
                    Here is an example:
                    
     PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "3.4%"
                    Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible. Here is an example:
     PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "3.4%"
                    
                    Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded
                    build system gets source code.
                    When the build system searches for source code, it first
                    tries the local download directory.
                    If that location fails, the build system tries locations
                    defined by PREMIRRORS, the upstream
                    source, and then locations specified by
                    MIRRORS
                    in that order.
                
                    Assuming your distribution
                    (DISTRO)
                    is "poky", the default value for
                    PREMIRRORS is defined in the
                    conf/distro/poky.conf file in the
                    meta-poky Git repository.
                
                    Typically, you could add a specific server for the
                    build system to attempt before any others by adding
                    something like the following to the
                    local.conf configuration file in the
                    Build Directory:
                    
     PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\
     git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n"
                    
                    These changes cause the build system to intercept
                    Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and direct them to
                    the http:// sources mirror.
                    You can use file:// URLs to point
                    to local directories or network shares as well.
                
Indicates the importance of a package.
                    PRIORITY is considered to be part of
                    the distribution policy because the importance of any given
                    recipe depends on the purpose for which the distribution
                    is being produced.
                    Thus, PRIORITY is not normally set
                    within recipes.
                
                    You can set PRIORITY to "required",
                    "standard", "extra", and "optional", which is the default.
                
Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has its own private versions of a library normally provided by another recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated packages that should instead depend on the package providing the standard version of the library.
Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser:
     PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \
                     libxpcom.so \
                     libnspr4.so \
                     libxul.so \
                     libmozalloc.so \
                     libplc4.so \
                     libplds4.so"
                    
                    A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be
                    known.
                    By default, a recipe's own
                    PN
                    is implicitly already in its PROVIDES
                    list.
                    If a recipe uses PROVIDES, the
                    additional aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can
                    be useful satisfying dependencies of other recipes during
                    the build as specified by
                    DEPENDS.
                
                    Consider the following example
                    PROVIDES statement from a recipe
                    file libav_0.8.11.bb:
                    
     PROVIDES += "libpostproc"
                    
                    The PROVIDES statement results in
                    the "libav" recipe also being known as "libpostproc".
                
                    The network based
                    PR
                    service host and port.
                
                    The conf/local.conf.sample.extended
                    configuration file in the
                    Source Directory
                    shows how the PRSERV_HOST variable is
                    set:
                    
     PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
                    
                    You must set the variable if you want to automatically
                    start a local
                    PR service.
                    You can set PRSERV_HOST to other
                    values to use a remote PR service.
                
                    Specifies whether or not
                    Package Test
                    (ptest) functionality is enabled when building a recipe.
                    You should not set this variable directly.
                    Enabling and disabling building Package Tests
                    at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or
                    removing it from)
                    DISTRO_FEATURES.
                 
                    The version of the recipe.
                    The version is normally extracted from the recipe filename.
                    For example, if the recipe is named
                    expat_2.0.1.bb, then the default value of PV
                    will be "2.0.1".
                    PV is generally not overridden within
                    a recipe unless it is building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code repository
                    (e.g. Git or Subversion).
                 
                    When used by recipes that inherit the
                    distutils3,
                    setuptools3,
                    distutils,
                    or
                    setuptools
                    classes, denotes the Application Binary Interface (ABI)
                    currently in use for Python.
                    By default, the ABI is "m".
                    You do not have to set this variable as the OpenEmbedded
                    build system sets it for you.
                
                    The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct
                    directory names used when installing the Python headers
                    and libraries in sysroot
                    (e.g. .../python3.3m/...).
                
                    Recipes that inherit the
                    distutils
                    class during cross-builds also use this variable to
                    locate the headers and libraries of the appropriate Python
                    that the extension is targeting.
                
                    When used by recipes that inherit the
                    distutils3,
                    setuptools3,
                    distutils,
                    or
                    setuptools
                    classes, specifies the major Python version being built.
                    For Python 2.x, PYTHON_PN would
                    be "python2".  For Python 3.x, the variable would be
                    "python3".
                    You do not have to set this variable as the
                    OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you.
                
The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the following:
     DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native"
                    
                    In the previous example, the version of the dependency
                    is PYTHON_PN.
                
                    The minimal command and arguments to run
                    ranlib.
                
The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed.
Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
     RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name"
                   
                    BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
                    specifying versioned dependencies.
                    Although the syntax varies depending on the packaging
                    format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
                    Here is the general syntax to specify versions with
                    the RCONFLICTS variable:
                    
     RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
                    
                    For operator, you can specify the
                    following:
                    
     =
     <
     >
     <=
     >=
                    
                    For example, the following sets up a dependency on version
                    1.2 or greater of the package foo:
                    
     RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
                    
Lists a package's runtime dependencies (i.e. other packages) that must be installed in order for the built package to run correctly. If a package in this list cannot be found during the build, you will get a build error.
                    When you use the RDEPENDS variable
                    in a recipe, you are essentially stating that the recipe's
                    do_build
                    task depends on the existence of a specific package.
                    Consider this simple example for two recipes named "a" and
                    "b" that produce similarly named IPK packages.
                    In this example, the RDEPENDS
                    statement appears in the "a" recipe:
                    
     RDEPENDS_${PN} = "b"
                    
                    Here, the dependency is such that the
                    do_build task for recipe "a" depends
                    on the
                    do_package_write_ipk
                    task of recipe "b".
                    This means the package file for "b" must be available when
                    the output for recipe "a" has been completely built.
                    More importantly, package "a" will be marked as depending
                    on package "b" in a manner that is understood by the
                    package manager.
                
                    The names of the packages you list within
                    RDEPENDS must be the names of other
                    packages - they cannot be recipe names.
                    Although package names and recipe names usually match,
                    the important point here is that you are
                    providing package names within the
                    RDEPENDS variable.
                    For an example of the default list of packages created from
                    a recipe, see the
                    PACKAGES
                    variable.
                
                    Because the RDEPENDS variable applies
                    to packages being built, you should always use the variable
                    in a form with an attached package name.
                    For example, suppose you are building a development package
                    that depends on the perl package.
                    In this case, you would use the following
                    RDEPENDS statement:
                    
     RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl"
                    
                    In the example, the development package depends on
                    the perl package.
                    Thus, the RDEPENDS variable has the
                    ${PN}-dev package name as part of the
                    variable.
                
                    The package name you attach to the
                    RDEPENDS variable must appear
                    as it would in the PACKAGES
                    namespace before any renaming of the output package by
                    classes like
                    debian.
                
                    In many cases you do not need to explicitly add
                    runtime dependencies using
                    RDEPENDS since some automatic
                    handling occurs:
                    
shlibdeps:
                            If a runtime package contains a compiled binary,
                            the build processes the binary in order to
                            determine any shared libraries
                            (.so files) to which it is
                            dynamically linked.
                            The build process adds the packages containing
                            these libraries to RDEPENDS
                            when creating the runtime package.
                            In addition, if the shared library is versioned,
                            the dependency will have the version appended to it
                            in order to force an upgrade to the appropriate
                            version if needed.
                            
pcdeps:  If
                            the package ships a pkg-config
                            information file, the build process uses this file
                            to add items to the RDEPENDS
                            variable to create the runtime packages.
                            
                    BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
                    specifying versioned dependencies.
                    Although the syntax varies depending on the packaging
                    format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
                    Here is the general syntax to specify versions with
                    the RDEPENDS variable:
                    
     RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
                    
                    For operator, you can specify the
                    following:
                    
     =
     <
     >
     <=
     >=
                    
                    For example, the following sets up a dependency on version
                    1.2 or greater of the package foo:
                    
     RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
                    
                    For information on build-time dependencies, see the
                    DEPENDS
                    variable.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    distro_features_check
                    class, this
                    variable identifies distribution features that must
                    exist in the current configuration in order for the
                    OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe.
                    In other words, if the
                    REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES variable
                    lists a feature that does not appear in
                    DISTRO_FEATURES within the
                    current configuration, an error occurs and the
                    build stops.
                
                    Reclaims disk space by removing previously built
                    versions of the same image from the
                    images directory pointed to by the
                    DEPLOY_DIR
                    variable.
                
                    Set this variable to "1" in your
                    local.conf file to remove these
                    images.
                
                    With rm_work enabled, this
                    variable specifies a list of recipes whose work directories
                    should not be removed.
                    See the "rm_work.bbclass"
                    section for more details.
                
Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as follows in the BitBake configuration file:
     ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root"
                    
                    You can override the default by setting the variable
                    in any layer or in the local.conf file.
                    Because the default is set using a "weak" assignment
                    (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms
                    to define your override:
                    
     ROOT_HOME = "/root"
     ROOT_HOME ?= "/root"
                    
                    These override examples use /root,
                    which is probably the most commonly used override.
                
Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem.
                    The ROOTFS variable is an optional
                    variable used with the
                    image-live
                    class.
                
Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
                    Specifies a list of functions to call after the
                    OpenEmbedded build system has removed unnecessary
                    packages.
                    When runtime package management is disabled in the
                    image, several packages are removed including
                    base-passwd,
                    shadow, and
                    update-alternatives.
                    You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
                    
     ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command
                    within a function, you can use
                    ${IMAGE_ROOTFS}, which points to
                    the directory that becomes the root filesystem image.
                    See the
                    IMAGE_ROOTFS
                    variable for more information.
                
                    A list of package name aliases that a package also provides.
                    These aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies
                    of other packages both during the build and on the target
                    (as specified by
                    RDEPENDS).
                    
RPROVIDES list.
                    
As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
     RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2"
                   
                    A list of packages that extends the usability of a package
                    being built.
                    The package being built does not depend on this list of
                    packages in order to successfully build, but rather
                    uses them for extended usability.
                    To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see the
                    RDEPENDS
                    variable.
                
                    The package manager will automatically install the
                    RRECOMMENDS list of packages when
                    installing the built package.
                    However, you can prevent listed packages from being
                    installed by using the
                    BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS,
                    NO_RECOMMENDATIONS,
                    and
                    PACKAGE_EXCLUDE
                    variables.
                
                    Packages specified in
                    RRECOMMENDS need not actually be
                    produced.
                    However, a recipe must exist that provides each package,
                    either through the
                    PACKAGES
                    or
                    PACKAGES_DYNAMIC
                    variables or the
                    RPROVIDES
                    variable, or an error will occur during the build.
                    If such a recipe does exist and the package is not produced,
                    the build continues without error.
                
                    Because the RRECOMMENDS variable
                    applies to packages being built, you should always attach
                    an override to the variable to specify the particular
                    package whose usability is being extended.
                    For example, suppose you are building a development package
                    that is extended to support wireless functionality.
                    In this case, you would use the following:
                    
     RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name"
                    
                    In the example, the package name
                    (${PN}-dev)
                    must appear as it would in the
                    PACKAGES
                    namespace before any renaming of the output package by
                    classes such as debian.bbclass.
                
                    BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
                    specifying versioned recommends.
                    Although the syntax varies depending on the packaging
                    format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
                    Here is the general syntax to specify versions with
                    the RRECOMMENDS variable:
                    
     RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
                    
                    For operator, you can specify the
                    following:
                    
     =
     <
     >
     <=
     >=
                    
                    For example, the following sets up a recommend on version
                    1.2 or greater of the package foo:
                    
     RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
                    
                    A list of packages replaced by a package.
                    The package manager uses this variable to determine which
                    package should be installed to replace other package(s)
                    during an upgrade.
                    In order to also have the other package(s) removed at the
                    same time, you must add the name of the other
                    package to the
                    RCONFLICTS variable.
                
As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
     RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced"
                   
                    BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
                    specifying versioned replacements.
                    Although the syntax varies depending on the packaging
                    format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
                    Here is the general syntax to specify versions with
                    the RREPLACES variable:
                    
     RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
                    
                    For operator, you can specify the
                    following:
                    
     =
     <
     >
     <=
     >=
                    
                    For example, the following sets up a replacement using
                    version 1.2 or greater of the package
                    foo:
                    
     RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
                    
A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all package managers support this functionality.
As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
     RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package"
                   
                    The location in the
                    Build Directory
                    where unpacked recipe source code resides.
                    By default, this directory is
                    ${WORKDIR}/${BPN}-${PV},
                    where ${BPN} is the base recipe name
                    and ${PV} is the recipe version.
                    If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory
                    named anything other than ${BPN}-${PV},
                    or if the source code if fetched from an SCM such as
                    Git or Subversion, then you must set S
                    in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system
                    knows where to find the unpacked source.
                
                    As an example, assume a
                    Source Directory
                    top-level folder named poky and a
                    default Build Directory at poky/build.
                    In this case, the work directory the build system uses
                    to keep the unpacked recipe for db
                    is the following:
                    
     poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19
                    
                    The unpacked source code resides in the
                    db-5.1.19 folder.
                
                    This next example assumes a Git repository.
                    By default, Git repositories are cloned to
                    ${WORKDIR}/git during
                    do_fetch.
                    Since this path is different from the default value of
                    S, you must set it specifically
                    so the source can be located:
                    
     SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git"
     S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
                    
Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then BitBake immediately exits with an error.
                    A list of the host distribution identifiers that the
                    build system has been tested against.
                    Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID
                    followed by the release,
                    as reported by the lsb_release tool
                    or as read from /etc/lsb-release.
                    Separate the list items with explicit newline
                    characters (\n).
                    If SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS is not empty
                    and the current value of
                    NATIVELSBSTRING
                    does not appear in the list, then the build system reports
                    a warning that indicates the current host distribution has
                    not been tested as a build host.
                
                    The target architecture for the SDK.
                    Typically, you do not directly set this variable.
                    Instead, use
                    SDKMACHINE.
                
                    The directory set up and used by the
                    populate_sdk_base
                    to which the SDK is deployed.
                    The populate_sdk_base class defines
                    SDK_DEPLOY as follows:
                    
     SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk"
                    
                    The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system
                    when creating SDK output.
                    The
                    populate_sdk_base
                    class defines the variable as follows:
                    
     SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk"
                    
SDK_DIR directory is a
                        temporary directory as it is part of
                        WORKDIR.
                        The final output directory is
                        SDK_DEPLOY.
                    
Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK.
SSTATE_MIRRORS
                        is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the
                        artifacts to be fetched as needed.
                    
The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all the installed packages that make up the host part of SDK. The file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as follows:
     packagename packagearch version
                    
                    The
                    populate_sdk_base
                    class defines the manifest file as follows:
                    
     SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest"
                    
                    The location is derived using the
                    SDK_DEPLOY
                    and
                    TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME
                    variables.
                
                    When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for
                    all recipes in the "world" target in the extensible SDK.
                    Including this data allows the
                    devtool search command to find these
                    recipes in search results, as well as allows the
                    devtool add command to map
                    dependencies more effectively.
                    
SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA
                        variable significantly increases build time because
                        all of world needs to be built.
                        Enabling the variable also slightly increases the size
                        of the extensible SDK.
                    
                    A list of classes to remove from the
                    INHERIT
                    value globally within the extensible SDK configuration.
                    The default value is "buildhistory icecc".
                
Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK context and you can use this variable to disable them.
A list of variables not allowed through from the build system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually, these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic within the extensible SDK.
                    A list of variables allowed through from the build system
                    configuration into the extensible SDK configuration.
                    This list overrides the variables specified using the
                    SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST
                    variable as well as any variables identified by automatic
                    blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the
                    start of the value, which is usually indicative of being a
                    path and thus might not be valid on the system where the
                    SDK is installed.
                
                    The base name for SDK output files.
                    The name is derived from the
                    DISTRO,
                    TCLIBC,
                    SDK_ARCH,
                    IMAGE_BASENAME,
                    and
                    TUNE_PKGARCH
                    variables:
                    
     SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
                    
                    Specifies the operating system for which the SDK
                    will be built.
                    The default value is the value of
                    BUILD_OS.
                
                    The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when
                    creating SDK output.
                    The
                    populate_sdk_base
                    class defines the variable as follows:
                    
     SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image"
                    
SDK_OUTPUT directory is a
                        temporary directory as it is part of
                        WORKDIR by way of
                        SDK_DIR.
                        The final output directory is
                        SDK_DEPLOY.
                    
                    Specifies a list of architectures compatible with
                    the SDK machine.
                    This variable is set automatically and should not
                    normally be hand-edited.
                    Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
                    of priority.
                    The default value for
                    SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS is "all any noarch
                    ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}".
                
Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build system has created the SDK. You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
     SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
                    
                    If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a
                    function, you can use
                    ${SDK_DIR}, which points to
                    the parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system
                    when creating SDK output.
                    See the
                    SDK_DIR
                    variable for more information.
                
                    The toolchain binary prefix used for
                    nativesdk recipes.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system uses the
                    SDK_PREFIX value to set the
                    TARGET_PREFIX
                    when building nativesdk recipes.
                    The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-".
                
A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default, the following tasks are added:
     do_populate_lic
     do_package_qa
     do_populate_sysroot
     do_deploy
                    
                    Despite the default value of "" for the
                    SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS variable, the
                    above four tasks are always added to the SDK.
                    To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use
                    the SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS variable (e.g.
                    you are defining additional tasks that are needed in
                    order to build
                    SDK_TARGETS).
                
Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating system, for which the SDK will be built.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
                    variable based on
                    SDK_ARCH,
                    SDK_VENDOR,
                    and
                    SDK_OS.
                    You do not need to set the SDK_SYS
                    variable yourself.
                
The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as follows:
     packagename packagearch version
                    
                    The
                    populate_sdk_base
                    class defines the manifest file as follows:
                    
     SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest"
                    
                    The location is derived using the
                    SDK_DEPLOY
                    and
                    TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME
                    variables.
                
A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}" (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built).
                    The SDK_TARGETS variable is an
                    internal variable and typically would not be changed.
                
                    Specifies a title to be printed when running the SDK
                    installer.
                    The SDK_TITLE variable defaults to
                    "distro SDK" for the standard
                    SDK and "distro Extensible SDK"
                    for the extensible SDK, where
                    distro is the first one of
                    DISTRO_NAME
                    or
                    DISTRO
                    that is set in your configuration.
                
                    An optional URL for an update server for the extensible
                    SDK.
                    If set, the value is used as the default update server when
                    running devtool sdk-update within the
                    extensible SDK.
                
Specifies the name of the SDK vendor.
                    Specifies the version of the SDK.
                    The distribution configuration file (e.g.
                    /meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf)
                    defines the SDK_VERSION as follows:
                    
     SDK_VERSION := "${@'${DISTRO_VERSION}'.replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}"
                    
                    For additional information, see the
                    DISTRO_VERSION
                    and
                    DATE
                    variables.
                
                    Equivalent to
                    IMAGE_FEATURES.
                    However, this variable applies to the SDK generated from an
                    image using the following command:
                    
     $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
                    
                    The machine for which the SDK is built.
                    In other words, the SDK is built such that it
                    runs on the target you specify with the
                    SDKMACHINE value.
                    The value points to a corresponding
                    .conf file under
                    conf/machine-sdk/.
                
You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable. The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in the Build Directory.
     SDKMACHINE ?= "i686"
                     
SDKMACHINE
                         variable in your distribution configuration file.
                         If you do, the configuration will not take affect.
                     
Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's installation script. You can override the offered path when you run the script.
                    The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation
                    within an SDK as it will be when installed into the
                    default
                    SDKPATH.
                
The section in which packages should be categorized. Package management utilities can make use of this variable.
                    Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler
                    when building for the target.
                    The flags are passed through the default value of the
                    TARGET_CFLAGS
                    variable.
                
                    The SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION variable
                    takes the value of
                    FULL_OPTIMIZATION
                    unless DEBUG_BUILD = "1".
                    If that is the case, the value of
                    DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION is used.
                
Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using getty. Provide a value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device:
     SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0"
                    
Defines the serial consoles (TTYs) to enable using getty. Provide a value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices:
     SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1"
                    
                    Similar to
                    SERIAL_CONSOLES
                    except the device is checked for existence before attempting
                    to enable it.
                    This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit
                    (i.e. not with systemd).
                
A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from another recipe. For example:
    SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2"
                    
                    In this example, intone depends on
                    mplayer2.
                
Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes.
A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change. The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes.
Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value should be either "32" or "64".
Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian.
                    Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of
                    an RPM package.
                    Removal of these files is required for packages containing
                    prebuilt binaries and libraries such as
                    libstdc++ and
                    glibc.
                
                    To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your
                    conf/local.conf configuration file
                    in your:
                    Build Directory.
                    
     SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1"
                    
                    Groups together machines based upon the same family
                    of SOC (System On Chip).
                    You typically set this variable in a common
                    .inc file that you include in the
                    configuration files of all the machines.
                    
conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc
                        for this variable to appear in
                        MACHINEOVERRIDES.
                    
                    Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the
                    target platform.
                    By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based
                    systems and is defined in the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration
                    file.
                
                    You will see this variable referenced in the default values
                    of FILES_${PN}.
                
                    Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link
                    (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform.
                    By default, this suffix is ".so" for Linux-based
                    systems and is defined in the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration
                    file.
                
                    You will see this variable referenced in the default values
                    of FILES_${PN}-dev.
                
                    When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources
                    (i.e. creating a source mirror), setting
                    SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH to "1" in your
                    local.conf configuration file ensures
                    the source for all recipes are fetched regardless of
                    whether or not a recipe is compatible with the
                    configuration.
                    A recipe is considered incompatible with the currently
                    configured machine when either or both the
                    COMPATIBLE_MACHINE
                    variable and
                    COMPATIBLE_HOST
                    variables specify compatibility with a machine other
                    than that of the current machine or host.
                    
SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH variable
                        unless you are creating a source mirror.
                        In other words, do not set the variable during a
                        normal build.
                    
                    Defines your own
                    PREMIRRORS
                    from which to first fetch source before attempting to fetch
                    from the upstream specified in
                    SRC_URI.
                
                    To use this variable, you must globally inherit the
                    own-mirrors
                    class and then provide the URL to your mirrors.
                    Here is the general syntax:
                    
     INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
     SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror"
                    
SOURCE_MIRROR_URL.
                    
                    Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts
                    found in meta/files/common-licenses/.
                    For the default SPDXLICENSEMAP
                    mappings, see the
                    meta/conf/licenses.conf file.
                
                    For additional information, see the
                    LICENSE
                    variable.
                
                    A list of prefixes for PN used by the
                    OpenEmbedded build system to create variants of recipes or packages.
                    The list specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances
                    such as the generation of the BPN variable.
                
                    The list of source files - local or remote.
                    This variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system which bits
                    to pull in for the build and how to pull them in.
                    For example, if the recipe or append file only needs to
                    fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or
                    append file uses a single SRC_URI
                    entry.
                    On the other hand, if the recipe or append file needs to
                    fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include a custom
                    file, the recipe or append file would include four
                    instances of the variable.
                
The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see the "Fetchers" section in the BitBake User Manual.
file:// -
                            Fetches files, which are usually files shipped with
                            the
                            Metadata,
                            from the local machine.
                            The path is relative to the
                            FILESPATH
                            variable.
                            Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the
                            following directories, which are assumed to be a
                            subdirectories of the directory in which the
                            recipe file (.bb) or
                            append file (.bbappend)
                            resides:
                            
${BPN} -
                                    The base recipe name without any special
                                    suffix or version numbers.
                                    
${BP} -
                                    ${BPN}-${PV}.
                                    The base recipe name and version but without
                                    any special package name suffix.
                                    
files -
                                    Files within a directory, which is named
                                    files and is also
                                    alongside the recipe or append file.
                                    
SRC_URI
                                statement from your append file, you need to be
                                sure to extend the
                                FILESPATH
                                variable by also using the
                                FILESEXTRAPATHS
                                variable from within your append file.
                            
bzr:// - Fetches files from a
                            Bazaar revision control repository.
git:// - Fetches files from a
                            Git revision control repository.
osc:// - Fetches files from
                            an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service) revision control repository.
repo:// - Fetches files from
                            a repo (Git) repository.
ccrc:// -
                            Fetches files from a ClearCase repository.
                            
http:// - Fetches files from
                            the Internet using http.
https:// - Fetches files
                            from the Internet using https.
ftp:// - Fetches files
                            from the Internet using ftp.
cvs:// - Fetches files from
                            a CVS revision control repository.
hg:// - Fetches files from
                            a Mercurial (hg) revision control repository.
p4:// - Fetches files from
                            a Perforce (p4) revision control repository.
ssh:// - Fetches files from
                            a secure shell.
svn:// - Fetches files from
                            a Subversion (svn) revision control repository.
                    Standard and recipe-specific options for SRC_URI exist.
                    Here are standard options:
                    
apply - Whether to apply
                            the patch or not.
                            The default action is to apply the patch.
striplevel - Which
                            striplevel to use when applying the patch.
                            The default level is 1.
patchdir - Specifies
                            the directory in which the patch should be applied.
                            The default is ${S}.
                            
Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision control system:
mindate -
                            Apply the patch only if
                            SRCDATE
                            is equal to or greater than mindate.
                            
maxdate -
                            Apply the patch only if SRCDATE
                            is not later than mindate.
                            
minrev -
                            Apply the patch only if SRCREV
                            is equal to or greater than minrev.
                            
maxrev -
                            Apply the patch only if SRCREV
                            is not later than maxrev.
                            
rev -
                            Apply the patch only if SRCREV
                            is equal to rev.
                            
notrev -
                            Apply the patch only if SRCREV
                            is not equal to rev.
                            
Here are some additional options worth mentioning:
unpack - Controls
                            whether or not to unpack the file if it is an archive.
                            The default action is to unpack the file.
destsuffix - Places the file
                            (or extracts its contents) into the specified
                            subdirectory of WORKDIR
                            when the Git fetcher is used.
                            
subdir - Places the file
                            (or extracts its contents) into the specified
                            subdirectory of WORKDIR
                            when the local (file://)
                            fetcher is used.
                            
localdir - Places the file
                            (or extracts its contents) into the specified
                            subdirectory of WORKDIR
                            when the CVS fetcher is used.
                            
subpath -
                            Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the
                            tree when using the Git fetcher is used.
                            
name - Specifies a
                            name to be used for association with SRC_URI checksums
                            when you have more than one file specified in SRC_URI.
                            
downloadfilename - Specifies
                            the filename used when storing the downloaded file.
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects whether
                    SRC_URI
                    contains files that are machine-specific.
                    If so, the build system automatically changes
                    PACKAGE_ARCH.
                    Setting this variable to "0" disables this behavior.
                
The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager (SCM).
                    Returns the version string of the current package.
                    This string is used to help define the value of
                    PV.
                
                    The SRCPV variable is defined in the
                    meta/conf/bitbake.conf configuration
                    file in the
                    Source Directory
                    as follows:
                    
     SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}"
                    
                    Recipes that need to define PV do so
                    with the help of the SRCPV.
                    For example, the ofono recipe
                    (ofono_git.bb) located in
                    meta/recipes-connectivity in the
                    Source Directory defines PV as
                    follows:
                    
     PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}"
                    
                    The revision of the source code used to build the package.
                    This variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial and
                    Bazaar only.
                    Note that if you want to build a fixed revision and you
                    want to avoid performing a query on the remote repository
                    every time BitBake parses your recipe, you should specify
                    a SRCREV that is a
                    full revision identifier and not just a tag.
                
SRCREV,
                    see the
                    AUTOREV
                    variable description.
                The directory for the shared state cache.
                    If set to "1", allows fetches from
                    mirrors that are specified in
                    SSTATE_MIRRORS
                    to work even when fetching from the network has been
                    disabled by setting BB_NO_NETWORK
                    to "1".
                    Using the
                    SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK
                    variable is useful if you have set
                    SSTATE_MIRRORS to point to an
                    internal server for your shared state cache, but
                    you want to disable any other fetching from the network.
                
                    Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other
                    mirror locations for prebuilt cache data objects before
                    building out the data.
                    This variable works like fetcher
                    MIRRORS
                    and PREMIRRORS
                    and points to the cache locations to check for the shared
                    objects.
                
You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache you point to can also be from builds on other machines.
                    If a mirror uses the same structure as
                    SSTATE_DIR,
                    you need to add
                    "PATH" at the end as shown in the examples below.
                    The build system substitutes the correct path within the
                    directory structure.
                    
     SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\
     file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \
     file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH"
                    
                    Specifies the path to the /lib
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the
                    build host.
                
                    Specifies the path to the /lib
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the target
                    for which the current recipe is being built
                    (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
                    Specifies the path to the
                    /usr/bin subdirectory of the
                    sysroot directory for the target for which the current
                    recipe is being built
                    (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other software that wants to make use of libraries or include files provided by the software associated with the script.
pkg-config.
                        Consequently, if pkg-config
                        is supported by the library to which you are linking,
                        it is recommended you use
                        pkg-config instead of a
                        provided configuration script.
                    
                    Specifies the path to the
                    /usr/bin subdirectory of the
                    sysroot directory for the build host.
                
                     Specifies the path to the /usr/share
                     subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the target
                     for which the current recipe is being built
                     (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
                    Specifies the path to the /usr/share
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the build host.
                
                    Specifies the path to the top-level sysroots directory
                    (i.e.
                    ${TMPDIR}/sysroots).
                    
${D}
                        within your recipe's
                        do_install
                        task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will
                        stage a subset of those files into the sysroot.
                    
Specifies the path to the primary sysroot directory for which the target is being built. Depending on the type of recipe and the build target, the recipe's value is as follows:
For recipes building for the target machine, the value is "${STAGING_DIR}/${MACHINE}".
For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty given the assumption that when building for the build host, the build host's own directories should be used.
For native SDK
                           recipes that build for the SDK
                           (nativesdk), the value is
                           "${STAGING_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_HOST_SYS}".
                           
Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the build host.
                    Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the
                    target for which the current recipe is being built.
                    In most cases, this path is the
                    STAGING_DIR_HOST.
                
                    Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target
                    system but those binaries in turn generate code for
                    another different system (e.g. cross-canadian recipes).
                    Using terminology from GNU, the primary system is referred
                    to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or different, system is
                    referred to as the "TARGET".
                    Thus, the binaries run on the "HOST" system and
                    and generate binaries for the "TARGET" system.
                    STAGING_DIR_TARGET points to the
                    sysroot used for the "TARGET" system.
                
                    Specifies the path to the /etc
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the
                    build host.
                
                    Specifies the path to the /usr
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the target
                    for which the current recipe is being built
                    (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
                    Specifies the path to the
                    /usr/include subdirectory of the
                    sysroot directory for the target for which the current
                    recipe being built
                    (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
                    Specifies the path to the /usr/include
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the build host.
                
                    Points to the directory containing the kernel build
                    artifacts.
                    Recipes building software that needs to access kernel
                    build artifacts
                    (e.g. systemtap-uprobes) can look in
                    the directory specified with the
                    STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR variable to
                    find these artifacts after the kernel has been built.
                
The directory with kernel headers that are required to build out-of-tree modules.
                    Specifies the path to the /usr/lib
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the target for
                    which the current recipe is being built
                    (STAGING_DIR_HOST).
                
                    Specifies the path to the /usr/lib
                    subdirectory of the sysroot directory for the build host.
                
                    Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files.
                    The path to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this
                    string and then appending additional information.
                    Currently, the default assignment for STAMP
                    as set in the meta/conf/bitbake.conf file
                    is:
                    
     STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}"
                    
                    See STAMPS_DIR,
                    MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS,
                    PN,
                    EXTENDPE,
                    PV, and
                    PR for related variable
                    information.
                
                    Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded
                    build system places stamps.
                    The default directory is
                    ${TMPDIR}/stamps.
                
                    The minimal command and arguments to run
                    strip, which is used to strip
                    symbols.
                
                    The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for packaging
                    systems such as opkg, rpm or
                    dpkg.
                    By default, SUMMARY is used to define
                    the DESCRIPTION
                    variable if DESCRIPTION is not set
                    in the recipe.
                
The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are stored.
Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as follows where "X" is the console number you want to use:
     SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX"
                    
                    The
                    syslinux
                    class initially sets this variable to null but then checks
                    for a value later.
                
                    Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file.
                    You need to set this variable in your recipe.
                    If you want to list multiple options, separate the options
                    with a semicolon character (;).
                
                    The
                    syslinux
                    class uses this variable to create a set of options.
                
                    Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off.
                    To turn off serial, set this variable to an empty string
                    in your recipe.
                    The variable's default value is set in the
                    syslinux
                    as follows:
                    
     SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200"
                    
The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
                    An .LSS file used as the background
                    for the VGA boot menu when you are using the boot menu.
                    You need to set this variable in your recipe.
                
                    The
                    syslinux
                    class checks for this variable and if found, the
                    OpenEmbedded build system installs the splash screen.
                
                    Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument.
                    The variable's default value is set in the
                    syslinux
                    as follows:
                    
     SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200"
                    
The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files.
                    When inheriting the
                    systemd
                    class, this variable specifies whether the service you have
                    specified in
                    SYSTEMD_SERVICE
                    should be started automatically or not.
                    By default, the service is enabled to automatically start
                    at boot time.
                    The default setting is in the
                    systemd
                    class as follows:
                    
     SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable"
                    
You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable".
                    When inheriting the
                    systemd
                    class, this variable locates the systemd unit files when
                    they are not found in the main recipe's package.
                    By default, the
                    SYSTEMD_PACKAGES variable is set
                    such that the systemd unit files are assumed to reside in
                    the recipes main package:
                    
     SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}"
                    
                    If these unit files are not in this recipe's main
                    package, you need to use
                    SYSTEMD_PACKAGES to list the package
                    or packages in which the build system can find the systemd
                    unit files.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    systemd
                    class, this variable specifies the systemd service name for
                    a package.
                
When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is an example from the connman recipe:
     SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service"
                    
                    When using
                    SysVinit,
                    specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals
                    that should be running a
                    getty
                    (allowing login), assuming
                    USE_VT
                    is not set to "0".
                
                    The default value for
                    SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS is "1"
                    (i.e. only run a getty on the first virtual terminal).
                
This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows:
     T = "${WORKDIR}/temp"
                    
                    The WORKDIR
                    is the directory into which BitBake unpacks and builds the
                    recipe.
                    The default bitbake.conf file sets this variable.
The T variable is not to be confused with
                    the TMPDIR variable,
                    which points to the root of the directory tree where BitBake
                    places the output of an entire build.
                
The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is configurable:
     arm
     i586
     x86_64
     powerpc
     powerpc64
     mips
     mipsel
                    
                    For additional information on machine architectures, see
                    the
                    TUNE_ARCH
                    variable.
                
                    Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the
                    target system.
                    TARGET_AS_ARCH is initialized from
                    TUNE_ASARGS
                    by default in the BitBake configuration file
                    (meta/conf/bitbake.conf):
                    
     TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}"
                    
                    Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the
                    target system.
                    TARGET_CC_ARCH is initialized from
                    TUNE_CCARGS
                    by default.
                    
LDFLAGS
                        to TARGET_CC_ARCH
                        in recipes that build software for the target that
                        would not otherwise respect the exported
                        LDFLAGS variable.
                    
                    This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or
                    Application Binary Interface (ABI) tune.
                    The flag is used rarely and only for cases where a
                    userspace
                    TUNE_CCARGS
                    is not compatible with the kernel compilation.
                    The TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH variable
                    allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a
                    different configuration.
                    See the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc
                    file in the
                    Source Directory
                    for an example.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building
                    for the target.
                    When building in the target context,
                    CFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets
                    the
                    CFLAGS
                    variable in the environment to the
                    TARGET_CFLAGS value so that
                    executables built using the SDK also have the flags
                    applied.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor
                    (i.e. to both the C and the C++ compilers) when building
                    for the target.
                    When building in the target context,
                    CPPFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets
                    the
                    CPPFLAGS
                    variable in the environment to the
                    TARGET_CPPFLAGS value so that
                    executables built using the SDK also have the flags
                    applied.
                
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when
                    building for the target.
                    When building in the target context,
                    CXXFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets
                    the
                    CXXFLAGS
                    variable in the environment to the
                    TARGET_CXXFLAGS value so that
                    executables built using the SDK also have the flags
                    applied.
                
Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets, which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance penalty.
                    Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the
                    target system.
                    TARGET_LD_ARCH is initialized from
                    TUNE_LDARGS
                    by default in the BitBake configuration file
                    (meta/conf/bitbake.conf):
                    
     TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}"
                    
                    Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building
                    for the target.
                    When building in the target context,
                    LDFLAGS
                    is set to the value of this variable by default.
                
                    Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets
                    the
                    LDFLAGS
                    variable in the environment to the
                    TARGET_LDFLAGS value so that
                    executables built using the SDK also have the flags
                    applied.
                
                    Specifies the target's operating system.
                    The variable can be set to "linux" for glibc-based systems and
                    to "linux-uclibc" for uclibc.
                    For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and
                    "linux-uclibc-gnueabi" values possible.
                
Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools.
                    Depending on the type of recipe and the build target,
                    TARGET_PREFIX is set as follows:
                    
For recipes building for the target machine, the value is "${TARGET_SYS}-".
                            For native recipes, the build system sets the
                            variable to the value of
                            BUILD_PREFIX.
                            
                            For native SDK recipes
                            (nativesdk), the
                            build system sets the variable to the value of
                            SDK_PREFIX.
                            
Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the current recipe.
                    The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
                    variable based on
                    TARGET_ARCH,
                    TARGET_VENDOR,
                    and
                    TARGET_OS
                    variables.
                    
TARGET_SYS variable yourself.
                    
Consider these two examples:
Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the value is "i686-linux".
Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
Specifies the name of the target vendor.
                    Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the
                    TMPDIR
                    value.
                    The suffix identifies the libc variant
                    for building.
                    When you are building for multiple variants with the same
                    Build Directory,
                    this mechanism ensures that output for different
                    libc variants is kept separate to
                    avoid potential conflicts.
                
                    In the defaultsetup.conf file, the
                    default value of TCLIBCAPPEND is
                    "-${TCLIBC}".
                    However, distros such as poky, which normally only support
                    one libc variant, set
                    TCLIBCAPPEND to "" in their distro
                    configuration file resulting in no suffix being applied.
                
                    Specifies the GNU standard C library (libc)
                    variant to use during the build process.
                    This variable replaces POKYLIBC, which is no longer
                    supported.
                
You can select "glibc" or "uclibc".
                    Specifies the toolchain selector.
                    TCMODE controls the characteristics
                    of the generated packages and images by telling the
                    OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use.
                    By default, the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own
                    internal toolchain.
                    The variable's default value is "default", which uses
                    that internal toolchain.
                    
TCMODE is set to a value
                        other than "default", then it is your responsibility
                        to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the
                        default toolchain.
                        Using older or newer versions of these components
                        might cause build problems.
                        See the
                        Release Notes
                        for the specific components with which the toolchain
                        must be compatible.
                    
                    The TCMODE variable is similar to
                    TCLIBC,
                    which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library
                    (libc) used during the build process:
                    glibc or uclibc.
                
                    With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled
                    external toolchain.
                    One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain.
                    The support for this toolchain resides in the separate
                    Mentor Graphics®
                    meta-sourcery layer at
                    http://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/.
                
                    The layer's README file contains
                    information on how to use the Sourcery G++ Toolchain as
                    an external toolchain.
                    In summary, you must be sure to add the layer to your
                    bblayers.conf file in front of the
                    meta layer and then set the
                    EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN
                    variable in your local.conf file
                    to the location in which you installed the toolchain.
                
                    The fundamentals used for this example apply to any
                    external toolchain.
                    You can use meta-sourcery as a
                    template for adding support for other external toolchains.
                
                    The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export
                    tests when the
                    TEST_EXPORT_ONLY
                    variable is set to "1".
                
                    The TEST_EXPORT_DIR variable defaults
                    to "${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}".
                
Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a manner that you to run them outside of the build system.
Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an image is successfully built.
                    These tests are written in Python making use of the
                    unittest module, and the majority of
                    them run commands on the target system over
                    ssh.
                    You can set this variable to "1" in your
                    local.conf file in the
                    Build Directory
                    to have the OpenEmbedded build system automatically run
                    these tests after an image successfully builds:
                    
     TEST_IMAGE = "1"
                    
                    For more information on enabling, running, and writing
                    these tests, see the
                    "Performing Automated Runtime Testing"
                    section in the Yocto Project Development Manual and the
                    "testimage*.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines.
                    The TEST_LOG_DIR variable defaults
                    to "${WORKDIR}/testimage".
                    
log.do_testimage), which is in
                        the ${WORKDIR}/temp/ directory.
                    
For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then power on) the device, respectively.
                    For automated hardware testing, specifies additional
                    arguments to pass through to the command specified in
                    TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD.
                    Setting TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS
                    is optional.
                    You can use it if you wish, for example, to separate the
                    machine-specific and non-machine-specific parts of the
                    arguments.
                
                    The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before
                    automated runtime tests begin to run against an
                    image.
                    The default timeout period to allow the boot process to
                    reach the login prompt is 500 seconds.
                    You can specify a different value in the
                    local.conf file.
                
For more information on testing images, see the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal program does.
                    For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on
                    serial device /dev/ttyUSB0 at
                    115200bps, you would set the variable as follows:
                    
     TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
                    
                    For automated hardware testing, specifies additional
                    arguments to pass through to the command specified in
                    TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD.
                    Setting TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS
                    is optional.
                    You can use it if you wish, for example, to separate the
                    machine-specific and non-machine-specific parts of the
                    command.
                
The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e. where the build is taking place).
TEST_SERVER_IP variable
                        is only used for a small number of tests such as
                        the "smart" test suite, which needs to download
                        packages from DEPLOY_DIR/rpm.
                    
Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a test image. The default controller to use is "qemu":
     TEST_TARGET = "qemu"
                    
                    A target controller is a class that defines how an
                    image gets deployed on a target and how a target is started.
                    A layer can extend the controllers by adding a module
                    in the layer's /lib/oeqa/controllers
                    directory and by inheriting the
                    BaseTarget class, which is an abstract
                    class that cannot be used as a value of
                    TEST_TARGET.
                
                    You can provide the following arguments with
                    TEST_TARGET:
                    
"qemu" and "QemuTarget": Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the "Enabling Runtime Tests on QEMU" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for more information.
"simpleremote" and "SimpleRemoteTarget":
                            Runs the tests on target hardware that is already
                            up and running.
                            The hardware can be on the network or it can be
                            a device running an image on QEMU.
                            You must also set
                            TEST_TARGET_IP
                            when you use "simpleremote" or "SimpleRemoteTarget".
                            
meta/lib/oeqa/targetcontrol.py.
                                The small caps names are kept for compatibility
                                reasons.
                            
"GummibootTarget": Automatically deploys and runs tests on an EFI-enabled machine that has a master image installed.
meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/masterimage.py.
                            
For information on running tests on hardware, see the "Enabling Runtime Tests on Hardware" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
                    The IP address of your hardware under test.
                    The TEST_TARGET_IP variable has no
                    effect when
                    TEST_TARGET
                    is set to "qemu".
                
When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is an example:
     TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201"
                    Specifying a port is useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address translation.
An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when performing automated runtime testing.
The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can be used against images.
                    Tests include ping,
                    ssh, df among
                    others.
                    You can add your own tests to the list of tests by
                    appending TEST_SUITES as follows:
                    
     TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest"
                    Alternatively, you can provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against the image.
     TEST_SUITES_append = " auto"
                    Using this option causes the build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped.
                    The order in which tests are run is important.
                    Tests that depend on another test must appear later in the
                    list than the test on which they depend.
                    For example, if you append the list of tests with two
                    tests (test_A and
                    test_B) where
                    test_B is dependent on
                    test_A, then you must order the tests
                    as follows:
                    
     TEST_SUITES = " test_A test_B"
                    
For more information on testing images, see the "Performing Automated Runtime Testing" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is located. Do not manually set this variable.
The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute, and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine seconds past 1400 hours).
                    This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded
                    build system uses for all build output and intermediate
                    files (other than the shared state cache).
                    By default, the TMPDIR variable points
                    to tmp within the
                    Build Directory.
                
                    If you want to establish this directory in a location other
                    than the default, you can uncomment and edit the following
                    statement in the
                    conf/local.conf file in the
                    Source Directory:
                    
     #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp"
                    
                    An example use for this scenario is to set
                    TMPDIR to a local disk, which does
                    not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS.
                
                    The filesystem used by TMPDIR must
                    have standard filesystem semantics (i.e. mixed-case files
                    are unique, POSIX file locking, and persistent inodes).
                    Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some
                    implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum
                    requirement.
                    Consequently, TMPDIR cannot be on
                    NFS.
                
                    This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system
                    uses when building an SDK, which contains a
                    cross-development environment.
                    The packages specified by this variable are part of the
                    toolchain set that runs on the
                    SDKMACHINE,
                    and each package should usually have the prefix
                    nativesdk-.
                    For example, consider the following command when
                    building an SDK:
                    
     $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
                    In this case, a default list of packages is set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the list.
For background information on cross-development toolchains in the Yocto Project development environment, see the "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation" section. For information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
                    This variable defines the name used for the toolchain
                    output.
                    The
                    populate_sdk_base
                    class sets the
                    TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME variable as
                    follows:
                    
     TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}"
                    
                    See the
                    SDK_NAME
                    and
                    SDK_VERSION
                    variables for additional information.
                
This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the target hardware), which includes libraries and headers.
For background information on cross-development toolchains in the Yocto Project development environment, see the "Cross-Development Toolchain Generation" section. For information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the Yocto Project Software Development Kit (SDK) Developer's Guide.
                    The top-level
                    Build Directory.
                    BitBake automatically sets this variable when you
                    initialize your build environment using either
                    oe-init-build-env
                    or
                    oe-init-build-env-memres.
                
                    A sanitized version of
                    TARGET_ARCH.
                    This variable is used where the architecture is needed in
                    a value where underscores are not allowed, for example
                    within package filenames.
                    In this case, dash characters replace any underscore
                    characters used in TARGET_ARCH.
                
Do not edit this variable.
                    The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture
                    (i.e. arm,
                    armeb,
                    mips,
                    mips64, and so forth).
                    BitBake uses this value to setup configuration.
                
                    TUNE_ARCH definitions are specific to
                    a given architecture.
                    The definitions can be a single static definition, or
                    can be dynamically adjusted.
                    You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at
                    the architecture's README file.
                    For example, the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README
                    file in the
                    Source Directory
                    provides information for TUNE_ARCH
                    specific to the mips architecture.
                
                    TUNE_ARCH is tied closely to
                    TARGET_ARCH,
                    which defines the target machine's architecture.
                    The BitBake configuration file
                    (meta/conf/bitbake.conf) sets
                    TARGET_ARCH as follows:
                    
     TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}"
                    
The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures are configurable, shows supported machine architectures:
     arm
     i586
     x86_64
     powerpc
     powerpc64
     mips
     mipsel
                    
                    Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for
                    the target system.
                    The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
                    TUNE_ASARGS is set using
                    the tune include files, which are typically under
                    meta/conf/machine/include/ and are
                    influenced through
                    TUNE_FEATURES.
                    For example, the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc
                    file defines the flags for the x86 architecture as follows:
                    
     TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}"
                    
                    Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for
                    the target system.
                    The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
                    TUNE_CCARGS is set using
                    the tune include files, which are typically under
                    meta/conf/machine/include/ and are
                    influenced through
                    TUNE_FEATURES.
                    
                    Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for
                    the target system.
                    The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
                    TUNE_LDARGS is set using
                    the tune include files, which are typically under
                    meta/conf/machine/include/ and are
                    influenced through
                    TUNE_FEATURES.
                    For example, the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc
                    file defines the flags for the x86 architecture as follows:
                    
     TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}"
                    
                    Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use
                    given a specific processor.
                    The features are defined within the tune files and allow
                    arguments (i.e. TUNE_*ARGS) to be
                    dynamically generated based on the features.
                
The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they are not conflicting and that they are supported.
                    The BitBake configuration file
                    (meta/conf/bitbake.conf) defines
                    TUNE_FEATURES as follows:
                    
     TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}"
                    
                    See the
                    DEFAULTTUNE
                    variable for more information.
                
The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows:
     TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune"
                    
                    These tune-specific package architectures are defined in
                    the machine include files.
                    Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used
                    in the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc
                    file:
                    
     TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32"
                    
                    An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by
                    a particular tuning in a given toolchain layer.
                    Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the
                    TUNEABI,
                    TUNEABI_OVERRIDE,
                    and
                    TUNEABI_WHITELIST
                    variables to check compatibility of tunings against their
                    selection of libraries.
                
                    If TUNEABI is undefined, then every
                    tuning is allowed.
                    See the
                    sanity
                    class to see how the variable is used.
                
                    If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the
                    TUNEABI_WHITELIST
                    variable.
                    Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the
                    TUNEABI_OVERRIDE,
                    TUNEABI_WHITELIST,
                    and
                    TUNEABI
                    variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their
                    selection of libraries.
                
                    See the
                    sanity
                    class to see how the variable is used.
                
                    A whitelist of permissible
                    TUNEABI
                    values.
                    If TUNEABI_WHITELIST is not set,
                    all tunes are allowed.
                    Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the
                    TUNEABI_WHITELIST,
                    TUNEABI_OVERRIDE,
                    and TUNEABI variables to check
                    compatibility of a tuning against their selection of
                    libraries.
                
                    See the
                    sanity
                    class to see how the variable is used.
                
feature]¶
                    Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI)
                    tuning features that conflict with feature.
                
                    Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include
                    files in the
                    Source Directory.
                    Here is an example from the
                    meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc
                    include file that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as
                    conflicting with the "n32" feature:
                    
     TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64"
                    
feature]¶
                    Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI)
                    tuning feature.
                    The specified feature is stored as a flag.
                    Valid features are specified in the machine include files
                    (e.g. meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc).
                    Here is an example from that file:
                    
     TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode."
                    
See the machine include files in the Source Directory for these features.
                    Configures the
                    UBOOT_MACHINE
                    and can also define
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES
                    for individual cases.
                
                    Following is an example from the
                    meta-fsl-arm layer.
                    
     UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd"
     UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard"
     UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config"
     UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs"
     UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config"
                    
                    In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration
                    of the possible four for the
                    UBOOT_MACHINE.
                    The "sd" configuration defines "mx6qsabreauto_config"
                    as the value for UBOOT_MACHINE, while
                    the "sdcard" specifies the
                    IMAGE_FSTYPES to use for the U-boot
                    image.
                
                    For more information on how the
                    UBOOT_CONFIG is handled, see the
                    uboot-config
                    class.
                
                    Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image.
                    During U-Boot image creation, the
                    UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT variable is passed
                    as a command-line parameter to the
                    uboot-mkimage utility.
                
                    Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image.
                    During U-Boot image creation, the
                    UBOOT_LOADADDRESS variable is passed
                    as a command-line parameter to the
                    uboot-mkimage utility.
                
Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built was "2013.10, the full version string reported by U-Boot would be "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement:
     UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto"
                    
                    Specifies the value passed on the
                    make command line when building
                    a U-Boot image.
                    The value indicates the target platform configuration.
                    You typically set this variable from the machine
                    configuration file (i.e.
                    conf/machine/).
                machine_name.conf
Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type" section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable.
                    Specifies the target called in the
                    Makefile.
                    The default target is "all".
                
                    Points to the generated U-Boot extension.
                    For example, u-boot.sb has a
                    .sb extension.
                
                    The default U-Boot extension is
                    .bin
                
Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building process.
                    Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the
                    configure script as being invalid, should not generate a
                    warning during the
                    do_configure
                    task.
                    Normally, invalid configure options are simply not passed
                    to the configure script (e.g. should be removed from
                    EXTRA_OECONF).
                    However, common options, for example, exist that are passed
                    to all configure scripts at a class level that might not
                    be valid for some configure scripts.
                    It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a warning about
                    these options.
                    For these cases, the options are added to
                    UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST.
                
                    The configure arguments check that uses
                    UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST is part
                    of the
                    insane
                    class and is only enabled if the recipe inherits the
                    autotools
                    class.
                
                    For recipes inheriting the
                    update-rc.d
                    class, UPDATERCPN specifies
                    the package that contains the initscript that is to be
                    enabled.
                
The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe, you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes.
                    When the
                    distrodata
                    class is enabled globally, you can perform a per-recipe
                    check for what the latest upstream source code version is
                    by calling
                    bitbake -c checkpkg recipe.
                    If the recipe source code is provided from Git
                    repositories, the OpenEmbedded build system determines the
                    latest upstream version by picking the latest tag from the
                    list of all repository tags.
                    You can use the
                    UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX
                    variable to provide a regular expression to filter only the
                    relevant tags should the default filter not work
                    correctly.
                    
     UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex"
                    
                    When the
                    distrodata
                    class is enabled globally, use the
                    UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX variable to
                    specify a different regular expression instead of the
                    default one when the package checking system is parsing
                    the page found using
                    UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI.
                    
     UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex"
                    
                    When the
                    distrodata
                    class is enabled globally, you can perform a per-recipe
                    check for what the latest upstream source code version is
                    by calling bitbake -c checkpkg
                    recipe.
                    If the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest
                    version is determined by fetching the directory listing
                    where the tarball is and attempting to find a later tarball.
                    When this approach does not work, you can use
                    UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI to
                    provide a different URI that contains the link to the
                    latest tarball.
                    
     UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url"
                    
                    Determines if devtmpfs is used for
                    /dev population.
                    The default value used for USE_DEVFS
                    is "1" when no value is specifically set.
                    Typically, you would set USE_DEVFS
                    to "0" for a statically populated /dev
                    directory.
                
See the "Selecting a Device Manager" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual for information on how to use this variable.
When using SysVinit, determines whether or not to run a getty on any virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those terminals.
                    The default value used for USE_VT
                    is "1" when no default value is specifically set.
                    Typically, you would set USE_VT
                    to "0" in the machine configuration file for machines
                    that do not have a graphical display attached and
                    therefore do not need virtual terminal functionality.
                
                    A list of classes to globally inherit.
                    These classes are used by the OpenEmbedded build system
                    to enable extra features (e.g.
                    buildstats,
                    image-mklibs, and so forth).
                
                    The default list is set in your
                    local.conf file:
                    
     USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink"
                    
                    For more information, see
                    meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample in
                    the
                    Source Directory.
                
                    Forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce an error
                    if the user identification (uid) and
                    group identification (gid) values
                    are not defined in files/passwd
                    and files/group files.
                
                    The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically
                    apply uid and
                    gid values.
                    Consequently, the USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC
                    variable is by default not set.
                    If you plan on using statically assigned
                    gid and uid
                    values, you should set
                    the USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC variable in
                    your local.conf file as
                    follows:
                    
     USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "1"
                    
                    Overriding the default behavior implies you are going to
                    also take steps to set static uid and
                    gid values through use of the
                    USERADDEXTENSION,
                    USERADD_UID_TABLES,
                    and
                    USERADD_GID_TABLES
                    variables.
                
                    Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static
                    group identification (gid) values
                    when the OpenEmbedded build system adds a group to the
                    system during package installation.
                
                    When applying static group identification
                    (gid) values, the OpenEmbedded build
                    system looks in
                    BBPATH
                    for a files/group file and then applies
                    those uid values.
                    Set the variable as follows in your
                    local.conf file:
                    
     USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group"
                    
USERADDEXTENSION
                    variable to "useradd-staticids" causes the build system
                    to use static gid values.
                
                    When inheriting the
                    useradd
                    class, this variable
                    specifies the individual packages within the recipe that
                    require users and/or groups to be added.
                
You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in a recipe:
     USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}"
                    
USERADD_PACKAGES variable,
                        you need to set one or more of the
                        USERADD_PARAM,
                        GROUPADD_PARAM,
                        or
                        GROUPMEMS_PARAM
                        variables.
                    
                    When inheriting the
                    useradd
                    class, this variable
                    specifies for a package what parameters should be passed
                    to the useradd command
                    if you wish to add a user to the system when the package
                    is installed.
                
                    Here is an example from the dbus
                    recipe:
                    
     USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \
                            --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \
                            --user-group messagebus"
                    
                    For information on the standard Linux shell command
                    useradd, see
                    http://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd.
                
                    Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static
                    user identification (uid) values
                    when the OpenEmbedded build system adds a user to the
                    system during package installation.
                
                    When applying static user identification
                    (uid) values, the OpenEmbedded build
                    system looks in
                    BBPATH
                    for a files/passwd file and then applies
                    those uid values.
                    Set the variable as follows in your
                    local.conf file:
                    
     USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd"
                    
USERADDEXTENSION
                    variable to "useradd-staticids" causes the build system
                    to use static uid values.
                
                    When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the
                    OpenEmbedded build system to base all user and group
                    additions on a static
                    passwd and
                    group files found in
                    BBPATH.
                
                    To use static user identification (uid)
                    and group identification (gid)
                    values, set the variable
                    as follows in your local.conf file:
                    
     USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids"
                    
uid and gid
                        values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ
                        the
                        useradd-staticids
                        class.
                    
                    If you use static uid and
                    gid information, you must also
                    specify the files/passwd and
                    files/group files by setting the
                    USERADD_UID_TABLES
                    and
                    USERADD_GID_TABLES
                    variables.
                    Additionally, you should also set the
                    USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC
                    variable.
                
                    Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are
                    reported as warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system.
                    You set this variable in your distribution configuration
                    file.
                    For a list of the checks you can control with this variable,
                    see the
                    "insane.bbclass"
                    section.
                
                    The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded
                    build system builds a recipe.
                    This directory is located within the
                    TMPDIR
                    directory structure and is specific to the recipe being
                    built and the system for which it is being built.
                
                    The WORKDIR directory is defined as
                    follows:
                    
     ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
                    The actual directory depends on several things:
                    As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder
                    name poky, a default Build Directory at
                    poky/build, and a
                    qemux86-poky-linux machine target
                    system.
                    Furthermore, suppose your recipe is named
                    foo_1.3.0-r0.bb.
                    In this case, the work directory the build system uses to
                    build the package would be as follows:
                    
     poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
                    
                    Specifies the packages that should be installed to
                    provide an X server and drivers for the current machine,
                    assuming your image directly includes
                    packagegroup-core-x11-xserver or,
                    perhaps indirectly, includes "x11-base" in
                    IMAGE_FEATURES.
                
                    The default value of XSERVER, if not
                    specified in the machine configuration, is
                    "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev".
                
        While you can use most variables in almost any context such as
        .conf, .bbclass,
        .inc, and .bb files,
        some variables are often associated with a particular locality or context.
        This chapter describes some common associations.
    
The following subsections provide lists of variables whose context is configuration: distribution, machine, and local.
This section lists variables whose configuration context is the distribution, or distro.
                This section lists variables whose configuration context is the
                local configuration through the local.conf
                file.
                
The following subsections provide lists of variables whose context is recipes: required, dependencies, path, and extra build information.
This section lists variables that are required for recipes.
SRC_URI - used
                        in recipes that fetch local or remote files.
                        
This section lists variables that define extra build information for recipes.
| 31.1. | How does Poky differ from OpenEmbedded? | 
| The term "Poky" refers to the specific reference build system that the Yocto Project provides. Poky is based on OE-Core and BitBake. Thus, the generic term used here for the build system is the "OpenEmbedded build system." Development in the Yocto Project using Poky is closely tied to OpenEmbedded, with changes always being merged to OE-Core or BitBake first before being pulled back into Poky. This practice benefits both projects immediately. | |
| 31.2. | My development system does not meet the required Git, tar, and Python versions. In particular, I do not have Python 2.7.3 or greater, or I do have Python 3.x, which is specifically not supported by the Yocto Project. Can I still use the Yocto Project? | 
| You can get the required tools on your host development system a couple different ways (i.e. building a tarball or downloading a tarball). See the "Required Git, tar, and Python Versions" section for steps on how to update your build tools. | |
| 31.3. | How can you claim Poky / OpenEmbedded-Core is stable? | 
| There are three areas that help with stability; 
 
 | |
| 31.4. | How do I get support for my board added to the Yocto Project? | 
| Support for an additional board is added by creating a Board Support Package (BSP) layer for it. For more information on how to create a BSP layer, see the "Understanding and Creating Layers" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual and the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide. Usually, if the board is not completely exotic, adding support in the Yocto Project is fairly straightforward. | |
| 31.5. | Are there any products built using the OpenEmbedded build system? | 
| The software running on the Vernier LabQuest is built using the OpenEmbedded build system. See the Vernier LabQuest website for more information. There are a number of pre-production devices using the OpenEmbedded build system and the Yocto Project team announces them as soon as they are released. | |
| 31.6. | What does the OpenEmbedded build system produce as output? | 
| Because you can use the same set of recipes to create output of various formats, the output of an OpenEmbedded build depends on how you start it. Usually, the output is a flashable image ready for the target device. | |
| 31.7. | How do I add my package to the Yocto Project? | 
| To add a package, you need to create a BitBake recipe. For information on how to create a BitBake recipe, see the "Writing a New Recipe" in the Yocto Project Development Manual. | |
| 31.8. | Do I have to reflash my entire board with a new Yocto Project image when recompiling a package? | 
| 
                The OpenEmbedded build system can build packages in various
                formats such as IPK for OPKG, Debian package
                ( | |
| 31.9. | 
                I see the error ' | 
| 
                You are probably running the build on an NTFS filesystem.
                Use  | |
| 31.10. | 
                I see lots of 404 responses for files on
                 | 
| Nothing is wrong. The OpenEmbedded build system checks any configured source mirrors before downloading from the upstream sources. The build system does this searching for both source archives and pre-checked out versions of SCM-managed software. These checks help in large installations because it can reduce load on the SCM servers themselves. The address above is one of the default mirrors configured into the build system. Consequently, if an upstream source disappears, the team can place sources there so builds continue to work. | |
| 31.11. | I have machine-specific data in a package for one machine only but the package is being marked as machine-specific in all cases, how do I prevent this? | 
| 
                Set  | |
| 31.12. | I'm behind a firewall and need to use a proxy server. How do I do that? | 
| 
                Most source fetching by the OpenEmbedded build system is done
                by  
                Following is the applicable code for setting various proxy
                types in the  
     # You can set the default proxies for Wget to use for http, https, and ftp.
     # They will override the value in the environment.
     #https_proxy = http://proxy.yoyodyne.com:18023/
     #http_proxy = http://proxy.yoyodyne.com:18023/
     #ftp_proxy = http://proxy.yoyodyne.com:18023/
     # If you do not want to use proxy at all, set this to off.
     #use_proxy = on
                
                The Yocto Project also includes a
                 | |
| 31.13. | 
                What’s the difference between  | 
| 
                The  | |
| 31.14. | I'm seeing random build failures. Help?! | 
| If the same build is failing in totally different and random ways, the most likely explanation is: 
 The OpenEmbedded build system processes a massive amount of data that causes lots of network, disk and CPU activity and is sensitive to even single-bit failures in any of these areas. True random failures have always been traced back to hardware or virtualization issues. | |
| 31.15. | 
                When I try to build a native recipe, the build fails with  | 
| 
                If you get an error message that indicates GNU
                 
     #error GNU libiconv not in use but included iconv.h is from libiconv
                If you find a previously installed file, you should either uninstall it or temporarily rename it and try the build again. 
                This issue is just a single manifestation of "system
                leakage" issues caused when the OpenEmbedded build system
                finds and uses previously installed files during a native
                build.
                This type of issue might not be limited to
                 | |
| 31.16. | What do we need to ship for license compliance? | 
| This is a difficult question and you need to consult your lawyer for the answer for your specific case. It is worth bearing in mind that for GPL compliance, there needs to be enough information shipped to allow someone else to rebuild and produce the same end result you are shipping. This means sharing the source code, any patches applied to it, and also any configuration information about how that package was configured and built. You can find more information on licensing in the "Licensing" and "Maintaining Open Source License Compliance During Your Product's Lifecycle" sections, both of which are in the Yocto Project Development Manual. | |
| 31.17. | How do I disable the cursor on my touchscreen device? | 
| 
                You need to create a form factor file as described in the
                "Miscellaneous BSP-Specific Recipe Files"
                section in the Yocto Project Board Support Packages (BSP)
                Developer's Guide.
                Set the  
     HAVE_TOUCHSCREEN=1
                
 | |
| 31.18. | How do I make sure connected network interfaces are brought up by default? | 
| The default interfaces file provided by the netbase recipe does not automatically bring up network interfaces. Therefore, you will need to add a BSP-specific netbase that includes an interfaces file. See the "Miscellaneous BSP-Specific Recipe Files" section in the Yocto Project Board Support Packages (BSP) Developer's Guide for information on creating these types of miscellaneous recipe files. For example, add the following files to your layer: 
     meta-MACHINE/recipes-bsp/netbase/netbase/MACHINE/interfaces
     meta-MACHINE/recipes-bsp/netbase/netbase_5.0.bbappend
                
 | |
| 31.19. | How do I create images with more free space? | 
| By default, the OpenEmbedded build system creates images that are 1.3 times the size of the populated root filesystem. To affect the image size, you need to set various configurations: 
 
 | |
| 31.20. | Why don't you support directories with spaces in the pathnames? | 
| 
                The Yocto Project team has tried to do this before but too
                many of the tools the OpenEmbedded build system depends on,
                such as  | |
| 31.21. | How do I use an external toolchain? | 
| 
                The toolchain configuration is very flexible and customizable.
                It is primarily controlled with the
                 
                The default value of  
                In addition to the toolchain configuration, you also need a
                corresponding toolchain recipe file.
                This recipe file needs to package up any pre-built objects in
                the toolchain such as  | |
| 31.22. | How does the OpenEmbedded build system obtain source code and will it work behind my firewall or proxy server? | 
| The way the build system obtains source code is highly configurable. You can setup the build system to get source code in most environments if HTTP transport is available. 
                When the build system searches for source code, it first
                tries the local download directory.
                If that location fails, Poky tries
                 
                Assuming your distribution is "poky", the OpenEmbedded build
                system uses the Yocto Project source
                 
                As an example, you could add a specific server for the
                build system to attempt before any others by adding something
                like the following to the  
     PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\
     git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n"
                
 
                These changes cause the build system to intercept Git, FTP,
                HTTP, and HTTPS requests and direct them to the
                 Aside from the previous technique, these options also exist: 
     BB_NO_NETWORK = "1"
                This statement tells BitBake to issue an error instead of trying to access the Internet. This technique is useful if you want to ensure code builds only from local sources. Here is another technique: 
     BB_FETCH_PREMIRRORONLY = "1"
                
                This statement limits the build system to pulling source
                from the  Here is another technique: 
     BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
                This statement tells the build system to generate mirror tarballs. This technique is useful if you want to create a mirror server. If not, however, the technique can simply waste time during the build. 
                Finally, consider an example where you are behind an
                HTTP-only firewall.
                You could make the following changes to the
                 
     PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\
     ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
     https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n"
     BB_FETCH_PREMIRRORONLY = "1"
                
                These changes would cause the build system to successfully
                fetch source over HTTP and any network accesses to anything
                other than the  
                The build system also honors the standard shell environment
                variables  NoteYou can find more information on the "Working Behind a Network Proxy" Wiki page. | |
| 31.23. | Can I get rid of build output so I can start over? | 
| 
                Yes - you can easily do this.
                When you use BitBake to build an image, all the build output
                goes into the directory created when you run the
                build environment setup script (i.e.
                 
                Within the Build Directory, is the  | |
| 31.24. | 
                Why do  | 
| Executables and libraries might need to be used from a directory other than the directory into which they were initially installed. Complicating this situation is the fact that sometimes these executables and libraries are compiled with the expectation of being run from that initial installation target directory. If this is the case, moving them causes problems. 
                This scenario is a fundamental problem for package maintainers
                of mainstream Linux distributions as well as for the
                OpenEmbedded build system.
                As such, a well-established solution exists.
                Makefiles, Autotools configuration scripts, and other build
                systems are expected to respect environment variables such as
                 
                When the OpenEmbedded build system uses a recipe to build a
                target-architecture program (i.e. one that is intended for
                inclusion on the image being built), that program eventually
                runs from the root file system of that image.
                Thus, the build system provides a value of "/usr/bin" for
                 
                Meanwhile,  NoteDue to these lengthy examples, the paths are artificially broken across lines for readability.
 
     /home/maxtothemax/poky-bootchart2/build/tmp/work/i586-poky-linux/zlib/
        1.2.8-r0/sysroot-destdir/usr/bin
     /home/maxtothemax/poky-bootchart2/build/tmp/work/x86_64-linux/
        zlib-native/1.2.8-r0/sysroot-destdir/home/maxtothemax/poky-bootchart2/
        build/tmp/sysroots/x86_64-linux/usr/bin
                
                Even if the paths look unusual, they both are correct -
                the first for a target and the second for a native recipe.
                These paths are a consequence of the
                 | |
| 31.25. | 
                The files provided by my  | 
| 
                This situation results when a build system does
                not recognize the environment variables supplied to it by
                BitBake.
                The incident that prompted this FAQ entry involved a Makefile
                that used an environment variable named
                 | 
The Yocto Project team is happy for people to experiment with the Yocto Project. A number of places exist to find help if you run into difficulties or find bugs. To find out how to download source code, see the "Yocto Project Release" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
If you find problems with the Yocto Project, you should report them using the Bugzilla application at http://bugzilla.yoctoproject.org.
A number of mailing lists maintained by the Yocto Project exist as well as related OpenEmbedded mailing lists for discussion, patch submission and announcements. To subscribe to one of the following mailing lists, click on the appropriate URL in the following list and follow the instructions:
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/yocto - General Yocto Project discussion mailing list.
http://lists.openembedded.org/mailman/listinfo/openembedded-core - Discussion mailing list about OpenEmbedded-Core (the core metadata).
http://lists.openembedded.org/mailman/listinfo/openembedded-devel - Discussion mailing list about OpenEmbedded.
http://lists.openembedded.org/mailman/listinfo/bitbake-devel - Discussion mailing list about the BitBake build tool.
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/poky - Discussion mailing list about Poky.
http://lists.yoctoproject.org/listinfo/yocto-announce - Mailing list to receive official Yocto Project release and milestone announcements.
For more Yocto Project-related mailing lists, see the Yocto Project community mailing lists page here.
Two IRC channels on freenode are available for the Yocto Project and Poky discussions:
#yocto
#poky
Here is a list of resources you will find helpful:
The Yocto Project website: The home site for the Yocto Project.
OpenEmbedded: The upstream, generic, embedded distribution used as the basis for the build system in the Yocto Project. Poky derives from and contributes back to the OpenEmbedded project.
BitBake: The tool used to process metadata.
For more links, see the "Other Information" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
The Yocto Project gladly accepts contributions. You can submit changes to the project either by creating and sending pull requests, or by submitting patches through email. For information on how to do both as well as information on how to identify the maintainer for each area of code, see the "How to Submit a Change" section in the Yocto Project Development Manual.
|  | 
Toaster is a web interface to the Yocto Project's OpenEmbedded build system. The interface enables you to configure and run your builds. Information about builds is collected and stored in a database. You can use Toaster to configure and start builds on multiple remote build servers.
Toaster allows you to configure and run builds, and it provides extensive information about the build process.
Configure and Run Builds: You can use the Toaster web interface to configure and start your builds. Builds started using the Toaster web interface are organized into projects. When you create a project, you are asked to select a release, or version of the build system you want to use for the project builds. As shipped, Toaster supports Yocto Project releases 1.8 and beyond. With the Toaster web interface, you can:
Browse layers listed in the various layer sources that are available in your project (e.g. the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index at http://layers.openembedded.org/layerindex/).
Browse images, recipes, and machines provided by those layers.
Import your own layers for building.
Add and remove layers from your configuration.
Set configuration variables.
Select a target or multiple targets to build.
Start your builds.
Toaster also allows you to configure and run your builds from the command line, and switch between the command line and the web interface at any time. Builds started from the command line appear within a special Toaster project called "Command line builds".
Information About the Build Process: Toaster also records extensive information about your builds. Toaster collects data for builds you start from the web interface and from the command line as long as Toaster is running.
With Toaster you can:
See what was built (recipes and packages) and what packages were installed into your final image.
Browse the directory structure of your image.
See the value of all variables in your build configuration, and which files set each value.
Examine error, warning, and trace messages to aid in debugging.
See information about the BitBake tasks executed and reused during your build, including those that used shared state.
See dependency relationships between recipes, packages, and tasks.
See performance information such as build time, task time, CPU usage, and disk I/O.
You can set Toaster up to run as a local instance or as a shared hosted service.
When Toaster is set up as a local instance, all the components reside on a single build host. Fundamentally, a local instance of Toaster is suited for a single user developing on a single build host.
|  | 
Toaster as a hosted service is suited for multiple users developing across several build hosts. When Toaster is set up as a hosted service, its components can be spread across several machines:
|  | 
This chapter describes how you need to prepare your system in order to use Toaster.
Before you can use Toaster, you need to first set up your build system to run the Yocto Project. To do this, follow the instructions in the "The Build Host Packages" and "Yocto Project Release" sections in the Yocto Project Quick Start.
            Toaster requires extra Python dependencies in order to run.
            A Toaster requirements file named
            toaster-requirements.txt defines the
            Python dependencies.
            The requirements file is located in the
            bitbake directory, which is located in the
            root directory of the
            Source Directory
            (e.g. poky/bitbake/toaster-requirements.txt).
            The dependencies appear in a pip,
            install-compatible format.
        
Set up a Python virtual environment that allows you to maintain a dedicated Python executable and its own set of installed modules. Doing so separates the executable from Python and the modules provided by the operating system. This separation avoids any version conflicts.
Follow these steps to set up your virtual environment. These steps assume a Ubuntu distribution:
Install virtualenv:
                        Install the supported
                        python-virtualenv package from your
                        distribution rather than using pip.
                        
     $ sudo apt-get install python-virtualenv
                        
Create and Activate a Virtual Environment:
     $ virtualenv venv
     $ source venv/bin/activate
                        
     $ source venv/bin/activate
                    
You need to install the packages that Toaster requires. Use this command:
     $ pip install -r bitbake/toaster-requirements.txt
                
Once you have set up the Yocto Project and installed the Toaster system dependencies as described in "Preparing to Use Toaster", you are ready to start Toaster.
            Navigate to the root of your
            Source Directory
            (e.g. poky):
            
     $ cd poky
            Once in that directory, source the build environment script:
     $ source oe-init-build-env
            
            Next, from the build directory (e.g.
            poky/build), start Toaster using this
            command:
            
     $ source ../bitbake/bin/toaster
            You can now run your builds from the command line, or with Toaster as explained in section "Using the Toaster Web Interface".
To access the Toaster web interface, open your favorite browser and enter the following:
     http://127.0.0.1:8000
            
            By default, Toaster starts on port 8000.
            You can use the WEBPORT parameter to
            set a different port.
            For example, the following command sets the port to "8400":
            
     $ source ../bitbake/bin/toaster webport=8400
            
            Toaster creates a _toaster_clones
            directory inside your Source Directory
            (i.e. poky) to clone any layers
            needed for your builds.
        
            Alternatively, if you would like all of your Toaster related
            files and directories to be in a particular location other than
            the default, you can set the TOASTER_DIR
            environment variable, which takes precedence over your current
            working directory.
            Setting this environment variable causes Toaster to create and use
            $TOASTER_DIR./_toaster_clones.
        
            Toaster creates a build directory within your Source
            Directory (e.g. poky) to execute
            the builds.
        
            Alternatively, if you would like all of your Toaster related files
            and directories to be in a particular location, you can set
            the TOASTER_DIR environment variable,
            which takes precedence over your current working directory.
            Setting this environment variable causes Toaster to use
            $TOASTER_DIR/build as the build directory.
        
Toaster is built on the Django framework. Django provides an administration interface you can use to edit Toaster configuration parameters.
To access the Django administration interface, you must create a superuser by following these steps:
                  If you used virtualenv, which is
                  recommended, to set up the Toaster system dependencies,
                  you need be sure the virtual environment is activated.
                  To activate this environment, use the following command:
                  
   $ source venv/bin/activate
                  
                  From the directory containing the Toaster database,
                  which by default is the
                  Build Directory,
                  invoke the createsuperuser command
                  from manage.py:
                  
   $ cd ~/poky/build
   $ ../bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py createsuperuser
                  
Django prompts you for the username, which you need to provide.
Django prompts you for an email address, which is optional.
Django prompts you for a password, which you must provide.
Django prompts you to re-enter your password for verification.
After completing these steps, the following confirmation message appears:
   Superuser created successfully.
          
Creating a superuser allows you to access the Django administration interface through a browser. The URL for this interface is the same as the URL used for the Toaster instance with "/admin" on the end. For example, if you are running Toaster locally, use the following URL:
   http://127.0.0.1:8000/admin
          You can use the Django administration interface to set Toaster configuration parameters such as the build directory, layer sources, default variable values, and BitBake versions.
You can use a production instance of Toaster to share the Toaster instance with remote users, multiple users, or both. The production instance is also the setup that can handle heavier loads on the web service. Use the instructions in the following sections to set up Toaster to run builds through the Toaster web interface.
Be sure you meet the following requirements:
mod-wsgi, and Mysql requirements.
              
Have all the build requirements as described in "Setting Up the Basic System Requirements" chapter.
Have an Apache webserver.
                      Have mod-wsgi for the Apache
                      webserver.
                      
Use the Mysql database server.
If you are using Ubuntu 14.04.3, run the following:
   $ sudo apt-get install apache2 libapache2-mod-wsgi mysql-server virtualenv libmysqlclient-dev
                      
If you are using Fedora 22 or a RedHat distribution, run the following:
   $ sudo dnf install httpd mod_wsgi python-virtualenv gcc mysql-devel
                      
Perform the following steps to install Toaster:
                      Checkout a copy of poky
                      into the web server directory.
                      You will be using /var/www/toaster:
                      
   $ mkdir -p /var/www/toaster
   $ cd /var/www/toaster/
   $ git clone git://git.yoctoproject.org/poky
   $ git checkout krogoth
                      
Initialize a virtual environment and install Toaster dependencies. Using a virtual environment keeps the Python packages isolated from your system-provided packages:
   $ cd /var/www/toaster/
   $ virtualenv venv
   $ source ./venv/bin/activate
   $ pip install -r ./poky/bitbake/toaster-requirements.txt
   $ pip install mysql
   $ pip install MySQL-python
                      
                      Configure Toaster by editing
                      /var/www/toaster/poky/bitbake/lib/toaster/toastermain/settings.py
                      as follows:
                      
                              Edit the DATABASE settings:
                              
   DATABASES = {
       'default': {
           'ENGINE': 'django.db.backends.mysql',
           'NAME': 'toaster_data',
           'USER': 'toaster',
           'PASSWORD': 'yourpasswordhere',
           'HOST': 'localhost',
           'PORT': '3306',
      }
   }
                              
                              Edit the SECRET_KEY:
                              
   SECRET_KEY = 'your_secret_key'
                              
                              Edit the STATIC_ROOT:
                              
   STATIC_ROOT = '/var/www/toaster/static_files/'
                              
                      Add the database and user to the mysql
                      server defined earlier:
                      
   $ mysql -u root -p
   mysql> CREATE DATABASE toaster_data;
   mysql> CREATE USER 'toaster'@'localhost' identified by 'yourpasswordhere';
   mysql> GRANT all on toaster_data.* to 'toaster'@'localhost';
   mysql> quit
                      
Get Toaster to create the database schema, default data, and gather the statically-served files:
   $ cd  /var/www/toaster/poky/
   $ ./bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py syncdb
   $ ./bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py migrate
   $ TOASTER_DIR=`pwd` TOASTER_CONF=./meta-poky/conf/toasterconf.json ./bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py checksettings
   $ ./bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py collectstatic
                      
                          For the above set of commands, after moving to the
                          poky directory,
                          the syncdb and migrate
                          commands ensure the database
                          schema has had changes propagated correctly (i.e.
                          migrations).
                      
                          The next line sets the Toaster root directory
                          TOASTER_DIR and the location of
                          the Toaster configuration file
                          TOASTER_CONF, which is
                          relative to the Toaster root directory
                          TOASTER_DIR.
                          For more information on the Toaster configuration file
                          TOASTER_CONF, see the
                          JSON Files
                          section of this manual.
                      
                          This line also runs the checksettings
                          command, which configures the location of the Toaster
                          Build directory.
                          The Toaster root directory TOASTER_DIR
                          determines where the Toaster build directory
                          is created on the file system.
                          In the example above,
                          TOASTER_DIR is set as follows:
                          
   /var/www/toaster/poky
                          This setting causes the Toaster build directory to be:
   /var/www/toaster/poky/build
                          
                          Finally, the collectstatic command
                          is a Django framework command that collects all the
                          statically served files into a designated directory to
                          be served up by the Apache web server.
                      
Add an Apache configuration file for Toaster to your Apache web server's configuration directory. If you are using Ubuntu or Debian, put the file here:
   /etc/apache2/conf-available/toaster.conf
                      If you are using Fedora or RedHat, put it here:
   /etc/httpd/conf.d/toaster.conf
                      Following is a sample Apache configuration for Toaster you can follow:
   Alias /static /var/www/toaster/static_files
   <Directory /var/www/toaster/static_files>
           Order allow,deny
           Allow from all
           Require all granted
   </Directory>
   WSGIDaemonProcess toaster_wsgi python-path=/var/www/toaster/poky/bitbake/lib/toaster:/var/www/toaster/venv/lib/python2.7/site-packages
   WSGIScriptAlias / "/var/www/toaster/poky/bitbake/lib/toaster/toastermain/wsgi.py"
   <Location />
       WSGIProcessGroup toastern_wsgi
   </Location>
                      If you are using Ubuntu or Debian, you will need to enable the config and module for Apache:
   $ sudo a2enmod wsgi
   $ sudo a2enconf toaster
   $ chmod +x bitbake/lib/toaster/toastermain/wsgi.py
                      Finally, restart Apache to make sure all new configuration is loaded. For Ubuntu and Debian use:
   $ sudo service apache2 restart
                      For Fedora and RedHat use:
   $ sudo service httpd restart
                      
Install the build runner service. This service needs to be running in order to dispatch builds. Use this command:
   /var/www/toaster/poky/bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py runbuilds
                      Here is an example:
   #!/bin/sh
   # toaster run builds dispatcher
   cd /var/www/toaster/
   source ./venv/bin/activate
   ./bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py runbuilds
                      
You can now open up a browser and start using Toaster.
The Toaster web interface allows you to do the following:
Browse published layers in the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index that are available for your selected version of the build system.
Import your own layers for building.
Add and remove layers from your configuration.
Set configuration variables.
Select a target or multiple targets to build.
Start your builds.
See what was built (recipes and packages) and what packages were installed into your final image.
Browse the directory structure of your image.
See the value of all variables in your build configuration, and which files set each value.
Examine error, warning and trace messages to aid in debugging.
See information about the BitBake tasks executed and reused during your build, including those that used shared state.
See dependency relationships between recipes, packages and tasks.
See performance information such as build time, task time, CPU usage, and disk I/O.
Following are several videos that show how to use the Toaster GUI:
Build Configuration: This video overviews and demonstrates build configuration for Toaster.
Build Custom Layers: This video shows you how to build custom layers that are used with Toaster.
Toaster Homepage and Table Controls: This video goes over the Toaster entry page, and provides an overview of the data manipulation capabilities of Toaster, which include search, sorting and filtering by different criteria.
Build Dashboard: This video shows you the build dashboard, a page providing an overview of the information available for a selected build.
Image Information: This video walks through the information Toaster provides about images: packages installed and root file system.
Configuration: This video provides Toaster build configuration information.
Tasks: This video shows the information Toaster provides about the tasks run by the build system.
Recipes and Packages Built: This video shows the information Toaster provides about recipes and packages built.
Performance Data: This video shows the build performance data provided by Toaster.
This section only applies if you have set up Toaster for local development, as explained in the "Starting Toaster for Local Development" section.
When you create a project in Toaster, you will be asked to provide a name and to select a Yocto Project release. One of the release options you will find is called "Local Yocto Project".
|  | 
When you select the "Local Yocto Project" release, Toaster will run your builds using the local Yocto Project clone you have in your computer: the same clone you are using to run Toaster. Unless you manually update this clone, your builds will always use the same Git revision.
If you select any of the other release options, Toaster will fetch the tip of your selected release from the upstream Yocto Project repository every time you run a build. Fetching this tip effectively means that if your selected release is updated upstream, the Git revision you are using for your builds will change. If you are doing development locally, you might not want this change to happen. In that case, the "Local Yocto Project" release might be the right choice.
However, the "Local Yocto Project" release will not provide you with any compatible layers, other than the three core layers that come with the Yocto Project:
|  | 
If you want to build any other layers, you will need to manually import them into your Toaster project, using the "Import layer" page.
|  | 
                Occasionally, a layer might provide more than one version of
                the same recipe.
                For example, the openembedded-core layer
                provides two versions of the bash recipe
                (i.e. 3.2.48 and 4.3.30-r0) and two versions of the
                which recipe (i.e. 2.21 and 2.18).
                The following figure shows this exact scenario:
                
|  | 
                By default, the OpenEmbedded build system builds one of the
                two recipes.
                For the bash case, version 4.3.30-r0 is
                built by default.
                Unfortunately, Toaster as it exists, is not able to override
                the default recipe version.
                If you would like to build bash 3.2.48, you need to set the
                PREFERRED_VERSION
                variable.
                You can do so from Toaster, using the "Add variable" form,
                which is available in the "BitBake variables" page of the
                project configuration section as shown in the following screen:
                
|  | 
                To specify bash 3.2.48 as the version to build,
                enter "PREFERRED_VERSION_bash" in the "Variable" field, and "3.2.48"
                in the "Value" field.
                Next, click the "Add variable" button:
                
|  | 
                After clicking the "Add variable" button, the settings for
                PREFERRED_VERSION are added to the bottom
                of the BitBake variables list.
                With these settings, the OpenEmbedded build system builds the
                desired version of the recipe rather than the default version:
                
|  | 
        In order to configure and use Toaster, you should understand some
        concepts and have some basic command reference material available.
        This final chapter provides conceptual information on layer sources,
        releases, and JSON configuration files.
        Also provided is a quick look at some useful
        manage.py commands that are Toaster-specific.
        Information on manage.py commands does exist
        across the Web and the information in this manual by no means
        attempts to provide a command comprehensive reference.
    
In general, a "layer source" is a source of information about existing layers. In particular, we are concerned with layers that you can use with the Yocto Project and Toaster. This chapter describes a particular type of layer source called a "layer index."
A layer index is a web application that contains information about a set of custom layers. A good example of an existing layer index is the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index. A public instance of this layer index exists at http://layers.openembedded.org. You can find the code for this layer index's web application at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/layerindex-web/.
            When you tie a layer source into Toaster, it can query the layer
            source through a
            REST
            API, store the information about the layers in the Toaster
            database, and then show the information to users.
            Users are then able to view that information and build layers
            from Toaster itself without worrying about cloning or editing
            the BitBake layers configuration file
            bblayers.conf.
        
Tying a layer source into Toaster is convenient when you have many custom layers that need to be built on a regular basis by a community of developers. In fact, Toaster comes pre-configured with the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index.
To use your own layer source, you need to set up the layer source and then tie it into Toaster. This section describes how to tie into a layer index in a manner similar to the way Toaster ties into the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index.
The obvious first step for using a layer index is to have several custom layers that developers build and access using the Yocto Project on a regular basis. This set of layers needs to exist and you need to be familiar with where they reside. You will need that information when you set up the code for the web application that "hooks" into your set of layers.
For general information on layers, see the "BSP Layers" and "Using the Yocto Project's BSP Tools" sections in the Yocto Project Board Support Package (BSP) Developer's Guide.
If you want Toaster to use your layer index, you must host the web application in a server to which Toaster can connect. You also need to give Toaster the information about your layer index. In other words, you have to configure Toaster to use your layer index. This section describes two methods by which you can configure and use your layer index.
In the previous section, the code for the OpenEmbedded Metadata Index (i.e. http://layers.openembedded.org) was referenced. You can use this code, which is at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/layerindex-web/, as a base to create your own layer index.
                        Access the administration interface through a
                        browser by entering the URL of your Toaster instance and
                        adding "/admin" to the end of the
                        URL.
                        As an example, if you are running Toaster locally, use
                        the following URL:
                        
     http://127.0.0.1:8000/admin
                        
The administration interface has a "Layer sources" section that includes an "Add layer source" button. Click that button and provide the required information. Make sure you select "layerindex" as the layer source type.
toasterconf.json File¶
                        If you do not want to use the Administration
                        Interface, you can edit the
                        toasterconf.json
                        file and reload it to Toaster.
                    
                        The Toaster startup script in
                        /bitbake/bin/toaster specifies
                        the location of a Toaster configuration file
                        toasterconf.json as the value of
                        the TOASTER_CONF variable.
                        This configuration file is used to set up the initial
                        configuration values within the Toaster database
                        including the layer sources.
                        Two versions of the configuration file exist:
                        
                                The first version of the file is found in the
                                conf directory of the
                                meta-poky layer
                                (i.e.
                                meta-poky/conf/toasterconf.json).
                                This version contains the default Yocto Project
                                configuration for Toaster.
                                
                                The second version of the file is in the
                                conf directory of the
                                openembedded-core layer
                                (i.e. meta/conf/toasterconf.json).
                                This version contains the default OpenEmbedded
                                configuration for Toaster.
                                
                        Edit the version of the
                        toasterconf.json file you
                        used to set up your Toaster instance.
                        In the file, you will find a section for layer sources
                        such as the following:
                        
    "layersources": [
        {
            "name": "Local Yocto Project",
            "sourcetype": "local",
            "apiurl": "../../",
            "branches": ["HEAD" ],
            "layers": [
                {
                    "name": "openembedded-core",
                    "local_path": "meta",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta"
                },
                {
                    "name": "meta-poky",
                    "local_path": "meta-poky",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta-poky"
                },
                {
                    "name": "meta-yocto-bsp",
                    "local_path": "meta-yocto-bsp",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta-yocto-bsp"
                }
            ]
        },
        {
            "name": "OpenEmbedded",
            "sourcetype": "layerindex",
            "apiurl": "http://layers.openembedded.org/layerindex/api/",
            "branches": ["master", "jethro" ,"fido"]
        },
        {
            "name": "Imported layers",
            "sourcetype": "imported",
            "apiurl": "",
            "branches": ["master", "jethro","fido", "HEAD"]
        }
    ],
                        You should add your own layer source to this section by following the same format used for the "OpenEmbedded" layer source shown above.
Give your layer source a name, provide the URL of your layer source API, use the source type "layerindex", and indicate which branches from your layer source you want to make available through Toaster. For example, the OpenEmbedded layer source makes available only its "master", "fido", and "jethro" branches.
The branches must match the branch you set when configuring your releases. For example, if you configure one release in Toaster by setting its branch to "branch-one" and you configure another release in Toaster by setting its branch to "branch-two", the branches in your layer source should be "branch-one" and "branch-two" as well. Doing so creates a connection between the releases and the layer information from your layer source. Thus, when users create a project with a given release, they will see the appropriate layers from your layer source. This connection ensures that only layers that are compatible with the selected project release can be selected for building.
                        Once you have added this information to the
                        toasterconf.json file, save your
                        changes.
                    
                        In a terminal window, navigate to the directory that
                        contains the Toaster database, which by default is the
                        root of the Yocto Project
                        Source Directory.
                        Once you are located in that directory, run the
                        "loadconf" command, which takes as
                        an argument the full path to the
                        toasterconf.json file you just edited.
                        For example, if you cloned the
                        poky repository and you edited the
                        meta-poky/conf/toasterconf.json file,
                        you would type something like the following:
                        
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py loadconf /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky/conf/toasterconf.json
                        
                        After entering this command, you need to update the
                        Toaster database with the information coming from your
                        new layer source.
                        To do that, you should run the
                        "lsupdates" command from the directory
                        that contains the Toaster database.
                        Here is an example:
                        
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py lsupdates
                        If Toaster can reach the API URL, you should see a message telling you that Toaster is updating the layer source information.
Once the information has been updated, verify the new layer information is available by using the Toaster web interface. To do that, visit the "All compatible layers" page inside a Toaster project. The layers from your layer source should be listed there.
When you create a Toaster project using the web interface, you are asked to choose a "Release." In the context of Toaster, the term "Release" refers to a set of layers and a BitBake version the OpenEmbedded build system uses to build something. As shipped, Toaster is pre-configured with releases that correspond to Yocto Project release branches. However, you can modify, delete, and create new releases according to your needs. This section provides some background information on releases.
As shipped, Toaster is configured to use a specific set of releases. Of course, you can always configure Toaster to use any release. For example, you might want your project to build against a specific commit of any of the "out-of-the-box" releases. Or, you might want your project to build against different revisions of OpenEmbedded and BitBake.
As shipped, Toaster is configured to work with the following releases:
Yocto Project 2.0 "Jethro" or OpenEmbedded "Jethro": This release causes your Toaster projects to build against the head of the jethro branch at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/?h=jethro or http://git.openembedded.org/openembedded-core/commit/?h=jethro.
Yocto Project 1.8 "Fido" or OpenEmbedded "Fido": This release causes your Toaster projects to build against the head of the fido branch at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/?h=fido or http://git.openembedded.org/openembedded-core/commit/?h=fido.
Yocto Project "Master" or OpenEmbedded "Master": This release causes your Toaster Projects to build against the head of the master branch, which is where active development takes place, at http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/ or http://git.openembedded.org/openembedded-core/log/.
Local Yocto Project or Local OpenEmbedded:
                        This release causes your Toaster Projects to
                        build against the head of the poky
                        or openembedded-core clone you
                        have local to the machine running Toaster.
                        
A release consists of the following:
Name:
                        The name of the release (name).
                        This release name never appears in the the Toaster
                        web interface.
                        Consequently, a user never sees the release name.
                        
Description:
                        The textual description of the release
                        (description).
                        This description is what users encounter when creating
                        projects with the Toaster web interface.
                        When you configure your release, be sure to use
                        a description that sufficiently describes and is
                        understandable.
                        If Toaster has more than one release configured, the
                        release descriptions appear listed in a drop down menu
                        when a user creates a new project.
                        If Toaster has only one release configured, all
                        projects created using the web interface take that
                        release and the drop down menu does not display in the
                        Toaster web interface.
                        
BitBake:
                        The Bitbake version (bitbake)
                        used to build layers set in the current release.
                        This version is described by a name, a Git URL, a
                        branch in the Git URL, and a directory path in the
                        Git repository.
                        As an example, consider the following snippet from
                        a Toaster JSON configuration file.
                        This BitBake version uses the master branch from the
                        OpenEmbedded repository:
                        
     "bitbake" : [
         {
             "name": "master",
             "giturl": "git://git.openembedded.org/bitbake",
             "branch": "master",
             "dirpath": ""
         }
     ]
                        Here is more detail on each of the items that comprise the BitBake version:
Name:
                                A string
                                (name) used to refer to
                                the version of BitBake you are using with
                                Toaster.
                                This name is never exposed through Toaster.
                                
Git URL:
                                The URL (giturl)
                                for the BitBake Git repository cloned
                                for Toaster projects.
                                
Branch:
                                The Git branch, or revision,
                                (branch) of the BitBake
                                repository used with Toaster.
                                
Directory Path:
                                The sub-directory of the BitBake repository
                                (dirpath).
                                If the Git URL includes more than one
                                repository, you need to set this directory.
                                If the URL does not include more than a single
                                repository, you can set
                                dirpath to a null string
                                (i.e. "").
                                
Branch:
                        The branch for the layer source
                        (branch) used with the release.
                        For example, for the OpenEmbedded layer source, the
                        "master", "fido", and "jethro" branches are available.
                        
Default Layers:
                        The set of default layers
                        (defaultlayers) automatically
                        added to the project configuration when a project is
                        created.
                        
Layer Source Priorities
                        A specification of
                        layer source
                        priorities (layersourcepriority).
                        In order for Toaster to work as intended, the
                        "Imported layers" layer source should have the highest
                        priority, which means that layers manually imported by
                        users with the "Import layer" functionality will
                        always be visible and available for selection.
                        
Help Text:
                        Help text (helptext) that explains
                        what the release does when selected.
                        This help text appears below the release drop-down
                        menu when you create a Toaster project.
                        The help text should assist users in making the correct
                        decision regarding the release to use for a given
                        project.
                        
                To summarize what comprises a release, consider the following
                example from a Toaster JSON file.
                The configuration names the release "master" and uses the
                "master" branch provided by the layer source of type
                "layerindex", which is called "OpenEmbedded", and sets
                the openembedded-core layer as the one
                to be added by default to any projects created in Toaster.
                The BitBake version used would be defined as shown earlier
                in the previous list:
                
     "releases": [
         {
             "name": "master",
             "description": "OpenEmbedded master",
             "bitbake": "master",
             "branch": "master",
             "defaultlayers": [ "openembedded-core" ],
             "layersourcepriority": { "Imported layers": 99, "Local OpenEmbedded" : 10, "OpenEmbedded" :  0 },
             "helptext": "Toaster will run your builds using the tip of the <a href=\"http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/\">Yocto Project master branch</a>, where active development takes place. This is not a stable branch, so your builds might not work as expected."
         }
     ]
                
You must configure Toaster before using it. Configuration customizes layer source settings and Toaster defaults for all users and is performed by the person responsible for Toaster Configuration (i.e the Toaster Administrator). The Toaster Administrator performs this configuration through the Django administration interface.
            To make it easier to initially start Toaster, you can import a
            pre-defined configuration file using the
            loadconf
            command.
            
            By convention, the supplied configuration files are named
            toasterconf.json.
            The Toaster Administrator can customize the file prior to loading
            it into Toaster.
            The TOASTER_CONF variable in the
            Toaster startup script at bitbake/bin/toaster
            specifies the location of the toasterconf.json file.
        
Two versions of the configuration file exist:
                        The
                        meta-poky/conf/toasterconf.json
                        in the conf directory of the
                        Yocto Project's meta-poky layer.
                        This version contains the default Yocto Project
                        configuration for Toaster.
                        You are prompted to select this file during the Toaster
                        set up process if you cloned the
                        poky repository (i.e.
                        http://git.yoctoproject.org/poky).
                        
                        The meta/conf/toasterconf.json
                        in the conf directory of the
                        OpenEmbedded's openembedded-core
                        layer.
                        This version contains the default OpenEmbedded
                        configuration for Toaster.
                        You are prompted to select this file during the Toaster
                        set up process if you had cloned the
                        openembedded-core repository (i.e.
                        git://git.openembedded.org/openembedded-core).
                        
                The toasterconf.json file consists of
                easily readable areas: configuration, layer sources, BitBake,
                default release, and releases.
            
This area of the JSON file sets which variables are exposed to users through the Toaster web interface. Users can easily edit these variables.
                    The variables you set here are displayed in the
                    "Configuration variables" page in Toaster.
                    Minimally, you should set the
                    MACHINE
                    variable, which appears to users as part of the project
                    page in Toaster.
                
                    Here is the default config area:
                    
     "config": {
         "MACHINE"      : "qemux86",
         "DISTRO"       : "poky",
         "IMAGE_FSTYPES": "ext3 jffs2 tar.bz2",
         "IMAGE_INSTALL_append": "",
         "PACKAGE_CLASSES": "package_rpm",
     },
                    
This area of the JSON file defines the layer sources Toaster uses. Toaster reads layer information from layer sources. Three types of layer sources exist that Toaster recognizes: Local, LayerIndex, and Imported.
The Local layer source reads layers from Git clones available on your local drive. Using a local layer source enables you to easily test Toaster.
The LayerIndex layer source uses a REST API exposed by instances of the Layer Index application (e.g the public http://layers.openembedded.org/) to read layer data.
The Imported layer source is reserved for layer data manually introduced by the user or Toaster Administrator through the GUI. This layer source lets users import their own layers and build them with Toaster. You should not remove the imported layer source.
                    Here is the default layersources area:
                    
    "layersources": [
        {
            "name": "Local Yocto Project",
            "sourcetype": "local",
            "apiurl": "../../",
            "branches": ["HEAD" ],
            "layers": [
                {
                    "name": "openembedded-core",
                    "local_path": "meta",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta"
                },
                {
                    "name": "meta-poky",
                    "local_path": "meta-poky",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta-poky"
                },
                {
                    "name": "meta-yocto-bsp",
                    "local_path": "meta-yocto-bsp",
                    "vcs_url": "remote:origin",
                    "dirpath": "meta-yocto-bsp"
                }
            ]
        },
        {
            "name": "OpenEmbedded",
            "sourcetype": "layerindex",
            "apiurl": "http://layers.openembedded.org/layerindex/api/",
            "branches": ["master", "jethro" ,"fido"]
        },
        {
            "name": "Imported layers",
            "sourcetype": "imported",
            "apiurl": "",
            "branches": ["master", "jethro","fido", "HEAD"]
        }
    ],
                    
This area of the JSON file defines the version of BitBake Toaster uses. As shipped, Toaster is configured to recognize four versions of BitBake: master, fido, jethro, and HEAD.
                    Here is the default bitbake area:
                    
     "bitbake" : [
         {
             "name": "master",
             "giturl": "remote:origin",
             "branch": "master",
             "dirpath": "bitbake"
         },
        {
             "name": "jethro",
             "giturl": "remote:origin",
             "branch": "jethro",
             "dirpath": "bitbake"
         },
         {
             "name": "fido",
             "giturl": "remote:origin",
             "branch": "fido",
            "dirpath": "bitbake"
        },
         {
             "name": "HEAD",
             "giturl": "remote:origin",
             "branch": "HEAD",
             "dirpath": "bitbake"
         }
     ],
                    
This area of the JSON file establishes a default release used by Toaster. As shipped, Toaster uses the "master" release.
Here is the statement in the JSON file that establishes the default release:
     "defaultrelease": "master",
                    
This area of the JSON file defines the versions of the OpenEmbedded build system Toaster recognizes. As shipped, Toaster is configured to work with the four releases described in the "Pre-Configured Releases" section.
                    Here is the default releases area:
                    
     "releases": [
         {
             "name": "master",
             "description": "Yocto Project master",
             "bitbake": "master",
             "branch": "master",
             "defaultlayers": [ "openembedded-core", "meta-poky", "meta-yocto-bsp"],
             "layersourcepriority": { "Imported layers": 99, "Local Yocto Project" : 10, "OpenEmbedded" :  0 },
             "helptext": "Toaster will run your builds using the tip of the <a href=\"http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/\">Yocto Project master branch</a>, where active development takes place. This is not a stable branch, so your builds might not work as expected."
         },
         {
             "name": "jethro",
             "description": "Yocto Project 2.0 Jethro",
             "bitbake": "jethro",
             "branch": "jethro",
             "defaultlayers": [ "openembedded-core", "meta-poky", "meta-yocto-bsp"],
             "layersourcepriority": { "Imported layers": 99, "Local Yocto Project" : 10, "OpenEmbedded" :  0 },
             "helptext": "Toaster will run your builds with the tip of the <a href=\"http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/?h=jethro\">Yocto Project 2.0 \"Jethro\"</a> branch."
         },
         {
             "name": "fido",
             "description": "Yocto Project 1.8 Fido",
             "bitbake": "fido",
             "branch": "fido",
             "defaultlayers": [ "openembedded-core", "meta-poky", "meta-yocto-bsp"],
             "layersourcepriority": { "Imported layers": 99, "Local Yocto Project" : 10, "OpenEmbedded" :  0 },
             "helptext": "Toaster will run your builds with the tip of the <a href=\"http://git.yoctoproject.org/cgit/cgit.cgi/poky/log/?h=fido\">Yocto Project 1.8 \"Fido\"</a> branch."
         },
         {
             "name": "local",
             "description": "Local Yocto Project",
             "bitbake": "HEAD",
             "branch": "HEAD",
             "defaultlayers": [ "openembedded-core", "meta-poky", "meta-yocto-bsp"],
             "layersourcepriority": { "Imported layers": 99, "Local Yocto Project" : 10, "OpenEmbedded" :  0 },
             "helptext": "Toaster will run your builds with the version of the Yocto Project you have cloned or downloaded to your computer."
         }
     ]
                    
            In addition to the web user interface and the scripts that start
            and stop Toaster, command-line commands exist through the
            manage.py management script.
            You can find general documentation on
            manage.py at the
            Django
            site.
            However, several manage.py commands have been
            created that are specific to Toaster and are used to control
            configuration and back-end tasks.
            You can locate these commands in the
            Source Directory
            (e.g. poky) at
            bitbake/lib/manage.py.
            This section documents those commands.
            
                    When using manage.py commands given
                    a default configuration, you must be sure that your
                    working directory is set to the
                    Build Directory.
                    Using manage.py commands from the
                    Build Directory allows Toaster to find the
                    toaster.sqlite file, which is located
                    in the Build Directory.
                
                    For non-default database configurations, it is possible
                    that you can use manage.py commands
                    from a directory other than the Build directory.
                    To do so, the
                    toastermain/settings.py file must be
                    configured to point to the correct database backend.
                
buildslist¶
                The buildslist command lists all builds
                that Toaster has recorded.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py buildslist
                The command returns a list, which includes numeric identifications, of the builds that Toaster has recorded in the current database.
                You need to run the buildslist command
                first to identify existing builds in the database before
                using the
                builddelete
                command.
                Here is an example that assumes default repository and build
                directory names:
                
     $ cd ~/poky/build
     $ python ../bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py buildslist
                
                If your Toaster database had only one build, the above
                buildslist command would return something
                like the following:
                
     1: qemux86 poky core-image-minimal
                
builddelete¶
                The builddelete command deletes data
                associated with a build.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py builddelete build_id
                
                The command deletes all the build data for the specified
                build_id.
                This command is useful for removing old and unused data from
                the database.
            
                Prior to running the builddelete
                command, you need to get the ID associated with builds
                by using the
                buildslist
                command.
            
perf¶
                The perf command measures Toaster
                performance.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py perf
                The command is a sanity check that returns page loading times in order to identify performance problems.
checksettings¶
                The checksettings command verifies
                existing Toaster settings.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py checksettings
                
                Toaster uses settings that are based on the
                database to configure the building tasks.
                The checksettings command verifies that
                the database settings are valid in the sense that they have
                the minimal information needed to start a build.
            
                In order for the checksettings command
                to work, the database must be correctly set up and not have
                existing data.
                To be sure the database is ready, you can run the following:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py syncdb
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py migrate orm
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py migrate bldcontrol
                
                After running these commands, you can run the
                checksettings command.
            
loadconf¶
                The loadconf command loads an
                existing Toaster configuration file (JSON file).
                You must run this on a new database that does not have any
                data.
                Running this command on an existing database that has data
                results in errors.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py loadconf filepath
                
                The loadconf command configures a database
                based on the supplied existing
                toasterconf.json file.
                For information on the toasterconf.json,
                see the
                "JSON Files"
                section.
            
runbuilds¶
                The runbuilds command launches
                scheduled builds.
                Access the command as follows:
                
     $ bitbake/lib/toaster/manage.py runbuilds
                
                The runbuilds command checks if
                scheduled builds exist in the database and then launches them
                per schedule.
                The command returns after the builds start but before they
                complete.
                The Toaster Logging Interface records and updates the database
                when the builds complete.